406

Pt. 173 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

where the material is relinquished to another entity. Railroad facilities are railroad 

property including, but not limited to, classification and switching yards, storage facilities, and non-private sidings; however, 

they do not include an offeror’s facility, private track, private siding, or consignee’s facility. Each rail carrier must use best efforts 

to communicate with its shippers, consignees, and interlining partners to ensure 

the safety and security of shipments during 

all stages of transportation. 

C. Because of the varying operating environments and interconnected nature of the 

rail system, each carrier must select and 

document the analysis method/model used 

and identify the routes to be analyzed. 

D. The safety and security risk analysis 

must consider current data and information 

as well as changes that may reasonably be 

anticipated to occur during the analysis 

year. Factors to be considered in the performance of this safety and security risk 

analysis include: 

1. Volume of hazardous material transported;

2. Rail traffic density; 

3. Trip length for route; 

4. Presence and characteristics of railroad 

facilities;

5. Track type, class, and maintenance 

schedule;

6. Track grade and curvature; 

7. Presence or absence of signals and train 

control systems along the route (‘‘dark’’ 

versus signaled territory); 

8. Presence or absence of wayside hazard 

detectors;

9. Number and types of grade crossings; 

10. Single versus double track territory; 

11. Frequency and location of track turnouts;

12. Proximity to iconic targets; 

13. Environmentally sensitive or significant areas; 

14. Population density along the route; 

15. Venues along the route (stations, 

events, places of congregation); 

16. Emergency response capability along 

the route; 

17. Areas of high consequence along the 

route, including high consequence targets as 

defined in §172.820(c); 

18. Presence of passenger traffic along 

route (shared track); 

19. Speed of train operations; 

20. Proximity to en-route storage or repair 

facilities;

21. Known threats, including any non-public threat scenarios provided by the Department of Homeland Security or the Department of Transportation for carrier use in the 

development of the route assessment; 

22. Measures in place to address apparent 

safety and security risks; 

23. Availability of practicable alternative 

routes;

24. Past incidents; 

25. Overall times in transit; 

26. Training and skill level of crews; and 

27. Impact on rail network traffic and congestion.

[73 FR 20772, April 16, 2008] 

PART 173—SHIPPERS—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHIPMENTS 

AND PACKAGINGS 

Subpart A—General 

Sec.

173.1 Purpose and scope. 

173.2 Hazardous materials classes and index 

to hazard class definitions. 

173.2a Classification of a material having 

more than one hazard. 

173.3 Packaging and exceptions. 

173.4 Small quantity exceptions. 

173.4a Excepted quantities. 

173.5 Agricultural operations. 

173.5a Oilfield service vehicles and mechanical displacement meter provers. 

173.5b Portable and mobile refrigeration 

systems.

173.6 Materials of trade exceptions. 

173.7 Government operations and materials. 

173.8 Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate transportation. 

173.9 Transport vehicles or freight containers containing lading which has been 

fumigated.

173.10 Tank car shipments. 

173.12 Exceptions for shipment of waste materials.

173.13 Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1, 

4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and Classes 8 and 9 materials.

Subpart B—Preparation of Hazardous 

Materials for Transportation 

173.21 Forbidden materials and packages. 

173.22 Shipper’s responsibility. 

173.22a Use of packagings authorized under 

special permits. 

173.23 Previously authorized packaging. 

173.24 General requirements for packagings 

and packages. 

173.24a Additional general requirements for 

non-bulk packagings and packages. 

173.24b Additional general requirements for 

bulk packagings. 

173.25 Authorized packagings and overpacks.

173.26 Quantity limitations. 

173.27 General requirements for transportation by aircraft. 

173.28 Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings. 

173.29 Empty packagings. 

173.30 Loading and unloading of transport 

vehicles.

407

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 173 

173.31 Use of tank cars. 

173.32 Requirements for the use of portable 

tanks.

173.33 Hazardous materials in cargo tank 

motor vehicles. 

173.34 [Reserved] 

173.35 Hazardous materials in intermediate 

bulk containers (IBCs). 

173.36 Hazardous materials in Large Packagings.

173.40 General packaging requirements for 

toxic materials packaged in cylinders. 

Subpart C—Definitions, Classification and 

Packaging for Class 1 

173.50 Class 1—Definitions. 

173.51 Authorization to offer and transport 

explosives.

173.52 Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives. 

173.53 Provisions for using old classifications of explosives. 

173.54 Forbidden explosives. 

173.55 [Reserved] 

173.56 New explosives—Definition and procedures for classification and approval. 

173.57 Acceptance criteria for new explosives.

173.58 Assignment of class and division for 

new explosives. 

173.59 Description of terms for explosives. 

173.60 General packaging requirements for 

explosives.

173.61 Mixed packaging requirements. 

173.62 Specific packaging requirements for 

explosives.

173.63 Packaging exceptions. 

Subpart D—Definitions, Classification, 

Packing Group Assignments and Exceptions for Hazardous Material Other 

Than Class 1 and Class 7 

173.115 Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3— 

Definitions.

173.116 Class 2—Assignment of hazard zone. 

173.117–173.119 [Reserved] 

173.120 Class 3—Definitions. 

173.121 Class 3—Assignment of packing 

group.

173.124 Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3— 

Definitions.

173.125 Class 4—Assignment of packing 

group.

173.127 Class 5, Division 5.1—Definition and 

assignment of packing groups. 

173.128 Class 5, Division 5.2—Definitions and 

types.

173.129 Class 5, Division 5.2—Assignment of 

packing group. 

173.132 Class 6, Division 6.1—Definitions. 

173.133 Assignment of packing group and 

hazard zones for Division 6.1 materials. 

173.134 Class 6, Division 6.2—Definitions and 

exceptions.

173.136 Class 8—Definitions. 

173.137 Class 8—Assignment of packing 

group.

173.140 Class 9—Definitions. 

173.141 Class 9—Assignment of packing 

group.

173.144 Other Regulated Materials (ORM)— 

Definitions.

173.145 Other Regulated Materials—Assignment of packing group. 

173.150 Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable 

and combustible liquids). 

173.151 Exceptions for Class 4. 

173.152 Exceptions for Division 5.1 

(oxidizers) and Division 5.2 (organic peroxides).

173.153 Exceptions for Division 6.1 (poisonous materials). 

173.154 Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials).

173.155 Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials). 

173.156 Exceptions for ORM materials. 

Subpart E—Non-bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 

and Class 7 

173.158 Nitric acid. 

173.159 Batteries, wet. 

173.159a Exceptions for non-spillable batteries.

173.160 Bombs, smoke, non-explosive (corrosive).

173.161 Chemical kits and first aid kits. 

173.162 Gallium. 

173.163 Hydrogen fluoride. 

173.164 Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury). 

173.166 Air bag inflators, air bag modules 

and seat-belt pretensioners. 

173.168 Chemical oxygen generators. 

173.170 Black powder for small arms. 

173.171 Smokeless powder for small arms. 

173.172 Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel 

tank.

173.173 Paint, paint-related material, adhesives and ink and resins. 

173.174 Refrigerating machines. 

173.181 Pyrophoric materials (liquids). 

173.182 Barium azide—50 percent or more 

water wet. 

173.183 Nitrocellulose base film. 

173.184 Highway or rail fusee. 

173.185 Lithium batteries and cells. 

173.186 Matches. 

173.187 Pyrophoric solids, metals or alloys, 

n.o.s.

173.188 White or yellow phosphorous. 

173.189 Batteries containing sodium or cells 

containing sodium. 

173.192 Packaging for certain toxic gases in 

Hazard Zone A. 

173.193 Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, 

chloropicrin and methyl bromide or 

methyl chloride mixtures, etc. 

173.194 Gas identification sets. 

408

Pt. 173 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

173.195 Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solution).

173.196 Category A infectious substances. 

173.197 Regulated medical waste. 

173.198 Nickel carbonyl. 

173.199 Category B infectious substances. 

173.201 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group I. 

173.202 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group II. 

173.203 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group III. 

173.204 Non-bulk, non-specification packagings for certain hazardous materials. 

173.205 Specification cylinders for liquid 

hazardous materials. 

173.206 Packaging requirements for 

chlorosilanes.

173.211 Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group I. 

173.212 Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group II. 

173.213 Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group III. 

173.214 Packagings which require approval 

by the Associate Administrator. 

173.216 Asbestos, blue, brown, or white. 

173.217 Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice). 

173.218 Fish meal or fish scrap. 

173.219 Life-saving appliances. 

173.220 Internal combustion engines, selfpropelled vehicles, mechanical equipment containing internal combustion engines, and battery powered vehicles or 

equipment.

173.221 Polymeric beads, expandable and 

Plastic molding compound. 

173.222 Dangerous good in machinery or apparatus.

173.223 Packagings for certain flammable 

solids.

173.224 Packaging and control and emergency temperatures for self-reactive materials.

173.225 Packaging requirements and other 

provisions for organic peroxides. 

173.226 Materials poisonous by inhalation, 

Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard 

Zone A. 

173.227 Materials poisonous by inhalation, 

Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard 

Zone B. 

173.228 Bromine pentaflouride or bromine 

trifluoride.

173.229 Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen. 

173.230 Fuel cell cartridges containing hazardous material. 

Subpart F—Bulk Packaging for Hazardous 

Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7 

173.240 Bulk packaging for certain low hazard solid materials. 

173.241 Bulk packagings for certain low hazard liquid and solid materials. 

173.242 Bulk packagings for certain medium 

hazard liquids and solids, including solids 

with dual hazards. 

173.243 Bulk packaging for certain high hazard liquids and dual hazard materials 

which pose a moderate hazard. 

173.244 Bulk packaging for certain 

pyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) materials, 

and poisonous liquids with inhalation 

hazards (Division 6.1). 

173.245 Bulk packaging for extremely hazardous materials such as poisonous gases 

(Division 2.3). 

173.247 Bulk packaging for certain elevated 

temperature materials. 

173.249 Bromine. 

Subpart G—Gases; Preparation and 

Packaging 

173.300 [Reserved] 

173.301 General requirements for shipment 

of compressed gases and other hazardous 

materials in cylinders, UN pressure receptacles and spherical pressure vessels. 

173.301a Additional general requirements 

for shipment of specification cylinders. 

173.301b Additional general requirements 

for shipment of UN pressure receptacles. 

173.302 Filling of cylinders with nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases. 

173.302a Additional requirements for shipment nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases in specification cylinders. 

173.302b Additional requirements for shipment of non-liquefied (permanent) compressed gases in UN pressure receptacles. 

173.303 Charging of cylinders with compressed gas in solution (acetylene). 

173.304 Filling of cylinders with liquefied 

compressed gases. 

173.304a Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed gases in 

specification cylinders. 

173.304b Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed gases in UN 

pressure receptacles. 

173.305 Charging of cylinders with a mixture 

of compressed gas and other material. 

173.306 Limited quantities of compressed 

gases.

173.307 Exceptions for compressed gases. 

173.308 Cigarette lighter or other similar device charged with fuel. 

173.309 Fire extinguishers. 

173.310 Exceptions for radiation detectors. 

173.312 Requirements for shipment of 

MEGCs.

173.313 UN Portable Tank Table for Liquefied Compressed Gases. 

173.314 Compressed gases in tank cars and 

multi-unit tank cars. 

173.315 Compressed gases in cargo tanks and 

portable tanks. 

173.316 Cryogenic liquids in cylinders. 

173.318 Cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks. 

409

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 173 

173.319 Cryogenic liquids in tank cars. 

173.320 Cryogenic liquids; exceptions. 

173.321 Ethylamine. 

173.322 Ethyl chloride. 

173.323 Ethylene oxide. 

173.334 Organic phosphates mixed with compressed gas. 

173.335 [Reserved] 

173.336 Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or 

dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied. 

173.337 Nitric oxide. 

173.338 Tungsten hexafluoride. 

173.340 Tear gas devices. 

Subpart H [Reserved] 

Subpart I—Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials 

173.401 Scope. 

173.403 Definitions. 

173.410 General design requirements. 

173.411 Industrial packagings. 

173.412 Additional design requirements for 

Type A packages. 

173.413 Requirements for Type B packages. 

173.415 Authorized Type A packages. 

173.416 Authorized Type B packages. 

173.417 Authorized fissile materials packages.

173.418 Authorized packages—pyrophoric 

Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

173.419 Authorized packages—oxidizing 

Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

173.420 Uranium hexafluoride (fissile, fissile 

excepted and non-fissile). 

173.421 Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

173.422 Additional requirements for excepted packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

173.423 Requirements for multiple hazard 

limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) 

materials.

173.424 Excepted packages for radioactive 

instruments and articles. 

173.425 Table of activity limits—excepted 

quantities and articles. 

173.426 Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or thorium. 

173.427 Transport requirements for low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 (radioactive) 

materials and surface contaminated objects (SCO). 

173.428 Empty Class 7 (radioactive) materials packaging. 

173.431 Activity limits for Type A and Type 

B packages. 

173.433 Requirements for determining basic 

radionuclide values, and for the listing of 

radionuclides on shipping papers and labels.

173.434 Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium. 

173.435 Table of A1 and A2 values for radionuclides.

173.436 Exempt material activity concentrations and exempt consignment activity 

limits for radionuclides. 

173.441 Radiation level limitations and exclusive use provisions. 

173.442 Thermal limitations. 

173.443 Contamination control. 

173.447 Storage incident to transportation— 

general requirements. 

173.448 General transportation requirements.

173.453 Fissile materials—exceptions. 

173.457 Transportation of fissile material 

packages—specific requirements. 

173.459 Mixing of fissile material packages 

with non-fissile or fissile-excepted material packages. 

173.461 Demonstration of compliance with 

tests.

173.462 Preparation of specimens for testing. 

173.465 Type A packaging tests. 

173.466 Additional tests for Type A packagings designed for liquids and gases. 

173.467 Tests for demonstrating the ability 

of Type B and fissile materials packagings to withstand accident conditions 

in transportation. 

173.468 Test for LSA-III material. 

173.469 Tests for special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

173.471 Requirements for U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission approved packages. 

173.472 Requirements for exporting DOT 

Specification Type B and fissile packages.

173.473 Requirements for foreign-made 

packages.

173.474 Quality control for construction of 

packaging.

173.475 Quality control requirements prior 

to each shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) 

materials.

173.476 Approval of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

173.477 Approval of packagings containing 

greater than 0.1 kg of non-fissile or 

fissile-excepted uranium hexafluoride. 

Subparts J–O [Reserved] 

APPENDIX A TO PART 173 [RESERVED]

APPENDIX B TO PART 173—PROCEDURE FOR

TESTING CHEMICAL COMPATIBILITY AND

RATE OF PERMEATION IN PLASTIC PACKAGING AND RECEPTACLES

APPENDIX C TO PART 173—PROCEDURE FOR

BASE-LEVEL VIBRATION TESTING

APPENDIX D TO PART 173—TEST METHODS FOR

DYNAMITE (EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE

A)

APPENDIXES E–G TO PART 173 [RESERVED]

APPENDIX H TO PART 173—METHOD OF TESTING FOR SUSTAINED COMBUSTIBILITY

AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5101–5128, 44701; 49 

CFR 1.45, 1.53. 

410

§ 173.1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

EDITORIAL NOTE: Nomenclature changes to 

part 173 appear at 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005. 

Subpart A—General 

§ 173.1 Purpose and scope. 

(a) This part includes: 

(1) Definitions of hazardous materials 

for transportation purposes; 

(2) Requirements to be observed in 

preparing hazardous materials for shipment by air, highway, rail, or water, or 

any combination thereof; and 

(3) Inspection, testing, and retesting 

responsibilities for persons who retest, 

recondition, maintain, repair and rebuild containers used or intended for 

use in the transportation of hazardous 

materials.

(b) A shipment of hazardous materials that is not prepared in accordance 

with this subchapter may not be offered for transportation by air, highway, rail, or water. It is the responsibility of each hazmat employer subject 

to the requirements of this subchapter 

to ensure that each hazmat employee 

is trained in accordance with the requirements prescribed in this subchapter. It is the duty of each person 

who offers hazardous materials for 

transportation to instruct each of his 

officers, agents, and employees having 

any responsibility for preparing hazardous materials for shipment as to applicable regulations in this subchapter. 

(c) In general, the Hazardous Materials Regulations (HMR) contained in 

this subchapter are based on the UN 

Recommendations and are consistent 

with international regulations issued 

by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO Technical Instructions) and the International Maritime 

Organization (IMDG Code). However, 

the HMR are not consistent in all respects with the UN Recommendations, 

the ICAO Technical Instructions or the 

IMDG Code, and compliance with the 

HMR will not guarantee acceptance by 

regulatory bodies outside of the United 

States.

[Amdt. 173–94, 41 FR 16062, Apr. 15, 1976, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–100, 41 FR 40476, Sept. 

20, 1976; Amdt. 173–161, 48 FR 2655, Jan. 20, 

1983; Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990; 

Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 20953, May 15, 1992; 64 

FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 

2003]

§ 173.2 Hazardous materials classes 

and index to hazard class definitions. 

The hazard class of a hazardous material is indicated either by its class 

(or division) number, its class name, or 

by the letters ‘‘ORM-D’’. The following 

table lists class numbers, division numbers, class or division names and those 

sections of this subchapter which contain definitions for classifying hazardous materials, including forbidden 

materials.

Class

No.

Division No. 

(if any) Name of class or division 

49 CFR reference for 

definitions

None .................... Forbidden materials .............................................................................................................. 173.21 

None .................... Forbidden explosives ............................................................................................................ 173.54 

1 1.1 Explosives (with a mass explosion hazard) .......................................................................... 173.50

1 1.2 Explosives (with a projection hazard) ................................................................................... 173.50

1 1.3 Explosives (with predominately a fire hazard) ...................................................................... 173.50

1 1.4 Explosives (with no significant blast hazard) ........................................................................ 173.50

1 1.5 Very insensitive explosives; blasting agents ........................................................................ 173.50

1 1.6 Extremely insensitive detonating substances ....................................................................... 173.50 

2 2.1 Flammable gas ...................................................................................................................... 173.115 

2 2.2 Non-flammable compressed gas .......................................................................................... 173.115

2 2.3 Poisonous gas ....................................................................................................................... 173.115 

3 .................... Flammable and combustible liquid ....................................................................................... 173.120 

4 4.1 Flammable solid .................................................................................................................... 173.124 

4 4.2 Spontaneously combustible material .................................................................................... 173.124

4 4.3 Dangerous when wet material .............................................................................................. 173.124

5 5.1 Oxidizer ................................................................................................................................. 173.127 

5 5.2 Organic peroxide ................................................................................................................... 173.128 

6 6.1 Poisonous materials .............................................................................................................. 173.132 

6 6.2 Infectious substance (Etiologic agent) .................................................................................. 173.134

7 .................... Radioactive material .............................................................................................................. 173.403 

8 .................... Corrosive material ................................................................................................................. 173.136 

9 .................... Miscellaneous hazardous material ........................................................................................ 173.140 

None .................... Other regulated material: ORM-D ......................................................................................... 173.144 

411

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.2a 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173– 

234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993] 

§ 173.2a Classification of a material 

having more than one hazard. 

(a) Classification of a material having 

more than one hazard. Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, a 

material not specifically listed in the 

§172.101 table that meets the definition 

of more than one hazard class or division as defined in this part, shall be 

classed according to the highest applicable hazard class of the following hazard classes, which are listed in descending order of hazard: 

(1) Class 7 (radioactive materials, 

other than limited quantities). 

(2) Division 2.3 (poisonous gases). 

(3) Division 2.1 (flammable gases). 

(4) Division 2.2 (nonflammable gases). 

(5) Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids), 

Packing Group I, poisonous-by-inhalation only. 

(6) A material that meets the definition of a pyrophoric material in 

§173.124(b)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.2). 

(7) A material that meets the definition of a self-reactive material in 

§173.124(a)(2) of this subchapter (Division 4.1). 

(8) Class 3 (flammable liquids), Class 

8 (corrosive materials), Division 4.1 

(flammable solids), Division 4.2 (spontaneously combustible materials), Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet materials), Division 5.1 (oxidizers) or Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids or solids 

other than Packing Group I, poisonousby-inhalation). The hazard class and 

packing group for a material meeting 

more than one of these hazards shall be 

determined using the precedence table 

in paragraph (b) of this section. 

(9) Combustible liquids. 

(10) Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous 

materials).

(b) Precedence of hazard table for 

Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 

5.1 and 6.1. The following table ranks 

those materials that meet the definition of Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 

4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 6.1: 

PRECEDENCE OF HAZARD TABLE

[ Hazard class or division and packing group ] 

4.2 4.3 5.1

I 1

5.1

II 1

5.1

III 1

6.1, I 

dermal

6.1, I 

oral

6.1

II

6.1

III

8, I 

liquid

8, I 

solid

8, II 

liquid

8, II 

solid

8, III 

liquid

8, III 

solid

3 I2 ...................... ...... 4 .3 ...... ...... ...... 3 3 3 3 3 (3) 3 (3) 3 (3)

3 II2 ..................... ...... 4 .3 ...... ...... ...... 3 3 3 3 8 (3) 3 (3) 3 (3)

3 III2 .................... ...... 4 .3 ...... ...... ...... 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 34 8 (3) 8 (3) 3 (3)

4.1 II 2 ............... 4 .2 4 .3 5 .1 4 .1 4 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .1 4 .1 (3) 8 (3) 4 .1 (3) 4 .1

4.1 III 2 .............. 4 .2 4 .3 5 .1 4 .1 4 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .1 (3) 8 (3) 8 (3) 4 .1

4.2 II ................. ...... 4 .3 5 .1 4 .2 4 .2 6 .1 6 .1 4 .2 4 .2 8 8 4 .2 4 .2 4 .2 4 .2

4.2 III ................ ...... 4 .3 5 .1 5 .1 4 .2 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .2 8 8 8 8 4 .2 4 .2

4.3 I .................. ...... ...... 5 .1 4 .3 4 .3 6 .1 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3

4.3 II ................. ...... ...... 5 .1 4 .3 4 .3 6 .1 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 8 8 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3 4 .3

4.3 III ................ ...... ...... 5 .1 5 .1 4 .3 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 4 .3 8 8 8 8 4 .3 4 .3

5.1 I 1 ................ ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1

5.1 II 1 ............... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 6 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 8 8 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1 5 .1

5.1 III 1 .............. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 5 .1 8 8 8 8 5 .1 5 .1

6.1 I, Dermal .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1

6.1 I, Oral ......... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1

6.1 II, Inhalation ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1

6.1 II, Dermal ... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 6 .1 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1

6.1 II, Oral ........ ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 8 8 6 .1 6 .1 6 .1

6.1 III ................ ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............ ........ ...... ........ 8 8 8 8 8 8 

1See § 173.127. 

2 Materials of Division 4.1 other than self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives, and materials of Class 3 other

than liquid desensitized explosives. 3 Denotes an impossible combination. 

4For pesticides only, where a material has the hazards of Class 3, Packing Group III, and Division 6.1, Packing Group III, the 

primary hazard is Division 6.1, Packing Group III. 

NOTE 1: The most stringent packing group 

assigned to a hazard of the material takes 

precedence over other packing groups; for 

example, a material meeting Class 3 PG II 

412

§ 173.3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

and Division 6.1 PG I (oral toxicity) is classified as Class 3 PG I. 

NOTE 2: A material which meets the definition of Class 8 and has an inhalation toxicity 

by dusts and mists which meets criteria for 

Packing Group I specified in §173.133(a)(1) 

must be classed as Division 6.1 if the oral or 

dermal toxicity meets criteria for Packing 

Group I or II. If the oral or dermal toxicity 

meets criteria for Packing Group III or less, 

the material must be classed as Class 8. 

(c) The following materials are not 

subject to the provisions of paragraph 

(a) of this section because of their 

unique properties: 

(1) A Class 1 (explosive) material that 

meets any other hazard class or division as defined in this part shall be assigned a division in Class 1. Class 1 materials shall be classed and approved in 

accordance with §173.56 of this part; 

(2) A Division 5.2 (organic peroxide) 

material that meets the definition of 

any other hazard class or division as 

defined in this part, shall be classed as 

Division 5.2; 

(3) A Division 6.2 (infectious substance) material that also meets the 

definition of another hazard class or division, other than Class 7, or that also 

is a limited quantity Class 7 material, 

shall be classed as Division 6.2; 

(4) A material that meets the definition of a wetted explosive in 

§173.124(a)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.1). Wetted explosives are either 

specifically listed in the §172.101 table 

or are approved by the Associate Administrator (see §173.124(a)(1) of this 

subchapter); and 

(5) A limited quantity of a Class 7 

(radioactive) material that meets the 

definition for more than one hazard 

class or division shall be classed in accordance with §173.423. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66264, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

247, 60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995; Amdt. 173–244, 

60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 

5, 1999; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45182, 

45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45032, July 31, 2003] 

§ 173.3 Packaging and exceptions. 

(a) The packaging of hazardous materials for transportation by air, highway, rail, or water must be as specified 

in this part. Methods of manufacture, 

packing, and storage of hazardous materials, that affect safety in transportation, must be open to inspection by a 

duly authorized representative of the 

initial carrier or of the Department. 

Methods of manufacture and related 

functions necessary for completion of a 

DOT specification or U.N. standard 

packaging must be open to inspection 

by a representative of the Department. 

(b) The regulations setting forth 

packaging requirements for a specific 

material apply to all modes of transportation unless otherwise stated, or 

unless exceptions from packaging requirements are authorized. 

(c) Salvage drums. Packages of hazardous materials that are damaged, defective, or leaking; packages found to 

be not conforming to the requirements 

of this subchapter after having been 

placed in transportation; and, hazardous materials that have spilled or 

leaked may be placed in a metal or 

plastic removable head salvage drum 

that is compatible with the lading and 

shipped for repackaging or disposal 

under the following conditions: 

(1) Except as provided in paragraph 

(c)(7) of this section, the drum must be 

a UN 1A2, 1B2, 1N2 or 1H2 tested and 

marked for Packing Group III or higher 

performance standards for liquids or 

solids and a leakproofness test of 20 

kPa (3 psig). Alternatively, a drum 

manufactured and marked prior to October 1, 1993 as a salvage drum, in accordance with the provisions of this 

section in effect on September 30, 1991, 

is authorized. Capacity of the drum 

may not exceed 450 L (119 gallons). 

(2) Each drum shall be provided when 

necessary with sufficient cushioning 

and absorption material to prevent excessive shifting of the damaged package and to eliminate the presence of 

any free liquid at the time the salvage 

drum is closed. All cushioning and absorbent material used in the drum 

must be compatible with the hazardous 

material.

(3) Each salvage packaging must be 

marked with the proper shipping name 

of the hazardous material inside the 

packaging and the name and address of 

the consignee. In addition, the packaging must be marked ‘‘SALVAGE’’ or 

‘‘SALVAGE DRUM’’. 

(4) Each drum shall be labeled as prescribed for the respective material. 

413

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.3 

(5) The shipper shall prepare shipping 

papers in accordance with subpart C of 

part 172 of this subchapter. 

(6) Transportation is authorized by 

motor vehicle and cargo vessel only. 

(7) A salvage packaging marked ‘‘T’’ 

in accordance with applicable provisions in the UN Recommendations may 

be used. 

(d) Salvage cylinders. Cylinders of hazardous materials that are damaged or 

leaking may be overpacked in a nonDOT specification full opening hinged 

head or fully removable head steel salvage cylinder under the following conditions:

(1) Only a cylinder containing a Division 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3, 6.1, or a Class 8 material may be overpacked in a salvage 

cylinder. A cylinder containing acetylene may not be overpacked in a salvage cylinder. 

(2) Each salvage cylinder— 

(i) Must be designed, constructed and 

marked in accordance with Section 

VIII, Division I of the ASME Code 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) with 

a minimum design margin of 4 to 1. 

Salvage cylinders may not be equipped 

with a pressure relief device. Damaged 

cylinders must be securely positioned 

in the salvage cylinder to prevent excessive movement. The overpack requirements of §173.25 of this part do 

not apply to salvage cylinders used in 

accordance with this section. 

(ii) Must have a maximum water capacity of 450 L (119 gallons). 

(iii) Except for liquefied nitrous 

oxide and carbon dioxide, contents of 

the damaged or leaking cylinder must 

be limited in pressure and volume so 

that if totally discharged into the salvage cylinder, the pressure in the salvage cylinder will not exceed 5⁄4 of the 

MAWP at 55 °C (131 °F).

(iv) Must have gaskets, valves and 

fittings that are compatible with the 

hazardous materials contained within. 

(3) Each salvage cylinder must be 

plainly and durably marked. Unless 

otherwise specified, the markings 

below must be in the same area on any 

portion of the upper end: 

(i) The proper shipping name of the 

hazardous material contained inside 

the packaging; 

(ii) The name and address of the consignee or consignor; 

(iii) The name and address or registered symbol of the manufacturer; 

and

(iv) The words ‘‘SALVAGE CYLINDER’’ in letters at least 50 mm (2.0 

inches) high on opposite sides near the 

middle of the cylinder; stamping on the 

sidewall is not authorized. 

(4) Each salvage cylinder must be labeled for the hazardous material contained inside the packaging. 

(5) The shipper must prepare shipping 

papers in accordance with subpart C of 

part 172 of this subchapter. 

(6) Transportation is authorized by 

motor vehicle only. 

(7) Each salvage cylinder must be 

cleaned and purged after each use. 

(8) In addition to the training requirements of §§172.700 through 172.704 

of this subchapter, a person who loads, 

unloads or transports a salvage cylinder must be trained in handling, 

loading and unloading the salvage cylinder.

(9) Cylinder Requalification: At least 

once every five years, each cylinder 

must be visually inspected (internally 

and externally) in accordance with 

CGA Pamphlet C–6 (IBR, see §171.7 of 

this subchapter) and pressure tested. A 

minimum test pressure of at least 11⁄2

times MAWP must be maintained for 

at least 30 seconds. The cylinder must 

be examined under test pressure and 

removed from service if a leak or a defect is found. 

(i) The retest and inspection must be 

performed by a person familiar with 

salvage cylinders and trained and experienced in the use of the inspection and 

testing equipment. 

(ii) Each salvage cylinder that is successfully requalified must be durably 

and legibly marked with the word 

‘‘Tested’’ followed by the requalification date (month/year), e.g., ‘‘Tested 9/ 

04.’’ The marking must be in letters 

and numbers at least 12 mm (0.5 inches) 

high. The requalification marking may 

be placed on any portion of the upper 

end of the cylinder near the marking 

required in (d)(3) of this section or on a 

metal plate permanently secured to the 

cylinder. Stamping on the cylinder 

sidewall is not authorized. 

(10) Record retention: The owner of 

each salvage cylinder or his authorized 

agent shall retain a record of the most 

414

§ 173.4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

recent visual inspection and pressure 

test until the salvage cylinder is requalified. The records must be made 

available to a DOT representative upon 

request.

(e) Emergency transportation of DOT 

3A480 or 3AA480 cylinders and DOT 

106A500 multi-unit tank car tanks. (1) A 

DOT 3A480 or DOT 3AA480 cylinder containing chlorine or sulphur dioxide 

that has developed a leak in a valve or 

fusible plug may be repaired temporarily by trained personnel using a 

Chlorine Institute Kit ‘‘A’’ (IBR, see

§171.7 of this subchapter). The repaired 

cylinder is authorized to be transported by private or contract carrier 

one time, one way, from the point of 

discovery to a proper facility for discharge and examination. 

(2) A DOT 106A500 multi-unit tank 

car tank containing chlorine or sulphur dioxide that has developed a leak 

in the valve or fusible plug may be 

temporarily repaired by trained personnel using a Chlorine Institute Kit 

‘‘B’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

The repaired tank is authorized to be 

transported by private or contract carrier one time, one way, from the point 

of discovery to a proper facility for discharge and examination. 

(3) Training for personnel making the 

repairs in paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) of 

this section must include: 

(i) Proper use of the devices and tools 

in the applicable kits; 

(ii) Use of respiratory equipment and 

all other safety equipment; and 

(iii) Knowledge of the properties of 

chlorine and sulphur dioxide. 

(4) Packagings repaired with ‘‘A’’ or 

‘‘B’’ kits must be properly blocked and 

braced to ensure the packagings are secured in the transport vehicle. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52607, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 

261, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 

28, 2001; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 69 FR 76154, 

Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 3307, Jan. 24, 2005; 68 FR 

61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 70 FR 34397, June 14, 2005; 

70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005; 75 FR 27213, May 

14, 2010] 

§ 173.4 Small quantities for highway 

and rail. 

(a) When transported domestically by 

highway or rail in conformance with 

this section, small quantities of Class 

3, Division 4.1, Division 4.2 (PG II and 

III), Division 4.3 (PG II and III), Division 5.1, Division 5.2, Division 6.1, Class 

7, Class 8, and Class 9 materials that 

also meet the definition of one or more 

of these hazard classes, are not subject 

to any other requirements of this subchapter when— 

(1) The maximum quantity of material per inner receptacle or article is 

limited to— 

(i) Thirty (30) mL (1 ounce) for authorized liquids, other than Division 

6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A or 

B materials; 

(ii) Thirty (30) g (1 ounce) for authorized solid materials; 

(iii) One (1) g (0.04 ounce) for authorized materials meeting the definition 

of a Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A or B material; and 

(iv) An activity level not exceeding 

that specified in §§173.421, 173.424, 

173.425 or 173.426, as appropriate, for a 

package containing a Class 7 (radioactive) material. 

(2) With the exception of temperature 

sensing devices, each inner receptacle: 

(i) Is not liquid-full at 55 °C (131 °F),

and

(ii) Is constructed of plastic having a 

minimum thickness of no less than 0.2 

mm (0.008 inch), or earthenware, glass, 

or metal; 

(3) Each inner receptacle with a removable closure has its closure held securely in place with wire, tape, or 

other positive means; 

(4) Unless equivalent cushioning and 

absorbent material surrounds the inside packaging, each inner receptacle 

is securely packed in an inside packaging with cushioning and absorbent 

material that: 

(i) Will not react chemically with the 

material, and 

(ii) Is capable of absorbing the entire 

contents (if a liquid) of the receptacle; 

(5) The inside packaging is securely 

packed in a strong outer packaging; 

(6) The completed package, as demonstrated by prototype testing, is capable of sustaining— 

(i) Each of the following free drops 

made from a height of 1.8 m (5.9 feet) 

directly onto a solid unyielding surface 

without breakage or leakage from any 

415

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.4a 

inner receptacle and without a substantial reduction in the effectiveness 

of the package: 

(A) One drop flat on bottom; 

(B) One drop flat on top; 

(C) One drop flat on the long side; 

(D) One drop flat on the short side; 

and

(E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting edges; and 

(ii) A compressive load as specified in 

§178.606(c) of this subchapter. 

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(6): Each of the 

tests in paragraph (a)(6) of this section may 

be performed on a different but identical 

package; i.e., all tests need not be performed 

on the same package. 

(7) Placement of the material in the 

package or packing different materials 

in the package does not result in a violation of §173.21; 

(8) The gross mass of the completed 

package does not exceed 29 kg (64 

pounds);

(9) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no longer in 

commerce; and 

(10) The shipper certifies conformance with this section by marking the 

outside of the package with the statement ‘‘This package conforms to 49 

CFR 173.4 for domestic highway or rail 

transport only.’’ 

(b) A package containing a Class 7 

(radioactive) material also must conform to the requirements of 

§173.421(a)(1) through (a)(5) or 

§173.424(a) through (g), as appropriate. 

(c) Packages which contain a Class 2, 

Division 4.2 (PG I), or Division 4.3 (PG 

I) material conforming to paragraphs 

(a)(1) through (a)(10) of this section 

may be offered for transportation or 

transported if specifically approved by 

the Associate Administrator. 

(d) Lithium batteries and cells are 

not eligible for the exceptions provided 

in this section. 

74 FR 2253, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 

5393, Feb. 2, 2010] 

§ 173.4a Excepted quantities. 

(a) Excepted quantities of materials 

other than articles transported in accordance with this section are not subject to any additional requirements of 

this subchapter except for: 

(1) The shipper’s responsibilities to 

properly class their material in accordance with §173.22 of this subchapter; 

(2) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this 

subchapter pertaining to the reporting 

of incidents; and 

(3) For a Class 7 (Radioactive) material the requirements for an excepted 

package.

(b) Authorized materials. Only materials authorized for transport aboard 

passenger aircraft and appropriately 

classed within one of the following hazard classes or divisions may be transported in accordance with this section: 

(1) Division 2.2 materials with no subsidiary hazard; 

(2) Class 3 materials; 

(3) Class 4 (PG II and III) materials 

except for self-reactive materials; 

(4) Division 5.1 (PG II and III); 

(5) Division 5.2 materials only when 

contained in a chemical kit or a first 

aid kit; 

(6) Division 6.1, other than PG I, Hazard Zone A or B material; 

(7) Class 7, Radioactive material in 

excepted packages 

(8) Class 8 (PG II and III), except for 

UN2803 (Gallium) and UN2809 (Mercury); and 

(9) Class 9, except for UN1845 (Carbon 

dioxide, solid or Dry ice), and lithium 

batteries and cells. 

(c) Inner packaging limits. The maximum quantity of hazardous materials 

in each inner packaging is limited to: 

(1) For toxic material with a Division 

6.1 primary or subsidiary hazard, PG I 

or II— 

(i) 1 g (0.04 ounce) for solids; or 

(ii) 1 mL (0.03 ounce) for liquids; 

(2) 30 g (1 ounce) or 30 mL (1 ounce) 

for solids or liquids other than those 

covered in paragraph (c)(1) of this section; and 

(3) For gases a water capacity of 30 

mL (1.8 cubic inches) or less. 

(d) Outer packaging aggregate quantity 

limits. The maximum aggregate quantity of hazardous material contained in 

each outer packaging must not exceed 

the limits provided in the following 

paragraphs. For outer packagings containing more than one hazardous material, the aggregate quantity of hazardous material must not exceed the 

lowest permitted maximum aggregate 

quantity. The limits are as follows: 

416

§ 173.4a 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(1) For other than a Division 2.2 or 

Division 5.2 material: 

(i) Packing Group I—300 g (0.66 

pounds) for solids or 300 mL (0.08 gallons) for liquids; 

(ii) Packing Group II—500 g (1.1 

pounds) for solids or 500 mL (0.1 gallons) for liquids; 

(iii) Packing Group III—1 kg (2.2 

pounds) for solids or 1 L (0.2 gallons) 

for liquids; 

(2) For Division 2.2 material, 1 L (61 

cubic inches); or 

(3) For Division 5.2 material, 500 g 

(1.1 pounds) for solids or 250 mL (0.05 

gallons) for liquids. 

(e) Packaging materials. Packagings 

used for the transport of excepted 

quantities must meet the following: 

(1) Each inner receptacle must be 

constructed of plastic, or of glass, porcelain, stoneware, earthenware or 

metal. When used for liquid hazardous 

materials, plastic inner packagings 

must have a thickness of not less than 

0.2 mm (0.008 inch). 

(2) Each inner packaging with a removable closure must have its closure 

held securely in place with wire, tape 

or other positive means. Each inner receptacle having a neck with molded 

screw threads must have a leak proof, 

threaded type cap. The closure must 

not react chemically with the material.

(3) Each inner packaging must be securely packed in an intermediate packaging with cushioning material in such 

a way that, under normal conditions of 

transport, it cannot break, be punctured or leak its contents. The intermediate packaging must completely 

contain the contents in case of breakage or leakage, regardless of package 

orientation. For liquid hazardous materials, the intermediate packaging 

must contain sufficient absorbent material that: 

(i) Will absorb the entire contents of 

the inner packaging. 

(ii) Will not react dangerously with 

the material or reduce the integrity or 

function of the packaging materials. 

(iii) The absorbent material may be 

the cushioning material. 

(4) The intermediate packaging must 

be securely packed in a strong, rigid 

outer packaging. 

(5) Placement of the material in the 

package or packing different materials 

in the package must not result in a 

violation of §173.21. 

(6) Each package must be of such a 

size that there is adequate space to 

apply all necessary markings. 

(7) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no longer in 

commerce.

(8) Overpacks may be used and may 

also contain packages of hazardous material or other materials not subject to 

the HMR subject to the requirements 

of §173.25. 

(f) Package tests. The completed package as prepared for transport, with 

inner packagings filled to not less than 

95% of their capacity for solids or 98% 

for liquids, must be capable of withstanding, as demonstrated by testing 

which is appropriately documented, 

without breakage or leakage of any 

inner packaging and without significant reduction in effectiveness: 

(1) Drops onto a solid unyielding surface from a height of 1.8 m (5.9 feet): 

(i) Where the sample is in the shape 

of a box, it must be dropped in each of 

the following orientations: 

(A) One drop flat on the bottom; 

(B) One drop flat on the top; 

(C) One drop flat on the longest side; 

(D) One drop flat on the shortest side; 

and

(E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting edges. 

(ii) Where the sample is in the shape 

of a drum, it must be dropped in each 

of the following orientations: 

(A) One drop diagonally on the top 

chime, with the center of gravity directly above the point of impact; 

(B) One drop diagonally on the base 

chime; and 

(C) One drop flat on the side. 

(2) A compressive load as specified in 

§178.606(c) of this subchapter. Each of 

the tests in this paragraph (f) of this 

section may be performed on a different but identical package; that is, 

all tests need not be performed on the 

same package. 

(g) Marking. Excepted quantities of 

hazardous materials packaged, 

marked, and otherwise offered and 

transported in accordance with this 

section must be durably and legibly 

marked with the following marking: 

417

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.4b 

(1) The ‘‘*’’ must be replaced by the 

primary hazard class, or when assigned, the division of each of the hazardous materials contained in the 

package. The ‘‘**’’ must be replaced by 

the name of the shipper or consignee if 

not shown elsewhere on the package. 

(2) The marking must not be less 

than 100 mm (3.9 inches) by 100 mm (3.9 

inches), and must be durable and clearly visible. 

(h) Documentation. (1) For transportation by highway or rail, no shipping 

paper is required. 

(2) For transport by air, a shipping 

paper is not required, except that, if a 

document such as an air waybill accompanies a shipment, the document 

must include the statement ‘‘Dangerous Goods in Excepted Quantities’’ 

and indicate the number of packages. 

(3) For transport by vessel, a shipping paper is required and must include 

the statement ‘‘Dangerous Goods in 

Excepted Quantities’’ and indicate the 

number of packages. 

(i) Training. Each person who offers 

or transports excepted quantities of 

hazardous materials must know about 

the requirements of this section. 

(j) Restrictions. Hazardous material 

packaged in accordance with this section may not be carried in checked or 

carry-on baggage. 

[74 FR 2254, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 

FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010] 

§ 173.4b De minimis exceptions. 

(a) Packing Group II and III materials in Class 3, Division 4.1, Division 

4.2, Division 4.3, Division 5.1, Division 

6.1, Class 8, and Class 9 do not meet the 

definition of a hazardous material in 

§171.8 of this subchapter when packaged in accordance with this section 

and, therefore, are not subject to the 

requirements of this subchapter. 

(1) The maximum quantity of material per inner receptacle or article is 

limited to— 

(i) One (1) mL (0.03 ounce) for authorized liquids; and 

(ii) One (1) g (0.04 ounce) for authorized solid materials; 

(2) Each inner receptacle with a removable closure has its closure held securely in place with wire, tape, or 

other positive means; 

(3) Unless equivalent cushioning and 

absorbent material surrounds the inside packaging, each inner receptacle 

is securely packed in an inside packaging with cushioning and absorbent 

material that: 

(i) Will not react chemically with the 

material, and 

(ii) Is capable of absorbing the entire 

contents (if a liquid) of the receptacle; 

(4) The inside packaging is securely 

packed in a strong outer packaging; 

(5) The completed package is capable 

of sustaining— 

(i) Each of the following free drops 

made from a height of 1.8 m (5.9 feet) 

directly onto a solid unyielding surface 

without breakage or leakage from any 

inner receptacle and without a substantial reduction in the effectiveness 

of the package: 

(A) One drop flat on bottom; 

(B) One drop flat on top; 

(C) One drop flat on the long side; 

(D) One drop flat on the short side; 

and

(E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting edges; and 

(ii) A compressive load as specified in 

§178.606(c) of this subchapter. Each of 

the tests in this paragraph (a)(5) may 

be performed on a different but identical package; that is, all tests need 

not be performed on the same package. 

(6) Placement of the material in the 

package or packing different materials 

in the package does not result in a violation of §173.21; 


ER14JA09.002</GPH>
418

§ 173.5 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(7) The aggregate quantity of hazardous material per package does not 

exceed 100 g (0.22 pounds) for solids or 

100 mL (3.38 ounces) for liquids; 

(8) The gross mass of the completed 

package does not exceed 29 kg (64 

pounds);

(9) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no longer in 

commerce; and 

(10) For transportation by aircraft: 

(i) The hazardous material is authorized to be carried aboard passenger-carrying aircraft in Column 9A of the 

§172.101 Hazardous Materials Table; 

and

(ii) Material packed in accordance 

with this section may not be carried in 

checked or carry-on baggage. 

(b) [Reserved] 

[74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 

FR 5393, Feb. 2, 2010] 

§ 173.5 Agricultural operations. 

(a) For other than a Class 2 material, 

the transportation of an agricultural 

product over local roads between fields 

of the same farm is excepted from the 

requirements of this subchapter. A 

Class 2 material transported over local 

roads between fields of the same farm 

is excepted from subparts G and H of 

part 172 of this subchapter. In either 

instance, transportation of the hazardous material is subject to the following conditions: 

(1) It is transported by a farmer who 

is an intrastate private motor carrier; 

and

(2) The movement of the agricultural 

product conforms to requirements of 

the State in which it is transported 

and is specifically authorized by a 

State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998. 

(b) The transportation of an agricultural product to or from a farm, within 

150 miles of the farm, is excepted from 

the requirements in subparts G and H 

of part 172 of this subchapter and from 

the specific packaging requirements of 

this subchapter when: 

(1) It is transported by a farmer who 

is an intrastate private motor carrier; 

(2) The total amount of agricultural 

product being transported on a single 

motor vehicle does not exceed: 

(i) 7,300 kg (16,094 lbs.) of ammonium 

nitrate fertilizer properly classed as 

Division 5.1, PG III, in a bulk packaging, or 

(ii) 1900 L (502 gallons) for liquids or 

gases, or 2,300 kg (5,070 lbs.) for solids, 

of any other agricultural product; 

(3) The movement and packaging of 

the agricultural product conform to 

the requirements of the State in which 

it is transported and are specifically 

authorized by a State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998; 

and

(4) Each person having any responsibility for transporting the agricultural 

product or preparing the agricultural 

product for shipment has been instructed in the applicable requirements 

of this subchapter. 

(c) Formulated liquid agricultural 

products in specification packagings of 

220 L (58 gallons) capacity, or less, with 

closures manifolded to a closed mixing 

system and equipped with positive dry 

disconnect devices may be transported 

by a private motor carrier between a 

final distribution point and an ultimate point of application or for loading aboard an airplane for aerial application.

(d) See §173.315(m) pertaining to 

nurse tanks of anhydrous ammonia. 

(e) See §173.6 pertaining to materials 

of trade. 

(f) See §172.800(b) pertaining to security plans. 

[Amdt. 173–259, 62 FR 1215, Jan. 8, 1997, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–262, 62 FR 49566, Sept. 

22, 1997; Amdt. 173–259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 

1998; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 70 FR 73165, 

Dec. 9, 2005; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008] 

§ 173.5a Oilfield service vehicles and 

mechanical displacement meter 

provers. 

(a) Oilfield service vehicles. Notwithstanding §173.29 of this subchapter, a 

cargo tank motor vehicle used in oilfield servicing operations is not subject 

to the specification requirements of 

this subchapter provided— 

(1) The cargo tank and equipment 

contains only residual amounts (i.e., it 

is emptied so far as practicable) of a 

flammable liquid alone or in combination with water, 

(2) No flame producing device is operated during transportation, and 

419

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.5a 

(3) The proper shipping name is preceded by ‘‘RESIDUE: LAST CONTAINED * * *’’ on the shipping paper 

for each movement on a public highway.

(b) Mechanical displacement meter 

provers. (1) A mechanical displacement 

meter prover, as defined in §171.8 of 

this subchapter, permanently mounted 

on a truck chassis or trailer and transported by motor vehicle is excepted 

from the specification packaging requirements in part 178 of this subchapter provided it— 

(i) Contains only the residue of a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) or Class 3 

(flammable liquid) material. For liquids, the meter prover must be drained 

to not exceed 10% of its capacity or, to 

the extent that draining of the meter 

prover is impracticable, to the maximum extent practicable. For gases, 

the meter prover must not exceed 25% 

of the marked pressure rating; 

(ii) Has a water capacity of 3,785 L 

(1,000 gallons) or less; 

(iii) Is designed and constructed in 

accordance with chapters II, III, IV, V 

and VI of ASME Standard B31.4 (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter); 

(iv) Is marked with the MAWP determined from the pipe component with 

the lowest pressure rating; and 

(v) Is equipped with rear-end protection as prescribed in §178.337–10(c) of 

this subchapter and 49 CFR 393.86 of the 

Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations.

(2) The description on the shipping 

paper for a meter prover containing the 

residue of a hazardous material must 

include the phrase ‘‘RESIDUE: LAST 

CONTAINED * * * ’’ before the basic 

description.

(3) Periodic test and inspection. (i)

Each meter prover must be externally 

visually inspected once a year. The external visual inspection must include 

at a minimum: checking for leakage, 

defective fittings and welds, defective 

closures, significant dents and other 

defects or abnormalities which indicate 

a potential or actual weakness that 

could render the meter prover unsafe 

for transportation; and 

(ii) Each meter prover must be pressure tested once every 5 years at not 

less than 75% of design pressure. The 

pressure must be held for a period of 

time sufficiently long to assure detection of leaks, but in no case less than 

5 minutes. 

(4) In addition to the training requirements in subpart H, the person 

who performs the visual inspection or 

pressure test and/or signs the inspection report must have the knowledge 

and ability to perform them as required by this section. 

(5) A meter prover that fails the periodic test and inspection must be rejected and removed from hazardous 

materials service unless the meter 

prover is adequately repaired, and 

thereafter, a successful test is conducted in accordance with the requirements of this section. 

(6) Prior to any repair work, the 

meter prover must be emptied of any 

hazardous material. A meter prover 

containing flammable lading must be 

purged.

(7) Each meter prover successfully 

completing the external visual inspection and the pressure test must be 

marked with the test date (month/ 

year), and the type of test or inspection as follows: 

(i) V for external visual inspection; 

and

(ii) P for pressure test. 

The marking must be on the side of a 

tank or the largest piping component 

in letters 32 mm (1.25 inches) high on a 

contrasting background. 

(8) The owner must retain a record of 

the most recent external visual inspection and pressure test until the next 

test or inspection of the same type is 

successfully completed. The test or inspection report must include the following:

(i) Serial number or other meter 

prover identifier; 

(ii) Type of test or inspection performed;

(iii) Test date (month/year); 

(iv) Location of defects found, if any, 

and method used to repair each defect; 

(v) Name and address of person performing the test or inspection; 

(vi) Disposition statement, such as 

‘‘Meter Prover returned to service’’ or 

‘‘Meter Prover removed from service’’. 

[70 FR 3308, Jan. 24, 2005, as amended at 75 

FR 27213, May 14, 2010] 

420

§ 173.5b 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

§ 173.5b Portable and mobile refrigeration systems. 

This section authorizes the highway 

transportation of residual amounts of 

Division 2.2 refrigerant gases or anhydrous ammonia contained in non-specification pressure vessels that are components of refrigeration systems, which 

may or may not be permanently 

mounted to a transport vehicle, used 

for agricultural operations. These refrigeration systems are used at field 

sites to cool (pre-cool) produce before 

the produce is loaded into trucks or 

railcars for market or used to supplement stationary refrigeration systems 

during peak harvest times. The components of these refrigeration systems 

are commonly known as vacuum tubes, 

accumulators, refrigeration units, ice 

makers, pressure coolers, or evaporators.

(a) General packaging requirements. 

Each non-specification pressure vessel 

must conform to the following: 

(1) Each pressure vessel must be designed, manufactured, and maintained 

in accordance with applicable requirements of the ASME Code (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter). 

(2) Except as authorized in this section, each pressure vessel and associated piping must be rated at a maximum allowable work pressure (MAWP) 

of 250 psig. The pressure in these components may not exceed MAWP. 

(3) Any part of the piping or pressure 

vessel separated from another component of the refrigeration system by 

means of a valve, blank flange, or other 

device must be equipped with a pressure relief valve set at MAWP. All lines 

that must be disconnected for transportation purposes must be closed by 

means of a cap, plug or blank flange, 

and valves at the end of disconnected 

lines must be tightly closed. 

(4) The aggregate total volumetric 

capacity of components within the refrigeration system authorized for highway transportation in accordance with 

this section may not exceed 2,500 gallons per vehicle. 

(5) Each pressure vessel and associated piping containing anhydrous ammonia must conform to the following: 

(i) Piping with a diameter of 2 inches 

or more must conform to ASTM A 53 

Schedule 40 or ASTM A106 Schedule 40 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(ii) Piping with a diameter of less 

than 2 inches must conform to ASTM A 

53 Schedule 80 or ASTM A 106 Schedule 

80 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(iii) The words ‘‘Inhalation Hazard’’ 

must be marked as required in special 

provision 13 in §172.102 of this subchapter and, when practicable, within 

24 inches of the placard. 

(b) Refrigeration systems placed into 

service prior to June 1, 1991. (1) For refrigeration systems placed into service 

prior to June 1, 1991, each pressure vessel and associated piping for the condensing line (‘‘high side’’) must be 

rated at an MAWP of not less than 250 

psig. Each pressure vessel and associated piping for the evaporating line 

(‘‘low side’’) must be rated at an 

MAWP of not less than 150 psig, except 

that each pressure vessel or associated 

piping that will contain refrigerant gas 

during transportation must be rated at 

an MAWP of not less than 250 psig. 

During transportation, pressure in the 

components that are part of the 

evaporating line may not exceed 150 

psig.

(2) Each pressure vessel and associated piping that is part of the 

evaporating line must be marked 

‘‘LOW SIDE’’ in a permanent and clearly visible manner. The evaporating line 

must have a pressure gauge with corresponding temperature markings 

mounted so as to be easily readable 

when standing on the ground. The 

gauge must be permanently marked or 

tagged ‘‘SATURATION GAUGE’’. 

(3) Each pressure vessel and associated piping with an MAWP of 250 psig 

or greater containing liquid anhydrous 

ammonia must be isolated using appropriate means from piping and components marked ‘‘LOW SIDE’’. 

(4) Liquid lading is only authorized in 

system components with a rated 

MAWP of not less than 250 psig. 

(5) Prior to transportation, each pressure vessel and associated piping with 

a rated MAWP of less than 250 psig 

must be relieved of enough gaseous lading to ensure that the MAWP is not exceeded at transport temperatures up to 

54 °C (130 °F).

421

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.6 

(6) Refrigeration systems placed into 

service prior to June 1, 1991, may continue in service until October 1, 2017. 

(c) Prior to transportation over public highways, each pressure vessel and 

associated piping must be drained of 

refrigerant gas or liquid anhydrous ammonia to the extent practicable. 

Drained contents must be recovered in 

conformance with all applicable environmental regulations. Residual liquid 

anhydrous ammonia in each component may not exceed one percent of the 

component’s total volumetric capacity 

or 10 gallons, whichever is less. 

(d) System inspection and testing. (1)

Each refrigeration system authorized 

under this section must be visually inspected every year. The visual inspection must include items listed in 

§180.407(d)(2) of this subchapter applicable to refrigeration systems. A certificate of the annual visual inspection 

must be dated and signed by the person 

performing the inspection and must 

contain that person’s company affiliation. The certificate must remain at 

the equipment owner’s office. 

(2) Each refrigeration system authorized under this section must be proof 

pressure tested every two years beginning with the initial pressure test performed after manufacture. Additional 

pressure tests must be performed after 

any modification, repair or damage to 

a part of the system pressurized with 

refrigerant gas. System test pressures 

may not be less than one-and-one-half 

(1.50) times the rated MAWP of the system component or piping. 

(3) Pressure relief valves must be successfully tested every two years at the 

MAWP for the components or piping to 

which they are attached. Pressure relief valves may be replaced and marked 

every 5 years with valves certified at 

the appropriate MAWP, in which case 

the valves need not be tested every two 

years. Valves that do not pass the test 

must be repaired or replaced. 

(e) Test markings and reports. (1) Evidence of testing specified in paragraph 

(d) of this section must be marked on 

the right forward side of the refrigeration system with 2 inch high letters indicating type of last test (V = visual; P 

= pressure: hydrostatic or pneumatic) 

and the month/year in which it was 

performed. Reports and all of the requirements for records of inspections 

including markings must be completed 

as specified in part 180. 

(2) Pressure relief valves must be durably marked with either the date of 

last test, set-pressure and testing company or the date of last replacement, 

set-pressure, and certifying company, 

as applicable. 

[74 FR 16142, Apr. 9, 2009] 

§ 173.6 Materials of trade exceptions. 

When transported by motor vehicle 

in conformance with this section, a 

material of trade (see §171.8 of this subchapter) is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter besides 

those set forth or referenced in this 

section.

(a) Materials and amounts. A material 

of trade is limited to the following: 

(1) A Class 3, 8, 9, Division 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 

6.1, or ORM-D material contained in a 

packaging having a gross mass or capacity not over— 

(i) 0.5 kg (1 pound) or 0.5 L (1 pint) for 

a Packing Group I material; 

(ii) 30 kg (66 pounds) or 30 L (8 gallons) for a Packing Group II, Packing 

Group III, or ORM-D material; 

(iii) 1500 L (400 gallons) for a diluted 

mixture, not to exceed 2 percent concentration, of a Class 9 material. 

(2) A Division 2.1 or 2.2 material in a 

cylinder with a gross weight not over 

100 kg (220 pounds), or a permanently 

mounted tank manufactured to the 

ASME Code of not more than 70 gallon 

water capacity for a non-liquefied Division 2.2 material with no subsidiary 

hazard.

(3) A Division 4.3 material in Packing 

Group II or III contained in a packaging having a gross capacity not exceeding 30 mL (1 ounce). 

(4) A Division 6.2 material, other 

than a Category A infectious substance, contained in human or animal 

samples (including, but not limited to, 

secreta, excreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluids, and 

body parts) being transported for research, diagnosis, investigational activities, or disease treatment or prevention, or is a biological product or 

regulated medical waste. The material 

must be contained in a combination 

packaging. For liquids, the inner packaging must be leakproof, and the outer 

422

§ 173.6 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

packaging must contain sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire 

contents of the inner packaging. For 

sharps, the inner packaging (sharps 

container) must be constructed of a 

rigid material resistant to punctures 

and securely closed to prevent leaks or 

punctures, and the outer packaging 

must be securely closed to prevent 

leaks or punctures. For solids, liquids, 

and sharps, the outer packaging must 

be a strong, tight packaging securely 

closed and secured against shifting, including relative motion between packages, within the vehicle on which it is 

being transported. 

(i) For other than a regulated medical waste, the amount of Division 6.2 

material in a combination packaging 

must conform to the following limitations:

(A) One or more inner packagings, 

each of which may not contain more 

than 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) or 0.5 L (17 ounces), 

and an outer packaging containing not 

more than 4 kg (8.8 lbs) or 4 L (1 gallon); or 

(B) A single inner packaging containing not more than 16 kg (35.2 lbs) or 

16 L (4.2 gallons) in a single outer packaging.

(ii) For a regulated medical waste, a 

combination packaging must consist of 

one or more inner packagings, each of 

which may not contain more than 4 kg 

(8.8 lbs) or 4 L (1 gallon), and an outer 

packaging containing not more than 16 

kg (35.2 lbs) or 16 L (4.2 gallons). 

(5) This section does not apply to a 

hazardous material that is self-reactive 

(see §173.124), poisonous by inhalation 

(see §173.133), or a hazardous waste. 

(b) Packaging. (1) Packagings must be 

leak tight for liquids and gases, sift 

proof for solids, and be securely closed, 

secured against shifting, and protected 

against damage. 

(2) Each material must be packaged 

in the manufacturer’s original packaging, or a packaging of equal or greater strength and integrity. 

(3) Outer packagings are not required 

for receptacles (e.g., cans and bottles) 

that are secured against shifting in 

cages, carts, bins, boxes or compartments.

(4) For gasoline, a packaging must be 

made of metal or plastic and conform 

to the requirements of this subchapter 

or to the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department of Labor contained in 29 CFR 1910.106(d)(2) or 

1926.152(a)(1).

(5) A cylinder or other pressure vessel 

containing a Division 2.1 or 2.2 material must conform to packaging, qualification, maintenance, and use requirements of this subchapter, except that 

outer packagings are not required. 

Manifolding of cylinders is authorized 

provided all valves are tightly closed. 

(c) Hazard communication. (1) A nonbulk packaging other than a cylinder 

(including a receptacle transported 

without an outer packaging) must be 

marked with a common name or proper 

shipping name to identify the material 

it contains, including the letters ‘‘RQ’’ 

if it contains a reportable quantity of a 

hazardous substance. 

(2) A bulk packaging containing a diluted mixture of a Class 9 material 

must be marked on two opposing sides 

with the four-digit identification number of the material. The identification 

number must be displayed on placards, 

orange panels or, alternatively, a white 

square-on-point configuration having 

the same outside dimensions as a 

placard (at least 273 mm (10.8 inches) 

on a side), in the manner specified in 

§172.332 (b) and (c) of this subchapter. 

(3) A DOT specification cylinder (except DOT specification 39) must be 

marked and labeled as prescribed in 

this subchapter. Each DOT-39 cylinder 

must display the markings specified in 

178.65(i).

(4) The operator of a motor vehicle 

that contains a material of trade must 

be informed of the presence of the hazardous material (including whether the 

package contains a reportable quantity) and must be informed of the requirements of this section. 

(d) Aggregate gross weight. Except for 

a material of trade authorized by paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section, the aggregate gross weight of all materials of 

trade on a motor vehicle may not exceed 200 kg (440 pounds). 

(e) Other exceptions. A material of 

trade may be transported on a motor 

vehicle under the provisions of this section with other hazardous materials 

423

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.7 

without affecting its eligibility for exceptions provided by this section. 

[Amdt. 173–259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–262, 62 FR 49566, Sept. 

22, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; Amdt. 173– 

259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 

1, 1998; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 53137, 

Aug. 14, 2002; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 68 FR 

61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 71 FR 32258, June 2, 2006; 

72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007] 

§ 173.7 Government operations and 

materials. 

(a) Hazardous materials offered for 

transportation by, for, or to the Department of Defense (DOD) of the U.S. 

Government, including commercial 

shipments pursuant to a DOD contract, 

must be packaged in accordance with 

the regulations in this subchapter or in 

packagings of equal or greater strength 

and efficiency as certified by DOD in 

accordance with the procedures prescribed by ‘‘Packaging of Hazardous 

Material, DLAD 4145.41/AR 700–143/AFJI 

24–210/NAVSUPINST 4030.55B/MCO 

4030.40B (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).’’ Hazardous materials offered 

for transportation by DOD under this 

provision may be reshipped by any 

shipper to any consignee provided the 

original packaging has not been damaged or altered in any manner. 

(1) Hazardous materials sold by the 

DOD in packagings that are not 

marked in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter may be 

shipped from DOD installations if the 

DOD certifies in writing that the packagings are equal to or greater in 

strength and efficiency than the packaging prescribed in this subchapter. 

The shipper shall obtain such a certification in duplicate for each shipment. 

He shall give one copy to the originating carrier and retain the other for 

no less than 1 year. 

(2) [Reserved] 

(b) Shipments of hazardous materials, made by or under the direction or 

supervision of the U.S. Department of 

Energy (DOE) or the Department of Defense (DOD), for the purpose of national security, and which are escorted 

by personnel specifically designated by 

or under the authority of those agencies, are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter. For transportation by a motor vehicle or a rail car, 

the escorts must be in a separate transport vehicle from the transport vehicle 

carrying the hazardous materials that 

are excepted by this paragraph. A document certifying that the shipment is 

for the purpose of national security 

must be in the possession of the person 

in charge of providing security during 

transportation.

(c) Shipments of explosive samples, 

not exceeding 1 g net weight, offered by 

and consigned to the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms (ATF) of 

the Department of the Treasury are 

not otherwise subject to the regulations in parts 110–189 of this subchapter 

when placed in a specifically designed 

multi-unit assembly packed in a strong 

outer packaging. The packaging must 

be of a type accepted by ATF as capable of precluding a propagation of any 

explosion outside the packaging. The 

second component from the outside of 

the packaging must be marked or 

tagged to indicate the presence of an 

explosive.

(d) Notwithstanding the requirements of §§173.416 and 173.417 of this 

subchapter, packagings made by or 

under the direction of the U.S. Department of Energy may be used for the 

transportation of Class 7 materials 

when evaluated, approved, and certified 

by the Department of Energy against 

packaging standards equivalent to 

those specified in 10 CFR part 71. Packages shipped in accordance with this 

paragraph shall be marked and otherwise prepared for shipment in a manner 

equivalent to that required by this subchapter for packagings approved by the 

Nuclear Regulatory Commission. 

(e) Class 1 (explosive) materials 

owned by the Department of Defense 

and packaged prior to January 1, 1990, 

in accordance with the requirements of 

this subchapter in effect at that time, 

are excepted from the marking and labeling requirements of part 172 of this 

subchapter and the packaging and 

package marking requirements of part 

178 of this subchapter, provided the 

packagings have maintained their integrity and the explosive material is 

declared as ‘‘government-owned goods 

packaged prior to January 1, 1990’’ on 

the shipping papers. In addition, packages of these materials owned by the 

Department of Defense that are 

marked and labeled in conformance 

424

§ 173.8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

with the requirements of the HMR that 

were in effect at the time they were 

originally marked and labeled are excepted from the current marking and 

labeling requirements. 

(f) The requirements of this subchapter do not apply to shipments of 

hazardous materials carried aboard an 

aircraft that is not owned by a government or engaged in carrying persons or 

property for commercial purposes, but 

is under the exclusive direction and 

control of the government for a period 

of not less than 90 days as specified in 

a written contract or lease. An aircraft 

is under the exclusive direction and 

control of a government when the government exercises responsibility for: 

(1) Approving crew members and determining they are qualified to operate 

the aircraft; 

(2) Determining the airworthiness 

and directing maintenance of the aircraft; and 

(3) Dispatching the aircraft, including the times of departure, airports to 

be used, and type and amount of cargo 

to be carried. 

[29 FR 18671, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 

FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.7, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.8 Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate 

transportation. 

(a) Non-specification bulk packagings. 

Notwithstanding requirements for 

specification packagings in subpart F 

of this part and parts 178 and 180 of this 

subchapter, a non-specification bulk 

packaging may be used for transportation of a hazardous material by an 

intrastate motor carrier until July 1, 

2000, in accordance with the provisions 

of paragraph (d) of this section. 

(b) Non-specification cargo tanks for petroleum products. Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part and 

parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a 

non-specification cargo tank motor vehicle having a capacity of less than 

13,250 L (3,500 gallons) may be used by 

an intrastate motor carrier for transportation of a flammable liquid petroleum product in accordance with the 

provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.

(c) Permanently secured non-bulk tanks 

for petroleum products. Notwithstanding

requirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part 173 and 

parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a 

non-specification metal tank permanently secured to a transport vehicle 

and protected against leakage or damage in the event of a turnover, having 

a capacity of less than 450 L (119 gallons), may be used by an intrastate 

motor carrier for transportation of a 

flammable liquid petroleum product in 

accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section. 

(d) Additional requirements. A packaging used under the provisions of 

paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of this section 

must—

(1) Be operated by an intrastate 

motor carrier and in use as a packaging for hazardous material before October 1, 1998; 

(2) Be operated in conformance with 

the requirements of the State in which 

it is authorized; 

(3) Be specifically authorized by a 

State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998, for use as a packaging for the hazardous material being 

transported;

(4) Be offered for transportation and 

transported in conformance with all 

other applicable requirements of this 

subchapter;

(5) Not be used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid, hazardous substance, hazardous waste, or a marine 

pollutant (except for gasoline); and 

(6) On and after July 1, 2000, for a 

tank authorized under paragraph (b) or 

(c) of this section, conform to all requirements in part 180 (except for 

§180.405(g)) of this subchapter in the 

same manner as required for a DOT 

specification MC 306 cargo tank motor 

vehicle.

[Amdt. 173–259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as 

amended by Amdt. 172–262, 62 FR 49567, Sept. 

22, 1997; Amdt. 173–259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 

1998; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001] 

425

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.9 

§ 173.9 Transport vehicles or freight 

containers containing lading which 

has been fumigated. 

(a) For the purpose of this section, 

not including 49 CFR part 387, a rail 

car, freight container, truck body, or 

trailer in which the lading has been fumigated with any material, or is undergoing fumigation, is a package containing a hazardous material. 

(b) No person may offer for transportation or transport a rail car, freight 

container, truck body, or trailer in 

which the lading has been fumigated or 

treated with any material, or is undergoing fumigation, unless the FUMIGANT marking specified in paragraph 

(e) of this section is prominently displayed so that it can be seen by any 

person attempting to enter the interior 

of the transport vehicle or freight container. For domestic transportation, a 

hazard warning label authorized by 

EPA under 40 CFR part 156 may be used 

as an alternative to the FUMIGANT 

marking.

(c) No person may affix or display on 

a rail car, freight container, truck 

body, or trailer the FUMIGANT marking specified in paragraph (e) of this 

section, unless the lading has been fumigated or is undergoing fumigation. 

(d) The FUMIGANT marking required by paragraph (b) of this section 

must remain on the rail car, freight 

container, truck body, or trailer until 

the rail car, freight container, truck 

body, or trailer has been completely 

ventilated either by opening the doors 

of the unit or by mechanical ventilation to ensure no harmful concentration of gas remains after fumigation 

has been completed. 

(e) FUMIGANT marking. (1) The FUMIGANT marking must consist of red 

or black letters on a white background 

that is at least 30 cm (11.8 inches) wide 

and at least 25 cm (9.8 inches) high. Except for size and color, the FUMIGANT 

marking must be as follows: 

426

§ 173.9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(2) The ‘‘*’’ shall be replaced with the 

technical name of the fumigant. 

(f) A closed cargo transport unit that 

has been fumigated is not subject to 

any other provisions of this subchapter 

if it— 

(1) Has been completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the unit or 

by mechanical ventilation after fumigation, and 

(2) Displays the FUMIGANT marking, including the date of ventilation. 


ER29DE06.002</GPH>
427

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.10 

(g) For international shipments, 

transport documents should indicate 

the date of fumigation, type and 

amount of fumigant used, and instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant, including fumigation devices. 

(h) Any person subject to the requirements of this section, solely due to the 

fumigated lading, must be informed of 

the requirements of this section and 

the safety precautions necessary to 

protect themselves and others in the 

event of an incident or accident involving the fumigated lading. 

(i) Any person who offers for transportation or transports a rail car, 

freight container, truck body or trailer 

that is subject to this subchapter solely because of the hazardous materials 

designation specified in paragraph (a) 

of this section is not subject to any requirements of this subchapter other 

than those contained in this section. 

[71 FR 78629, Dec. 29, 2006] 

§ 173.10 Tank car shipments. 

(a) Tank cars containing any 2.1 material (including a cryogenic liquid) or 

Class 3 material with a flash point 

below 38 °C (100 °F), except liquid road 

asphalt or tar, may not be offered for 

transportation unless originally consigned or subsequently reconsigned to 

parties having private-siding (see Note 

1 of this section) or to parties using 

railroad siding facilities which have 

been equipped for piping the liquid 

from tank cars to permanent storage 

tanks of sufficient capacity to receive 

contents of car. 

(b) A tank car containing any Class 2 

material must not be offered for transportation unless the car is consigned 

for delivery (see paragraph (c) of this 

section) and unloading on a private 

track (see Note 1 of this section) except 

that where no private track is available, delivery and unloading on carrier 

tracks is permitted provided the following conditions are complied with: 

(1) Any tank car of DOT-106A or 110A 

type (see §§179.300 and 179.301 of this 

subchapter) may be offered for transportation and the loaded unit tanks 

may be removed from car frame on carrier tracks, provided the shipper has 

obtained from the delivering carrier 

and filed with originating carrier, written permission (see Note 2 of this section) for such removal. The consignee 

must furnish adequately safe mechanical hoist, obtained from the carrier if 

desirable, by which the tanks shall be 

lifted from the car and deposited directly upon vehicles furnished by the 

consignee for immediate removal from 

carrier property or tanks must be lifted by adequately safe mechanical hoist 

from car directly to vessels for further 

transportation.

(c) Any tank car of other than DOT106A or 110A type (see §§179.300 and 

179.301 of this subchapter), containing 

anhydrous ammonia, liquefied hydrocarbon or liquefied petroleum gas, and 

having interior pipes of liquid and gas 

discharge valves equipped with check 

valves, may be consigned for delivery 

and unloading on carrier tracks, if the 

lading is piped directly from the car to 

permanent storage tanks of sufficient 

capacity to receive the entire contents 

of the car. Such cars may also be consigned for storage on a private track or 

on a carrier track when designated by 

the carrier for such storage. 

(d) For cars of the DOT-106A or 110A 

type (see §§179.300 and 179.301 of this 

subchapter), the tanks must be placed 

in position and attached to the car 

structure by the shipper. 

(e) Class 3 materials with a flash 

point below 38 °C (100 °F) and Division 

2.1 materials (including a cryogenic 

liquid) may not be loaded into tank 

cars on carrier property from tank 

trucks or drums. 

NOTE 1: For this purpose, a private track is 

a track outside of carrier’s right-of-way, 

yard, and terminals, and of which the carrier 

does not own either the rails, ties, roadbed 

or right-of-way; or a track or portion of a 

track which is devoted to the purpose of its 

user, either by lease or written agreement; 

in which case the lease or written agreement 

will be considered as equivalent to ownership.

NOTE 2: Carriers should give permission for 

the unloading of these containers on carrier 

tracks only where no private siding is available within reasonable trucking distance of 

final destination. The danger involved is the 

release of compressed gases due to accidental 

428

§ 173.12 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

damage to container in handling. The exposure to this danger decreases directly with 

the isolation of the unloading point. 

[29 FR 18773, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 

FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and by Amdt. 173–162, 48 

FR 10226, Mar. 10, 1983, and amended by 

Amdt. 173–180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 1984; 

Amdt. 173–207, 53 FR 38274, Sept. 29, 1988; 

Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52608, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 

FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 

51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002] 

§ 173.12 Exceptions for shipment of 

waste materials. 

(a) Open head drums. If a hazardous 

material that is a hazardous waste is 

required by this subchapter to be 

shipped in a closed head drum (i.e., a 

drum with a 7.0 cm (3 inches) or less 

bung opening) and the hazardous waste 

contains solids or semisolids that make 

its placement in a closed head drum 

impracticable, an equivalent (except 

for closure) open head drum may be 

used for the hazardous waste. 

(b) Lab packs. (1) Waste materials 

prohibited by paragraph (b)(3) of this 

section are not authorized for transport in packages authorized by this 

paragraph (b). Waste materials classed 

as Class or Division 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 

5.2, 6.1, 8, or 9 are excepted from the 

specification packaging requirements 

of this subchapter for combination 

packagings if packaged in accordance 

with this paragraph (b) and transported 

for disposal or recovery by highway, 

rail or cargo vessel. In addition, a generic description from the §172.101 Hazardous Materials Table may be used in 

place of specific chemical names, when 

two or more chemically compatible 

waste materials in the same hazard 

class are packaged in the same outside 

packaging.

(2) Combination packaging requirements:

(i) Inner packagings. The inner packagings must be either glass, not exceeding 4 L (1 gallon) rated capacity, or 

metal or plastic, not exceeding 20 L (5.3 

gallons) rated capacity. Inner packagings containing liquid must be surrounded by a chemically compatible 

absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the total liquid contents. 

(ii) Outer packaging. Each outer packaging may contain only one class of 

waste material. The following outer 

packagings are authorized except that 

Division 4.2 Packing Group I materials 

must be packaged using UN standard 

steel or plastic drums tested and 

marked to the Packing Group I performance level for liquids or solids; and 

bromine pentafluoride and bromine 

trifluoride may not be packaged using 

UN 4G fiberboard boxes: 

(A) A UN 1A2 or UN 1B2 metal drum, 

a UN 1D plywood drum, a UN 1G fiber 

drum, or a UN 1H2 plastic drum, tested 

and marked to at least the Packing 

Group III performance level for liquids 

or solids; 

(B) At a minimum, a double-walled 

UN 4G fiberboard box made out of 500 

pound burst-strength fiberboard fitted 

with a polyethylene liner at least 3 

mils (0.12 inches) thick and when filled 

during testing to 95 percent capacity 

with a solid material, successfully 

passes the tests prescribed in §§178.603 

(drop) and 178.606 (stacking), and is capable of passing the tests prescribed in 

§178.608 (vibration) to at least the 

Packing Group II performance level for 

liquids or solids; or 

(C) A UN 11G fiberboard intermediate 

bulk container (IBC) or a UN 11HH2 

composite IBC, fitted with a polyethylene liner at least 6 mils (0.24 

inches) thick, that successfully passes 

the tests prescribed in Subpart O of 

Part 178 and §178.603 to at least the 

Packing Group II performance level for 

liquids or solids; a UN 11HH2 is composed of multiple layers of encapsulated corrugated fiberboard between 

inner and outer layers of woven coated 

polypropylene.

(iii) The gross weight of each completed combination package may not 

exceed 205 kg (452 lbs). 

(3) Prohibited materials. The following 

waste materials may not be packaged 

or described under the provisions of 

this paragraph (b): a material poisonous-by-inhalation, a Division 6.1 

Packing Group I material, chloric acid, 

and oleum (fuming sulfuric acid). 

(c) Reuse of packagings. A previously 

used packaging may be reused for the 

shipment of waste material transported for disposal or recovery, not 

subject to the reconditioning and reuse 

provisions contained in §173.28 and part 

178 of this subchapter, under the following conditions: 

429

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.12 

(1) Except as authorized by this paragraph, the waste must be packaged in 

accordance with this part and offered 

for transportation in accordance with 

the requirements of this subchapter. 

(2) Transportation is performed by 

highway only. 

(3) A package is not offered for transportation less than 24 hours after it is 

finally closed for transportation, and 

each package is inspected for leakage 

and is found to be free from leaks immediately prior to being offered for 

transportation.

(4) Each package is loaded by the 

shipper and unloaded by the consignee, 

unless the motor carrier is a private or 

contract carrier. 

(5) The packaging may be used only 

once under this paragraph and may not 

be used again for shipment of hazardous materials except in accordance 

with §173.28. 

(d) Technical names for n.o.s. descriptions. The requirements for the inclusion of technical names for n.o.s. descriptions on shipping papers and package markings, §§172.203 and 172.301 of 

this subchapter, respectively, do not 

apply to packages prepared in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, 

except that packages containing materials meeting the definition of a hazardous substance must be described as 

required in §172.203 of this subchapter 

and marked as required in §172.324 of 

this subchapter. 

(e) Segregation requirements. Waste

materials packaged according to paragraph (b) of this section and transported in conformance with this paragraph (e) are not subject to the segregation requirements in §§174.81(d), 

176.83(b), and 177.848(d) if blocked and 

braced in such a manner that they are 

separated from incompatible materials 

by a minimum horizontal distance of 

1.2 m (4 feet) and the packages are 

loaded at least 100 mm (4 inches) off 

the floor of the freight container, unit 

load device, transport vehicle, or rail 

car. The following conditions specific 

to incompatible materials also apply: 

(1) General restrictions. The freight 

container, unit load device, transport 

vehicle, or rail car may not contain 

any Class 1 explosives, Class 7 radioactive material, or uncontainerized 

hazardous materials; 

(2) Waste cyanides and waste acids. For

waste cyanides stored, loaded, and 

transported with waste acids: 

(i) The cyanide or a cyanide mixture 

may not exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net 

weight per inner packaging and may 

not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) net weight 

per outer packaging; a cyanide solution 

may not exceed 2 L (0.6 gallon) per 

inner packaging and may not exceed 10 

L (3.0 gallons) per outer packaging; and 

(ii) The acids must be packaged in 

lab packs in accordance paragraph (b) 

of this section or in single packagings 

authorized for the acid in Column (8B) 

of the §172.101 Hazardous Materials 

Table of this subchapter not to exceed 

208 L (55 gallons) capacity. 

(3) Waste Division 4.2 materials and 

waste Class 8 liquids. For waste Division 

4.2 materials stored, loaded, and transported with waste Class 8 liquids: 

(i) The Division 4.2 material may not 

exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net weight per 

inner packaging and may not exceed 10 

kg (22 pounds) net weight per outer 

packaging; and 

(ii) The Class 8 liquid must be packaged in lab packs in accordance with 

paragraph (b) of this section or in single packagings authorized for the material in Column (8B) of the §172.101 

Hazardous Materials Table of this subchapter not to exceed 208 L (55 gallons) 

capacity.

(4) Waste Division 6.1 Packing Group I, 

Hazard Zone A material and waste Class 

3, Class 8 liquids, or Division 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 

5.1 and 5.2 materials. For waste Division 

6.1 Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A 

material stored, loaded, and transported with waste Class 8 liquids, or 

Division 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 5.2 materials: 

(i) The Division 6.1 Packing Group I, 

Hazard Zone A material must be packaged in accordance with §173.226(c) of 

this subchapter and overpacked in a 

UN standard steel or plastic drum 

meeting the Packing Group I performance level; 

(ii) The Class 8 liquid must be packaged in lab packs in accordance with 

paragraph (b) of this section or in single packagings authorized for the material in Column (8B) of the §172.101 

Hazardous Materials Table of this subchapter not to exceed 208 L (55 gallons) 

capacity.

430

§ 173.13 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(iii) The Division 4.2 material may 

not exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net weight 

per inner packaging and may not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) net weight per 

outer packaging; 

(iv) The Division 5.1 materials may 

not exceed 2 kg (4.4 pounds) net weight 

per inner packaging and may not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) net weight per 

outer packaging. The aggregate net 

weight per freight container, unit load 

device, transport vehicle, or rail car 

may not exceed 100 kg (220 pounds); 

(v) The Division 5.2 material may not 

exceed 1 kg (2.2 pounds) net weight per 

inner packaging and may not exceed 5 

kg (11 pounds) net weight per outer 

packaging. Organic Peroxide, Type B 

material may not exceed 0.5 kg (1.1 

pounds) net weight per inner packaging 

and may not exceed 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds) 

net weight per outer packaging. The 

aggregate net weight per freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle, or rail car may not exceed 50 kg 

(110 pounds). 

(f) Additional exceptions. Lab packs 

conforming to the requirements of this 

section are not subject to the following:

(1) The overpack marking and labeling requirements in §173.25(a)(2) of this 

subchapter when secured to a pallet 

with shrink-wrap or stretch-wrap except that labels representative of each 

Hazard Class or Division in the overpack must be visibly displayed on two 

opposing sides. 

(2) The restrictions for overpacks 

containing Class 8, Packing Group I 

material and Division 5.1, Packing 

Group I material in §173.25(a)(5) of this 

subchapter. These waste materials may 

be overpacked with other materials. 

(g) Household waste. Household waste, 

as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, 

is not subject to the requirements of 

this subchapter when transported in 

accordance with applicable state, local, 

or tribal requirements. 

(f) Household waste. Household waste, 

as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, 

is not subject to the requirements of 

this subchapter when transported in 

accordance with applicable state, local, 

or tribal requirements. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173– 

138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 65 FR 50460, 

Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 

48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 70 FR 3309, Jan. 24, 2005; 

73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 

2009; 75 FR 27214, May 14, 2010] 

§ 173.13 Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and Classes 8 and 9 materials. 

(a) A Class 3, 8 or 9, or Division 4.1, 

4.2, 4.3, 5.1, or 6.1 material is excepted 

from the labeling (except for the 

CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label), 

placarding and segregation requirements of this subchapter if prepared for 

transportation in accordance with the 

requirements of this section. A material that meets the definition of a material poisonous by inhalation may not 

be offered for transportation or transported under provisions of this section. 

(b) A hazardous material conforming 

to the requirements of this section 

may be transported by motor vehicle 

and rail car. In addition, packages prepared in accordance with this section 

may be transported by aircraft under 

the following conditions: 

(1) Cargo-only aircraft. Only hazardous 

materials permitted to be transported 

aboard either a passenger or cargo-only 

aircraft by column (9A) or (9B) of the 

Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 

of this subchapter are authorized 

aboard cargo-only aircraft. 

(2) Passenger carrying aircraft. Only 

hazardous materials permitted to be 

transported aboard a passenger aircraft 

by column (9A) of the Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 of this subchapter are authorized aboard passenger aircraft. The completed package, assembled as for transportation, 

must be successfully tested in accordance with part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group I level. A hazardous 

material which meets the definition of 

a Division 5.1 (oxidizer) at the Packing 

Group I level in accordance with 

§173.127(b)(1)(i) of this subchapter may 

not be transported aboard a passenger 

aircraft.

(3) Packages offered for transportation aboard either passenger or 

431

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.21 

cargo-only aircraft must meet the requirements for transportation by aircraft specified in §173.27 of this subchapter.

(c) A hazardous material permitted 

by paragraph (a) of this section must 

be packaged as follows: 

(1) For liquids: 

(i) The hazardous material must be 

placed in a tightly closed glass, plastic 

or metal inner packaging with a maximum capacity not exceeding 1.2 L. 

Sufficient outage must be provided 

such that the inner packaging will not 

become liquid full at 55 °C (130 °F). The 

net quantity (measured at 20 °C (68 °F))

of liquid in any inner packaging may 

not exceed 1 L. For transportation by 

aircraft, the net quantity in one package may not exceed the quantity specified in columns (9A) or (9B), as appropriate.

(ii) The inner packaging must be 

placed in a hermetically sealed barrier 

bag which is impervious to the lading, 

and then wrapped in a non-reactive absorbent material in sufficient quantity 

to completely absorb the contents of 

the inner packaging. Alternatively, the 

inner packaging may first be wrapped 

in a non-reactive absorbent material 

and then placed in the hermetically 

sealed barrier bag. The combination of 

inner packaging, absorbent material, 

and bag must be placed in a snugly fitting metal can. 

(iii) The metal can must be securely 

closed. For liquids that are in Division 

4.2 or 4.3, the metal can must be hermetically sealed. For Division 4.2 materials in Packing Group I, the metal 

can must be tested in accordance with 

part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. 

(iv) The metal can must be placed in 

a fiberboard box that is placed in a hermetically sealed barrier bag which is 

impervious to the lading. 

(v) The intermediate packaging must 

be placed inside a securely closed, 

outer packaging conforming to 

§173.201. 

(vi) Not more than four intermediate 

packagings are permitted in an outer 

packaging.

(2) For solids: 

(i) The hazardous material must be 

placed in a tightly closed glass, plastic 

or metal inner packaging. The net 

quantity of material in any inner packaging may not exceed 2.85kg (6.25 

pounds). For transportation by aircraft, the net quantity in one package 

may not exceed the quantity specified 

in columns (9A) or (9B), as appropriate. 

(ii) The inner packaging must be 

placed in a hermetically sealed barrier 

bag which is impervious to the lading. 

(iii) The barrier bag and its contents 

must be placed in a fiberboard box that 

is placed in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.

(iv) The intermediate packaging 

must be placed inside an outer packaging conforming to §173.211. 

(v) Not more than four intermediate 

packagings are permitted in an outer 

packaging.

(d) The outside of the package must 

be marked, in association with the 

proper shipping name, with the statement: ‘‘This package conforms to 49 

CFR 173.13.’’ 

[Amdt. 173–253, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996, as 

amended at 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 

45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 3309, Jan. 24, 2005; 

71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 75 FR 27215, May 

14, 2010] 

Subpart B—Preparation of Hazardous Materials for Transportation 

§ 173.21 Forbidden materials and packages. 

Unless otherwise provided in this 

subchapter, the offering for transportation or transportation of the following is forbidden: 

(a) Materials that are designated 

‘‘Forbidden’’ in Column 3 of the 

§172.101 table. 

(b) Forbidden explosives as defined in 

§173.54 of this part. 

(c) Electrical devices, such as batteries and battery-powered devices, 

which are likely to create sparks or 

generate a dangerous evolution of heat, 

unless packaged in a manner which 

precludes such an occurrence. 

(d) For carriage by aircraft, any 

package which has a magnetic field of 

more than 0.00525 gauss measured at 4.5 

m (15 feet) from any surface of the 

package.

(e) A material in the same packaging, freight container, or overpack 

432

§ 173.21 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

with another material, the mixing of 

which is likely to cause a dangerous 

evolution of heat, or flammable or poisonous gases or vapors, or to produce 

corrosive materials. 

(f) A package containing a material 

which is likely to decompose with a 

self-accelerated decomposition temperature (SADT) of 50 °C (122 °F) or 

less, or polymerize at a temperature of 

54 °C (130 °F) or less with an evolution 

of a dangerous quantity of heat or gas 

when decomposing or polymerizing, unless the material is stabilized or inhibited in a manner to preclude such evolution. The SADT may be determined 

by any of the test methods described in 

Part II of the UN Manual of Tests and 

Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(1) A package meeting the criteria of 

paragraph (f) of this section may be required to be shipped under controlled 

temperature conditions. The control 

temperature and emergency temperature for a package shall be as specified 

in the table in this paragraph based 

upon the SADT of the material. The 

control temperature is the temperature 

above which a package of the material 

may not be offered for transportation 

or transported. The emergency temperature is the temperature at which, 

due to imminent danger, emergency 

measures must be initiated. 

§ 173.21 TABLE: METHOD OF DETERMINING

CONTROL AND EMERGENCY TEMPERATURE.

SADT 1 Control tempera- tures

Emergency temperature

SADT ≤ 20 °C (68 

°F).

20 °C (36 °F)

below SADT.

10 °C (18 °F)

below SADT. 

20 °C (68 °F) < 

SADT ≤ 35 °C

(95 °F).

15 °C (27 °F)

below SADT.

10 °C (18 °F)

below SADT. 

35 °C (95 °F) < 

SADT ≤ 50 °C

(122 °F).

10 °C (18 °F)

below SADT.

5 °C (9 °F) below 

SADT.

50 °C (122 °F) < 

SADT.

(2) (2)

1Self-accelerating decomposition temperature. 

2Temperature control not required. 

(2) For self-reactive materials listed 

in §173.224(b) table control and emergency temperatures, where required 

are shown in Columns 5 and 6, respectively. For organic peroxides listed in 

The Organic Peroxides Table in §173.225 

control and emergency temperatures, 

where required, are shown in Columns 

7a and 7b, respectively. 

(3) Refrigeration may be used as a 

means of stabilization only when approved by the Associate Administrator. 

Approvals issued by the Bureau of Explosives are no longer valid (see §171.19 

of this subchapter). Methods of stabilization approved by the Associate 

Administrator are as follows: 

(i) For highway transportation: 

(A) A material meeting the criteria 

of this paragraph (f) may be transported only in a transport vehicle, 

freight container, or motor vehicle 

equipped with a mechanical refrigeration unit, or loaded with a consumable 

refrigerant, capable of maintaining the 

inside temperature of the hazardous 

material at or below the control temperature required for the material during transportation. 

(B) Each package containing a material meeting the criteria of this paragraph (f) must be loaded and maintained at or below the control temperature required for the material. The 

temperature of the material must be 

determined by appropriate means and 

entered on a written record at the time 

the packaging is loaded. 

(C) The vehicle operator shall monitor the inside temperature of the 

transport vehicle, freight container, or 

motor vehicle and enter that temperature on a written record at the time 

the package is loaded and thereafter at 

intervals not exceeding two hours. Alternatively, a transport vehicle, freight 

container, or motor vehicle may be 

equipped with a visible or audible 

warning device that activates when the 

inside temperature of the transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle exceeds the control temperature required for the material. The warning 

device must be readily visible or audible, as appropriate, from the vehicle 

operator’s seat in the vehicle. 

(D) The carrier shall advise the vehicle operator of the emergency temperature for the material, and provide the 

vehicle operator with written procedures that must be followed to assure 

maintenance of the control temperature inside the transport vehicle, 

freight container, or motor vehicle. 

The written procedures must include 

433

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.22 

instructions for the vehicle operator on 

actions to take if the inside temperature exceeds the control temperature 

and approaches or reaches the emergency temperature for the material. In 

addition, the written temperature-control procedures must identify enroute 

points where the consumable refrigerant may be procured, or where repairs to, or replacement of, the mechanical refrigeration unit may be accomplished.

(E) The vehicle operator shall maintain the written temperature-control 

procedures, and the written record of 

temperature measurements specified in 

paragraph (f)(3)(i)(C) of this section, if 

applicable, in the same manner as specified in §177.817 of this subchapter for 

shipping papers. 

(F) If the control temperature is 

maintained by use of a consumable refrigerant (e.g., dry ice or liquid nitrogen), the quantity of consumable refrigerant must be sufficient to maintain the control temperature for twice 

the average transit time under normal 

conditions of transportation. 

(G) A material that has a control 

temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) or higher 

may be transported by common carrier. A material that has a control 

temperature below 40 °C (104 °F) must 

be transported by a private or contract 

carrier.

(ii) For transportation by vessel, 

shipments are authorized in accordance 

with the control temperature requirements in Chapter 7.7 of the IMDG Code 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(g) Packages which give off a flammable gas or vapor, released from a 

material not otherwise subject to this 

subchapter, likely to create a flammable mixture with air in a transport 

vehicle.

(h) Packages containing materials 

(other than those classed as explosive) 

which will detonate in a fire. 

(1) For purposes of this paragraph, 

‘‘detonate’’ means an explosion in 

which the shock wave travels through 

the material at a speed greater than 

the speed of sound. 

(2) When tests are required to evaluate the performance of a package under 

the provisions of this paragraph, the 

testing must be done or approved by 

one of the agencies specified in §173.56. 

(i) Except for a package containing a 

lighter design sample that meets the 

requirements of §173.308(b)(2), a package containing a lighter (see §171.8 of 

this subchapter) containing a Division 

2.1 material, of a design that has not 

been examined and successfully tested 

by an authorized person under the criteria specified in §173.308(a)(4) or, a 

lighter design containing a Class 3 material, that has not been approved by 

the Associate Administrator. 

(j) An organic peroxide of the ‘‘ketone peroxide’’ category which contains more than 9 percent available oxygen as calculated using the equation 

in §173.128(a)(4)(ii). The category, ketone peroxide, includes, but is not limited to: 

Acetyl acetone peroxide 

Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) 

Diacetone alcohol peroxides 

Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s) 

Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) 

Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s) 

(k) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, including subpart C of part 171 and 175.10(a)(2) of this 

subchapter, an oxygen generator 

(chemical) as cargo on a passenger-carrying aircraft. This prohibition does 

not apply to an oxygen generator for 

medical or personal use of a passenger 

that meets the requirements of 

§175.10(a)(7) of this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.21, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.22 Shipper’s responsibility. 

(a) Except as otherwise provided in 

this part, a person may offer a hazardous material for transportation in a 

packaging or container required by 

this part only in accordance with the 

following:

(1) The person shall class and describe the hazardous material in accordance with parts 172 and 173 of this 

subchapter, and 

(2) The person shall determine that 

the packaging or container is an authorized packaging, including part 173 

requirements, and that it has been 

manufactured, assembled, and marked 

in accordance with: 

434

§ 173.22a 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(i) Section 173.7(a) and parts 173, 178, 

or 179 of this subchapter; 

(ii) A specification of the Department 

in effect at the date of manufacture of 

the packaging or container; 

(iii) National or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), as authorized in §173.24(d)(2); 

(iv) An approval issued under this 

subchapter; or 

(v) An exemption or special permit 

issued under subchapter A of this chapter.

(3) In making the determination 

under paragraph (a)(2) of this section, 

the person may accept: 

(i) Except for the marking on the 

bottom of a metal or plastic drum with 

a capacity over 100 L which has been 

reconditioned, remanufactured or otherwise converted, the manufacturer’s 

certification, specification, approval, 

or exemption or special permit marking (see §§178.2 and 179.1 of this subchapter); or 

(ii) With respect to cargo tanks provided by a carrier, the manufacturer’s 

identification plate or a written certification of specification or exemption 

or special permit provided by the carrier.

(4) For a DOT Specification or UN 

standard packaging subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, a person must perform all 

functions necessary to bring the package into compliance with parts 173 and 

178 of this subchapter, as identified by 

the packaging manufacturer or subsequent distributor (for example, applying closures consistent with the manufacturer’s closure instructions) in accordance with §178.2 of this subchapter. 

A person must maintain a copy of the 

manufacturer’s notification, including 

closure instructions (see §178.2(c) of 

this subchapter) unless permanently 

embossed or printed on the packaging. 

When applicable, a person must maintain a copy of any supporting documentation for an equivalent level of 

performance under the selective testing variation in §178.601(g)(1) of this 

subchapter. A copy of the notification, 

unless permanently embossed or printed on the packaging, and supporting 

documentation, when applicable, must 

be made available for inspection by a 

representative of the Department upon 

request for the time period of the packaging’s periodic retest date, i.e., every

12 months for single or composite packagings and every 24 months for combination packagings. 

(b) No person may offer a motor carrier any hazardous material specified 

in 49 CFR 385.403 unless that motor carrier holds a safety permit issued by the 

Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration.

(c) Prior to each shipment of fissile 

radioactive materials, and Type B or 

highway route controlled quantity 

packages of radioactive materials (see 

§173.403), the shipper shall notify the 

consignee of the dates of shipment and 

expected arrival. The shipper shall also 

notify each consignee of any special 

loading/unloading instructions prior to 

his first shipment. For any shipment of 

irradiated reactor fuel, the shipper 

shall provide physical protection in 

compliance with a plan established 

under:

(1) Requirements prescribed by the 

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 

or

(2) Equivalent requirements approved 

by the Associate Administrator. 

[Amdt. 173–100, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.22, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.22a Use of packagings authorized 

under special permits. 

(a) Except as provided in paragraph 

(b) of this section, no person may offer 

a hazardous material for transportation in a packaging the use of which 

is dependent upon an exemption or special permit issued under subpart B of 

part 107 of this title, unless that person 

is the holder of or a party to the exemption or special permit. 

(b) If an exemption or special permit 

authorizes the use of a packaging for 

the transportation of a hazardous material by any person or class of persons 

other than or in addition to the holder 

of the exemption or special permit, 

that person or a member of that class 

of persons may use the packaging for 

the purposes authorized in the exemption or special permit subject to the 

435

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.24 

terms specified therein. Copies of exemptions and special permits may be 

obtained by accessing the Hazardous 

Materials Safety Web site at http://

hazmat.dot.gov/specialpermitslindex.htm

or by writing to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, U.S. Department of Transportation, 

East Building, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, 

SE., Washington, DC 20590–0001, Attention: Records Center. 

(c) When an exemption or special permit issued to a person who offers a hazardous material contains requirements 

that apply to a carrier of the hazardous 

material, the offeror shall furnish a 

copy of the current exemption or special permit to the carrier before or at 

the time a shipment is tendered. 

[70 FR 73165, Dec. 9, 2005, as amended at 72 

FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007] 

§ 173.23 Previously authorized packaging. 

(a) When the regulations specify a 

packaging with a specification marking prefix of ‘‘DOT,’’ a packaging 

marked prior to January 1, 1970, with 

the prefix of ‘‘ICC’’ may be used in its 

place if the packaging otherwise conforms to applicable specification requirements.

(b) [Reserved] 

(c) After July 2, 1982, a seamless aluminum cylinder manufactured in conformance with and for use under DOT 

special permit (SP) or exemption (E) 

6498, 7042, 8107, 8364 or 8422 may be continued in use if marked before or at the 

time of the next retest with either the 

specification identification ‘‘3AL’’ immediately above the special permit or 

exemption number, or the DOT mark 

(e.g., DOT 3AL 1800) in proximity to 

the special permit or exemption marking.

(d) Cylinders (spheres) manufactured 

and marked under DOT special permit 

(SP) or exemption (E) 6616 prior to January 1, 1983, may be continued in use if 

marked before or at the time of the 

next retest with the specification identification ‘‘4BA’’ near the special permit or exemption marking. 

(e) After October 1, 1984, cylinders 

manufactured for use under special permit (SP) or exemption (E) 6668 or 8404 

may be continued in use, and must be 

marked ‘‘DOT-4LXXXYY’’ (XXX to be 

replaced by the service pressure, YY to 

be replaced by the letters ‘‘AL’’, if applicable) in compliance with Specification 4L (§178.57 of this subchapter) on 

or before January 1, 1986. The ‘‘DOT4LXXXYY’’ must appear in proximity 

to other required special permit or exemption markings. 

(f) An MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle must conform to structural integrity requirements in §178.337–3 or to 

corresponding requirements in effect at 

the time of manufacture. 

(g) A non-bulk packaging manufactured, tested, marked, and certified on 

or before September 30, 1996, in accordance with the applicable provisions of 

subparts L and M of part 178 of this 

subchapter in effect on September 30, 

1995, may be used as authorized by this 

subchapter if the packaging conforms 

to all requirements applicable at the 

time of manufacture. In addition, such 

a packaging may be reused as authorized by §173.28 without a nominal 

thickness marking, if it conforms to 

the minimum thickness criteria prescribed in §173.28(b)(4). 

(h) An exemption packaging or shipping paper that is permanently marked 

‘‘DOT-E’’ prior to October 1, 2007, may 

continue in use as long as the exemption or special permit remains valid, 

unless otherwise specified in the exemption or special permit. 

[Amdt. 173–3, 33 FR 14921, Oct. 4, 1968] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.23, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.24 General requirements for 

packagings and packages. 

(a) Applicability. Except as otherwise 

provided in this subchapter, the provisions of this section apply to— 

(1) Bulk and non-bulk packagings; 

(2) New packagings and packagings 

which are reused; and 

(3) Specification and non-specification packagings. 

(b) Each package used for the shipment of hazardous materials under this 

subchapter shall be designed, constructed, maintained, filled, its contents so limited, and closed, so that 

under conditions normally incident to 

transportation—

436

§ 173.24 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(1) Except as otherwise provided in 

this subchapter, there will be no identifiable (without the use of instruments) 

release of hazardous materials to the 

environment;

(2) The effectiveness of the package 

will not be substantially reduced; for 

example, impact resistance, strength, 

packaging compatibility, etc. must be 

maintained for the minimum and maximum temperatures, changes in humidity and pressure, and shocks, loadings 

and vibrations, normally encountered 

during transportation; 

(3) There will be no mixture of gases 

or vapors in the package which could, 

through any credible spontaneous increase of heat or pressure, significantly 

reduce the effectiveness of the packaging;

(4) There will be no hazardous material residue adhering to the outside of 

the package during transport. 

(c) Authorized packagings. A packaging is authorized for a hazardous material only if— 

(1) The packaging is prescribed or 

permitted for the hazardous material 

in a packaging section specified for 

that material in Column 8 of the 

§172.101 table and conforms to applicable requirements in the special provisions of Column 7 of the §172.101 table 

and, for specification packagings (but 

not including UN standard packagings 

manufactured outside the United 

States), the specification requirements 

in parts 178 and 179 of this subchapter; 

or

(2) The packaging is permitted under, 

and conforms to, provisions contained 

in subparts B or C of part 171 of this 

subchapter or §§173.3, 173.4, 173.4a, 

173.4b, 173.5, 173.5a, 173.6, 173.7, 173.8, 

173.27, or §176.11 of this subchapter. 

(d) Specification packagings and UN 

standard packagings manufactured outside the U.S.—(1) Specification packagings. A specification packaging, including a UN standard packaging manufactured in the United States, must 

conform in all details to the applicable 

specification or standard in part 178 or 

part 179 of this subchapter. 

(2) UN standard packagings manufactured outside the United States. A UN 

standard packaging manufactured outside the United States, in accordance 

with national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), may be imported and used 

and is considered to be an authorized 

packaging under the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, subject to 

the following conditions and limitations:

(i) The packaging fully conforms to 

applicable provisions in the UN Recommendations and the requirements of 

this subpart, including reuse provisions;

(ii) The packaging is capable of passing the prescribed tests in part 178 of 

this subchapter applicable to that 

standard; and 

(iii) The competent authority of the 

country of manufacture provides reciprocal treatment for UN standard packagings manufactured in the U.S. 

(e) Compatibility. (1) Even though 

certain packagings are specified in this 

part, it is, nevertheless, the responsibility of the person offering a hazardous material for transportation to 

ensure that such packagings are compatible with their lading. This particularly applies to corrosivity, permeability, softening, premature aging and 

embrittlement.

(2) Packaging materials and contents 

must be such that there will be no significant chemical or galvanic reaction 

between the materials and contents of 

the package. 

(3) Plastic packagings and receptacles. (i) Plastic used in packagings 

and receptacles must be of a type compatible with the lading and may not be 

permeable to an extent that a hazardous condition is likely to occur during transportation, handling or refilling.

(ii) Each plastic packaging or receptacle which is used for liquid hazardous 

materials must be capable of withstanding without failure the procedure 

specified in appendix B of this part 

(‘‘Procedure for Testing Chemical Compatibility and Rate of Permeation in 

Plastic Packagings and Receptacles’’). 

The procedure specified in appendix B 

of this part must be performed on each 

plastic packaging or receptacle used 

for Packing Group I materials. The 

maximum rate of permeation of hazardous lading through or into the plastic packaging or receptacles may not 

437

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.24 

exceed 0.5 percent for materials meeting the definition of a Division 6.1 material according to §173.132 and 2.0 percent for other hazardous materials, 

when subjected to a temperature no 

lower than— 

(A) 18 °C (64 °F) for 180 days in accordance with Test Method 1 in appendix B of this part; 

(B) 50 °C (122 °F) for 28 days in accordance with Test Method 2 in appendix B 

of this part; or 

(C) 60 °C (140 °F) for 14 days in accordance with Test Method 3 in appendix B 

of this part. 

(iii) Alternative procedures or rates 

of permeation are permitted if they 

yield a level of safety equivalent to or 

greater than that provided by paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section and are 

specifically approved by the Associate 

Administrator.

(4) Mixed contents. Hazardous materials may not be packed or mixed together in the same outer packaging 

with other hazardous or nonhazardous 

materials if such materials are capable 

of reacting dangerously with each 

other and causing— 

(i) Combustion or dangerous evolution of heat; 

(ii) Evolution of flammable, poisonous, or asphyxiant gases; or 

(iii) Formation of unstable or corrosive materials. 

(5) Packagings used for solids, which 

may become liquid at temperatures 

likely to be encountered during transportation, must be capable of containing the hazardous material in the 

liquid state. 

(f) Closures. (1) Closures on packagings shall be so designed and closed 

that under conditions (including the effects of temperature, pressure and vibration) normally incident to transportation—

(i) Except as provided in paragraph 

(g) of this section, there is no identifiable release of hazardous materials to 

the environment from the opening to 

which the closure is applied; and 

(ii) The closure is leakproof and secured against loosening. For air transport, stoppers, corks or other such friction closures must be held in place by 

positive means. 

(2) Except as otherwise provided in 

this subchapter, a closure (including 

gaskets or other closure components, if 

any) used on a specification packaging 

must conform to all applicable requirements of the specification and must be 

closed in accordance with information, 

as applicable, provided by the manufacturer’s notification required by §178.2 

of this subchapter. 

(g) Venting. Venting of packagings, to 

reduce internal pressure which may develop by the evolution of gas from the 

contents, is permitted only when— 

(1) Except for shipments of cryogenic 

liquids as specified in §173.320(c) and of 

carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), transportation by aircraft is not involved; 

(2) Except as otherwise provided in 

this subchapter, the evolved gases are 

not poisonous, likely to create a flammable mixture with air or be an asphyxiant under normal conditions of 

transportation;

(3) The packaging is designed so as to 

preclude an unintentional release of 

hazardous materials from the receptacle;

(4) For bulk packagings, other than 

IBCs, venting is authorized for the specific hazardous material by a special 

provision in the §172.101 table or by the 

applicable bulk packaging specification 

in part 178 of this subchapter; and 

(5) Intermediate bulk packagings 

(IBCs) may be vented when required to 

reduce internal pressure that may develop by the evolution of gas subject to 

the requirements of paragraphs (g)(1) 

through (g)(3) of this section. The IBC 

must be of a type that has successfully 

passed (with the vent in place) the applicable design qualification tests with 

no release of hazardous material. 

(h) Outage and filling limits—(1) General. When filling packagings and receptacles for liquids, sufficient ullage 

(outage) must be left to ensure that 

neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging or receptacle will 

occur as a result of an expansion of the 

liquid caused by temperatures likely to 

be encountered during transportation. 

Requirements for outage and filling 

limits for non-bulk and bulk packagings are specified in §§173.24a(d) and 

173.24b(a), respectively. 

(2) Compressed gases and cryogenic liquids. Filling limits for compressed 

438

§ 173.24a 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

gases and cryogenic liquids are specified in §§173.301 through 173.306 for cylinders and §§173.314 through 173.319 for 

bulk packagings. 

(i) Air transportation. Except as provided in subpart C of part 171 of this 

subchapter, packages offered or intended for transportation by aircraft 

must conform to the general requirements for transportation by aircraft in 

§173.27. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52610, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 

2, 1991; 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173– 

238, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173–241, 

59 FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–242, 60 

FR 26805, May 18, 1995; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 

2001; 66 FR 45379, 81, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45032, 

July 31, 2003; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 

76154, Dec. 20, 2004; 72 FR 25176, May 3, 2007; 

73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 

2009]

§ 173.24a Additional general requirements for non-bulk packagings and 

packages. 

(a) Packaging design. Except as provided in §172.312 of this subchapter: 

(1) Inner packaging closures. A combination packaging containing liquid 

hazardous materials must be packed so 

that closures on inner packagings are 

upright.

(2) Friction. The nature and thickness 

of the outer packaging must be such 

that friction during transportation is 

not likely to generate an amount of 

heat sufficient to alter dangerously the 

chemical stability of the contents. 

(3) Securing and cushioning. Inner

packagings of combination packagings 

must be so packed, secured and cushioned to prevent their breakage or 

leakage and to control their shifting 

within the outer packaging under conditions normally incident to transportation. Cushioning material must not 

be capable of reacting dangerously 

with the contents of the inner packagings or having its protective properties significantly weakened in the 

event of leakage. 

(4) Metallic devices. Nails, staples and 

other metallic devices shall not protrude into the interior of the outer 

packaging in such a manner as to be 

likely to damage inner packagings or 

receptacles.

(5) Vibration. Each non-bulk package 

must be capable of withstanding, without rupture or leakage, the vibration 

test procedure specified in §178.608 of 

this subchapter. 

(b) Non-bulk packaging filling limits. (1)

A single or composite non-bulk packaging may be filled with a liquid hazardous material only when the specific 

gravity of the material does not exceed 

that marked on the packaging, or a 

specific gravity of 1.2 if not marked, 

except as follows: 

(i) A Packing Group I packaging may 

be used for a Packing Group II material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, or 1.5 times the 

specific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all the performance 

criteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity material; 

(ii) A Packing Group I packaging 

may be used for a Packing Group III 

material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 2.7, or 2.25 times 

the specific gravity marked on the 

packaging, provided all the performance criteria can still be met with the 

higher specific gravity material; and 

(iii) A Packing Group II packaging 

may be used for a Packing Group III 

material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, or 1.5 times 

the specific gravity marked on the 

packaging, provided all the performance criteria can still be met with the 

higher specific gravity material. 

(2) Except as otherwise provided in 

this section, a non-bulk packaging may 

not be filled with a hazardous material 

to a gross mass greater than the maximum gross mass marked on the packaging.

(3) A single or composite non-bulk 

packaging which is tested and marked 

for liquid hazardous materials may be 

filled with a solid hazardous material 

to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, 

or 1.2 if not marked. In addition: 

(i) A single or composite non-bulk 

packaging which is tested and marked 

for Packing Group I liquid hazardous 

materials may be filled with a solid 

Packing Group II hazardous material 

439

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.24a 

to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on 

the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked. 

(ii) A single or composite non-bulk 

packaging which is tested and marked 

for Packing Group I liquid hazardous 

materials may be filled with a solid 

Packing Group III hazardous material 

to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 2.25, multiplied by the specific gravity marked 

on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked. 

(iii) A single or composite non-bulk 

packaging which is tested and marked 

for Packing Group II liquid hazardous 

materials may be filled with a solid 

Packing Group III hazardous material 

to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on 

the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked. 

(4) Packagings tested as prescribed in 

§178.605 of this subchapter and marked 

with the hydrostatic test pressure as 

prescribed in §178.503(a)(5) of this subchapter may be used for liquids only 

when the vapor pressure of the liquid 

conforms to one of the following: 

(i) The vapor pressure must be such 

that the total pressure in the packaging (i.e., the vapor pressure of the 

liquid plus the partial pressure of air or 

other inert gases, less 100 kPa (15 psia)) 

at 55 °C (131 °F), determined on the 

basis of a maximum degree of filling in 

accordance with paragraph (d) of this 

section and a filling temperature of 15 

°C (59 °F)), will not exceed two-thirds of 

the marked test pressure; 

(ii) The vapor pressure at 50 °C (122 

°F) must be less than four-sevenths of 

the sum of the marked test pressure 

plus 100 kPa (15 psia); or 

(iii) The vapor pressure at 55 °C (131 

°F) must be less than two-thirds of the 

sum of the marked test pressure plus 

100 kPa (15 psia). 

(5) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of a package after 

filling.

(c) Mixed contents. (1) An outer nonbulk packaging may contain more than 

one hazardous material only when— 

(i) The inner and outer packagings 

used for each hazardous material conform to the relevant packaging sections of this part applicable to that 

hazardous material; 

(ii) The package as prepared for shipment meets the performance tests prescribed in part 178 of this subchapter 

for the packing group indicating the 

highest order of hazard for the hazardous materials contained in the 

package;

(iii) Corrosive materials (except 

ORM-D) in bottles are further packed 

in securely closed inner receptacles before packing in outer packagings; and 

(iv) For transportation by aircraft, 

the total net quantity does not exceed 

the lowest permitted maximum net 

quantity per package as shown in Column 9a or 9b, as appropriate, of the 

§172.101 table. The permitted maximum 

net quantity must be calculated in 

kilograms if a package contains both a 

liquid and a solid. 

(2) A packaging containing inner 

packagings of Division 6.2 materials 

may not contain other hazardous materials except— 

(i) Refrigerants, such as dry ice or 

liquid nitrogen, as authorized under 

the HMR; 

(ii) Anticoagulants used to stabilize 

blood or plasma; or 

(iii) Small quantities of Class 3, Class 

8, Class 9, or other materials in Packing Groups II or III used to stabilize or 

prevent degradation of the sample, provided the quantity of such materials 

does not exceed 30 mL (1 ounce) or 30 g 

(1 ounce) in each inner packaging. The 

maximum quantity in an outer package, including a hazardous material 

used to preserve or stabilize a sample, 

may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon) or 4 kg 

(8.8 pounds). Such preservatives are not 

subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(d) Liquids must not completely fill a 

receptacle at a temperature of 55 °C

(131 °F) or less. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52611, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45460, Oct. 1, 1992; 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 

Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 

FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 

2003; 71 FR 32258, June 2, 2006] 

440

§ 173.24b 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

§ 173.24b Additional general requirements for bulk packagings. 

(a) Outage and filling limits. (1) Except 

as otherwise provided in this subchapter, liquids and liquefied gases 

must be so loaded that the outage is at 

least five percent for materials poisonous by inhalation, or at least one 

percent for all other materials, of the 

total capacity of a cargo tank, portable 

tank, tank car (including dome capacity), multi-unit tank car tank, or any 

compartment thereof, at the following 

reference temperatures— 

(i) 46 °C (115 °F) for a noninsulated 

tank;

(ii) 43 °C (110 °F) for a tank car having a thermal protection system, incorporating a metal jacket that provides 

an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 

°C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22 

kilojoules per hour per square meter 

per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per 

square foot/ per degree F) temperature 

differential; or 

(iii) 41 °C (105 °F) for an insulated 

tank.

(2) Hazardous materials may not be 

loaded into the dome of a tank car. If 

the dome of the tank car does not provide sufficient outage, vacant space 

must be left in the shell to provide the 

required outage. 

(b) Equivalent steel. For the purposes 

of this section, the reference stainless 

steel is stainless steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 51.7 

deka newtons per square millimeter 

(75,000 psi) and a guaranteed elongation 

of 40 percent or greater. Where the regulations permit steel other than stainless steel to be used in place of a specified stainless steel (for example, as in 

§172.102 of this subchapter, special provision B30), the minimum thickness for 

the steel must be obtained from one of 

the following formulas, as appropriate: 

Formula for metric units 

e1 = (12.74e0) / (Rm1 A1)1⁄3

Formula for non-metric units 

e1 = (144.2e0) / (Rm1 A1)1⁄3

where:

e0 = Required thickness of the reference 

stainless steel in mm or inches respectively;

e1 = Equivalent thickness of the steel used in 

mm or inches respectively; 

Rm1 = Specified minimum tensile strength of 

the steel used in deka-newtons per square 

millimeter or pounds per square inch respectively; and 

A1 = Specified minimum percentage elongation of the steel used multiplied by 100 

(for example, 20 percent times 100 equals 

20). Elongation values used must be determined from a 50 mm or 2 inch test specimen.

(c) Air pressure in excess of ambient 

atmospheric pressure may not be used 

to load or unload any lading which 

may create an air-enriched mixture 

within the flammability range of the 

lading in the vapor space of the tank. 

(d) A bulk packaging may not be 

loaded with a hazardous material that: 

(1) Is at a temperature outside of the 

packaging’s design temperature range; 

or

(2) Except as otherwise provided in 

this subchapter, exceeds the maximum 

weight of lading marked on the specification plate. 

(e) Stacking of IBCs and Large Packagings. (1) IBCs and Large Packagings 

not designed and tested to be stacked. 

No packages or freight (hazardous or 

otherwise) may be stacked upon an IBC 

or a Large Packaging that was not designed and tested to be stacked upon. 

(2) IBCs and Large Packagings designed and tested to be stacked. The 

superimposed weight placed upon an 

IBC or a Large Packaging designed to 

be stacked may not exceed the maximum permissible stacking test mass 

marked on the packaging. 

(f) UN portable tanks. (1) A UN portable tank manufactured in the United 

States must conform in all details to 

the applicable requirements in parts 

172, 173, 178 and 180 of this subchapter. 

(2) UN portable tanks manufactured 

outside the United States. A UN portable 

tank manufactured outside the United 

States, in accordance with national or 

international regulations based on the 

UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 

of this subchapter), which is an authorized packaging under §173.24 of this 

subchapter, may be filled, offered and 

transported in the United States, if the 

§172.101 Table of this subchapter authorizes the hazardous material for 

transportation in the UN portable tank 

and it conforms to the applicable T 

441

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.26 

codes, and tank provision codes, or 

other special provisions assigned to the 

hazardous material in Column (7) of 

the Table. In addition, the portable 

tank must— 

(i) Conform to applicable provisions 

in the UN Recommendations (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter) and the requirements of this subpart; 

(ii) Be capable of passing the prescribed tests and inspections in part 180 

of this subchapter applicable to the UN 

portable tank specification; 

(iii) Be designed and manufactured 

according to the ASME Code (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter) or a pressure 

vessel design code approved by the Associate Administrator; 

(iv) Be approved by the Associate Administrator when the portable tank is 

designed and constructed under the 

provisions of an alternative arrangement (see §178.274(a)(2) of this subchapter); and 

(v) The competent authority of the 

country of manufacture must provide 

reciprocal treatment for UN portable 

tanks manufactured in the United 

States.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 

243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173–252, 61 

FR 28676, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 

50624, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 

67 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 

74 FR 2255, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.25 Authorized packagings and 

overpacks. 

(a) Authorized packages containing 

hazardous materials may be offered for 

transportation in an overpack as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, if all 

of the following conditions are met: 

(1) The package meets the requirements of §§173.21 and 173.24 of this subchapter.

(2) The overpack is marked with the 

proper shipping name and identification number, when applicable, and is 

labeled as required by this subchapter 

for each hazardous material contained 

therein, unless marking and labels representative of each hazardous material 

in the overpack are visible. 

(3) Each package subject to the orientation marking requirements of 

§172.312 of this subchapter is packed in 

the overpack with its filling holes up 

and the overpack is marked with package orientation marking arrows on two 

opposite vertical sides of the overpack 

with the arrows pointing in the correct 

direction of orientation. 

(4) The overpack is marked with the 

word ‘‘OVERPACK’’ when specification 

packagings are required, unless specification markings on the inside packages are visible. 

(5) Packages containing Class 8 (corrosive) materials in Packing Group I or 

Division 5.1 (oxidizing) materials in 

Packing Group I may not be overpacked with any other materials. 

(b) Shrink-wrapped or stretchwrapped trays may be used as outer 

packagings for inner packagings prepared in accordance with the limited 

quantity provisions or consumer commodity provisions of this subchapter, 

provided that— 

(1) Inner packagings are not fragile, 

liable to break or be easily punctured, 

such as those made of glass, porcelain, 

stoneware or certain plastics; and 

(2) Each complete package does not 

exceed 20 kg (44 lbs) gross weight. 

(c) Hazardous materials which are required to be labeled POISON may be 

transported in the same motor vehicle 

with material that is marked or known 

to be foodstuffs, feed or any edible material intended for consumption by humans or animals provided the hazardous material is marked, labeled, 

and packaged in accordance with this 

subchapter, conforms to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section 

and is overpacked as specified in 

§177.841(e) of this subchapter or in an 

overpack which is a UN 1A2, 1B2, or 1N2 

drum tested and marked for a Packing 

Group II or higher performance level. 

[Amdt. 173–165, 48 FR 28099, June 20, 1983, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612 Dec. 

21, 1990; 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173– 

234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–214, 59 

FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 

1999; 68 FR 45032, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, 

Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34397, June 14, 2005; 73 FR 

57005, Oct. 1, 2008] 

§ 173.26 Quantity limitations. 

When quantity limitations do not appear in the packaging requirements of 

this subchapter, the permitted gross 

weight or capacity authorized for a 

packaging is as shown in the packaging 

442

§ 173.27 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

specification or standard in part 178 or 

179, as applicable, of this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990] 

§ 173.27 General requirements for 

transportation by aircraft. 

(a) The requirements of this section 

are in addition to the requirements in 

§173.24 and apply to packages offered or 

intended for transportation aboard aircraft. Except for materials not subject 

to performance packaging requirements in subpart E of this part, a packaging containing a Packing Group III 

material with a primary or subsidiary 

risk of Division 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, or Class 

8 must meet the Packing Group II performance level when offered or intended for transportation by aircraft. 

(b) Packages authorized onboard aircraft. (1) When Column 9a of the 

§172.101 table indicates that a material 

is ‘‘Forbidden’’, that material may not 

be offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft.

(2) When Column 9b of the §172.101 

table indicates that a material is 

‘‘Forbidden’’, that material may not be 

offered for transportation or transported aboard aircraft. 

(3) The maximum quantity of hazardous material in a package that may 

be offered for transportation or transported aboard a passenger-carrying aircraft or cargo aircraft may not exceed 

that quantity prescribed for the material in Column 9a or 9b, respectively, of 

the §172.101 table. 

(4) A package containing a hazardous 

material which is authorized aboard 

cargo aircraft but not aboard passenger 

aircraft must be labeled with the 

CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label required by §172.402(c) of this subchapter 

and may not be offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft. 

(c) Pressure requirements. (1) Packagings must be designed and constructed to prevent leakage that may 

be caused by changes in altitude and 

temperature during transportation 

aboard aircraft. 

(2) Packagings for which retention of 

liquid is a basic function must be capable of withstanding without leakage 

the greater of— 

(i) An internal pressure which produces a gauge pressure of not less than 

75 kPa (11 psig) for liquids in Packing 

Group III of Class 3 or Division 6.1; or 

95 kPa (14 psig) for other liquids; or 

(ii) A pressure related to the vapor 

pressure of the liquid to be conveyed, 

determined by one of the following: 

(A) The total gauge pressure measured in the receptacle (i.e., the vapor 

pressure of the material and the partial 

pressure of air or other inert gases, less 

100 kPa (15 psia)) at 55 °C (131 °F), multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; determined on the basis of a filling temperature of 15 °C (59 °F) and a degree of filling such that the receptacle is not 

completely liquid full at a temperature 

of 55 °C (131 °F) or less; 

(B) 1.75 times the vapor pressure at 50 

°C (122 °F) less 100 kPa (15 psia); or 

(C) 1.5 times the vapor pressure at 55 

°C (131 °) less 100 kPa (15 psia). 

(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of 

paragraph (c)(2) of this section— 

(i) Hazardous materials may be contained in an inner packaging which 

does not itself meet the pressure requirement provided that the inner 

packaging is packed within a supplementary packaging which does meet 

the pressure requirement and other applicable packaging requirements of 

this subchapter. 

(ii) Packagings which are subject to 

the hydrostatic pressure test and 

marking requirements of §§178.605 and 

178.503(a)(5), respectively, of this subchapter must have a marked test pressure of not less than 250 kPa (36 psig) 

for liquids in Packing Group I, 80 kPa 

(12 psig) for liquids in Packing Group 

III of Class 3 or Division 6.1, and 100 

kPa (15 psig) for other liquids. 

(d) Closures. Stoppers, corks or other 

such friction-type closures must be 

held securely, tightly and effectively in 

place by positive means. Each screwtype closure on any packaging must be 

secured to prevent closure from loosening due to vibration or substantial 

change in temperature. 

(e) Absorbent materials. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, liquid hazardous materials of Class 3, 4, or 

8, or Division 5.1, 5.2 or 6.1 that are 

packaged and offered for transport in 

glass, earthenware, plastic or metal 

443

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.27 

inner packagings must be packaged 

using absorbent material as follows: 

(1) Packing Group I liquids on passenger aircraft must be packaged using 

materials capable of absorbing the entire contents of the inner packagings. 

(2) Packing Group I liquids on cargo 

aircraft, and Packing Group II liquids 

including Division 5.2 liquids on passenger and cargo aircraft, must be 

packaged using a sufficient quantity of 

absorbent material to absorb the entire 

contents of any one of the inner packagings containing such liquids. When 

the inner packagings are of different 

sizes and quantities, sufficient absorbent material must be used to absorb 

the entire contents of the inner packaging with the greatest volume of liquid.

(3) When absorbent materials are required and the outer packaging is not 

liquid tight, a means of containing the 

liquid in the event of a leakage must be 

provided in the form of a leakproof 

liner, plastic bag or other equally efficient means of containment. 

(4) Absorbent material must not 

react dangerously with the liquid (see 

§§173.24 and 173.24a.). 

(5) Absorbent material is not required if the inner packagings are so 

protected that they are unlikely to 

break and leak their contents from the 

outer packaging under normal conditions of transportation. 

(f) Combination packaging. Unless otherwise specified in this part, or in 

§171.22 of this subchapter, when combination packaging are offered for 

transportation aboard aircraft, inner 

packaging must conform to the quantity limitations set forth in table 1 of 

this paragraph for transport aboard 

passenger-carrying aircraft and table 2 

of this paragraph for transport aboard 

cargo aircraft only, as follows: 

TABLE 1—MAXIMUM NET CAPACITY OF INNER PACKAGING FOR TRANSPORTATION ON PASSENGERCARRYING AIRCRAFT

Maximum net quantity per package from Column 9a of the § 172.101 table

Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging

Glass, earthenware or 

fiber inner packagings 

Metal or plastic inner 

packagings

Liquids:

Not greater than 0.5L ............................................................... 0.5L ................................... 0.5L.

Greater than 0.5L. not greater than lL ..................................... 0.5L ................................... lL. 

Greater than 1L, not greater than 5L ....................................... 1L ...................................... 5L. 

Greater than 5L, not greater than 60L ..................................... 2.5L ................................... 10L. 

Greater than 60L, not greater than 220L ................................. 5L ...................................... 25L. 

Greater than 220L .................................................................... No limit .............................. No limit.

Solids:

Not greater than 5 kg ............................................................... 0.5 kg ................................ 1 kg.

Greater than 5 kg, not greater than 25 kg ............................... 1 kg ................................... 2.5 kg. 

Greater than 25 kg, not greater than 200 kg ........................... 5 kg ................................... 10 kg. 

Greater than 200 kg ................................................................. No limit .............................. No limit.

TABLE 2—MAXIMUM NET CAPACITY OF INNER PACKAGING FOR TRANSPORTATION ON CARGO

AIRCRAFT

Maximum net quantity per package from Column 9b of the § 172.101 table

Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging

Glass, earthenware or 

fiber inner packagings 

Metal or plastic inner 

packagings

Liquids:

Not greater than 2.5L ............................................................... 1L ...................................... 1L.

Greater than 2.5L, not greater than 30L .................................. 2.5L ................................... 2.5L. 

Greater than 30L, not greater than 60L ................................... 5L ...................................... 10L. 

Greater than 60L, not greater than 220L ................................. 5L ...................................... 25L. 

Greater than 220L .................................................................... No limit .............................. No limit.

Solids:

Not greater than 15 kg ............................................................. 1 kg ................................... 2.5 kg.

Greater than 15 kg, not greater than 50 kg ............................. 2.5 kg ................................ 5 kg. 

Greater than 50 kg, not greater than 200 kg ........................... 5 kg ................................... 10 kg. 

Greater than 200 kg ................................................................. No limit .............................. No limit.

444

§ 173.28 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(g) Cylinders. For any cylinder containing hazardous materials and incorporating valves, sufficient protection 

must be provided to prevent operation 

of, and damage to, the valves during 

transportation, by one of the following 

methods:

(1) By equipping each cylinder with 

securely attached valve caps or protective headrings; or 

(2) By boxing or crating the cylinder. 

(h) Tank cars and cargo tanks. Any 

tank car or cargo tank containing a 

hazardous material may not be transported aboard aircraft. 

(i) Effective October 1, 2006, each person who offers a hazardous material for 

transportation by aircraft must include the certification statement specified in §172.204(c)(3). 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 65 FR 

58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 

68 FR 45032, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 

2004; 71 FR 14602, Mar. 22, 2006; 73 FR 57006, 

Oct. 1, 2008; 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010] 

§ 173.28 Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings. 

(a) General. Packagings and receptacles used more than once must be in 

such condition, including closure devices and cushioning materials, that 

they conform in all respects to the prescribed requirements of this subchapter. Before reuse, each packaging 

must be inspected and may not be reused unless free from incompatible residue, rupture, or other damage which 

reduces its structural integrity. Packagings not meeting the minimum 

thickness requirements prescribed in 

paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section may 

not be reused or reconditioned for 

reuse.

(b) Reuse of non-bulk packaging. A

non-bulk packaging used more than 

once must conform to the following 

provisions and limitations: 

(1) A non-bulk packaging which, upon 

inspection, shows evidence of a reduction in integrity may not be reused unless it is reconditioned in accordance 

with paragraph (c) of this section. 

(2) Before reuse, packagings subject 

to the leakproofness test with air prescribed in §178.604 of this subchapter 

shall be— 

(i) Retested without failure in accordance with §178.604 of this subchapter using an internal air pressure 

(gauge) of at least 48 kPa (7.0 psig) for 

Packing Group I and 20 kPa (3.0 psig) 

for Packing Group II and Packing 

Group III; and 

(ii) Marked with the letter ‘‘L’’, with 

the name and address or symbol of the 

person conducting the test, and the 

last two digits of the year the test was 

conducted. Symbols, if used, must be 

registered with the Associate Administrator.

(3) Packagings made of paper (other 

than fiberboard), plastic film, or textile are not authorized for reuse; 

(4) Metal and plastic drums and 

jerricans used as single packagings or 

the outer packagings of composite 

packagings are authorized for reuse 

only when they are marked in a permanent manner (e.g., embossed) in mm 

with the nominal (for metal packagings) or minimum (for plastic packagings) thickness of the packaging material, as required by §178.503(a)(9) of 

this subchapter, and— 

(i) Except as provided in paragraph 

(b)(4)(ii) of this section, conform to the 

following minimum thickness criteria: 

Maximum capacity not over

Minimum thickness of packaging material 

Metal drum or jerricanPlastic drum or jerrican

20 L ............. 0.63 mm (0.025 inch) 1.1 mm (0.043 inch). 

30 L ............. 0.73 mm (0.029 inch) 1.1 mm (0.043 inch). 

40 L ............. 0.73 mm (0.029 inch) 1.8 mm (0.071 inch). 

60 L ............. 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) 1.8 mm (0.071 inch). 

120 L ........... 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) 2.2 mm (0.087 inch). 

220 L ........... 0.92 mm (0.036 

inch) 1.

2.2 mm (0.087 inch). 

450 L ........... 1.77 mm (0.070 inch) 5.0 mm (0.197 inch). 

1Metal drums or jerricans with a 

minimum thickness of 0.82 mm body 

and 1.09 mm heads which are manufactured and marked prior to January 1, 

1997 may be reused. Metal drums or 

jerricans manufactured and marked on 

or after January 1, 1997, and intended 

for reuse, must be constructed with a 

minimum thickness of 0.82 mm body 

and 1.11 mm heads. 

(ii) For stainless steel drums and 

jerricans, conform to a minimum wall 

thickness as determined by the following equivalence formula: 

445

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.28 

FORMULA FOR METRIC UNITS

e

e

Rm A

1

0

3

1 1

21 4 = ×

×

.

FORMULA FOR U.S. STANDARD

UNITS

e

e

Rm A

1

0

3

1 1

21 4

145

= ×

( ) ×

.

/

where:

e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the 

metal to be used (in mm or, for U.S. Standard units, use inches). 

e0 = required minimum wall thickness for 

the reference steel (in mm or, for U.S. 

Standard units, use inches). 

Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength 

of the metal to be used (in N/mm2 or for 

U.S. Standard units, use psi). 

A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation (as a 

percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see paragraph 

(c)(1) of this section). 

(5) Plastic inner receptacles of composite packagings must have a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 inch). 

(6) A previously used non-bulk packaging may be reused for the shipment 

of hazardous waste, not subject to the 

reconditioning and reuse provisions of 

this section, in accordance with 

§173.12(c). 

(7) Notwithstanding the provisions of 

paragraph (b)(2) of this section, a packaging otherwise authorized for reuse 

may be reused without being 

leakproofness tested with air provided 

the packaging— 

(i) Is refilled with a material which is 

compatible with the previous lading: 

(ii) Is refilled and offered for transportation by the original filler; 

(iii) Is transported in a transport vehicle or freight container under the exclusive use of the refiller of the packaging; and 

(iv) Is constructed of— 

(A) Stainless steel, monel or nickel 

with a thickness not less than one and 

one-half times the minimum thickness 

prescribed in paragraph (b)(4) of this 

section;

(B) Plastic, provided the packaging is 

not refilled for reuse on a date more 

than five years from the date of manufacture marked on the packaging in accordance with §178.503(a)(6) of this subchapter; or 

(C) Another material or thickness 

when approved under the conditions established by the Associate Administrator for reuse without retesting. 

(c) Reconditioning of non-bulk packaging. (1) For the purpose of this subchapter, reconditioning of metal drums 

is:

(i) Cleaning to base material of construction, with all former contents, internal and external corrosion, and any 

external coatings and labels removed; 

(ii) Restoring to original shape and 

contour, with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed, and all non-integral 

gaskets replaced: and 

(iii) Inspecting after cleaning but before painting, Packagings that have 

visible pitting, significant reduction in 

material thickness, metal fatigue, 

damaged threads or closures, or other 

significant defects, must be rejected. 

(2) For the purpose of this subchapter, reconditioning of a non-bulk 

packaging other than a metal drum includes:

(i) Removal of all former contents, 

external coatings and labels, and cleaning to the original materials of construction;

(ii) Inspection after cleaning with rejection of packagings with visible damage such as tears, creases or cracks, or 

damaged threads or closures, or other 

significant defects; 

(iii) Replacement of all non-integral 

gaskets and closure devices with new 

or refurbished parts, and cushioning 

and cushioning materials; and components including gaskets, closure devices and cushioning and cushioning 

material. (For a UN 1H1 plastic drum, 

replacing a removable gasket or closure device with another of the same 

design and material that provides 

equivalent performance does not constitute reconditioning); and 

(iv) Ensuring that the packagings are 

restored to a condition that conforms 

in all respects with the prescribed requirements of this subchapter. 

(3) A person who reconditions a packaging manufactured and marked under 

the provisions of subpart L of part 178 

of this subchapter, shall mark that 

packaging as required by §178.503(c) 


EP26JN96.000</MATH> EP26JN96.001</MATH>
446

§ 173.29 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

and (d) of this subchapter. The marking is the certification of the reconditioner that the packaging conforms to 

the standard for which it is marked 

and that all functions performed by the 

reconditioner which are prescribed by 

this subchapter have been performed in 

compliance with this subchapter. 

(4) The markings applied by the reconditioner may be different from 

those applied by the manufacturer at 

the time of original manufacture, but 

may not identify a greater performance 

capability than that for which the 

original design type had been tested 

(for example, the reconditioner may 

mark a drum which was originally 

marked as 1A1/Y1.8 as 1A1/Y1.2 or 1A1/ 

Z2.0).

(5) Packagings which have significant 

defects which cannot be repaired may 

not be reused. 

(d) Remanufacture of non-bulk packagings. For the purpose of this subchapter, remanufacture is the conversion of a non-specification, non-bulk 

packaging to a DOT specification or 

U.N. standard, the conversion of a 

packaging meeting one specification or 

standard to another specification or 

standard (for example, conversion of 

1A1 non-removable head drums to 1A2 

removable head drums) or the replacement of integral structural packaging 

components (such as non-removable 

heads on drums). A person who remanufactures a non-bulk packaging to 

conform to a specification or standard 

in part 178 of this subchapter is subject 

to the requirements of part 178 of this 

subchapter as a manufacturer. 

(e) Non-reusable containers. A packaging marked as NRC according to the 

DOT specification or UN standard requirements of part 178 of this subchapter may be reused for the shipment of any material not required by 

this subchapter to be shipped in a DOT 

specification or UN standard packaging.

(f) A Division 6.2 packaging to be reused must be disinfected prior to reuse 

by any means effective for neutralizing 

the infectious substance the packaging 

previously contained. A secondary 

packaging or outer packaging conforming to the requirements of §173.196 

or §173.199 need not be disinfected prior 

to reuse if no leakage from the primary 

receptacle has occurred. Drums or 

jerricans not meeting the minimum 

thickness requirements prescribed in 

paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section may 

not be reused or reconditioned for 

reuse.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.28, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.29 Empty packagings. 

(a) General. Except as otherwise provided in this section, an empty packaging containing only the residue of a 

hazardous material shall be offered for 

transportation and transported in the 

same manner as when it previously 

contained a greater quantity of that 

hazardous material. 

(b) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, 

an empty packaging is not subject to 

any other requirements of this subchapter if it conforms to the following 

provisions:

(1) Any hazardous material shipping 

name and identification number markings, any hazard warning labels or 

placards, and any other markings indicating that the material is hazardous 

(e.g., RQ, INHALATION HAZARD) are 

removed, obliterated, or securely covered in transportation. This provision 

does not apply to transportation in a 

transport vehicle or a freight container 

if the packaging is not visible in transportation and the packaging is loaded 

by the shipper and unloaded by the 

shipper or consignee; 

(2) The packaging— 

(i) Is unused; 

(ii) Is sufficiently cleaned of residue 

and purged of vapors to remove any potential hazard; 

(iii) Is refilled with a material which 

is not hazardous to such an extent that 

any residue remaining in the packaging no longer poses a hazard; or 

(iv) Contains only the residue of— 

(A) An ORM-D material; or 

(B) A Division 2.2 non-flammable gas, 

other than ammonia, anhydrous, and 

with no subsidiary hazard, at a gauge 

pressure less than 200 kPa (29.0 psig); at 

20 °C (68 °F); and 

447

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.31 

(3) Any material contained in the 

packaging does not meet the definitions in §171.8 of this subchapter for a 

hazardous substance, a hazardous 

waste, or a marine pollutant. 

(c) A non-bulk packaging containing 

only the residue of a hazardous material covered by Table 2 of §172.504 of 

this subchapter that is not a material 

poisonous by inhalation or its residue 

shipped under the subsidiary 

placarding provisions of §172.505— 

(1) Does not have to be included in 

determining the applicability of the 

placarding requirements of subpart F 

of part 172 of this subchapter; and 

(2) Is not subject to the shipping 

paper requirements of this subchapter 

when collected and transported by a 

contract or private carrier for reconditioning, remanufacture or reuse. 

(d) Notwithstanding the stowage requirements in Column 10a of the 

§172.101 table for transportation by vessel, an empty drum or cylinder may be 

stowed on deck or under deck. 

(e) Specific provisions for describing 

an empty packaging on a shipping 

paper appear in §172.203(e) of this subchapter.

(f) [Reserved] 

(g) A package which contains a residue of an elevated temperature material may remain marked in the same 

manner as when it contained a greater 

quantity of the material even though it 

no longer meets the definition in §171.8 

of this subchapter for an elevated temperature material. 

(h) A package that contains a residue 

of a hazardous substance, Class 9, listed 

in the §172.101 Table, Appendix A, 

Table I, that does not meet the definition of another hazard class and is not 

a hazardous waste or marine pollutant, 

may remain marked, labeled and, if applicable, placarded in the same manner 

as when it contained a greater quantity of the material even though it no 

longer meets the definition in §171.8 of 

this subchapter for a hazardous substance.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 

2, 1991; Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 

1992; Amdt. 173–251, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 

Amdt. 173–260, 62 FR 1236, Jan. 8, 1997; 64 FR 

10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 

69 FR 64473, Nov. 4, 2004; 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 

2010]

§ 173.30 Loading and unloading of 

transport vehicles. 

A person who is subject to the loading and unloading regulations in this 

subchapter must load or unload hazardous materials into or from a transport vehicle or vessel in conformance 

with the applicable loading and unloading requirements of parts 174, 175, 176, 

and 177 of this subchapter. 

[68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003] 

§ 173.31 Use of tank cars. 

(a) General. (1) No person may offer a 

hazardous material for transportation 

in a tank car unless the tank car meets 

the applicable specification and packaging requirements of this subchapter 

or, when this subchapter authorizes the 

use of a non-DOT specification tank 

car, the applicable specification to 

which the tank was constructed. 

(2) Tank cars and appurtenances may 

be used for the transportation of any 

commodity for which they are authorized in this part and specified on the 

certificate of construction (AAR Form 

4–2 or by addendum on Form R–1). See 

§179.5 of this subchapter. Transfer of a 

tank car from one specified service on 

its certificate of construction to another may be made only by the owner 

or with the owner’s authorization. A 

tank car proposed for a commodity 

service other than specified on its certificate of construction must be approved for such service by the AAR’s 

Tank Car Committee. 

(3) No person may fill a tank car 

overdue for periodic inspection with a 

hazardous material and then offer it 

for transportation. Any tank car 

marked as meeting a DOT specification 

and any non-specification tank car 

transporting a hazardous material 

must have a periodic inspection and 

test conforming to subpart F of part 

180 of this subchapter. 

(4) No railroad tank car, regardless of 

its construction date, may be used for 

the transportation in commerce of any 

hazardous material unless the air 

brake equipment support attachments 

of such tank car conform to the standards for attachments set forth in 

§§179.100–16 and 179.200–19 of this subchapter.

448

§ 173.31 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(5) No railroad tank car, regardless of 

its construction date, may be used for 

the transportation in commerce of any 

hazardous material with a self-energized manway located below the liquid 

level of the lading. 

(6) Unless otherwise specifically provided in this part: 

(i) When the tank car delimiter is an 

‘‘A,’’ offerors may also use tank cars 

with a delimiter ‘‘S,’’ ‘‘J’’ or ‘‘T’’. 

(ii) When the tank car delimiter is an 

‘‘S,’’ offerors may also use tank cars 

with a delimiter ‘‘J’’ or ‘‘T’’. 

(iii) When a tank car delimiter is a 

‘‘T’’ offerors may also use tank cars 

with a delimiter of ‘‘J’’. 

(iv) When a tank car delimiter is a 

‘‘J’’, offerors may not use a tank car 

with any other delimiter. 

(7) A class DOT-103 or DOT-104 tank 

car may continue to be used for the 

transportation of a hazardous material 

if it meets the requirements of this 

subchapter and the design requirements in Part 179 of this subchapter in 

effect on September 30, 2003; however, 

no new construction is authorized. 

(8) A tank car authorized by the 

Transport Canada TDG Regulations 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) may 

be used provided it conforms to the applicable requirements in §171.12 of this 

subchapter.

(b) Safety systems—(1) Coupler vertical 

restraint. Each tank car conforming to 

a DOT specification and any other tank 

car used for transportation of a hazardous material must be equipped with 

a coupler vertical restraint system 

that meets the requirements of §179.14 

of this subchapter. 

(2) Pressure relief devices. (i) Pressure 

relief devices on tank cars must conform to part 179 of this subchapter. 

(ii) A single-unit tank car transporting a Division 6.1 PG I or II, or 

Class 2, 3, or 4 material must have a reclosing pressure relief device. However, 

a single-unit tank car built before January 1, 1991, and equipped with a nonreclosing pressure relief device may be 

used to transport a Division 6.1 PG I or 

II material or a Class 4 liquid provided 

such materials do not meet the definition of a material poisonous by inhalation.

(3) Tank-head puncture-resistance requirements. The following tank cars 

must have a tank-head puncture-resistance system that conforms to the requirements in §179.16 of this subchapter, or to the corresponding requirements in effect at the time of installation:

(i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2 

material.

(ii) Tank cars constructed from aluminum or nickel plate that are used to 

transport hazardous material. 

(iii) Except as provided in paragraph 

(b)(3)(iv) of this section, those tank 

cars specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) 

and (ii) of this section not requiring a 

tank-head puncture resistance system 

prior to July 1, 1996, must have a tankhead puncture resistance system installed no later than July 1, 2006. 

(iv) Class DOT 105A tank cars built 

prior to September 1, 1981, having a 

tank capacity less than 70 kl (18,500 

gallons), and used to transport a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, must 

have a tank-head puncture-resistant 

system installed no later than July 1, 

2001.

(4) Thermal protection requirements. 

The following tank cars must have 

thermal protection that conforms to 

the requirements of §179.18 of this subchapter:

(i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2 

material, except for a class 106, 107A, 

110, and 113 tank car. A tank car 

equipped with a thermal protection 

system conforming to §179.18 of this 

subchapter, or that has an insulation 

system having an overall thermal conductance of no more than 0.613 

kilojoules per hour, per square meter, 

per degree Celsius temperature differential (0.03 B.t.u. per square foot, 

per hour, per degree Fahrenheit temperature differential), conforms to this 

requirement.

(ii) A tank car transporting a Class 2 

material that was not required to have 

thermal protection prior to July 1, 

1996, must be equipped with thermal 

protection no later than July 1, 2006. 

(5) Bottom-discontinuity protection requirements. No person may offer for 

transportation a hazardous material in 

a tank car with bottom-discontinuity 

protection unless the tank car has bottom-discontinuity protection that conforms to the requirements of E9.00 and 

E10.00 of the AAR Specifications for 

449

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.31 

Tank Cars (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Tank cars not requiring bottom-discontinuity protection under the 

terms of Appendix Y of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars as of July 1, 

1996, must conform to these requirements no later than July 1, 2006, except 

that tank cars transporting a material 

that is hazardous only because it meets 

the definition of an elevated temperature material or because it is molten 

sulfur do not require bottom discontinuity protection. 

(6) Scheduling of modifications and 

progress reporting. The date of conformance for the continued use of tank cars 

subject to paragraphs (b)(4), (b)(5), and 

(f) of this section and §173.314(j) is subject to the following conditions and 

limitations.

(i) Each tank car owner shall modify, 

reassign, retire, or remove at least 50 

percent of their in-service tank car 

fleet within the first half of the compliance period and the remainder of 

their in-service tank car fleet during 

the second half of the compliance period.

(ii) By October 1 of each year, each 

owner of a tank car subject to this 

paragraph (b)(6) shall submit to the 

Federal Railroad Administration, Hazardous Materials Division, Office of 

Safety Assurance and Compliance, 1120 

Vermont Avenue, Mail Stop 25, Washington, DC 20590, a progress report that 

shows the total number of in-service 

tank cars that need head protection, 

thermal protection, or bottom-discontinuity protection; the number of 

new or different tank cars acquired to 

replace those tank cars required to be 

upgraded to a higher service pressure; 

and the total number of tank cars 

modified, reassigned, acquired, retired, 

or removed from service the previous 

year.

(c) Tank car test pressure. A tank car 

used for the transportation of a hazardous material must have a tank test 

pressure equal to or greater than the 

greatest of the following: 

(1) Except for shipments of carbon dioxide, anhydrous hydrogen chloride, 

vinyl fluoride, ethylene, or hydrogen, 

133 percent of the sum of lading vapor 

pressure at the reference temperature 

of 46 °C (115 °F) for non-insulated tank 

cars or 41 °C (105 °F) for insulated tank 

cars plus static head, plus gas padding 

pressure in the vacant space of a tank 

car;

(2) 133 percent of the maximum loading or unloading pressure, whichever is 

greater;

(3) 20.7 Bar (300 psig) for materials 

that are poisonous by inhalation (see 

§173.31(e)(2)(ii) for compliance dates); 

(4) The minimum pressure prescribed 

by the specification in part 179 of this 

subchapter; or 

(5) The minimum test pressure prescribed for the specific hazardous material in the applicable packaging section in subpart F or G of this part. 

(d) Examination before shipping. (1) No 

person may offer for transportation a 

tank car containing a hazardous material or a residue of a hazardous material unless that person determines that 

the tank car is in proper condition and 

safe for transportation. As a minimum, 

each person offering a tank car for 

transportation must perform an external visual inspection that includes: 

(i) Except where insulation or a thermal protection system precludes an inspection, the tank shell and heads for 

abrasion, corrosion, cracks, dents, distortions, defects in welds, or any other 

condition that makes the tank car unsafe for transportation; 

(ii) The piping, valves, fittings, and 

gaskets for corrosion, damage, or any 

other condition that makes the tank 

car unsafe for transportation; 

(iii) For missing or loose bolts, nuts, 

or elements that make the tank car 

unsafe for transportation; 

(iv) All closures on tank cars and determine that the closures and all fastenings securing them are properly 

tightened in place by the use of a bar, 

wrench, or other suitable tool; 

(v) Protective housings for proper securement;

(vi) The pressure relief device, including a careful inspection of the rupture disc in non-reclosing pressure relief devices, for corrosion or damage 

that may alter the intended operation 

of the device. The rupture disc is not 

required to be removed prior to visual 

inspection if the tank car contains the 

residue, as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, of a Class 8, PG II or PG III 

material with no subsidiary hazard or 

450

§ 173.31 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

the residue of a Class 9 elevated temperature material; 

(vii) Each tell-tale indicator after 

filling and prior to transportation to 

ensure the integrity of the rupture 

disc;

(viii) The external thermal protection system, tank-head puncture resistance system, coupler vertical restraint system, and bottom discontinuity protection for conditions that 

make the tank car unsafe for transportation;

(ix) The required markings on the 

tank car for legibility; and 

(x) The periodic inspection date 

markings to ensure that the inspection 

and test intervals are within the prescribed intervals. 

(2) Closures on tank cars are required, in accordance with this subchapter, to be designed and closed so 

that under conditions normally incident to transportation, including the 

effects of temperature and vibration, 

there will be no identifiable release of 

a hazardous material to the environment. ln any action brought to enforce 

this section, the lack of securement of 

any closure to a tool-tight condition, 

detected at any point, will establish a 

rebuttable presumption that a proper 

inspection was not performed by the offeror of the car. That presumption may 

be rebutted by any evidence indicating 

that the lack of securement resulted 

from a specific cause not within the 

control of the offeror. 

(e) Special requirements for materials 

poisonous by inhalation—(1) Interior

heater coils. Tank cars used for materials poisonous by inhalation may not 

have interior heater coils. 

(2) Tank car specifications. A tank 

car used for a material poisonous by inhalation must have a tank test pressure of 20.7 Bar (300 psig) or greater, 

head protection, and a metal jacket 

(e.g., DOT 105S300W), except that— 

(i) A higher test pressure is required 

if otherwise specified in this subchapter; and 

(ii) Each tank car constructed on or 

after March 16, 2009, and used for the 

transportation of PIH materials must 

meet the applicable authorized tank 

car specifications and standards listed 

in §173.244(a)(2) or (3) and §173.314(c) or 

(d).

(iii) A tank car meeting the applicable authorized tank car specifications 

listed in §173.244(a)(2) or (3), or 

§173.314(c) or (d) is authorized for the 

transportation of a material poisonous 

by inhalation for a period of 20 years 

after the date of original construction. 

(iv) A tank car owner retiring or otherwise removing a tank car from service transporting materials poisonous 

by inhalation, other than because of 

damage to the car, must retire or remove cars constructed of non-normalized steel in the head or shell before removing any car in service transporting 

materials poisonous by inhalation constructed of normalized steel meeting 

the applicable DOT specification. 

(f) Special requirements for hazardous 

substances. (1) A tank car used for a 

hazardous substance listed in paragraph (f)(2) of this section must have a 

tank test pressure of at least 13.8 Bar 

(200 psig), head protection and a metal 

jacket, except that— 

(i) No metal jacket is required if— 

(A) The tank test pressure is 23.4 Bar 

(340 psig) or higher; or 

(B) The tank shell and heads are 

manufactured from AAR steel specification TC–128, normalized; 

(ii) A higher test pressure is required 

if otherwise specified in this subchapter; and 

(iii) Other than as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, a tank car 

which does not conform to the requirements of this paragraph (f)(1), and was 

authorized for a hazardous substance 

under the regulations in effect on June 

30, 1996, may continue in use until July 

1, 2006. 

(2) List of hazardous substances. Hazardous substances for which the provisions of this paragraph (f) apply are as 

follows:

Aldrin

Allyl chloride 

alpha-BHC

beta-BHC

delta-BHC

gamma-BHC

Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether 

Bromoform

Carbon tetrachloride 

Chlordane

p-Chloroaniline

Chlorobenzene

Chlorobenzilate

p-Chloro-m-cresol

451

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.32 

2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether 

Chloroform

2-Chloronapthalene

o-Chlorophenol

3-Chloropropionitrile

DDE

DDT

1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane

m-Dichlorobenzene

o-Dichlorobenzene

p-Dichlorobenzene

3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine

1,4-Dichloro-2-butene

1,1-Dichloroethane

1,2-Dichloroethane

1,1-Dichloroethylene

Dichloroisopropyl ether 

Dichloromethane @ 

2,4-Dichlorophenol

2,6-Dichlorophenol

1,2-Dichloropropane

1,3-Dichloropropene

Dieldrin

alpha-Endosulfan

beta-Endosulfan

Endrin

Endrin aldehyde 

Heptachlor

Heptachlor epoxide 

Hexachlorobenzene

Hexachlorobutadiene

Hexachloroethane

Hexachlorophene

Hexachloropropene

Isodrin

Kepone

Methoxychlor

4,4′-Methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)

Methylene bromide 

Pentachlorobenzene

Pentachloroethane

Pentachloronitrobenzene (PCNB) 

Pentachlorophenol

Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) 

Pronamide

Silvex (2,4,5-TP) 

2,4,5-T

TDE

1,2,4,5-Tetrachlorobenzene

2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD) 

Tetrachloroethane

Tetrachloroethylene

2,3,4,6-Tetrachlorophenol

Toxaphene

1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene

1,1,1-Trichloroethane

1,1,2-Trichloroethane

Trichloroethylene

2,4,5-Trichlorophenol

2,4,6-Trichlorophenol

Tris(2,3-dibromopropyl) phosphate 

(g) Tank car loading and unloading. 

When placed for loading or unloading 

and before unsecuring any closure, a 

tank car must be protected against 

movement or coupling as follows: 

(1) Each hazmat employee who is responsible for loading or unloading a 

tank car must secure access to the 

track to prevent entry by other rail 

equipment, including motorized service 

vehicles. Derails, lined and locked 

switches, portable bumper blocks, or 

other equipment that provides an 

equivalent level of security may be 

used to satisfy this requirement. 

(2) Caution signs must be displayed 

on the track or on the tank cars to 

warn persons approaching the cars 

from the open end of the track and 

must be left up until after all closures 

are secured and the cars are in proper 

condition for transportation. The caution signs must be of metal or other 

durable material, rectangular, at 30.48 

cm (12 inches) high by 38.10 cm (15 

inches) wide, and bear the word 

‘‘STOP.’’ The word ‘‘STOP’’ must appear in letters at least 10.16 cm (4 

inches) high. The letters must be white 

on a blue background. Additional 

words, such as ‘‘Tank Car Connected’’ 

or ‘‘Crew at Work,’’ may also appear in 

white letters under the word ‘‘STOP.’’ 

(3) At least one wheel on the tank car 

must be blocked against movement in 

both directions, and the hand brakes 

must be set. If multiple tank cars are 

coupled together, sufficient hand 

brakes must be set and wheels blocked 

to prevent movement in both directions.

[Amdt. 173–245, 60 FR 49072, Sept. 21, 1995, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–245, 61 FR 33254, June 

26, 1996; Amdt. 173–256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 

1996; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33427, 

June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45379, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 

68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 

2003; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 70 FR 34075, 

June 13, 2005; 72 FR 25176, May 3, 2007; 72 FR 

55692, Oct. 1, 2007; 74 FR 1799, Jan. 13, 2009; 75 

FR 27215, May 14, 2010] 

§ 173.32 Requirements for the use of 

portable tanks. 

(a) General requirements. No person 

may offer a hazardous material for 

transportation in a portable tank except as authorized by this subchapter. 

(1) Except as otherwise provided in 

this subpart, no person may use a portable tank for the transportation of a 

hazardous material unless it meets the 

requirements of this subchapter. 

(2) No person may fill and offer for 

transportation a portable tank when 

452

§ 173.32 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

the prescribed periodic test or inspection under subpart G of part 180 of this 

subchapter has become due until the 

test or inspection has been successfully 

completed. This requirement does not 

apply to any portable tank filled prior 

to the test or inspection due date. 

(3) When a portable tank is used as a 

cargo tank motor vehicle, it must conform to all the requirements prescribed 

for cargo tank motor vehicles. (See 

§173.33.) 

(b) Substitute packagings. A particular 

Specification portable tank may be 

substituted for another portable tank 

as follows: 

(1) An IM or UN portable tank may 

be used whenever an IM or UN portable 

tank having less stringent requirements is authorized provided the portable tank meets or exceeds the requirements for pressure-relief devices, bottom outlets and any other special provisions specified in §172.102(c)(7)(vi) of 

this subchapter. 

(2) Where a Specification IM101 or 

IM102 portable tank is prescribed, a UN 

portable tank or Specification 51 portable tank otherwise conforming to the 

special commodity requirements of 

§172.102(c)(7) of this subchapter for the 

material to be transported may be 

used.

(3) A DOT Specification 51 portable 

tank may be used whenever a DOT 

Specification 56, 57, or 60 portable tank 

is authorized. A DOT Specification 60 

portable tank may be used whenever a 

DOT Specification 56 or 57 portable 

tank is authorized. A higher integrity 

tank used instead of a specified portable tank must meet the same design 

profile; for example, a DOT Specification 51 portable tank must be lined if 

used instead of a lined DOT Specification 60 portable tank. 

(4) A portable tank authorized by the 

Transport Canada TDG Regulations 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) may 

be used provided it conforms to the applicable requirements in §171.12 of this 

subchapter.

(c) Grandfather provisions for portable 

tanks—(1) Continued use of Specification 

56 and 57 portable tanks. Continued use 

of an existing portable tank constructed to DOT Specification 56 or 57 

is authorized only for a portable tank 

constructed before October 1, 1996. A 

stainless steel portable tank internally 

lined with polyethylene that was constructed on or before October 1, 1996, 

and that meets all requirements of 

DOT Specification 57 except for being 

equipped with a polypropylene discharge ball valve and polypropylene 

secondary discharge opening closure, 

may be marked as a Specification 57 

portable tank and used in accordance 

with the provisions of this section. 

(2) A DOT Specification 51, IM 101, or 

IM 102 portable tank may not be manufactured after January 1, 2003; however, 

such tanks may continue to be used for 

the transportation of a hazardous material provided they meet the requirements of this subchapter, including the 

specification requirements and the requirements of this subchapter for the 

transportation of the particular hazardous material according to the T 

codes in effect on September 30, 2001 or 

the new T codes in §172.102(c)(7)(i) (see 

§171.14(d)(4) for transitional provisions 

applicable to T codes), and provided 

the portable tanks conform to the periodic inspection and tests specified for 

the particular portable tank in subpart 

G of part 180 of this subchapter. After 

January 1, 2003, all newly manufactured portable tanks must conform to 

the requirements for the design, construction and approval of UN portable 

tanks as specified in §§178.273, 178.274, 

178.275, 178.276, 178.277 and part 180, subpart G, of this subchapter. 

(3) A DOT Specification portable 

tank manufactured prior to January 1, 

1992 that is equipped with a non-reclosing pressure relief device may continue in service for the hazardous materials for which it is authorized. Except for a DOT Specification 56 or 57 

portable tank, a DOT Specification 

portable tank manufactured after January 1, 1992, used for materials meeting 

the definition for Division 6.1 liquids, 

Packing Group I or II, Class 2 gases, or 

Class 3 or 4 liquids, must be equipped 

with a reclosing pressure relief valve 

having adequately sized venting capacity unless otherwise specified in this 

subchapter (see §§178.275(f)(1) and 

178.277 of this subchapter). 

(4) Any portable tank container constructed prior to May 15, 1950, complying with the requirements of either 

the ASME Code for Unfired Pressure 

453

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.32 

Vessels, 1946 Edition, or the API ASME 

Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1943 

Edition, may be used for the transportation of liquefied compressed gas, provided it fulfills all the requirements of 

the part and specifications for the particular gas or gases to be transported. 

Such portable tanks must be marked 

‘‘ICC Specification 51X’’ on the plate 

required by the specification, except as 

modified by any or all of the following: 

(i) Portable tanks designed and constructed in accordance with Pars. U–68, 

U–69, or U–201 of the ASME Code, 1943 

and 1946 editions, may be used. Portable tanks designed and constructed in 

accordance with Par. U–68 or Par. U–69 

may be re-rated at a working pressure 

25 percent in excess of the design pressure for which the portable tank was 

originally constructed. If the portable 

tank is re-rated, the re-rated pressure 

must be marked on the plate as follows: ‘‘Re-rated working pressure— 

psig’’.

(ii) Loading and unloading accessories, valves, piping, fittings, safety 

and gauging devices, do not have to 

comply with the requirements for the 

particular location on the portable 

tank.

(5) Any ICC Specification 50 portable 

tank fulfilling the requirements of that 

specification may be continued in service for transportation of a liquefied petroleum gas if it is retested every five 

years in accordance with the requirements in §180.605 of this subchapter. 

Use of existing portable tanks is authorized. New construction is not authorized.

(d) Determination of an authorized 

portable tank. Prior to filling and offering a portable tank for transportation, 

the shipper must ensure that the portable tank conforms to the authorized 

specification and meets the applicable 

requirements in this subchapter for the 

hazardous material. The shipper must 

ensure that the MAWP, design pressure 

or test pressure of the portable tank, 

as applicable, is appropriate for the 

hazardous material being transported. 

Determination of the applicable pressure must take into account the maximum pressure used to load or unload 

the hazardous material, the vapor pressure, static head and surge pressures of 

the hazardous material and the temperatures that the hazardous material 

will experience during transportation. 

(e) External inspection prior to filling. 

Each portable tank must be given a 

complete external inspection prior to 

filling. Any unsafe condition must be 

corrected prior to its being filled and 

offered for transportation. The external inspection shall include a visual inspection of: 

(1) The shell, piping, valves and other 

appurtenances for corroded areas, 

dents, defects in welds and other defects such as missing, damaged, or 

leaking gaskets; 

(2) All flanged connections or blank 

flanges for missing or loose nuts and 

bolts;

(3) All emergency devices for corrosion, distortion, or any damage or defect that could prevent their normal 

operation;

(4) All required markings on the tank 

for legibility; and 

(5) Any device for tightening manhole covers to ensure such devices are 

operative and adequate to prevent 

leakage at the manhole cover. 

(f) Loading requirements. (1) A hazardous material may not be loaded into 

a portable tank if the hazardous material would: 

(i) Damage the portable tank; 

(ii) React with the portable tank; or 

(iii) Otherwise compromise its product retention capability. 

(2) A hazardous material may not be 

loaded in a DOT Specification 51, DOT 

Specification 60, an IM or UN portable 

tank unless the portable tank has a 

pressure relief device that provides 

total relieving capacity meeting the 

requirements of this subchapter. 

(3) Except during a pressure test, a 

portable tank may not be subjected to 

a pressure greater than its marked 

maximum allowable working pressure 

or, when appropriate, its marked design pressure. 

(4) A portable tank may not be loaded to a gross mass greater than the 

maximum allowable gross mass specified on its identification plate. 

(5) Except for a non-flowable solid or 

a liquid with a viscosity of 2,680 

centistokes (millimeters squared per 

second) or greater at 20 °C (68 °F), an 

IM or UN portable tank, or compartment thereof, having a volume greater 

454

§ 173.32 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

than 7,500 L (1,980 gallons) may not be 

loaded to a filling density of more than 

20% and less than 80% by volume. This 

filling restriction does not apply if a 

portable tank is divided by partitions 

or surge plates into compartments of 

not more than 7,500 L (1,980 gallons) capacity; this portable tank must not be 

offered for transportation in an ullage 

condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge. 

(6) The outage for a portable tank 

may not be less than 2% at a temperature of 50 °C (122 °F) unless otherwise 

specified in this subchapter. For UN 

portable tanks, the applicable maximum filling limits apply as specified 

according to the assigned TP codes in 

Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this 

subchapter except when transported 

domestically.

(7) Each tell-tale indicator or pressure gauge located in the space between a frangible disc and a safety relief valve mounted in series must be 

checked after the tank is filled and 

prior to transportation to ensure that 

the frangible disc is leak free. Any 

leakage through the frangible disc 

must be corrected prior to offering the 

tank for transportation. 

(8) During filling, the temperature of 

the hazardous materials shall not exceed the limits of the design temperature range of the portable tank. 

(9) The maximum mass of liquefied 

compressed gas per liter (gallon) of 

shell capacity (kg/L or lbs./gal.) may 

not exceed the density of the liquefied 

compressed gas at 50 °C (122 °F). The 

portable tank must not be liquid full at 

60 °C (140 °F).

(g) Additional requirements for specific 

modal transport. In addition to other applicable requirements, the following 

apply:

(1) A portable tank containing a hazardous material may not be loaded 

onto a highway or rail transport vehicle unless loaded entirely within the 

horizontal outline of the vehicle, without overhang or projection of any part 

of the tank assembly. 

(2) An IM or UN portable tank used 

for the transportation of flammable 

liquids by rail may not be fitted with 

non-reclosing pressure relief devices 

except in series with reclosing pressure 

relief valves. 

(3) A portable tank or Specification 

106A or 110A multi-unit tank car containing a hazardous material may not 

be offered for transportation aboard a 

passenger vessel unless: 

(i) The vessel is operating under a 

change to its character of vessel certification as defined in §171.8 of this 

subchapter; and 

(ii) The material is permitted to be 

transported aboard a passenger vessel 

in the §172.101 Table of this subchapter. 

(h) Additional general commodity-specific requirements. In addition to other 

applicable requirements, the following 

requirements apply: 

(1) Each uninsulated portable tank 

used for the transportation of a liquefied compressed gas must have an exterior surface finish that is significantly 

reflective, such as a light-reflecting 

color if painted, or a bright reflective 

metal or other material if unpainted. 

(2) If a hazardous material is being 

transported in a molten state, the portable tank must be thermally insulated 

with suitable insulation material of 

sufficient thickness that the overall 

thermal conductance is not more than 

0.080 Btu per hour per square foot per 

degree Fahrenheit differential. 

(3) No person may offer a liquid hazardous material of Class 3, PG I or II, 

or PG III with a flash point of less than 

100 °F (38 °C); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or 

Division 6.1, PG I or II, in an IM or UN 

portable tank that is equipped with a 

bottom outlet as authorized in Column 

(7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter by assignment of a T Code in 

the appropriate proper shipping name 

entry, for unloading to a facility while 

it remains on a transport vehicle with 

the power unit attached unless— 

(i) The tank outlets conform to 

§178.275(d)(3) of this subchapter; or 

(ii) The facility at which the IM or 

UN portable tank is to be unloaded 

conforms to the requirements in 

§177.834(o) of this subchapter. 

(i) Additional requirements for portable 

tanks other than IM specification and UN 

portable tanks. (1) The bursting 

strength of any piping and fittings 

must be at least four times the design 

pressure of the tank, and at least four 

times the pressure to which, in any instance, it may be subjected in service 

by the action of a pump or other device 

455

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.32 

(not including safety relief valves) that 

may subject piping to pressures greater 

than the design pressure of the tank. 

(2) Pipe joints must be threaded, 

welded or flanged. If threaded pipe is 

used, the pipe and pipe fittings must 

not be lighter than Schedule 80 weight. 

Where copper tubing is permitted, 

joints must be brazed or be of equally 

strong metal union type. The melting 

point of brazing material may not be 

lower than 1,000 °F (537.8 °C). The method of joining tubing must not decrease 

the strength of the tubing such as by 

the cutting of threads. 

(3) Non-malleable metals may not be 

used in the construction of valves or 

fittings.

(4) Suitable provision must be made 

in every case to allow for expansion, 

contraction, jarring and vibration of 

all pipe. Slip joints may not be used for 

this purpose. 

(5) Piping and fittings must be 

grouped in the smallest practicable 

space and must be protected from damage as required by the specification. 

(6) All piping, valves and fittings on 

every portable tank must be leakage 

tested with gas or air after installation 

and proved tight at not less than the 

design pressure of the portable tank on 

which they are used. In the event of replacement, all such piping, valves, or 

fittings must be tested in accordance 

with the requirements of this section 

before the portable tank is returned to 

transportation service. The requirements of this section apply to all hoses 

used on portable tanks, except that 

hoses may be tested either before or 

after installation on the portable tank. 

(7) All materials used in the construction of portable tanks and their 

appurtenances may not be subject to 

destructive attack by the contents of 

the portable tank. 

(8) No aluminum, copper, silver, zinc 

nor their alloys may be used. Brazed 

joints may not be used. All parts of a 

portable tank and its appurtenances 

used for anhydrous ammonia must be 

steel.

(9) Each outlet of a portable tank 

used for the transportation of non-refrigerated liquefied compressed gases, 

except carbon dioxide, must be provided with a suitable automatic excessflow valve (see definition in §178.337– 

1(g) of this subchapter). The valve must 

be located inside the portable tank or 

at a point outside the portable tank 

where the line enters or leaves the 

portable tank. The valve seat must be 

located inside the portable tank or 

may be located within a welded flange 

or its companion flange, or within a 

nozzle or within a coupling. The installation must be made in such a manner 

as to reasonably assure that any undue 

strain which causes failure requiring 

functioning of the valve shall cause 

failure in such a manner that it will 

not impair the operation of the valve. 

(i) A safety device connection or liquid level gauging device that is constructed so that the outward flow of 

the tank contents will not exceed that 

passed by an opening of 0.1397 cm 

(0.0550 inches) is not required to be 

equipped with excess-flow valves. 

(ii) An excess-flow valve must close 

automatically if the flow reaches the 

rated flow of gas or liquid specified by 

the original valve manufacturer when 

piping mounted directly on the valve is 

sheared off before the first valve, 

pump, or fitting downstream from the 

excess flow valve. 

(iii) An excess-flow valve may be designed with a by-pass, not to exceed a 

0.1016 cm (0.040 inches) diameter opening to allow equalization of pressure. 

(iv) Filling and discharge lines must 

be provided with manually operated 

shut-off valves located as close to the 

tank as practical. Unless this valve is 

manually operable at the valve, the 

line must also have a manual shut-off 

valve. The use of ‘‘Stop-Check’’ valves 

to satisfy with one valve the requirements of this section is forbidden. For 

portable tanks used for refrigerated 

liquefied gases, a ‘‘stop check’’ valve 

may be used on the vapor side of the 

pressure buildup circuit. 

(10) Each portable tank used for carbon dioxide or nitrous oxide must be 

lagged with a suitable insulation material of such thickness that the overall 

thermal conductance is not more than 

0.08 Btu per square foot per degree 

Fahrenheit differential in temperature 

per hour. The conductance must be determined at 60 °Fahrenheit. Insulation 

material used on portable tanks for nitrous oxide must be noncombustible. 

456

§ 173.33 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(11) Refrigerating or heating coils 

must be installed in portable tanks 

used for carbon dioxide and nitrous 

oxide. Such coils must be tested externally to at least the same pressure as 

the test pressure of the portable tank. 

The coils must also be tested internally to at least twice the working 

pressure of the heating or refrigerating 

system to be used, but in no case less 

than the test pressure of the portable 

tank. Such coils must be securely anchored. In the event of leakage, the refrigerant or heating medium to be circulated through the coil or coils must 

have no adverse chemical reaction with 

the portable tank or its contents. 

(12) Excess flow valves are not required for portable tanks used for the 

transport of refrigerated liquefied 

gases.

[66 FR 33427, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 

FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 32413, May 30, 

2003; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75742, 

75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 

72 FR 25176, May 3, 2007] 

§ 173.33 Hazardous materials in cargo 

tank motor vehicles. 

(a) General requirements. (1) No person 

may offer or accept a hazardous material for transportation in a cargo tank 

motor vehicle except as authorized by 

this subchapter. 

(2) Two or more materials may not be 

loaded or accepted for transportation 

in the same cargo tank motor vehicle 

if, as a result of any mixture of the materials, an unsafe condition would 

occur, such as an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure or heat, or the 

release of toxic vapors. 

(3) No person may fill and offer for 

transportation a specification cargo 

tank motor vehicle for which the prescribed periodic retest or reinspection 

under subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter is past due until the retest or 

inspection has been successfully completed. This requirement does not 

apply to a cargo tank supplied by a 

motor carrier who is other than the 

person offering the hazardous material 

for transportation (see §180.407(a)(1) of 

this subchapter), or to any cargo tank 

filled prior to the retest or inspection 

due date. 

(b) Loading requirements. (1) A hazardous material may not be loaded in a 

cargo tank if during transportation 

any part of the tank in contact with 

the hazardous material lading would 

have a dangerous reaction with the 

hazardous material. 

(2) A cargo tank may not be loaded 

with a hazardous material that will 

have an adverse effect on the tank’s integrity or— 

(i) May combine chemically with any 

residue or contaminants in the tank to 

produce an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure, release of toxic vapors or other unsafe condition. 

(ii)–(iii) [Reserved] 

(iv) May severely corrode or react 

with the tank material at any concentration and temperature that will 

exist during transportation. 

(v) Is prohibited by §173.21 or §173.24 

of this subchapter. 

(3) Air pressure in excess of ambient 

atmospheric pressure may not be used 

to load or unload any lading which 

may create an air-enriched mixture 

within the flammability range of the 

lading in the vapor space of the tank. 

(4) To prevent cargo tank rupture in 

a loading or unloading accident, the 

loading or unloading rate used must be 

less than or equal to that indicated on 

the cargo tank specification plate, except as specified in §173.318(b)(6). If no 

loading or unloading rate is marked on 

the specification plate, the loading or 

unloading rate and pressure used must 

be limited such that the pressure in the 

tank may not exceed 130% of the 

MAWP.

(c) Maximum Lading Pressure. (1) Prior 

to loading and offering a cargo tank 

motor vehicle for transportation with 

material that requires the use of a 

specification cargo tank, the person 

must confirm that the cargo tank 

motor vehicle conforms to the specification required for the lading and 

that the MAWP of the cargo tank is 

greater than or equal to the largest 

pressure obtained under the following 

conditions:

(i) For compressed gases and certain 

refrigerated liquids that are not cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in 

§173.315 of this subchapter. 

(ii) For cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in §173.318 of this subchapter.

457

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.33 

(iii) For liquid hazardous materials 

loaded in DOT specification cargo 

tanks equipped with a 1 psig normal 

vent, the sum of the tank static head 

plus 1 psig. In addition, for hazardous 

materials loaded in these cargo tanks, 

the vapor pressure of the lading at 115 

°F must be not greater than 1 psig, except for gasoline transported in accordance with Special Provision B33 in 

§172.102(c)(3) of this subchapter. 

(iv) For liquid hazardous materials 

not covered in paragraph (c)(1)(i), (ii), 

or (iii) of this section, the sum of the 

vapor pressure of the lading at 115 °F,

plus the tank static head exerted by 

the lading, plus any pressure exerted 

by the gas padding, including air in the 

ullage space or dome. 

(v) The pressure prescribed in subpart 

B, D, E, F, G, or H of this part, as applicable.

(vi) The maximum pressure in the 

tank during loading or unloading. 

(2) Any Specification MC 300, MC 301, 

MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306 or MC 

312, cargo tank motor vehicle with no 

marked design pressure or marked with 

a design pressure of 3 psig or less may 

be used for an authorized lading where 

the pressure derived from §173.33(c)(1) 

is less than or equal to 3 psig. After December 31, 1990, a cargo tank may not 

be loaded and offered for transportation unless marked or remarked with 

an MAWP or design pressure in accordance with 49 CFR 180.405(k). 

(3) Any Specification MC 310 or MC 

311 cargo tank motor vehicle may be 

used for an authorized lading where the 

pressure derived from §173.33(c)(1) is 

less than or equal to the MAWP or 

MWP, respectively, as marked on the 

specification plate. 

(4) Any cargo tank marked or certified before August 31, 1995, marked 

with a design pressure rather than an 

MAWP may be used for an authorized 

lading where the largest pressure derived from §173.33(c)(1) is less than or 

equal to the design pressure marked on 

the cargo tank. 

(5) Any material that meets the definition of a Division 6.1, Packing Group 

I or II (poisonous liquid) material must 

be loaded in a cargo tank motor vehicle having a MAWP of 25 psig or greater.

(6) Substitute packagings. Unless otherwise specified, where MC 307, MC 312, 

DOT 407 or DOT 412 cargo tanks are authorized, minimum tank design pressure is 172.4 kPa (25 psig) for any Packing Group I or Packing Group II liquid 

lading that meets more than one hazard class definition. 

(d) Relief system. (1) Non-reclosing 

pressure relief devices are not authorized in any cargo tank except when in 

series with a reclosing pressure relief 

device. However, a cargo tank marked 

or certified before August 31, 1995 

which is fitted with non-reclosing pressure relief devices may continue to be 

used in any hazardous material service 

for which it is authorized. The requirements in this paragraph do not apply 

to MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo 

tanks.

(2) Each cargo tank motor vehicle 

used to transport a liquid hazardous 

material with a gas pad must have a 

pressure relief system that provides 

the venting capacity prescribed in 

§178.345–10(e) of this subchapter. The 

requirements in this paragraph do not 

apply to MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 

cargo tanks. 

(3) A cargo tank motor vehicle made 

to a specification listed in column 1 

may have pressure relief devices or 

outlets conforming to the applicable 

specification to which the tank was 

constructed, or the pressure relief devices or outlets may be modified to 

meet the applicable requirement for 

the specification listed in column 2 

without changing the markings on the 

tank specification plate. The venting 

capacity requirements of the original 

DOT cargo tank specification must be 

met whenever a pressure relief valve is 

modified.

Column 1 Column 2 

MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, 

MC 303, MC 305.

MC 306 or DOT 406. 

MC 306 .................................. DOT 406. 

MC 304 .................................. MC 307 or DOT 407. 

MC 307 .................................. DOT 407. 

MC 310, MC 311 ................... MC 312 or DOT 412. 

MC 312 .................................. DOT 412. 

MC 330 .................................. MC 331. 

(e) Retention of hazardous materials in 

product piping during transportation. 

DOT specification cargo tanks used for 

the transportation of any material 

that is a Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) 

458

§ 173.34 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

material, oxidizer liquid, liquid organic 

peroxide or corrosive liquid (corrosive 

to skin only) may not be transported 

with hazardous materials lading retained in the piping, unless the cargo 

tank motor vehicle is equipped with 

bottom damage protection devices 

meeting the requirements of §178.337–10 

or §178.345–8(b) of this subchapter, or 

the accident damage protection requirements of the specification under 

which it was manufactured. This requirement does not apply to a residue 

which remains after the piping is 

drained. A sacrificial device (see 

§178.345–1 of this subchapter) may not 

be used to satisfy the accident damage 

protection requirements of this paragraph.

(f) An MC 331 type cargo tank may be 

used where MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, 

DOT 406, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type 

cargo tanks are authorized. An MC 307, 

MC 312, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type cargo 

tank may be used where MC 306 or DOT 

406 type cargo tanks are authorized. A 

higher integrity tank used instead of a 

specified tank must meet the same design profile (for example, an MC 331 

cargo tank must be lined if used in 

place of a lined MC 312 cargo tank.) 

(g) Remote control of self-closing stop 

valves—MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo 

tanks. Each liquid or vapor discharge 

opening in an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo 

tank and each liquid filling and liquid 

discharge line in an MC 338 cargo tank 

must be provided with a remotely controlled internal self-closing stop valve, 

except when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo 

tank is marked and used exclusively to 

transport carbon dioxide, or except 

when an MC 338 is used to transport 

argon, carbon dioxide, helium, krypton, neon, nitrogen, and xenon. However, if the cargo tank motor vehicle 

was certified before January 1, 1995, 

this requirement is applicable only 

when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank is 

used to transport a flammable liquid, 

flammable gas, hydrogen chloride (refrigerated liquid), or anhydrous ammonia; or when an MC 338 cargo tank is 

used to transport flammable ladings. 

(h) A cargo tank motor vehicle authorized by the Transport Canada TDG 

Regulations (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) may be used provided it conforms to the applicable requirements 

in §171.12 of this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–212, 54 FR 25005, June 12, 1989] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.33, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.34 [Reserved] 

§ 173.35 Hazardous materials in IBCs. 

(a) No person may offer or accept a 

hazardous material for transportation 

in an IBC except as authorized by this 

subchapter. Each IBC used for the 

transportation of hazardous materials 

must conform to the requirements of 

its specification and regulations for the 

transportation of the particular commodity. A specification IBC, for which 

the prescribed periodic retest or inspection under subpart D of part 180 of 

this subchapter is past due, may not be 

filled and offered for transportation 

until the retest or inspection have been 

successfully completed. This requirement does not apply to any IBC filled 

prior to the retest or inspection due 

date.

(b) Initial use and reuse of IBCs. (Also

see §180.352 of this subchapter.) An IBC 

other than a multiwall paper IBC (13M1 

and 13M2) may be reused. If an inner 

liner is required, the inner liner must 

be replaced before each reuse. Before 

an IBC is filled and offered for transportation, the IBC and its service 

equipment must be given an external 

visual inspection, by the person filling 

the IBC, to ensure that: 

(1) The IBC is free from corrosion, 

contamination, cracks, cuts, or other 

damage which would render it unable 

to pass the prescribed design type test 

to which it is certified and marked; and 

(2) The IBC is marked in accordance 

with requirements in §178.703 of this 

subchapter. Additional marking allowed for each design type may be 

present. Required markings that are 

missing, damaged or difficult to read 

must be restored or returned to original condition. 

(c) A metal IBC, or a part thereof, 

subject to thinning by mechanical abrasion or corrosion due to the lading, 

must be protected by providing a suitable increase in thickness of material, 

459

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.35 

a lining or some other suitable method 

of protection. Increased thickness for 

corrosion or abrasion protection must 

be added to the wall thickness specified 

in §178.705(c)(1)(iv) of this subchapter. 

(d) Notwithstanding requirements in 

§173.24b of this subpart, when filling an 

IBC with liquids, sufficient ullage must 

be left to ensure that, at the mean bulk 

temperature of 50 °C (122 °F), the IBC is 

not filled to more than 98 percent of its 

water capacity. 

(e) Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series, the system 

nearest to the hazardous material 

being carried must be closed first. 

(f) During transportation— 

(1) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of the IBC; and 

(2) Each IBC must be securely fastened to or contained within the transport unit. 

(g) Each IBC used for transportation 

of solids which may become liquid at 

temperatures likely to be encountered 

during transportation must also be capable of containing the substance in 

the liquid state. 

(2) Liquids having a vapor pressure 

greater than 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50 °C

(122 °F) or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55 °C

(131 °F) may not be transported in 

metal IBCs. 

(1) A rigid plastic or composite IBC 

may only be filled with a liquid having 

a vapor pressure less than or equal to 

the greater of the following two values: 

the first value is determined from any 

of the methods in paragraphs (h)(1) (i), 

(ii) or (iii) of this section. The second 

value is determined by the method in 

paragraph (h)(1)(iv) of this section. 

(i) The gauge pressure (pressure in 

the IBC above ambient atmospheric 

pressure) measured in the IBC at 55 °C

(131 °F). This gauge pressure must not 

exceed two-thirds of the marked test 

pressure and must be determined after 

the IBC was filled and closed at 15 °C

(60 °F) to less than or equal to 98 percent of its capacity. 

(ii) The absolute pressure (vapor 

pressure of the hazardous material plus 

atmospheric pressure) in the IBC at 50 

°C (122 °F). This absolute pressure must 

not exceed four-sevenths of the sum of 

the marked test pressure and 100 kPa 

(14.5 psia). 

(iii) The absolute pressure (vapor 

pressure of the hazardous material plus 

atmospheric pressure) in the IBC at 55 

°C (131 °F). This absolute pressure must 

not exceed two-thirds of the sum of the 

marked test pressure and 100 kPa (14.5 

psia).

(iv) Twice the static pressure of the 

substance, measured at the bottom of 

the IBC. This value must not be less 

than twice the static pressure of water. 

(2) Gauge pressure (pressure in the 

IBC above ambient atmospheric pressure) in metal IBC must not exceed 110 

kPa (16 psig) at 50 °C (122 °F) or 130 kPa 

(18.9 psig) at 55 °C (131 °F).

(i) The requirements in this section 

do not apply to DOT-56 or –57 portable 

tanks.

(j) No IBC may be filled with a Packing Group I liquid. Rigid plastic, composite, flexible, wooden or fiberboard 

IBC used to transport Packing Group I 

solid materials may not exceed 1.5 

cubic meters (53 cubic feet) capacity. 

For Packing Group I solids, a metal 

IBC may not exceed 3 cubic meters (106 

cubic feet) capacity. 

(k) When an IBC is used for the transportation of liquids with a flash point 

of 60 °C (140 °F) (closed cup) or lower, or 

powders with the potential for dust explosion, measures must be taken during product loading and unloading to 

prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge.

(l) IBC filling limits. (1) Except as provided in this section, an IBC may not 

be filled with a hazardous material in 

excess of the maximum gross mass 

marked on that container. 

(2) An IBC which is tested and 

marked for Packing Group II liquid 

materials may be filled with a Packing 

Group III liquid material to a gross 

mass not exceeding 1.5 times the maximum gross mass marked on that container, if all the performance criteria 

can still be met at the higher gross 

mass.

(3) An IBC which is tested and 

marked for liquid hazardous materials 

may be filled with a solid hazardous 

material to a gross mass not exceeding 

the maximum gross mass marked on 

that container. In addition, an IBC intended for the transport of liquids 

which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid materials may be 

460

§ 173.36 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

filled with a Packing Group III solid 

hazardous material to a gross mass not 

exceeding the marked maximum gross 

mass multiplied by 1.5 if all the performance criteria can still be met at 

the higher gross mass. 

(4) An IBC which is tested and 

marked for Packing Group I solid materials may be filled with a Packing 

Group II solid material to a gross mass 

not exceeding the maximum gross mass 

marked on that container, multiplied 

by 1.5, if all the performance criteria 

can be met at the higher gross mass; or 

a Packing Group III solid material to a 

gross mass not exceeding the maximum 

gross mass marked on the IBC, multiplied by 2.25, if all the performance criteria can be met at the higher gross 

mass. An IBC which is tested and 

marked for Packing Group II solid materials may be filled with a Packing 

Group III solid material to a gross 

mass not exceeding the maximum gross 

mass marked on the IBC, multiplied by 

1.5.

[Amdt. 173–238, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 

4, 1995; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45380, 

45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 

71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 75 FR 5393, Feb. 2, 

2010]

§ 173.36 Hazardous materials in Large 

Packagings. 

(a) No person may offer or accept a 

hazardous material for transportation 

in a Large Packaging except as authorized by this subchapter. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, no 

Large Packaging may be filled with a 

Packing Group I or II material. Each 

Large Packaging used for the transportation of hazardous materials must 

conform to the requirements of its 

specification and regulations for the 

transportation of the particular commodity.

(b) Packaging design. (1) Inner packaging closures. A Large Packaging containing liquid hazardous materials 

must be packed so that closures on 

inner packagings are upright. 

(2) Flexible Large Packagings. Flexible

Large Packagings (e.g., 51H) are only 

authorized for use with flexible inner 

packagings.

(3) Friction. The nature and thickness 

of the outer packaging must be such 

that friction during transportation is 

not likely to generate an amount of 

heat sufficient to dangerously alter the 

chemical stability of the contents. 

(4) Securing and cushioning. Inner

packagings of Large Packagings must 

be packed, secured and cushioned to 

prevent their breakage or leakage and 

to control their shifting within the 

outer packaging under conditions normally incident to transportation. Cushioning material must not be capable of 

reacting dangerously with the contents 

of the inner packagings or having its 

protective properties significantly 

weakened in the event of leakage. 

(5) Metallic devices. Nails, staples and 

other metallic devices must not protrude into the interior of the outer 

packaging in such a manner as to be 

likely to damage inner packagings or 

receptacles.

(c) Initial use and reuse of Large Packagings. A Large Packaging may be reused. If an inner packaging is constructed of paper or flexible plastic, 

the inner packaging must be replaced 

before each reuse. Before a Large Packaging is filled and offered for transportation, the Large Packaging must be 

given an external visual inspection, by 

the person filling the Large Packaging, 

to ensure: 

(1) The Large Packaging is free from 

corrosion, contamination, cracks, cuts, 

or other damage which would render it 

unable to pass the prescribed design 

type test to which it is certified and 

marked; and 

(2) The Large Packaging is marked in 

accordance with requirements in 

§178.910 of this subchapter. Additional 

marking allowed for each design type 

may be present. Required markings 

that are missing, damaged or difficult 

to read must be restored or returned to 

original condition. 

(d) During transportation— 

(1) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of the Large Packaging; and 

(2) Each Large Packaging must be securely fastened to or contained within 

the transport unit. 

(e) Each Large Packaging used for 

transportation of solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to 

be encountered during transportation 

may not be transported in paper or 

461

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.40 

fiber inner packagings. The inner packagings must be capable of containing 

the substance in the liquid state. 

(f) Liquid hazardous materials may 

only be offered for transportation in 

inner packagings appropriately resistant to an increase of internal pressure 

likely to develop during transportation.

(g) A Large Packaging used to transport hazardous materials may not exceed 3 cubic meters (106 cubic feet) capacity.

(h) Mixed contents. (1) An outer Large 

Packaging may contain more than one 

hazardous material only when— 

(i) The inner and outer packagings 

used for each hazardous material conform to the relevant packaging sections of this part applicable to that 

hazardous material, and not result in a 

violation of §173.21; 

(ii) The package as prepared for shipment meets the performance tests prescribed in part 178 of this subchapter 

for the hazardous materials contained 

in the package; 

(iii) Corrosive materials (except 

ORM–D) in bottles are further packed 

in securely closed inner receptacles before packing in outer packagings; and 

(iv) For transportation by aircraft, 

the total net quantity does not exceed 

the lowest permitted maximum net 

quantity per package as shown in Column 9a or 9b, as appropriate, of the 

§172.101 table. The permitted maximum 

net quantity must be calculated in 

kilograms if a package contains both a 

liquid and a solid. 

(2) A packaging containing inner 

packagings of Division 6.2 materials 

may not contain other hazardous materials, except dry ice. 

(i) When a Large Packaging is used 

for the transportation of liquids with a 

flash point of 60.5 °C (141 °F) (closed 

cup) or lower, or powders with the potential for dust explosion, measures 

must be taken during product loading 

and unloading to prevent a dangerous 

electrostatic discharge. 

[75 FR 5393, Feb. 2, 2010] 

§ 173.40 General packaging requirements for toxic materials packaged 

in cylinders. 

When this section is referenced for a 

Hazard Zone A or B hazardous material 

elsewhere in this subchapter, the requirements in this section are applicable to cylinders used for that material. 

(a) Authorized cylinders. (1) A cylinder 

must conform to a DOT specification 

or a UN standard prescribed in subpart 

C of part 178 of this subchapter, except 

that acetylene cylinders and non-refillable cylinders are not authorized. The 

use of UN tubes and MEGCs is prohibited for Hazard Zone A materials. 

(2) The use of a specification 3AL cylinder made of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 

is prohibited for a Division 2.3 Hazard 

Zone A material or a Division 6.1 Hazard Zone A material. 

(3) A UN composite cylinder certified 

to ISO–11119–3 is not authorized for a 

Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A or B material.

(4) For UN seamless cylinders used 

for Hazard Zone A materials, the maximum water capacity is 85 L. 

(b) Outage and pressure requirements. 

For DOT specification cylinders, the 

pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of Hazard 

Zone A and Hazard Zone B materials 

may not exceed the service pressure of 

the cylinder. Sufficient outage must be 

provided so that the cylinder will not 

be liquid full at 55 °C (131 °F).

(c) Closures. Each cylinder containing 

a Hazard Zone A material must be 

closed with a plug or valve conforming 

to the following: 

(1) Each plug or valve must have a 

taper-threaded connection directly to 

the cylinder and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the cylinder without damage or leakage. 

(2) Each valve must be of the 

packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the packed 

type with an assembly made gas-tight 

by means of a seal cap with gasketed 

joint attached to the valve body or the 

cylinder to prevent loss of material 

through or past the packing. 

(3) Each valve outlet must be sealed 

by a threaded cap or threaded solid 

plug and inert gasketing material. 

(4) The materials of construction for 

the cylinder, valves, plugs, outlet caps, 

luting, and gaskets must be compatible 

with each other and with the lading. 

(d) Additional handling protection. 

Each cylinder or cylinder overpack 

combination offered for transportation 

462

§ 173.50 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

containing a Division 2.3 or 6.1 Hazard 

Zone A or B material must conform to 

the valve damage protection performance requirements of this section. In 

addition to the requirements of this 

section, overpacks must conform to the 

overpack provisions of §173.25. 

(1) DOT specification cylinders must 

conform to the following: 

(i) Each cylinder with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.03 mm 

(0.08 inch) and each cylinder that does 

not have fitted valve protection must 

be overpacked in a box. The box must 

conform to overpack provisions in 

§173.25. Box and valve protection must 

be of sufficient strength to protect all 

parts of the cylinder and valve, if any, 

from deformation and breakage resulting from a drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) or more 

onto a non-yielding surface, such as 

concrete or steel, impacting at an orientation most likely to cause damage. 

‘‘Deformation’’means a cylinder or 

valve that is bent, distorted, mangled, 

misshapen, twisted, warped, or in a 

similar condition. 

(ii) Each cylinder with a valve must 

be equipped with a protective metal 

cap, other valve protection device, or 

an overpack which is sufficient to protect the valve from breakage or leakage resulting from a drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) 

onto a non-yielding surface, such as 

concrete or steel. Impact must be at an 

orientation most likely to cause damage.

(2) Each UN cylinder containing a 

Hazard Zone A or Hazard Zone B material must have a minimum test pressure in accordance with P200 of the UN 

Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of 

this subchapter). For Hazard Zone A 

gases, the cylinder must have a minimum wall thickness of 3.5 mm if made 

of aluminum alloy or 2 mm if made of 

steel or, alternatively, cylinders may 

be packed in a rigid outer packaging 

that meets the Packing Group I performance level when tested as prepared 

for transport, and that is designed and 

constructed to protect the cylinder and 

valve from puncture or damage that 

may result in release of the gas. 

(e) Interconnection. Cylinders may not 

be manifolded or connected. This provision does not apply to MEGCs containing Hazard Zone B materials in accordance with §173.312. 

[67 FR 51642, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 

FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 24660, May 8, 

2003; 71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006] 

Subpart C—Definitions, Classification and Packaging for Class 

1 

SOURCE: Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 

1990, unless otherwise noted. 

§ 173.50 Class 1—Definitions. 

(a) Explosive. For the purposes of this 

subchapter, an explosive means any substance or article, including a device, 

which is designed to function by explosion (i.e., an extremely rapid release of 

gas and heat) or which, by chemical reaction within itself, is able to function 

in a similar manner even if not designed to function by explosion, unless 

the substance or article is otherwise 

classed under the provisions of this 

subchapter. The term includes a pyrotechnic substance or article, unless the 

substance or article is otherwise 

classed under the provisions of this 

subchapter.

(b) Explosives in Class 1 are divided 

into six divisions as follows: 

(1) Division 1.1 consists of explosives 

that have a mass explosion hazard. A 

mass explosion is one which affects almost the entire load instantaneously. 

(2) Division 1.2 consists of explosives 

that have a projection hazard but not a 

mass explosion hazard. 

(3) Division 1.3 consists of explosives 

that have a fire hazard and either a 

minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard. 

(4) Division 1.4 consists of explosives 

that present a minor explosion hazard. 

The explosive effects are largely confined to the package and no projection 

of fragments of appreciable size or 

range is to be expected. An external 

fire must not cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire 

contents of the package. 

463

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.52 

1The probability of transition from burning to detonation is greater when large quantities are transported in a vessel. 2The risk from articles of Division 1.6 is 

limited to the explosion of a single article. 

(5) Division 1.5 1 consists of very insensitive explosives. This division is 

comprised of substances which have a 

mass explosion hazard but are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition 

from burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport. 

(6) Division 1.6 2 consists of extremely 

insensitive articles which do not have a 

mass explosive hazard. This division is 

comprised of articles which contain 

only extremely insensitive detonating 

substances and which demonstrate a 

negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 

45183, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003] 

§ 173.51 Authorization to offer and 

transport explosives. 

(a) Unless otherwise provided in this 

subpart, no person may offer for transportation or transport an explosive, 

unless it has been tested and classed 

and approved by the Associate Administrator (§173.56). 

(b) Reports of explosives approved by 

the Department of Defense or the Department of Energy must be filed with, 

and receive acknowledgement in writing by, the Associate Administrator 

prior to such explosives being offered 

for transportation. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001] 

§ 173.52 Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives. 

(a) The classification code for an explosive, which is assigned by the Associate Administrator in accordance with 

this subpart, consists of the division 

number followed by the compatibility 

group letter. Compatibility group letters are used to specify the controls for 

the transportation, and storage related 

thereto, of explosives and to prevent an 

increase in hazard that might result if 

certain types of explosives were stored 

or transported together. Transportation compatibility requirements for 

carriers are prescribed in §§174.81, 

175.78. 176.83 and 177.848 of this subchapter for transportation by rail, air, 

vessel, and public highway, respectively, and storage incidental thereto. 

(b) Compatibility groups and classification codes for the various types of 

explosives are set forth in the following 

tables. Table 1 sets forth compatibility 

groups and classification codes for substances and articles described in the 

first column of table 1. Table 2 shows 

the number of classification codes that 

are possible within each explosive division. Altogether, there are 35 possible 

classification codes for explosives. 

TABLE 1—CLASSIFICATION CODES

Description of substances or article to be classified 

Compatibility

group

Classification

code

Primary explosive substance ............................................................................................................................ A 1.1A 

Article containing a primary explosive substance and not containing two or more effective protective features. Some articles, such as detonators for blasting, detonator assemblies for blasting and primers, 

cap-type, are included, even though they do not contain primary explosives..

B 1.1B 

1.2B

1.4B

Propellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or article containing such explosive substance.C 1.1C 

1.2C

1.3C

1.4C

Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article containing a secondary detonating 

explosive substance, in each case without means of initiation and without a propelling charge, or article 

containing a primary explosive substance and containing two or more effective protective features.

D 1.1D 

1.2D

1.4D

1.5D

Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, without means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquid).E 1.1E 

1.2E

1.4E

464

§ 173.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

TABLE 1—CLASSIFICATION CODES—Continued

Description of substances or article to be classified 

Compatibility

group

Classification

code

Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquid) or without a propelling charge.

F 1.1F 

1.2F

1.3F

1.4F

Pyrotechnic substance or article containing a pyrotechnic substance, or article containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating, incendiary, tear-producing or smoke-producing substance (other 

than a water-activated article or one containing white phosphorus, phosphide or flammable liquid or gel 

or hypergolic liquid).

G 1.1G 

1.2G

1.3G

1.4G

Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus .......................................................... H 1.2H

1.3H

Article containing both an explosive substance and flammable liquid or gel .................................................. J 1.1J

1.2J

1.3J

Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent .................................................. K 1.2K

1.3K

Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and presenting a special risk (e.g., due 

to water-activation or presence of hybergolic liquids, phosphides or pyrophoric substances) needing isolation of each type.

L 1.1L 

1.2L

1.3L

Articles containing only extremely insensitive detonating substances. ........................................................... N 1.6N 

Substance or article so packed or designed that any hazardous effects arising from accidental functioning 

are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder or prohibit fire fighting or other emergency 

response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package.

S 1.4S 

TABLE 2—SCHEME OF CLASSIFICATION OF EXPLOSIVES, COMBINATION OF HAZARD DIVISION WITH

COMPATIBILITY GROUP

Compatibility group 

Hazard

division A B C D E F G H J K L N S A-S 

1.1 1.1A 1.1B 1.1C 1.1D 1.1E 1.1F 1.1G .......... 1.1J .......... 1.1L .......... .......... 9 

1.2 .......... 1.2B 1.2C 1.2D 1.2E 1.2F 1.2G 1.2H 1.2J 1.2K 1.2L .......... .......... 10 

1.3 .......... .......... 1.3C .......... .......... 1.3F 1.3G 1.3H 1.3J 1.3K 1.3L .......... .......... 7 

1.4 .......... 1.4B 1.4C 1.4D 1.4E 1.4F 1.4G .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 1.4S 7 

1.5 .......... .......... .......... 1.5D .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 1 

1.6 .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 1.6N .......... 1 

1.6 1 3 4 4 3 4 4 2 3 2 3 1 1 35 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 

1994; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001] 

§ 173.53 Provisions for using old classifications of explosives. 

Where the classification system in effect prior to January 1, 1991, is referenced in State or local laws, ordinances or regulations not pertaining to 

the transportation of hazardous materials, the following table may be used 

to compare old and new hazard class 

names:

Current classification Class name prior to Jan. 1, 1991 

Division 1.1 ....................... Class A explosives. 

Division 1.2 ....................... Class A or Class B explosives. 

Division 1 3 ....................... Class B explosive. 

Division 1.4 ....................... Class C explosives. 

Division 1.5 ....................... Blasting agents. 

Division 1.6 ....................... No applicable hazard class. 

§ 173.54 Forbidden explosives. 

Unless otherwise provided in this 

subchapter, the following explosives 

shall not be offered for transportation 

or transported: 

(a) An explosive that has not been approved in accordance with §173.56 of 

this subpart. 

(b) An explosive mixture or device 

containing a chlorate and also containing:

(1) An ammonium salt, including a 

substituted ammonium or quaternary 

ammonium salt; or 

(2) An acidic substance, including a 

salt of a weak base and a strong acid. 

(c) A leaking or damaged package or 

article containing an explosive. 

465

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.56 

(d) Propellants that are unstable, 

condemned or deteriorated. 

(e) Nitroglycerin, diethylene glycol 

dinitrate, or any other liquid explosives not specifically authorized by 

this subchapter. 

(f) A loaded firearm (except as provided in 49 CFR 1544.219). 

(g) Fireworks that combine an explosive and a detonator. 

(h) Fireworks containing yellow or 

white phosphorus. 

(i) A toy torpedo, the maximum outside dimension of which exceeds 23 mm 

(0.906 inch), or a toy torpedo containing 

a mixture of potassium chlorate, black 

antimony (antimony sulfide), and sulfur, if the weight of the explosive material in the device exceeds 0.26 g (0.01 

ounce).

(j) Explosives specifically forbidden 

in the §172.101 table of this subchapter. 

(k) Explosives not meeting the acceptance criteria specified in §173.57 of 

this subchapter. 

(l) An explosive article with its 

means of initiation or ignition installed, unless approved in accordance 

with §173.56. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; 67 FR 

61013, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003] 

§ 173.55 [Reserved] 

§ 173.56 New explosives—definition 

and procedures for classification 

and approval. 

(a) Definition of new explosive. For 

the purposes of this subchapter a new

explosive means an explosive produced 

by a person who: 

(1) Has not previously produced that 

explosive; or 

(2) Has previously produced that explosive but has made a change in the 

formulation, design or process so as to 

alter any of the properties of the explosive. An explosive will not be considered a ‘‘new explosive’’ if an agency 

listed in paragraph (b) of this section 

has determined, and confirmed in writing to the Associate Administrator, 

that there are no significant differences in hazard characteristics from 

the explosive previously approved. 

(b) Examination, classing and approval. Except as provided in paragraph (j) of this section, no person may 

offer a new explosive for transportation 

unless that person has specified to the 

examining agency the ranges of composition of ingredients and compounds, 

showing the intended manufacturing 

tolerances in the composition of substances or design of articles which will 

be allowed in that material or device, 

and unless it has been examined, 

classed and approved as follows: 

(1) Except for an explosive made by 

or under the direction or supervision of 

the Department of Defense (DOD) or 

the Department of Energy (DOE), a 

new explosive must be examined and 

assigned a recommended shipping description, division and compatibility 

group, based on the tests and criteria 

prescribed in §§173.52, 173.57 and 173.58. 

The person requesting approval of the 

new explosive must submit to the Associate Administrator a report of the examination and assignment of a recommended shipping description, division, and compatibility group. If the 

Associate Administrator finds the approval request meets the regulatory 

criteria, the new explosive will be approved in writing and assigned an EX 

number. The examination must be performed by a person who is approved by 

the Associate Administrator under the 

provisions of subpart H of part 107 of 

this chapter and who— 

(i) Has (directly, or through an employee involved in the examination) at 

least ten years of experience in the examination, testing and evaluation of 

explosives;

(ii) Does not manufacture or market 

explosives, and is not controlled by or 

financially dependent on any entity 

that manufactures or markets explosives, and whose work with respect to 

explosives is limited to examination, 

testing and evaluation; and 

(iii) Is a resident of the United 

States.

(2) A new explosive made by or under 

the direction or supervision of a component of the DOD may be examined, 

classed, and concurred in by: 

(i) U.S. Army Technical Center for 

Explosives Safety (SMCAC-EST), Naval 

Sea Systems Command (SEA–9934), or 

Air Force Safety Agency (SEW), when 

approved by the Chairman, DOD Explosives Board, in accordance with the 

DOD Explosives Hazard Classification 

466

§ 173.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Procedures (IBR, see §171.7 of the subchapter); or 

(ii) The agencies and procedures specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. 

(3) A new explosive made by or under 

the direction or supervision of the Department of Energy (DOE) may be— 

(i) Examined by the DOE in accordance with the DOD Explosives Hazard 

Classification Procedures, and must be 

classed and approved by DOE; or 

(ii) Examined, classed, and approved 

in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of 

this section. 

(4) For a material shipped under the 

description of ‘‘ammonium nitrate-fuel 

oil mixture (ANFO)’’, the only test required for classification purposes is the 

Cap Sensitivity Test—Test Method 5(a) 

prescribed in the Explosive Test Manual (UN Manual of Tests and Criteria) 

(IBR, see §171.7 of the subchapter). The 

test must be performed by an agency 

listed in paragraph (b)(1), (b)(2), or 

(b)(3) of this section, the manufacturer, 

or the shipper. A copy of the test report must be submitted to the Associate Administrator before the material is offered for transportation, and a 

copy of the test report must be retained by the shipper for as long as 

that material is shipped. At a minimum, the test report must contain the 

name and address of the person or organization conducting the test, date of 

the test, quantitative description of 

the mixture, including prill size and 

porosity, and a description of the test 

results.

(c) Filing DOD or DOE approval report. DOD or DOE must file a copy of 

each approval, accompanied by supporting laboratory data, with the Associate Administrator and receive acknowledgement in writing before offering the new explosive for transportation, unless the new explosive is: 

(1) Being transported under paragraph (d) or (e) of this section; or 

(2) Covered by a national security 

classification currently in effect. 

(d) Transportation of explosive samples for examination. Notwithstanding 

the requirements of paragraph (b) of 

this section with regard to the transportation of a new explosive that has 

not been approved, a person may offer 

a sample of a new explosive for transportation, by railroad, highway, or vessel from the place where it was produced to an agency identified in paragraph (b) of this section, for examination if— 

(1) The new explosive has been assigned a tentative shipping description 

and class in writing by the testing 

agency;

(2) The new explosive is packaged as 

required by this part according to the 

tentative description and class assigned, unless otherwise specified in 

writing by the testing agency; and, 

(3) The package is labeled as required 

by this subchapter and the following is 

marked on the package: 

(i) The words ‘‘SAMPLE FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION’’; 

(ii) The net weight of the new explosive; and 

(iii) The tentative shipping name and 

identification number. 

(e) Transportation of unapproved explosives for developmental testing. 

Notwithstanding the requirements of 

paragraph (b) of this section, the owner 

of a new explosive that has not been 

examined or approved may transport 

that new explosive from the place 

where it was produced to an explosives 

testing range if— 

(1) It is not a primary (a 1.1A initiating) explosive or a forbidden explosive according to this subchapter; 

(2) It is described as a Division 1.1 explosive (substance or article) and is 

packed, marked, labeled, described on 

shipping papers and is otherwise offered for transportation in conformance with the requirements of this subchapter applicable to Division 1.1; 

(3) It is transported in a motor vehicle operated by the owner of the explosive; and 

(4) It is accompanied by a person, in 

addition to the operator of the motor 

vehicle, who is qualified by training 

and experience to handle the explosive. 

(f) Notwithstanding the requirements 

of paragraphs (b) and (d) of this section, the Associate Administrator may 

approve a new explosive on the basis of 

an approval issued for the explosive by 

the competent authority of a foreign 

government, or when examination of 

the explosive by a person approved by 

the Associate Administrator is impracticable, on the basis of reports of tests 

467

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.57 

conducted by disinterested third parties, or may approve the transportation of an explosives sample for the 

purpose of examination by a person approved by the Associate Administrator. 

(g) An explosive may be transported 

under subparts B or C of part 171 or 

§176.11 of this subchapter without the 

approval of the Associate Administrator as required by paragraph (b) of 

this section if the Associate Administrator has acknowledged in writing the 

acceptability of an approval issued by 

the competent authority of a foreign 

government pursuant to the provisions 

of the UN Recommendations, the ICAO 

Technical Instructions, the IMDG Code 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), or 

other national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations. In such a case, a copy of the foreign competent authority approval, 

and a copy of the written acknowledgement of its acceptance must accompany each shipment of that explosive. 

(h) The requirements of this section 

do not apply to cartridges, small arms 

which are: 

(1) Not a forbidden explosive under 

§173.54 of this subchapter; 

(2) Ammunition for rifle, pistol, or 

shotgun;

(3) Ammunition with inert projectile 

or blank ammunition; and 

(4) Ammunition not exceeding 50 caliber for rifle or pistol cartridges or 8 

gauge for shotgun shells. 

Cartridges, small arms meeting the criteria of this paragraph (h) may be assigned a classification code of 1.4S by 

the manufacturer. 

(i) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a material or a 

device containing an explosive composition is greater or less than indicated according to the definition and 

criteria specified in §§173.50, 173.56, and 

173.58 of this subchapter, the Associate 

Administrator may specify a classification or except the material or device 

from the requirements of this subchapter.

(j) Fireworks. Notwithstanding the 

requirements of paragraph (b) of this 

section, Division 1.3 and 1.4 fireworks 

may be classed and approved by the Associate Administrator without prior 

examination and offered for transportation if the following conditions are 

met:

(1) The fireworks are manufactured 

in accordance with the applicable requirements in APA Standard 87–1 (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter); 

(2) A thermal stability test is conducted on the device by the BOE, the 

BOM, or the manufacturer. The test 

must be performed by maintaining the 

device, or a representative prototype of 

a large device such as a display shell, 

at a temperature of 75 °C (167 °F) for 48 

consecutive hours. When a device contains more than one component, those 

components which could be in physical 

contact with each other in the finished 

device must be placed in contact with 

each other during the thermal stability 

test; and 

(3) The manufacturer applies in writing to the Associate Administrator following the applicable requirements in 

APA Standard 87–1, and is notified in 

writing by the Associate Administrator 

that the fireworks have been classed, 

approved, and assigned an EX-number. 

Each application must be complete, including all relevant background data 

and copies of all applicable drawings, 

test results, and any other pertinent 

information on each device for which 

approval is being requested. The manufacturer must sign the application and 

certify that the device for which approval is requested conforms to APA 

Standard 87–1 and that the descriptions 

and technical information contained in 

the application are complete and accurate. If the application is denied, the 

manufacturer will be notified in writing of the reasons for the denial. The 

Associate Administrator may require 

that the fireworks be examined by an 

agency listed in paragraph (b)(1) of this 

section.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51560, 

Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998; 64 FR 

10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 

68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 72 FR 25177, May 3, 

2007]

§ 173.57 Acceptance criteria for new 

explosives. 

(a) Unless otherwise excepted, an explosive substance must be subjected to 

the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity 

468

§ 173.58 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Test (Test Method 3(a)(i)), the Friction 

Sensitivity Test (Test Method 3(b)(iii)), 

the Thermal Stability Test (Test Method 3(c)) at 75 °C (167 °F) and the SmallScale Burning Test (Test Method 

3(d)(i)), each as described in the Explosive Test Manual (UN Manual of Tests 

and Criteria) (IBR, see §171.7 of this 

subchapter). A substance is forbidden 

for transportation if any one of the following occurs: 

(1) For a liquid, failure to pass the 

test criteria when tested in the Drop 

Weight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for liquids; 

(2) For a solid, failure to pass the test 

criteria when tested in the Drop 

Weight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for solids; 

(3) The substance has a friction sensitiveness equal to or greater than that 

of dry pentaerythrite tetranitrate 

(PETN) when tested in the Friction 

Sensitivity Test; 

(4) The substance fails to pass the 

test criteria specified in the Thermal 

Stability Test at 75 °C (167 °F); or 

(5) Explosion occurs when tested in 

the Small-Scale Burning Test. 

(b) An explosive article, packaged or 

unpackaged, or a packaged explosive 

substance must be subjected to the 

Thermal Stability Test for Articles and 

Packaged Articles (Test method 4(a)(i)) 

and the Twelve Meter Drop Test (Test 

Method 4(b)(ii)), when appropriate, in 

the Explosive Test Manual. An article 

or packaged substance is forbidden for 

transportation if evidence of thermal 

instability or excessive impact sensitivity is found in those tests according 

to the criteria and methods of assessing results prescribed therein. 

(c) Dynamite (explosive, blasting, 

type A) is forbidden for transportation 

if any of the following occurs: 

(1) It does not have uniformly mixed 

with the absorbent material a satisfactory antacid in a quantity sufficient to 

have the acid neutralizing power of an 

amount of magnesium carbonate equal 

to one percent of the nitroglycerin or 

other liquid explosive ingredient; 

(2) During the centrifuge test (Test 

Method D–2, in appendix D to this part) 

or the compression test (Test Method 

D–3 in appendix D to this part), a nongelatin dynamite loses more than 3 

percent by weight of the liquid explosive or a gelatin dynamite loses more 

than 10 percent by weight of the liquid 

explosive; or 

(3) During the leakage test (Test 

Method D–1 in appendix D to this part), 

there is any loss of liquid. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 64 FR 

51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003] 

§ 173.58 Assignment of class and division for new explosives. 

(a) Division 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4 explosives. In addition to the test prescribed 

in §173.57 of this subchapter, a substance or article in these divisions 

must be subjected to Test Methods 6(a), 

6(b), and 6(c), as described in the UN 

Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter), for assignment to an appropriate division. The 

criteria for assignment of class and division are as follows: 

(1) Division 1.1 if the major hazard is 

mass explosion; 

(2) Division 1.2 if the major hazard is 

dangerous projections; 

(3) Division 1.3 if the major hazard is 

radiant heat or violent burning, or 

both, but there is no blast or projection 

hazard;

(4) Division 1.4 if there is a small hazard with no mass explosion and no projection of fragments of appreciable size 

or range; 

(5) Division 1.4 Compatibility Group 

S (1.4S) if the hazardous effects are 

confined within the package or the 

blast and projection effects do not significantly hinder emergency response 

efforts; or 

(6) Not in the explosive class if the 

substance or article does not have significant explosive hazard or if the effects of explosion are completely confined within the article. 

(b) Division 1.5 explosive. Except for 

ANFO, a substance that has been examined in accordance with the provisions §173.57(a) of this subchapter, 

must be subjected to the following additional tests: Cap Sensitivity Test, 

Princess Incendiary Spark Test, DDT 

Test, and External Fire Test, each as 

described in the Explosive Test Manual. A material may not be classed as 

a Division 1.5 explosive if any of the 

following occurs: 

469

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.59 

(1) Detonation occurs in the Cap Sensitivity Test (Test Method 5(a)); 

(2) Detonation occurs in the DDT 

Test (Test Method 5(b)(ii)); 

(3) An explosion, evidenced by a loud 

noise and projection of fragments, occurs in the External Fire Test (Test 

Method 5(c), or 

(4) Ignition or explosion occurs in the 

Princess Incendiary Spark Test (Test 

Method 5(d)). 

(c) Division 1.6 explosive. (1) In order 

to be classed as a 1.6 explosive, an article must pass all of the following tests, 

as prescribed in the Explosive Test 

Manual:

(i) The 1.6 Article External Fire Test; 

(ii) The 1.6 Article Slow Cook-off 

Test;

(iii) The 1.6 Article Propagation Test; 

and

(iv) The 1.6 Article Bullet Impact 

Test.

(2) A substance intended for use as 

the explosive load in an article of Division 1.6 must be an extremely insensitive detonating substance (EIDS). In 

order to determine if a substance is an 

EIDS, it must be subjected to the tests 

in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (c)(2)(x) 

of this section, which are described in 

the Explosive Test Manual. The substance must be tested in the form (i.e., 

composition, granulation, density, etc.) 

in which it is to be used in the article. 

A substance is not an EIDS if it fails 

any of the following tests: 

(i) The Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test; 

(ii) The Friction Sensitivity Test; 

(iii) The Thermal Sensitivity Test at 

75 °C (167 °F);

(iv) The Small Scale Burning Test; 

(v) The EIDS Cap Test; 

(vi) The EIDS Gap Test; 

(vii) The Susan Test; 

(viii) The EIDS Bullet Impact Test; 

(ix) The EIDS External Fire Test; 

and

(x) The EIDS Slow Cook-off Test. 

(d) The Associate Administrator may 

waive or modify certain test(s) identified in §§173.57 and 173.58 of this subchapter, or require additional testing, 

if appropriate. In addition, the Associate Administrator may limit the 

quantity of explosive in a device. 

(e) Each explosive is assigned a compatibility group letter by the Associate 

Administrator based on the criteria 

prescribed in §173.52(b) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 

52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 

68 FR 75743, Dec. 31, 2003] 

§ 173.59 Description of terms for explosives. 

For the purpose of this subchapter, a 

description of the following terms is 

provided for information only. They 

must not be used for purposes of classification or to replace proper shipping 

names prescribed in §172.101 of this 

subchapter.

Ammonium-nitrate—fuel oil mixture 

(ANFO). A blasting explosive containing no essential ingredients other 

than prilled ammonium nitrate and 

fuel oil. 

Ammunition. Generic term related 

mainly to articles of military application consisting of all types of bombs, 

grenades, rockets, mines, projectiles 

and other similar devices or contrivances.

Ammunition, illuminating, with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling 

charge. Ammunition designed to 

produce a single source of intense light 

for lighting up an area. The term includes illuminating cartridges, grenades and projectiles, and illuminating 

and target identification bombs. The 

term excludes the following articles 

which are listed separately: cartridges,

signal; signal devices; hand signals; distress flares, aerial and flares, surface. 

Ammunition, incendiary. Ammunition

containing an incendiary substance 

which may be a solid, liquid or gel including white phosphorus. Except when 

the composition is an explosive per se, 

it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer 

and igniter charge, or a fuze with 

burster or expelling charge. The term 

includes: Ammunition, incendiary, liquid

or gel, with burster, expelling charge 

or propelling charge; Ammunition, incendiary with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; and 

Ammunition, incendiary, white phosphorus, with burster, expelling charge 

or propelling charge. 

470

§ 173.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Ammunition, practice. Ammunition

without a main bursting charge, containing a burster or expelling charge. 

Normally it also contains a fuze and 

propelling charge. The term excludes 

the following article which is listed 

separately: Grenades, practice. 

Ammunition, proof. Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substance, used to 

test the performance or strength of 

new ammunition, weapon component 

or assemblies. 

Ammunition, smoke. Ammunition containing a smoke-producing substance 

such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture 

(CSAM), titanium tetrachloride (FM), 

white phosphorus, or smoke-producing 

substance whose composition is based 

on hexachlorothannol (HC) or red phosphorus. Except when the substance is 

an explosive per se, the ammunition 

also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer 

and igniter charge, or a fuze with 

burster or expelling charge. The term 

includes: Ammunition, smoke, with or 

without burster, expelling charge or 

propelling charge; Ammunition, smoke, 

white phosphorus with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. 

Ammunition, tear-producing with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. 

Ammunition containing tear-producing 

substance. It may also contain one or 

more of the following: a pyrotechnic 

substance, a propelling charge with 

primer and igniter charge, or a fuze 

with burster or expelling charge. 

Ammunition, toxic. Ammunition containing toxic agent. It may also contain one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance, a propelling 

charge with primer and igniter charge, 

or a fuze with burster or expelling 

charge.

Articles, explosive, extremely insensitive 

(Articles, EEI). Articles that contain 

only extremely insensitive detonating 

substances and which demonstrate a 

negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation under normal 

conditions of transport and which have 

passed Test Series 7. 

Articles, pyrophoric. Articles which 

contain a pyrophoric substance (capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive substance or component. The term excludes articles containing white phosphorus.

Articles, pyrotechnic for technical purposes. Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are used for 

technical purposes, such as heat generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: all ammunition; cartridges, signal; cutters, cable, explosive; fireworks; 

flares, aerial; flares, surface; release devices, explosives; rivets, explosive; signal 

devices, hand; signals, distress; signals, 

railway track, explosive; and signals,

smoke.

Black powder (gunpowder). Substance

consisting of an intimate mixture of 

charcoal or other carbon and either potassium or sodium nitrate, and sulphur. It may be meal, granular, compressed, or pelletized. 

Bombs. Explosive articles which are 

dropped from aircraft. They may contain a flammable liquid with bursting 

charge, a photo-flash composition or 

bursting charge. The term excludes torpedoes (aerial) and includes bombs,

photo-flash; bombs with bursting charge; 

bombs with flammable liquids, with

bursting charge. 

Boosters. Articles consisting of a 

charge of detonating explosive without 

means of initiation. They are used to 

increase the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord. 

Bursters, explosive. Articles consisting 

of a small charge of explosive to open 

projectiles or other ammunition in 

order to disperse their contents. 

Cartridges, blank. Articles which consist of a cartridge case with a center or 

rim fire primer and a confined charge 

of smokeless or black powder, but no 

projectile. Used in training, saluting, 

or in starter pistols, etc. 

Cartridges, flash. Articles consisting 

of a casing, a primer and flash powder, 

all assembled in one piece for firing. 

Cartridges for weapons. (1) Fixed (assembled) or semi-fixed (partially assembled) ammunition designed to be 

fired from weapons. Each cartridge includes all the components necessary to 

function the weapon once. The name 

and description should be used for military small arms cartridges that cannot 

be described as cartridges, small arms. 

471

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.59 

Separate loading ammunition is included under this name and description 

when the propelling charge and projectile are packed together (see also Cartridges, blank). 

(2) Incendiary, smoke, toxic, and 

tear-producing cartridges are described 

under ammunition, incendiary, etc.

Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile. 

Ammunition consisting of a casing 

with propelling charge and a solid or 

empty projectile. 

Cartridges, oil well. Articles consisting 

of a casing of thin fiber, metal or other 

material containing only propellant 

explosive. The term excludes charges, 

shaped, commercial. 

Cartridges, power device. Articles designed to accomplish mechanical actions. They consist of a casing with a 

charge of deflagrating explosive and a 

means of ignition. The gaseous products of the deflagration produce inflation, linear or rotary motion; activate 

diaphragms, valves or switches, or 

project fastening devices or extinguishing agents. 

Cartridges, signal. Articles designed to 

fire colored flares or other signals from 

signal pistols or devices. 

Cartridges, small arms. Ammunition

consisting of a cartridge case fitted 

with a center or rim fire primer and 

containing both a propelling charge 

and solid projectile(s). They are designed to be fired in weapons of caliber 

not larger than 19.1 mm. Shotgun cartridges of any caliber are included in 

this description. The term excludes: 

Cartridges, small arms, blank, and 

some military small arms cartridges 

listed under Cartridges for weapons, 

inert projectile. 

Cases, cartridge, empty with primer. Articles consisting of a cartridge case 

made from metal, plastics or other 

non-flammable materials, in which 

only the explosive component is the 

primer.

Cases, combustible, empty, without 

primer. Articles consisting of cartridge 

cases made partly or entirely from nitrocellulose.

Charges, bursting. Articles consisting 

of a charge of detonating explosive 

such as hexolite, octolite, or plasticsbonded explosive designed to produce 

effect by blast or fragmentation. 

Charges, demolition. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive in a casing of fiberboard, plastics, 

metal or other material. The term excludes articles identified as bombs, 

mines, etc. 

Charges, depth. Articles consisting of 

a charge of detonating explosive contained in a drum or projectile. They 

are designed to detonate under water. 

Charges, expelling. A charge of 

deflagrating explosive designed to eject 

the payload from the parent article 

without damage. 

Charges, explosive, without detonator. 

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation, used for explosive welding, 

joining, forming, and other processes. 

Charges, propelling. Articles consisting of propellant charge in any 

physical form, with or without a casing, for use in cannon or for reducing 

drag for projectiles or as a component 

of rocket motors. 

Charges, propelling for cannon. Articles consisting of a propellant charge 

in any physical form, with or without a 

casing, for use in a cannon. 

Charges, shaped, without detonator. 

Articles consisting of a casing containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with rigid material, without means of initiation. 

They are designed to produce a powerful, penetrating jet effect. 

Charges, shaped, flexible, linear. Articles consisting of a V-shaped core of a 

detonating explosive clad by a flexible 

metal sheath. 

Charges, supplementary, explosive. Articles consisting of a small removable 

booster used in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze and the bursting 

charge.

Components, explosive train, n.o.s. Articles containing an explosive designed 

to transmit a detonation or deflagration within an explosive train. 

Contrivance, water-activated with 

burster, expelling charge or propelling 

charge. Articles whose functioning depends of physico-chemical reaction of 

their contents with water. 

Cord, detonating, flexible. Articles consisting of a core of detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric with plastics or other covering. 

472

§ 173.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Cord (fuse) detonating, metal clad. Articles consisting of a core of detonating 

explosive clad by a soft metal tube 

with or without protective covering. 

When the core contains a sufficiently 

small quantity of explosive, the words 

‘‘mild effect’’ are added. 

Cord igniter. Articles consisting of 

textile yarns covered with black powder or another fast-burning pyrotechnic composition and a flexible protective covering, or consisting of a core 

of black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric. It burns progressively 

along its length with an external flame 

and is used to transmit ignition from a 

device to a charge or primer. 

Cutters, cable, explosive. Articles consisting of a knife-edged device which is 

driven by a small charge of 

deflagrating explosive into an anvil. 

Detonator assemblies, non-electric, for 

blasting. Non-electric detonators assembled with and activated by such 

means as safety fuse, shock tube, flash 

tube, or detonating cord. They may be 

of instantaneous design or incorporate 

delay elements. Detonating relays incorporating detonating cord are included. Other detonating relays are included in Detonators, nonelectric. 

Detonators. Articles consisting of a 

small metal or plastic tube containing 

explosives such as lead azide, PETN, or 

combinations of explosives. They are 

designed to start a detonation train. 

They may be constructed to detonate 

instantaneously, or may contain a 

delay element. They may contain no 

more than 10 g of total explosives 

weight, excluding ignition and delay 

charges, per unit. The term includes: 

detonators for ammunition; detonators 

for blasting, both electric and non-electric; and detonating relays without 

flexible detonating cord. 

Dynamite. A detonating explosive 

containing a liquid explosive ingredient (generally nitroglycerin, similar 

organic nitrate esters, or both) that is 

uniformly mixed with an absorbent 

material, such as wood pulp, and usually contains materials such as nitrocellulose, sodium and ammonium nitrate.

Entire load and total contents. The

phrase means such a substantial portion of the material explodes that the 

practical hazard should be assessed by 

assuming simultaneous explosion of 

the whole of the explosive content of 

the load or package. 

Explode. The term indicates those explosive effects capable of endangering 

life and property through blast, heat, 

and projection of missiles. It encompasses both deflagration and detonation.

Explosion of the total contents. The

phrase is used in testing a single article or package or a small stack of articles or packages. 

Explosive, blasting. Detonating explosive substances used in mining, construction, and similar tasks. Blasting 

explosives are assigned to one of five 

types. In addition to the ingredients 

listed below for each type, blasting explosives may also contain inert components, such as kieselguhr, and other 

minor ingredients, such as coloring 

agents and stabilizers. 

Explosive, blasting, type A. Substances

consisting of liquid organic nitrates, 

such as nitroglycerin, or a mixture of 

such ingredients with one or more of 

the following: nitrocellulose, ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates, aromatic nitro-derivatives, or 

combustible materials, such as woodmeal and aluminum powder. Such explosives must be in powdery, gelatinous, plastic or elastic form. The term 

includes dynamite, blasting gelatine 

and gelatine dynamites. 

Explosive, blasting, type B. Substances

consisting of a mixture of ammonium 

nitrate or other inorganic nitrates 

with an explosive, such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other substances, such as wood-meal or aluminum powder, or a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives may not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates. 

Explosive, blasting, type C. Substances

consisting of a mixture of either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, 

sodium or ammonium perchlorate with 

organic nitro-derivatives or combustible materials, such as wood-meal or 

aluminum powder, or a hydrocarbon. 

Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerin or any similar liquid organic nitrate. 

473

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.59 

Explosive, blasting, type D. Substances

consisting of a mixture of organic nitrate compounds and combustible materials, such as hydrocarbons and aluminum powder. Such explosives must 

not contain nitroglycerin, any similar 

liquid organic nitrate, chlorate or ammonium-nitrate. The term generally 

includes plastic explosives. 

Explosive, blasting, type E. Substances

consisting of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizer, some 

or all of which are in solution. The 

other constituents may include nitroderivatives, such as trinitrotoluene, 

hydrocarbons or aluminum powder. 

The term includes: explosives, emulsion; explosives, slurry; and explosives, 

watergel.

Explosive, deflagrating. A substance, 

e.g., propellant, which reacts by deflagration rather than detonation when 

ignited and used in its normal manner. 

Explosive, detonating. A substance 

which reacts by detonation rather than 

deflagration when initiated and used in 

its normal manner. 

Explosive, extremely insensitive detonating substance (EIDS). A substance 

which, although capable of sustaining a 

detonation, has demonstrated through 

tests that it is so insensitive that there 

is very little probability of accidental 

initiation.

Explosive, primary. Explosive substance which is manufactured with a 

view to producing a practical effect by 

explosion, is very sensitive to heat, impact, or friction, and even in very 

small quantities, detonates. The major 

primary explosives are mercury fulminate, lead azide, and lead styphnate. 

Explosive, secondary. An explosive 

substance which is relatively insensitive (when compared to primary explosives) and is usually initiated by primary explosives with or without the 

aid of boosters or supplementary 

charges. Such an explosive may react 

as a deflagrating or as a detonating explosive.

Fireworks. Pyrotechnic articles designed for entertainment. 

Flares. Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed 

to illuminate, identify, signal, or warn. 

The term includes: flares, aerial and 

flares, surface. 

Flash powder. Pyrotechnic substance 

which, when ignited, produces an intense light. 

Fracturing devices, explosive, for oil 

wells, without detonators. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a casing without the 

means of initiation. They are used to 

fracture the rock around a drill shaft 

to assist the flow of crude oil from the 

rock.

Fuse/Fuze. Although these two words 

have a common origin (French fusee, 

fusil) and are sometimes considered to 

be different spellings, it is useful to 

maintain the convention that fuse refers to a cord-like igniting device, 

whereas fuze refers to a device used in 

ammunition which incorporates mechanical, electrical, chemical, or hydrostatic components to initiate a 

train by deflagration or detonation. 

Fuse, igniter. Articles consisting of a 

metal tube with a core of deflagrating 

explosives.

Fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating 

(Quickmatch). Article consisting of cotton yarns impregnated with fine black 

powder. It burns with an external 

flame and is used in ignition trains for 

fireworks, etc. 

Fuse, safety. Article consisting of a 

core of fine-grained black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with 

one or more protective outer coverings. 

When ignited, it burns at a predetermined rate without any explosive effect.

Fuzes. Articles designed to start a 

detonation or deflagration in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, 

electrical, chemical, or hydrostatic 

components and generally protective 

features. The term includes: Fuzes, detonating; fuzes detonating with protective features; and fuzes igniting. 

Grenades, hand or rifle. Articles 

which are designed to be thrown by 

hand or to be projected by rifle. The 

term includes: grenades, hand or rifle, 

with bursting charge; and grenades, 

practice, hand or rifle. The term excludes: grenades, smoke. 

Igniters. Articles containing one or 

more explosive substance used to start 

deflagration of an explosive train. They 

may be actuated chemically, electrically, or mechanically. The term excludes: cord, igniter; fuse, igniter; fuse, 

474

§ 173.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

instantaneous, non-detonating; fuze, 

igniting; lighters, fuse, instantaneous, 

non-detonating; fuzes, igniting; lighters, fuse; primers, cap type; and primers, tubular. 

Ignition, means of. A general term 

used in connection with the method 

employed to ignite a deflagrating train 

of explosive or pyrotechnic substances 

(for example: a primer for propelling 

charge, an igniter for a rocket motor 

or an igniting fuze). 

Initiation, means of. (1) A device intended to cause the detonation of an 

explosive (for example: detonator, detonator for ammunition, or detonating 

fuze).

(2) The term with its own means of initiation means that the contrivance has 

its normal initiating device assembled 

to it and this device is considered to 

present a significant risk during transport but not one great enough to be unacceptable. The term does not apply, 

however, to a contrivance packed together with its means of initiation, 

provided the device is packaged so as 

to eliminate the risk of causing detonation of the contrivance in the event 

of functioning of the initiating device. 

The initiating device can even be assembled in the contrivance provided 

there are protective features ensuring 

that the device is very unlikely to 

cause detonation of the contrivance 

under conditions which are associated 

with transport. 

(3) For the purposes of classification, 

any means of initiation without two effective protective features should be 

regarded as Compatibility Group B; an 

article with its own means of initiation, without two effective protective 

features, is Compatibility Group F. A 

means of initiation which itself possesses two effective protective features 

is Compatibility Group D, and an article with its own means of initiation 

which possesses two effective features 

is Compatibility Group D or E. A 

means of initiation, adjudged as having 

two effective protective features, must 

be approved by the Associate Administrator. A common and effective way of 

achieving the necessary degree of protection is to use a means of initiation 

which incorporates two or more independent safety features. 

Jet perforating guns, charged, oil well, 

without detonator. Articles consisting of 

a steel tube or metallic strip, into 

which are inserted shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without 

means of initiation. 

Lighters, fuse. Articles of various design actuated by friction, percussion, 

or electricity and used to ignite safety 

fuse.

Mass explosion. Explosion which affects almost the entire load virtually 

instantaneously.

Mines. Articles consisting normally 

of metal or composition receptacles 

and bursting charge. They are designed 

to be operated by the passage of ships, 

vehicles, or personnel. The term includes Bangalore torpedoes. 

Powder cake (powder paste). Substance

consisting of nitrocellulose impregnated with not more than 60 percent of 

nitroglycerin or other liquid organic 

nitrates or a mixture of these. 

Powder, smokeless. Substance based on 

nitrocellulose used as propellant. The 

term includes propellants with a single 

base (nitrocellulose (NC) alone), those 

with a double base (such as NC and nitroglycerin (NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/ 

nitroguanidine). Cast pressed or bagcharges of smokeless powder are listed 

under charges, propelling and charges,

propelling for cannon. 

Primers, cap type. Articles consisting 

of a metal or plastic cap containing a 

small amount of primary explosive 

mixture that is readily ignited by impact. They serve as igniting elements 

in small arms cartridges and in percussion primers for propelling charges. 

Primers, tubular. Articles consisting 

of a primer for ignition and an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive, 

such as black powder, used to ignite 

the propelling charge in a cartridge 

case for cannon, etc. 

Projectiles. Articles, such as a shell or 

bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other artillery gun, rifle, or 

other small arm. They may be inert, 

with or without tracer, or may contain 

a burster, expelling charge or bursting 

charge. The term includes: projectiles, 

inert, with tracer; projectiles, with 

burster or expelling charge; and projectiles, with bursting charge. 

475

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.60 

Propellant, liquid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating liquid explosive, used for propulsion. 

Propellant, solid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating solid explosive, used for propulsion. 

Propellants. Deflagrating explosives 

used for propulsion or for reducing the 

drag of projectiles. 

Release devices, explosive. Articles

consisting of a small charge of explosive with means of initiation. They 

sever rods or links to release equipment quickly. 

Rocket motors. Articles consisting of a 

solid, liquid, or hypergolic propellant 

contained in a cylinder fitted with one 

or more nozzles. They are designed to 

propel a rocket or guided missile. The 

term includes: rocket motors; rocket 

motors with hypergolic liquids with or 

without an expelling charge; and rocket motors, liquid fuelled. 

Rockets. Articles containing a rocket 

motor and a payload which may be an 

explosive warhead or other device. The 

term includes: guided missiles; rockets, 

line-throwing; rockets, liquid fuelled, 

with bursting charge; rockets, with 

bursting charge; rockets, with expelling charge; and rockets, with inert 

head.

Signals. Articles consisting of pyrotechnic substances designed to produce 

signals by means of sound, flame, or 

smoke or any combination thereof. The 

term includes: signal devices, hand; 

signals, distress ship; signals, railway 

track, explosive; signals, smoke. 

Sounding devices, explosive. Articles

consisting of a charge of detonating explosive. They are dropped from ships 

and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed. 

Substance, explosive, very insensitive 

(Substance, EVI) N.O.S. Substances

which present a mass explosive hazard 

but which are so insensitive that there 

is very little probability of initiation, 

or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of 

transport and which have passed test 

series 5. 

Torpedoes. Articles containing an explosive or non-explosive propulsion 

system and designed to be propelled 

through water. They may contain an 

inert head or warhead. The term includes: torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with 

inert head; torpedoes, liquid fuelled, 

with or without bursting charge; and 

torpedoes, with bursting charge. 

Tracers for ammunition. Sealed articles containing pyrotechnic substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile. 

Warheads. Articles containing detonating explosives, designed to be fitted 

to a rocket, guided missile, or torpedo. 

They may contain a burster or expelling charge or bursting charge. The 

term includes: warhead rocket with 

bursting charge; and warheads, torpedo, with bursting charge. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 10777, 

Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001] 

§ 173.60 General packaging requirements for explosives. 

(a) Unless otherwise provided in this 

subpart and in §173.7(a), packaging 

used for Class 1 (explosives) materials 

must meet Packing Group II requirements. Each packaging used for an explosive must be capable of meeting the 

test requirements of subpart M of part 

178 of this subchapter, at the specified 

level of performance, and the applicable general packaging requirements of 

paragraph (b) of this section. 

(b) The general requirements for 

packaging of explosives are as follows: 

(1) Nails, staples, and other closure 

devices, made of metal, having no protective covering may not penetrate to 

the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately 

protects the explosive against contact 

with the metal. 

(2) The closure device of containers 

for liquid explosives must provide double protection against leakage, such as 

a screw cap secured in place with tape. 

(3) Inner packagings, fittings, and 

cushioning materials, and the placing 

of explosive substances or articles in 

packages, must be such that the explosive substance is prevented from becoming loose in the outer packaging 

during transportation. Metallic components of articles must be prevented 

from making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive 

substances not enclosed in an outer 

casing must be separated from each 

other in order to prevent friction and 

476

§ 173.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

impact. Padding, trays, partitioning in 

the inner or outer packaging, molded 

plastics or receptacles may be used for 

this purpose. 

(4) When the packaging includes 

water that could freeze during transportation, a sufficient amount of antifreeze, such as denatured ethyl alcohol, 

must be added to the water to prevent 

freezing. If the anti-freeze creates a 

fire hazard, it may not be used. When a 

percentage of water in the substance is 

specified, the combined weight of water 

and anti-freeze may be substituted. 

(5) If an article is fitted with its own 

means of ignition or initiation, it must 

be effectively protected from accidental actuation during normal conditions of transportation. 

(6) The entry of explosive substances 

into the recesses of double-seamed 

metal packagings must be prevented. 

(7) The closure device of a metal 

drum must include a suitable gasket; if 

the closure device includes metal-tometal screw-threads, the ingress of explosive substances into the threading 

must be prevented. 

(8) Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of 

an uncased or partly cased article may 

come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A2, 1B2, 4A, 

4B and metal receptacles), the metal 

packaging should be provided with an 

inner liner or coating. 

(9) Packagings must be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained in 

the package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the 

packaging materials, nor leakage, 

causes the explosive to become unsafe 

in transportation, or the hazard division or compatibility group to change 

(see §173.24(e)(2)). 

(10) An explosive article containing 

an electrical means of initiation that 

is sensitive to external electromagnetic radiation, must have its 

means of initiation effectively protected from electromagnetic radiation 

sources (for example, radar or radio 

transmitters) through either design of 

the packaging or of the article, or 

both.

(11) Plastic packagings may not be 

able to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity to cause the 

packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or inadvertently 

function. Metal packagings must be 

compatible with the explosive substance they contain. 

(12) Explosive substances may not be 

packed in inner or outer packagings 

where the differences in internal and 

external pressures, due to thermal or 

other effects, could cause an explosion 

or rupture of the package. 

(13) Packagings for water soluble substances must be water resistant. Packagings for desensitized or phlegmatized 

substances must be closed to prevent 

changes in concentration during transport. When containing less alcohol, 

water, or phlegmatizer than specified 

in its proper shipping description, the 

substance is a ‘‘forbidden’’ material. 

(14) Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military 

use, without their means of initiation 

or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried 

unpackaged provided that a negative 

result was obtained in Test Series 4 of 

the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria on 

an unpackaged article. When such articles have propelling charges or are selfpropelled, their ignition systems shall 

be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of 

transport. Such unpackaged articles 

may be fixed to cradles or contained in 

crates or other suitable handling, storage or launching devices in such a way 

that they will not become loose during 

normal conditions of transport and are 

in accordance with DOD-approved procedures.

[Amdt. 173–260, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997, as 

amended at 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000] 

§ 173.61 Mixed packaging requirements. 

(a) An explosive may not be packed 

in the same outside packaging with 

any other material that could, under 

normal conditions of transportation, 

adversely affect the explosive or its 

packaging unless packaged by DOD or 

DOE in accordance with §173.7(a). 

(b) Hardware necessary for assembly 

of explosive articles at the point-of-use 

may be packed in the same outside 

packaging with the explosive articles. 

The hardware must be securely packed 

477

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62 

in a separate inside packaging. Sufficient cushioning materials must be 

used to ensure that all inside packagings are securely packed in the outside packaging. 

(c) The following explosives may not 

be packed together with other Class 1 

explosives: UN 0029, UN 0030, UN 0073, 

UN 0106, UN 0107, UN 0255, UN 0257, UN 

0267, UN 0350, UN 0360, UN 0361, UN 0364, 

UN 0365, UN 0366, UN 0367, UN 0408, UN 

0409, UN 0410, UN 0455, UN 0456, and UN 

0500. These explosives may be mixpacked with each other in accordance 

with the compatibility requirements 

prescribed in paragraph (e) of this section.

(d) Division 1.1 and 1.2 explosives 

may not be packed with the following 

explosives: UN 0333, UN 0334, UN 0335, 

UN 0336, and UN 0337. 

(e) Except as prescribed in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, different explosives may be packed in one 

outside packaging in accordance with 

the following compatibility requirements:

(1) Explosives of the same compatibility group and same division number 

may be packed together. 

(2) Explosives of the same compatibility group or authorized combination of compatibility group but different division number may be packed 

together, provided that the whole 

package is treated as though its entire 

contents were comprised of the lower 

division number. For example, a mixed 

package of Division 1.2 explosives and 

Division 1.4 explosives, compatibility 

group D, must be treated as 1.2D explosives. However, when 1.5D explosives 

are packed together with 1.2D explosives, the whole package must be treated as 1.1D explosives. 

(3) Explosives of compatibility group 

S may be packaged together with explosives of any other compatibility 

group except A or L, and the combined 

package may be treated as belonging to 

any of the packaged compatibility 

groups except S. 

(4) Explosives of compatibility group 

L shall only be packed with an identical explosive. 

(5) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, or E may be packed 

together and the entire package shall 

be treated as belonging to compatibility group E. 

(6) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, E, or N may be 

packed together and the entire package 

shall be treated as belonging to compatibility group D. 

(7) Explosives substances of compatibility groups C and D may be packaged together and the entire package 

shall be treated as belonging to compatibility group D. 

(8) Explosive articles of compatibility group G, except for fireworks 

and articles requiring special packaging, may be packaged together with 

explosive articles of compatibility 

groups C, D or E and the combined 

package shall be treated as belonging 

to compatibility group E. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; 65 FR 

50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33429, June 21, 2001; 

66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR 54046, Sept. 

7, 2004; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28 2008] 

§ 173.62 Specific packaging requirements for explosives. 

(a) Except as provided in §173.7 of 

this subchapter, when the §172.101 

Table specifies that an explosive must 

be packaged in accordance with this 

section, only packagings which conform to the provisions of paragraphs 

(b) and (c) of this section or §173.7(e) of 

this subchapter and the applicable requirements in §§173.60 and 173.61 may 

be used unless otherwise approved by 

the Associate Administrator. 

(b) Explosives Table. The Explosives 

Table specifies the Packing Instructions assigned to each explosive. Explosives are identified in the first column 

in numerical sequence by their identification number (ID #), which is listed 

in column 4 of the §172.101 table, of this 

subchapter. The second column of the 

Explosives Table specifies the Packing 

Instruction (PI) which must be used for 

packaging the explosive. The Explosives Packing Method Table in paragraph (c) of this section defines the 

methods of packaging. The Packing Instructions are identified using a 3 digit 

designation. The Packing Instruction 

prefixed by the letters ‘‘US’’ is particular to the United States and not 

found in applicable international regulations.

478

§ 173.62 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

EXPLOSIVES TABLE

ID# PI 

UN0004 .................................. 112 

UN0005 .................................. 130 

UN0006 .................................. 130 

UN0007 .................................. 130 

UN0009 .................................. 130 

UN0010 .................................. 130 

UN0012 .................................. 130 

UN0014 .................................. 130 

UN0015 .................................. 130 

UN0016 .................................. 130 

UN0018 .................................. 130 

UN0019 .................................. 130 

UN0020 .................................. 101 

UN0021 .................................. 101 

UN0027 .................................. 113 

UN0028 .................................. 113 

UN0029 .................................. 131 

UN0030 .................................. 131 

UN0033 .................................. 130 

UN0034 .................................. 130 

UN0035 .................................. 130 

UN0037 .................................. 130 

UN0038 .................................. 130 

UN0039 .................................. 130 

UN0042 .................................. 132 

UN0043 .................................. 133 

UN0044 .................................. 133 

UN0048 .................................. 130 

UN0049 .................................. 135 

UN0050 .................................. 135 

UN0054 .................................. 135 

UN0055 .................................. 136 

UN0056 .................................. 130 

UN0059 .................................. 137 

UN0060 .................................. 132 

UN0065 .................................. 139 

UN0066 .................................. 140 

UN0070 .................................. 134 

UN0072 .................................. 112(a) 

UN0073 .................................. 133 

UN0074 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) 

UN0075 .................................. 115 

UN0076 .................................. 112 

UN0077 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b) 

UN0078 .................................. 112 

UN0079 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0081 .................................. 116 

UN0082 .................................. 116 or 117 

UN0083 .................................. 116 

UN0084 .................................. 116 

UN0092 .................................. 135 

UN0093 .................................. 135 

UN0094 .................................. 113 

UN0099 .................................. 134 

UN0101 .................................. 140 

UN0102 .................................. 139 

UN0103 .................................. 140 

UN0104 .................................. 139 

UN0105 .................................. 140 

UN0106 .................................. 141 

UN0107 .................................. 141 

UN0110 .................................. 141 

UN0113 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) 

UN0114 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) 

UN0118 .................................. 112 

UN0121 .................................. 142 

UN0124 .................................. US1 

UN0129 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) 

UN0130 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) 

UN0131 .................................. 142 

UN0132 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0133 .................................. 112(a) 

EXPLOSIVES TABLE—Continued

ID# PI 

UN0135 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) 

UN0136 .................................. 130 

UN0137 .................................. 130 

UN0138 .................................. 130 

UN0143 .................................. 115 

UN0144 .................................. 115 

UN0146 .................................. 112 

UN0147 .................................. 112(b) 

UN0150 .................................. 112(a) or 112(b) 

UN0151 .................................. 112 

UN0153 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0154 .................................. 112 

UN0155 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0159 .................................. 111 

UN0160 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0161 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0167 .................................. 130 

UN0168 .................................. 130 

UN0169 .................................. 130 

UN0171 .................................. 130 

UN0173 .................................. 134 

UN0174 .................................. 134 

UN0180 .................................. 130 

UN0181 .................................. 130 

UN0182 .................................. 130 

UN0183 .................................. 130 

UN0186 .................................. 130 

UN0190 .................................. 101 

UN0191 .................................. 135 

UN0192 .................................. 135 

UN0193 .................................. 135 

UN0194 .................................. 135 

UN0195 .................................. 135 

UN0196 .................................. 135 

UN0197 .................................. 135 

UN0204 .................................. 134 

UN0207 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0208 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0209 .................................. 112 

UN0212 .................................. 133 

UN0213 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0214 .................................. 112 

UN0215 .................................. 112 

UN0216 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0217 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0218 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0219 .................................. 112 

UN0220 .................................. 112 

UN0221 .................................. 130 

UN0222 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0224 .................................. 110(a) or 110(b) 

UN0225 .................................. 133 

UN0226 .................................. 112(a) 

UN0234 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b) 

UN0235 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b) 

UN0236 .................................. 114(a) or 114(b) 

UN0237 .................................. 138 

UN0238 .................................. 130 

UN0240 .................................. 130 

UN0241 .................................. 116 or 117 

UN0242 .................................. 130 

UN0243 .................................. 130 

UN0244 .................................. 130 

UN0245 .................................. 130 

UN0246 .................................. 130 

UN0247 .................................. 101 

UN0248 .................................. 144 

UN0249 .................................. 144 

UN0250 .................................. 101 

UN0254 .................................. 130 

UN0255 .................................. 131 

UN0257 .................................. 141 

479

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62 

EXPLOSIVES TABLE—Continued

ID# PI 

UN0266 .................................. 112 

UN0267 .................................. 131 

UN0268 .................................. 133 

UN0271 .................................. 143 

UN0272 .................................. 143 

UN0275 .................................. 134 

UN0276 .................................. 134 

UN0277 .................................. 134 

UN0278 .................................. 134 

UN0279 .................................. 130 

UN0280 .................................. 130 

UN0281 .................................. 130 

UN0282 .................................. 112 

UN0283 .................................. 132 

UN0284 .................................. 141 

UN0285 .................................. 141 

UN0286 .................................. 130 

UN0287 .................................. 130 

UN0288 .................................. 138 

UN0289 .................................. 139 

UN0290 .................................. 139 

UN0291 .................................. 130 

UN0292 .................................. 141 

UN0293 .................................. 141 

UN0294 .................................. 130 

UN0295 .................................. 130 

UN0296 .................................. 134 

UN0297 .................................. 130 

UN0299 .................................. 130 

UN0300 .................................. 130 

UN0301 .................................. 130 

UN0303 .................................. 130 

UN0305 .................................. 113 

UN0306 .................................. 133 

UN0312 .................................. 135 

UN0313 .................................. 135 

UN0314 .................................. 142 

UN0315 .................................. 142 

UN0316 .................................. 141 

UN0317 .................................. 141 

UN0318 .................................. 141 

UN0319 .................................. 133 

UN0320 .................................. 133 

UN0321 .................................. 130 

UN0322 .................................. 101 

UN0323 .................................. 134 

UN0324 .................................. 130 

UN0325 .................................. 142 

UN0326 .................................. 130 

UN0327 .................................. 130 

UN0328 .................................. 130 

UN0329 .................................. 130 

UN0330 .................................. 130 

UN0331 .................................. 116 or 117 

UN0332 .................................. 116 or 117 

UN0333 .................................. 135 

UN0334 .................................. 135 

UN0335 .................................. 135 

UN0336 .................................. 135 

UN0337 .................................. 135 

UN0338 .................................. 130 

UN0339 .................................. 130 

UN0340 .................................. 112(a) or 112(b) 

UN0341 .................................. 112(b) 

UN0342 .................................. 114(a) 

UN0343 .................................. 111 

UN0344 .................................. 130 

UN0345 .................................. 130 

UN0346 .................................. 130 

UN0347 .................................. 130 

UN0348 .................................. 130 

UN0349 .................................. 101 

EXPLOSIVES TABLE—Continued

ID# PI 

UN0350 .................................. 101 

UN0351 .................................. 101 

UN0352 .................................. 101 

UN0353 .................................. 101 

UN0354 .................................. 101 

UN0355 .................................. 101 

UN0356 .................................. 101 

UN0357 .................................. 101 

UN0358 .................................. 101 

UN0359 .................................. 101 

UN0360 .................................. 131 

UN0361 .................................. 131 

UN0362 .................................. 130 

UN0363 .................................. 130 

UN0364 .................................. 133 

UN0365 .................................. 133 

UN0366 .................................. 133 

UN0367 .................................. 141 

UN0368 .................................. 141 

UN0369 .................................. 130 

UN0370 .................................. 130 

UN0371 .................................. 130 

UN0372 .................................. 141 

UN0373 .................................. 135 

UN0374 .................................. 134 

UN0375 .................................. 134 

UN0376 .................................. 133 

UN0377 .................................. 133 

UN0378 .................................. 133 

UN0379 .................................. 136 

UN0380 .................................. 101 

UN0381 .................................. 134 

UN0382 .................................. 101 

UN0383 .................................. 101 

UN0384 .................................. 101 

UN0385 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0386 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0387 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0388 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0389 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0390 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0391 .................................. 112(a) 

UN0392 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0393 .................................. 112(b) 

UN0394 .................................. 112(a) 

UN0395 .................................. 101 

UN0396 .................................. 101 

UN0397 .................................. 101 

UN0398 .................................. 101 

UN0399 .................................. 101 

UN0400 .................................. 101 

UN0401 .................................. 112 

UN0402 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0403 .................................. 135 

UN0404 .................................. 135 

UN0405 .................................. 135 

UN0406 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0407 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0408 .................................. 141 

UN0409 .................................. 141 

UN0410 .................................. 141 

UN0411 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0412 .................................. 130 

UN0413 .................................. 130 

UN0414 .................................. 130 

UN0415 .................................. 143 

UN0417 .................................. 130 

UN0418 .................................. 135 

UN0419 .................................. 135 

UN0420 .................................. 135 

UN0421 .................................. 135 

UN0424 .................................. 130 

480

§ 173.62 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

EXPLOSIVES TABLE—Continued

ID# PI 

UN0425 .................................. 130 

UN0426 .................................. 130 

UN0427 .................................. 130 

UN0428 .................................. 135 

UN0429 .................................. 135 

UN0430 .................................. 135 

UN0431 .................................. 135 

UN0432 .................................. 135 

UN0433 .................................. 111 

UN0434 .................................. 130 

UN0435 .................................. 130 

UN0436 .................................. 130 

UN0437 .................................. 130 

UN0438 .................................. 130 

UN0439 .................................. 137 

UN0440 .................................. 137 

UN0441 .................................. 137 

UN0442 .................................. 137 

UN0443 .................................. 137 

UN0444 .................................. 137 

UN0445 .................................. 137 

UN0446 .................................. 136 

UN0447 .................................. 136 

UN0448 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0449 .................................. 101 

UN0450 .................................. 101 

UN0451 .................................. 130 

UN0452 .................................. 141 

UN0453 .................................. 130 

UN0454 .................................. 142 

UN0455 .................................. 131 

UN0456 .................................. 131 

UN0457 .................................. 130 

UN0458 .................................. 130 

UN0459 .................................. 130 

UN0460 .................................. 130 

UN0461 .................................. 101 

UN0462 .................................. 101 

UN0463 .................................. 101 

UN0464 .................................. 101 

UN0465 .................................. 101 

UN0466 .................................. 101 

UN0467 .................................. 101 

UN0468 .................................. 101 

UN0469 .................................. 101 

UN0470 .................................. 101 

UN0471 .................................. 101 

UN0472 .................................. 101 

UN0473 .................................. 101 

UN0474 .................................. 101 

UN0475 .................................. 101 

UN0476 .................................. 101 

UN0477 .................................. 101 

UN0478 .................................. 101 

UN0479 .................................. 101 

UN0480 .................................. 101 

UN0481 .................................. 101 

UN0482 .................................. 101 

UN0483 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0484 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0486 .................................. 101 

UN0487 .................................. 135 

UN0488 .................................. 130 

UN0489 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0490 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0491 .................................. 143 

UN0492 .................................. 135 

UN0493 .................................. 135 

UN0494 .................................. US1 

UN0495 .................................. 115 

EXPLOSIVES TABLE—Continued

ID# PI 

UN0496 .................................. 112(b) or 112(c) 

UN0497 .................................. 115 

UN0498 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0499 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0500 .................................. 131 

UN0502 .................................. 130 

UN0503 .................................. 135 

UN0504 .................................. 112(c) 

UN0505 .................................. 135 

UN0506 .................................. 135 

UN0507 .................................. 135 

UN0508 .................................. 114(b) 

UN0509 .................................. 114(b) 

NA0124 .................................. US1 

NA0276 .................................. 134 

NA0323 .................................. 134 

NA0331 .................................. 116 or 117 

NA0337 .................................. 135 

NA0349 .................................. 133 

NA0494 .................................. US1 

(c) Explosives must be packaged in 

accordance with the following table: 

(1) The first column lists, in alphanumeric sequence, the packing methods prescribed for explosives in the Explosives Table of paragraph (b) of this 

section.

(2) The second column specifies the 

inner packagings that are required. If 

inner packagings are not required, a 

notation of ‘‘Not necessary’’ appears in 

the column. The term ‘‘Not necessary’’ 

means that a suitable inner packaging 

may be used but is not required. 

(3) The third column specifies the intermediate packagings that are required. If intermediate packagings are 

not required, a notation of ‘‘Not necessary’’ appears in the column. The 

term ‘‘Not necessary’’ means that a 

suitable intermediate packaging may 

be used but is not required. 

(4) The fourth column specifies the 

outer packagings which are required. If 

inner packagings and/or intermediate 

packagings are specified in the second 

and third columns, then the packaging 

specified in the fourth column must be 

used as the outer packaging of a combination packaging; otherwise it may 

be used as a single packaging. 

(5) Packing Instruction 101 may be 

used for any explosive substance or article if an equivalent level of safety is 

shown to be maintained subject to the 

approval of the Associate Administrator.

481

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

101 ................................................................................. This Packing Instruction may be used as an alternative to a specifically 

assigned packing method with the approval of the Associate Administrator prior to transportation. When this packing instruction is used, 

the following must be marked on the shipping documents: 

‘‘Packaging approved by the competent authority of the United States of 

America (USA)’’. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. Samples of new or existing explosive substances 

or articles may be transported as directed by the Associate Administrator for purposes including: testing, 

classification, research and development, quality control, or as a commercial sample. Explosive samples 

which are wetted or desensitized must be limited to 25 

kg. Explosive samples which are not wetted or desensitized must be limited to 10 kg in small packages as 

specified by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety 

110(a) ............................................................................ Bags .......................... Bags .......................... Drums. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. The Intermediate packagings must be filled with 

water saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning 

2. Outer packagings must be filled with water saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or 

wetted cushioning. Outer packagings must be constructed and sealed to prevent evaporation of the wetting solution, except when 0224 is being carried dry 

plastics ...................

textile, plastic coated or lined.

rubber .....................

textile, rubberized ..

textile ......................

plastics ...................

textile, plastic coated or lined.

rubber .....................

textile, rubberized ..

Receptacles ...............

plastics ...................

metal ......................

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2) 

110(b) ............................................................................ Bags .......................... Dividing partitions ...... Boxes. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS

For UN 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and 

0224, the following conditions must be satisfied: 

a. inner packagings must not contain more 

than 50 g of explosive substance (quantity 

corresponding to dry substance); 

b. each inner packaging must be separated 

from other inner packagings by dividing 

partitions; and 

c. the outer packaging must not be partitioned with more than 25 compartments 

rubber, conductive

plastics, conductive 

Receptacles ...............

metal ......................

wood ......................

rubber, conductive

plastics, conductive 

metal ......................

wood ......................

plastics ...................

fibreboard ...............

natural wood, siftproof wall (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

111 .................................................................................

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:.

For UN 0159, inner packagings are not required 

when metal (1A2 or 1B2) or plastics (1H2) 

drums are used as outer packagings.

Bags ..........................

paper, waterproofed 

plastics ...................

textile, rubberized ..

Sheets .......................

plastics ...................

textile, rubberized ..

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

natural wood, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, sift 

proof (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, expanded 

(4H1).

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminum, removable head (1B2). 

plywood (1D). 

fibreboard (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

112(a) This packing instruction applies to wetted solids.Bags .......................... Bags .......................... Boxes. 

482

§ 173.62 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 

and 0394, packagings must be lead free 

2. Intermediate packagings are not required if 

leakproof drums are used as the outer packaging

3. For UN 0072 and UN 0226, intermediate packagings are not required 

paper, multiwall, 

water resistant.

plastics ...................

textile ......................

textile, rubberized ..

woven plastics .......

Receptacles ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

plastics ...................

textile, plastic coated or lined.

Receptacles ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

natural wood, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, sift 

proof (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, expanded 

(4H1).

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

112(b) This packing instruction applies to dry solids 

other than powders.

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:.

1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 

and 0386, packagings must be lead free.

2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry 

state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg..

3. For UN 0222, inner packagings are not required.

Bags ..........................

paper, Kraft ............

paper, multiwall, 

water resistant.

plastics ...................

textile ......................

textile, rubberized 

plastics.

woven plastics .......

Bags (for UN 0150 

only).

plastics ...................

textile, plastic coated or lined.

Bags.

woven plastics siftproof (5H2/3). 

plastics, film (5H4). 

textile, sift-proof 

(5L2).

textile, water resistant (5L3). 

paper, multiwall, 

water resistant 

(5M2).

Boxes

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

natural wood, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, sift 

proof (4C2). 

plywood (4D) 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, expanded 

(4H1).

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

112(c) This packing instruction applies to solid dry 

powders.

Bags .......................... Bags .......................... Boxes. 

483

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 

and 0386, packagings must be lead free 

2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry 

state. Bags must not exceed a maximum net 

mass of 30 kg. 

3. Inner packagings are not required if drums are 

used as the outer packaging. 

4. At least one of the packagings must be siftproof

paper, multiwall, 

water resistant.

plastics ...................

woven plastics .......

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

paper, multiwall, 

water resistant 

with inner lining.

plastics ...................

Receptacles ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

steel (4A). 

natural wood, 

aluminum (4B). 

ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, 

sift proof (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

113 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0094 and UN 0305, no more than 50 g 

of substance must be packed in an inner packaging

2. For UN 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as the outer packaging

3. At least one of the packagings must be siftproof

4. Sheets must only be used for UN 0028 

paper ......................

plastics ...................

textile, rubberized ..

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Sheets .......................

paper, kraft .............

paper, waxed .........

.................................... steel (4A). 

aluminum (4B). 

natural wood, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, siftproof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

114(a) This packing instruction applies to wetted solids.

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:.

1. For UN 0077, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings must be lead free.

2. For UN 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A2 or 1B2) or plastics 

(1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.

3. Intermediate packagings are not required if 

leakproof removable head drums are used as 

the outer packaging.

Bags ..........................

plastics ...................

textile ......................

woven plastics .......

Receptacles ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

Bags ..........................

plastics ...................

textile, plastic coated or lined.

Receptacles ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

Boxes.

steel (4A). 

natural wood, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics,

removable head 

(1H2).

114(b) This packing instruction applies to dry solids.

484

§ 173.62 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings must be lead free 

2. For UN 0160 and UN 0161, when metal drums 

(1A2 or 1B2) are used as the outer packaging, 

metal packagings must be so constructed that the 

risk of explosion, by reason of increased internal 

pressure from internal or external causes, is prevented

3. For UN 0160, UN 0161, and UN 0508, inner packagings are not necessary if drums are used as the 

outer packaging 

4. For UN 0508 and UN 0509, metal packagings must 

not be used 

Bags ..........................

paper, kraft 

plastics

textile, sift-proof 

woven plastics, siftproof.

Receptacles ................... 

fiberboard

metal

paper

plastics

woven plastics, siftproof.

Not necessary ...........

....................................

Boxes.

natural wood, ordinary 

(4C1).

natural wood, siftproof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fiberboard (4G). 

Drums.

steel, removable head 

(1A2).

aluminum, removable 

head (1B2). 

plywood (1D). 

fiber (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

115 ................................................................................. Receptacles Bags .......................... Boxes.

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For liquid explosives, inner packagings must be 

surrounded with non-combustible absorbent 

cushioning material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire liquid content. Metal receptacles 

should be cushioned from each other. The net 

mass of explosive per package may not exceed 

30 kg when boxes are used as outer packaging. The net volume of explosive in each 

package other than boxes must not exceed 120 

litres

2. For UN 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497 when 

boxes are used as the outer packaging, inner 

packagings must have taped screw cap closures and be not more than 5 litres capacity 

each. A composite packaging consisting of a 

plastic receptacle in a metal drum (6HA1) may 

be used in lieu of combination packagings. Liquid substances must not freeze at temperatures 

above ¥15 °C (+5 °F)

3. For UN 0144, intermediate packagings are not 

necessary.

metal

plastics

plastics in metal receptacles.

Drums ........................

metal ......................

natural wood, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

Drums.

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

Specification MC–200 

containers may be 

used for transport 

by motor vehicle. 

116 ................................................................................. Bags Not necessary ........... Bags. 

485

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner 

packagings are not necessary if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer 

packaging

2. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner 

packagings are not required when the explosive 

is contained in a material impervious to liquid 

3. For UN 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is 

impervious to nitric esters 

4. For UN 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2), (5H3) or (5H4) are 

used as outer packagings 

5. Bags (5H2 or 5H3) must be used only for UN 

0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332 

6. For UN 0081, bags must not be used as outer 

packagings

paper, water and oil ..

resistant .................

plastics ...................

texitile, plasic coated or.

lined .......................

woven plasics, siftproof.

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard, water 

resistant.

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood, sift-proof ......

Sheets .......................

paper, water resistant.

paper, waxed .........

plastics ...................

.................................... woven plastics 

(5H1/2/3).

paper, mulitwall, 

water resistant 

(5M2).

plastics, film (5H4). 

textile, sift-proof 

(5L2).

textile, water resistant (5L3). 

Boxes.

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

Jerricans.

steel, removable 

head (3A2). 

plastics, removable 

head (3H2). 

117 ................................................................................. Not necessary ........... Not necessary ........... IBCs. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. This packing instruction may only be used for 

explosives of 0082 when they are mixtures of 

ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates 

with other combustible substances which are 

not explosive ingredients. Such explosives must 

not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic 

nitrates, liquid or solid nitrocarbons, or chlorates.

2. This packing instruction may only be used for 

explosives of UN 0241 which consist of water 

as an essential ingredient and high proportions 

of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizers, some 

or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but must not include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene. 

3. Metal IBCs must not be used for UN 0082 and 

0241.

4. Flexible IBCs may only be used for solids. 

.................................... .................................... metal (11A), (11B), 

(11N), (21A), 

(21B), (21N), 

(31A), (31B), 

(31N).

flexible (13H2), 

(13H3), (13H4), 

(13L2), (13L3), 

(13L4), (13M2). 

rigid plastics 

(11H1), (11H2), 

(21H1), (21H2), 

(31H1), (31H2). 

composite (11HZ1), 

(11HZ2),

(21HZ1),

(21HZ2),

(31HZ1),

(31HZ2).

130 ................................................................................. Not necessary ........... Not necessary ...........

Particular Packaging Requirements: 

486

§ 173.62 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

The following applies to UN 0006, 0009, 

0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 

0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 

0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 

0238, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 

0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 

0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 

0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 

0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0459 

and 0488. Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, 

without their means of initiation or with their 

means of initiation containing at least two 

effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged. When such articles have 

propelling charges or are self-propelled, 

their ignition systems must be protected 

against stimuli encountered during normal 

conditions of transport. A negative result in 

Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered 

for transport unpackaged. Such 

unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable 

handling devices.

.................................... .................................... Boxes. 

Steel (4A). 

Wood natural, ordinary (4C1). 

Plywood (4D). 

Reconstituted wood 

(4F).

Fiberboard (4G). 

Plastics, expanded 

(4H1).

Plastics, solid (4H2). 

Drums.

Steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

Aluminum, removable 

head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

Fiber (1G). 

Plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

Large Packagings. 

Steel (50A). 

Aluminum (50B). 

Metal other than steel 

or aluminum (50N). 

Rigid plastics (50H). 

Natural wood (50C). 

Plywood (50D). 

Reconstituted wood 

(50F).

Rigid fiberboard 

(50G).

131 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels 

may not be used as inner packagings 

2. For UN 0030, 0255 and 0456, inner packagings are not required when detonators are 

packed in pasteboard tubes, or when their leg 

wires are wound on spools with the caps either 

placed inside the spool or securely taped to the 

wire on the spool, so as to restrict free moving 

of the caps and to protect them from impact 

forces

3. For UN 0360, 0361 and 0500, detonators are 

not required to be attached to the safety fuse, 

metal-clad mild detonating cord, detonating 

cord, or shock tube. Inner packagings are not 

required if the packing configuration restricts 

free moving of the caps and protects them from 

impact forces 

.

paper.

plastics ...................

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Reels .........................

.................................... steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

natural wood, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

132(a) For articles consisting of closed metal, plastic 

or fiberboard casings that contian detonating explosives, or consisting of plastics-bonded detonating 

explosives.

Not necessary ........... Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminum (4B). 

wood, natural; ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fiberboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

487

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

132(b) For articles without closed casings ................... Receptacles fiberboard metal plastics. Sheets paper 

plastics.

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A); aluminum (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fiberboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

133 ................................................................................. Receptacles ............... Receptacles ............... Boxes. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306 

trays are not authorized as inner packagings 

Intermediate packagings are only required when trays 

are used as inner 

packagings.

fibreboard ..................

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Trays, fitted with dividing.

partitions ....................

fibreboard ..................

plastics .......................

wood ..........................

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

134 ................................................................................. Bags ..........................

water resistant 

Receptacles

fibreboard

metal

plastics

wood

Sheets

fibreboard, corrugated

Tubes

fibreboard

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted

wood (4F). 

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, expanded (4H1). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

fibreboard (1G). 

plastics, removable head (1H2). 

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head 

(1B2).

plywood (1D). 

488

§ 173.62 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

135 ................................................................................. Bags ..........................

paper ......................

plastics ...................

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Sheets .......................

paper ......................

plastics ...................

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, expanded 

(4H1).

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

136 ................................................................................. Bags ..........................

plastics ...................

textile ......................

Boxes. ........................

fibreboard ...............

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Dividing partitions in 

the.

outer packagings .......

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B) 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

137 PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR 

EXCEPTIONS: For UN 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, 

when the shaped charges are packed singly, the 

conical cavity must face downwards and the package marked ‘‘THIS SIDE UP’’. When the shaped 

charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities 

must face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in 

the event of accidental initiation.

Bags ..........................

plastics ...................

Boxes .........................

fibreboard ...............

Tubes .........................

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

Dividing partitions in 

the outer packagings.

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

138 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

489

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.62 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary 

plastics ................... .................................... steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

fiberboard (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

139 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the 

ends of the detonating cord must be sealed, for 

example, by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of CORD 

DETONATING flexible must be fastened securely

2. For UN 0065 and UN 0289, inner packagings 

are not required when they are fastened securely in coils 

plastics ...................

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Reels .........................

...............................

Sheets .......................

paper ......................

plastics ...................

.................................... steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

140 ................................................................................. Bags .......................... Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. If the ends of UN 0105 are sealed, no inner 

packagings are required 

2. For UN 0101, the packaging must be sift-proof 

except when the fuse is covered by a paper 

tube and both ends of the tube are covered 

with removable caps 

3. For UN 0101, steel or aluminium boxes or 

drums must not be used 

plastics ...................

Reels .........................

Sheets .......................

paper, kraft .............

plastics ...................

.................................... steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

490

§ 173.62 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

141 ................................................................................. Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

...............................

Trays, fitted with dividing partitions.

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Dividing partitions in 

the outer packagings.

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

142 ................................................................................. Bags ..........................

paper ......................

plastics ...................

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

wood ......................

Sheets .......................

paper ......................

Trays, fitted with dividing partitions.

plastics ...................

Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

steel (4A). 

aluminium (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

Plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

143 ................................................................................. Bag ............................ Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

1. For UN 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491 when 

metal packagings are used, metal packagings 

must be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure 

from internal or external causes is prevented 

2. Composite packagings (6HH2) (plastic receptacle with outer solid box) may be used in lieu 

of combination packagings 

paper, kraft .............

plastics ...................

textile ......................

textile, rubberized ..

Receptacles ...............

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

Trays, fitted with dividing partitions.

plastics ...................

wood ......................

.................................... steel (4A). 

aluminum (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). 

wood, natural, sift 

proof walls (4C2). 

plywood (4D). 

reconstituted wood 

(4F).

fibreboard (4G). 

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

plywood (1D). 

fibre (1G). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

491

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.63 

TABLE OF PACKING METHODS—Continued

Packing instruction Inner packagings Intermediate

packagings Outer packagings 

144 ................................................................................. Receptacles ............... Not necessary ........... Boxes. 

Drums.

steel, removable 

head (1A2). 

aluminium, removable head (1B2). 

plastics, removable 

head (1H2). 

Plywood (1D). 

PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS:

For UN 0248 and UN 0249, packagings must be 

protected against the ingress of water. When 

CONTRIVANCES, WATER ACTIVATED are 

transported unpackaged, they must be provided 

with at least two independent protective features which prevent the ingress of water 

fibreboard ...............

metal ......................

plastics ...................

Dividing partitions in 

the outer packagings.

.................................... 2steel (4A). 

aluminum (4B). 

wood, natural, ordinary (4C1) with 

metal liner. 

plywood (4D) with 

metal liner. 

reconstituted wood 

(4F) with metal 

liner.

plastics, expanded 

(4H1).

plastics, solid 

(4H2).

US 1 

1. A jet perforating gun, charged, oil well may be transported under the following conditions: 

a. Initiation devices carried on the same motor vehicle or offshore supply vessel must be segregated; each kind from every 

other kind, and from any gun, tool or other supplies, unless approved in accordance with § 173.56. Segregated initiation 

devices must be carried in a container having individual pockets for each such device or in a fully enclosed steel container lined with a non-sparking material. No more than two segregated initiation devices per gun may be carried on the 

same motor vehicle. 

b. Each shaped charge affixed to the gun may not contain more than 112 g (4 ounces) of explosives. 

c. Each shaped charge if not completely enclosed in glass or metal, must be fully protected by a metal cover after installation in the gun. 

d. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.1D or 1.4D may be transported by highway by private or contract carriers engaged in 

oil well operations. 

(i) A motor vehicle transporting a gun must have specially built racks or carrying cases designed and constructed so that 

the gun is securely held in place during transportation and is not subject to damage by contact, one to the other or any 

other article or material carried in the vehicle; and 

(ii) The assembled gun packed on the vehicle may not extend beyond the body of the motor vehicle. 

e. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.4D may be transported by a private offshore supply vessel only when the gun is carried in a motor vehicle as specified in paragraph (d) of this packing method or on offshore well tool pallets provided that: 

(i) All the conditions specified in paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this packing method are met; 

(ii) The total explosive contents do not exceed 90.8 kg (200 pounds) per tool pallet; 

(iii) Each cargo vessel compartment may contain up to 90.8 kg (200 pounds) of explosive content if the segregation requirements in § 176.83(b) of this subchapter are met; and 

(iv) When more than one vehicle or tool pallet is stowed ‘‘on deck’’ a minimum horizontal separation of 3 m (9.8 feet) must 

be provided. 

[Amdt. 173–260, 62 FR 24720, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 

63 FR 1884, Jan. 12, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 

18, 2000; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 65 FR 60383, Oct. 11, 2000; 66 FR 33429, 33430, June 21, 2001; 

66 FR 45183, 45379, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 68 FR 48569, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 

FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 73 FR 4717, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 2009; 75 FR 72, Jan. 4, 

2010; 75 FR 5394, Feb. 2, 2010] 

§ 173.63 Packaging exceptions. 

(a) Cord, detonating (UN 0065), having 

an explosive content not exceeding 6.5 

g (0.23 ounces) per 30 centimeter length 

(one linear foot) may be offered for 

transportation domestically and transported as Cord, detonating (UN 0289), 

Division 1.4 Compatibility Group D 

(1.4D) explosives, if the gross weight of 

all packages containing Cord, detonating (UN 0065), does not exceed 45 kg 

(99 pounds) per: 

(1) Transport vehicle, freight container, or cargo-only aircraft; 

(2) Off-shore down-hole tool pallet 

carried on an off-shore supply vessel; 

(3) Cargo compartment of a cargo 

vessel; or 

492

§ 173.115 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(4) Passenger-carrying aircraft used 

to transport personnel to remote work 

sites, such as offshore drilling units. 

(b) Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices. (1) Cartridges, 

small arms, and cartridges power devices (which are used to project fastening devices) which have been 

classed as a Division 1.4S explosive 

may be reclassed, offered for transportation, and transported as ORM–D material when packaged in accordance 

with paragraph (b)(2) of this section. 

For transportation by aircraft, the 

package must also comply with the applicable requirements of §173.27 of this 

subchapter. Such transportation is excepted from the requirements of subparts E (Labeling) and F (Placarding) 

of part 172 of this subchapter. Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges 

power devices that may be shipped as 

ORM–D material are limited to: 

(i) Ammunition for rifle, pistol or 

shotgun;

(ii) Ammunition with inert projectiles or blank ammunition; 

(iii) Ammunition having no tear gas, 

incendiary, or detonating explosive 

projectiles;

(iv) Ammunition not exceeding 12.7 

mm (50 caliber or 0.5 inch) for rifle or 

pistol, cartridges or 8 gauge for 

shotshells; and 

(v) Cartridges, power devices which 

are used to project fastening devices. 

(2) Packaging for cartridges, small 

arms, and cartridges power devices as 

ORM-D material must be as follows: 

(i) Ammunition must be packed in inside boxes, or in partitions which fit 

snugly in the outside packaging, or in 

metal clips; 

(ii) Primers must be protected from 

accidental initiation; 

(iii) Inside boxes, partitions or metal 

clips must be packed in securely-closed 

strong outside packagings; 

(iv) Maximum gross weight is limited 

to 30 kg (66 pounds) per package; and 

(v) Cartridges, power devices which 

are used to project fastening devices 

and 22 caliber rim-fire cartridges may 

be packaged loose in strong outside 

packagings.

(c)–(e) [Reserved] 

(f) Detonators containing no more 

than 1 g explosive (excluding ignition 

and delay charges) that are electric 

blasting caps with leg wires 4 feet long 

or longer, delay connectors in plastic 

sheaths, or blasting caps with empty 

plastic tubing 12 feet long or longer 

may be packed as follows in which case 

they are excepted from the packaging 

requirements of §173.62: 

(1) No more than 50 detonators in one 

inner packaging; 

(2) IME Standard 22 container (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter) or compartment is used as the outer packaging;

(3) No more than 1000 detonators in 

one outer packaging; and 

(4) No material may be loaded on top 

of the IME Standard 22 container and 

no material may be loaded against the 

outside door of the IME Standard 22 

compartment.

(g) Detonators that are classed as 

1.4B or 1.4S and contain no more than 

1 g of explosive (excluding ignition and 

delay charges) may be packed as follows in which case they are excepted 

from the packaging requirements of 

§173.62: 

(1) No more than 50 detonators in one 

inner packaging; 

(2) IME Standard 22 container is used 

as the outer packaging; 

(3) No more than 1000 detonators in 

one outer packaging; and 

(4) Each inner packaging is marked 

‘‘l.4B Detonators’’ or ‘‘1.4S Detonators’’, as appropriate. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–236, 58 FR 50536, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173– 

253, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996; 68 FR 75743, 

Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 14602, Mar. 22, 2006] 

Subpart D—Definitions Classification, Packing Group Assignments and Exceptions for 

Hazardous Materials Other 

Than Class 1 and Class 7 

SOURCE: Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 

1990, unless otherwise noted. 

§ 173.115 Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 

2.3—Definitions. 

(a) Division 2.1 (Flammable gas). For

the purpose of this subchapter, a flammable gas (Division 2.1) means any material which is a gas at 20 °C (68 °F) or 

less and 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) of pressure 

493

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.115 

(a material which has a boiling point of 

20 °C (68 °F) or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 

psia)) which— 

(1) Is ignitable at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) 

when in a mixture of 13 percent or less 

by volume with air; or 

(2) Has a flammable range at 101.3 

kPa (14.7 psia) with air of at least 12 

percent regardless of the lower limit. 

Except for aerosols, the limits specified 

in paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this 

section shall be determined at 101.3 

kPa (14.7 psia) of pressure and a temperature of 20 °C (68 °F) in accordance 

with the ASTM E681–85, Standard Test 

Method for Concentration Limits of 

Flammability of Chemicals or other 

equivalent method approved by the Associate Administrator. The flammability of aerosols is determined by the 

tests specified in §173.115 (k) of this 

section.

(b) Division 2.2 (non-flammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas—including compressed gas, liquefied gas, pressurized 

cryogenic gas, compressed gas in solution, 

asphyxiant gas and oxidizing gas). For 

the purpose of this subchapter, a nonflammable, nonpoisonous compressed 

gas (Division 2.2) means any material 

(or mixture) which— 

(1) Exerts in the packaging a gauge 

pressure of 200 kPa (29.0 psig/43.8 psia) 

or greater at 20 °C (68 °F), is a liquefied 

gas or is a cryogenic liquid, and 

(2) Does not meet the definition of 

Division 2.1 or 2.3. 

(c) Division 2.3 (Gas poisonous by inhalation). For the purpose of this subchapter, a gas poisonous by inhalation 

(Division 2.3) means a material which 

is a gas at 20 °C (68 °F) or less and a 

pressure of 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) (a material which has a boiling point of 20 °C

(68 °F) or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia)) 

and which— 

(1) Is known to be so toxic to humans 

as to pose a hazard to health during 

transportation, or 

(2) In the absence of adequate data on 

human toxicity, is presumed to be 

toxic to humans because when tested 

on laboratory animals it has an LC50

value of not more than 5000 mL/m3 (see

§173.116(a) of this subpart for assignment of Hazard Zones A, B, C or D). 

LC50 values for mixtures may be determined using the formula in 

§173.133(b)(1)(i) or CGA P–20 (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter). 

(d) Non-liquefied compressed gas. A

gas, which when packaged under pressure for transportation is entirely gaseous at ¥50 °C (¥58 °F) with a critical 

temperature less than or equal to ¥50

°C (¥58 °F), is considered to be a nonliquefied compressed gas. 

(e) Liquefied compressed gas. A gas, 

which when packaged under pressure 

for transportation is partially liquid at 

temperatures above ¥50 °C (¥58 °F), is 

considered to be a liquefied compressed 

gas. A liquefied compressed gas is further categorized as follows: 

(1) High pressure liquefied gas which is 

a gas with a critical temperature between ¥50 °C (¥58 °F) and + 65 °C (149 

°F), and 

(2) Low pressure liquefied gas which is 

a gas with a critical temperature above 

+ 65 °C (149 °F).

(f) Compressed gas in solution. A compressed gas in solution is a non-liquefied 

compressed gas which is dissolved in a 

solvent.

(g) Cryogenic liquid. A cryogenic liquid 

means a refrigerated liquefied gas having a boiling point colder than ¥90 °C

(¥130 °F) at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) absolute. A material meeting this definition is subject to requirements of this 

subchapter without regard to whether 

it meets the definition of a non-flammable, non-poisonous compressed gas 

in paragraph (b) of this section. 

(h) Flammable range. The term flammable range means the difference between the minimum and maximum volume percentages of the material in air 

that forms a flammable mixture. 

(i) Service pressure. The term service

pressure means the authorized pressure 

marking on the packaging. For example, for a cylinder marked ‘‘DOT 

3A1800’’, the service pressure is 12410 

kPa (1800 psig). 

(j) Refrigerant gas or Dispersant gas. 

The terms Refrigerant gas and Dispersant gas apply to all nonpoisonous refrigerant gases; dispersant gases (fluorocarbons) listed in §172.101 of this subchapter and §§173.304, 173.314(c), 

173.315(a), and 173.315(h) and mixtures 

thereof; and any other compressed gas 

having a vapor pressure not exceeding 

260 psia at 54 °C(130 °F), used only as a 

494

§ 173.116 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

refrigerant, dispersant, or blowing 

agent.

(k) For Division 2.2 gases, the oxidizing ability shall be determined by 

tests or by calculation in accordance 

with ISO 10156:1996 and ISO 10156–2:2005 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(l) The following applies to aerosols 

(see §171.8 of this subchapter): 

(1) An aerosol must be assigned to Division 2.1 if the contents include 85% 

by mass or more flammable components and the chemical heat of combustion is 30 kJ/g or more; 

(2) An aerosol must be assigned to Division 2.2 if the contents contain 1% by 

mass or less flammable components 

and the heat of combustion is less than 

20 kJ/g. 

(3) Aerosols not meeting the provisions of paragraphs (a) or (b) of this 

section must be classed in accordance 

with the appropriate tests of the UN 

Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter). An aerosol 

which was tested in accordance with 

the requirements of this subchapter in 

effect on December 31, 2005, is not required to be retested. 

(4) Division 2.3 gases may not be 

transported in an aerosol container. 

(5) When the contents are classified 

as Division 6.1, PG III or Class 8, PG II 

or III, the aerosol must be assigned a 

subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1 or 

Class 8, as appropriate. 

(6) Substances of Division 6.1, PG I or 

II, and substances of Class 8, PG I are 

forbidden from transportation in an 

aerosol container. 

(7) Flammable components are Class 

3 flammable liquids, Division 4.1 flammable solids, or Division 2.1 flammable 

gases. The chemical heat of combustion must be determined in accordance 

with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–236, 58 FR 50236, 

Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 

1, 1993; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67506, Dec. 29, 

1994; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; 

66 FR 45379, 45380, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 

51642, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 16013, Sept. 27, 2002; 

68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 

2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, 

June 14, 2005; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 

2256, Jan. 14, 2009; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009; 75 

FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010] 

§ 173.116 Class 2—Assignment of hazard zone. 

(a) The hazard zone of a Class 2, Division 2.3 material is assigned in column 

7 of the §172.101 table. There are no 

hazard zones for Divisions 2.1 and 2.2. 

When the §172.101 table provides more 

than one hazard zone for a Division 2.3 

material, or indicates that the hazard 

zone be determined on the basis of the 

grouping criteria for Division 2.3, the 

hazard zone shall be determined by applying the following criteria: 

Hazard

zone Inhalation toxicity 

A .............. LC50 less than or equal to 200 ppm. 

B .............. LC50 greater than 200 ppm and less than or 

equal to 1000 ppm. 

C .............. LC50 greater than 1000 ppm and less than or 

equal to 3000 ppm. 

D .............. LC50 greater than 3000 ppm or less than or 

equal to 5000 ppm. 

(b) The criteria specified in paragraph (a) of this section are represented graphically in §173.133, Figure 

1.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 67 FR 

61013, Sept. 27, 2002] 

§§ 173.117–173.119 [Reserved] 

§ 173.120 Class 3—Definitions. 

(a) Flammable liquid. For the purpose 

of this subchapter, a flammable liquid 

(Class 3) means a liquid having a flash 

point of not more than 60 °C (140 °F), or 

any material in a liquid phase with a 

flash point at or above 37.8 °C (100 °F)

that is intentionally heated and offered 

for transportation or transported at or 

above its flash point in a bulk packaging, with the following exceptions: 

495

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.120 

(1) Any liquid meeting one of the 

definitions specified in §173.115. 

(2) Any mixture having one or more 

components with a flash point of 60 °C

(140 °F) or higher, that make up at 

least 99 percent of the total volume of 

the mixture, if the mixture is not offered for transportation or transported 

at or above its flash point. 

(3) Any liquid with a flash point 

greater than 35 °C (95 °F) that does not 

sustain combustion according to ASTM 

D 4206 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) or the procedure in appendix 

H of this part. 

(4) Any liquid with a flash point 

greater than 35 °C (95 °F) and with a 

fire point greater than 100 °C (212 °F)

according to ISO 2592 (IBR, see §171.7 of 

this subchapter). 

(5) Any liquid with a flash point 

greater than 35 °C (95 °F) which is in a 

water-miscible solution with a water 

content of more than 90 percent by 

mass.

(b) Combustible liquid. (1) For the 

purpose of this subchapter, a combustible liquid means any liquid that does 

not meet the definition of any other 

hazard class specified in this subchapter and has a flash point above 60 

°C (140 °F) and below 93 °C (200 °F).

(2) A flammable liquid with a flash 

point at or above 38 °C (100 °F) that 

does not meet the definition of any 

other hazard class may be reclassed as 

a combustible liquid. This provision 

does not apply to transportation by 

vessel or aircraft, except where other 

means of transportation is impracticable. An elevated temperature material that meets the definition of a Class 

3 material because it is intentionally 

heated and offered for transportation 

or transported at or above its flash 

point may not be reclassed as a combustible liquid. 

(3) A combustible liquid that does not 

sustain combustion is not subject to 

the requirements of this subchapter as 

a combustible liquid. Either the test 

method specified in ASTM D 4206 or the 

procedure in appendix H of this part 

may be used to determine if a material 

sustains combustion when heated 

under test conditions and exposed to an 

external source of flame. 

(c) Flash point. (1) Flash point means

the minimum temperature at which a 

liquid gives off vapor within a test vessel in sufficient concentration to form 

an ignitable mixture with air near the 

surface of the liquid. It shall be determined as follows: 

(i) For a homogeneous, single-phase, 

liquid having a viscosity less than 45 

S.U.S. at 38 °C (100 °F) that does not 

form a surface film while under test, 

one of the following test procedures 

shall be used: 

(A) Standard Method of Test for 

Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, 

(ASTM D 56); 

(B) Standard Methods of Test for 

Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash 

Closed Tester, (ASTM D 3278); or 

(C) Standard Test Methods for Flash 

Point by Small Scale Closed Tester, 

(ASTM D 3828). 

(ii) For a liquid other than one meeting all of the criteria of paragraph 

(c)(1)(i) of this section, one of the following test procedures shall be used: 

(A) Standard Method of Test for 

Flash Point by Pensky—Martens 

Closed Tester, (ASTM D 93). For cutback asphalt, use Method B of ASTM D 

93 or alternate tests authorized in this 

standard; or 

(B) Standard Methods of Test for 

Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash 

Closed Tester (ASTM D 3278). 

(2) For a liquid that is a mixture of 

compounds that have different volatility and flash points, its flash point 

shall be determined as specified in 

paragraph (c)(1) of this section, on the 

material in the form in which it is to 

be shipped. If it is determined by this 

test that the flash point is higher than 

¥7 °C (20 °F) a second test shall be 

made as follows: a portion of the mixture shall be placed in an open beaker 

(or similar container) of such dimensions that the height of the liquid can 

be adjusted so that the ratio of the volume of the liquid to the exposed surface area is 6 to one. The liquid shall be 

allowed to evaporate under ambient 

pressure and temperature (20 to 25 °C

(68 to 77 °F)) for a period of 4 hours or 

until 10 percent by volume has evaporated, whichever comes first. A flash 

point is then run on a portion of the 

liquid remaining in the evaporation 

container and the lower of the two 

flash points shall be the flash point of 

the material. 

496

§ 173.121 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(3) For flash point determinations by 

Setaflash closed tester, the glass syringe specified need not be used as the 

method of measurement of the test 

sample if a minimum quantity of 2 mL 

(0.1 ounce) is assured in the test cup. 

(d) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a material is 

greater or less than indicated by the 

criteria specified in paragraphs (a) and 

(b) of this section, the Associate Administrator may revise the classification or make the material subject or 

not subject to the requirements of 

parts 170–189 of this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 

2, 1991; 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, 

Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67506, 67507, 

Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 

26, 1996; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 

1997; 66 FR 45379, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 

75743, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006] 

§ 173.121 Class 3—Assignment of packing group. 

(a) The packing group of a Class 3 

material is as assigned in column 5 of 

the §172.101 table. When the §172.101 

table provides more than one packing 

group for a hazardous material, the 

packing group shall be determined by 

applying the following criteria: 

Packing

group Flash point (closed-cup) Initial boiling point

I ........... ....................................................... ≤35°C (95 °F)

II .......... <23°C (73 °F) ............................... >35 °C (95 °F)

III ......... ≥23 °C, ≤60 °C (≥73 °F, ≤140 °F) >35 °C (95 °F)

(b) Criteria for inclusion of viscous 

Class 3 materials in Packing Group III. (1)

Viscous Class 3 materials in Packing 

Group II with a flash point of less than 

23 °C (73 °F) may be grouped in Packing 

Group III provided that— 

(i) Less than 3 percent of the clear 

solvent layer separates in the solvent 

separation test; 

(ii) The mixture does not contain any 

substances with a primary or a subsidiary risk of Division 6.1 or Class 8; 

(iii) The capacity of the packaging is 

not more than 30 L (7.9 gallons); and 

(iv) The viscosity and flash point are 

in accordance with the following table: 

Flow time t in secondsJet diameter in mm Flash point c.c. 

20<t≤60 ............. 4 above 17 °C (62.6 °F).

60<t≤100 ........... 4 above 10 °C (50 °F).

Flow time t in 

seconds

Jet diameter 

in mm Flash point c.c. 

20<t≤32 ............. 6 above 5 °C (41 °F).

32<t≤44 ............. 6 above ¥1 °C (31.2 °F).

44<t≤100 ........... 6 above ¥5 °C (23 °F).

100<t ................. 6 ¥5 °C (23 °F) and below. 

(2) The methods by which the tests 

referred to in paragraph (b)(1) of this 

section shall be performed are as follows:

(i) Viscosity test. The flow time in seconds is determined at 23 °C (73.4 °F)

using the ISO standard cup with a 4 

mm (0.16 inch) jet as set forth in ISO 

2431 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

Where the flow time exceeds 100 seconds, a further test is carried out using 

the ISO standard cup with a 6 mm (0.24 

inch) jet. 

(ii) Solvent Separation Test. This test 

is carried out at 23 °C (73 °F) using a 

100.0 mL(3 ounces) measuring cylinder 

of the stoppered type of approximately 

25.0 cm (9.8 inches) total height and of 

a uniform internal diameter of approximately 30 mm (1.2 inches) over the calibrated section. The sample should be 

stirred to obtain a uniform consistency, and poured in up to the 100 mL (3 

ounces) mark. The stopper should be 

inserted and the cylinder left standing 

undisturbed for 24 hours. After 24 

hours, the height of the upper separated layer should be measured and the 

percentage of this layer as compared 

with the total height of the sample calculated.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67507, Dec. 29, 1994 Amdt. 173– 

255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; 64 FR 10777, 

Mar. 5, 1999; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 

45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 

71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006] 

§ 173.124 Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 

4.3—Definitions. 

(a) Division 4.1 (Flammable Solid). For

the purposes of this subchapter, flammable solid (Division 4.1) means any of 

the following three types of materials: 

(1) Desensitized explosives that— 

(i) When dry are Explosives of Class 1 

other than those of compatibility 

group A, which are wetted with sufficient water, alcohol, or plasticizer to 

suppress explosive properties; and 

(ii) Are specifically authorized by 

name either in the §172.101Table or 

497

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.124 

have been assigned a shipping name 

and hazard class by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of— 

(A) A special permit issued under 

subchapter A of this chapter; or 

(B) An approval issued under 

§173.56(i) of this part. 

(2)(i) Self-reactive materials are materials that are thermally unstable and 

that can undergo a strongly 

exothermic decomposition even without participation of oxygen (air). A material is excluded from this definition 

if any of the following applies: 

(A) The material meets the definition 

of an explosive as prescribed in subpart 

C of this part, in which case it must be 

classed as an explosive; 

(B) The material is forbidden from 

being offered for transportation according to §172.101 of this subchapter 

or §173.21; 

(C) The material meets the definition 

of an oxidizer or organic peroxide as 

prescribed in subpart D of this part, in 

which case it must be so classed; 

(D) The material meets one of the 

following conditions: 

(1) Its heat of decomposition is less 

than 300 J/g; or 

(2) Its self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is greater 

than 75 °C (167 °F) for a 50 kg package; 

or

(3) It is an oxidizing substance in Division 5.1 containing less than 5.0% 

combustible organic substances; or 

(E) The Associate Administrator has 

determined that the material does not 

present a hazard which is associated 

with a Division 4.1 material. 

(ii) Generic types. Division 4.1 self-reactive materials are assigned to a generic system consisting of seven types. 

A self-reactive substance identified by 

technical name in the Self-Reactive 

Materials Table in §173.224 is assigned 

to a generic type in accordance with 

that table. Self-reactive materials not 

identified in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in §173.224 are assigned to 

generic types under the procedures of 

paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section. 

(A) Type A. Self-reactive material 

type A is a self-reactive material 

which, as packaged for transportation, 

can detonate or deflagrate rapidly. 

Transportation of type A self-reactive 

material is forbidden. 

(B) Type B. Self-reactive material 

type B is a self-reactive material 

which, as packaged for transportation, 

neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal 

explosion in a package. 

(C) Type C. Self-reactive material 

type C is a self-reactive material 

which, as packaged for transportation, 

neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly and cannot undergo a thermal explosion.

(D) Type D. Self-reactive material 

type D is a self-reactive material 

which—

(1) Detonates partially, does not 

deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent 

effect when heated under confinement; 

(2) Does not detonate at all, 

deflagrates slowly and shows no violent 

effect when heated under confinement; 

or

(3) Does not detonate or deflagrate at 

all and shows a medium effect when 

heated under confinement. 

(E) Type E. Self-reactive material 

type E is a self-reactive material 

which, in laboratory testing, neither 

detonates nor deflagrates at all and 

shows only a low or no effect when 

heated under confinement. 

(F) Type F. Self-reactive material 

type F is a self-reactive material 

which, in laboratory testing, neither 

detonates in the cavitated state nor 

deflagrates at all and shows only a low 

or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive 

power.

(G) Type G. Self-reactive material 

type G is a self-reactive material 

which, in laboratory testing, does not 

detonate in the cavitated state, will 

not deflagrate at all, shows no effect 

when heated under confinement, nor 

shows any explosive power. A type G 

self-reactive material is not subject to 

the requirements of this subchapter for 

self-reactive material of Division 4.1 

provided that it is thermally stable 

(self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 50 °C (122 °F) or higher for 

a 50 kg (110 pounds) package). A self-reactive material meeting all characteristics of type G except thermal stability is classed as a type F self-reactive, temperature control material. 

(iii) Procedures for assigning a self-reactive material to a generic type. A selfVerDate Mar<15>2010 15:30 Dec 30, 2010 Jkt 220213 PO 00000 Frm 00507 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\49\X49\220213.XXX ofr150 PsN: PC150
498

§ 173.125 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

reactive material must be assigned to a 

generic type based on— 

(A) Its physical state (i.e. liquid or 

solid), in accordance with the definition of liquid and solid in §171.8 of this 

subchapter;

(B) A determination as to its control 

temperature and emergency temperature, if any, under the provisions of 

§173.21(f); 

(C) Performance of the self-reactive 

material under the test procedures 

specified in the UN Manual of Tests 

and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this 

subchapter) and the provisions of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section; and 

(D) Except for a self-reactive material which is identified by technical 

name in the Self-Reactive Materials 

Table in §173.224(b) or a self-reactive 

material which may be shipped as a 

sample under the provisions of §173.224, 

the self-reactive material is approved 

in writing by the Associate Administrator. The person requesting approval 

shall submit to the Associate Administrator the tentative shipping description and generic type and— 

(1) All relevant data concerning physical state, temperature controls, and 

tests results; or 

(2) An approval issued for the self-reactive material by the competent authority of a foreign government. 

(iv) Tests. The generic type for a selfreactive material must be determined 

using the testing protocol from Figure 

14.2 (Flow Chart for Assigning Self-Reactive Substances to Division 4.1) from 

the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria. 

(3) Readily combustible solids are 

materials that— 

(i) Are solids which may cause a fire 

through friction, such as matches; 

(ii) Show a burning rate faster than 

2.2 mm (0.087 inches) per second when 

tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter); or 

(iii) Any metal powders that can be 

ignited and react over the whole length 

of a sample in 10 minutes or less, when 

tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria. 

(b) Division 4.2 (Spontaneously Combustible Material). For the purposes of this 

subchapter, spontaneously combustible 

material (Division 4.2) means— 

(1) A pyrophoric material. A 

pyrophoric material is a liquid or solid 

that, even in small quantities and 

without an external ignition source, 

can ignite within five (5) minutes after 

coming in contact with air when tested 

according to UN Manual of Tests and 

Criteria.

(2) A self-heating material. A selfheating material is a material that, 

when in contact with air and without 

an energy supply, is liable to self-heat. 

A material of this type which exhibits 

spontaneous ignition or if the temperature of the sample exceeds 200 °C (392 

°F) during the 24-hour test period when 

tested in accordance with UN Manual 

of Tests and Criteria, is classed as a Division 4.2 material. 

(c) Division 4.3 (Dangerous when wet 

material). For the purposes of this chapter, dangerous when wet material (Division 4.3) means a material that, by contact with water, is liable to become 

spontaneously flammable or to give off 

flammable or toxic gas at a rate greater than 1 L per kilogram of the material, per hour, when tested in accordance with UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–233, 58 FR 33305, 

June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 

1, 1993; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67507, Dec. 29, 

1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997; 

66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 

2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 73165, 

Dec. 9, 2005; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 

53188, Oct. 16, 2009] 

§ 173.125 Class 4—Assignment of packing group. 

(a) The packing group of a Class 4 

material is assigned in column (5) of 

the §172.101 Table. When the §172.101 

Table provides more than one packing 

group for a hazardous material, the 

packing group shall be determined on 

the basis of test results following test 

methods given in the UN Manual of 

Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of 

this subchapter) and by applying the 

appropriate criteria given in this section.

(b) Packing group criteria for readily 

combustible materials of Division 4.1 

are as follows: 

(1) Powdered, granular or pasty materials must be classified in Division 

499

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.127 

4.1 when the time of burning of one or 

more of the test runs, in accordance 

with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, is less than 45 seconds or the rate 

of burning is more than 2.2 mm/s. Powders of metals or metal alloys must be 

classified in Division 4.1 when they can 

be ignited and the reaction spreads 

over the whole length of the sample in 

10 minutes or less. 

(2) Packing group criteria for readily 

combustible materials of Division 4.1 

are assigned as follows: 

(i) For readily combustible solids 

(other than metal powders), Packing 

Group II if the burning time is less 

than 45 seconds and the flame passes 

the wetted zone. Packing Group II 

must be assigned to powders of metal 

or metal alloys if the zone of reaction 

spreads over the whole length of the 

sample in 5 minutes or less. 

(ii) For readily combustible solids 

(other than metal powders), Packing 

Group III must be assigned if the burning rate time is less than 45 seconds 

and the wetted zone stops the flame 

propagation for at least 4 minutes. 

Packing Group III must be assigned to 

metal powders if the reaction spreads 

over the whole length of the sample in 

more than 5 minutes but not more than 

10 minutes. 

(c) Packing group criteria for Division 4.2 materials is as follows: 

(1) Pyrophoric liquids and solids of 

Division 4.2 are assigned to Packing 

Group I. 

(2) A self-heating material is assigned to— 

(i) Packing Group II, if the material 

gives a positive test result when tested 

with a 25 mm cube size sample at 140 

°C; or 

(ii) Packing Group III, if— 

(A) A positive test result is obtained 

in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at 

140 °C and a negative test result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample 

cube at 140 °C and the substance is 

transported in packagings with a volume of more than 3 cubic meters; or 

(B) A positive test result is obtained 

in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at 

120 °C and a negative result is obtained 

in a test using a 25 mm sample cube at 

140 °C and the substance is transported 

in packagings with a volume of more 

than 450 L; or 

(C) A positive result is obtained in a 

test using a 100 mm sample cube at 100 

°C and a negative result is obtained in 

a test using a 25 mm sample cube at 140 

°C and the substance is transported in 

packagings with a volume of less than 

450 L. 

(d) A Division 4.3 dangerous when wet 

material is assigned to— 

(1) Packing Group I, if the material 

reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperatures and demonstrates a 

tendency for the gas produced to ignite 

spontaneously, or which reacts readily 

with water at ambient temperatures 

such that the rate of evolution of flammable gases is equal or greater than 10 

L per kilogram of material over any 

one minute; 

(2) Packing Group II, if the material 

reacts readily with water at ambient 

temperatures such that the maximum 

rate of evolution of flammable gases is 

equal to or greater than 20 L per kilogram of material per hour, and which 

does not meet the criteria for Packing 

Group I; or 

(3) Packing Group III, if the material 

reacts slowly with water at ambient 

temperatures such that the maximum 

rate of evolution of flammable gases is 

greater than 1 L per kilogram of material per hour, and which does not meet 

the criteria for Packing Group I or II. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 

26, 1996; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 

1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45380, 

Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003] 

§ 173.127 Class 5, Division 5.1—Definition and assignment of packing 

groups. 

(a) Definition. For the purpose of this 

subchapter, oxidizer (Division 5.1) 

means a material that may, generally 

by yielding oxygen, cause or enhance 

the combustion of other materials. 

(1) A solid material is classed as a Division 5.1 material if, when tested in 

accordance with the UN Manual of 

Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of 

this subchapter), its mean burning 

time is less than or equal to the burning time of a 3:7 potassium bromate/ 

cellulose mixture. 

(2) A liquid material is classed as a 

Division 5.1 material if, when tested in 

accordance with the UN Manual of 

500

§ 173.128 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Tests and Criteria, it spontaneously ignites or its mean time for a pressure 

rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa gauge is 

less then the time of a 1:1 nitric acid 

(65 percent)/cellulose mixture. 

(b) Assignment of packing groups. (1)

The packing group of a Division 5.1 material which is a solid shall be assigned 

using the following criteria: 

(i) Packing Group I, for any material 

which, in either concentration tested, 

exhibits a mean burning time less than 

the mean burning time of a 3:2 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture. 

(ii) Packing Group II, for any material which, in either concentration 

tested, exhibits a mean burning time 

less than or equal to the mean burning 

time of a 2:3 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and the criteria for 

Packing Group I are not met. 

(iii) Packing Group III for any material which, in either concentration 

tested, exhibits a mean burning time 

less than or equal to the mean burning 

time of a 3:7 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and the criteria for 

Packing Group I and II are not met. 

(2) The packing group of a Division 

5.1 material which is a liquid shall be 

assigned using the following criteria: 

(i) Packing Group I for: 

(A) Any material which spontaneously ignites when mixed with cellulose in a 1:1 ratio; or 

(B) Any material which exhibits a 

mean pressure rise time less than the 

pressure rise time of a 1:1 perchloric 

acid (50 percent)/cellulose mixture. 

(ii) Packing Group II, any material 

which exhibits a mean pressure rise 

time less than or equal to the pressure 

rise time of a 1:1 aqueous sodium chlorate solution (40 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group 

I are not met. 

(iii) Packing Group III, any material 

which exhibits a mean pressure rise 

time less than or equal to the pressure 

rise time of a 1:1 nitric acid (65 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria 

for Packing Group I and II are not met. 

[Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997, as 

amended at 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003] 

§ 173.128 Class 5, Division 5.2—Definitions and types. 

(a) Definitions. For the purposes of 

this subchapter, organic peroxide (Division 5.2) means any organic compound 

containing oxygen (O) in the bivalent 

-O-O- structure and which may be considered a derivative of hydrogen peroxide, where one or more of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by organic radicals, unless any of the following paragraphs applies: 

(1) The material meets the definition 

of an explosive as prescribed in subpart 

C of this part, in which case it must be 

classed as an explosive; 

(2) The material is forbidden from 

being offered for transportation according to §172.101 of this subchapter 

or §173.21; 

(3) The Associate Administrator has 

determined that the material does not 

present a hazard which is associated 

with a Division 5.2 material; or 

(4) The material meets one of the following conditions: 

(i) For materials containing no more 

than 1.0 percent hydrogen peroxide, the 

available oxygen, as calculated using 

the equation in paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of 

this section, is not more than 1.0 percent, or 

(ii) For materials containing more 

than 1.0 percent but not more than 7.0 

percent hydrogen peroxide, the available oxygen, content (Oa) is not more 

than 0.5 percent, when determined 

using the equation: 

O

n c

m a

i i

i i

k

= ×

=

16 ∑

1

where, for a material containing k species of 

organic peroxides: 

ni = number of -O-O- groups per molecule of 

the i th species 

ci = concentration (mass percent) of the i th

species

mi = molecular mass of the i th species 

(b) Generic types. Division 5.2 organic 

peroxides are assigned to a generic system which consists of seven types. An 

organic peroxide identified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides 

Table in §173.225 is assigned to a generic type in accordance with that 

table. Organic peroxides not identified 

in the Organic Peroxides table are assigned to generic types under the procedures of paragraph (c) of this section. 

(1) Type A. Organic peroxide type A is 

an organic peroxide which can detonate 

or deflagrate rapidly as packaged for 


EC13NO91.031</MATH>
501

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.132 

transport. Transportation of type A organic peroxides is forbidden. 

(2) Type B. Organic peroxide type B is 

an organic peroxide which, as packaged 

for transport, neither detonates nor 

deflagrates rapidly, but can undergo a 

thermal explosion. 

(3) Type C. Organic peroxide type C is 

an organic peroxide which, as packaged 

for transport, neither detonates nor 

deflagrates rapidly and cannot undergo 

a thermal explosion. 

(4) Type D. Organic peroxide type D is 

an organic peroxide which— 

(i) Detonates only partially, but does 

not deflagrate rapidly and is not affected by heat when confined; 

(ii) Does not detonate, deflagrates 

slowly, and shows no violent effect if 

heated when confined; or 

(iii) Does not detonate or deflagrate, 

and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement. 

(5) Type E. Organic peroxide type E is 

an organic peroxide which neither detonates nor deflagrates and shows low, 

or no, effect when heated under confinement.

(6) Type F. Organic peroxide type F is 

an organic peroxide which will not detonate in a cavitated state, does not 

deflagrate, shows only a low, or no, effect if heated when confined, and has 

low, or no, explosive power. 

(7) Type G. Organic peroxide type G is 

an organic peroxide which will not detonate in a cavitated state, will not 

deflagrate at all, shows no effect when 

heated under confinement, and shows 

no explosive power. A type G organic 

peroxide is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for organic 

peroxides of Division 5.2 provided that 

it is thermally stable (self-accelerating 

decomposition temperature is 50 °C (122 

°F) or higher for a 50 kg (110 pounds) 

package). An organic peroxide meeting 

all characteristics of type G except 

thermal stability and requiring temperature control is classed as a type F, 

temperature control organic peroxide. 

(c) Procedure for assigning an organic 

peroxide to a generic type. An organic 

peroxide shall be assigned to a generic 

type based on— 

(1) Its physical state (i.e., liquid or 

solid), in accordance with the definitions for liquid and solid in §171.8 of 

this subchapter; 

(2) A determination as to its control 

temperature and emergency temperature, if any, under the provisions of 

§173.21(f); and 

(3) Performance of the organic peroxide under the test procedures specified in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section. 

(d) Approvals. (1) An organic peroxide 

must be approved, in writing, by the 

Associate Administrator, before being 

offered for transportation or transported, including assignment of a generic type and shipping description, except for— 

(i) An organic peroxide which is identified by technical name in the Organic 

Peroxides Table in §173.225(c); 

(ii) A mixture of organic peroxides 

prepared according to §173.225(b); or 

(iii) An organic peroxide which may 

be shipped as a sample under the provisions of §173.225(b). 

(2) A person applying for an approval 

must submit all relevant data concerning physical state, temperature 

controls, and tests results or an approval issued for the organic peroxide 

by the competent authority of a foreign government. 

(e) Tests. The generic type for an organic peroxide shall be determined 

using the testing protocol from Figure 

20.1(a) (Classification and Flow Chart 

Scheme for Organic Peroxides) from 

the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 

241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 

62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 

2000; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 

28, 2001; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, 

Dec. 20, 2004] 

§ 173.129 Class 5, Division 5.2—Assignment of packing group. 

All Division 5.2 materials are assigned to Packing Group II in column 5 

of the §172.101 table. 

§ 173.132 Class 6, Division 6.1—Definitions. 

(a) For the purpose of this subchapter, poisonous material (Division

6.1) means a material, other than a gas, 

502

§ 173.132 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

which is known to be so toxic to humans as to afford a hazard to health 

during transportation, or which, in the 

absence of adequate data on human 

toxicity:

(1) Is presumed to be toxic to humans 

because it falls within any one of the 

following categories when tested on 

laboratory animals (whenever possible, 

animal test data that has been reported in the chemical literature 

should be used): 

(i) Oral Toxicity. A liquid or solid 

with an LD50 for acute oral toxicity of 

not more than 300 mg/kg. 

(ii) Dermal Toxicity. A material with 

an LD50 for acute dermal toxicity of 

not more than 1000 mg/kg. 

(iii) Inhalation Toxicity. (A) A dust or 

mist with an LC50 for acute toxicity on 

inhalation of not more than 4 mg/L; or 

(B) A material with a saturated 

vapor concentration in air at 20 °C (68 

°F) greater than or equal to one-fifth of 

the LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors and with an LC50 for

acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors 

of not more than 5000 mL/m3; or 

(2) Is an irritating material, with 

properties similar to tear gas, which 

causes extreme irritation, especially in 

confined spaces. 

(b) For the purposes of this subchapter—

(1) LD50 (median lethal dose) for 

acute oral toxicity is the statistically 

derived single dose of a substance that 

can be expected to cause death within 

14 days in 50% of young adult albino 

rats when administered by the oral 

route. The LD50 value is expressed in 

terms of mass of test substance per 

mass of test animal (mg/kg). 

(2) LD50 for acute dermal toxicity 

means that dose of the material which, 

administered by continuous contact for 

24 hours with the shaved intact skin 

(avoiding abrading) of an albino rabbit, 

causes death within 14 days in half of 

the animals tested. The number of animals tested must be sufficient to give 

statistically valid results and be in 

conformity with good pharmacological 

practices. The result is expressed in 

mg/kg body mass. 

(3) LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation means that concentration of 

vapor, mist, or dust which, administered by continuous inhalation for one 

hour to both male and female young 

adult albino rats, causes death within 

14 days in half of the animals tested. If 

the material is administered to the 

animals as a dust or mist, more than 90 

percent of the particles available for 

inhalation in the test must have a diameter of 10 microns or less if it is reasonably foreseeable that such concentrations could be encountered by a 

human during transport. The result is 

expressed in mg/L of air for dusts and 

mists or in mL/m3 of air (parts per million) for vapors. See §173.133(b) for LC50

determination for mixtures and for 

limit tests. 

(i) When provisions of this subchapter require the use of the LC50 for

acute toxicity on inhalation of dusts 

and mists based on a one-hour exposure 

and such data is not available, the LC50

for acute toxicity on inhalation based 

on a four-hour exposure may be multiplied by four and the product substituted for the one-hour LC50 for acute 

toxicity on inhalation. 

(ii) When the provisions of this subchapter require the use of the LC50 for

acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors 

based on a one-hour exposure and such 

data is not available, the LC50 for acute 

toxicity on inhalation based on a fourhour exposure may be multiplied by 

two and the product substituted for the 

one-hour LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation.

(iii) A solid substance should be tested if at least 10 percent of its total 

mass is likely to be dust in a respirable 

range, e.g. the aerodynamic diameter 

of that particle-fraction is 10 microns 

or less. A liquid substance should be 

tested if a mist is likely to be generated in a leakage of the transport 

containment. In carrying out the test 

both for solid and liquid substances, 

more than 90% (by mass) of a specimen 

prepared for inhalation toxicity testing 

must be in the respirable range as defined in this paragraph (b)(3)(iii). 

(c) For purposes of classifying and assigning packing groups to mixtures 

possessing oral or dermal toxicity hazards according to the criteria in 

§173.133(a)(1), it is necessary to determine the acute LD50 of the mixture. If 

a mixture contains more than one active constituent, one of the following 

503

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.133 

methods may be used to determine the 

oral or dermal LD50 of the mixture: 

(1) Obtain reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be transported; 

(2) If reliable, accurate data is not 

available, classify the formulation according to the most hazardous constituent of the mixture as if that constituent were present in the same concentration as the total concentration 

of all active constituents; or 

(3) If reliable, accurate data is not 

available, apply the formula: 

C

T

C

T

C

T T

A

A

B

B

Z

Z M

+ ++=

100

where:

C = the % concentration of constituent A, B 

... Z in the mixture; 

T = the oral LD50 values of constituent A, B 

... Z; 

TM = the oral LD50 value of the mixture. 

NOTE TO FORMULA IN PARAGRAPH (c)(3): This 

formula also may be used for dermal 

toxicities provided that this information is 

available on the same species for all constituents. The use of this formula does not 

take into account any potentiation or protective phenomena. 

(d) The foregoing categories shall not 

apply if the Associate Administrator 

has determined that the physical characteristics of the material or its probable hazards to humans as shown by 

documented experience indicate that 

the material will not cause serious 

sickness or death. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 

261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, August 28, 1997; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 

45379, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 

2004; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007] 

§ 173.133 Assignment of packing group 

and hazard zones for Division 6.1 

materials. 

(a) The packing group of Division 6.1 

materials shall be as assigned in column 5 of the §172.101 table. When the 

§172.101 table provides more than one 

packing group or hazard zone for a hazardous material, the packing group and 

hazard zone shall be determined by applying the following criteria: 

(1) The packing group assignment for 

routes of administration other than inhalation of vapors shall be in accordance with the following table: 

Packing group Oral toxicity LD50 (mg/kg) Dermal toxicity LD50

(mg/kg)

Inhalation toxicity by dusts 

and mists LC50 (mg/L)

I ............................... ≤5.0 .......................................................... ≤50 ≤0.2

II .............................. >5.0 and ≤50 ............................................ >50 and ≤200 >0.2 and ≤2.0

III ............................. >50 and ≤300 ........................................... >200 and ≤1000 >2.0 and ≤4.0

(2)(i) The packing group and hazard 

zone assignments for liquids (see 

§173.115(c) of this subpart for gases) 

based on inhalation of vapors shall be 

in accordance with the following table: 

Packing Group Vapor concentration and toxicity 

I (Hazard Zone A) ...................................... V ≥ 500 LC50 and LC50 ≤ 200 mL/M3.

I (Hazard Zone B) ...................................... V ≥ 10 LC50; LC50 ≤ 1000 mL/m3; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone 

A are not met. 

II ................................................................. V ≥ LC50; LC50 ≤ 3000 mL/m3; and the criteria for Packing Group I, are not met. 

III ................................................................ V ≥ .2 LC50; LC50 ≤ 5000 mL/m3; and the criteria for Packing Groups I and II, are 

not met. 

NOTE 1: V is the saturated vapor concentration in air of the material in mL/m3 at 20 °C and standard atmospheric pressure. 

NOTE 2: A liquid in Division 6.1 meeting criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zones A or B stated in paragraph (a)(2) of this 

section is a material poisonous by inhalation subject to the additional hazard communication requirements in §§ 172.203(m), 

172.313 and table 1 of § 172.504(e) of this subchapter. 

(ii) These criteria are represented 

graphically in Figure 1: 


ER06MY97.000</MATH>
504

§ 173.133 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(3) When the packing group determined by applying these criteria is different for two or more (oral, dermal or 

inhalation) routes of administration, 

the packing group assigned to the material shall be that indicated for the 

highest degree of toxicity for any of 

the routes of administration. 


EC02MR91.063</GPH>
505

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.133 

(4) Notwithstanding the provisions of 

this paragraph, the packing group and 

hazard zone of a tear gas substance is 

as assigned in column 5 of the §172.101 

table.

(b) The packing group and hazard 

zone for Division 6.1 mixtures that are 

poisonous (toxic) by inhalation may be 

determined by one of the following 

methods:

(1) Where LC50 data is available on 

each of the poisonous (toxic) substances comprising the mixture— 

(i) The LC50 of the mixture is estimated using the formula: 

LC mixture

f

LC

i

i i

50 n

1 50

1 ( ) =

=

∑

where

fi = mole fraction of the ith component substance of the liquid. 

LC50i = mean lethal concentration of the ith

component substance in mL/m3

(ii) The volatility of each component 

substance is estimated using the formula:

V P mL m i = ×i

10

1013

6

3

. /

where:

Pi = partial pressure of the ith component

substance in kPa at 20 °C and one atmospheric pressure. Pi may be calculated according to Raoult’s Law using appropriate 

activity coefficients. Where activity coefficients are not available, the coefficient 

may be assumed to be 1.0. 

(iii) The ratio of the volatility to the 

LC50 is calculated using the formula: 

R V

LC

i

i i

n

=

=

∑

1 50

(iv) Using the calculated values LC50

(mixture) and R, the packing group for 

the mixture is determined as follows: 

Packaging group 

(hazard zone) Ratio of volatility and LC50

I (Hazard Zone A) .. R ≥ 500 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 200 mL/ 

m3.

I (Hazard Zone B) .. R ≥ 10 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 1000 mL/ 

m3; and the criteria for Packing 

Group I, Hazard Zone A are not met. 

II ............................. R ≥ 1 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 3000 mL/ 

m3; and the criteria for Packing 

Group I, Hazard Zones A and B are 

not met. 

Packaging group 

(hazard zone) Ratio of volatility and LC50

III ............................ R ≥ 1/5 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 5000 mL/ 

m3; and the criteria for Packing 

Group I, Hazard Zones A and B and 

Packing Group II are not met. 

(2) In the absence of LC50 data on the 

poisonous (toxic) constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned a 

packing group and hazard zone based 

on the following simplified threshold 

toxicity tests. When these threshold 

tests are used, the most restrictive 

packing group and hazard zone must be 

determined and used for the transportation of the mixture. 

(i) A mixture is assigned to Packing 

Group I, Hazard Zone A only if both the 

following criteria are met: 

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is 

vaporized and diluted with air to create 

a test atmosphere of 200 mL/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats 

(five male and five female) are exposed 

to the test atmosphere as determined 

by an analytical method appropriate 

for the material being classified for one 

hour and observed for fourteen days. If 

five or more of the animals die within 

the fourteen-day observation period, 

the mixture is presumed to have an 

LC50 equal to or less than 200 mL/m3.

(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 499 equal volumes of air to 

form a test atmosphere. Ten albino 

rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one 

hour and observed for fourteen days. If 

five or more of the animals die within 

the fourteen-day observation period, 

the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 500 

times the mixture LC50.

(ii) A mixture is assigned to Packing 

Group I, Hazard Zone B only if both the 

following criteria are met, and the 

mixture does not meet the criteria for 

Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A: 

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is 

vaporized and diluted with air to create 

a test atmosphere of 1000 mL/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats 

(five male and five female) are exposed 

to the test atmosphere for one hour 

and observed for fourteen days. If five 

or more of the animals die within the 

fourteen-day observation period, the 


ER07SE04.000</MATH> ER28SE01.023</MATH> ER07SE04.001</MATH>
506

§ 173.134 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

mixture is presumed to have an LC50

equal to or less than 1000 mL/m3.

(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 9 equal volumes of air to 

form a test atmosphere. Ten albino 

rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one 

hour and observed for fourteen days. If 

five or more of the animals die within 

the fourteen-day observation period, 

the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 10 

times the mixture LC50.

(iii) A mixture is assigned to Packing 

Group II only if both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not 

meet the criteria for Packing Group I 

(Hazard Zones A or B): 

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is 

vaporized and diluted with air to create 

a test atmosphere of 3000 mL/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats 

(five male and five female) are exposed 

to the test atmosphere for one hour 

and observed for fourteen days. If five 

or more of the animals die within the 

fourteen-day observation period, the 

mixture is presumed to have an LC50

equal to or less than 3000 mL/m3.

(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is used 

to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino 

rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one 

hour and observed for fourteen days. If 

five or more of the animals die within 

the fourteen-day observation period, 

the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than the 

mixture LC50.

(iv) A mixture is assigned to Packing 

Group III only if both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not 

meet the criteria for Packing Groups I 

(Hazard Zones A or B) or Packing 

Group II (Hazard Zone C): 

(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is 

vaporized and diluted with air to create 

a test atmosphere of 5000 mL/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats 

(five male and five female) are exposed 

to the test atmosphere for one hour 

and observed for fourteen days. If five 

or more of the animals die within the 

fourteen-day observation period, the 

mixture is presumed to have an LC50

equal to or less than 5000 mL/m3.

(B) The vapor pressure of the liquid 

mixture is measured and if the vapor 

concentration is equal to or greater 

than 1000 mL/m3, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or 

greater than 1⁄5 the mixture LC50.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66268–66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 

FR 45461–45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–234, 58 

FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–138, 59 FR 

49133, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 

50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45183, 45380, Aug. 

28, 2001; 66 FR 49556, Sept. 28, 2001; 69 FR 

54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 

71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 

2009]

§ 173.134 Class 6, Division 6.2—Definitions and exceptions. 

(a) Definitions and classification criteria. For the purposes of this subchapter, the following definitions and 

classification criteria apply to Division 

6.2 materials. 

(1) Division 6.2 (Infectious substance) 

means a material known or reasonably 

expected to contain a pathogen. A 

pathogen is a microorganism (including bacteria, viruses, rickettsiae, 

parasites, fungi) or other agent, such 

as a proteinaceous infectious particle 

(prion), that can cause disease in humans or animals. An infectious substance must be assigned the identification number UN 2814, UN 2900, UN 3373, 

or UN 3291 as appropriate, and must be 

assigned to one of the following categories:

(i) Category A: An infectious substance in a form capable of causing 

permanent disability or life-threatening or fatal disease in otherwise 

healthy humans or animals when exposure to it occurs. An exposure occurs 

when an infectious substance is released outside of its protective packaging, resulting in physical contact 

with humans or animals. A Category A 

infectious substance must be assigned 

to identification number UN 2814 or UN 

2900, as appropriate. Assignment to UN 

2814 or UN 2900 must be based on the 

known medical history or symptoms of 

the source patient or animal, endemic 

local conditions, or professional judgment concerning the individual circumstances of the source human or 

animal.

(ii) Category B: An infectious substance that is not in a form generally 

507

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.134 

capable of causing permanent disability or life-threatening or fatal disease in otherwise healthy humans or 

animals when exposure to it occurs. 

This includes Category B infectious 

substances transported for diagnostic 

or investigational purposes. A Category B infectious substance must be 

described as ‘‘Biological substance, 

Category B’’ and assigned identification number UN 3373. This does not include regulated medical waste, which 

must be assigned identification number 

UN 3291. 

(2) Biological product means a virus, 

therapeutic serum, toxin, antitoxin, 

vaccine, blood, blood component or derivative, allergenic product, or analogous product, or arsphenamine or derivative of arsphenamine (or any other 

trivalent arsenic compound) applicable 

to the prevention, treatment, or cure 

of a disease or condition of human 

beings or animals. A biological product 

includes a material subject to regulation under 42 U.S.C. 262 or 21 U.S.C. 

151–159. Unless otherwise excepted, a biological product known or reasonably 

expected to contain a pathogen that 

meets the definition of a Category A or 

B infectious substance must be assigned the identification number UN 

2814, UN 2900, or UN 3373, as appropriate.

(3) Culture means an infectious substance containing a pathogen that is 

intentionally propagated. Culture does

not include a human or animal patient 

specimen as defined in paragraph (a)(4) 

of this section. 

(4) Patient specimen means human or 

animal material collected directly 

from humans or animals and transported for research, diagnosis, investigational activities, or disease treatment or prevention. Patient specimen 

includes excreta, secreta, blood and its 

components, tissue and tissue swabs, 

body parts, and specimens in transport 

media (e.g., transwabs, culture media, 

and blood culture bottles). 

(5) Regulated medical waste or clinical 

waste or (bio) medical waste means a 

waste or reusable material derived 

from the medical treatment of an animal or human, which includes diagnosis and immunization, or from biomedical research, which includes the 

production and testing of biological 

products. Regulated medical waste or 

clinical waste or (bio) medical waste 

containing a Category A infectious 

substance must be classed as an infectious substance, and assigned to UN2814 

or UN2900, as appropriate. 

(6) Sharps means any object contaminated with a pathogen or that may become contaminated with a pathogen 

through handling or during transportation and also capable of cutting or 

penetrating skin or a packaging material. Sharps includes needles, syringes, 

scalpels, broken glass, culture slides, 

culture dishes, broken capillary tubes, 

broken rigid plastic, and exposed ends 

of dental wires. 

(7) Toxin means a Division 6.1 material from a plant, animal, or bacterial 

source. A toxin containing an infectious 

substance or a toxin contained in an infectious substance must be classed as 

Division 6.2, described as an infectious 

substance, and assigned to UN 2814 or 

UN 2900, as appropriate. 

(8) Used health care product means a 

medical, diagnostic, or research device 

or piece of equipment, or a personal 

care product used by consumers, medical professionals, or pharmaceutical 

providers that does not meet the definition of a patient specimen, biological 

product, or regulated medical waste, is 

contaminated with potentially infectious body fluids or materials, and is 

not decontaminated or disinfected to 

remove or mitigate the infectious hazard prior to transportation. 

(b) Exceptions. The following are not 

subject to the requirements of this subchapter as Division 6.2 materials: 

(1) A material that does not contain 

an infectious substance or that is unlikely to cause disease in humans or 

animals.

(2) Non-infectious biological materials from humans, animals, or plants. 

Examples include non-infectious cells, 

tissue cultures, blood or plasma from 

individuals not suspected of having an 

infectious disease, DNA, RNA or other 

non-infectious genetic elements. 

(3) A material containing micro-organisms that are non-pathogenic to humans or animals. 

(4) A material containing pathogens 

that have been neutralized or inactivated such that they no longer pose a 

health risk. 

508

§ 173.134 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(5) A material with a low probability 

of containing an infectious substance, 

or where the concentration of the infectious substance is at a level naturally occurring in the environment so 

it cannot cause disease when exposure 

to it occurs. Examples of these materials include: Foodstuffs; environmental samples, such as water or a 

sample of dust or mold; and substances 

that have been treated so that the 

pathogens have been neutralized or deactivated, such as a material treated 

by steam sterilization, chemical disinfection, or other appropriate method, 

so it no longer meets the definition of 

an infectious substance. 

(6) A biological product, including an 

experimental or investigational product or component of a product, subject 

to Federal approval, permit, review, or 

licensing requirements, such as those 

required by the Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of 

Health and Human Services or the U.S. 

Department of Agriculture. 

(7) Blood collected for the purpose of 

blood transfusion or the preparation of 

blood products; blood products; plasma; 

plasma derivatives; blood components; 

tissues or organs intended for use in 

transplant operations; and human cell, 

tissues, and cellular and tissue-based 

products regulated under authority of 

the Public Health Service Act (42 

U.S.C. 264–272) and/or the Food, Drug, 

and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 332 et seq.).

(8) Blood, blood plasma, and blood 

components collected for the purpose 

of blood transfusion or the preparation 

of blood products and sent for testing 

as part of the collection process, except 

where the person collecting the blood 

has reason to believe it contains an infectious substance, in which case the 

test sample must be shipped as a Category A or Category B infectious substance in accordance with §173.196 or 

§173.199, as appropriate. 

(9) Dried blood spots or specimens for 

fecal occult blood detection placed on 

absorbent filter paper or other material.

(10) A Division 6.2 material, other 

than a Category A infectious substance, contained in a patient sample 

being transported for research, diagnosis, investigational activities, or disease treatment or prevention, or a biological product, when such materials 

are transported by a private or contract carrier in a motor vehicle used 

exclusively to transport such materials. Medical or clinical equipment 

and laboratory products may be transported aboard the same vehicle provided they are properly packaged and 

secured against exposure or contamination. If the human or animal sample or 

biological product meets the definition 

of regulated medical waste in paragraph (a)(5) of this section, it must be 

offered for transportation and transported in conformance with the appropriate requirements for regulated medical waste. 

(11) A human or animal sample (including, but not limited to, secreta, excreta, blood and its components, tissue 

and tissue fluids, and body parts) being 

transported for routine testing not related to the diagnosis of an infectious 

disease, such as for drug/alcohol testing, cholesterol testing, blood glucose 

level testing, prostate specific antibody testing, testing to monitor kidney or liver function, or pregnancy 

testing, or for tests for diagnosis of 

non-infectious diseases, such as cancer 

biopsies, and for which there is a low 

probability the sample is infectious. 

(12) Laundry and medical equipment 

and used health care products, as follows:

(i) Laundry or medical equipment 

conforming to the regulations of the 

Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department of 

Labor in 29 CFR 1910.1030. This exception includes medical equipment intended for use, cleaning, or refurbishment, such as reusable surgical equipment, or equipment used for testing 

where the components within which 

the equipment is contained essentially 

function as packaging. This exception 

does not apply to medical equipment 

being transported for disposal. 

(ii) Used health care products not 

conforming to the requirements in 29 

CFR 1910.1030 and being returned to the 

manufacturer or the manufacturer’s 

designee are excepted from the requirements of this subchapter when offered 

for transportation or transported in accordance with this paragraph (b)(12). 

For purposes of this paragraph, a 

health care product is used when it has 

509

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.134 

been removed from its original packaging. Used health care products contaminated with or suspected of contamination with a Category A infectious substance may not be transported 

under the provisions of this paragraph. 

(A) Each used health care product 

must be drained of free liquid to the extent practicable and placed in a watertight primary container designed and 

constructed to assure that it remains 

intact under conditions normally incident to transportation. For a used 

health care product capable of cutting 

or penetrating skin or packaging material, the primary container must be capable of retaining the product without 

puncture of the packaging under normal conditions of transport. Each primary container must be marked with a 

BIOHAZARD marking conforming to 29 

CFR 1910.1030(g)(1)(i). 

(B) Each primary container must be 

placed inside a watertight secondary 

container designed and constructed to 

assure that it remains intact under 

conditions normally incident to transportation. The secondary container 

must be marked with a BIOHAZARD 

marking conforming to 29 CFR 

1910.1030(g)(1)(i).

(C) The secondary container must be 

placed inside an outer packaging with 

sufficient cushioning material to prevent movement between the secondary 

container and the outer packaging. An 

itemized list of the contents of the primary container and information concerning possible contamination with a 

Division 6.2 material, including its possible location on the product, must be 

placed between the secondary container and the outside packaging. 

(D) Each person who offers or transports a used health care product under 

the provisions of this paragraph must 

know about the requirements of this 

paragraph.

(13) Any waste or recyclable material, other than regulated medical 

waste, including— 

(i) Household waste as defined in 

§171.8, when transported in accordance 

with applicable state, local, or tribal 

requirements.

(ii) Sanitary waste or sewage; 

(iii) Sewage sludge or compost; 

(iv) Animal waste generated in animal husbandry or food production; or 

(v) Medical waste generated from 

households and transported in accordance with applicable state, local, or 

tribal requirements. 

(14) Corpses, remains, and anatomical 

parts intended for interment, cremation, or medical research at a college, 

hospital, or laboratory. 

(15) Forensic material transported on 

behalf of a U.S. Government, state, 

local or Indian tribal government agency, except that— 

(i) Forensic material known or suspected to contain a Category B infectious substance must be shipped in a 

packaging conforming to the provisions of §173.24. 

(ii) Forensic material known or suspected to contain a Category A infectious substance or an infectious substance listed as a select agent in 42 

CFR Part 73 must be transported in 

packaging capable of meeting the test 

standards in §178.609 of this subchapter. 

The secondary packaging must be 

marked with a BIOHAZARD symbol 

conforming to specifications in 29 CFR 

1910.1030(g)(1)(i). An itemized list of 

contents must be enclosed between the 

secondary packaging and the outer 

packaging.

(16) Agricultural products and food as 

defined in the Federal Food, Drug, and 

Cosmetics Act (21 U.S.C. 332 et seq.).

(c) Exceptions for regulated medical 

waste. The following provisions apply 

to the transportation of regulated medical waste: 

(1) A regulated medical waste transported by a private or contract carrier 

is excepted from— 

(i) The requirement for an ‘‘INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE’’ label if the outer 

packaging is marked with a ‘‘BIOHAZARD’’ marking in accordance with 

29 CFR 1910.1030; and 

(ii) The specific packaging requirements of §173.197, if packaged in a rigid 

non-bulk packaging conforming to the 

general packaging requirements of 

§§173.24 and 173.24a and packaging requirements specified in 29 CFR 

1910.1030, provided the material does 

not include a waste concentrated stock 

culture of an infectious substance. 

Sharps containers must be securely 

closed to prevent leaks or punctures. 

(2) A waste stock or culture of a Category B infectious substance may be 

510

§ 173.136 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

offered for transportation and transported as a regulated medical waste 

when it is packaged in a rigid non-bulk 

packaging conforming to the general 

packaging requirements of §§173.24 and 

173.24a and packaging requirements 

specified in 29 CFR 1910.1030 and transported by a private or contract carrier 

in a vehicle used exclusively to transport regulated medical waste. Medical 

or clinical equipment and laboratory 

products may be transported aboard 

the same vehicle provided they are 

properly packaged and secured against 

exposure or contamination. Sharps 

containers must be securely closed to 

prevent leaks or punctures. 

(d) If an item listed in paragraph (b) 

or (c) of this section meets the definition of another hazard class or if it is 

a hazardous substance, hazardous 

waste, or marine pollutant, it must be 

offered for transportation and transported in accordance with applicable 

requirements of this subchapter. 

[67 FR 53138, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 68 

FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 

2005; 71 FR 32258, June 2, 2006; 71 FR 78631, 

Dec. 29, 2006; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007; 73 FR 

4718, Jan. 28, 2008; 74 FR 2257, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.136 Class 8—Definitions. 

(a) For the purpose of this subchapter, ‘‘corrosive material’’ (Class 8) 

means a liquid or solid that causes full 

thickness destruction of human skin at 

the site of contact within a specified 

period of time. A liquid, or a solid 

which may become liquid during transportation, that has a severe corrosion 

rate on steel or aluminum based on the 

criteria in §173.137(c)(2) is also a corrosive material.. 

(b) If human experience or other data 

indicate that the hazard of a material 

is greater or less than indicated by the 

results of the tests specified in paragraph (a) of this section, PHMSA may 

revise its classification or make the determination that the material is not 

subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(c) Skin corrosion test data produced 

no later than September 30, 1995, using 

the procedures of part 173, appendix A, 

in effect on September 30, 1995 (see 49 

CFR part 173, appendix A, revised as of 

October 1, 1994) for appropriate exposure times may be used for classification and assignment of packing group 

for Class 8 materials corrosive to skin. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173– 

241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 

62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 

2004; 71 FR 78631, Dec. 29, 2006] 

§ 173.137 Class 8—Assignment of packing group. 

The packing group of a Class 8 material is indicated in Column 5 of the 

§172.101 Table. When the §172.101 Table 

provides more than one packing group 

for a Class 8 material, the packing 

group must be determined using data 

obtained from tests conducted in accordance with the 1992 OECD Guideline 

for Testing of Chemicals, Number 404, 

‘‘Acute Dermal Irritation/Corrosion’’ 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) as 

follows:

(a) Packing Group I. Materials that 

cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation 

period of up to 60 minutes starting 

after the exposure time of three minutes or less. 

(b) Packing Group II. Materials other 

than those meeting Packing Group I 

criteria that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within 

an observation period of up to 14 days 

starting after the exposure time of 

more than three minutes but not more 

than 60 minutes. 

(c) Packing Group III. Materials,

other than those meeting Packing 

Group I or II criteria— 

(1) That cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more 

than 60 minutes but not more than 4 

hours; or 

(2) That do not cause full thickness 

destruction of intact skin tissue but 

exhibit a corrosion on either steel or 

aluminum surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm 

(0.25 inch) a year at a test temperature 

of 55 °C (130 °F) when tested on both 

materials. The corrosion may be determined in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter) or other 

equivalent test methods. 

NOTE TO §173.137: When an initial test on 

either a steel or aluminum surface indicates 

511

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.150 

the material being tested is corrosive, the 

follow up test on the other surface is not required.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 

31, 2003; 69 FR 76155, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78631, 

Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 2257, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.140 Class 9—Definitions. 

For the purposes of this subchapter, 

miscellaneous hazardous material (Class

9) means a material which presents a 

hazard during transportation but which 

does not meet the definition of any 

other hazard class. This class includes: 

(a) Any material which has an anesthetic, noxious or other similar property which could cause extreme annoyance or discomfort to a flight crew 

member so as to prevent the correct 

performance of assigned duties; or 

(b) Any material that meets the definition in §171.8 of this subchapter for 

an elevated temperature material, a 

hazardous substance, a hazardous 

waste, or a marine pollutant. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 

5, 1992; Amdt. 173–233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 

1993]

§ 173.141 Class 9—Assignment of packing group. 

The packing group of a Class 9 material is as indicated in column 5 of the 

§172.101 table. 

§ 173.144 Other Regulated Materials 

(ORM)—Definitions. 

For the purpose of this subchapter, 

‘‘ORM-D material’’ means a material 

such as a consumer commodity, which, 

although otherwise subject to the regulations of this subchapter, presents a 

limited hazard during transportation 

due to its form, quantity and packaging. It must be a material for which 

exceptions are provided in the §172.101 

table. Each ORM-D material and category of ORM-D material is listed in 

the §172.101 table. 

§ 173.145 Other Regulated Materials— 

Assignment of packing group. 

Packing groups are not assigned to 

ORM-D materials. 

§ 173.150 Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable and combustible liquids). 

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous 

materials shipments in the following 

paragraphs are permitted only if this 

section is referenced for the specific 

hazardous material in the §172.101 

Table of this subchapter. 

(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of flammable liquids (Class 3) and 

combustible liquids are excepted from 

labeling requirements, unless the material also meets the definition of Division 6.1 or is offered for transportation 

or transported by aircraft, and the 

specification packaging requirements 

of this subchapter when packaged in 

combination packagings according to 

this paragraph. For transportation by 

aircraft, the package must also comply 

with the applicable requirements of 

§173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard 

passenger-carrying aircraft may be 

transported as a limited quantity. In 

addition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F 

(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform 

to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 

30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For flammable liquids in Packing 

Group I, inner packagings not over 0.5 

L (0.1 gallon) net capacity each, packed 

in strong outer packagings; 

(2) For flammable liquids in Packing 

Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 

L (0.3 gallons) net capacity each, unless 

the material has a subsidiary hazard of 

Division 6.1, Packing Group II, in 

which case the inner packagings may 

not exceed 100 mL (3.38 ounces) net capacity each, packed in a strong outer 

packaging.

(3) For flammable liquids in Packing 

Group III and combustible liquids, 

inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each, packed in 

strong outer packagings. 

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a 

material that has a subsidiary hazard 

of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a 

limited quantity which conforms to the 

provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ 

as defined in 171.8 of this subchapter, 

512

§ 173.151 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as ORM–D material. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, 

shipments of ORM–D materials are not 

subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this 

subchapter, unless the material meets 

the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, marine pollutant, or are offered for transportation and transported by aircraft, and 

are eligible for the exceptions provided 

in §173.156. 

(d) Alcoholic beverages. An alcoholic 

beverage (wine and distilled spirits as 

defined in 27 CFR 4.10 and 5.11) is not 

subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it— 

(1) Contains 24 percent or less alcohol 

by volume; 

(2) Is in an inner packaging of 5 L (1.3 

gallons) or less, and for transportation 

on passenger-carrying aircraft conforms to §175.10(a)(4) of this subchapter 

as checked or carry-on baggage; or 

(3) Is a Packing Group III alcoholic 

beverage in a packaging of 250 L (66 

gallons) or less, unless transported by 

air.

(e) Aqueous solutions of alcohol. An

aqueous solution containing 24 percent 

or less alcohol by volume and no other 

hazardous material— 

(1) May be reclassed as a combustible 

liquid.

(2) Is not subject to the requirements 

of this subchapter if it contains no less 

than 50 percent water. 

(f) Combustible liquids. (1) A flammable liquid with a flash point at or 

above 38 °C (100 °F) that does not meet 

the definition of any other hazard class 

may be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This provision does not apply to 

transportation by vessel or aircraft, except where other means of transportation is impracticable. 

(2) The requirements in this subchapter do not apply to a material 

classed as a combustible liquid in a 

non-bulk packaging unless the combustible liquid is a hazardous substance, a 

hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.

(3) A combustible liquid that is in a 

bulk packaging or a combustible liquid 

that is a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant is 

not subject to the requirements of this 

subchapter except those pertaining to: 

(i) Shipping papers, waybills, switching orders, and hazardous waste manifests;

(ii) Marking of packages; 

(iii) Display of identification numbers on bulk packages; 

(iv) For bulk packagings only, 

placarding requirements of subpart F 

of part 172 of this subchapter; 

(v) Carriage aboard aircraft and vessels (for packaging requirements for 

transport by vessel, see §176.340 of this 

subchapter);

(vi) Reporting incidents as prescribed 

by §§171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter;

(vii) Packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and, in addition, 

non-bulk packagings must conform 

with requirements of §173.203; 

(viii) The requirements of §§173.1, 

173.21, 173.24, 173.24a, 173.24b, 174.1, 

177.804, 177.817, 177.834(j), and 177.837(d) 

of this subchapter; 

(ix) The training requirements of 

subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter.

(x) Emergency response information 

requirements of subpart G of part 172. 

(4) A combustible liquid that is not a 

hazardous substance, a hazardous 

waste, or a marine pollutant is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it is a mixture of one or 

more components that— 

(i) Has a flash point at or above 93 °C

(200 °F),

(ii) Comprises at least 99 percent of 

the volume of the mixture, and 

(iii) Is not offered for transportation 

or transported as a liquid at a temperature at or above its flash point. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.150, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.151 Exceptions for Class 4. 

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous 

materials shipments in the following 

paragraphs are permitted only if this 

section is referenced for the specific 

hazardous material in the §172.101 table 

of this subchapter. 

513

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.152 

(b) Limited quantities of Division 4.1. 

Limited quantities of flammable solids 

(Division 4.1) in Packing Group II or III 

are excepted from labeling requirements, unless the material also meets 

the definition of Division 6.1 or is offered for transportation or transported 

by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter 

when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For 

transportation by aircraft, the package 

must also comply with the applicable 

requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials 

authorized aboard passenger-carrying 

aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of 

limited quantities are not subject to 

subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of 

this subchapter. Each package must 

conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and 

may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross 

weight. The following combination 

packagings are authorized: 

(1) For flammable solids in Packing 

Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 

kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, unless the material has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, 

in which case the inner packagings 

may not exceed 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) net 

capacity each, packed in a strong outer 

packaging.

(2) For flammable solids in Packing 

Group III, inner packagings not over 

5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each, 

packed in a strong outer packaging. 

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a 

material that has a subsidiary hazard 

of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a 

limited quantity which conforms to the 

provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and charcoal briquettes in packagings not exceeding 30 kg (66 pounds) 

gross weight, may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as 

ORM–D material if the material is a 

‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in 

§171.8 of this subchapter. In addition to 

the exceptions provided by paragraph 

(b) of this section, shipments of ORM– 

D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of 

part 172 of this subchapter, unless the 

material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, 

marine pollutant, or is offered for 

transportation and transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in §173.156. 

(d) Limited quantities of Division 4.3. 

Limited quantities of Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet) solids in Packing 

Group II or III are excepted from labeling requirements, unless the material 

also meets the definition of Division 6.1 

or is offered for transportation or 

transported by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of 

this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this 

paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package must also comply 

with the applicable requirements of 

§173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials authorized aboard 

passenger-carrying aircraft may be 

transported as a limited quantity. In 

addition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F 

(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform 

to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 

30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:

(1) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing 

Group II, inner packagings not over 0.5 

kg (1.1 pound) net capacity each, 

packed in strong outer packagings; and 

(2) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing 

Group III, inner packagings not over 1 

kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, 

packed in strong outer packagings. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 

5, 1992; Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 

1993; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 

69 FR 76156, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, June 

14, 2005; 71 FR 14602, Mar. 22, 2006; 72 FR 55692, 

Oct. 1, 2007] 

§ 173.152 Exceptions for Division 5.1 

(oxidizers) and Division 5.2 (organic 

peroxides). 

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous 

materials shipments in the following 

paragraphs are permitted only if this 

section is referenced for the specific 

hazardous material in the §172.101 table 

of this subchapter. 

(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of oxidizers (Division 5.1) in 

Packing Group II and III and organic 

peroxides (Division 5.2) are excepted 

from labeling requirements, unless the 

514

§ 173.153 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

material also meets the definition of 

Division 6.1 or is offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and 

the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package 

must also comply with the applicable 

requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials 

authorized aboard passenger-carrying 

aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of 

these limited quantities are not subject 

to subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of 

this subchapter. Each package must 

conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and 

may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross 

weight. The following combination 

packagings are authorized: 

(1) For oxidizers in Packing Group II, 

inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or 

not over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each for solids, unless the material 

has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, 

Packing Group II, in which case the 

inner packagings may not exceed 100 

mL (3.38 ounces) for liquids or 0.5 kg 

(1.1 pounds) for solids, packed in a 

strong outer packaging. 

(2) For oxidizers in Packing Group 

III, inner packagings not over 5 L (1.3 

gallons) net capacity each for liquids 

or not over 5.0 kg (11 lbs) net capacity 

each for solids, and packed in strong 

outer packagings. 

(3) For organic peroxides which do 

not require temperature control during 

transportation—

(i) For Type D, E, or F organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 125 mL 

(4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 500 g (17.64 ounces) net capacity 

for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.

(ii) For Type B or C organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 25 mL 

(0.845 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 100 g (3.528 ounces) net capacity 

for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.

(4) For polyester resin kits consisting 

of a base material component (Class 3, 

Packing Group II or III) and an activator component (Type C, D, E, or F 

organic peroxide which does not require temperature control)— 

(i) The organic peroxide component 

must be packed in inner packagings 

not over 125 mL (4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 500 g (17.64 

ounces) net capacity each for solids; 

(ii) The flammable liquid component 

must be packed in inner packagings 

not over 5 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity 

each for Packing Group II or III liquid; 

and

(iii) The flammable liquid component 

and the organic peroxide component 

may be packed in the same strong 

outer packaging provided they will not 

interact dangerously in the event of 

leakage.

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a 

material that has a subsidiary hazard 

of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a 

limited quantity which conforms to the 

provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ 

as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, 

may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as ORM–D. In 

addition to the exceptions provided by 

paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM–D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements 

of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the 

definition of a hazardous substance, 

hazardous waste, marine pollutant, or 

are offered for transportation and 

transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in 

§173.156. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 

5, 1992; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 

1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 

66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 

2003; 69 FR 76156, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14603, 

Mar. 22, 2006; 72 FR 55692, Oct. 1, 2007] 

§ 173.153 Exceptions for Division 6.1 

(poisonous materials). 

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous 

materials shipments in the following 

paragraphs are permitted only if this 

section is referenced for the specific 

hazardous material in the §172.101 table 

of this subchapter. 

(b) Limited quantities of Division 6.1 

materials. The exceptions in this paragraph do not apply to poison-by-inhalation materials. Limited quantities of 

515

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.154 

poisonous materials (Division 6.1) in 

Packing Group II and III are excepted 

from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when 

packaged in combination packagings 

according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package 

must also comply with the applicable 

requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials 

authorized aboard passenger-carrying 

aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of 

these limited quantities are not subject 

to subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of 

this subchapter. Each package must 

conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and 

may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross 

weight. The following combination 

packagings are authorized: 

(1) For poisonous materials in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 

100 mL (3.38 ounces) each for liquids or 

0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) each for solids, 

packed in a strong outer packaging. 

(2) For poisonous materials in Packing Group III, inner packagings not 

over 4 L (1.0 gallon) each for liquids or 

5.0 kg (11 pounds) each for solids, 

packed in a strong outer packaging. 

(c) Consumer commodities. The following provisions apply to consumer 

commodities:

(1) A limited quantity of poisonous 

material in Packing Group III which 

conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 

of this subchapter, may be renamed 

‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed 

as ORM–D. 

(2) A poisonous material which is a 

drug or medicine and is a ‘‘consumer 

commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this 

subchapter, may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as 

ORM-D material if packaged in a combination packaging not exceeding 30 kg 

(66 pounds) with inner packagings not 

over 250 mL (8 ounces) net capacity for 

liquids or 250 g (8.8 ounces) net capacity for solids packed in strong outer 

packagings. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of 

subpart B of this part. 

(3) Packages of ORM-D material are 

excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter 

and from the labeling requirements of 

subpart E of part 172 of this subchapter. Shipments of ORM-D material 

are eligible for the exceptions provided 

in §173.156 and in paragraph (b) of this 

section and are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of 

part 172 of this subchapter, unless the 

material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, 

or a marine pollutant or unless offered 

for transportation or transported by 

aircraft.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 

5, 1992; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45033, 

July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76156, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 

14603, Mar. 22, 2006; 71 FR 54938, Sept. 20, 2006] 

§ 173.154 Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials). 

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous 

materials shipments in the following 

paragraphs are permitted only if this 

section is referenced for the specific 

hazardous material in the §172.101 table 

of this subchapter. 

(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of corrosive materials (Class 8) in 

Packing Group II and III are excepted 

from labeling requirements, unless the 

material also meets the definition of 

Division 6.1 or is offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and 

the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package 

must also comply with the applicable 

requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials 

authorized aboard passenger-carrying 

aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of 

these limited quantities are not subject 

to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of 

this subchapter. Each package must 

conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and 

may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross 

weight. The following combination 

packagings are authorized: 

(1) For corrosive materials in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 

1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for 

liquids or not over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) 

net capacity each for solids, unless the 

516

§ 173.155 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

material has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1, Packing Group II in which 

case the inner packagings may not exceed 100 mL (3.38 ounces) for liquids or 

0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) for solids, packed in 

a strong outer packaging. 

(2) For corrosive materials in Packing Group III, in inner packagings not 

over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity 

each for liquids, or not over 5.0 kg (11 

lbs) net capacity each for solids, and 

packed in strong outer packagings. 

(c) Consumer commodities. Except for a 

material that has a subsidiary hazard 

of Division 6.1, Packing Group II, a 

limited quantity which conforms to the 

provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ 

as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, 

may be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ and reclassed as ORM–D. In 

addition to the exceptions provided by 

paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM–D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements 

of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the 

definition of a hazardous substance, 

hazardous waste, marine pollutant, or 

are offered for transportation and 

transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in 

§173.156. 

(d) Materials corrosive to aluminum or 

steel only. Except for a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine 

pollutant, a material classed as a Class 

8, Packing Group III, material solely 

because of its corrosive effect— 

(1) On aluminum is not subject to 

any other requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or rail car in a packaging constructed of materials that will not 

react dangerously with or be degraded 

by the corrosive material; or 

(2) On steel is not subject to any 

other requirements of this subchapter 

when transported by motor vehicle or 

rail car in a bulk packaging constructed of materials that will not 

react dangerously with or be degraded 

by the corrosive material. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–231, 57 FR 52940, 

Nov. 5, 1992; 68 FR 45033, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 

76157, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14603, Mar. 22, 2006; 

72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 2007] 

§ 173.155 Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials). 

(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous 

materials shipments in the following 

paragraphs are permitted only if this 

section is referenced for the specific 

hazardous material in the §172.101 table 

of this subchapter. 

(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of miscellaneous hazardous materials (Class 9) are excepted from labeling, unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and 

the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. For transportation by aircraft, the package 

must also comply with the applicable 

requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter and only hazardous materials 

authorized aboard passenger-carrying 

aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments of 

these limited quantities are not subject 

to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of 

this subchapter. Each package must 

conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and 

may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross 

weight. The following combination 

packagings are authorized: 

(1) For liquids, inner packagings not 

over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity 

each. packed in strong outer packagings.

(2) For solids, inner packagings not 

over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity 

each, packed in strong outer packagings.

(c) Consumer commodities. A limited 

quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section 

and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter, may 

be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ 

and reclassed as ORM-D material. In 

addition to the exceptions provided by 

paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements 

of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the 

definition of a hazardous substance, a 

hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant 

or unless offered for transportation or 

517

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.158 

transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in 

§173.156. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173– 

253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996; 71 FR 14603, 

Mar. 22, 2006] 

§ 173.156 Exceptions for ORM materials. 

(a) Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table or 

in a packaging section in this part. 

(b) ORM-D. Packagings for ORM-D 

materials are specified according to 

hazard class in §§173.150 through 173.155 

and in §173.306. In addition to other exceptions specified for ORM-D materials 

in this part: 

(1) Strong outer packagings as specified in this part, marking requirements 

specified in subpart D of part 172 of this 

subchapter, and the 30 kg (66 pounds) 

gross weight limitation are not required for materials classed as ORM-D 

when—

(i) Unitized in cages, carts, boxes or 

similar overpacks; 

(ii) Offered for transportation or 

transported by: 

(A) Rail; 

(B) Private or contract motor carrier; or 

(C) Common carrier in a vehicle 

under exclusive use for such service; 

and

(iii) Transported to or from a manufacturer, a distribution center, or a retail outlet, or transported to a disposal 

facility from one offeror. 

(2) The 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight 

limitation does not apply to materials 

classed as ORM-D when offered for 

transportation, or transported, by 

highway or rail between a manufacturer, a distribution center, and a retail outlet provided— 

(i) Inner packagings conform to the 

quantity limits for inner packagings 

specified in §§173.150(b), 173.152(b), 

173.154(b), 173.155(b) and 173.306 (a) and 

(b), as appropriate; 

(ii) The inner packagings are packed 

into corrugated fiberboard trays to prevent them from moving freely; 

(iii) The trays are placed in a fiberboard box which is banded and secured 

to a wooden pallet by metal, fabric, or 

plastic straps, to form a single 

palletized unit; 

(iv) The package conforms to the 

general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part; 

(v) The maximum net quantity of 

hazardous material permitted on one 

palletized unit is 250 kg (550 pounds); 

and

(vi) The package is properly marked 

in accordance with §172.316 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50626, 

Sept. 26, 1996; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998] 

Subpart E—Non-bulk Packaging 

for Hazardous Materials Other 

Than Class 1 and Class 7 

SOURCE: Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 

1990, unless otherwise noted. 

§ 173.158 Nitric acid. 

(a) Nitric acid exceeding 40 percent 

concentration may not be packaged 

with any other material. 

(b) Nitric acid in any concentration 

which does not contain sulfuric acid or 

hydrochloric acid as impurities, when 

offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water shall 

be packaged in specification containers 

as follows: 

(1) 1A1 stainless steel drums are authorized, subject to the following limitations:

(i) Stainless steel used in drums must 

conform to the following thicknesses: 

Nominal (marked) capacity (in 

liters) of 1A1 drum 

Minimum thickness (in mm) of stainless steel 

55 0.9 

115 1.2 

210 1.5 

450 2.0 

(ii) Drums weighing less than 85 percent of their original tare weight may 

not be used. 

(iii) Type 304 or other grades of 

equivalent corrosion-resistant steels in 

the as-welded condition are permissible 

for nitric acid concentrations up to and 

including 78 percent. 

518

§ 173.158 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(iv) For all concentrations of nitric 

acid, the following are permissible: 

(A) Type 304 heat-treated (quenched 

in water at 1040 °C (1900 °F)),

(B) Stabilized Type 347 in the aswelded condition, 

(C) Stabilized Type 347 stress-relieved 

(845–900 °C (1550–1650 °F)),

(D) Stabilized Type 347 heat-treated 

(quenched in water at 1040 °C (1900 °F)),

or

(E) Other grades of equivalent corrosion resistance. 

(v) All parts of drum exposed to lading must be capable of withstanding 

the corrosive effect of nitric acid to the 

extent that 65 percent boiling nitric 

acid does not penetrate the metal more 

than 0.0381 mm (0.002 inches) per 

month. (ASTM A 262 may be used for a 

suitable corrosion test procedure.) 

(vi) In addition to marking required 

by §178.503 of this subchapter, the following marks, in lettering of at least 

12.7 mm (0.5 inch) height, must be 

placed on drums used to transport nitric acid: 

(A) The type of steel used in body and 

head sheets as identified by American 

Iron and Steel Institute type number, 

and, in addition, the letters ‘‘HT’’ following the steel designation on containers subject to stress relieving or 

heat treatment during manufacture. 

(B) The thickness in mm of metal in 

thinnest part. When the thickness of 

metal in the body differs from that in 

the head, both must be indicated with 

slanting line between and with the 

gauge of the body indicated first. 

(C) Original tare weight in kilograms, preceded by the letters ‘‘TW.’’ 

An example of the markings required 

by paragraphs (b)(1)(vi) (A), (B), and (C) 

of this section is ‘‘304HT/1.9/2.7/TW55.’’ 

(2) 4H1 expanded plastics outer packagings with glass inner receptacles of 

not greater than 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each. No more than four 2.5 L 

(0.66 gallon) inner receptacles may be 

packed in one outer packaging. 

(c) Nitric acid of 80 percent or greater 

concentration which does not contain 

sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid as 

impurities, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, 

or water may be packaged in 1B1 aluminum drums. 

(d) Nitric acid of 90 percent or greater concentration, when offered for 

transportation or transported by rail, 

highway, or water may be packaged as 

follows:

(1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes 

with inner packagings consisting of 

glass bottles further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings. Glass bottles must be of 2.5 L 

(0.66 gallon) or less capacity and cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent 

material within the metal packagings. 

(2) In combination packagings with 

1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2 or 4G outer 

packagings with inner glass packagings 

of 2.5 L (0.66 gallons) or less capacity 

cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material and packed within a 

tightly closed intermediate packaging 

of metal or plastic. 

(e) Nitric acid of less than 90 percent 

concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be packaged in 4G 

fiberboard boxes or 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F 

wooden boxes with inside glass packagings of not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each. 

(f) Nitric acid of 70 percent or less 

concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water, may be packaged as follows:

(1) In composite packagings 6PA1, 

6PA2, 6PB1, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PH1, or 

6PH2. 6HH1 and 6HA1 composite packaging with plastic inner receptacles 

meeting the compatibility requirements §173.24(e) (e.g., PFA Teflon) are 

authorized.

(2) In 4H1 expanded plastic boxes with 

inner glass packagings of not over 2.5 L 

(0.66 gallon) each. 

(3) In combination packagings with 

1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 

4F or 4G outer packagings and plastic 

inner packagings not over 2.5 L (0.66 

gallon) capacity further individually 

overpacked in tightly closed metal 

packagings.

(g) Nitric acid of more than 70 percent concentration, when offered for 

transportation or transported by cargo 

aircraft only, must be packaged in 

combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 

1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G 

outer packagings with glass or earthenware inner packagings of not over 1 

519

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.159 

L (0.3 gallon) or glass ampoules of not 

over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon). 

(h) Nitric acid of less than 70 percent 

concentration, when offered for transportation in cargo aircraft only must 

be packaged in combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 

4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings 

with inner packagings of— 

(1) Glass or earthenware not over 2.5 

L (0.66 gallon) capacity; 

(2) Plastic not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) 

capacity further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings; or 

(3) Glass ampoule not over 0.5 L (0.1 

gallon) capacity. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 68 FR 75744, 

Dec. 31, 2003] 

§ 173.159 Batteries, wet. 

(a) Electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte acid or alkaline 

corrosive battery fluid (wet batteries), 

may not be packed with other materials except as provided in paragraphs 

(g) and (h) of this section and in 

§§173.220 and 173.222; and any battery or 

battery-powered device must be prepared and packaged for transport in a 

manner to prevent: 

(1) A dangerous evolution of heat 

(i.e., an amount of heat sufficient to be 

dangerous to packaging or personal 

safety to include charring of packaging, melting of packaging, scorching 

of packaging, or other evidence); 

(2) Short circuits, including, but not 

limited to: 

(i) Packaging each battery or each 

battery-powered device when practicable, in fully enclosed inner packagings made of non-conductive material;

(ii) Separating or packaging batteries and battery-powered devices in a 

manner to prevent contact with other 

batteries, devices or conductive materials (e.g., metal) in the packagings; or 

(iii) Ensuring exposed terminals are 

protected with non-conductive caps, 

non-conductive tape, or by other appropriate means; and 

(3) Damage to terminals. If not impact 

resistant, the outer packaging must 

not be used as the sole means of protecting the battery terminals from 

damage or short circuiting. Batteries 

must be securely cushioned and packed 

to prevent shifting which could loosen 

terminal caps or reorient the terminals. Batteries contained in devices 

must be securely installed. Terminal 

protection methods include but are not 

limited to: 

(i) Securely attaching covers of sufficient strength to protect the terminals;

(ii) Packaging the battery in a rigid 

plastic packaging; or 

(iii) Constructing the battery with 

terminals that are recessed or otherwise protected so that the terminals 

will not be subjected to damage if the 

package is dropped. 

(b) For transportation by aircraft: 

(1) The packaging for wet batteries 

must incorporate an acid- or alkaliproof liner, or include a supplementary 

packaging with sufficient strength and 

adequately sealed to prevent leakage of 

electrolyte fluid in the event of spillage; and 

(2) Any battery-powered device, 

equipment or vehicle must be packaged 

for transport in a manner to prevent 

unintentional activation or must have 

an independent means of preventing 

unintentional activation (e.g., packaging restricts access to activation 

switch, switch caps or locks, recessed 

switches, trigger locks, temperature 

sensitive circuit breakers, etc.). 

(c) The following specification packagings are authorized for batteries 

packed without other materials provided all requirements of paragraph (a) 

of this section, and for transportation 

by aircraft, paragraph (b) of this section are met: 

(1) Wooden box: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F. 

(2) Fiberboard box: 4G. 

(3) Plywood drum: 1D. 

(4) Fiber drum: 1G. 

(5) Plastic drum: 1H2. 

(6) Plastic jerrican: 3H2. 

(7) Plastic box: 4H2. 

(d) The following non-specification 

packagings are authorized for batteries 

packed without other materials provided all requirements of paragraph (a) 

of this section, and for transportation 

by aircraft, paragraph (b) of this section are met: 

520

§ 173.159 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(1) Electric storage batteries are 

firmly secured to skids or pallets capable of withstanding the shocks normally incident to transportation are 

authorized for transportation by rail, 

highway, or vessel. The height of the 

completed unit must not exceed 11⁄2

times the width of the skid or pallet. 

The unit must be capable of withstanding, without damage, a superimposed weight equal to two times the 

weight of the unit or, if the weight of 

the unit exceeds 907 kg (2,000 pounds), a 

superimposed weight of 1814 kg (4,000 

pounds). Battery terminals must not be 

relied upon to support any part of the 

superimposed weight and must not 

short out if a conductive material is 

placed in direct contact with them. 

(2) Electric storage batteries weighing 225 kg (500 pounds) or more, consisting of carriers’ equipment, may be 

shipped by rail when mounted on suitable skids. Such shipments may not be 

offered in interchange service. 

(3) One to three batteries not over 

11.3 kg (25 pounds) each, packed in 

strong outer boxes. The maximum authorized gross weight is 34 kg (75 

pounds).

(4) Not more than four batteries not 

over 7 kg (15 pounds) each, packed in 

strong outer fiberboard or wooden 

boxes. The maximum authorized gross 

weight is 30 kg (65 pounds). 

(5) Not more than five batteries not 

over 4.5 kg (10 pounds) each, packed in 

strong outer fiberboard or wooden 

boxes. The maximum authorized gross 

weight is 30 kg (65 pounds). 

(6) Single batteries not exceeding 34 

kg (75 pounds) each, packed in 5-sided 

slip covers or in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Slip covers and boxes 

must be of solid or double-faced corrugated fiberboard of at least 91 kg (200 

pounds) Mullen test strength. The slip 

cover or fiberboard box must fit snugly 

and provide inside top clearance of at 

least 1.3 cm (0.5 inch) above battery 

terminals and filler caps with reinforcement in place. Assembled for shipment, the bottom edges of the slipcover 

must come to within 2.5 cm (1 inch) of 

the bottom of the battery. The completed package (battery and box or slip 

cover) must be capable of withstanding 

a top-to-bottom compression test of at 

least 225 kg (500 pounds) without damage to battery terminal caps, cell covers or filler caps. 

(7) Single batteries exceeding 34 kg 

(75 pounds) each may be packed in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Boxes 

must be of double-wall corrugated fiberboard of at least 181 kg (400 pounds) 

test, or solid fiberboard testing at least 

181 kg (400 pounds); a box may have 

hand holes in its ends provided that the 

hand holes will not materially weaken 

the box. Sides and ends of the box must 

have cushioning between the battery 

and walls of the box; combined thickness of cushioning material and walls 

of the box must not be less than 1.3 cm 

(0.5 inch); and cushioning must be excelsior pads, corrugated fiberboard, or 

other suitable cushioning material. 

The bottom of the battery must be protected by a minimum of one excelsior 

pad or by a double-wall corrugated fiberboard pad. The top of the battery 

must be protected by a wood frame, 

corrugated trays or scored sheets of 

corrugated fiberboard having minimum 

test of 91 kg (200 pounds), or other 

equally effective cushioning material. 

Top protection must bear evenly on 

connectors and/or edges of the battery 

cover to facilitate stacking of batteries. No more than one battery may 

be placed in one box. The maximum authorized gross weight is 91 kg (200 

pounds).

(e) When transported by highway or 

rail, electric storage batteries containing electrolyte or corrosive battery 

fluid are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter, if all of 

the following are met: 

(1) No other hazardous materials may 

be transported in the same vehicle; 

(2) The batteries must be loaded or 

braced so as to prevent damage and 

short circuits in transit; 

(3) Any other material loaded in the 

same vehicle must be blocked, braced, 

or otherwise secured to prevent contact with or damage to the batteries; 

and

(4) The transport vehicle may not 

carry material shipped by any person 

other than the shipper of the batteries. 

(f) Batteries can be considered as 

non-spillable provided they are capable 

of withstanding the following two 

tests, without leakage of battery fluid 

from the battery: 

521

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.159a 

(1) Vibration test. The battery must be 

rigidly clamped to the platform of a vibration machine, and a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 

0.8 mm (0.03 inches) with a 1.6 mm 

(0.063 inches) maximum total excursion 

must be applied. The frequency must 

be varied at the rate of 1 Hz/min between the limits of 10 Hz to 55 Hz. The 

entire range of frequencies and return 

must be traversed in 95 ± 5 minutes for 

each mounting position (direction of 

vibrator) of the battery. The battery 

must be tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing 

with fill openings and vents, if any, in 

an inverted position) for equal time periods.

(2) Pressure differential test. Following 

the vibration test, the battery must be 

stored for six hours at 24 °C ± 4 °C (75 

°F ± 7 °F) while subjected to a pressure 

differential of at least 88 kPa (13 psig). 

The battery must be tested in three 

mutually perpendicular positions (to 

include testing with fill openings and 

vents, if any, in an inverted position) 

for at least six hours in each position. 

(g) Electrolyte, acid or alkaline corrosive battery fluid, packed with batteries wet or dry, must be packed in 

one of the following specification packagings:

(1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F wooden 

boxes with inner receptacles of glass, 

not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) each with not 

over 8.0 L (2 gallons) total in each outside container. Inside containers must 

be well-cushioned and separated from 

batteries by a strong solid wooden partition. The completed package must 

conform to Packing Group III requirements.

(2) Electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid included with electric storage batteries and filling kits 

may be packed in strong rigid outer 

packagings when shipments are made 

by, for, or to the Departments of the 

Army, Navy, or Air Force of the United 

States. Packagings must conform to 

military specifications. The electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery 

fluid must be packed in polyethylene 

bottles of not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each. Not more than 24 bottles, 

securely separated from electric storage batteries and kits, may be offered 

for transportation or transported in 

each package. 

(3) In 4G fiberboard boxes with not 

more than 12 inside packagings of polyethylene or other material resistant to 

the lading, each not over 2.0 L (0.5 gallon) capacity each. Completed packages must conform to Packing Group 

III requirements. Inner packagings 

must be adequately separated from the 

storage battery. The maximum authorized gross weight is 29 kg (64 pounds). 

These packages are not authorized for 

transportation by aircraft. 

(h) Dry batteries or battery charger 

devices may be packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes with inner receptacles containing battery fluid. Completed packagings must conform to Packing Group 

III requirements. Not more than 12 

inner receptacles may be packed in one 

outer box. The maximum authorized 

gross weight is 34 kg (75 pounds). 

(i) When approved by the Associate 

Administrator, electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte or corrosive battery fluid in a separate reservoir from which fluid is injected into 

the battery cells by a power device cartridge assembled with the battery, and 

which meet the criteria of paragraph 

(f) are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter. 

[74 FR 2257, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.159a Exceptions for non-spillable 

batteries. 

(a) Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the §172.101 table or 

in a packaging section in this part. 

(b) Non-spillable batteries offered for 

transportation or transported in accordance with this section are subject 

to the incident reporting requirements. 

For transportation by aircraft, a telephone report in accordance with 

§171.15(a) is required if a fire, violent 

rupture, explosion or dangerous evolution of heat (i.e., an amount of heat 

sufficient to be dangerous to packaging 

or personal safety to include charring 

of packaging, melting of packaging, 

scorching of packaging, or other evidence) occurs as a direct result of a 

non-spillable battery. For all modes of 

522

§ 173.160 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

transportation, a written report in accordance with §171.16(a) is required if a 

fire, violent rupture, explosion or dangerous evolution of heat occurs as a direct result of a non-spillable battery. 

(c) Non-spillable batteries are excepted from the packaging requirements of §173.159 under the following 

conditions:

(1) Non-spillable batteries must be securely packed in strong outer packagings and meet the requirements of 

§173.159(a). A non-spillable battery 

which is an integral part of and necessary for the operation of mechanical 

or electronic equipment must be securely fastened in the battery holder 

on the equipment; 

(2) The battery and outer packaging 

must be plainly and durably marked 

‘‘NON-SPILLABLE’’ or ‘‘NON-SPILLABLE BATTERY.’’ The requirement to 

mark the outer package does not apply 

when the battery is installed in a piece 

of equipment that is transported 

unpackaged.

(d) Non-spillable batteries are excepted from all other requirements of 

this subchapter when offered for transportation and transported in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section 

and the following: 

(1) At a temperature of 55 °C (131 °F),

the battery must not contain any 

unabsorbed free-flowing liquid, and 

must be designed so that electrolyte 

will not flow from a ruptured or 

cracked case; and 

(2) For transport by aircraft, when 

contained in a battery-powered device, 

equipment or vehicle must be prepared 

and packaged for transport in a manner to prevent unintentional activation 

in conformance with §173.159(b)(2) of 

this Subpart. 

[74 FR 2258, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 

FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010] 

§ 173.160 Bombs, smoke, non-explosive 

(corrosive). 

Bombs, smoke, non-explosive may be 

shipped provided they are without ignition elements, bursting charges, detonating fuses or other explosive components. They must be packaged in wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes, or plywood 

drums (1D), which meet Packing Group 

II requirements. 

§ 173.161 Chemical kits and first aid 

kits. 

(a) Chemical kits and First aid kits 

must conform to the following requirements:

(1) The kits may only contain hazardous materials for which packaging 

exceptions are provided in column 8(A) 

the §172.101 Table of this subchapter. 

(2) The kits must be packed in a 

strong outer packaging conforming to 

the packaging requirements of subpart 

B of this subchapter. 

(3) The kits must include sufficient 

absorbent material to completely absorb the contents of any liquid hazardous materials contained in the kits. 

The contents must be separated, 

placed, or packed, and closed with 

cushioning material to protect them 

from damage. 

(4) The contents of the kits must be 

packed so there will be no possibility of 

the mixture of contents causing dangerous evolution of heat or gas. 

(5) The packing group assigned to the 

kits as a whole must be the most stringent packing group assigned to any individual substance contained in the 

kits.

(6) Inner receptacles containing hazardous materials within the kits must 

not contain more than 250 ml for liquids or 250 g for solids per receptacle. 

(7) The total quantity of hazardous 

materials in any one outer package 

must not exceed either 10 L or 10 kg. 

(b) Chemical kits and First aid kits 

are excepted from the specification 

packaging requirements of this subchapter. Chemical kits and First aid 

kits are also excepted from the labeling requirements of this subchapter except when offered for transportation or 

transported by air. In addition, Chemical kits and First aid kits are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter (Placarding), part 174 (Carriage 

by rail) of this subchapter except 

§174.24 (Shipping papers), and part 177 

(Carriage by highway) of this subchapter except §177.817 (Shipping papers). Kits that meet the definition for 

a consumer commodity in §171.8 of this 

subchapter may be transported in accordance with the exceptions for ORM 

materials in §173.156. 

[Doc. No. 2002–13658, 68 FR 45033, July 31, 

2003]

523

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.164 

§ 173.162 Gallium. 

(a) Except when packaged in cylinders or steel flasks, gallium must be 

packaged in packagings which meet 

the requirements of part 178 of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level for transportation by 

aircraft, and at the Packing Group III 

performance level for transport by 

highway, rail or vessel, as follows: 

(1) In combination packagings intended to contain liquids consisting of 

glass, earthenware or rigid plastic 

inner packagings with a maximum net 

mass of 15 kg (33 pounds) each. The 

inner packagings must be packed in 

wood boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), plastic boxes (4H1, 

4H2), fiber drums (1G) or removable 

head steel and plastic drums or 

jerricans (1A2, 1H2, 3A2 or 3H2) with 

sufficient cushioning materials to prevent breakage. Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings must 

have an inner liner that is leakproof or 

bags of strong leakproof and punctureresistant material impervious to the 

contents and completely surrounding 

the contents to prevent it from escaping from the package, irrespective of 

its position. 

(2) In packagings intended to contain 

liquids consisting of semi-rigid plastic 

inner packagings of not more than 2.5 

kg (5.5 pounds) net capacity each, individually enclosed in a sealed, leaktight bag of strong puncture-resistant 

material. The sealed bags must be 

packed in wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood 

(4D), reconstituted wood (4F), fiberboard (4G) or plastic (4H1, 4H2) boxes or 

in fiber (1G) or steel (1A2) drums, which 

are lined with leak-tight, puncture-resistant material. Bags and liner material must be chemically resistant to 

gallium.

(3) Cylinders and steel flasks with 

vaulted bottoms are also authorized. 

(b) When it is necessary to transport 

gallium at low temperatures in order 

to maintain it in a completely solid 

state, the above packagings may be 

overpacked in a strong, water-resistant 

outer packaging which contains dry ice 

or other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is used, all of the above materials used in the packaging of gallium 

must be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and must 

have impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. 

If dry ice is used, the outer packaging 

must permit the release of carbon dioxide gas. 

(c) Manufactured articles or 

apparatuses, each containing not more 

than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of gallium 

and packaged so that the quantity of 

gallium per package does not exceed 1 

g (0.35 ounce) are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter. 

[64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; as amemded at 66 

FR 33430, June 21, 2001] 

§ 173.163 Hydrogen fluoride. 

(a) Hydrogen fluoride (hydrofluoric 

acid, anhydrous) must be packaged as 

follows:

(1) In specification 3, 3A, 3AA, 3B, 

3BN, or 3E cylinders; or in specification 

4B, 4BA, or 4BW cylinders except that 

brazed 4B, 4BA, and 4BW cylinders are 

not authorized. The filling density may 

not exceed 85 percent of the cylinder’s 

water weight capacity. In place of the 

periodic volumetric expansion test, 

cylinders used in exclusive service may 

be given a complete external visual inspection in conformance with part 180, 

subpart C, of this subchapter, at the 

time such requalification becomes due. 

(2) In a UN cylinder, as specified in 

part 178 of this subchapter, having a 

minimum test pressure of 10 bar and a 

maximum filling ratio of 0.84. 

(b) A cylinder removed from hydrogen fluoride service must be condemned in accordance with §180.205 of 

this subchapter. Alternatively, at the 

direction of the owner, the requalifier 

may render the cylinder incapable of 

holding pressure. 

[71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.164 Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury). 

(a) For transportation by aircraft, 

mercury must be packaged in packagings which meet the requirements of 

part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:

(1) In inner packagings of earthenware, glass or plastic containing not 

more than 3.5 kg (7.7 pounds) of mercury, or inner packagings which are 

glass ampoules containing not more 

524

§ 173.164 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

than 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) of mercury, or 

iron or steel quicksilver flasks containing not more than 35 kg (77 pounds) 

of mercury. The inner packagings or 

flasks must be packed in steel drums 

(1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden 

boxes (4C1), (4C2), plywood boxes (4D), 

reconstituted wood boxes (4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), plastic boxes (4H2), 

plywood drums (1D) or fiber drums 

(1G).

(2) [Reserved] 

(3) When inner packagings of earthenware, glass or plastic are used, they 

must be packed in the outer packaging 

with sufficient cushioning material to 

prevent breakage. 

(4) Either the inner packagings or the 

outer packagings must have inner linings or bags of strong leakproof and 

puncture-resistant material impervious to mercury, completely surrounding the contents, so that the escape of mercury will be prevented irrespective of the position of the package. 

(b) Manufactured articles or 

apparatuses, each containing not more 

than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of mercury 

and packaged so that the quantity of 

mercury per package does not exceed 1 

g (0.035 ounce) are not subject to the 

requirements of this subchapter. 

(c) Manufactured articles or 

apparatuses containing mercury are 

excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter 

when packaged as follows: 

(1) Manufactured articles or 

apparatuses of which metallic mercury 

is a component part, such as 

manometers, pumps, thermometers, 

switches, etc. (for electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes and similar tubes, see 

paragraph (c)(3) of this section), must 

be in strong outer packagings, having 

sealed inner liners or bags of strong 

leakproof and puncture-resistant material impervious to mercury, which will 

prevent the escape of mercury from the 

package irrespective of its position. 

Mercury switches and relays are excepted from these packaging requirements, if they are totally enclosed, 

leakproof and in sealed metal or plastic units. 

(2) Thermometers, switches and relays, each containing a total quantity 

of not more than 15 g (0.53 ounces) of 

mercury, are excepted from the requirements of this subchapter if installed as an integral part of a machine 

or apparatus and so fitted that shock 

of impact damage, leading to leakage 

of mercury, is unlikely to occur under 

conditions normally incident to transport.

(3) Electron tubes, mercury vapor 

tubes and similar tubes must be packaged as follows: 

(i) Tubes which are packed in strong 

outer packagings with all seams and 

joints sealed with self-adhesive, pressure-sensitive tape which will prevent 

the escape of mercury from the package, are authorized up to a total net 

quantity of 450 g (15.9 ounces) of mercury per package; 

(ii) Tubes with more than 450 g (15.9 

ounces) of mercury are authorized only 

when packed in strong outer packagings, having sealed inner liners or 

bags of strong leakproof and punctureresistant material impervious to mercury which will prevent escape of mercury from the package irrespective of 

its position; 

(iii) Tubes which do not contain more 

than 5 g (0.2 ounce) of mercury each 

and which are packed in the manufacturer’s original packagings, are authorized up to a total net quantity of 30 g 

(1.1 ounces) of mercury per package; 

(iv) Tubes which are completely jacketed in sealed leakproof metal cases 

are authorized in the manufacturer’s 

original packagings. 

(4) A person offering for transportation electron tubes, mercury vapor 

tubes, and similar tubes shall indicate 

the quantity of mercury therein on the 

shipping paper. 

(5) Mercurial barometers conforming 

to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, 

which are loaded and unloaded from an 

aircraft under the supervision of, and 

accompanied in flight by, a National 

Weather Service official or similar 

United States agency official, are excepted from any other requirements of 

this subchapter. 

(d) For transportation by other than 

aircraft, mercury must be packaged— 

(1) In any packaging which meets the 

requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level; or 

(2) In non-specification reusable 

metal packagings. 

525

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.166 

(e) Except for a hazardous substance 

or a hazardous waste or for transportation by aircraft or vessel, packages 

containing less than 0.45 kg (1.0 pound) 

net weight of mercury are not subject 

to the requirements of this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 64 FR 10777, 

10778, Mar. 5, 1999; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003] 

§ 173.166 Air bag inflators, air bag 

modules and seat-belt 

pretensioners. 

(a) Definitions. An air bag inflator 

(consisting of a casing containing an 

igniter, a booster material, a gas 

generant and, in some cases, a pressure 

vessel (cylinder)) is a gas generator 

used to inflate an air bag in a supplemental restraint system in a motor vehicle. An air bag module is the air bag 

inflator plus an inflatable bag assembly. A seat-belt pre-tensioner contains

similar hazardous materials and is used 

in the operation of a seat-belt restraining system in a motor vehicle. 

(b) Classification. An air bag inflator, 

air bag module, or seat-belt 

pretensioner may be classed as Class 9 

(UN3268) if: 

(1) The manufacturer has submitted 

each design type air bag inflator, air 

bag module, or seat-belt pretensioner 

to a person approved by the Associate 

Administrator, in accordance with 

§173.56(b), for examination and testing. 

The submission must contain a detailed description of the inflator or 

pretensioner or, if more than a single 

inflator or pretensioner is involved, the 

maximum parameters of each particular inflator or pretensioner design 

type for which approval is sought and 

details on the complete package. The 

manufacturer must submit an application, including the test results and report recommending the shipping description and classification for each device or design type to the Associate 

Administrator, and must receive written notification from the Associate Administrator that the device has been 

approved for transportation and assigned an EX number; or, 

(2) The manufacturer has submitted 

an application, including a classification issued by the competent authority 

of a foreign government to the Associate Administrator, and received written notification from the Associate Administrator that the device has been 

approved for transportation and assigned an EX number. 

(c) EX numbers. When offered for 

transportation, the shipping paper 

must contain the EX number or product code for each approved inflator, 

module or pretensioner in association 

with the basic description required by 

§172.202(a) of this subchapter. Product 

codes must be traceable to the specific 

EX number assigned to the inflator, 

module or pretensioner by the Associate Administrator. The EX number 

or product code is not required to be 

marked on the outside package. 

(d) Exceptions. (1) An air bag module 

or seat-belt pretensioner that has been 

approved by the Associate Administrator and is installed in a motor vehicle, aircraft, boat or other transport 

conveyance or its completed components, such as steering columns or door 

panels, is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter. 

(2) An air bag module containing an 

inflator that has been previously approved for transportation is not required to be submitted for further examination or approval. 

(3) An air bag module containing an 

inflator that has previously been approved as a Division 2.2 material is not 

required to be submitted for further examination to be reclassed as a Class 9 

material.

(4) Shipments for recycling. When offered for domestic transportation by 

highway, rail freight, cargo vessel or 

cargo aircraft, a serviceable air bag 

module or seat-belt pretensioner removed from a motor vehicle that was 

manufactured as required for use in the 

United States may be offered for transportation and transported without 

compliance with the shipping paper requirement prescribed in paragraph (c) 

of this section. However, the word 

‘‘Recycled’’ must be entered on the 

shipping paper immediately after the 

basic description prescribed in §172.202 

of this subchapter. No more than one 

device is authorized in the packaging 

prescribed in paragraph (e)(1), (2) or (3) 

of this section. The device must be 

526

§ 173.168 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

cushioned and secured within the package to prevent movement during transportation.

(e) Packagings. Rigid, outer packagings, meeting the general packaging 

requirements of part 173, and the packaging specification and performance requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level are authorized as follows. The packagings must be designed 

and constructed to prevent movement 

of the articles and inadvertent operation.

(1) 1A2, 1B2, 1G or 1H2 drums. 

(2) 3A2 or 3H2 jerricans. 

(3) 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 boxes. 

(4) Reusable high strength plastic or 

metal containers or dedicated handling 

devices are authorized for shipment of 

air bag inflators, air bag modules, and 

seat-belt pretensioners from a manufacturing facility to the assembly facility, subject to the following conditions: 

(i) The gross weight of the container 

or handling device may not exceed 1000 

kg (2205 pounds). The container or handling device structure must provide 

adequate support to allow them to be 

stacked at least three high with no 

damage to the containers or devices. 

(ii) If not completely enclosed by design, the container or handling device 

must be covered with plastic, fiberboard, or metal. The covering must be 

secured to the container by banding or 

other comparable methods. 

(iii) Internal dunnage must be sufficient to prevent shifting of the devices 

within the container. 

(5) Packagings specified in the approval document issued by the Associate Administrator in accordance with 

paragraph (e) of this section are also 

authorized.

(f) Labeling. Notwithstanding the provisions of §172.402 of this subchapter, 

each package or handling device must 

display a CLASS 9 label. Additional labeling is not required when the package contains no hazardous materials 

other than the devices. 

[Amdt. 173–230, 57 FR 1878, Jan. 16, 1992, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 

29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 

1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 10778, 

Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 

58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 

66 FR 45183, 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45034, 

July 31, 2003; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 

61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 

71 FR 78632, Dec. 29,2006] 

§ 173.168 Chemical oxygen generators. 

An oxygen generator, chemical (defined in §171.8 of this subchapter) may 

be transported only under the following conditions: 

(a) Approval. A chemical oxygen generator that is shipped with an explosive 

or non-explosive means of initiation 

attached must be classed and approved 

by the Associate Administrator in accordance with the procedures specified 

in §173.56 of this subchapter. 

(b) Impact resistance. A chemical oxygen generator, without any packaging, 

must be capable of withstanding a 1.8 

meter drop onto a rigid, non-resilient, 

flat and horizontal surface, in the position most likely to cause actuation or 

loss of contents. 

(c) Protection against inadvertent actuation. A chemical oxygen generator 

must incorporate one of the following 

means of preventing inadvertent actuation:

(1) A chemical oxygen generator that 

is not installed in protective breathing 

equipment (PBE): 

(i) Mechanically actuated devices: 

(A) Two pins, installed so that each 

is independently capable of preventing 

the actuator from striking the primer; 

(B) One pin and one retaining ring, 

each installed so that each is independently capable of preventing the actuator from striking the primer; or 

(C) A cover securely installed over 

the primer and a pin installed so as to 

prevent the actuator from striking the 

primer and cover. 

(ii) Electrically actuated devices: 

The electrical leads must be mechanically shorted and the mechanical short 

must be shielded in metal foil. 

(iii) Devices with a primer but no actuator: A chemical oxygen generator 

that has a primer but no actuating 

mechanism must have a protective 

527

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.171 

cover over the primer to prevent actuation from external impact. 

(2) A chemical oxygen generator installed in a PBE must contain a pin installed so as to prevent the actuator 

from striking the primer, and be placed 

in a protective bag, pouch, case or 

cover such that the protective breathing equipment is fully enclosed in such 

a manner that the protective bag, 

pouch, case or cover prevents unintentional actuation of the oxygen generator.

(d) Packaging. A chemical oxygen 

generator and a chemical oxygen generator installed in equipment, (e.g., a 

PBE) must be placed in a rigid outer 

packaging that— 

(1) Conforms to the requirements of 

either:

(i) Part 178, subparts L and M, of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group I or 

II performance level; or 

(ii) The performance criteria in Air 

Transport Association (ATA) Specification No. 300 for a Category I Shipping 

Container.

(2) After September 30, 2009, with its 

contents, is capable of meeting the following additional requirements when 

transported by cargo-only aircraft: 

(i) The Flame Penetration Resistance 

Test specified in Appendix E to part 178 

of this subchapter. 

(ii) The Thermal Resistance Test 

specified in Appendix D to part 178 of 

this subchapter. 

(e) Equipment marking. The outside 

surface of a chemical oxygen generator 

must be marked to indicate the presence of an oxygen generator (e.g., ‘‘oxygen generator, chemical’’). The outside surface of equipment containing a 

chemical oxygen generator that is not 

readily apparent (e.g., a sealed passenger service unit) must be clearly 

marked to indicate the presence of the 

oxygen generator (example: ‘‘Oxygen 

Generator Inside’’). 

(f) Items forbidden in air transportation. (1) A chemical oxygen generator 

is forbidden for transportation on 

board a passenger-carrying aircraft. 

(2) A chemical oxygen generator is 

forbidden for transportation by both 

passenger-carrying and cargo-only aircraft after: 

(i) The manufacturer’s expiration 

date; or 

(ii) The contents of the generator 

have been expended. 

[72 FR 4455, Jan. 31, 2007, as amended at 72 

FR 55097, Sept. 28, 2007; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 

2009; 74 FR 53188, Oct. 16, 2009] 

§ 173.170 Black powder for small arms. 

Black powder for small arms that has 

been classed in Division 1.1 may be reclassed as a Division 4.1 material, for 

domestic transportation by motor vehicle, rail freight, and cargo vessel 

only, subject to the following conditions:

(a) The powder must be examined and 

approved for Division 1.1 and Division 

4.1 classification in accordance with 

§§173.56 and 173.58; 

(b) The total quantity of black powder in one motor vehicle, rail car, or 

freight container may not exceed 45.4 

kg (100 pounds) net mass, and no more 

than four freight containers may be on 

board one cargo vessel; 

(c) The black powder must be packed 

in inner metal or heavy wall conductive plastic receptacles not over 454 g 

(16 ounces) net capacity each, with no 

more than 25 cans in one outer UN 4G 

fiberboard box. The inner packagings 

must be arranged and protected so as 

to prevent simultaneous ignition of the 

contents. The complete package must 

be of the same type which has been examined as required in §173.56; 

(d) Each completed package must be 

marked ‘‘BLACK POWDER FOR 

SMALL ARMS’’ and ‘‘NA 0027’’; and 

(e) Each package must bear the 

FLAMMABLE SOLID label. 

[Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996, as 

amended at Amdt. 173–255, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 

26, 1997] 

§ 173.171 Smokeless powder for small 

arms. 

Smokeless powder for small arms 

which has been classed in Division 1.3 

may be reclassed in Division 4.1, for domestic transportation by motor vehicle, rail car, vessel, or cargo-only aircraft, subject to the following conditions:

(a) The powder must be examined and 

approved for a Division 1.3 and Division 

4.1 classification in accordance with 

§§173.56 and 173.58 of this part. 

528

§ 173.172 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(b) The total quantity of smokeless 

powder may not exceed 45.4 kg (100 

pounds) net mass in: 

(1) One rail car, motor vehicle, or 

cargo-only aircraft; or 

(2) One freight container on a vessel, 

not to exceed four freight containers 

per vessel. 

(c) Only combination packagings 

with inner packagings not exceeding 

3.6 kg (8 pounds) net mass are authorized. Inner packagings must be arranged and protected so as to prevent 

simultaneous ignition of the contents. 

The complete package must be of the 

same type which has been examined as 

required in §173.56 of this part. 

(d) Inside packages that have been 

examined and approved by the Associate Administrator may be packaged 

in UN 4G fiberboard boxes meeting the 

Packing Group I performance level, 

provided all inside containers are 

packed to prevent shifting and the net 

weight of smokeless powder in any one 

box does not exceed 7.3 kg (16 pounds). 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996; 66 FR 45379, 

Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 61941, Oct. 30, 2003; 75 FR 

53597, Sept. 1, 2010] 

§ 173.172 Aircraft hydraulic power 

unit fuel tank. 

Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel 

tanks containing a mixture of anhydrous hydrazine and monomethyl hydrazine (M86 fuel) and designed for installation as complete units in aircraft 

are excepted from the specification 

packaging requirements of this subchapter when they conform to either of 

the following conditions: 

(a) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel made from tubing and having welded heads. Primary 

containment of the fuel within this 

vessel must consist of a welded aluminum bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The 

outer vessel must have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1,275 kPa (185 

psig) and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa (400 psig). Each vessel 

must be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and must be 

found leakproof. The complete inner 

unit must be securely packed in noncombustible cushioning material, such 

as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will 

adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and 

package is 42 L (11 gallons); or 

(b) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel. Primary containment of the fuel within this vessel 

must consist of a welded hermetically 

sealed fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The 

pressure vessel must have a minimum 

design gauge pressure of 5,170 kPa (750 

psig). Each vessel must be leakchecked during manufacture and before 

shipment and must be securely packed 

in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong 

outer tightly closed metal packaging 

which will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per 

unit and package is 42 L (11 gallons). 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by 66 FR 45380] 

§ 173.173 Paint, paint-related material, 

adhesives, ink and resins. 

(a) When the §172.101 table specifies 

that a hazardous material be packaged 

under this section, the following requirements apply. Except as otherwise 

provided in this part, the description 

‘‘Paint’’ is the proper shipping name 

for paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, liquid aluminum, liquid 

bronze, liquid gold, liquid wood filler, 

and liquid lacquer base. The description ‘‘Paint-related material’’ is the 

proper shipping name for a paint 

thinning, drying, reducing or removing 

compound. However, if a more specific 

description is listed in the §172.101 

table of this subchapter, that description must be used. 

(b) Paint, paint-related material, adhesives, ink and resins must be packaged as follows: 

(1) As prescribed in §173.202 of this 

part if it is a Packing Group II material or §173.203 of this part if it is a 

Packing Group III material; or 

(2) In inner glass packagings of not 

over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each or 

inner metal packagings of not over 5 L 

(1 gallon) each, packed in a strong 

outer packaging. Packages must conform to the packaging requirements of 

529

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.183 

subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of 

this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994] 

§ 173.174 Refrigerating machines. 

A refrigerating machine assembled 

for shipment and containing 7 kg (15 

pounds) or less of a flammable liquid 

for its operation in a strong, tight receptacle is excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation or 

transported by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this 

subchapter. In addition. shipments are 

not subject to subpart F of part 172 of 

this subchapter (Placarding), to part 

174 of this subchapter (Carriage by rail) 

except §174.24 (Shipping papers) and to 

part 177 (Carriage by highway) of this 

subchapter except §177.817 (Shipping 

papers).

§ 173.181 Pyrophoric materials (liquids). 

When the §172.101 table specifies that 

a hazardous material be packaged 

under this section, only the following 

non-bulk packagings are authorized: 

(a) Specification steel or nickel cylinders prescribed for any compressed 

gas except acetylene having a minimum design pressure of 1206 kPa (175 

psig). Cylinders with valves must be: 

(1) Equipped with steel valve protection caps or collars, unless overpacked; 

or

(2) Overpacked in a wooden box (4C1, 

4C2, 4D or 4F); fiberboard box (4G), or 

plastic box (4H1 or 4H2). Cylinders 

must be secured to prevent shifting in 

the box and, when offered for transportation or transported, must be so loaded that pressure relief devices remain 

in the vapor space of the cylinder. (See 

§177.838(h) of this subchapter.) 

(b) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) 

or fiberboard boxes (4G) enclosing not 

more than four strong, tight metal 

cans with inner receptacles of glass or 

metal, not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, having positive screwcap closures adequately gasketed. Inner packagings must be cushioned on all sides 

with dry, absorbent, incombustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb 

the entire contents. The strong, tight 

metal cans must be closed by positive 

means, not by friction. 

(c) Steel drums (1A2) or fiber drums 

(1G) not exceeding 220 L (58 gallons) capacity each with strong tight inner 

metal cans not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) capacity each, closed by positive means, 

not friction. 

(1) Inner packagings must have no 

opening exceeding 25 mm (1 inch) diameter and must be surrounded with 

noncombustible cushioning material. 

(2) Net quantity of pyrophoric liquids 

may not exceed two-thirds of the rated 

capacity of the outer drum. For example, a 220 L (58 gallons) outer drum may 

contain no more than 147 L (39 gallons) 

of pyrophoric liquids. 

(3) Each layer of inner containers 

must be separated by a metal plate separator in addition to cushioning material.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 65 FR 

58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45183, 45380, Aug. 

28, 2001; 68 FR 24660, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 61941, 

Oct. 30, 2003] 

§ 173.182 Barium azide—50 percent or 

more water wet. 

Barium azide—50 percent or more 

water wet, must be packed in wooden 

boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) or fiber 

drums (1G) with inner glass packagings 

not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) capacity 

each. Packagings must have rubber 

stoppers wire tied for securement. If 

transportation is to take place when 

and where freezing weather is possible, 

a suitable antifreeze solution must be 

used to prevent freezing. Each packaging must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group I performance level. 

§ 173.183 Nitrocellulose base film. 

Films, nitrocellulose base, must be 

packaged in packagings conforming to 

the requirements of part 178 of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group III 

performance level, as follows: 

(a) In steel drums (1A2), aluminum 

drums (1B2), steel jerricans (3A2), 

wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes or plywood 

drums (1D) with each reel in a tightly 

closed metal can, polypropylene canister, or strong cardboard or fiberboard 

530

§ 173.184 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

inner packaging with cover held in 

place by adhesive tape or paper; or 

(b) In fiberboard (4G) boxes or fiber 

drums (1G) with a single tightly closed 

metal can, polypropylene canister, or 

strong cardboard or fiberboard inner 

packaging with cover held in place by 

adhesive tape or paper; authorized only 

for not over 600 m (1969 feet) of film. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643 Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–255, 61 FR 50627, Sept. 

26, 1996] 

§ 173.184 Highway or rail fusee. 

(a) A fusee is a device designed to 

burn at a controlled rate and to 

produce visual effects for signaling 

purposes. The composition of the fusee 

must be such that the fusee will not ignite spontaneously or undergo marked 

decomposition when subjected to a 

temperature of 75 °C (167 °F) for 48 consecutive hours. 

(b) Fusees (highway and railway) 

must be packaged in steel drums (1A2), 

steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), 

plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood 

(4F) boxes or in fiberboard boxes (4G), 

plywood (1D) or fiber (1G) drums. If the 

fusees are equipped with spikes packagings must have reinforced ends to 

prevent penetration of spikes through 

the outer packagings; packages must 

be capable of passing drop test requirements (§178.603 of this subchapter), including at least one drop with spike in 

a downward position, and other requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packing Group II performance level. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 66 FR 45379] 

§ 173.185 Lithium cells and batteries. 

(a) Cells and batteries. A lithium cell 

or battery, including a lithium polymer cell or battery and a lithium-ion 

cell or battery, must conform to all of 

the following requirements: 

(1) Be of a type proven to meet the 

requirements of each test in the UN 

Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR; see 

§171.7 of this subchapter). A cell or battery and equipment containing a cell 

or battery that was first transported 

prior to January 1, 2006 and is of a type 

proven to meet the criteria of Class 9 

by testing in accordance with the tests 

in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, Third Revised Edition, 1999, need 

not be retested. 

(2) Incorporate a safety venting device or otherwise be designed in a manner that will preclude a violent rupture 

under conditions normally incident to 

transportation.

(3) Be equipped with an effective 

means to prevent dangerous reverse 

current flow (e.g., diodes, fuses, etc.) if 

a battery contains cells or series of 

cells that are connected in parallel. 

(4) Be packaged in combination packagings conforming to the requirements 

of part 178, subparts L and M, of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group II 

performance level. The lithium battery 

or cell must be packed in inner packagings in such a manner as to prevent 

short circuits, including movement 

which could lead to short circuits. The 

inner packaging must be packed within 

one of the following outer packagings: 

metal boxes (4A or 4B); wooden boxes 

(4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F); fiberboard boxes 

(4G); solid plastic boxes (4H2); fiber 

drums (1G); metal drums (1A2 or 1B2); 

plywood drums (1D); plastic jerricans 

(3H2); or metal jerricans (3A2 or 3B2). 

(5) Be equipped with an effective 

means of preventing external short circuits.

(6) Except as provided in paragraph 

(d) of this section, cells and batteries 

with a liquid cathode containing sulfur 

dioxide, sulfuryl chloride or thionyl 

chloride may not be offered for transportation or transported if any cell has 

been discharged to the extent that the 

open circuit voltage is less than two 

volts or is less than 2/3 of the voltage of 

the fully charged cell, whichever is 

less.

(b) Lithium cells or batteries packed 

with equipment. Lithium cells or batteries packed with equipment may be 

transported as Class 9 materials if the 

batteries and cells meet all the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section. The equipment and the packages 

of cells or batteries must be further 

packed in a strong outer packaging. 

The cells or batteries must be packed 

in such a manner as to prevent short 

circuits, including movement that 

could lead to short circuits. 

(c) Lithium cells or batteries contained 

in equipment. Lithium cells or batteries 

531

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.186 

contained in equipment may be transported as Class 9 materials if the cells 

and batteries meet all the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, 

except paragraph (a)(4) of this section, 

and the equipment is packed in a 

strong outer packaging that is waterproof or is made waterproof through 

the use of a liner unless the equipment 

is made waterproof by nature of its 

construction. The equipment and cells 

or batteries must be secured within the 

outer packaging and be packed so as to 

prevent movement, short circuits, and 

accidental operation during transport. 

(d) Cells and batteries, for disposal or 

recycling. A lithium cell or battery offered for transportation or transported 

by motor vehicle to a permitted storage facility, disposal site or for purposes of recycling is excepted from the 

specification packaging requirements 

of paragraph (a)(4) of this section and 

the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) 

and (a)(6) of this section when protected against short circuits and 

packed in a strong outer packaging 

conforming to the requirements of 

§§173.24 and 173.24a. 

(e) Shipments for testing (prototypes). A

lithium cell or battery is excepted 

from the requirements of (a)(1) of this 

section when transported by motor vehicle for purposes of testing. The cell 

or battery must be individually packed 

in an inner packaging, surrounded by 

cushioning material that is non-combustible and nonconductive. The cell or 

battery must be transported as a Class 

9 material. 

(f) A lithium cell or battery that does 

not comply with the provisions of this 

subchapter may be transported only 

under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator. 

(g) Batteries employing a strong, impact-resistant outer casing and exceeding a gross weight of 12 kg (26.5 lbs.), 

and assemblies of such batteries, may 

be packed in strong outer packagings, 

in protective enclosures (for example, 

in fully enclosed wooden slatted crates) 

or on pallets. Batteries must be secured to prevent inadvertent movement, and the terminals may not support the weight of other superimposed 

elements. Batteries packaged in this 

manner are not permitted for transportation by passenger aircraft, and may 

be transported by cargo aircraft only if 

approved by the Associate Administrator prior to transportation. 

[72 FR 44949, Aug. 9, 2007] 

§ 173.186 Matches. 

(a) Matches must be of a type which 

will not ignite spontaneously or undergo marked decomposition when subjected for 8 consecutive hours to a temperature of 93 °C (200 °F).

(b) Definitions. (1) Fusee matches are

matches the heads of which are prepared with a friction-sensitive igniter 

composition and a pyrotechnic composition which burns with little or no 

flame, but with intense heat. 

(2) Safety matches are matches combined with or attached to the box, book 

or card that can be ignited by friction 

only on a prepared surface. 

(3) Strike anywhere matches are 

matches that can be ignited by friction 

on a solid surface. 

(4) Wax ‘‘Vesta’’ matches are matches 

that can be ignited by friction either 

on a prepared surface or on a solid surface.

(c) Safety matches and wax ‘‘Vesta’’ 

matches must be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under conditions normally incident to transportation, and further packed in outer fiberboard, wooden, or other equivalenttype packagings. These matches in 

outer packagings not exceeding 23 kg 

(50 pounds) gross weight are not subject to any other requirement (except 

marking) of this subchapter. These 

matches may be packed in the same 

outer packaging with materials not 

subject to this subchapter. 

(d) Strike-anywhere matches may 

not be packed in the same outer packaging with any material other than 

safety matches or wax ‘‘Vesta’’ 

matches, which must be packed in separate inner packagings. 

(e) Packagings. Strike-anywhere 

matches must be tightly packed in securely closed chipboard, fiberboard, 

wooden, or metal inner packagings to 

prevent accidental ignition under conditions normally incident to transportation. Each inner packaging may contain no more than 700 strike-anywhere 

matches and must be packed in outer 

steel drums (1A2), aluminum drums 

532

§ 173.187 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(1B2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden 

(4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D), reconstituted 

wood (4F) or fiberboard (4G) boxes, plywood (1D) or fiber (1G) drums. Gross 

weight of fiberboard boxes (4G) must 

not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds). Gross 

weight of other outer packagings must 

not exceed 45 kg (100 pounds). 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 69 FR 76157, Dec. 20, 2004] 

§ 173.187 Pyrophoric solids, metals or 

alloys, n.o.s. 

Packagings for pyrophoric solids, 

metals, or alloys, n.o.s. must conform 

to the requirements of part 178 of this 

subchapter at the packing group performance level specified in the §172.101 

Table. These materials must be packaged as follows: 

(a) In steel boxes (4A) and contain 

not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each. 

(b) In wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 

4F) with inner metal receptacles which 

have a positive (not friction) means of 

closure and contain not more than 15 

kg (33 pounds) each. 

(c) In fiberboard boxes (4G) with 

inner metal receptacles which have a 

positive (not friction) means of closure 

and contain not more than 7.5 kg (17 

pounds) each. 

(d) In steel drums (1A1 or 1A2) with a 

gross mass not exceeding 150 kg (331 

pounds) per drum. 

(e) In plywood drums (1D) with inner 

metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and 

contain not more than 15 kg (33 

pounds) each. 

(f) In fiber drums (1G) with inner 

metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and 

contain not more than 15 kg (33 

pounds) each. 

(g) In specification cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except 

for Specifications 8 and 3HT. 

[71 FR 78632, Dec. 29, 2006] 

§ 173.188 White or yellow phosphorus. 

Phosphorus, white or yellow, when 

offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water, must 

be packaged in water or dry in packagings conforming to the requirements 

of part 178 of this subchapter at the 

Packing Group I performance level, as 

follows:

(a) When placed in water, it must be 

packaged in specification packagings 

as follows: 

(1) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) 

with:

(i) Inner hermetically sealed (soldered) metal cans, enclosed in other 

hermetically sealed (soldered) metal 

cans, or 

(ii) Inner water-tight metal cans containing not over 0.5 kg (1 pound) of 

phosphorus with screw-top closures; or 

(2) Steel drums (1A1) not over 250 L 

(66 gallons) capacity each or steel 

drums (1A2) not over 115 L (30 gallons) 

capacity each. 

(b) When dry, it must be cast solid 

and shipped in packagings as follows: 

(1) Steel drums (1A2) not over 115 L 

(30 gallons) capacity each, or 

(2) In projectiles or bombs when 

shipped by, for, or to the Departments 

of the Army, Navy, or Air Force of the 

United States Government, without 

bursting elements. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991] 

§ 173.189 Batteries containing sodium 

or cells containing sodium. 

(a) Batteries and cells may not contain any hazardous material other than 

sodium, sulfur or polysulfides. Cells 

not forming a component of a completed battery may not be offered for 

transportation at a temperature at 

which any liquid sodium is present in 

the cell. Batteries may only be offered 

for transportation, or transported, at a 

temperature at which any liquid sodium present in the battery conforms 

to the conditions prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section. 

(b) Cells must consist of hermetically 

sealed metal casings which fully enclose the hazardous materials and 

which are so constructed and closed as 

to prevent the release of the hazardous 

materials under normal conditions of 

transport. Cells must be placed in suitable outer packagings with sufficient 

cushioning material to prevent contact 

between cells and between cells and the 

internal surfaces of the outer packaging, and to ensure that no dangerous 

shifting of the cells within the outer 

packaging occurs in transport. Cells 

533

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.192 

must be packaged in 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 

1H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer 

packagings which meet the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group II performance 

level.

(c) Batteries must consist of cells secured within, and fully enclosed by a 

metal casing so constructed and closed 

as to prevent the release of the hazardous materials under normal conditions of transport. Batteries may be offered for transportation, and transported, unpacked or in protective packagings that are not subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.

(d) Batteries containing any liquid 

sodium may not be offered for transportation, or transported, by aircraft. 

Batteries containing liquid sodium 

may be transported by motor vehicle, 

rail car or vessel under the following 

conditions:

(1) Batteries must be equipped with 

an effective means of preventing external short circuits, such as by providing 

complete electrical insulation of battery terminals or other external electrical connectors. Battery terminals or 

other electrical connectors penetrating 

the heat insulation fitted in battery 

casings must be provided with thermal 

insulation sufficient to prevent the 

temperature of the exposed surfaces of 

such devices from exceeding 55 °C (130 

°F).

(2) No battery may be offered for 

transportation if the temperature at 

any point on the external surface of 

the battery exceeds 55 °C (130 °F).

(3) If any external source of heating 

is used during transportation to maintain sodium in batteries in a molten 

state, means must be provided to ensure that the internal temperature of 

the battery does not reach or exceed 

400 °C (752 °F).

(4) When loaded in a transport vehicle or freight container: 

(i) Batteries must be secured so as to 

prevent significant shifting within the 

transport vehicle or freight container 

under conditions normally incident to 

transportation;

(ii) Adequate ventilation and/or separation between batteries must be provided to ensure that the temperature 

at any point on the external surface of 

the battery casing will not exceed 240 

°C (464 °F) during transportation; and 

(iii) No other hazardous materials, 

with the exception of cells containing 

sodium, may be loaded in the same 

transport vehicle or freight container. 

Batteries must be separated from all 

other freight by a distance of not less 

than 0.5 m (1.6 feet). 

(e) Vehicles, machinery and equipment powered by sodium batteries 

must be consigned under the entry 

‘‘Battery-powered vehicle or Batterypowered equipment.’’ 

[Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 

1, 1996; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 61941, 

Oct. 30, 2003; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.192 Packaging for certain toxic 

gases in Hazard Zone A. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies a toxic material must be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following cylinders are authorized: 

(a) Specification 3A1800, 3AA1800, 

3AL1800, 3E1800, or seamless UN cylinders with a minimum test pressure in 

accordance with P200 of the UN Recommendations (IBR, see §171.7 of this 

subchapter).

(1) Specification 3A, 3AA, or 3AL cylinders may not exceed 57 kg (125 lb) 

water capacity (nominal). 

(2) Specification 3AL cylinders may 

only be offered for transportation or 

transported by highway and rail. 

(b) Packagings must conform to the 

requirements of §173.40. 

(c) For cylinders used for phosgene: 

(1) The filling density may not exceed 

125 percent; 

(2) A cylinder may not contain more 

than 68 kg (150 lb) of phosgene; and 

(3) Each cylinder containing phosgene must be tested for leakage before 

it is offered for transportation or 

transported and must show no leakage. 

The leakage test must consist of immersing the cylinder and valve, without the protective cap attached, in a 

bath of water at a temperature of approximately 66 °C (150 °F) for at least 30 

minutes, during which time frequent 

examinations must be made to note 

any escape of gas. The valve of the cylinder may not be loosened after this 

534

§ 173.193 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

test. Suitable safeguards must be provided to protect personnel and facilities should failure occur during the 

test. As an alternative, each cylinder 

containing phosgene may be tested for 

leakage by a method approved in writing by the Associate Administrator. 

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 71 

FR 33880, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.193 Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide or methyl chloride mixtures, 

etc. 

(a) Bromoacetone must be packaged 

as follows in wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D 

or 4F) with inner glass receptacles or 

tubes in hermetically sealed metal receptacles in corrugated fiberboard cartons. Bottles may not contain over 500 

g (17.6 ounces) of liquid each and must 

be cushioned in cans with at least 12.7 

mm (0.5 inch) of absorbent material. 

Total amount of liquid in the outer box 

must not exceed 11 kg (24 pounds). 

Packagings must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. 

(b) Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, 

chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixtures, chloropicrin and methyl chloride 

mixtures, and chloropicrin mixtures 

charged with non-flammable, non-liquefied compressed gas must be packed 

in Specification 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3C, 3E, 4A, 

4B, 4BA, 4BW, or 4C cylinders having 

not over 113 kg (250 pounds) water capacity (nominal). This capacity does 

not apply to shipments of methyl bromide.

(c) Methyl bromide mixtures containing up to 2% chloropicrin must be 

packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes with 

inside metal cans containing not over 

one pound each, or inside metal cans 

with a minimum wall thickness of 0.007 

inch containing not over 13⁄4 pounds

each. The one-pound can must be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 130 psig without leakage or permanent distortion. Vapor pressure of 

the contents must not exceed 130 psig 

at 55 °C (130 °F). The 13⁄4–pound can 

must be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 140 psig without 

leakage or permanent distortion. 

Vapor pressure of the contents must 

not exceed 140 psig at 55 °C (130 °F).

Cans must not be liquid full at 130 °F.

Cans must be constructed of tinplate or 

lined with suitable material and must 

have concave or pressure ends. 

(d) Cylinders, except those containing methyl bromide, must conform 

to §173.40 of this part. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45463, Oct. 1, 1992] 

§ 173.194 Gas identification sets. 

Gas identification sets containing 

poisonous material must be packaged 

in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows: 

(a) In glass inner receptacles, hermetically sealed, of not over 40 mL (1.4 

fluid ounces) each. Each glass inner receptacle must in turn be placed in a 

sealed fiberboard receptacle, cushioned 

with absorbent material. Not more 

than 12 fiberboard receptacles must in 

turn be placed in a 4G fiberboard box. 

No more than four boxes, well-cushioned, may in turn be placed in a steel 

cylinder. The cylinder must have a 

wall thickness of at least 3.7 mm (0.146 

inch) and must have a hermetically 

sealed steel closure. 

(b) When the poisonous material is 

absorbed in a medium such as activated charcoal or silical gel, gas identification sets may be shipped as follows: 

(1) If the poisonous material does not 

exceed 5 mL (0.2 fluid ounce) if a liquid 

or 5 g (0.2 ounce) if a solid, it may be 

packed in glass inner receptacles of not 

over 120 mL (4.1 fluid ounces) each. 

Each glass receptacle, cushioned with 

absorbent material must be packed in a 

hermetically sealed metal can of not 

less than 0.30 mm (0.012 inch) wall 

thickness. Metal cans, surrounded on 

all sides by at least 25 mm (1 inch) of 

dry sawdust, must be packed in 4C1, 

4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes. Not more 

than 100 mL (3.4 fluid ounces) or 100 g 

(3.5 ounces) of poisonous materials may 

be packed in one outer wooden box. 

(2) If the poisonous material does not 

exceed 5 mL (0.2 fluid ounce) if a liquid 

or 20 g (0.7 ounce) if a solid, it may be 

packed in glass inner receptacles with 

screw-top closures of not less than 60 

mL (2 ounces), hermetically sealed. 

Twelve bottles containing poisonous 

535

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.196 

material, not to exceed 100 mL (3.4 

ounces) or 100 g (3.5 ounces), or both, 

may be placed in a plastic carrying 

case, each glass receptacle surrounded 

by absorbent cushioning and each separated from the other by sponge rubber 

partitions. The plastic carrying case 

must be placed in a tightly fitting fiberboard box which in turn must be 

placed in a tightly fitting 4C1, 4C2, 4D 

or 4F wooden box. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 66 FR 45183, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001] 

§ 173.195 Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, 

aqueous solution). 

(a) Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, 

stabilized, must be packed in specification cylinders or UN pressure receptacles as follows: 

(1) As prescribed in §173.192; 

(2) Specification 3A480, 3A480X, 

3AA480, or 3A1800 metal cylinders of 

not over 126 kg (278 pounds) water capacity (nominal); 

(3) Shipments in 3AL cylinders are 

authorized only when transported by 

highway and rail; or 

(4) UN cylinders, as specified in part 

178, with a minimum test pressure of 

100 bar and a maximum filling ratio of 

0.55. The use of UN tubes and MEGCs is 

not authorized. 

(b) Cylinders may not be charged 

with more than 0.27 kg (0.6 pound) of 

liquid per 0.45 kg (1 pound) water capacity of cylinder. Each filled cylinder 

must be tested for leakage before being 

offered for transportation or transported and must show absolutely no 

leakage; this test must consist of passing a piece of Guignard’s sodium picrate paper over the closure of the cylinder, without the protection cap attached, to detect any escape of hydrogen cyanide from the cylinder. Other 

equally efficient test methods may be 

used in place of sodium picrate paper. 

(c) Packagings for hydrogen cyanide 

must conform to §173.40. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 71 FR 

33880, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.196 Category A infectious substances. 

(a) Category A infectious substances 

packaging. A packaging for a Division 

6.2 material that is a Category A infectious substance must meet the test 

standards of §178.609 of this subchapter 

and must be marked in conformance 

with §178.503(f) of this subchapter. A 

packaging for a Category A infectious 

substance is a triple packaging consisting of the following components: 

(1) A leakproof primary receptacle. 

(2) A leakproof secondary packaging. 

If multiple fragile primary receptacles 

are placed in a single secondary packaging, they must be either wrapped individually or separated to prevent contact between them. 

(3) A rigid outer packaging of adequate strength for its capacity, mass 

and intended use. The outer packaging 

must measure not less than 100 mm (3.9 

inches) at its smallest overall external 

dimension.

(4) For a liquid infectious substance, 

an absorbent material placed between 

the primary receptacle and the secondary packaging. The absorbent material must be sufficient to absorb the 

entire contents of all primary receptacles.

(5) An itemized list of contents enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging. 

(6) The primary receptacle or secondary packaging used for infectious 

substances must be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal 

pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (0.95 bar, 14 

psi).

(7) The primary receptacle or secondary packaging used for infectious 

substances must be capable of withstanding without leakage temperatures 

in the range of ¥40 °C to +55 °C (¥40 °F

to +131 °F).

(b) Additional requirements for packaging Category A infectious substances. 

Category A infectious substances must 

be packaged according to the following 

requirements, depending on the physical state and other characteristics of 

the material. 

(1) Infectious substances shipped at ambient temperatures or higher. Primary receptacles must be made of glass, metal, 

or plastic. Positive means of ensuring a 

leakproof seal must be provided, such 

as heat seal, skirted stopper, or metal 

crimp seal. If screw caps are used, they 

must be secured by positive means, 

536

§ 173.197 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

such as with adhesive tape, paraffin 

sealing tape, or manufactured locking 

closure. Lyophilized substances may 

also be transported in primary receptacles that are flame-sealed with glass 

ampoules or rubber-stoppered glass 

vials fitted with metal seals. 

(2) Infectious substances shipped refrigerated or frozen (ice, pre-frozen packs, 

dry ice). Ice, dry ice, or other refrigerant must be placed around the secondary packagings or in an overpack 

with one or more complete packages 

marked in accordance with §178.503 of 

this subchapter. Interior supports must 

be provided to secure the secondary 

packagings in the original position 

after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. 

If ice is used, the outer packaging or 

overpack must be leakproof. If dry ice 

is used, the outer packaging or overpack must permit the release of carbon 

dioxide gas and otherwise meet the 

provisions in §173.217. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging 

must maintain their integrity at the 

temperature of the refrigerant used, as 

well as the temperatures and pressures 

of transport by aircraft to which they 

could be subjected if refrigeration were 

lost.

(3) Infectious substances shipped in liquid nitrogen. The primary receptacle 

and the secondary packaging must 

maintain their integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen as well 

as the temperatures and pressures of 

transport by aircraft to which they 

could be subjected if refrigeration were 

lost. Refrigerated liquid nitrogen packagings must be metal vacuum insulated vessels or flasks vented to the atmosphere to prevent any increase in 

pressure within the packaging. The use 

of safety relief valves, check valves, 

frangible discs, or similar devices in 

the vent lines is prohibited. Fill and 

discharge openings must be protected 

against the entry of foreign materials 

that might cause an increase in the internal pressure. The package orientation markings specified in §172.312(a) of 

this subchapter must be marked on the 

packaging. The packaging must be designed to prevent the release of any refrigerated liquid nitrogen irrespective 

of the packaging orientation. 

(c) Live animals may not be used to 

transport infectious substances unless 

such substances cannot be sent by any 

other means. An animal containing or 

contaminated with an infectious substance must be transported under 

terms and conditions approved by the 

Associate Administrator for Hazardous 

Materials Safety. 

(d) Body parts, organs or whole bodies meeting the definition of Division 

6.2 material must be packaged as follows:

(1) In Division 6.2 packaging, as specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 

section; or 

(2) In packaging meeting the requirements of §173.197. 

[67 FR 53140, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 71 

FR 32260, June 2, 2006; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 

2009]

§ 173.197 Regulated medical waste. 

(a) General provisions. Non-bulk packagings, Large Packagings, and nonspecification bulk outer packagings 

used for the transportation of regulated medical waste or clinical waste 

or (bio) medical waste must be rigid 

containers meeting the provisions of 

subpart B of this part. 

(b) Non-bulk packagings. Except as 

provided in §173.134(c) of this subpart, 

non-bulk packagings for regulated 

medical waste or clinical waste or (bio) 

medical waste must be UN standard 

packagings conforming to the requirements of Part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group II performance 

level. A non-bulk packaging used as a 

sharps container must be puncture-resistant for sharps and sharps with residual fluid as demonstrated by conducting the performance tests in Part 

178, subpart M, of this subchapter on 

packagings containing materials representative of the sharps and fluids 

(such as sterile sharps) intended to be 

transported in the packagings. Sharps 

containers must be securely closed to 

prevent leaks or punctures in conformance with the instructions provided by 

the packaging manufacturer in accordance with §178.2(c) of this subchapter. 

(c) Large Packagings. 

(c) Large Packagings. Large Packagings constructed, tested, and marked 

in accordance with the requirements 

specified in subparts P and Q of part 

178 of this subchapter and conforming 

537

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.197 

to other requirements of this paragraph (c) may be used for the transportation of regulated medical waste, provided the waste is contained in inner 

packagings conforming to the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section. 

* * * Each Large Packaging design 

must be capable of meeting the vibration test specified in §178.819 of this 

subchapter. Each Large Packaging is 

subject to the periodic design requalification requirements for IBCs in 

§178.801(e) of this subchapter, and to 

the proof of compliance requirements 

of §178.801(j) and record retention requirements of §178.801(l) of this subchapter. Inner packagings used for liquids must be rigid. 

(1) Authorized packagings. Only the 

following Large Packagings are authorized for the transportation of liquid or solid regulated medical waste: 

(i) Metal: 50A, 50B, or 50N. 

(ii) Rigid plastic: 50H. 

(2) Additional requirements. Each

Large Packaging used to transport liquid regulated medical waste must contain absorbent material in sufficient 

quantity and appropriate location to 

absorb the entire amount of liquid 

present in the event of an unintentional release of contents. Each Large 

Packaging design intended for the 

transportation of sharps containers 

must be puncture resistant and capable 

of retaining liquids. The design must 

also be tested and certified as meeting 

the performance tests specified for intermediate bulk containers intended 

for the transportation of liquids in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter. 

(d) Non-specification bulk packaging. A

wheeled cart (Cart) or bulk outer packaging (BOP) is authorized as an outer 

packaging for the transportation of 

regulated medical waste in accordance 

with the provisions of this paragraph 

(d).

(1) General requirements. The following requirements apply to the 

transportation of regulated medical 

waste in Carts or BOPs: 

(i) Regulated medical waste in each 

Cart or BOP must be contained in nonbulk inner packagings conforming to 

paragraph (e) of this section. 

(ii) Each Cart or BOP must have 

smooth, non-porous interior surfaces 

free of cracks, crevices, and other defects that could damage plastic film 

inner packagings or impede disinfection operations. 

(iii) Except as otherwise provided in 

this paragraph (d), each Cart or BOP 

must be used exclusively for the transportation of regulated medical waste. 

Prior to reuse, each Cart or BOP must 

be disinfected by any means effective 

for neutralizing the infectious substance the packaging previously contained.

(iv) Untreated concentrated stock 

cultures of infectious substances containing Category A materials may not 

be transported in a Cart or BOP. 

(v) Division 6.1 toxic waste or Class 7 

radioactive waste, with the exception 

of chemotherapeutic waste, may not be 

transported in a Cart or BOP. 

(vi) Division 6.1 or Class 7 

chemotherapeutic waste; untreated 

concentrated stock cultures of infectious substances containing Category B 

infectious substances; unabsorbed liquids; and sharps containers may be 

transported in a Cart or BOP only if 

packaged in rigid non-bulk packagings 

conforming to paragraph (a) of this section.

(2) Wheeled cart (Cart). A Cart is authorized as an outer packaging for the 

transportation of regulated medical 

waste if it conforms to the following 

requirements:

(i) Each Cart must consist of a solid, 

one-piece body with a nominal volume 

not exceeding 1,655 L (437 gallons). 

(ii) Each Cart must be constructed of 

metal, rigid plastic, or fiberglass fitted 

with a lid to prevent leakage during 

transport.

(iii) Each Cart must be capable of 

meeting the requirements of §178.810 

(drop test) at the Packing Group II performance level. 

(iv) Inner packagings must be placed 

into a Cart and restrained in such a 

manner as to minimize the risk of 

breakage.

(3) Bulk outer packaging (BOP). A BOP 

is authorized as an outer packaging for 

regulated medical waste if it conforms 

to the following requirements: 

(i) Each BOP must be constructed of 

metal or fiberglass and have a capacity 

of at least 3.5 cubic meters (123.6 cubic 

feet) and not more than 45 cubic meters 

(1,590 cubic feet). 

538

§ 173.197 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(ii) Each BOP must have bottom and 

side joints of fully welded or seamless 

construction and a rigid, weatherproof 

top to prevent the intrusion of water 

(e.g., rain or snow). 

(iii) Each opening in a BOP must be 

fitted with a closure to prevent the intrusion of water or the release of any 

liquid during all loading, unloading, 

and transportation operations. 

(iv) In the upright position, each BOP 

must be leakproof and able to contain 

a liquid quantity of at least 300 liters 

(79.2 gallons) with closures open. 

(v) Inner packagings must be placed 

in a BOP in such a manner as to minimize the risk of breakage. Rigid inner 

packagings may not be placed in the 

same BOP with plastic film bag inner 

packagings unless separated from each 

other by rigid barriers or dividers to 

prevent damage to the packagings 

caused by load shifting during normal 

conditions of transportation. 

(vi) Division 6.1 or Class 7 

chemotherapeutic waste, untreated 

concentrated stock cultures of infectious substances containing Category B 

infectious substances, unabsorbed liquids, and sharps may be transported in 

a BOP only if separated and secured as 

required in paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this 

section.

(e) Inner packagings authorized for 

Large Packagings, Carts, and BOPs. 

After September 30, 2003, inner packagings must be durably marked or 

tagged with the name and location 

(city and state) of the offeror, except 

when the entire contents of the Large 

Packaging, Cart, or BOP originates at 

a single location and is delivered to a 

single location. 

(1) Solids. A plastic film bag is authorized as an inner packaging for solid 

regulated medical waste transported in 

a Cart, Large Packaging, or BOP. 

Waste material containing absorbed 

liquid may be packaged as a solid in a 

plastic film bag if the bag contains sufficient absorbent material to absorb 

and retain all liquid during transportation.

(i) The film bag may not exceed a 

volume of 175 L (46 gallons). The film 

bag must be marked and certified by 

its manufacturer as having passed the 

tests prescribed for tear resistance in 

ASTM D 1922, ‘‘Standard Test Method 

for Propagation Tear Resistance of 

Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting by 

Pendulum Method’’ (IBR, §171.7 of this 

subchapter) and for impact resistance 

in ASTM D 1709, ‘‘Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic 

Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method’’ 

(IBR, §171.7 of this subchapter). The 

film bag must meet an impact resistance of 165 grams and a tearing resistance of 480 grams in both the parallel 

and perpendicular planes with respect 

to the length of the bag. 

(ii) The plastic film bag must be 

closed with a minimum of entrapped 

air to prevent leakage in transportation. The bag must be capable of 

being held in an inverted position with 

the closed end at the bottom for a period of 5 minutes without leakage. 

(iii) When used as an inner packaging 

for Carts or BOPs, a plastic film bag 

may not weigh more than 10 kg (22 lbs.) 

when filled. 

(2) Liquids. Liquid regulated medical 

waste or clinical waste or (bio) medical 

waste transported in a Large Packaging, Cart, or BOP must be packaged 

in a rigid inner packaging conforming 

to the provisions of subpart B of this 

part. conforming to the provisions of 

subpart B of this part. Liquid materials 

are not authorized for transportation 

in inner packagings having a capacity 

greater than 19 L (5 gallons). 

(3) Sharps. Sharps transported in a 

Large Packaging, Cart, or BOP must be 

packaged in a puncture-resistant inner 

packaging (sharps container). Each 

sharps container must be securely 

closed to prevent leaks or punctures in 

conformance with instructions provided by the packaging manufacturer. 

Each sharps container exceeding 76 L 

(20 gallons) in volume must be capable 

of passing the performance tests in 

Part 178, subpart M, of this subchapter 

at the Packing Group II performance 

level. A sharps container may be reused only if it conforms to the following criteria: 

(i) The sharps container is specifically approved and certified by the U.S. 

Food and Drug Administration as a 

medical device for reuse. 

(ii) The sharps container must be permanently marked for reuse. 

(iii) The sharps container must be 

disinfected prior to reuse by any means 

539

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.199 

effective for the infectious substance 

the container previously contained. 

(iv) The sharps container must have 

a capacity greater than 7.57 L (2 gallons) and not greater than 151.42 L (40 

gallons) in volume. 

[67 FR 53140, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 68 

FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75744, Dec. 31, 

2003; 71 FR 32261, June 2, 2006; 71 FR 78632, 

Dec. 29, 2006; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010] 

§ 173.198 Nickel carbonyl. 

(a) Nickel carbonyl must be packed 

in specification steel or nickel cylinders as prescribed for any compressed 

gas except acetylene. A cylinder used 

exclusively for nickel carbonyl may be 

given a complete external visual inspection instead of the pressure test required by §180.205 of this subchapter. 

Visual inspection must be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–6 (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter). 

(b) Packagings for nickel carbonyl 

must conform to §173.40. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec 21, 1990, as 

amended at 67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 

75742, Dec. 31, 2003] 

§ 173.199 Category B infectious substances. 

(a) Category B infectious substances. 

Except as provided in this paragraph 

(a), Category B infectious substances 

are excepted from all other requirements of this subchapter when offered 

for transportation or transported in accordance with this section. Category B 

infectious substances offered for transportation or transported under the provisions of this section are subject to 

the incident reporting requirements in 

§§171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter 

and to the requirements in §175.75(b) of 

this subchapter concerning cargo location. Except as provided in paragraph 

(a)(9) of this section, a Category B infectious substance meeting the definition of a hazard class other than Division 6.2 must be offered for transportation or transported in accordance 

with applicable requirements of this 

subchapter.

(1) A Category B infectious substance 

must be packaged in a triple packaging 

consisting of a primary receptacle, a 

secondary packaging, and a rigid outer 

packaging.

(2) Primary receptacles must be 

packed in secondary packaging in such 

a way that, under normal conditions of 

transport, they cannot break, be punctured, or leak their contents into the 

secondary packaging. 

(3) Secondary packagings must be secured in rigid outer packagings with 

suitable cushioning material such that 

any leakage of the contents will not 

impair the protective properties of the 

cushioning material or the outer packaging.

(4) The completed package must be 

designed, constructed, maintained, 

filled, its contents limited, and closed 

so that under conditions normally encountered in transportation, including 

removal from a pallet or overpack for 

subsequent handling, there will be no 

release of hazardous material into the 

environment. Package effectiveness 

must not be substantially reduced for 

minimum and maximum temperatures, 

changes in humidity and pressure, and 

shocks, loadings and vibrations normally encountered during transportation. The packaging must be capable 

of successfully passing the drop tests in 

§§178.609(d) and (h) of this subchapter 

at a drop height of at least 1.2 meters 

(3.9 feet). Following the drop tests, 

there must be no leakage from the primary receptacle, which must remain 

protected by absorbent material, when 

required, in the secondary packaging. 

At least one surface of the outer packaging must have a minimum dimension 

of 100 mm by 100 mm (3.9 inches). 

(5) The following mark must be displayed on the outer packaging on a 

background of contrasting color. The 

width of the line must be at least 2 mm 

(0.08 inches) and the letters and numbers must be at least 6 mm (0.24 inches) 

high. The size of the mark must be 

such that no side of the diamond is less 

than 50 mm (1.97 inches) in length. The 

proper shipping name ‘‘Biological substances, Category B’’ must be marked 

on the outer packaging adjacent to the 

diamond-shaped mark in letters that 

are at least 6 mm (0.24 inches) high. 

540

§ 173.199 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(6) When packages are placed in an 

overpack, the package markings required by this section must be either 

clearly visible or reproduced on the 

outside of the overpack. 

(7) The name and telephone number 

of a person who is either knowledgeable about the material being shipped 

and has comprehensive emergency response and incident mitigation information for the material, or has immediate access to a person who possesses 

such knowledge and information, must 

be included on a written document 

(such as an air waybill or bill of lading) 

or on the outer packaging. 

(8) For transportation by aircraft, 

each package, overpack, pallet, or unit 

load device containing a Category B infectious substance must be inspected 

for leakage when it is unloaded from 

the aircraft. If evidence of leakage is 

found, the cargo compartment in which 

the package, overpack, pallet, or unit 

load device was transported must be 

disinfected. Disinfection may be by any 

means that will make the material released ineffective at transmitting disease.

(9) A packaging containing inner 

packagings of Category B infectious 

substances may not contain other hazardous materials except— 

(i) Refrigerants, such as dry ice or 

liquid nitrogen, as authorized under 

paragraph (d) of this section; 

(ii) Anticoagulants used to stabilize 

blood or plasma; or 

(iii) Small quantities of Class 3, Class 

8, Class 9, or other materials in Packing Groups II and III used to stabilize 

or prevent degradation of the sample, 

provided the quantity of such materials does not exceed 30 mL (1 ounce) or 

30 g (1 ounce) in each inner packaging. 

Such preservatives are not subject to 

the requirements of this subchapter. 

(10) Clear instructions on filling and 

closing a packaging used to transport a 

Category B infectious substance must 

be provided by the packaging manufacturer and subsequent distributors to 

the consignor or person who prepares 

the package to enable the package to 

be correctly prepared for transport. A 

copy or electronic image of these instructions must be retained by the 

manufacturer and subsequent distributors for at least one year from the date 

of issuance, and made available for inspection by a Federal or state government representative upon request. 

Packagings must be filled and closed in 

accordance with the information provided by the packaging manufacturer 

or subsequent distributor. 

(b) Liquid Category B infectious substances. Liquid Category B infectious 

substances must be packaged in conformance with the following provisions:

(1) The primary receptacle must be 

leakproof.

(2) Absorbent material must be 

placed between the primary receptacle 

and secondary packaging. If several 

fragile primary receptacles are placed 

in a single secondary packaging, they 

must be either individually wrapped or 

separated to prevent contact between 

them. The absorbent material must be 

of sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacles and not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or the 

outer packaging. 

(3) The secondary packaging must be 

leakproof.

(4) For shipments by aircraft, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging must be capable of withstanding 

without leakage an internal pressure 

producing a pressure differential of not 

less than 95 kPa (0.95 bar, 14 psi). 

(5) For shipments by aircraft, the 

maximum quantity contained in each 

primary receptacle, including any material used to stabilize or prevent degradation of the sample, may not exceed 

1 L (34 ounces), and the maximum 


ER02JN06.012</GPH>
541

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.201 

quantity contained in each outer packaging, including any material used to 

stabilize or prevent degradation of the 

samples, may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon). 

The outer packaging limitation does 

not include ice, dry ice, or liquid nitrogen when used to maintain the integrity of the material. 

(c) Solid Category B infectious substances. Solid Category B infectious 

substances must be packaged in a triple packaging, consisting of a primary 

receptacle, secondary packaging, and 

outer packaging, conforming to the following provisions: 

(1) The primary receptacle must be 

siftproof.

(2) If several fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary 

packaging, they must be either individually wrapped or separated to prevent 

contact between them. 

(3) The secondary packaging must be 

siftproof.

(4) If residual liquid may be present 

in the primary receptacle during transportation, then the material must be 

transported in accordance with requirements in paragraph (b) of this section. A solid material that may become 

liquid during transportation must be 

transported in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section. 

(5) Except for packages containing 

body parts, organs, or whole bodies, for 

shipment by aircraft, the outer packaging may not contain more than 4 kg 

(8.8 pounds), including any material 

used to stabilize or prevent degradation of the samples. The outer packaging limitation does not include ice, 

dry ice, or liquid nitrogen when used to 

maintain the integrity of the material. 

(d) Refrigerated or frozen specimens 

(ice, dry ice, and liquid nitrogen). In addition to complying with the requirements in this paragraph (d), dry ice and 

liquid nitrogen must be offered for 

transportation or transported in accordance with the applicable requirements of this subchapter. 

(1) Ice or dry ice must be placed outside the secondary packaging or in an 

overpack. Interior supports must be 

provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position after the 

ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is 

used, the outside packaging must be 

leakproof or must have a leakproof 

liner. If dry ice is used, the outside 

packaging must permit the release of 

carbon dioxide gas and otherwise meet 

the provisions in §173.217. The primary 

receptacle and secondary packaging 

must maintain their integrity at the 

temperature of the refrigerant used, as 

well as the temperatures and pressures 

of transport by aircraft they could be 

subjected to if refrigeration were lost, 

and sufficient absorbent material must 

be provided to absorb all liquid, including melted ice. 

(2) The package is marked ‘‘Carbon 

dioxide, solid’’ or ‘‘Dry ice’’ and an indication that the material being refrigerated is used for diagnostic treatment 

purposes (e.g., frozen medical specimens).

(e) Training. Each person who offers 

or transports a Category B infectious 

substance under the provisions of this 

section must know about the requirements of this section. 

[67 FR 53142, Aug. 14, 2002, as amended at 71 

FR 32261, June 2, 2006; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 

2007]

§ 173.201 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing 

Group I. 

(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, 

only non-bulk packagings prescribed in 

this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the 

requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized: 

Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

542

§ 173.202 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Expanded plastic box: 4H1 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Inner packagings: 

Glass or earthenware receptacles 

Plastic receptacles 

Metal receptacles 

Glass ampoules 

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single 

packagings are authorized: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel, or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber 

or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 

6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PG1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 

6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 

Cylinders, specification or UN standard, as 

prescribed for any compressed gas, except 

3HT and those prescribed for acetylene. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 

29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 

1997; 71 FR 33880, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.202 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing 

Group II. 

(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, 

only non-bulk packagings prescribed in 

this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the 

requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I or II 

performance level (unless otherwise excepted), and to the particular requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized: 

Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Wooden barrel: 2C2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Expanded plastic box: 4H1 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Inner packagings: 

Glass or earthenware receptacles 

Plastic receptacles 

Metal receptacles 

Glass ampoules 

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single 

packagings are authorized: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Fiber drum: 1G (with liner) 

Wooden barrel: 2C1 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber 

or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 

6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PG1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 

6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 

Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood 

drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PDl or 6PD2 

Cylinders, specification, as prescribed for 

any compressed gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt 

173–241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 

1, 1997] 

543

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.206 

§ 173.203 Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing 

Group III. 

(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, 

only non-bulk packagings prescribed in 

this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the 

requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I, II or 

III performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of 

column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized: 

Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Wooden barrel: 2C2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Expanded plastic box: 4H1 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Inner packagings: 

Glass or earthenware receptacles 

Plastic receptacles 

Metal receptacles 

Glass ampoules 

(c) The following single packagings 

are authorized: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Fiber drum: 1G (with liner) 

Wooden barrel: 2C1 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber 

or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 

6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, or 6PG1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 

6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 

Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood 

drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PD1 or 6PD2 

Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed 

gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997] 

§ 173.204 Non-bulk, non-specification 

packagings for certain hazardous 

materials. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a liquid or solid hazardous material be packaged under this 

section, any appropriate non-bulk 

packaging which conforms to the general packaging requirements of subpart 

B of part 173 may be used for its transportation. Packagings need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of 

this subchapter. 

§ 173.205 Specification cylinders for 

liquid hazardous materials. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material 

must be packaged under this section, 

the use of any specification or UN cylinder, except those specified for acetylene, is authorized. Cylinders used for 

toxic materials in Division 6.1 or 2.3 

must conform to the requirements of 

§173.40. 

[71 FR 33881, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.206 Packaging requirements for 

chlorosilanes. 

(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only nonbulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform 

to the general packaging requirements 

of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group I or II performance 

level (unless otherwise excepted), and 

to the particular requirements of the 

special provisions of Column (7) of the 

§172.101 Table. 

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized: 

544

§ 173.211 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A2 

Plastic drum: 1H2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Steel box: 4A 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Expanded plastic box: 4H1 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Inner packagings: 

Glass or Steel receptacle 

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single 

packagings are authorized: 

Steel drum: 1A1 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 

Plastic receptacle in steel drum: 

6HA1

Cylinders (for liquids in PG I), specification or UN standard, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except Specification 3HT and those prescribed for acetylene 

Cylinders (for liquids in PG II), specification, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except Specification 8 and 

3HT cylinders. 

[74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 

FR 72, Jan. 4, 2010] 

§ 173.211 Non-bulk packagings for 

solid hazardous materials in Packing Group I. 

(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, 

only non-bulk packagings prescribed in 

this section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform 

to the general packaging requirements 

of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group I performance level, 

and to the requirements of the special 

provisions of column 7 of the §172.101 

table.

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized: 

Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Wooden barrel: 2C2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Inner packagings: 

Glass or earthenware receptacles 

Plastic receptacles 

Metal receptacles 

Glass ampoules 

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single 

packagings are authorized: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box with liner: 4A 

Aluminum box with liner: 4B 

Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 

6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, 

6PD1 or 6PG1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 

6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or 

solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 

Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed 

gas, except for Specification 8 and 3HT 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, 

67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, 

May 6, 1997; 69 FR 76157, Dec. 20, 2004] 

§ 173.212 Non-bulk packagings for 

solid hazardous materials in Packing Group II. 

(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, 

only non-bulk packagings prescribed in 

this section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform 

to the general packaging requirements 

of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

545

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.213 

the Packing Group I or II performance 

level, and to the requirements of the 

special provisions of column 7 of the 

§172.101 table. 

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized: 

Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Wooden barrel: 2C2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Inner packagings: 

Glass or earthenware receptacles 

Plastic receptacles 

Metal receptacles 

Glass ampoules 

(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single 

packagings are authorized: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Steel box with liner: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Aluminum box with liner: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 

Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Expanded plastic box: 4H1 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3 

Bag, plastic film: 5H4 

Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3 

Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 

6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wood, 

plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 

6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, 

6PD1 or 6PG1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 

6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or 

solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 

Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed 

gas, except for Specification 8 and 3HT 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, 

Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, May 

6, 1997; 69 FR 76157, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, 

June 14, 2005] 

§ 173.213 Non-bulk packagings for 

solid hazardous materials in Packing Group III. 

(a) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, 

only non-bulk packagings prescribed in 

this section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform 

to the general packaging requirements 

of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group I, II or III performance level, and to the requirements of 

the special provisions of column 7 of 

the §172.101 table. 

(b) The following combination packagings are authorized: 

Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Wooden barrel: 2C2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Inner packagings: 

Glass or earthenware receptacles 

Plastic receptacles 

Metal receptacles 

Glass ampoules 

546

§ 173.214 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(c) The following single packagings 

are authorized: 

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 

1N1 or 1N2 

Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2 

Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2 

Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2 

Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2 

Steel box: 4A 

Steel box with liner: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Aluminum box with liner: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 

Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Expanded plastic box: 4H1 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3 

Bag, plastic film: 5H4 

Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3 

Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 

6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1 

Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wood, 

plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 

6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, 

6PD1 or 6PG1 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 

6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2 

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or 

solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2 

Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed 

gas, except for Specification 8 and 3HT 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, 

Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, May 

6, 1997; 69 FR 76158, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34398, 

June 14, 2005] 

§ 173.214 Packagings which require 

approval by the Associate Administrator. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, packagings and method of shipment must 

be approved by the Associate Administrator prior to the first shipment. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001] 

§ 173.216 Asbestos, blue, brown or 

white. 

(a) Asbestos, blue, brown or white, 

includes each of the following hydrated 

mineral silicates: chrysolite, crocidolite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, 

tremolite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, 

and every product containing any of 

these materials. 

(b) [Reserved] 

(c) Packagings for asbestos must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but 

need not conform to the requirements 

of part 178 of this subchapter. Asbestos 

must be offered for transportation and 

transported in— 

(1) Rigid, leaktight packagings, such 

as metal, plastic or fiber drums, portable tanks, hopper-type rail cars, or 

hopper-type motor vehicles; 

(2) Bags or other non-rigid packagings in closed freight containers, 

motor vehicles, or rail cars that are 

loaded by and for the exclusive use of 

the consignor and unloaded by the consignee;

(3) Bags or other non-rigid packagings which are dust and sift proof 

must be placed in rigid outer packagings or closed freight containers. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 

45034, July 31, 2003; 71 CFR 78632, Dec. 29, 

2006]

§ 173.217 Carbon dioxide, solid (dry 

ice). 

(a) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), 

when offered for transportation or 

transported by aircraft or water, must 

be packed in packagings designed and 

constructed to permit the release of 

carbon dioxide gas to prevent a buildup 

of pressure that could rupture the 

packagings. Packagings must conform 

to the general packaging requirements 

of subpart B of this part but need not 

conform to the requirements of part 178 

of this subchapter. 

(b) For transportation by vessel: 

(1) Each transport vehicle and freight 

container containing solid carbon dioxide must be conspicuously marked on 

two sides ‘‘WARNING CO2 SOLID (DRY 

ICE).’’

547

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.219 

(2) Other packagings containing solid 

carbon dioxide must be marked ‘‘CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID—DO NOT STOW 

BELOW DECKS.’’ 

(c) For transportation by aircraft: 

(1) In addition to the applicable 

marking requirements in subpart D of 

part 172, the net mass of the carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) must be marked 

on the outside of the package. This 

provision also applies to unit load devices (ULDs) when the ULD contains 

dry ice and is considered the packaging.

(2) The shipper must make arrangements with the operator for each shipment.

(3) The quantity limits per package 

shown in Columns (9A) and (9B) of the 

Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 

are not applicable to dry ice being used 

as a refrigerant for other than hazardous materials loaded in a unit load 

device or other type of pallet. In such 

a case, the unit load device or other 

type of pallet must allow the venting 

of the carbon dioxide gas to prevent a 

dangerous build up of pressure, and be 

identified to the operator. 

(4) Dry ice is excepted from the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of 

part 172 of this subchapter provided alternative written documentation is 

supplied containing the following information: proper shipping name (Dry 

ice or Carbon dioxide, solid), class 9, 

UN number 1845, the number of packages, and the net quantity of dry ice in 

each package. The information must be 

included with the description of the 

materials.

(5) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), in 

quantities not exceeding 2.5 kg (5.5 

pounds) per package and used as a refrigerant for the contents of the package is excepted from all other requirements of this subchapter if the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section 

are complied with and the package is 

marked ‘‘Carbon dioxide, solid’’ or 

‘‘Dry ice’’, is marked with the name of 

the contents being cooled, and is 

marked with the net weight of the dry 

ice or an indication that the net weight 

is 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds) or less. 

(d) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), 

when used to refrigerate materials 

being shipped for diagnostic or treatment purposes (e.g., frozen medical 

specimens), is excepted from the shipping paper and certification requirements of this subchapter if the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (c)(2) of 

this section are met and the package is 

marked ‘‘Carbon dioxide, solid’’ or 

‘‘Dry ice’’ and is marked with an indication that the material being refrigerated is being transported for diagnostic or treatment purposes. 

[73 FR 4718, Jan. 28, 2008] 

§ 173.218 Fish meal or fish scrap. 

(a) Except as provided in Column (7) 

of the HMT in §172.101 of this subchapter, fish meal or fish scrap, containing at least 6%, but not more than 

12% water, is authorized for transportation by vessel only when packaged as 

follows:

(1) Burlap (jute) bag; 

(2) Multi-wall paper bag; 

(3) Polyethylene-lined burlap or 

paper bag; 

(4) Cargo tank; 

(5) Portable tank; 

(6) Rail car; or 

(7) Freight container. 

(b) [Reserved] 

(c) When fish scrap or fish meal is offered for transportation by vessel in 

bulk in freight containers, the fish 

meal must contain at least 100 ppm of 

anti-oxident (ethoxyquin) at the time 

of shipment. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 68 FR 45034, July 31, 2003] 

§ 173.219 Life-saving appliances. 

(a) A life-saving appliance, self-inflating or non-self-inflating, containing 

small quantities of hazardous materials that are required as part of the 

life-saving appliance must conform to 

the requirements of this section. Packagings must conform to the general 

packaging requirements of subpart B of 

this part but need not conform to the 

requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. The appliances must be 

packed, so that they cannot be accidentally activated and, except for life 

vests, the hazardous materials must be 

in inner packagings packed so as to 

prevent shifting within the outer packaging. The hazardous materials must 

be an integral part of the appliance and 

in quantities that do not exceed those 

548

§ 173.220 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

appropriate for the actual appliance 

when in use. 

(b) Life saving appliances may contain:

(1) Division 2.2 compressed gases, including oxygen. However, oxygen generators are not permitted; 

(2) Signal devices (Class 1), which 

may include smoke and illumination 

signal flares; 

(3) Electric storage batteries and 

lithium batteries (Life saving appliances containing lithium batteries 

must be transported in accordance 

with §173.185, and Special Provisions 

188, 189, A101, A103 and A104 as applicable.);

(4) First aid or repair kits conforming to the applicable material and 

quantity limitations of §173.161 of this 

subchapter;

(5) Strike-anywhere matches; 

(6) For self-inflating life saving appliances only, cartridges power device of 

Division 1.4S, for purposes of the selfinflating mechanism provided that the 

quantity of explosives per appliance 

does not exceed 3.2 g; or 

(7) Limited quantities of other hazardous materials. 

(c) Hazardous materials in life saving 

appliances must be packaged as follows:

(1) Division 2.2 compressed gases 

must be packaged in cylinders in accordance with the requirements of this 

subchapter;

(2) Signal devices (Class 1) must be in 

packagings that prevent them from 

being inadvertently activated; 

(3) Strike-anywhere matches must be 

cushioned to prevent movement or friction in a metal or composition receptacle with a screw-type closure in a 

manner that prevents them from being 

inadvertently activated; 

(4) Limited quantities of other hazardous materials must be packaged in 

accordance with the requirements of 

this subchapter; and 

(5) For other than transportation by 

aircraft, life saving appliances containing no hazardous materials other 

than carbon dioxide cylinders with a 

capacity not exceeding 100 cm3 are not 

subject to the provisions of this subchapter provided they are overpacked 

in rigid outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 40 kg. 

[69 FR 76158, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 72 

FR 44950, Aug. 9, 2007; 73 FR 57006, Oct. 1, 

2008]

§ 173.220 Internal combustion engines, 

self-propelled vehicles, mechanical 

equipment containing internal combustion engines, and battery powered vehicles or equipment. 

(a) Applicability. An internal combustion engine, self-propelled vehicle, 

mechanized equipment containing an 

internal combustion engine, or a battery powered vehicle or equipment is 

subject to the requirements of this subchapter when transported as cargo on a 

transport vehicle, vessel, or aircraft 

if—

(1) The engine or fuel tank contains a 

liquid or gaseous fuel. An engine may 

be considered as not containing fuel 

when the fuel tank, engine components, and fuel lines have been completely drained, sufficiently cleaned of 

residue, and purged of vapors to remove any potential hazard and the engine when held in any orientation will 

not release any liquid fuel; 

(2) It is equipped with a wet battery 

(including a non-spillable battery), a 

sodium battery or lithium battery; or 

(3) Except as provided in paragraph 

(e)(1) of this section, it contains other 

hazardous materials subject to the requirements of this subchapter. 

(b) Requirements. Unless otherwise excepted in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, vehicles, engines and equipment 

are subject to the following requirements:

(1) Flammable liquid fuel. A fuel tank 

containing a flammable liquid fuel 

must be drained and securely closed, 

except that up to 500 mL (17 ounces) of 

residual fuel may remain in the tank, 

engine components, or fuel lines provided they are securely closed to prevent leakage of fuel during transportation. Self-propelled vehicles containing diesel fuel are excepted from 

the requirement to drain the fuel 

tanks, provided that sufficient ullage 

space has been left inside the tank to 

allow fuel expansion without leakage, 

and the tank caps are securely closed. 

(2) Flammable liquefied or compressed 

gas fuel. (i) For transportation by 

549

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.220 

motor vehicle, rail car or vessel, fuel 

tanks and fuel systems containing 

flammable liquefied or compressed gas 

fuel must be securely closed. For transportation by vessel, the requirements 

of §§176.78(k) and 176.905 of this subchapter apply. 

(ii) For transportation by aircraft: 

(A) Flammable gas-powered vehicles, 

machines, equipment or cylinders containing the flammable gas must be 

completely emptied of flammable gas. 

Lines from vessels to gas regulators, 

and gas regulators themselves, must 

also be drained of all traces of flammable gas. To ensure that these conditions are met, gas shut-off valves must 

be left open and connections of lines to 

gas regulators must be left disconnected upon delivery of the vehicle to 

the operator. Shut-off valves must be 

closed and lines reconnected at gas regulators before loading the vehicle 

aboard the aircraft; or alternatively 

(B) Flammable gas powered vehicles, 

machines or equipment, which have 

cylinders (fuel tanks) that are equipped 

with electrically operated valves, may 

be transported under the following conditions:

(1) The valves must be in the closed 

position and in the case of electrically 

operated valves, power to those valves 

must be disconnected; 

(2) After closing the valves, the vehicle, equipment or machinery must be 

operated until it stops from lack of fuel 

before being loaded aboard the aircraft; 

(3) In no part of the closed system 

shall the pressure exceed 5% of the 

maximum allowable working pressure 

of the system or 290 psig (2000 kPa), 

whichever is less; and 

(4) There must not be any residual 

liquefied gas in the system, including 

the fuel tank. 

(3) Truck bodies or trailers on flat 

cars—flammable liquid or gas powered. 

Truck bodies or trailers with automatic heating or refrigerating equipment of the flammable liquid type may 

be shipped with fuel tanks filled and 

equipment operating or inoperative, 

when used for the transportation of 

other freight and loaded on flat cars as 

part of a joint rail and highway movement, provided the equipment and fuel 

supply conform to the requirements of 

§177.834(l) of this subchapter. 

(4) Modal exceptions. Quantities of 

flammable liquid fuel greater than 500 

mL (17 ounces) may remain in self-propelled vehicles and mechanical equipment only under the following conditions:

(i) For transportation by motor vehicle or rail car, the fuel tanks must be 

securely closed. 

(ii) For transportation by vessel, the 

shipment must conform to §176.905 of 

this subchapter. 

(iii) For transportation by aircraft, 

when carried in aircraft designed or 

modified for vehicle ferry operations 

and when all of the following conditions are met: 

(A) Authorization for this type operation has been given by the appropriate 

authority in the government of the 

country in which the aircraft is registered;

(B) Each vehicle is secured in an upright position; 

(C) Each fuel tank is filled in a manner and only to a degree that will preclude spillage of fuel during loading, 

unloading, and transportation; and 

(D) Each area or compartment in 

which a self-propelled vehicle is being 

transported is suitably ventilated to 

prevent the accumulation of fuel vapors.

(c) Battery-powered or installed. Batteries must be securely installed, and 

wet batteries must be fastened in an 

upright position. Batteries must be 

protected against a dangerous evolution of heat, short circuits, and damage to terminals in conformance with 

§173.159(a) and leakage; or must be removed and packaged separately under 

§173.159. Battery-powered vehicles, machinery or equipment including battery-powered wheelchairs and mobility 

aids are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter except 

§173.21 when transported by rail, highway or vessel. 

(d) Lithium batteries. Except as provided in §172.102, Special Provision 

A101 of this subchapter, vehicles, engines and machinery powered by lithium metal batteries that are transported with these batteries installed 

550

§ 173.221 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

are forbidden aboard passenger-carrying aircraft. Lithium batteries contained in vehicles, engines or mechanical equipment must be securely fastened in the battery holder of the vehicle, engine or mechanical equipment 

and be protected in such a manner as 

to prevent damage and short circuits 

(e.g., by the use of non-conductive caps 

that cover the terminals entirely). 

Lithium batteries must be of a type 

that have successfully passed each test 

in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria 

as specified in §173.185, unless approved 

by the Associate Administrator. Equipment (other than vehicles, engines or 

mechanical equipment) containing 

lithium batteries, must be described as 

‘‘Lithium batteries contained in equipment’’ and transported in accordance 

with §173.185 and applicable special 

provisions.

(e) Other hazardous materials. (1)

Items containing hazardous materials, 

such as, fire extinguishers, compressed 

gas accumulators, safety devices and 

other hazardous materials which are 

integral components of the motor vehicle, engine or mechanical equipment 

and are necessary for the operation of 

the vehicle, engine or mechanical 

equipment, or for the safety of its operator or passengers must be securely installed in the motor vehicle, engine or 

mechanical equipment. Such items are 

not otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter. Equipment 

(other than vehicles, engines or mechanical equipment) containing lithium batteries must be described as 

‘‘Lithium batteries contained in equipment’’ and transported in accordance 

with §173.185 and applicable special 

provisions.

(2) Other hazardous materials must 

be packaged and transported in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.

(f) Additional requirements for internal 

combustion engines and vehicles with certain electronic equipment when transported by aircraft or vessel. When an internal combustion engine that is not 

installed in a vehicle or equipment is 

offered for transportation by aircraft 

or vessel, all fuel, coolant or hydraulic 

systems remaining in the engine must 

be drained as far as practicable, and all 

disconnected fluid pipes that previously contained fluid must be sealed 

with leak-proof caps that are positively 

retained. When offered for transportation by aircraft, vehicles equipped 

with theft-protection devices, installed 

radio communications equipment or 

navigational systems must have such 

devices, equipment or systems disabled.

(g) Exceptions. Except as provided in 

paragraph (e)(2) of this section, shipments made under the provisions of 

this section— 

(1) Are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter, for 

transportation by motor vehicle or rail 

car; and 

(2) Are not subject to the requirements of subparts D, E and F (marking, 

labeling and placarding, respectively) 

of part 172 of this subchapter or §172.604 

of this subchapter (emergency response 

telephone number) for transportation 

by vessel or aircraft. For transportation by aircraft, the provisions of 

§173.159(b)(2) as applicable, other applicable requirements of this subchapter, 

including shipping papers, emergency 

response information, notification of 

pilot-in-command, general packaging 

requirements, and the requirements 

specified in §173.27 must be met. For 

transportation by vessel, additional exceptions are specified in §176.905 of this 

subchapter.

[64 FR 10778, Mar. 5, 1999, as amended at 66 

45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45035, July 31, 2003; 

69 FR 75216, Dec. 15, 2004; 69 FR 76158, Dec. 20, 

2004; 70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005; 71 FR 14603, 

Mar. 22, 2006; 71 FR 78632, Dec. 29, 2006; 72 FR 

44950, Aug. 9, 2007; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 

FR 73, Jan. 4, 2010] 

§ 173.221 Polymeric beads, expandable 

and Plastic molding compound. 

(a) Non-bulk shipments of Polymeric 

beads (or granules), expandable, evolving flammable vapor and Plastic molding 

compound in dough, sheet or extruded 

rope form, evolving flammable vapor must

be packed in: wooden (4C1 or 4C2), plywood (4D), fiberboard (4G), reconstituted wood (4F) boxes, plywood drums 

(1D) or fiber drums (1G) with sealed 

inner plastic liners; in vapor tight 

metal or plastic drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 

1B2, 1H1 or 1H2); or packed in non-specification packagings when transported 

551

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.223 

in dedicated vehicles or freight containers. The packagings need not conform to the requirements for package 

testing in part 178 of this subchapter, 

but must be capable of containing any 

evolving gases from the contents during normal conditions of transportation.

(b) Bulk shipments of Polymeric 

beads (or granules), expandable, evolving flammable vapor or Plastic molding 

compounds in dough, sheet or extruded 

rope, evolving flammable vapor may be 

packed in non-specification bulk packagings. Except for transportation by 

highway and rail, bulk packagings 

must be capable of containing any 

gases evolving from the contents during normal conditions of transportation.

[64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 1999] 

§ 173.222 Dangerous goods in equipment, machinery or apparatus. 

Hazardous materials in machinery or 

apparatus are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of 

this subchapter when packaged according to this section. Hazardous materials in machinery or apparatus must 

be packaged in strong outer packagings, unless the receptacles containing the hazardous materials are afforded adequate protection by the construction of the machinery or apparatus. Each package must conform to 

the packaging requirements of subpart 

B of this part, except for the requirements in §§173.24(a)(1) and 173.27(e), and 

the following requirements: 

(a) If the machinery or apparatus 

contains more than one hazardous material, the materials must not be capable of reacting dangerously together. 

(b) The nature of the containment 

must be as follows— 

(1) Damage to the receptacles containing the hazardous materials during 

transport is unlikely. However, in the 

event of damage to the receptacles containing the hazardous materials, no 

leakage of the hazardous materials 

from the machinery or apparatus is 

possible. A leakproof liner may be used 

to satisfy this requirement. 

(2) Receptacles containing hazardous 

materials must be secured and cushioned so as to prevent their breakage 

or leakage and so as to control their 

movement within the machinery or apparatus during normal conditions of 

transportation. Cushioning material 

must not react dangerously with the 

content of the receptacles. Any leakage 

of the contents must not substantially 

impair the protective properties of the 

cushioning material. 

(3) Receptacles for gases, their contents and filling densities must conform to the applicable requirements of 

this subchapter, unless otherwise approved by the Associate Administrator. 

(c) The total net quantity of hazardous materials contained in one item 

of machinery or apparatus must not 

exceed the following: 

(1) 1 kg (2.2 pounds) in the case of solids;

(2) 0.5 L (0.1 gallons) in the case of 

liquids;

(3) 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) in the case of 

Division 2.2 gases. For transportation 

by aircraft, Division 2.2 gases with subsidiary risks and refrigerated liquefied 

gases are not authorized; and 

(4) A total quantity of not more than 

the aggregate of that permitted in 

paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this 

section, for each category of material 

in the package, when a package contains hazardous materials in two or 

more of the categories in paragraphs 

(c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section. 

(d) Except for transportation by aircraft, when a package contains hazardous materials in two or more of the 

categories listed in paragraphs (c)(1) 

through (c)(3) of this section the total 

quantity required by §172.202(c) of this 

subchapter to be entered on the shipping paper must be either the aggregate quantity, or the estimated quantity, of all hazardous materials, expressed as net mass. 

[64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 1999, as amended at 64 

FR 44428, Aug. 16, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 

2001; 70 FR 56098, Sept. 23, 2005; 71 FR 78633, 

Dec. 29, 2006; 74 FR 2259, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.223 Packagings for certain flammable solids. 

(a) Packagings for ‘‘Musk xylene,’’ 

‘‘5-tert-Butyl-2,4,6-trinitro-m-xylene,’’

‘‘Azodicarbonamide,’’ or ‘‘Isosorbide-5- 

mononitrate,’’ when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or vessel, must conform to the 

552

§ 173.224 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, and to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group III performance 

level and may only be transported in 

the following packagings: 

(1) Fiberboard box (4G) with a single 

inner plastic bag, and a maximum net 

mass of not more than 50 kg (110 lbs). 

(2) Fiberboard box (4G) or fiber drum 

(1G), with a plastic inner packaging 

not exceeding 5 kg (11 lbs), and a maximum net mass of not more than 25 kg 

(55 lbs). 

(3) Fiber drum (1G), and a maximum 

net mass of not more than 50 kg (110 

lbs), that may be fitted with a coating 

or lining. 

(b) [Reserved] 

[Doc. No. 2002–13658, 68 FR 45035, July 31, 2003; 

75 FR 5394, Feb. 2, 2010] 

§ 173.224 Packaging and control and 

emergency temperatures for self-reactive materials. 

(a) General. When the §172.101 table of 

this subchapter specifies that a Division 4.1 material be packaged in accordance with this section, only packagings which conform to the provisions 

of this section may be used. Each packaging must conform to the general 

packaging requirements of subpart B of 

this part and the applicable requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. 

Non-bulk packagings must meet Packing Group II performance levels. To 

avoid unnecessary confinement, metallic non-bulk packagings meeting Packing Group I are not authorized. Self-reactive materials which require temperature control are subject to the provisions of §173.21(f). Packagings required to bear a Class 1 subsidiary label 

must conform to §§173.60 through 

173.62.

(b) Self-Reactive Materials Table. The

Self-Reactive Materials Table specifies, by technical name, those self-reactive materials that are authorized for 

transportation and not subject to the 

approval provisions of §173.124(a)(2)(iii). 

A self-reactive material identified by 

technical name in the following table 

is authorized for transportation only if 

it conforms to all applicable provisions 

of the table. The column headings of 

the Self-Reactive Materials Table are 

as follows: 

(1) Technical name. Column 1 specifies 

the technical name. 

(2) ID number. Column 2 specifies the 

identification number which is used to 

identify the proper shipping name in 

the §172.101 table. 

(3) Concentration of self-reactive material. Column 3 specifies the concentration (percent) limitations, if any, in 

mixtures or solutions for the self-reactive material. Limitations are given as 

minimums, maximums, or a range, as 

appropriate. A range includes the lower 

and upper limits (i.e., ‘‘53–100’’ means 

from, and including, 53 percent to, and 

including 100 percent). 

(4) Packing method. Column 4 specifies 

the highest packing method which is 

authorized for the self-reactive material. A packing method corresponding 

to a smaller package size may be used, 

but a packing method corresponding to 

a larger package size may not be used. 

The Table of Packing Methods in 

§173.225(d) defines the packing methods. Bulk packagings for Type F selfreactive substances are authorized by 

§173.225(f) for IBCs and §173.225(h) for 

bulk packagings other than IBCs. Additional bulk packagings are authorized 

if approved by the Associate Administrator.

(5) Control temperature. Column 5 

specifies the control temperature in °C.

Temperatures are specified only when 

temperature controls are required (see 

§173.21(f)). 

(6) Emergency temperature. Column 6 

specifies the emergency temperature in 

°C. Temperatures are specified only 

when temperature controls are required (see §173.21(f)). 

(7) Notes. Column 7 specifies other applicable provisions, as set forth in 

notes following the table. 

553

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.224 

SELF-REACTIVE MATERIALS TABLE

Self-reactive substance 

(1)

Identification

No.

(2)

Concentration—

(%)

(3)

Packing

method (4)

Control temperature—( °C)

(5)

Emergency

temperature

(6)

Notes

(7)

Acetone-pyrogallol copolymer 2-diazo-1- 

naphthol-5-sulphonate.

3228 100 .................... OP8 ........................ ........................ ............

Azodicarbonamide formulation type B, 

temperature controlled.

3232 <100 .................. OP5 ........................ ........................ 1 

Azodicarbonamide formulation type C ..... 3224 <100 .................. OP6 ........................ ........................ ............

Azodicarbonamide formulation type C, 

temperature controlled.

3234 <100 .................. OP6 ........................ ........................ 1 

Azodicarbonamide formulation type D ..... 3226 <100 .................. OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

Azodicarbonamide formulation type D, 

temperature controlled.

3236 <100 .................. OP7 ........................ ........................ 1 

2,2′-Azodi(2,4-dimethyl-4-

methoxyvaleronitrile).

3236 100 .................... OP7 ¥5 ................. +5 .................. ............

2,2′-Azodi(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) ......... 3236 100 .................... OP7 +10 ................ +15 ................ ............

2,2′-Azodi(ethyl 2-methylpropionate) ....... 3235 100 .................... OP7 +20 ................ +25 ................ ............

1,1-Azodi(hexahydrobenzonitrile) ............ 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

2,2-Azodi(isobutyronitrile) ........................ 3234 100 .................... OP6 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2,2′-Azodi(isobutyronitrile) as a water 

based paste.

3224 ≤50 .................... OP6 

2,2-Azodi(2-methylbutyronitrile) ............... 3236 100 .................... OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ............

Benzene-1,3-disulphonylhydrazide, as a 

paste.

3226 52 ...................... OP7 

Benzene sulphohydrazide ........................ 3226 100 .................... OP7 

4-(Benzyl(ethyl)amino)-3-

ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride.

3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

4-(Benzyl(methyl)amino)-3-

ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride.

3236 100 .................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

3-Chloro-4-

diethylaminobenzenediazonium zinc 

chloride.

3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

2-Diazo-1-Naphthol sulphonic acid ester 

mixture.

3226 <100 .................. OP7 ................... ................... 4 

2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-4-sulphonyl chloride 3222 100 .................... OP5 

2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-5-sulphonyl chloride 3222 100 .................... OP5 

2,5-Dibutoxy-4-(4-morpholinyl)-Benzenediazonium, tetrachlorozincate (2:1).3228 100 .................... OP8 

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

morpholinobenzenediazonium zinc 

chloride.

3236 67–100 .............. OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

morpholinobenzenediazonium zinc 

chloride.

3236 66 ...................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

morpholinobenzenediazonium

tetrafluoroborate.

3236 100 .................... OP7 +30 ................ +35 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-

(phenylsulphonyl)benzenediazonium

zinc chloride.

3236 67 ...................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2,5-Diethoxy-4-(4-morpholinyl)-benzenediazonium sulphate.3226 100 .................... OP7 

Diethylene glycol bis(allyl carbonate) + 

Diisopropylperoxydicarbonate.

3237 ≥88+≤12 ............ OP8 ¥10 ............... 0 ..................... ............

2,5-Dimethoxy-4-(4-

methylphenylsulphony)benzenediazonium zinc chloride.

3236 79 ...................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

4-Dimethylamino-6-(2-

dimethylaminoethoxy)toluene-2-diazonium zinc chloride.

3236 100 .................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

4-(Dimethylamino)-benzenediazonium

trichlorozincate (-1).

3228 100 .................... OP8 

N,N′-Dinitroso-N, N′-dimethylterephthalamide, as a paste.3224 72 ...................... OP6 ........................ ........................ ............

N,N′-Dinitrosopentamethylenetetramine .. 3224 82 ...................... OP6 ........................ ........................ 2 

Diphenyloxide-4,4′-disulphohydrazide ..... 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

Diphenyloxide-4,4′-disulphonylhydrazide 3226 100 .................... OP7 

4-Dipropylaminobenzenediazonium zinc 

chloride.

3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

554

§ 173.224 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

SELF-REACTIVE MATERIALS TABLE—Continued

Self-reactive substance 

(1)

Identification

No.

(2)

Concentration—

(%)

(3)

Packing

method (4)

Control temperature—( °C)

(5)

Emergency

temperature

(6)

Notes

(7)

2-(N,N-Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-

methoxy-4-(N-methyl-Ncyclohexylamino)benzenediazonium

zinc chloride.

3236 63–92 ................ OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2-(N,N-Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-

methoxy-4-(N-methyl-Ncyclohexylamino)benzenediazonium

zinc chloride.

3236 62 ...................... OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ............

N-Formyl-2-(nitromethylene)-1,3-

perhydrothiazine.

3236 100 .................... OP7 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

2-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-1-(pyrrolidin-1-

yl)benzene-4-diazonium zinc chloride.

3236 100 .................... OP7 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

3-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-4-(pyrrolidin-1-

yl)benzenediazonium zinc chloride.

3236 100 .................... OP7 +40 ................ +45 ................ ............

2-(N,N-Methylaminoethylcarbonyl)-4-(3,4-

dimethyl-phenylsulphonyl)benzene diazonium zinc chloride.

3236 96 ...................... OP7 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

4-Methylbenzenesulphonylhydrazide ....... 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

3-Methyl-4-(pyrrolidin-1-

yl)benzenediazonium tetrafluoroborate.

3234 95 ...................... OP6 +45 ................ +50 ................ ............

4-Nitrosophenol ........................................ 3236 100 .................... OP7 +35 ................ +40 ................ ............

Self-reactive liquid, sample ...................... 3223 ........................... OP2 ........................ ........................ 3 

Self-reactive liquid, sample, temperature 

control.

3233 ........................... OP2 ........................ ........................ 3 

Self-reactive solid, sample ....................... 3224 ........................... OP2 ........................ ........................ 3 

Self-reactive solid, sample, temperature control.3234 ........................... OP2 ........................ ........................ 3 

Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonate 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonate 3226 100 .................... OP7 ........................ ........................ ............

Tetramine palladium (II) nitrate ................ 3234 100 .................... OP6 +30 ................ +35 ................ ............

NOTES: 1. The emergency and control temperatures must be determined in accordance with § 173.21(f). 

2. With a compatible diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150 °C.

3. Samples may only be offered for transportation under the provisions of paragraph (c)(3) of this section. 

4. This entry applies to mixtures of esters of 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonic acid and 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonic acid. 

(c) New self-reactive materials, formulations and samples. (1) Except as provided 

for samples in paragraph (c)(3) of this 

section, no person may offer, accept for 

transportation, or transport a self-reactive material which is not identified 

by technical name in the Self-Reactive 

Materials Table of this section, or a 

formulation of one or more self-reactive materials which are identified by 

technical name in the table, unless the 

self-reactive material is assigned a generic type and shipping description and 

is approved by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of 

§173.124(a)(2)(iii). 

(2) Except as provided by an approval 

issued under §173.124(a)(2)(iii), intermediate bulk and bulk packagings are 

not authorized. 

(3) Samples. Samples of new self-reactive materials or new formulations of 

self-reactive materials identified in the 

Self-Reactive Materials Table in paragraph (b) of this section, for which 

complete test data are not available, 

and which are to be transported for further testing or product evaluation, 

may be assigned an appropriate shipping description for Self-reactive materials Type C, packaged and offered for 

transportation under the following 

conditions:

(i) Data available to the person offering the material for transportation 

must indicate that the sample would 

pose a level of hazard no greater than 

that of a self-reactive material Type B 

and that the control temperature, if 

any, is sufficiently low to prevent any 

dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous 

phase separation; 

(ii) The sample must be packaged in 

accordance with packing method OP2; 

(iii) Packages of the self-reactive material may be offered for transportation and transported in a quantity 

not to exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) per 

transport vehicle; and 

555

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 

(iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned: 

(A) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, 4.1, 

UN3223.

(B) Self-reactive, solid, type C, 4.1, 

UN3224.

(C) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, UN3233. 

(D) Self-reactive, solid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, UN3234. 

[Amdt. 173–241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–242, 60 FR 26806, May 

18, 1995; Amdt. 173–246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 

1995; Amdt. 173–256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996; 

Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24734, 24735, May 6, 1997; 

62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997; 64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 

1999; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33431, 

June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 

45035, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76159, Dec. 20, 2004; 

71 FR 78633, Dec. 29,2006] 

§ 173.225 Packaging requirements and 

other provisions for organic peroxides. 

(a) General. When the §172.101 table 

specifies that an organic peroxide must 

be packaged under this section, the organic peroxide must be packaged and 

offered for transportation in accordance with the provisions of this section. Each packaging must conform to 

the general requirements of subpart B 

of part 173 and to the applicable requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Non-bulk packagings must 

meet Packing Group II performance 

levels. To avoid unnecessary confinement, metallic non-bulk packagings 

meeting Packing Group I are not authorized. No used material, other than 

production residues or regrind from the 

same production process, may be used 

in plastic packagings. Organic peroxides that require temperature control 

are subject to the provisions of 

§173.21(f). When an IBC or bulk packaging is authorized and meets the requirements of paragraph (f) or (h) of 

this section, respectively, lower control temperatures than those specified 

for non-bulk packaging may be required. An organic peroxide not identified in paragraph (c), (e), or (g) of this 

section by technical name, or not assigned to a generic type in accordance 

with the provisions in paragraph (b)(3) 

of this section, must conform to the 

provisions of paragraph (c) of §173.128. 

(b) New organic peroxides, formulations 

and samples. (1) Except as provided for 

samples in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, no person may offer for transportation an organic peroxide that is not 

identified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table, Organic Peroxide IBC Table, or the Organic Peroxide Portable Tank Table of this section, or a formulation of one or more 

organic peroxides that are identified by 

technical name in one of those tables, 

unless the organic peroxide is assigned 

a generic type and shipping description 

and is approved by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of 

§173.128(d) of this subchapter. 

(2) Samples. Samples of new organic 

peroxides or new formulations of organic peroxides identified in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (c) 

of this section, for which complete test 

data are not available, and that are to 

be transported for further testing or 

product evaluation, may be assigned an 

appropriate shipping description for organic peroxide Type C, packaged and 

offered for transportation, under the 

following conditions: 

(i) Data available to the person offering the material for transportation 

must indicate that the sample would 

pose a level of hazard no greater than 

that of an organic peroxide Type B and 

that the control temperature, if any, is 

sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently 

high to prevent any dangerous phase 

separation;

(ii) The sample must be packaged in 

accordance with packing method OP2, 

for a liquid or solid, respectively; 

(iii) Packages of the organic peroxide 

may be offered for transportation and 

transported in a quantity not to exceed 

10 kg (22 pounds) per transport vehicle; 

and

(iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned: 

(A) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, 

5.2, UN 3103; 

(B) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, 

5.2, UN 3104; 

(C) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, 

temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 3113; or 

(D) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, 

temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 3114. 

(3) Mixtures. Mixtures of organic peroxides individually identified in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (c) 

of this section may be classified as the 

556

§ 173.225 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

same type of organic peroxide as that 

of the most dangerous component and 

be transported under the conditions for 

transportation given for this type. If 

the stable components form a thermally less stable mixture, the SADT of 

the mixture must be determined and 

the new control and emergency temperature derived under the provisions 

of §173.21(f). 

(c) Organic peroxides table. The following Organic Peroxides Table specifies by technical name those organic 

peroxides that are authorized for transportation and not subject to the approval provisions of §173.128 of this 

part. An organic peroxide identified by 

technical name in the following table 

is authorized for transportation only if 

it conforms to all applicable provisions 

of the table. The column headings of 

the Organic Peroxides Table are as follows:

(1) Technical name. The first column 

specifies the technical name. 

(2) ID number. The second column 

specifies the identification (ID) number 

which is used to identify the proper 

shipping name in the §172.101 table. 

The word ‘‘EXEMPT’’ appearing in the 

column denotes that the material is 

not regulated as an organic peroxide. 

(3) Concentration of organic peroxide. 

The third column specifies concentration (mass percent) limitations, if any, 

in mixtures or solutions for the organic 

peroxide. Limitations are given as 

minimums, maximums, or a range, as 

appropriate. A range includes the lower 

and upper limits (i.e., ‘‘53–100’’ means 

from, and including, 53% to, and including 100%). See introductory paragraph of §172.203(k) of this subchapter 

for additional description requirements 

for an organic peroxide that may qualify for more than one generic listing, 

depending on its concentration. 

(4) Concentration of diluents. The

fourth column specifies the type and 

concentration (mass percent) of diluent 

or inert solid, when required. Other 

types and concentrations of diluents 

may be used if approved by the Associate Administrator. 

(i) The required mass percent of 

‘‘Diluent type A’’ is specified in column 

4a. A diluent type A is an organic liquid that does not detrimentally affect 

the thermal stability or increase the 

hazard of the organic peroxide and with 

a boiling point not less than 150 °C at 

atmospheric pressure. Type A diluents 

may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides. 

(ii) The required mass percent of 

‘‘Diluent type B’’ is specified in column 

4b. A diluent type B is an organic liquid which is compatible with the organic peroxide and which has a boiling 

point, at atmospheric pressure, of less 

than 150 °C (302 °F) but at least 60 °C

(140 °F), and a flash point greater than 

5 °C (41 °F). Type B diluents may be 

used for desensitizing all organic peroxides, when specified in the organic 

peroxide tables, provided that the boiling point is at least 60 °C (140 °F) above 

the SADT of the peroxide in a 50 kg 

(110 lbs) package. A type A diluent may 

be used to replace a type B diluent in 

equal concentration. 

(iii) The required mass percent of 

‘‘Inert solid’’ is specified in column 4c. 

An inert solid is a solid that does not 

detrimentally affect the thermal stability or hazard of the organic peroxide.

(5) Concentration of water. Column 5 

specifies, in mass percent, the minimum amount of water, if any, which 

must be in formulation. 

(6) Packing method. Column 6 specifies 

the highest packing method (largest 

packaging capacity) authorized for the 

organic peroxide. Lower numbered 

packing methods (smaller packaging 

capacities) are also authorized. For example, if OP3 is specified, then OP2 and 

OP1 are also authorized. The Table of 

Packing Methods in paragraph (d) of 

this section defines the non-bulk packing methods. 

(7) Temperatures. Column 7a specifies 

the control temperature. Column 7b 

specifies the emergency temperature. 

Temperatures are specified only when 

temperature controls are required. (See 

§173.21(f)). 

(8) Notes. Column 8 specifies other applicable provisions, as set forth in 

notes following the table. 

557

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE

TABLE

Technical name ID num- ber Con- centration (mass %) 

Diluent (mass %) 

Water

(mass

%)

Packing method 

Temperature ( 

°C)

Notes

A B I Control Emer- gency

(1) (2) (3) (4a) (4b) (4c) (5) (6) (7a) (7b) (8) 

Acetyl acetone peroxide ................................................................................................. UN3105 ≤42 ......... ≥48 .... .... ≥8 .... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 2 Acetyl acetone peroxide [as a paste] ............................................................................. UN3106 ≤32 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21 Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl peroxide .............................................................................. UN3112 ≤82 ......... .... .... .... ≥12 .. OP4 .................. ¥10 0 ......Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl peroxide .............................................................................. UN3115 ≤32 ......... .... ≥68 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥10 0 ......tert-Amyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3107 ≤88 ......... ≥6 .. .... .... ≥6 .... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3105 ≤62 ......... ≥38 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3103 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3115 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +20 +25 ..tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexyl carbonate ........................................................................ UN3105 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxy isopropyl carbonate ............................................................................. UN3103 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... 3119 .... ≤47 ......... ≥53 ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10.tert-Amyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3113 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP5 .................. +10 +15 ..tert-Amyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. 3119 .... ≤32 ......... ≥68 ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. +10 +15.tert-Amyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate .................................................................... 3105 .... ≤100 ....... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP7.tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide ................................................................................................ UN3107 >42–100 .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 9 tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide ................................................................................................ UN3108 ≤52 ......... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 9 n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert-butylperoxy)valerate .......................................................................... UN3103 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert-butylperoxy)valerate .......................................................................... UN3108 ≤52 ......... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3103 >79–90 ... .... .... .... ≥10 .. OP5 .................. ...... ...... 13 tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3105 ≤80 ......... ≥20 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 4, 13 tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3107 ≤79 ......... .... .... .... >14 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 16 tert-Butyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................. UN3109 ≤72 ......... .... .... .... ≥28 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13 tert-Butyl hydroperoxide [and] Di-tert-butylperoxide ....................................................... UN3103 <82+>9 ... .... .... .... ≥7 .... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 13 tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate ........................................................................................ UN3102 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate ........................................................................................ UN3103 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate ........................................................................................ UN3108 ≤52 ......... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate [as a paste] .................................................................... UN3108 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3101 >52–77 ... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3103 >32–52 ... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyacetate .................................................................................................. UN3109 ≤32 ......... .... ≥68 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3103 >77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3105 >52–77 ... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1 tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... UN3106 ≤52 ......... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate ............................................................................................... 3109 .... ≤32 ......... ≥68 ........ ........ .......... OP8.tert-Butyl peroxybutyl fumarate ....................................................................................... UN3105 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxycrotonate ............................................................................................... UN3105 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxydiethylacetate ........................................................................................ UN3113 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. +20 +25 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3113 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP6 .................. +20 +25 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3117 >32–52 ... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3118 ≤52 ......... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP8 .................. +20 +25 ..

558

§ 173.225 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE

TABLE—Continued

Technical name ID num- ber Con- centration (mass %) 

Diluent (mass %) 

Water

(mass

%)

Packing method 

Temperature ( 

°C)

Notes

A B I Control Emer- gency

(1) (2) (3) (4a) (4b) (4c) (5) (6) (7a) (7b) (8) 

tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ................................................................................. UN3119 ≤32 ......... .... ≥68 .... ...... OP8 .................. +40 +45 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-(tert-Butylperoxy)butane ...................... UN3106 ≤12+≤14 ≥14 .... ≥60 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-(tert-Butylperoxy)butane ...................... UN3115 ≤31+≤36 .... ≥33 .... ...... OP7 .................. +35 +40 ..tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexylcarbonate ......................................................................... UN3105 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate ............................................................................................ UN3111 >52–77 ... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP5 .................. +15 +20 ..tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate ............................................................................................ UN3115 ≤52 ......... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP7 .................. +15 +20 ..tert-Butylperoxy isopropylcarbonate ............................................................................... UN3103 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......1-(2-tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3-isopropenylbenzene .................................................. UN3105 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1-(2-tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3-isopropenylbenzene .................................................. UN3108 ≤42 ......... .... .... ≥58 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-2-methylbenzoate ................................................................................ UN3103 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3115 >77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥5 .. +5 ....tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] .................................. UN3119 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] ..................... UN3118 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate ....................................................................................... UN3119 ≤32 ......... ≥68 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneoheptanoate ...................................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxyneoheptanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] ................................. UN3117 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3113 >67–77 ... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3115 >27–67 ... .... ≥33 .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..tert-Butyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................. UN3119 ≤27 ......... .... ≥73 .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..tert-Butylperoxy stearylcarbonate ................................................................................... UN3106 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate ..................................................................... UN3105 >32–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethlyhexanoate .................................................................... 3106 .... ≤42 ......... ........ ........ ≥58 .......... OP7.tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate ..................................................................... UN3109 ≤32 ......... .... ≥68 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid ........................................................................................... UN3102 >57–86 ... .... .... ≥14 ...... OP1 .................. ...... ......3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid ........................................................................................... UN3106 ≤57 ......... .... .... ≥3 .. ≥40 .. OP7 .................. ...... ......3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid ........................................................................................... UN3106 ≤77 ......... .... .... ≥6 .. ≥17 .. OP7 .................. ...... ......Cumyl hydroperoxide ...................................................................................................... UN3107 >90–98 ... ≤10 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13 Cumyl hydroperoxide ...................................................................................................... UN3109 ≤90 ......... ≥10 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 15 Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate ........................................................................................... 3115 .... ≤87 ......... ≥13 ........ ........ .......... OP7 .................. ¥10 0.Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate ........................................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥10 0 ......Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] ....................................... UN3119 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ¥10 0 ......Cumyl peroxyneoheptanoate .......................................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥10 0 ......Cumyl peroxypivalate ...................................................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥5 .. +5 ....Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) ............................................................................................ UN3104 ≤91 ......... .... .... .... ≥9 .... OP6 .................. ...... ...... 13 Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) ............................................................................................ UN3105 ≤72 ......... ≥28 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5 Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) [as a paste] ........................................................................ UN3106 ≤72 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5, 21 Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) ............................................................................................ Exempt ≤32 ......... ........ >68 ........ .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29 Diacetone alcohol peroxides ........................................................................................... UN3115 ≤57 ......... .... ≥26 .... ≥8 .... OP7 .................. +40 +45 .. 5 Diacetyl peroxide ............................................................................................................ UN3115 ≤27 ......... .... ≥73 .... ...... OP7 .................. +20 +25 .. 8,13 Di-tert-amyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3107 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......

559

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 2,2-Di-(tert-amylperoxy)-butane ...................................................................................... 3105 .... ≤57 ......... ≥43 ........ ........ .......... OP7. 1,1-Di-(tert-amylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3103 ≤82 ......... ≥18 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ...... Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3102 >51–100 .... .... ≤48 ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 3 Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3102 >77–94 ... .... .... .... ≥6 .... OP4 .................. ...... ...... 3 Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3104 ≤77 ......... .... .... .... ≥23 .. OP6 .................. ...... ...... Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3106 ≤62 ......... .... .... ≥28 ≥10 .. OP7 .................. ...... ...... Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ..................................................................................... UN3106 >52–62 ... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21 Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3106 >35–52 ... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... UN3107 >36–42 ... ≥18 .... .... ≤40 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ..................................................................................... UN3108 ≤56.5 ...... .... .... .... ≥15 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ..................................................................................... UN3108 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 21 Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] ..................................................... UN3109 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... Dibenzoyl peroxide ......................................................................................................... Exempt ≤35 ......... ........ ........ ≥65 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29 Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate .................................................................. UN3114 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP6 .................. +30 +35 .. Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ............. UN3119 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 .. Di-tert-butyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3107 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... Di-tert-butyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3109 ≤52 ......... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 24 Di-tert-butyl peroxyazelate .............................................................................................. UN3105 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)butane ....................................................................................... UN3103 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP6 .................. ...... ...... 1,6-Di-(tert-butylperoxycarbonyloxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3103 ≤72 ......... ≥28 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3101 >80–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3103 >52–80 ... ≥20 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-cyclohexane ............................................................................. 3103 .... ≤72 ......... ........ ≥28 ........ .......... OP5 .................. ......... .......... 30 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3105 >42–52 ... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3106 ≤42 ......... ≥13 .... ≥45 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3107 ≤27 ......... ≥25 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 22 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3109 ≤42 ......... ≥58 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-Butylperoxy) cyclohexane ............................................................................. 3109 .... ≤37 ......... ≥63 ........ ........ .......... OP8. 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3109 ≤25 ......... ≥25 ≥50 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane .............................................................................. UN3109 ≤13 ......... ≥13 ≥74 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................................... UN3115 >27–52 ... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ... Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................................... UN3117 ≤27 ......... .... ≥73 .... ...... OP8 .................. ¥10 0 ...... Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] ........................ UN3118 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ... Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate ...................................................................................... UN3113 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP4 .................. ¥20 ¥10 6 Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate ...................................................................................... UN3115 ≤52 ......... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ... Di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl)benzene(s) ..................................................................... UN3106 >42–100 .... .... ≤57 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1, 9 Di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl) benzene(s) .................................................................... Exempt ≤42 ......... ........ ........ ≥58 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29 Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate .......................................................................................... UN3105 >42–52 ... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate [as a paste] ..................................................................... UN3106 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21 Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate .......................................................................................... UN3107 ≤42 ......... ≥58 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)propane ..................................................................................... UN3105 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)propane ..................................................................................... UN3106 ≤42 ......... ≥13 .... ≥45 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3101 >90–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3103 >57–90 ... ≥10 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3103 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3103 ≤90 ......... ........ ≥10 ........ .......... OP5 .................. ......... .......... 30 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3110 ≤57 ......... .... .... ≥43 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3107 ≤57 ......... ≥43 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane ...................................................... UN3107 ≤32 ......... ≥26 ≥42 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................................... UN3116 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +30 +35 ..

Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] .......................................... UN3119 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..

560

§ 173.225 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE

TABLE—Continued

Technical name ID num- ber Con- centration (mass %) 

Diluent (mass %) 

Water

(mass

%)

Packing method 

Temperature ( 

°C)

Notes

A B I Control Emer- gency

Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] .......................................... UN3119 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +30 +35 ..Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide ........................................................................................... UN3102 ≤77 ......... .... .... .... ≥23 .. OP5 .................. ...... ......Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide ........................................................................................... Exempt ≤32 ......... ........ ........ ≥68 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29 Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ................................................................. UN3118 ≤52 ......... ........ ........ ........ OP8 +20 ................... +25.Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] ....................................................................... UN3106 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 21 Dicumyl peroxide ............................................................................................................ UN3110 >52–100 .... .... ≤48 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 9 Dicumyl peroxide ............................................................................................................ Exempt ≤52 ......... ........ ........ ≥48 .......... Exempt ............. ......... .......... 29 Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate ..................................................................................... UN3112 >91–100 .... .... .... ...... OP3 .................. +10 +15 ..Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate ..................................................................................... UN3114 ≤91 ......... .... .... .... ≥9 .... OP5 .................. +10 +15 ..Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ................................. UN3119 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +15 +20 ..Didecanoyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3114 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP6 .................. +30 +35 ..2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane ......................................................... UN3106 ≤42 ......... .... .... ≥58 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane ......................................................... UN3107 ≤22 ......... .... ≥78 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide ..................................................................................... UN3102 ≤77 ......... .... .... .... ≥23 .. OP5 .................. ...... ......Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste with silicone oil] ........................................ UN3106 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Di-(2-ethoxyethyl) peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................. UN3115 ≤52 ......... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥10 0 ......Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................... UN3113 >77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ¥20 ¥10Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate ............................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ...Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ........................... 3119 .... ≤62 ......... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. ¥15 ¥5.Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ........................... UN3119 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ...Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] ............. UN3120 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ...2,2-Dihydroperoxypropane .............................................................................................. UN3102 ≤27 ......... .... .... ≥73 ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......Di-(1-hydroxycyclohexyl)peroxide ................................................................................... UN3106 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Diisobutyryl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3111 >32–52 ... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP5 .................. ¥20 ¥10Diisobutyryl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3115 ≤32 ......... .... ≥68 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥20 ¥10Diisopropylbenzene dihydroperoxide .............................................................................. UN3106 ≤82 ......... ≥5 .. .... .... ≥5 .... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 17 Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3112 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ...Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3115 ≤52 ......... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥20 ¥10Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3115 ≤28 ......... ≥72 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥15 ¥5 ...Dilauroyl peroxide ........................................................................................................... UN3106 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Dilauroyl peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] ....................................................... UN3109 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Di-(3-methoxybutyl) peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................... UN3115 ≤52 ......... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥5 .. +5 ....Di-(2-methylbenzoyl)peroxide ......................................................................................... UN3112 ≤87 ......... .... .... .... ≥13 .. OP5 .................. +30 +35 ..Di-(4-methylbenzoyl)peroxide [as a paste with silicone oil] ........................................... UN3106 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......Di-(3-methylbenzoyl) peroxide + Benzoyl (3-methylbenzoyl) peroxide + Dibenzoyl 

peroxide.

UN3115 ≤20+ .......

≤18+≤4 ...

.... ≥58 .... ...... OP7 .................. +35 +40 ..

2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3102 >82–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3106 ≤82 ......... .... .... ≥18 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane ................................................................... UN3104 ≤82 ......... .... .... .... ≥18 .. OP5 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane .................................................................. UN3105 >52–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane .................................................................. UN3108 ≤77 ......... .... .... ≥23 ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane .................................................................. UN3109 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexane [as a paste] ............................................. UN3108 ≤47 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......

561

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexyne-3 ............................................................... UN3101 >86–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexyne-3 ............................................................... UN3103 >52–86 ... ≥14 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-butylperoxy)hexyne-3 ............................................................... UN3106 ≤52 ......... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(2-ethylhexanoylperoxy)hexane ...................................................... UN3113 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. +20 +25 .. 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-dihydroperoxyhexane .......................................................................... UN3104 ≤82 ......... .... .... .... ≥18 .. OP6 .................. ...... ...... 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoylperoxy)hexane .......................................... UN3105 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1,1-Dimethyl-3-hydroxybutylperoxyneoheptanoate ......................................................... UN3117 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. 0 ...... +10 .. Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate .......................................................................................... UN3116 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +20 +25 .. Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] ..................................... UN3119 ≤42 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +20 +25 .. Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene ................................................................... UN3115 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥10 0 ...... Di-(2-neodecanoyl-peroxyisopropyl) benzene, as stable dispersion in water ................ 3119 .... ≤42 ......... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. ¥15 ¥5. Di-n-nonanoyl peroxide ................................................................................................... UN3116 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 .. Di-n-octanoyl peroxide .................................................................................................... UN3114 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. +10 +15 .. Di-(2-phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................... UN3102 >85–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... Di-(2-phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................... UN3106 ≤85 ......... .... .... .... ≥15 .. OP7 .................. ...... ...... Dipropionyl peroxide ....................................................................................................... UN3117 ≤27 ......... .... ≥73 .... ...... OP8 .................. +15 +20 .. Di-n-propyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3113 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP3 .................. ¥25 ¥15 Di-n-propyl peroxydicarbonate ........................................................................................ UN3113 ≤77 ......... .... ≥23 .... ...... OP5 .................. ¥20 ¥10 Disuccinic acid peroxide ................................................................................................. UN3102 >72–100 .... .... .... ...... OP4 .................. ...... ...... 18 Disuccinic acid peroxide ................................................................................................. UN3116 ≤72 ......... .... .... .... ≥28 .. OP7 .................. +10 +15 .. Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide .............................................................................. UN3115 >38–82 ... ≥18 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 .. Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] .......................... UN3119 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +10 +15 .. Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide .............................................................................. UN3119 ≤38 ......... ≥62 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +20 +25 .. Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-amylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3105 ≤67 ......... ≥33 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3103 >77–100 .... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3105 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate ............................................................................. UN3106 ≤52 ......... .... .... ≥48 ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 1-(2-ethylhexanoylperoxy)-1,3-Dimethylbutyl peroxypivalate ......................................... UN3115 ≤52 ......... ≥45 ≥10 .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥20 ¥10 tert-Hexyl peroxyneodecanoate ...................................................................................... UN3115 ≤71 ......... ≥29 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 .. tert-Hexyl peroxypivalate ................................................................................................ UN3115 ≤72 ......... .... ≥28 .... ...... OP7 .................. +10 +15 .. 3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate ......................................................... 3115 .... ≤77 ......... ≥23 ........ ........ .......... OP7 .................. ¥5 .. +5. 3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] .... 3119 .... ≤52 ......... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. ¥5 .. +5. 3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate ......................................................... 3117 .... ≤52 ......... ≥48 ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. ¥5 .. +5. Isopropyl sec-butyl peroxydicarbonat +Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate+Di-isopropyl peroxydicarbonate. UN3111 ≤52+≤28

+≤22 .......

.... .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ¥20 ¥10

Isopropyl sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate+Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate+Di-isopropyl 

peroxydicarbonate.

UN3115 ≤32+≤15

¥18 ........+≤12 .......

¥15 ........

≥38 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ¥20 ¥10

Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide ........................................................................................ UN3109 ≤72 ......... ≥28 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13 p-Menthyl hydroperoxide ................................................................................................ UN3105 > 72–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 13 p-Menthyl hydroperoxide ................................................................................................ UN3109 ≤72 ......... ≥28 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s) .................................................................................. UN3115 ≤67 ......... .... ≥33 .... ...... OP7 .................. +35 +40 ..Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) ...................................................................................... UN3101 ≤52 ......... ≥48 .... .... ...... OP5 .................. ...... ...... 5, 13 Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) ...................................................................................... UN3105 ≤45 ......... ≥55 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5 Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) ...................................................................................... UN3107 ≤40 ......... ≥60 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 7 Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s) ................................................................................. UN3105 ≤62 ......... ≥19 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 5, 23 Methyl isopropyl ketone peroxide(s) ............................................................................... 3109 .... (See remark

31).

≥70 ........ ........ .......... OP8 .................. ......... .......... 31 

562

§ 173.225 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE

TABLE—Continued

Technical name ID num- ber Con- centration (mass %) 

Diluent (mass %) 

Water

(mass

%)

Packing method 

Temperature ( 

°C)

Notes

A B I Control Emer- gency

Organic peroxide, liquid, sample .................................................................................... UN3103 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 12 Organic peroxide, liquid, sample, temperature controlled .............................................. UN3113 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 12 Organic peroxide, solid, sample ..................................................................................... UN3104 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 12 Organic peroxide, solid, sample, temperature controlled ............................................... UN3114 ............. .... .... .... ...... OP2 .................. ...... ...... 12 3,3,5,7,7-Pentamethyl-1,2,4-Trioxepane ......................................................................... 3107 .... ≤100 ....... ........ ........ ........ .......... OP8.Peroxyacetic acid, type D, stabilized .............................................................................. UN3105 ≤43 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20 Peroxyacetic acid, type E, stabilized .............................................................................. UN3107 ≤43 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20 Peroxyacetic acid, type F, stabilized .............................................................................. UN3109 ≤43 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20, 28 Peroxyacetic acid or peracetic acid [with not more than 7% hydrogen peroxide] ......... UN3107 ≤36 ......... .... .... .... ≥15 .. OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20, 28 Peroxyacetic acid or peracetic acid [with not more than 20% hydrogen peroxide] ....... Exempt ≤6 ........... .... .... .... ≥60 .. Exempt ............. ...... ...... 28 Peroxyacetic acid or peracetic acid [with not more than 26% hydrogen peroxide] ....... UN3109 ≤17 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ...... 13, 20, 28 Peroxylauric acid ............................................................................................................. UN3118 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. +35 +40 ..Pinanyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................... UN3105 >56–100 .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 13 Pinanyl hydroperoxide .................................................................................................... UN3109 ≤56 ......... ≥44 .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Polyether poly-tert-butylperoxycarbonate ....................................................................... UN3107 ≤52 ......... .... ≥48 .... ...... OP8 .................. ...... ......Tetrahydronaphthyl hydroperoxide ................................................................................. UN3106 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide ......................................................................... UN3105 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ......1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate ......................................................... UN3115 ≤100 ....... .... .... .... ...... OP7 .................. +15 +20 ..1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate ............................................................... UN3115 ≤72 ......... .... ≥28 .... ...... OP7 .................. -5 .... +5 ....1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] .......... UN3119 ≤52 ......... .... .... .... ...... OP8 .................. ¥5 .. +5 ....1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl peroxypivalate .......................................................................... UN3115 ≤77 ......... ≥23 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. 0 ...... +10 ..3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane ........................................................... UN3105 ≤42 ......... ≥58 .... .... ...... OP7 .................. ...... ...... 26 

563

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 

NOTES

1. For domestic shipments, OP8 is authorized.

2. Available oxygen must be <4.7%. 

3. For concentrations <80% OP5 is allowed. 

For concentrations of at least 80% but <85%, 

OP4 is allowed. For concentrations of at 

least 85%, maximum package size is OP2. 

4. The diluent may be replaced by di-tertbutyl peroxide. 

5. Available oxygen must be ≤9% with or 

without water. 

6. For domestic shipments, OP5 is authorized.

7. Available oxygen must be ≤8.2% with or 

without water. 

8. Only non-metallic packagings are authorized.

9. For domestic shipments this material 

maybe transported under the provisions of 

paragraph (h)(3)(xii) of this section. 

10. [Reserved] 

11. [Reserved] 

12. Samples may only be offered for transportation under the provisions of paragraph 

(b)(2) of this section. 

13. ‘‘Corrosive’’ subsidiary risk label is required.

14. [Reserved] 

15. No ‘‘Corrosive’’ subsidiary risk label is 

required for concentrations below 80%. 

16. With <6% di-tert-butyl peroxide. 

17. With ≤8% 1-isopropylhydroperoxy-4- 

isopropylhydroxybenzene.

18. Addition of water to this organic peroxide will decrease its thermal stability. 

19. [Reserved] 

20. Mixtures with hydrogen peroxide, water 

and acid(s). 

21. With diluent type A, with or without 

water.

22. With ≥36% diluent type A by mass, and 

in addition ethylbenzene. 

23. With ≥19% diluent type A by mass, and 

in addition methyl isobutyl ketone. 

24. Diluent type B with boiling point >100 

C.

25. No ‘‘Corrosive’’ subsidiary risk label is 

required for concentrations below 56%. 

26. Available oxygen must be ≤7.6%.

27. Formulations derived from distillation 

of peroxyacetic acid originating from peroxyacetic acid in a concentration of not 

more than 41% with water, total active oxygen less than or equal to 9.5% (peroxyacetic 

acid plus hydrogen peroxide). 

28. For the purposes of this section, the 

names ‘‘Peroxyacetic acid’’ and ‘‘Peracetic 

acid’’ are synonymous. 

29. Not subject to the requirements of this 

subchapter for Division 5.2. 

30. Diluent type B with boiling point > 130 

°C (266 °F).

31. Available oxygen ≤6.7%.

(d) Packing Method Table. Packagings

for organic peroxides and self-reactive 

substances are listed in the Maximum 

Quantity per Packing Method Table. 

The packing methods are designated 

OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified 

for each packing method represent the 

maximum that is authorized. 

(1) The following types of packagings 

are authorized: 

(i) Drums: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 

1H1, 1H2; 

(ii) Jerricans: 3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 

3H2;

(iii) Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 

4H2, 4A, 4B; or 

(iv) Composite packagings with a 

plastic inner receptacle: 6HA1, 6HA2, 

6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 

6HG2, 6HH1, 6HH2. 

(2) Metal packaging (including inner 

packagings of combination packagings 

and outer packagings of combination 

or composite packagings) are used only 

for packing methods OP7 and OP8. 

(3) In combination packagings, glass 

receptacles are used only as inner 

packagings with a maximum content of 

0.5 kg for solids or 0.5 L for liquids. 

(4) The maximum quantity per packaging or package for Packing Methods 

OP1–OP8 must be as follows: 

MAXIMUM QUANTITY PER PACKAGING/PACKAGE

[For Packing Methods OP1 to OP8] 

Maximum quantity 

Packing Method 

OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 1 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8 

Solids and combination packagings (liquid and 

solid) (kg) ........................................................... 0.5 0.5/10 5 5 25 50 50 2 400

Liquids (L) ............................................................. 0.5 ............ 5 ............ 30 60 60 3 225

1 If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the maximum net 

mass of the complete package. 2 60 kg for jerricans/200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings comprising 

boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fiber with a maximum net mass of 25 kg. 3 60 L for jerricans. 

564

§ 173.225 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(e) Organic Peroxide IBC Table. The

following Organic Peroxide IBC Table 

specifies, by technical name, those organic peroxides that are authorized for 

transportation in certain IBCs and not 

subject to the approval provisions of 

§173.128 of this part. Additional requirements for authorized IBCs are 

found in paragraph (f) of this section. 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE IBC TABLE

UN No. Organic peroxide Type of IBC Maximum

quantity (litres) 

Control temperatureEmergency temperature

3109 ................. ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE 

F, LIQUID.

tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not 

more than 72% with water.

31A 1250 

tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not 

more than 32% in diluent 

type A.

31A 1250 

.............................................. 31HA1 1000 

tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate, not 

more than 32% in diluent 

type A.

31A 1250. 

tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5- 

trimethylhexanoate, not more 

than 37% in diluent type A.

31A 1250. 

31HA1 1000. 

Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more 

than 90% in diluent type A.

31HA1 1250 

Dibenzoyl peroxide, not more 

than 42% as a stable dispersion.

31H1 1000 

Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more 

than 52% in diluent type B.

31A 1250 

.............................................. 31HA1 1000 

1,1-Di-(tert-Butylperoxy)

cyclohexane, not more than 

37% in diluent type A.

31A 1250. 

1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)

cyclohexane, not more than 

42% in diluent type A.

31H1 1000 

Dicumyl peroxide, less than or 

equal to 100%.

31A 1250 

.............................................. 31HA1 1000 

Dilauroyl peroxide, not more 

than 42%, stable dispersion, 

in water.

31HA1 1000 

Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide, 

not more than 72% in diluent 

type A.

31HA1 1250 

p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not 

more than 72% in diluent 

type A.

31HA1 1250 

Peroxyacetic acid, stabilized, 

not more than 17%.

31H1 1500 

.............................................. 31HA1 1500 

.............................................. 31A 1500 

Peroxyacetic acid, with not 

more than 26% hydrogen 

peroxide.

31A 1500 

.............................................. 31HA1 1500 

Peroxyacetic acid, type F, stabilized.31A 1500 

................................................... 31HA1 1500 

3110 ................. ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE 

F, SOLID.

Dicumyl peroxide, less than or 

equal to 100%.

31A 2000 

.............................................. 31H1 

.............................................. 31HA1 

3119 ................. ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE 

F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE 

CONTROLLED.

565

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE IBC TABLE—Continued

UN No. Organic peroxide Type of IBC Maximum

quantity (litres) 

Control temperatureEmergency temperature

tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not 

more than 32% in diluent 

type A.

31A 1250 +10 °C +15 °C.

tert-Butyl peroxy-2- 

ethylhexanoate, not more 

than 32% in diluent type B.

31HA1 1000 +30 °C +35 °C

.............................................. 31A 1250 +30 °C +35 °C

tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, 

not more than 32% in diluent 

type A.

31A 1250 0 °C +10 °C

tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, 

not more than 52%, stable 

dispersion, in water.

31A 1250 ¥5 °C +5 °C.

tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not 

more than 27% in diluent 

type B.

31HA1 1000 +10 °C +15 °C

.............................................. 31A 1250 +10 °C +15 °C

Dicyclohexylperoxydicarbonate,

not more than 42% as a stable dispersion, in water.

31A 1250 +10 °C +15 °C

Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl)

peroxydicarbonate, not more 

than 42%, stable dispersion, 

in water.

31HA1 1000 +30 °C +35 °C

Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate, not 

more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water.

31HA1 1000 +30 °C +35 °C

Di-(2-ethylhexyl)

peroxydicarbonate, not more 

than 62%, staple dispersion, 

in water.

31A 1250 ¥20 °C ¥10 °C.

Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate, 

not more than 42%, stable 

dispersion, in water.

31HA1 1000 +15 °C +20 °C

Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)

peroxide, not more than 38% 

in diluent type A.

31HA1 1000 +10 °C +15 °C

.............................................. 31A 1250 +10 °C +15 °C

Di-(2-

neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)

benzene, not more than 

42%, stable dispersion, in 

water.

31A 1250 ¥15 °C ¥5 °C.

3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl

peroxy-neodecanoate, not 

more than 52%, stable dispersion, in water.

31A 1250 ¥15 °C ¥5 °C.

Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)

peroxide, not more than 

52%, stable dispersion, in 

water.

31A 1250 +10 °C +15 °C

1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl

peroxyneodecanoate, not 

more than 52%, stable dispersion, in water.

31A 1250 ¥5 °C +5 °C

(f) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject 

to the conditions and limitations of 

this section if the IBC type is authorized according to paragraph (e) of this 

section, as applicable, and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O 

of part 178 of this subchapter at the 

Packing Group II performance level. 

Type F organic peroxides or self-reactive substances are not authorized for 

transportation in IBCs other than 

those specified, unless approved by the 

Associate Administrator. 

(1) IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during transportation. The inlet to the pressure relief 

device shall be sited in the vapor space 

of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during transportation. 

566

§ 173.225 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(2) To prevent explosive rupture of 

metal IBCs or composite IBCs with a 

complete metal casing, the emergencyrelief devices shall be designed to vent 

all the decomposition products and vapors evolved during self-accelerating 

decomposition or during a period of not 

less than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula 

in paragraph (h)(3)(v) of this section. 

The control and emergency temperatures specified in the Organic Peroxide 

IBC Table are based on a non-insulated 

IBC.

(g) Organic Peroxide Portable Tank 

Table. The following Organic Peroxide 

Portable Tank Table provides certain 

portable tank requirements and identifies, by technical name, those organic 

peroxides that are authorized for transportation in the bulk packagings listed 

in paragraph (h). Organic peroxides 

listed in this table, provided they meet 

the specific packaging requirements 

found in paragraph (h), are not subject 

to the approval provisions of §173.128 of 

this part. 

567

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE PORTABLE

TANK

TABLE

UN No. Hazardous material 

Minimum

test

pressure

(bar)

Minimum shell 

thickness (mm-reference steel) 

See. . . 

Bottom opening requirements

See. . . 

Pressure-relief requirements

See. . . 

Filling limits Control tempera- ture Emergency tem- perature

3109 ......... ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, 

LIQUID.

tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not 

more than 72% with water.

*Provided that steps have been 

taken to achieve the safety equivalence of 65% tert-Butyl hydroperoxide and 35% water.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

Cumyl hydro-peroxide, not more 

than 90% in diluent type A.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more 

32% in diluent type A.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

Dicumyl peroxide, less than or 

equal to 100% in diluent type B.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

Isopropyl cumyl hydro-peroxide, 

not more than 72% in diluent type A.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

p-Menthyl hydro-peroxide, not 

more than 72% in diluent type A.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

Pinanyl hydro-peroxide, not more 

than 56% in diluent type A.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

3110 ......... ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, 

SOLID.

Dicumyl peroxide less than or 

equal to 100% with inert solids.

*Maximum quantity per portable 

tank 2,000 kg.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

3119 ......... ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, 

LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED.

tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate, 

not more than 47% in diluent type A.

4 § 178.274 (d)(2) § 178.275 (d)(3) § 178.275 (g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

¥10 °C ¥5 °C.

tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not 

more than 32% in diluent type B.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

+30 °C +35 °C

tert-Butyl peroxy-2- 

ethylhexanoate, not more than 32% in diluent B.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

+15 °C +20 °C

568

§ 173.225 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

ORGANIC PEROXIDE PORTABLE

TANK

TABLE—Continued

UN No. Hazardous material 

Minimum

test

pressure

(bar)

Minimum shell 

thickness (mm-reference steel) 

See. . . 

Bottom opening requirements

See. . . 

Pressure-relief requirements

See. . . 

Filling limits Control tempera- ture Emergency tem- perature

tert-Butylperoxypivalate, not 

more than 27% in diluent type B.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

+5 °C +10 °C

tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate, not more than 32% 

in diluent type B.

4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

+35 °C +40 °C

Di-(3,5,5-trimethyl-hexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 38% in 

diluent type A or type B.

4 § 178.274 (d)(2) § 178.275 (d)(3) § 178.275 (g)(1) Not more than 90% at 

59 °F (15 °C)

0 °C +5 °C.

Peroxyacetic acid, distilled, stabilized, not more than 41%. 4 § 178.274(d)(2) § 178.275(d)(3) § 178.275(g)(1) Not more than 90% at 59 °F (15 °C) +30 °C +35 °C

569

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.225 

(h) Bulk packagings other than IBCs. 

The following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the conditions and 

limitations of this section, if the organic peroxide is listed in the Organic 

Peroxide Portable Tank Table and bulk 

packagings are authorized, or if the organic peroxide is specifically authorized for transport in a bulk packaging 

by this paragraph (h), and the bulk 

packaging conforms to the requirements of this subchapter: 

(1) Rail cars. Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 

109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 fusion-weld 

tank car tanks are authorized. DOT 

103W, 111A60F1 and 111A60W1 tank car 

tanks must have bottom outlets effectively sealed from inside. Gauging devices are required on DOT 103W tank 

car tanks. Riveted tank car tanks are 

not authorized. 

(2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 307, 

MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, DOT 407, and 

DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles 

with a tank design pressure of at least 

172 kPa (25 psig) are authorized. 

(3) Portable tanks. The following requirements apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances. DOT 

51, 57, IM 101 portable tanks, and UN 

portable tanks that conform to the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, are authorized. Type F organic 

peroxide or self-reactive substance formulations other than those indicated 

in the Organic Peroxide Portable Tank 

Table may be transported in portable 

tanks if approved by the Associate Administrator. The following conditions 

also apply: 

(i) The portable tank must be designed for a test pressure of at least 0.4 

MPa (4 bar). 

(ii) The portable tank must be fitted 

with temperature-sensing devices. 

(iii) The portable tank must be fitted 

with pressure relief devices and emergency-relief devices. Vacuum-relief devices may also be used. Pressure relief 

devices must operate at pressures determined according to both the properties of the hazardous material and 

the construction characteristics of the 

portable tank. Fusible elements are 

not allowed in the shell. 

(iv) The pressure relief devices must 

consist of reclosing devices fitted to 

prevent significant build-up within the 

portable tank of the decomposition 

products and vapors released at a temperature of 50 °C (122 °F). The capacity 

and start-to-discharge pressure of the 

relief devices must be in accordance 

with the applicable requirements of 

this subchapter specified for the portable tank. The pressure relief devices 

must not allow liquid to escape in the 

event the portable tank is overturned 

in a loaded condition. 

(v)(A) The emergency-relief devices 

may be of the reclosing or frangible 

types, or a combination of the two, designed to vent all the decomposition 

products and vapors evolved during a 

period of not less than one hour of 

complete fire engulfment as calculated 

by the following formula: 

q = 70961 F A0.82

Where:

q = heat absorption (W) 

A = wetted area (m2)

F = insulation factor (¥)

(B) Insulation factor (F) in the formula in paragraph (h)(3)(v)(A) of this 

section equals 1 for non-insulated vessels and for insulated vessels F is calculated using the following formula: 

F

TPO = U 923 ( ) −

47032

Where:

U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation (W·m¥2·K¥1); where K = heat conductivity of insulation layer (W·m¥1·K¥1),

and L = thickness of insulation layer (m). 

TPO = temperature of material at relieving 

conditions (K). 

(vi) The start-to-discharge pressure 

of emergency-relief devices must be 

higher than that specified for the pressure relief devices in paragraph 

(h)(3)(iv) of this section. The emergency-relief devices must be sized and 

designed in such a way that the maximum pressure in the shell never exceeds the test pressure of the portable 

tank.

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h)(3)(vi): An example 

of a method to determine the size of emergency-relief devices is given in Appendix 5 of 

the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter). A second example of a test method for venting sizing is 

given in the American Institute of Chemical 

Engineers Process Safety Progress Journal, 


ER20DE04.002</MATH> ER20DE04.003</MATH>
570

§ 173.226 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

June 2002 issue (Vol. 21, No. 2) (Informational 

materials not requiring incorporation by reference, see §171.7(b)). 

(vii) For insulated portable tanks, 

the capacity and setting of emergencyrelief devices must be determined assuming a loss of insulation from 1% of 

the surface area. 

(viii) Vacuum-relief devices and reclosing devices on portable tanks used 

for flammable hazardous materials 

must be provided with flame arresters. 

Any reduction of the relief capacity 

caused by the flame arrester must be 

taken into account and the appropriate 

relief capacity must be provided. 

(ix) Service equipment such as devices and external piping must be designed and constructed so that no hazardous material remains in them after 

filling the portable tank. 

(x) Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sun-shield. If 

the SADT of the hazardous material in 

the portable tank is 55 °C (131 °F) or 

less, the portable tank must be completely insulated. The outer surface 

must be finished in white or bright 

metal.

(xi) The degree of filling must not exceed 90% at 15 °C (59 °F).

(xii) DOT 57 metal portable tanks are 

authorized only for those materials or 

mixtures of two or more materials that 

are provided with a reference to Note 9 

in Column 8 of the Organic Peroxide 

Table, found in paragraph (c) of this 

section. DOT 57 portable tanks must 

conform to the venting requirements of 

paragraph (f) of this section. These 

portable tanks are not subject to any 

other requirements of paragraph (h) of 

this section. 

(4) For tertiary butyl hydroperoxide 

(TBHP), each tank car, cargo tank or 

portable tank must contain 7.6 cm (3.0 

inches) low density polyethylene (PE) 

saddles having a melt index of at least 

0.2 grams per 10 minutes (for example 

see, ASTM D1238, condition E) as part 

of the lading, with a ratio of PE to 

TBHP over a range of 0.008 to 0.012 by 

mass. Alternatively, plastic or metal 

containers equipped with fusible plugs 

having a melting point between 69 °C

(156 °F) and 71 °C (160 °F) and filled with 

a sufficient quantity of water to dilute 

the TBHP to 65% or less by mass may 

be used. The PE saddles must be visually inspected after each trip and, at 

a minimum, once every 12 months, and 

replaced when discoloration, fracture, 

severe deformation, or other indication 

of change is noted. 

[69 FR 76159, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 70 

FR 34398, June 14, 2005; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 

2007; 74 FR 2260, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.226 Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group 

I, Hazard Zone A. 

Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Zone A 

poisonous by inhalation (see §173.133) 

must be packed in non-bulk packagings 

in accordance with the following paragraphs:

(a) In seamless specification or UN 

cylinders conforming to the requirements of §173.40. 

(b) In 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, or 6HA1 

drums further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 

drum. Both inner and outer drums 

must conform to the performance test 

requirements of subpart M of part 178 

of this subchapter at the Packing 

Group I performance level. The outer 

drums may be tested either as a package intended to contain inner packagings (combination package) or as a 

single packaging intended to contain 

solids or liquids at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled packaging system. All outer 

drums, even those tested to contain 

inner packaging or as single packagings for solids, must withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 100 kPa (15 

psig). The outer drum must have a 

minimum thickness of 1.35 mm (0.053 

inch) for a 1A2 outer drum or 6.3 mm 

(0.248 inch) for a 1H2 outer drum. In addition, the inner drum must— 

(1) Be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the hydrostatic pressure test 

in §178.605 of this subchapter at a test 

pressure of 300 kPa (45 psig); 

(2) Satisfactorily withstand the 

leakproofness test in §178.604 of this 

subchapter using an internal air pressure of at least twice the vapor pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of the material to 

be packaged; 

(3) Have screw-type closures that 

are—

571

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.226 

(i) Closed and tightened to a torque 

prescribed by the closure manufacturer, using a properly calibrated device that is capable of measuring 

torque;

(ii) Physically held in place by any 

means capable of preventing back-off 

or loosening of the closure by impact 

or vibration during transportation; and 

(iii) Provided with a cap seal that is 

properly applied in accordance with the 

cap seal manufacturer’s recommendations and is capable of withstanding an 

internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 

psig).

(4) Have a minimum thickness as follows:

(i) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.3 mm 

(0.051 inch); 

(ii) For a 1B1 drum, 3.9 mm (0.154 

inch);

(iii) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 

inch); and 

(iv) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic 

inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0622 

inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 

0.96 mm (0.0378 inch). 

(5) Be isolated from the outer drum 

by a shock-mitigating, non-reactive 

material, which completely surrounds 

the inner packaging on all sides. 

(c) In combination packagings, consisting of an inner packaging system 

and an outer packaging, as follows: 

(1) Outer packagings: 

Steel drum: 1A2 

Aluminum drum: 1B2 

Metal drum, other than steel or aluminum: 1N2 

Plywood drum: 1D 

Fiber drum: 1G 

Plastic drum: 1H2 

Steel box: 4A 

Aluminum box: 4B 

Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2 

Plywood box: 4D 

Reconstituted wood box: 4F 

Fiberboard box: 4G 

Expanded plastic box: 4H2 

Solid plastic box: 4H2 

(2) Inner packaging system. The 

inner packaging system consists of two 

packagings:

(i) an impact-resistant receptacle of 

glass, earthenware, plastic or metal securely cushioned with a non-reactive, 

absorbent material, and 

(A) Capacity of each inner receptacle 

may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon). 

(B) An inner receptacle that has a 

closure must have a closure which is 

physically held in place by any means 

capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transportation. 

(ii) Packed within a leak-tight packaging of metal or plastic. 

(iii) This combination packaging in 

turn is packed within the outer packaging.

(3) Additional requirements: 

(i) The total amount of liquid contained in the outer packaging must not 

exceed 16 L (4 gallons). 

(ii) The inner packaging system must 

conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of 

this subchapter, at the Packaging 

Group I performance level when subjected to the following tests: 

(A) §178.603—Drop Test 

(B) §178.604—Leakproofness Test 

(C) §178.605—Hydrostatic Pressure 

Test

(iii) The inner packaging system 

must meet the above tests without the 

benefit of the outer packaging. 

(iv) The leakproofness and hydrostatic pressure test may be conducted 

on either the inner receptacle or the 

outer packaging of the inner packaging 

system.

(v) The outer package must conform 

to the performance test requirements 

of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packaging Group I performance level as applicable for the 

type of package being used. 

(d) If approved by the Associate Administrator, 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, 6HA1 or 

6HH1 drums described in paragraph (b) 

of this section may be used without 

being further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 

drum if the shipper loads the material, 

palletizes the drums, blocks and braces 

the drums within the transport vehicle 

and seals the transport vehicle used. 

Drums may not be stacked (double 

decked) within the transport vehicle. 

Shipments must be from one origin to 

one destination only without any intermediate pickup or delivery. 

(e) Prior to reuse, all authorized 

inner drums must be leakproofness 

tested and marked in accordance with 

§173.28 using a minimum test pressure 

572

§ 173.227 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

as indicated in paragraph (b)(2) of this 

section.

[69 FR 76172, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 71 

FR 33881, June 12, 2006; 74 FR 2263, Jan. 14, 

2009]

§ 173.227 Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group 

I, Hazard Zone B. 

(a) In packagings as authorized in 

§173.226 and seamless and welded specification cylinders or UN seamless cylinders conforming to the requirements 

of §173.40. 

(b) 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, 6HA1, or 6HH1 

drums further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 

drum. Both the inner and outer drums 

must conform to the performance test 

requirements of subpart M of part 178 

of this subchapter at the Packing 

Group I performance level. Both the 

inner and outer drums must conform to 

the performance test requirements of 

subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter 

at the Packing Group I performance 

level. The outer drums may be tested 

either as a package intended to contain 

inner packagings (combination package) or as a single packaging intended 

to contain solids or liquids at a mass 

corresponding to the mass of the assembled packaging system. The outer 

drum must have a minimum thickness 

of 1.35 mm (0.053 inches) for a 1A2 outer 

drum or 6.30 mm (0.248 inches) for a 1H2 

outer drum. Outer 1A2 and 1H2 drums 

must withstand a hydrostatic test 

pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig). Capacity 

of the inner drum may not exceed 220 

liters. In addition, the inner drum 

must conform to all of the following requirements:

(1) Satisfactorily withstand the 

leakproofness test in §178.604 of this 

subchapter using an internal air pressure of at least two times the vapor 

pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of the material to be packaged; 

(2) Have screw closures that are— 

(i) Closed and tightened to a torque 

prescribed by the closure manufacturer, using a properly calibrated device that is capable of measuring 

torque;

(ii) Physically held in place by any 

means capable of preventing back-off 

or loosening of the closure by impact 

or vibration during transportation; and 

(iii) Provided with a cap seal that is 

properly applied in accordance with the 

cap seal manufacturer’s recommendations and is capable of withstanding an 

internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 

psig).

(3) Have a minimum thickness as follows:

(i) For a 1A1 drum, 0.69 mm (0.027 

inch);

(ii) For a 1B1 drum, 2.79 mm (0.110 

inch);

(iii) For a 1H1 drum, 1.14 mm (0.045 

inch); or 

(iv) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic 

inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0625 

inch), the outer steel drum shall be 0.70 

mm (0.027 inch). 

(4) Be isolated from the outer drum 

by a shock-mitigating, non-reactive 

material which completely surrounds 

the inner packaging on all sides. 

(5) Prior to reuse, all authorized 

inner drums must be leakproofness 

tested and marked in accordance with 

§173.28 using a minimum test pressure 

as indicated in paragraph (b)(1) of this 

section.

(c) 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, 6HA1 or 6HH1 

drums described in paragraph (b) of 

this section may be used without being 

further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 drum if 

the shipper loads the material, blocks 

and braces the drums within the transport vehicle and seals the transport vehicle used. Drums may not be stacked 

(double decked) within the transport 

vehicle. Shipments must be from one 

origin to one destination only without 

any intermediate pickup or delivery. 

[70 FR 34398, June 14, 2005, as amended at 71 

FR 33881, June 12, 2006; 73 FR 57006, Oct.1, 

2008]

§ 173.228 Bromine pentafluoride or 

bromine trifluoride. 

(a) Bromine pentafluoride and bromine trifluoride are authorized in 

packagings as follows: 

(1) Specification 3A150, 3AA150, 3B240, 

3BN150, 4B240, 4BA240, 4BW240, and 

3E1800 cylinders. 

(2) UN cylinders as specified in part 

178 of this subchapter, except acetylene 

cylinders and non-refillable cylinders, 

with a minimum test pressure of 10 bar 

and a minimum outage of 8 percent by 

volume. The use of UN tubes and 

MEGCs is not authorized. 

573

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.230 

(3) The use of a pressure relief device 

is not authorized. 

(b) A material in Hazard Zone A must 

be transported in a seamless specification cylinder conforming to the requirements of §173.40. However, a welded cylinder filled before October 1, 2002, 

in accordance with the requirements of 

this subchapter in effect at the time of 

filling, may be transported for reprocessing or disposal of the cylinder’s contents until December 31, 2003. No cylinder may be equipped with a pressure 

relief device. 

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 

FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 24660, May 8, 

2003, as amended at 71 FR 33881, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.229 Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen. 

When the §172.101 table specifies that 

a hazardous material be packaged in 

accordance with this section, only 4G 

fiberboard boxes, with inner packagings of polyethylene or other suitable material, are authorized. Fiberboard boxes must be reinforced and insulated and sufficient dry ice must be 

used to maintain the hydrate or acid in 

a frozen state during transportation. 

Each packaging must conform to the 

general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, and to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the Packing Group I performance level. 

Transportation is authorized only by 

private or contract carrier by motor 

vehicle.

§ 173.230 Fuel cell cartridges containing hazardous material. 

(a) Requirements for Fuel Cell Cartridges. Fuel cell cartridges, including 

when contained in or packed with 

equipment, must be designed and constructed to prevent fuel leakage under 

normal conditions of transportation. 

Fuel cell cartridge design types using 

liquids as fuels must pass an internal 

pressure test at a gauge pressure of 100 

kPa (15 psig) without leakage. Except 

for fuel cell cartridges containing hydrogen in metal hydride which must be 

in conformance with paragraph (d) of 

this section, each fuel cell cartridge design type including when contained in 

or packed with equipment, must pass a 

1.2 meter (3.9 feet) drop test onto an 

unyielding surface in the orientation 

most likely to result in the failure of 

the containment system with no loss of 

contents. Fuel cell cartridges installed 

in or integral to a fuel cell system are 

regarded as contained in equipment. 

Fuel cell cartridges containing a Division 2.1, Division 4.3 or Class 8 material 

must meet the following additional requirements.

(b) A fuel cell cartridge designed to 

contain a Division 4.3 or a Class 8 material may contain an activator provided it is fitted with two independent 

means of preventing unintended mixing with the fuel during transport. 

(c) Each fuel cell cartridge designed 

to contain a liquefied flammable gas 

must:

(1) Be capable of withstanding, without leakage or bursting, a pressure of 

at least two times the equilibrium 

pressure of the contents at 55 °C (131 

°F);

(2) Contain no more than 200 mL of 

liquefied flammable gas with a vapor 

pressure not exceeding 1,000 kPa (150 

psig) at 55 °C (131 °F); and 

(3) Pass the hot water bath test prescribed in accordance with 

§173.306(a)(3)(v). 

(d) Each fuel cell cartridge designed 

to contain hydrogen in a metal hydride 

must conform to the following: 

(1) Each fuel cell cartridge must have 

a water capacity less than or equal to 

120 mL (4 fluid ounces). 

(2) Each fuel cell cartridge must be a 

design type that has been subjected, 

without leakage or bursting, a pressure 

of at least two times the design pressure of the cartridge at 55 °C (131 °F) or 

200 kPa (30 psig) more than the design 

pressure of the cartridge at 55 °C (131 

°F), whichever is greater. The pressure 

at which the test is conducted is referred to as the ‘‘minimum shell burst 

pressure.’’ The pressure within the fuel 

cell cartridge must not exceed 5 MPa 

(725 psig) at 55 °C (131 °F).

(3) Each fuel cell cartridge must be 

filled in accordance with the procedure 

provided by the manufacturer. The 

manufacturer must provide the following information with each fuel cell 

cartridge:

(i) Inspection procedures to be carried out before initial filling and before 

refilling of the fuel cell cartridge; 

574

§ 173.230 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(ii) Safety precautions and potential 

hazards to be aware of; 

(iii) A method of determining when 

the rated capacity has been achieved; 

(iv) Minimum and maximum pressure 

range;

(v) Minimum and maximum temperature range; and 

(vi) Any other requirements to be 

met for initial filling and refilling including the type of equipment to be 

used.

(4) Each fuel cell cartridge must be 

permanently marked with the following information: 

(i) The rated charging pressure in 

megapascals (MPa); 

(ii) The manufacturer’s serial number 

of the fuel cell cartridges or unique 

identification number; and 

(iii) The expiration date based on the 

maximum service life (yyyy/mm). 

(5) Design type tests: Each fuel cell 

cartridge design type must be subjected to and pass the following tests 

(this includes cartridges integral to a 

fuel cell): 

(i) Drop test. A 1.8 m (5.9 feet) drop 

test onto an unyielding surface must 

be performed. There must be no leakage. Leakage must be determined using 

a soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all possible leak locations, when the fuel cell cartridge is 

charged to its rated charging pressure. 

The fuel cell cartridge must then be 

hydrostatically pressurized to destruction. The burst pressure must be greater than 85% of the minimum shell 

burst pressure. The drop must be performed in the following four different 

orientations:

(A) Vertically, on the end containing 

the shut-off valve assembly; 

(B) Vertically, on the end opposite to 

the shut-off valve assembly; 

(C) Horizontally, onto a steel apex 

with a diameter of 3.8 cm (9.7 in), with 

the steel apex in the upward position; 

and

(D) At a 45° angle on the end containing the shut-off valve assembly. 

(ii) Fire test. A fuel cell cartridge 

filled to rated capacity (with hydrogen) 

must be subjected to a fire engulfment 

test. The cartridge design (including 

design types with an integral vent feature) is deemed to pass the fire test if: 

(A) The internal pressure vents to 

zero gauge pressure without the rupture of the cartridge; or 

(B) The cartridge withstands the fire 

for a minimum of 20 minutes without 

rupture.

(iii) Hydrogen cycling test. A fuel cell 

cartridge must be subjected to a hydrogen cycling test to ensure that the design stress limits are not exceeded during use. The fuel cell cartridge must be 

cycled from not more than 5% rated 

hydrogen capacity to not less than 95% 

rated hydrogen capacity and back to 

not more than 5% rated hydrogen capacity. The rated charging pressure 

must be used for charging and temperatures must be within the operating 

temperature range. The cycling must 

be continued for at least 100 cycles. 

Following the cycling test the fuel cell 

cartridge must be charged and the 

water volume displaced by the cartridge must be measured. The cartridge 

design is deemed to pass the test if the 

water volume displaced by the cycled 

cartridge does not exceed the water 

volume displaced by an uncycled cartridge charged to 95% rated capacity 

and pressurized to 75% of its minimum 

shell burst pressure. 

(6) Production leak test. Each fuel cell 

cartridge must be tested for leaks at 15 

°C ± 5 °C (59 °F ± 9 °F) while pressurized 

to its rated charging pressure. There 

must be no leakage. Leakage must be 

determined using a soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all 

possible leak locations. 

(e) The following packagings are authorized provided the general packaging requirements subpart B of part 

173 of this subchapter are met: 

(1) For fuel cell cartridges, rigid 

packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 

the packing group II performance level; 

and

(2) Strong outer packagings for fuel 

cell cartridges contained in equipment 

or packed with equipment. Large 

equipment containing fuel cell cartridges may be transported unpackaged 

if the equipment provides an equivalent level of protection. 

(i) Fuel cell cartridges packed with 

equipment must be packed with cushioning material or divider(s) or inner 

575

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.230 

packagings so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against damage 

that may be caused by the shifting or 

placement of the equipment and cartridges within the packaging. 

(ii) Fuel cell cartridges contained in 

equipment must be protected against 

short circuits and the entire fuel cell 

system must be protected from unintentional activation. The equipment 

must be securely cushioned in the 

outer packaging. 

(f) For transportation by aircraft, the 

following additional provisions apply: 

(1) The package must comply with 

the applicable provisions of §173.27 of 

this subchapter; 

(2) For fuel cell cartridges contained 

in equipment, fuel cell systems must 

not charge batteries during transport; 

(3) For transportation aboard passenger aircraft, for fuel cell cartridges 

contained in equipment, each fuel cell 

system and fuel cell cartridge must 

conform to IEC PAS 62282–6–1 Ed. 1 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) or a 

standard approved by the Associate Administrator;

(4) When packed with equipment, fuel 

cell cartridges must be packed in an intermediate packaging along with the 

equipment they are capable of 

powering, and the intermediate packagings packed in a strong outer packaging. The maximum number of fuel 

cell cartridges in the intermediate 

packaging may not be more than the 

number required to power the equipment, plus two spares; 

(5) Large robust articles containing 

fuel cells may be transported 

unpackaged when approved by the Associate Administrator; and 

(6) The mass of a fuel cell cartridge 

containing a Division 4.3 or Class 8 materials must be not more than 1 kg (2.2 

lbs).

(7) Fuel cell cartridges intended for 

transportation in carry-on baggage on 

board passenger aircraft must comply 

with paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d) in this 

section and the applicable provisions 

prescribed in §175.10 of this subchapter. 

(g) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of hazardous materials contained 

in fuel cell cartridges are excepted 

from the labeling, placarding and the 

specification packaging requirements 

of this subchapter when packaged according to this section. Each package 

must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part 

and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) 

gross weight. Limited quantities of fuel 

cell cartridges are not permitted for 

transportation by aircraft. For transportation by highway, rail and vessel, 

the following combination packagings 

are authorized: 

(1) For flammable liquids, in fuel cell 

cartridges containing not more than 1.0 

L (0.3 gallon), packed in strong outer 

packaging.

(2) For water-reactive substances (Division 4.3 Dangerous when wet material), in fuel cell cartridges containing 

not more than 0.5 L (16.9 fluid ounces) 

for liquids or not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pound) 

for solids, packed in strong outer packaging.

(3) For corrosive materials, in fuel 

cell cartridges containing not more 

than 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) for liquids or not 

more than 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) for solids 

packed in strong outer packaging. 

(4) For liquefied (compressed) flammable gas, in fuel cell cartridges not 

over 120 mL (4 fluid ounces) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packaging.

(5) For hydrogen in metal hydride, in 

fuel cell cartridges not over 120 mL (4 

fluid ounces) net capacity each, packed 

in strong outer packaging. 

(h) Consumer commodities. A limited 

quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (g) of this section 

and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 of this subchapter may 

be renamed ‘‘Consumer commodity’’ 

and reclassed as ORM–D. In addition to 

the exceptions provided in paragraph 

(g) of this section, shipments of ORM– 

D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of 

part 172 of this subchapter, unless the 

material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, 

marine pollutant, and are eligible for 

the exceptions provided in §173.156. 

[74 FR 2263, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 

FR 73, Jan. 4, 2010] 

576

§ 173.240 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Subpart F—Bulk Packaging for 

Hazardous Materials Other 

Than Class 1 and Class 7 

§ 173.240 Bulk packaging for certain 

low hazard solid materials. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 

109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car 

tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank 

car tanks; and metal non-DOT specification, sift-proof tank car tanks and 

sift-proof closed cars. 

(b) Motor vehicles: Specification MC 

300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 

305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 

312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, 

and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; non-DOT specification, sift-proof 

cargo tank motor vehicles; and siftproof closed vehicles. 

(c) Portable tanks and closed bulk bins. 

DOT 51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; 

IMO type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 

102 portable tanks; UN portable tanks; 

marine portable tanks conforming to 46 

CFR part 64; and sift-proof non-DOT 

Specification portable tanks and closed 

bulk bins are authorized. 

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject 

to the conditions and limitations of 

this section provided the IBC type is 

authorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific 

hazardous material in Column (7) of 

the §172.101 Table of this subchapter 

and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column 

(5) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being transported.

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials: 

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and 

(ii) Packing Group I solids that may 

become liquid during transportation. 

(2) The following IBCs may not be 

used for Packing Group II and III solids 

that may become liquid during transportation:

(i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; 

(ii) Fiberboard: 11G; 

(iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 

13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 

13M2; and 

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. 

(e) Large Packagings. Large Packagings are authorized subject to the 

conditions and limitations of this section provided the Large Packaging 

type is authorized according to the IBC 

packaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) 

of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter 

and the Large Packaging conforms to 

the requirements in subpart Q of part 

178 of this subchapter at the Packing 

Group performance level as specified in 

Column (5) of the §172.101 Table for the 

material being transported. 

(1) Except as specifically authorized 

in this subchapter, Large Packagings 

may not be used for Packing Group I or 

II hazardous materials. 

(2) Large Packagings with paper or 

fiberboard inner receptacles may not 

be used for solids that may become liquid in transportation. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66274, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 33435, 

June 21, 2001] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: Amendments published at 

66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory 

instruction.

§ 173.241 Bulk packagings for certain 

low hazard liquid and solid materials. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 

109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car 

tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank 

car tanks and AAR Class 203W, 206W, 

and 211W tank car tanks. 

(b) Cargo tanks: DOT specification MC 

300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 

305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 

312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, 

577

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.242 

and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; and non-DOT specification cargo 

tank motor vehicles suitable for transport of liquids. 

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 

51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; IMO 

type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 102 

portable tanks; UN portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 

CFR part 64; and non-DOT Specification portable tanks suitable for transport of liquids are authorized. For 

transportation by vessel, also see 

§176.340 of this subchapter. For transportation of combustible liquids by 

vessel, additional requirements are 

specified in §176.340 of this subchapter. 

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject 

to the conditions and limitations of 

this section provided the IBC type is 

authorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific 

hazardous material in Column (7) of 

the §172.101 Table of this subchapter 

and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column 

(5) of the §172.101 Table for the material being transported. 

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials: 

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and 

(ii) Packing Group I solids that may 

become liquid during transportation. 

(2) The following IBCs may not be 

used for Packing Group II and III solids 

that may become liquid during transportation:

(i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; 

(ii) Fiberboard: 11G; 

(iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 

13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 

13M2; and 

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. 

(e) Large Packagings. Large Packagings are authorized subject to the 

conditions and limitations of this section provided the Large Packaging 

type is authorized according to the IBC 

packaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) 

of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter 

and the Large Packaging conforms to 

the requirements in subpart Q of part 

178 of this subchapter at the Packing 

Group performance level as specified in 

Column (5) of the §172.101 Table for the 

material being transported. 

(1) Except as specifically authorized 

in this subchapter, Large Packagings 

may not be used for Packing Group I or 

II hazardous materials. 

(2) Large Packagings with paper or 

fiberboard inner receptacles may not 

be used for solids that may become liquid in transportation. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 33435, 

June 21, 2001; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 70 FR 

34075, June 13, 2005; 75 FR 5394, Feb. 2, 2010] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: Amendments published at 

66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory 

instruction.

§ 173.242 Bulk packagings for certain 

medium hazard liquids and solids, 

including solids with dual hazards. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 

109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car 

tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank 

car tanks and AAR Class 206W tank car 

tanks.

(b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, 

MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, 

MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, 

MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, and 

DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles. 

Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3, 

Packing Group I or II, or Packing 

Group III with a flash point of less 

than 38 °C (100 °F); Class 6, Packing 

Group I or II; and Class 8, Packing 

Group I or II materials must conform 

to the following special requirements: 

(1) Pressure relief system: Except as 

provided by §173.33(d), each cargo tank 

must be equipped with a pressure relief 

system meeting the requirements of 

§178.346–3 or §178.347–4 of this subchapter. However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 

cargo tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo 

tank (except for Class 8, Packing Group 

I and II). Pressure relief devices on MC 

330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet 

578

§ 173.242 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

the requirement in §178.337–9 of this 

subchapter.

(2) Bottom outlets: DOT 406, DOT 407 

and DOT 412 must be equipped with 

stop-valves meeting the requirements 

of §178.345–11 of this subchapter; MC 

304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 

cargo tanks must be equipped with 

stop-valves capable of being remotely 

closed within 30 seconds of actuation 

by manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and 

II) by a closure activated at a temperature not over 121 °C (250 °F); MC 330 and 

MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped 

with internal self-closing stop-valves 

meeting the requirements in §178.337–11 

of this subchapter. 

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 

51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; Specification IM 101, IM 102, and UN portable tanks when a T Code is specified 

in Column (7) of the §172.101 Hazardous 

Materials Table for a specific hazardous material; and marine portable 

tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64 are 

authorized. DOT Specification 57 portable tanks used for the transport by 

vessel of Class 3, Packaging Group II 

materials must conform to the following:

(1) Minimum design pressure. Each

tank must have a minimum design 

pressure of 62 kPa (9 psig); 

(2) Pressure relief devices. Each tank 

must be equipped with at least one 

pressure relief device, such as a springloaded valve or fusible plug, conforming to the following: 

(i) Each pressure relief device must 

communicate with the vapor space of 

the tank when the tank is in a normal 

transportation attitude. Shutoff valves 

may not be installed between the tank 

opening and any pressure relief device. 

Pressure relief devices must be mounted, shielded, or drained to prevent the 

accumulation of any material that 

could impair the operation or discharge 

capability of the device; 

(ii) Frangible devices are not authorized;

(iii) No pressure relief device may 

open at less than 34.4 kPa (5 psig); 

(iv) If a fusible device is used for relieving pressure, the device must have 

a minimum area of 1.25 square inches. 

The device must function at a temperature between 104 °C. and 149 °C. (220 °F.

and 300 °F.) and at a pressure less than 

the design test pressure of the tank, 

unless this latter function is accomplished by a separate device; and 

(v) No relief device may be used 

which would release flammable vapors 

under normal conditions of transportation (temperature up to and including 54 °C. (130 °F.).); and 

(3) Venting capacity. The minimum 

venting capacity for pressure activated 

vents must be 6,000 cubic feet of free 

air per hour (measured at 101.3 kPa 

(14.7 psi) and 15.6 °C. (60 °F.)) at not 

more than 34.4 kPa (5 psi). The total 

emergency venting capacity (cu. ft./hr.) 

of each portable tank must be at least 

that determined from the following 

table:

Total surface area square feet 1,2 Cubic feet free 

air per hour 

20 ................................................................... 15,800 

30 ................................................................... 23,700 

40 ................................................................... 31,600 

50 ................................................................... 39,500 

60 ................................................................... 47,400 

70 ................................................................... 55,300 

80 ................................................................... 63,300 

90 ................................................................... 71,200 

100 ................................................................. 79,100 

120 ................................................................. 94,900 

140 ................................................................. 110,700 

160 ................................................................. 126,500 

1 Interpolate for intermediate sizes. 

2Surface area excludes area of legs. 

(4) Unless provided by §173.32(h)(3), 

an IM 101, 102 or UN portable tank with 

a bottom outlet and used to transport 

a liquid hazardous material that is a 

Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III with a 

flash point of less than 38 °C (100 °F);

Division 5.1 PG I or II; or Division 6.1, 

PG I or II, must have internal valves 

conforming to §178.275(d)(3) of this subchapter.

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject 

to the conditions and limitations of 

this section provided the IBC type is 

authorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific 

hazardous material in Column (7) of 

the §172.101 Table of this subchapter 

and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column 

(5) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being transported.

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials: 

579

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.243 

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and 

(ii) Packing Group I solids that may 

become liquid during transportation. 

(2) The following IBCs may not be 

used for Packing Group II and III solids 

that may become liquid during transportation:

(i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; 

(ii) Fiberboard: 11G; 

(iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 

13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 

13M2; and 

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. 

(e) Large Packagings. Large Packagings are authorized subject to the 

conditions and limitations of this section provided the Large Packaging 

type is authorized according to the IBC 

packaging code specified for the specific hazardous material in Column (7) 

of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter 

and the Large Packaging conforms to 

the requirements in subpart Q of part 

178 of this subchapter at the Packing 

Group performance level as specified in 

Column (5) of the §172.101 Table for the 

material being transported. 

(1) Except as specifically authorized 

in this subchapter, Large Packagings 

may not be used for Packing Group I or 

II hazardous materials. 

(2) Large Packagings with paper or 

fiberboard inner receptacles may not 

be used for solids that may become liquid in transportation. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173–246, 60 

FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173–252, 61 FR 

28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 

FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 

2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 32413, 

May 30, 2003; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, 2010] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: Amendments published at 

66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory 

instruction.

§ 173.243 Bulk packaging for certain 

high hazard liquids and dual hazard materials which pose a moderate hazard. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 

109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 fusion-welded tank car tanks; and Class 106 or 110 

multi-unit tank car tanks. 

(b) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 304, 

MC 307, MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank 

motor vehicles; and MC 310, MC 311, MC 

312, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank 

motor vehicles with tank design pressure of at least 172.4 kPa (25 psig). 

Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3 

or Division 6.1 materials, or Class 8, 

Packing Group I or II materials must 

conform to the following special requirements:

(1) Pressure relief system: Except as 

provided by §173.33(d), each cargo tank 

must be equipped with a pressure relief 

system meeting the requirements of 

§178.346–3 or 178.347–4 of this subchapter. However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 

cargo tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo 

tank (except for Class 8, Packing Group 

I and II). Pressure relief devices on MC 

330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet 

the requirement in §178.337–9 of this 

subchapter.

(2) Bottom outlets: DOT 407 and DOT 

412 cargo tanks must be equipped with 

stop-valves meeting the requirements 

of §178.345–11 of this subchapter; MC 

304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 

cargo tanks must be equipped with 

stop-valves capable of being remotely 

closed within 30 seconds of actuation 

by manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and 

II) by a closure activated at a temperature not over 121 °C (250 °F); MC 330 and 

MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped 

with internal self-closing stop-valves 

meeting the requirements in §178.337–11 

of this subchapter. 

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 

51 and 60 portable tanks; UN portable 

tanks and IM 101 and IM 102 portable 

tanks when a T code is specified in Column (7) of the §172.101 Table of this 

subchapter for a specific hazardous material; and marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64 with design 

pressure of at least 172.4 kPa (25 psig) 

are authorized. Unless provided by 

§173.32(h)(3), an IM 101, 102 or UN portable tank, with a bottom outlet, used 

580

§ 173.244 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

to transport a liquid hazardous material that is a Class 3, PG I or II, or PG 

III with a flash point of less than 38 °C

(100 °F); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or Division 6.1, PG I or II, must have internal valves conforming to §178.275(d)(3) 

of this subchapter. 

(d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject 

to the conditions and limitations of 

this section provided the IBC type is 

authorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific 

hazardous material in Column (7) of 

the §172.101 Table of this subchapter 

and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column 

(5) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being transported.

(1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials: 

(i) Packing Group I liquids; and 

(ii) Packing Group I solids that may 

become liquid during transportation. 

(2) The following IBCs may not be 

used for Packing Group II and III solids 

that may become liquid during transportation:

(i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F; 

(ii) Fiberboard: 11G; 

(iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 

13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 

13M2; and 

(iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2. 

(e) A dual hazard material may be 

packaged in accordance with §173.242 if: 

(1) The subsidiary hazard is Class 3 

with a flash point greater than 38 °C

(100 °F); or 

(2) The subsidiary hazard is Division 

6.1, Packing Group III; or 

(3) The subsidiary hazard is Class 8, 

Packaging Group, III. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173– 

238, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173–243, 

60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173–246, 60 FR 

49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173–252, 61 FR 

28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 

FR 10780, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 

2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 32413, 

May 30, 2003] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: Amendments published at 

66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory 

instruction.

§ 173.244 Bulk packaging for certain 

pyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), 

dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) 

materials, and poisonous liquids 

with inhalation hazards (Division 

6.1). 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(a) Rail cars: (1) Class DOT 105, 109, 

112, 114, or 120 fusion-welded tank car 

tanks; and Class 106 or 110 multi-unit 

tank car tanks. For tank car tanks 

built prior to March 16, 2009, the following conditions apply: 

(i) Division 6.1 Hazard Zone A materials must be transported in tank cars 

having a test pressure of 34.47 Bar (500 

psig) or greater and conform to Classes 

105J, 106 or 110. 

(ii) Division 6.1 Hazard Zone B materials must be transported in tank cars 

having a test pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 

psig) or greater and conform to Classes 

105S, 106, 110, 112J, 114J or 120S. 

(iii) Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous 

must be transported in tank cars having a test pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 

psig) or greater and conform to Classes 

105, 112, 114 or 120. 

(2) For materials poisonous by inhalation, single unit tank cars tanks 

built prior to March 16, 2009 and approved by the Tank Car Committee for 

transportation of the specified material. Except as provided in 

§173.244(a)(3), tank cars built on or 

after March 16, 2009 used for the transportation of the PIH materials listed 

below, must meet the applicable authorized tank car specification listed 

in the following table: 

Proper shipping name 

Authorized

tank car 

specification

Acetone cyanohydrin, stabilized (Note 1) ......... 105J500I 

112J500I

Acrolein (Note 1) ............................................... 105J600I 

Allyl Alcohol ....................................................... 105J500I 

112J500I

Bromine ............................................................. 105J500I 

Chloropicrin ........................................................ 105J500I 

112J500I

Chlorosulfonic acid ............................................ 105J500I 

112J500I

581

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.247 

Proper shipping name 

Authorized

tank car 

specification

Dimethyl sulfate ................................................. 105J500I 

112J500I

Ethyl chloroformate ............................................ 105J500I 

112J500I

Hexachlorocyclopentadiene ............................... 105J500I 

112J500I

Hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solutionor Hydrogen cyanide, aqueous solutionwith not more 

than 20% hydrogen cyanide (Note 2) ............ 105J500I 

112J500I

Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized (Note 2) .............. 105J600I 

Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous ........................... 105J500I 

112J500I

Poison inhalation hazard, Zone A materials not 

specifically identified in this table .................. 105J600I 

Poison inhalation hazard, Zone B materials not 

specifically identified in this table .................. 105J500I 

112J500I

Phosphorus trichloride ....................................... 105J500I 

112J500I

Sulfur trioxide, stabilized ................................... 105J500I 

112J500I

Sulfuric acid, fuming .......................................... 105J500I 

112J500I

Titanium tetrachloride ........................................ 105J500I 

112J500I

Note 1: Each tank car must have a reclosing pressure relief 

device having a start-to-discharge pressure of 10.34 Bar (150 

psig). Restenciling to a lower test pressure is not authorized. 

Note 2: Each tank car must have a reclosing pressure relief 

device having a start-to-discharge pressure of 15.51 Bar (225 

psig). Restenciling to a lower test pressure is not authorized. 

(3) As an alternative to the authorized tank car specification listed in the 

table in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, 

a car of the same authorized tank car 

specification but of the next lower test 

pressure, as prescribed in column 5 of 

the table at §179.101–1 of this subchapter, may be used provided that 

both of the following conditions are 

met:

(i) The difference between the alternative and the required minimum plate 

thicknesses, based on the calculation 

prescribed in §179.100–6 of this subchapter, must be added to the alternative tank car jacket and head shield. 

When the jacket and head shield are 

made from steel with a minimum tensile strength from 70,000 p.s.i. to 80,000 

p.s.i., but the required minimum plate 

thickness calculation is based on steel 

with a minimum tensile strength of 

81,000 p.s.i., the thickness to be added 

to the jacket and head shield must be 

increased by a factor of 1.157. Forming 

allowances for heads are not required 

to be considered when calculating 

thickness differences. 

(ii) The tank car jacket and head 

shield are manufactured from carbon 

steel plate as prescribed in §179.100–7(a) 

of this subchapter. 

(b) Cargo tanks: Specifications MC 330 

and MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles 

and, except for Division 4.2 materials, 

MC 312 and DOT 412 cargo tank motor 

vehicles.

(c) Portable tanks: DOT 51 portable 

tanks and UN portable tanks that meet 

the requirements of this subchapter, 

when a T code is specified in Column 

(7) of the §172.101 Table of this subchapter for the specific hazardous material, are authorized. Additionally, a 

DOT 51 or UN portable tank used for 

Division 6.1 liquids, Hazard Zone A or 

B, must be certified and stamped to the 

ASME Code as specified in §178.273(b)(6) 

of this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 

45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173–252, 61 FR 28676, 

June 5, 1996; 68 FR 45037, July 31, 2003; 72 FR 

55693, Oct. 1, 2007; 74 FR 1799, Jan. 13, 2009] 

§ 173.245 Bulk packaging for extremely 

hazardous materials such as poisonous gases (Division 2.3). 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(a) Tank car tanks and multi-unit 

tank car tanks, when approved by the 

Associate Administrator. 

(b) Cargo tank motor vehicles and 

portable tanks, when approved by the 

Associate Administrator. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 

45379, Aug. 28, 2001] 

§ 173.247 Bulk packaging for certain 

elevated temperature materials. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions in 

column 7 of the §172.101 table. On or 

after October 1, 1993, authorized packagings must meet all requirements in 

582

§ 173.247 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

paragraph (g) of this section, unless 

otherwise excepted. 

(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 

109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car 

tanks; Class DOT 106, 110 multi-unit 

tank car tanks; AAR Class 203W, 206W, 

211W tank car tanks; and non-DOT 

specification tank car tanks equivalent 

in structural design and accident damage resistance to specification packagings.

(b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, 

MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, 

MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, 

MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles; DOT 406, DOT 407, DOT 412 cargo 

tank motor vehicles; and non-DOT 

specification cargo tank motor vehicles equivalent in structural design and 

accident damage resistance to specification packagings. A non-DOT specification cargo tank motor vehicle constructed of carbon steel which is in elevated temperature material service is 

excepted from §178.345–7(d)(5) of this 

subchapter.

(c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 

51, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; IM 101 

and IM 102 portable tanks; UN portable 

tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; metal IBCs 

and non-specification portable tanks 

equivalent in structural design and accident damage resistance to specification packagings are authorized. 

(d) Crucibles: Nonspecification crucibles designed and constructed such 

that the stress in the packaging does 

not exceed one fourth (0.25) of the ultimate strength of the packaging material at any temperature within the design temperature range. Stress is determined under a load equal to the sum 

of the static or working pressure in 

combination with the loads developed 

from accelerations and decelerations 

incident to normal transportation. For 

highway transportation, these forces 

are assumed to be ‘‘1.7g’’ vertical, 

‘‘0.75g’’ longitudinal, and ‘‘0.4g’’ transverse, in reference to the axes of the 

transport vehicle. Each accelerative or 

decelerative load may be considered 

separately.

(e) Kettles: A kettle, for the purpose 

of this section, is a bulk packaging 

(portable tank or cargo tank) having a 

capacity not greater than 5678 L (1500 

gallons) with an integral heating apparatus used for melting various bituminous products such as asphalt. Kettles used for the transport of asphalt or 

bitumen are subject to the following 

requirements:

(1) Low stability kettles. Kettles with a 

ratio of track-width to fully loaded 

center of gravity (CG) height less than 

2.5 must meet all requirements of paragraph (g) of this section (track-width is 

the distance measured between the 

outer edge of the kettle tires; CG 

height is measured perpendicular from 

the road surface). 

(2) High stability kettles. (i) Kettles 

with a total capacity of less than 2650 

L (700 gallons) and a ratio of trackwidth to fully loaded CG height of 2.5 

or more are excepted from all requirements of paragraph (g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection requirements of paragraph (g)(6) of this 

section, if closures meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this 

section.

(ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 

2650 L (700 gallons) or more and a ratio 

of track-width to fully loaded CG 

height of 2.5 or more are excepted from 

the ‘‘substantially leak tight’’ requirements of paragraph (g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection requirements of paragraph (g)(6) of this 

section if closures meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this 

section.

(iii) Closures must be securely closed 

during transportation. Closures also 

must be designed to prevent opening 

and the expulsion of lading in a rollover accident. 

(f) Other bulk packagings: Bulk packagings, other than those specified in 

paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section, which are used for the transport 

of elevated temperature materials, 

must conform to all requirements of 

paragraph (g) of this section on or after 

October 1, 1993. 

(g) General requirements. Bulk packagings authorized or used for transport 

of elevated temperature materials 

must conform to the following requirements:

(1) Pressure and vacuum control equipment. When pressure or vacuum control 

equipment is required on a packaging 

authorized in this section, such equipment must be of a self-reclosing design, 

583

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.247 

must prevent package rupture or collapse due to pressure, must prevent significant release of lading due to packaging overturn or splashing or surging 

during normal transport conditions, 

and may be external to the packaging. 

(i) Pressure control equipment is not 

required if pressure in the packaging 

would increase less than 10 percent as a 

result of heating the lading from the 

lowest design operating temperature to 

a temperature likely to be encountered 

if the packaging were engulfed in a 

fire. When pressure control equipment 

is required, it must prevent rupture of 

the packaging from heating, including 

fire engulfment. 

(ii) Vacuum control equipment is not 

required if the packaging is designed to 

withstand an external pressure of 100 

kPa (14.5 psig) or if pressure in the 

packaging would decrease less than 10 

percent as a result of the lading cooling from the highest design operating 

temperature to the lowest temperature 

incurred in transport. When vacuum 

control equipment is required, it must 

prevent collapse of the packaging from 

a cooling-induced pressure differential. 

(iii) When the regulations require a 

reclosing pressure relief device, the 

lading must not render the devices inoperable (i.e. from clogging, freezing, 

or fouling). If the lading affects the 

proper operation of the device, the 

packaging must have: 

(A) A safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc or a permanent opening, each having a maximum 

effective area of 22 cm2 (3.4 in.2), for 

transportation by highway; 

(B) For transportation of asphalt by 

highway, a safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc or a permanent opening, each having a maximum 

effective area of 48 cm2 (7.4 in2); or 

(C) For transportation by rail, a nonreclosing pressure relief device incorporating a rupture disc conforming to 

the requirements of §179.15 of this subchapter.

(iv) Reclosing pressure relief devices, 

rupture discs or permanent openings 

must not allow the release of lading 

during normal transportation conditions (i.e., due to splashing or surging). 

(2) Closures. All openings, except permanent vent openings authorized in 

paragraph (g)(1)(iii) of this section, 

must be securely closed during transportation. Packagings must be substantially leak-tight so as not to allow 

any more than dripping or trickling of 

a non-continuous flow when overturned. Closures must be designed and 

constructed to withstand, without exceeding the yield strength of the packaging, twice the static loading produced by the lading in any packaging 

orientation and at all operating temperatures.

(3) Strength. Each packaging must be 

designed and constructed to withstand, 

without exceeding the yield strength of 

the packaging, twice the static loading 

produced by the lading in any orientation and at all operating temperatures. 

(4) Compatibility. The packaging and 

lading must be compatible over the entire operating temperature range. 

(5) Markings. In addition to any other 

markings required by this subchapter, 

each packaging must be durably 

marked in a place readily accessible for 

inspection in characters at least 4.8 

mm (3/16 inch) with the manufacturer’s 

name, date of manufacture, design 

temperature range, and maximum 

product weight (or ‘‘load limit’’ for 

tank cars) or volumetric capacity. 

(6) Accident damage protection. For

transportation by highway, external 

loading and unloading valves and closures must be protected from impact 

damage resulting from collision or 

overturn. Spraying equipment and the 

road oil application portion of a packaging are excepted from this requirement.

(7) New construction. Specification

packagings that are being manufactured for the transport of elevated temperature materials must be authorized 

for current construction. 

(h) Exceptions—(1) General. Packagings manufactured for elevated temperature materials service prior to October 1, 1993, which are not in full compliance with the requirements in paragraph (g) of this section, may continue 

in service if they meet the applicable 

requirements of subparts A and B of 

this part and meet the closure requirements in paragraph (g)(2) of this section by March 30, 1995. 

(2) Kettles. Kettles in service prior to 

October 1, 1993, which are used to 

584

§ 173.249 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

transport asphalt or bitumen, are excepted from specific provisions of this 

section as follows: 

(i) Kettles with a total capacity of 

less than 2650 L (700 gallons), which are 

not in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service if they meet 

the applicable requirements of subparts 

A and B of this part and if, after March 

30, 1995, closures are secured during 

transport to resist opening in an overturn.

(ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 

2650 L (700 gallons) or more, which are 

not in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service if they meet 

the applicable requirements of subparts 

A and B of this part and if, after March 

30, 1995, closures are secured during 

transport to resist opening in an overturn and no opening exceeds 46 cm2 (7.1

in2).

(3) Molten metals and molten glass. 

This section does not apply to packagings used for transportation of molten metals and molten glass by rail 

when movement is restricted to operating speeds less than 15 miles per 

hour. (See §172.203(g)(3) of this subchapter for shipping paper requirements.)

(4) Solid elevated temperature materials. 

A material which meets the definition 

of a solid elevated temperature material is excepted from all requirements 

of this subchapter except §172.325 of 

this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–227, 58 FR 3349, Jan. 8, 1993, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 

1, 1993; 173–237, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; 62 

FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 

65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33436, June 

21, 2001; 66 FR 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61013, 

Sept. 27, 2002] 

§ 173.249 Bromine. 

When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the §172.101 table. 

(a) Class DOT 105A300W or 105A500W 

tank cars. Class 105A500W tank cars 

may be equipped with manway cover 

plates, pressure relief valves, vent 

valves, and loading/unloading valves 

that are required on Class 105A–300W 

tank cars. Tank cars must conform to 

the requirements in paragraphs (a) 

through (g) of this section. 

(b) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC 

312 or DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles conforming with paragraphs (d) 

through (f) of this section. Except when 

transported as a residue, the total 

quantity in one tank may not be less 

than 88 percent or more than 96 percent 

of the volume of the tank. Cargo tanks 

in bromine service built prior to August 31, 1991, may continue in service 

under the requirements contained in 

§173.252(a)(4) of this part in effect on 

September 30, 1991. 

(c) UN portable tanks conforming to 

tank code T22 (see §172.102 of this subchapter) or specification IM 101 portable tanks conforming with paragraphs 

(d) through (f) of this section. Except 

when transported as a residue, the 

total quantity in one tank may not be 

less than 88% nor more than 92% of the 

volume of the tank. 

(d) The tank must be made from 

nickel-clad or lead-lined steel plate. 

Nickel cladding or lead lining must be 

on the inside of the tank. Nickel cladding must comprise at least 20 percent 

of the required minimum total thickness. Nickel cladding must conform to 

ASTM B 162 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Lead lining must be at least 

4.763 mm (0.188 inch) thick. All tank 

equipment and appurtenances in contact with the lading must be lined or 

made from metal not subject to deterioration by contact with lading. 

(e) Maximum filling density is 300 

percent of the tank’s water capacity. 

Minimum filling density is 287 percent 

of the tank’s water capacity. Maximum 

water capacity is 9,253 kg (20,400 

pounds) for DOT 105A300W tank cars. 

Maximum quantity of lading in DOT 

105A300W tank cars is 27,216 kg (60,000 

pounds). Maximum water capacity is 

16,964 kg (37,400 pounds) for DOT 

105A500W tank cars and DOT 105A500W 

tank cars equipped as described in 

paragraph (a) of this section. Maximum 

585

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.301 

1 Use of existing cylinders is authorized. 

New construction is not authorized. 

quantity of lading in DOT 105A500W 

tank cars is 49,895 kg (110,000 pounds). 

(f) Tank shell and head thickness for 

cargo tank motor vehicles and portable 

tanks must be at least 9.5 mm (0.375 

inch) excluding lead lining. 

(g) Except as provided in 

§173.244(a)(3), tank cars built on or 

after March 16, 2009 and used for the 

transportation of bromine must meet 

the applicable authorized tank car 

specification listed in the table in 

§173.244(a)(2). 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; 68 FR 

75745, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76174, Dec. 20, 2004; 

74 FR 1800, Jan. 13, 2009; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, 

2010]

Subpart G—Gases; Preparation 

and Packaging 

§ 173.300 [Reserved] 

§ 173.301 General requirements for 

shipment of compressed gases and 

other hazardous materials in cylinders, UN pressure receptacles and 

spherical pressure vessels. 

(a) General qualifications for use of cylinders. Unless otherwise stated, as used 

in this section, the term ‘‘cylinder’’ includes a UN pressure receptacle. As 

used in this subpart, filled or charged 

means an introduction or presence of a 

hazardous material in a cylinder. A 

cylinder filled with a Class 2 hazardous 

material (gas) and offered for transportation must meet the requirements in 

this section and §§173.301a through 

173.305, as applicable. 

(1) Compressed gases must be in UN 

pressure receptacles built in accordance with the UN standards or in metal 

cylinders and containers built in accordance with the DOT and ICC specifications and part 178 of this subchapter in effect at the time of manufacture, and requalified and marked as 

prescribed in subpart C in part 180 of 

this subchapter, if applicable. The DOT 

and ICC specifications authorized for 

use are as follows: 

Packagings

2P

2Q

ICC–31

3A

3AA

3AL

3AX

3A480X

3AAX

3B

3BN

3E

3HT

3T

4AA480

4B

4B240ET

4BA

4BW

4D

4DA

4DS

4E

4L

8

8AL

39

(2) A cylinder must be filled in accordance with this part. Before each 

filling of a cylinder, the person filling 

the cylinder must visually inspect the 

outside of the cylinder. A cylinder that 

has a crack or leak, is bulged, has a defective valve or a leaking or defective 

pressure relief device, or bears evidence 

of physical abuse, fire or heat damage, 

or detrimental rusting or corrosion, 

may not be filled and offered for transportation. A cylinder may be repaired 

and requalified only as prescribed in 

subpart C of part 180 of this subchapter. 

(3) Pressure relief devices must be 

tested for leaks before a filled cylinder 

is shipped from the cylinder filling 

plant. It is expressly forbidden to repair a leaking fusible plug device where 

the leak is through the fusible metal or 

between the fusible metal and the 

opening in the plug body, except by removal and replacement of the pressure 

relief device. 

(4) A cylinder that previously contained a Class 8 material must be requalified in accordance with §180.205(e) 

of this subchapter. 

(5) When a cylinder with a marked 

pressure limit is prescribed, another 

cylinder made under the same specification but with a higher marked pressure limit is authorized. For example, a 

586

§ 173.301 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

cylinder marked ‘‘DOT-4B500’’ may be 

used when ‘‘DOT-4B300’’ is specified. 

(6) No person may fill a cylinder 

overdue for periodic requalification 

with a hazardous material and then 

offer it for transportation. The prohibition against offering a cylinder for 

transportation that is overdue for periodic requalification does not apply to a 

cylinder filled prior to the requalification due date. 

(7) A cylinder with an authorized 

service life may not be offered for 

transportation in commerce after its 

authorized service life has expired. 

However, a cylinder in transportation 

or a cylinder filled prior to the expiration of its authorized service life may 

be transported for reprocessing or disposal of the cylinder’s contents. After 

emptying, the cylinder must be condemned in accordance with §180.205 of 

this subchapter. 

(8) The pressure of the hazardous material at 55 °C (131 °F) may not exceed 

5/4 of the service pressure of the cylinder. Sufficient outage must be provided so the cylinder will not be liquid 

full at 55 °C (131 °F).

(9) Specification 2P, 2Q, 3E, 3HT, 

spherical 4BA, 4D, 4DA, 4DS, and 39 

cylinders must be packed in strong 

non-bulk outer packagings. The outside of the combination packaging 

must be marked with an indication 

that the inner packagings conform to 

the prescribed specifications. 

(10) Any person who installs a valve 

into an aluminum cylinder in oxygen 

service must verify the valve and the 

cylinder have the same thread type. 

(b) Cylinder markings. Required markings on a cylinder must be legible and 

must meet the applicable requirements 

of subpart C of part 180 of this subchapter. Additional information may 

be marked on the cylinder provided it 

does not affect the required markings 

prescribed in the applicable cylinder 

specification.

(c) Toxic gases and mixtures. Cylinders

containing toxic gases and toxic gas 

mixtures meeting the criteria of Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A or B must conform to the requirements of §173.40 and 

CGA S–1.1 (compliance with paragraph 

9.1.1.1 is not required) (IBR; see §171.7 

of this subchapter) and CGA S–7 (IBR; 

see §171.7 of this subchapter). A DOT 39 

cylinder, UN non-refillable cylinder, or 

a UN composite cylinder certified to 

ISO–11119–3 may not be used for a toxic 

gas or toxic gas mixture meeting the 

criteria for Division 2.3, Hazard Zone A 

or B. 

(d) Gases capable of combining chemically. A filled cylinder may not contain 

any gas or material capable of combining chemically with the cylinder’s 

contents or with the cylinder’s material of construction, so as to endanger 

the cylinder’s serviceability. 

(e) Ownership of cylinder. A cylinder 

filled with a hazardous material may 

not be offered for transportation unless 

it was filled by the owner of the cylinder or with the owner’s consent. 

(f) Pressure relief device systems. (1) Except as provided in paragraphs (f)(5), 

(f)(6), and (l)(2) of this section, a cylinder filled with a gas and offered for 

transportation must be equipped with 

one or more pressure relief devices 

sized and selected as to type, location, 

and quantity, and tested in accordance 

with CGA S–1.1 (compliance with paragraph 9.1.1.1 is not required) and CGA 

S–7. The pressure relief device must be 

capable of preventing rupture of the 

normally filled cylinder when subjected to a fire test conducted in accordance with CGA C–14 (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter), or, in the 

case of an acetylene cylinder, CGA C–12 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(2) After December 31, 2003, a pressure 

relief device, when installed, must be 

in communication with the vapor space 

of a cylinder containing a Division 2.1 

(flammable gas) material. 

(3) For a specification 3, 3A, 3AA, 

3AL, 3AX, 3AXX, 3B, 3BN, or 3T cylinder filled with gases in other than Division 2.2 (except oxygen and oxidizing 

gases transported by aircraft, see 

§§173.302(f) and 173.304(f)), beginning 

with the first requalification due after 

December 31, 2003, the burst pressure of 

a CG–1, CG–4, or CG–5 pressure relief 

device must be at test pressure with a 

tolerance of plus zero to minus 10%. An 

additional 5% tolerance is allowed 

when a combined rupture disk is placed 

inside a holder. This requirement does 

not apply if a CG–2, CG–3, or CG–9 thermally activated relief device or a CG–7 

reclosing pressure valve is used on the 

cylinder.

587

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.301 

(4) A pressure relief device is required 

on a DOT 39 cylinder regardless of cylinder size or filled pressure. A DOT 39 

cylinder used for liquefied Division 2.1 

materials must be equipped with a 

metal pressure relief device. Fusible 

pressure relief devices are not authorized on a DOT 39 cylinder containing a 

liquefied gas. 

(5) A pressure relief device is not required on— 

(i) A cylinder 305 mm (12 inches) or 

less in length, exclusive of neck, and 

114 mm (4.5 inches) or less in outside 

diameter, except when the cylinder is 

filled with a liquefied gas for which 

this part requires a service pressure of 

1800 psig or higher or a nonliquefied gas 

to a pressure of 1800 psig or higher at 21 

°C (70 °F);

(ii) A cylinder with a water capacity 

of less than 454 kg (1000 lbs) filled with 

a nonliquefied gas to a pressure of 300 

psig or less at 21 °C (70 °F), except for 

a DOT 39 cylinder or a cylinder used for 

acetylene in solution; or 

(iii) A cylinder containing a Class 3 

or a Class 8 material without pressurization, unless otherwise specified for 

the hazardous material. 

(6) A pressure relief device is prohibited on a cylinder filled with a Division 

2.3 or 6.1 material in Hazard Zone A. 

(iv) A UN pressure receptacle transported in accordance with paragraph 

(k) or (l) or this section. 

(g) Manifolding cylinders in transportation. (1) Cylinder manifolding is authorized only under conditions prescribed in this paragraph (g). 

Manifolded cylinders must be supported and held together as a unit by 

structurally adequate means. Except 

for Division 2.2 materials, each cylinder must be equipped with an individual shutoff valve that must be 

tightly closed while in transit. Manifold branch lines must be sufficiently 

flexible to prevent damage to the 

valves that otherwise might result 

from the use of rigid branch lines. Each 

cylinder must be individually equipped 

with a pressure relief device as required in paragraph (f) of this section, 

except that pressure relief devices on 

manifolded horizontal cylinders that 

are mounted on a motor vehicle or 

framework may be selected as to type, 

location, and quantity according to the 

lowest marked pressure limit of an individual cylinder in the manifolded 

unit. The pressure relief devices selected for the manifolded unit must 

have been tested in accordance with 

CGA S–1.1 and CGA S–7. Pressure relief 

devices on manifolded horizontal cylinders filled with a compressed gas 

must be arranged to discharge unobstructed to the open air. In addition, 

for Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, the pressure relief devices (PRDs) 

must be arranged to discharge upward 

to prevent any escaping gas from contacting personnel or any adjacent cylinders. Valves and pressure relief devices on manifolded cylinders filled 

with a compressed gas must be protected from damage by framing, a cabinet or other method. Manifolding is authorized for cylinders containing the 

following gases: 

(i) Nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases authorized by §173.302. 

(ii) Liquefied compressed gases authorized by §173.304. Each manifolded 

cylinder containing a liquefied compressed gas must be separately filled 

and means must be provided to ensure 

no interchange of cylinder contents 

can occur during transportation. 

(iii) Acetylene as authorized by 

§173.303. 

(2) For the checking of tare weights 

or replacing solvent, the cylinder must 

be removed from the manifold. This requirement is not intended to prohibit 

filling acetylene cylinders while 

manifolded.

(h) Cylinder valve protection. UN pressure receptacles must meet the valve 

protection requirements in §173.301b(c). 

A DOT specification cylinder used to 

transport a hazardous material must 

meet the requirements specified in this 

paragraph (h). 

(1) The following specification cylinders are not subject to the cylinder 

valve protection requirements in this 

paragraph (h): 

(i) A cylinder containing only a Division 2.2 material without a Division 5.1 

subsidiary hazard; 

(ii) A cylinder containing a Class 8 

liquid corrosive only to metal; 

(iii) A cylinder with a water capacity 

of 4.8 liters (293 in3) or less containing 

oxygen, compressed; 

588

§ 173.301 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(iv) A cylinder containing oxygen, refrigerated liquid (cryogenic liquid); 

(v) A Medical E cylinder with a water 

capacity of 4.9 liters (300 in3) or less; 

(vi) A fire extinguisher; or 

(vii) A ‘‘B’’ style cylinder with a capacity of 40 ft 3 (1.13 m3) or an ‘‘MC’’ 

style cylinder with a capacity of 10 ft 3

(0.28m3) containing acetylene. 

(2) For cylinders manufactured before 

October 1, 2007, a cylinder must have 

its valves protected by one of the following methods: 

(i) By equipping the cylinder with securely attached metal caps of sufficient strength to protect valves from 

damage during transportation; 

(ii) By boxing or crating the cylinders so as to protect valves from 

damage during transportation; 

(iii) By constructing the cylinder so 

that the valve is recessed into the cylinder or otherwise protected to the extent that it will not be subjected to a 

blow when the container is dropped 

onto a flat surface; or 

(iv) By loading the cylinders in an 

upright position and securely bracing 

the cylinders in rail cars or motor vehicles, when loaded by the consignor 

and unloaded by the consignee. 

(3) For cylinders manufactured on or 

after October 1, 2007, each cylinder 

valve assembly must be of sufficient 

strength or protected such that no 

leakage occurs when a cylinder with 

the valve installed is dropped 1.8 m (6 

ft.) or more onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or steel, impacting the valve assembly or protection 

device at an orientation most likely to 

cause damage. The cylinder valve assembly protection may be provided by 

any method meeting the performance 

requirement in this paragraph (h)(3). 

Examples include: 

(i) Equipping the cylinder with a securely attached metal cap. 

(ii) Packaging the cylinder in a box, 

crate, or other strong outer packaging 

conforming to the requirements of 

§173.25. 

(iii) Constructing the cylinder such 

that the valve is recessed into the cylinder or otherwise protected. 

(i) Cylinders mounted in motor vehicles 

or in frames. (1) MEGCs must conform 

to the requirements in §173.312. DOT 

specification cylinders mounted on 

motor vehicles or in frames must conform to the requirements specified in 

this paragraph (i). 

(2) Seamless DOT specification cylinders longer than 2 m (6.5 feet) are authorized for transportation only when 

horizontally mounted on a motor vehicle or in an ISO framework or other 

framework of equivalent structural integrity in accordance with CGA TB–25 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). The 

pressure relief device must be arranged 

to discharge unobstructed to the open 

air. In addition, for Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, the pressure relief 

devices must be arranged to discharge 

upward to prevent any escaping gas 

from contacting personnel or any adjacent cylinders. 

(3) Cylinders may not be transported 

by rail in container on freight car 

(COFC) or trailer on flat car (TOFC) 

service except under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator 

for Safety, Federal Railroad Administration.

(j) Non-specification cylinders in domestic use. Except as provided in §§171.12(a) 

and 173.23(g) of this subchapter, a filled 

cylinder manufactured to other than a 

DOT specification or a UN standard in 

accordance with part 178 of this subchapter, or a DOT exemption or special 

permit cylinder or a cylinder used as a 

fire extinguisher in conformance with 

§173.309(a), may not be transported to, 

from, or within the United States. 

(k) Metal attachments. Metal attachments to cylinders must have rounded 

or chamfered corners, or be otherwise 

protected, so as to prevent the likelihood of causing puncture or damage to 

other hazardous materials packages. 

This requirement applies to anything 

temporarily or permanently attached 

to the cylinder, such as metal skids. 

(o) Cylinders made of aluminum alloy 

6351–T6. A DOT 3AL cylinder manufactured of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 may 

not be filled and offered for transportation or transported with pyrophoric 

gases. The use of UN cylinders manufactured of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 is 

prohibited.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.301, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected, which appears in the 

589

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.301b 

Finding Aids section of the printed volume 

and on GPO Access. 

§ 173.301a Additional general requirements for shipment of specification 

cylinders. 

(a) General. The requirements in this 

section are in addition to the requirements in §173.301 and apply to the shipment of gases in specification cylinders.

(b) Authorized cylinders not marked 

with a service pressure. For authorized 

cylinders not marked with a service 

pressure, the service pressure is designated as follows: 

Specification marking 

Service

Pressure psig

3 ......................................................................... 1800 

3E ...................................................................... 1800 

8 ......................................................................... 250 

(c) Cylinder pressure at 21 °C (70 °F).

The pressure in a cylinder at 21 °C (70 

°F) may not exceed the service pressure 

for which the cylinder is marked or 

designated, except as provided in 

§173.302a(b). For certain liquefied 

gases, the pressure at 21 °C (70 °F) must 

be lower than the marked service pressure to avoid having a pressure at a 

temperature of 55 °C (131 °F) that is 

greater than permitted. 

(d) Cylinder pressure at 55 °C (131 °F).

The pressure in a cylinder at 55 °C (131 

°F) may not exceed 5/4 times the service pressure, except: 

(1) For a cylinder filled with acetylene, liquefied nitrous oxide, or carbon 

dioxide.

(2) For a cylinder filled in accordance 

with §173.302a(b), the pressure in the 

cylinder at 55 °C (131 °F) may not exceed 5/4 times the filling pressure. 

(3) The pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of 

Hazard Zone A and, after December 31, 

2003, Hazard Zone B materials, may not 

exceed the service pressure of the cylinder. Sufficient outage must be provided so that the cylinder will not be 

liquid full at 55 °C (131 °F).

(e) Grandfather clause. A cylinder in 

domestic use prior to the date on which 

the specification for the cylinder was 

first made effective may be used if the 

cylinder has been properly tested and 

otherwise conforms to the requirements applicable to the gas with which 

it is charged. 

[67 FR 51645, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 

FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 24661, May 8, 

2003]

§ 173.301b Additional general requirements for shipment of UN pressure 

receptacles. 

(a) General. The requirements of this 

section are in addition to the requirements in §173.301 and apply to the shipment of gases in UN pressure receptacles. A UN pressure receptacle, including closures, must conform to the 

design, construction, inspection and 

testing requirements specified in parts 

178 and 180 of this subchapter, as applicable. Bundles of cylinders must conform to the requirements in §178.70(e) 

of this subchapter. 

(1) A UN pressure receptacle may not 

be filled and offered for transportation 

when damaged to such an extent that 

the integrity of the UN pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be 

affected. Prior to filling, the service 

equipment must be examined and found 

to be in good working condition (see 

§178.70(d) of this subchapter). In addition, the required markings must be 

legible on the pressure receptacle. 

(2) The gases or gas mixtures must be 

compatible with the UN pressure receptacle and valve materials as prescribed 

for metallic materials in ISO 11114–1 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and 

for non-metallic materials in ISO 

11114–2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(3) A refillable UN pressure receptacle may not be filled with a gas or 

gas mixture different from that previously contained in the UN pressure 

receptacle unless the necessary operations for change of gas service have 

been performed in accordance with ISO 

11621 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(4) When a strong outer packaging is 

prescribed, for example as provided by 

paragraph (c)(2)(vi) or (d)(1) of this section, the UN pressure receptacles must 

be protected to prevent movement. Unless otherwise specified in this part, 

more than one UN pressure receptacle 

may be enclosed in the strong outer 

packaging.

590

§ 173.302 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(b) Individual shut-off valves and pressure relief devices. Except for Division 

2.2 permanent gases, each UN pressure 

receptacle must be equipped with an 

individual shutoff valve that must be 

tightly closed while in transit. Each 

UN pressure receptacle must be individually equipped with a pressure relief 

device as prescribed by §173.301(f), except that pressure relief devices on 

bundles of cylinders or manifolded horizontal cylinders must have a set-todischarge pressure that is based on the 

lowest marked pressure of any cylinder 

in the bundle or manifolded unit. 

(c) Pressure receptacle valve requirements. (1) When the use of a valve is 

prescribed, the valve must conform to 

the requirements in ISO 10297 (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter). 

(2) A UN pressure receptacle must 

have its valves protected from damage 

that could cause inadvertent release of 

the contents of the UN pressure receptacle by one of the following methods: 

(i) By constructing the pressure receptacle so that the valves are recessed 

inside the neck of the UN pressure receptacle and protected by a threaded 

plug or cap; 

(ii) By equipping the UN pressure receptacle with a valve cap conforming 

to the requirements in ISO 11117 (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter). The cap 

must have vent-holes of sufficient 

cross-sectional area to evacuate the 

gas if leakage occurs at the valve; 

(iii) By protecting the valves by 

shrouds or guards conforming to the 

requirements in ISO 11117; 

(iv) By using valves designed and 

constructed with sufficient inherent 

strength to withstand damage in accordance with Annex B of ISO 10297; 

(v) By enclosing the UN pressure receptacles in frames, e.g., bundles of 

cylinders; or 

(vi) By packing the UN pressure receptacles in a strong outer package, 

such as a box or crate, capable of meeting the drop test specified in §178.603 of 

this subchapter at the Packing Group I 

performance level. 

(d) Non-refillable UN pressure receptacles. Non-refillable UN pressure receptacles must conform to the following requirements: 

(1) The receptacles must be transported as an inner package of a combination package; 

(2) The receptacle must have a water 

capacity not exceeding 1.25 L when 

used for a flammable or toxic gas; and 

(3) The receptacle is prohibited for 

Hazard Zone A material. 

(e) Pyrophoric gases. A UN pressure 

receptacle must have valves equipped 

with gas-tight plugs or caps when used 

for pyrophoric or flammable mixtures 

of gases containing more than 1% 

pyrophoric compounds. 

(f) Hydrogen bearing gases. A steel UN 

pressure receptacle bearing an ‘‘H’’ 

mark must be used for hydrogen bearing gases or other embrittling gases 

that have the potential of causing hydrogen embrittlement. 

(g) Composite cylinders in underwater 

use. A composite cylinder certified to 

ISO–11119–2 or ISO–11119–3 may not be 

used for underwater applications unless 

the cylinder is manufactured in accordance with the requirements for underwater use and is marked ‘‘UW’’ as prescribed in §178.71(o)(17) of this subchapter.

[71 FR 33882, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71 

FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006] 

§ 173.302 Filling of cylinders with nonliquefied (permanent) compressed 

gases. 

(a) General requirements. A cylinder 

filled with a non-liquefied compressed 

gas (except gas in solution) must be offered for transportation in accordance 

with the requirements of this section 

and §173.301. In addition, a DOT specification cylinder must meet the requirements in §§173.301a, 173.302a and 

173.305, as applicable. UN pressure receptacles must meet the requirements 

in §§173.301b and 173.302b, as applicable. 

Where more than one section applies to 

a cylinder, the most restrictive requirements must be followed. 

(b) Aluminum cylinders in oxygen service. Each aluminum cylinder filled with 

oxygen must meet all of the following 

conditions:

(1) Metallic portions of a valve that 

may come into contact with the oxygen in the cylinder must be constructed of brass or stainless steel. 

591

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.302 

(2) Except for UN cylinders, each cylinder opening must be configured with 

straight threads only. 

(3) Each UN pressure receptacle must 

be cleaned in accordance with the requirements of ISO 11621 (IBR, see §171.7 

or this subchapter). Each DOT cylinder 

must be cleaned in accordance with the 

requirements of GSA Federal Specification RR–C–901D, paragraphs 3.3.1 

and 3.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Cleaning agents equivalent to 

those specified in Federal Specification 

RR–C–901D may be used provided they 

do not react with oxygen. One cylinder 

selected at random from a group of 200 

or fewer and cleaned at the same time 

must be tested for oil contamination in 

accordance with Federal Specification 

RR–C–901D, paragraph 4.3.2, and meet 

the specified standard of cleanliness. 

(4) The pressure in each cylinder may 

not exceed 3000 psig at 21 °C (70 °F).

(c) Notwithstanding the provisions of 

§§173.24(b)(1) and paragraph (f) of this 

section, an authorized cylinder containing oxygen continuously fed to 

tanks containing live fish may be offered for transportation and transported.

(d) Shipment of Division 2.1 materials in aluminum cylinders is authorized for transportation only by motor 

vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only aircraft. 

(e) DOT 3AL cylinders manufactured of 

6351–T6 aluminum alloy. Suitable safeguards should be provided to protect 

personnel and facilities should failure 

occur while filling cylinders manufactured of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 used 

in self-contained underwater breathing 

apparatus (SCUBA), self-contained 

breathing apparatus (SCBA) or oxygen 

service. The cylinder filler should 

allow only those individuals essential 

to the filling process to be in the vicinity of the cylinder during the filling 

process.

(f) Compressed oxygen and oxidizing 

gases by aircraft. A cylinder containing 

oxygen, compressed; compressed gas, 

oxidizing, n.o.s.; or nitrogen trifluoride 

is authorized for transportation by aircraft only when it meets the following 

requirements:

(1) Only DOT specification 3A, 3AA, 

3AL, 3E, 3HT, and 39 cylinders, and UN 

pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 

9809–2, ISO 9809–3 and ISO 7866 cylinders 

are authorized. 

(2) Cylinders must be equipped with a 

pressure relief device in accordance 

with §173.301(f) and, for DOT 39 cylinders offered for transportation after 

October 1, 2008, for the other DOT specification cylinders with the first requalification due after October 1, 2008, 

or for the UN pressure receptacles prior 

to initial use: 

(i) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for DOT 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3E, and 

39 cylinders, and UN pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 9809–2, ISO 9809– 

3 and ISO 7866 cylinders must be 100% 

of the cylinder minimum test pressure 

with a tolerance of plus zero to minus 

10%; and 

(ii) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for a DOT 3HT cylinder must 

be 90% of the cylinder minimum test 

pressure with a tolerance of plus zero 

to minus 10%. 

(3) The cylinder must be placed in a 

rigid outer packaging that— 

(i) Conforms to the requirements of 

either part 178, subparts L and M of 

this subchapter at the Packing Group I 

or II performance level or the performance criteria in Air Transport Association (ATA) Specification No. 300 for a 

Category I Shipping Container; 

(ii) After September 30, 2009, is capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Flame Penetration 

Resistance Test in Appendix E to part 

178 of this subchapter; and 

(iii) Prior to each shipment, passes a 

visual inspection that verifies that all 

features of the packaging are in good 

condition, including all latches, hinges, 

seams, and other features, and that the 

packaging is free from perforations, 

cracks, dents, or other abrasions that 

may negatively affect the flame penetration resistance and thermal resistance characteristics of the packaging. 

(4) After September 30, 2009, the cylinder and the outer packaging must be 

capable of passing, as demonstrated by 

design testing, the Thermal Resistance 

Test specified in Appendix D to part 178 

of this subchapter. 

(5) The cylinder and the outer packaging must both be marked and labeled 

in accordance with part 172, subparts D 

and E of this subchapter. The additional marking ‘‘DOT31FP,’’ is allowed 

592

§ 173.302a 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

to indicate that the cylinder and the 

outer packaging are capable of passing, 

as demonstrated by design testing, the 

Thermal Resistance Test specified in 

Appendix D to part 178 of this subchapter.

(6) A cylinder of compressed oxygen 

that has been furnished by an aircraft 

operator to a passenger in accordance 

with 14 CFR §§121.574, 125.219, or 135.91 

is excepted from the outer packaging 

requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this 

section.

[67 FR 51646, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 

FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002; 68 FR 75745, Dec. 31, 

2003; 71 FR 33883; June 12, 2006; 71 FR 51127, 

Aug. 29, 2006; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 28, 2007] 

§ 173.302a Additional requirements for 

shipment of nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases in specification cylinders. 

(a) Detailed filling requirements. Nonliquefied compressed gases (except gas 

in solution) for which filling requirements are not specifically prescribed in 

§173.304a must be shipped subject to 

the requirements in this section and 

§§173.301, 173.301a, 173.302, and 173.305 in 

specification cylinders, as follows: 

(1) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3B, 3E, 4B, 

4BA and 4BW cylinders. 

(2) DOT 3HT cylinders. These cylinders are authorized for aircraft use 

only and only for nonflammable gases. 

They have a maximum service life of 24 

years from the date of manufacture. 

The cylinders must be equipped with 

frangible disc type pressure relief devices that meet the requirements of 

§173.301(f). Each frangible disc must 

have a rated bursting pressure not exceeding 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure of the cylinder. 

Discs with fusible metal backing are 

not permitted. Specification 3HT cylinders may be offered for transportation only when packaged in accordance with §173.301(a)(9). 

(3) DOT 39 cylinders. When the cylinder is filled with a Division 2.1 material, the internal volume of the cylinder may not exceed 1.23 L (75 in3).

(4) DOT 3AX, 3AAX, and 3T cylinders 

are authorized for Division 2.1 and 2.2 

materials and for carbon monoxide. 

DOT 3T cylinders are not authorized 

for hydrogen. When used in methane 

service, the methane must be a nonliquefied gas with a minimum purity of 

98.0 percent methane and commercially 

free of corroding components. 

(5) Aluminum cylinders manufactured in conformance with specifications DOT 39 and 3AL are authorized 

for oxygen only under the conditions 

specified in §173.302(b). 

(b) Special filling limits for DOT 3A, 

3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T cylinders. A

DOT 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T cylinder may be filled with a compressed 

gas, other than a liquefied, dissolved, 

Division 2.1, or Division 2.3 gas, to a 

pressure 10 percent in excess of its 

marked service pressure, provided: 

(1) The cylinder is equipped with a 

frangible disc pressure relief device 

(without fusible metal backing) having 

a bursting pressure not exceeding the 

minimum prescribed test pressure. 

(2) The cylinder’s elastic expansion 

was determined at the time of the last 

test or retest by the water jacket 

method.

(3) Either the average wall stress or 

the maximum wall stress does not exceed the wall stress limitation shown 

in the following table: 

Type of steel 

Average

wall

stress

limitation

Maximum

wall

stress

limitation

I. Plain carbon steels over 0.35 carbon and medium manganese 

steels .............................................. 53,000 58,000 

II. Steels of analysis and heat treatment specified in spec. 3AA .......... 67,000 73,000 

III. Steels of analysis and heat treatment specified in spec. DOT-3T .... 87,000 94,000 

IV. Plain carbon steels less than 0.35 

carbon made prior to 1920 ............ 45,000 48,000 

(i)(A) The average wall stress must 

be computed from the elastic expansion data using the following formula: 

S = 1.7EE / KV¥0.4P

Where:

S = wall stress, pounds per square inch; 

EE = elastic expansion (total less permanent) in cubic centimeters; 

K = factor × 10 ¥7 experimentally determined 

for the particular type of cylinder being 

tested or derived in accordance with CGA 

C–5 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); 

V = internal volume in cubic centimeter (1 

cubic inch = 16.387 cubic centimeters); 

P = test pressure, pounds per square inch. 

(B) The formula in paragraph 

(b)(3)(i)(A) of this section is derived 

593

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.302b 

from the formula in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) 

of this section and the following: 

EE = (PKVD2) / (D2¥d2)

(ii) The maximum wall stress must 

be computed from the formula: 

S = (P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)) / (D2¥d2)

Where:

S = wall stress, pounds per square inch; 

P = test pressure, pounds per square inch; 

D = outside diameter, inches; 

d = D–2t, where t=minimum wall thickness 

determined by a suitable method. 

(iii) Compliance with average wall 

stress limitation may be determined by 

computing the elastic expansion rejection limit in accordance with CGA C–5, 

by reference to data tabulated in CGA 

C–5, or by the manufacturer’s marked 

elastic expansion rejection limit (REE) 

on the cylinder. 

(4) An external and internal visual 

examination made at the time of test 

or retest shows the cylinder to be free 

from excessive corrosion, pitting, or 

dangerous defects. 

(5) A plus sign (+) is added following 

the test date marking on the cylinder 

to indicate compliance with paragraphs (b) (2), (b)(3), and (b)(4) of this 

section.

(c) Carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide must be offered in a DOT 3, 3A, 

3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, 3AL, 3E, or 3T cylinder having a minimum service pressure of 1800 psig. The pressure in a steel 

cylinder may not exceed 1000 psig at 21 

°C (70 °F), except that if the gas is dry 

and sulfur free, the cylinder may be 

filled to 5/6 of the cylinder’s service 

pressure or 2000 psig, whichever is less. 

A DOT 3AL cylinder may be filled to 

its marked service pressure. A DOT 

3AL cylinder is authorized only when 

transported by motor vehicle, rail car, 

or cargo-only aircraft. 

(d) Diborane and diborane mixtures. 

Diborane and diborane mixed with 

compatible compressed gas must be offered in a DOT 3AL1800 or 3AA1800 cylinder. The maximum filling density of 

the diborane may not exceed 7 percent. 

Diborane mixed with compatible compressed gas may not have a pressure 

exceeding the service pressure of the 

cylinder if complete decomposition of 

the diborane occurs. Cylinder valve assemblies must be protected in accordance with §173.301(h). 

(e) Fluorine. Fluorine must be shipped 

in specification 3A1000, 3AA1000, or 

3BN400 cylinders without pressure relief devices and equipped with valve 

protection cap. The cylinder may not 

be charged to over 400 psig at 21 °C (70 

°F) and may not contain over 2.7 kg (6 

lbs) of gas. 

[67 FR 51646, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 

FR 75745, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 34075, June 13, 

2005; 71 FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 72 FR 4455, 

Jan. 31, 2007; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 28, 2007] 

§ 173.302b Additional requirements for 

shipment of non-liquefied (permanent) compressed gases in UN pressure receptacles. 

(a) General. A cylinder filled with a 

non-liquefied gas must be offered for 

transportation in UN pressure receptacles subject to the requirements in 

this section and §173.302. In addition, 

the requirements in §§173.301 and 

173.301b must be met. 

(b) UN pressure receptacles filling limits. A UN pressure receptacle is authorized for the transportation of non-liquefied compressed gases as specified in 

this section. Except where filling limits are specifically prescribed in this 

section, the working pressure of a UN 

pressure receptacle may not exceed 2⁄3

of the test pressure of the receptacle. 

Alternatively, the filling limits specified for non-liquefied gases in Table 1 

of P200 of the UN Recommendations 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) are 

authorized. In no case may the internal 

pressure at 65 °C (149 °F) exceed the 

test pressure. 

(c) Fluorine, compressed, UN 1045 and 

Oxygen diflouride, compressed, UN 2190. 

Fluorine, compressed and Oxygen 

difluoride, compressed must be packaged in a UN pressure receptacle with a 

minimum test pressure of 200 bar and a 

maximum working pressure not to exceed 30 bar. A UN pressure receptacle 

made of aluminum alloy is not authorized. The maximum quantity of gas authorized in each UN pressure receptacle 

is 5 kg. 

(d) Diborane and diborane mixtures, UN 

1911. Diborane and diborane mixtures 

must be packaged in a UN pressure receptacle with a minimum test pressure 

of 250 bar and a maximum filling ratio 

dependent on the test pressure not to 

exceed 0.07. Filling should be further 

594

§ 173.303 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

limited so that if complete decomposition of diborane occurs, the pressure of 

diborane or diborane mixtures will not 

exceed the working pressure of the cylinder. The use of UN tubes and MEGCs 

is not authorized. 

(e) Carbon monoxide, compressed UN 

1016. Carbon monoxide, compressed is 

authorized in UN pressure receptacles. 

The settled pressure in a steel pressure 

receptacle containing carbon monoxide 

may not exceed 1⁄3 of the pressure receptacle’s test pressure at 65 °C (149 °F)

except, if the gas is dry and sulfur-free, 

the settled pressure may not exceed l

⁄2

of the marked test pressure. 

[71 FR 33883, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.303 Charging of cylinders with 

compressed gas in solution (acetylene). 

(a) Cylinder, filler and solvent requirements. (Refer to applicable parts of 

Specification 8 and 8AL). Acetylene gas 

must be shipped in Specification 8 or 

8AL cylinders (§178.59 or §178.60 of this 

subchapter). The cylinders shall consist of metal shells filled with a porous 

material, and this material must be 

charged with a suitable solvent. The 

cylinders containing the porous material and solvent shall be successfully 

tested in accordance with CGA C–12 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

Representative samples of cylinders 

charged with acetylene must be successfully tested in accordance with 

CGA C–12. 

(b) Filling limits. For DOT specification cylinders, the pressure in the cylinder containing acetylene gas may not 

exceed 250 psig at 70 °F. If cylinders are 

marked for a lower allowable charging 

pressure at 70 °F., that pressure must 

not be exceeded. For UN cylinders, the 

pressure in the cylinder may not exceed the limits specified in 

§173.304b(b)(2). 

(c) Data requirements on filler and solvent. Cylinders containing acetylene 

gas must not be shipped unless they 

were charged by or with the consent of 

the owner, and by a person, firm, or 

company having possession of complete 

information as to the nature of the porous filling, the kind and quantity of 

solvent in the cylinders, and the meaning of such markings on the cylinders 

as are prescribed by the Department’s 

regulations and specifications applying 

to containers for the transportation of 

acetylene gas. 

(d) Verification of container pressure. 

(1) Each day, the pressure in a container representative of that day’s 

compression must be checked by the 

charging plant after the container has 

cooled to a settled temperature and a 

record of this test kept for at least 30 

days.

(e) Prefill requirements. Before each 

filling of an acetylene cylinder, the 

person filling the cylinder must visually inspect the outside of the cylinder in accordance with the prefill requirements contained in CGA C–13, 

Section 3 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(f) UN cylinders. (1) UN cylinders and 

bundles of cylinders are authorized for 

the transport of acetylene gas as specified in this section. Each UN acetylene 

cylinder must conform to ISO 3807–2 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), 

have a homogeneous monolithic porous 

mass filler and be charged with acetone 

or a suitable solvent as specified in the 

standard. UN acetylene cylinders must 

have a minimum test pressure of 52 bar 

and may be filled up to the pressure 

limits specified in ISO 3807–2. The use 

of UN tubes and MEGCs is not authorized.

(2) UN cylinders equipped with pressure relief devices or that are 

manifolded together must be transported upright. 

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 

FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.303, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.304 Filling of cylinders with liquefied compressed gases. 

(a) General requirements. A cylinder 

filled with a liquefied compressed gas 

(except gas in solution) must be offered 

for transportation in accordance with 

the requirements of this section and 

the general requirements in §173.301. In 

addition, a DOT specification cylinder 

must meet the requirement in 

§§173.301a, 173.304a, and 173.305, as applicable. UN pressure receptacles must be 

595

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.304 

shipped in accordance with the requirements in 173.301b and 173.304b, as applicable.

(1) A DOT 3AL cylinder may not be 

used for any material with a primary 

or subsidiary hazard of Class 8. 

(2) Shipments of Division 2.1 materials in aluminum cylinders are authorized only when transported by 

motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only 

aircraft.

(b) Filling limits. Except for carbon dioxide; 1,1-Difluoroethylene (R–1132A); 

nitrous oxide; and vinyl fluoride, inhibited, the liquid portion of a liquefied 

gas may not completely fill the packaging at any temperature up to and including 55 °C (131 °F). The liquid portion of vinyl fluoride, inhibited, may 

completely fill the cylinder at 55 °C

(131 °F) provided the pressure at the 

critical temperature does not exceed 

1.25 times the service pressure of the 

cylinder.

(c) Mixture of compressed gas and other 

material. A mixture of compressed gas 

must be shipped in accordance with 

§173.305. 

(d) Refrigerant and dispersant gases. 

Nontoxic and nonflammable refrigerant or dispersant gases must be offered for transportation in cylinders 

prescribed in §173.304a, or in DOT 2P 

and 2Q containers (§§178.33, 178.33a of 

this subchapter). DOT 2P and 2Q containers must be packaged in a strong 

wooden or fiberboard box of such design as to protect valves from damage 

or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Pressure in the inside metal containers 

may not exceed 87 psia at 21 °C (70 °F).

Each completed metal container filled 

for shipment must be heated until its 

contents reach a minimum temperature of 55 °C (131 °F) without evidence 

of leakage, distortion, or other defect. 

Each outside package must be plainly 

marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS’’.

(e) Engine starting fluid. Engine starting fluid containing a flammable compressed gas or gases must be shipped in 

a cylinder as prescribed in §173.304a or 

as follows: 

(1) Inside non-refillable metal containers having a capacity not greater 

than 500 mL (32 in3). The containers 

must be packaged in strong, tight 

outer packagings. The pressure in the 

container may not exceed 145 psia at 54 

°C (130 °F). If the pressure exceeds 145 

psia at 54 °C (130 °F), a DOT 2P container must be used. In either case, the 

metal container must be capable of 

withstanding, without bursting, a pressure of 1.5 times the pressure of the 

contents at 54 °C (130 °F). The liquid 

content of the material and gas may 

not completely fill the container at 54 

°C (130 °F). Each container filled for 

shipment must have been heated until 

its contents reach a minimum temperature of 54 °C (130 °F), without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other 

defect. Each outside shipping container 

must be plainly marked, ‘‘INSIDE 

CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS’’. 

(2) [Reserved] 

(f) Oxidizing gases by aircraft. A cylinder containing carbon dioxide and oxygen mixture, compressed; liquefied 

gas, oxidizing, n.o.s.; or nitrous oxide is 

authorized for transportation by aircraft only when it meets the following 

requirements:

(1) Only DOT specification 3A, 3AA, 

3AL, 3E, 3HT, and 39 cylinders, and UN 

pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 

9809–2, ISO 9809–3 and ISO 7866 cylinders 

are authorized. 

(2) Cylinders must be equipped with a 

pressure relief device in accordance 

with §173.301(f) and, for DOT 39 cylinders offered for transportation after 

October 1, 2008, for the other DOT specification cylinders with the first requalification due after October 1, 2008, 

or for the UN pressure receptacles prior 

to initial use: 

(i) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for DOT 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3E and 

39 cylinders, and UN pressure receptacles ISO 9809–1, ISO 9809–2, ISO 9809– 

3 and ISO 7866 cylinders must be 100% 

of the cylinder minimum test pressure 

with a tolerance of plus zero to minus 

10%; and 

(ii) The rated burst pressure of a rupture disc for a DOT 3HT cylinder must 

be 90% of the cylinder minimum test 

pressure with a tolerance of plus zero 

to minus 10%. 

(3) The cylinder must be placed in a 

rigid outer packaging that— 

596

§ 173.304a 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(i) Conforms to the requirements of 

either part 178, subparts L and M, of 

this subchapter at the Packing Group I 

or II performance level, or the performance criteria in Air Transport Association (ATA) Specification No. 300 for a 

Category I Shipping Container; 

(ii) After September 30, 2009, is capable of passing, as demonstrated by design testing, the Flame Penetration 

Resistance Test specified in part III of 

Appendix E to part 178 of this subchapter; and 

(iii) Prior to each shipment, passes a 

visual inspection that verifies that all 

features of the packaging are in good 

condition, including all latches, hinges, 

seams, and other features, and the 

packaging is free from perforations, 

cracks, dents, or other abrasions that 

may negatively affect the flame penetration resistance and thermal resistance characteristics of the container. 

(4) After September 30, 2009, the cylinder and the outer packaging must be 

capable of passing, as demonstrated by 

design testing, the Thermal Resistance 

Test specified in Appendix D to part 178 

of this subchapter. 

(5) The cylinder and the outer packaging must both be marked and labeled 

in accordance with part 172, subparts D 

and E of this subchapter. The additional marking ‘‘DOT31FP,’’ is allowed 

to indicate that the cylinder and the 

outer packaging are capable of passing, 

as demonstrated by design testing, the 

Thermal Resistance Test specified in 

Appendix D to part 178 of this subchapter.

(6) A cylinder of compressed oxygen 

that has been furnished by an aircraft 

operator to a passenger in accordance 

with 14 CFR 121.574, 125.219, or 135.91 is 

excepted from the outer packaging requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this 

section.

[67 FR 51647, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 

FR 24661, May 8, 2003; 71 FR 33883, June 12, 

2006; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 28, 2007; 74 FR 53188, 

Oct. 16, 2009] 

§ 173.304a Additional requirements for 

shipment of liquefied compressed 

gases in specification cylinders. 

(a) Detailed filling requirements. Liquefied gases (except gas in solution) must 

be offered for transportation, subject 

to the requirements in this section and 

§§173.301 and 173.304, in specification 

cylinders, as follows: 

(1) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3B, 3BN, 3E, 

4B, 4BA, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4E, 39, except 

that no DOT 4E or 39 packaging may be 

filled and shipped with a mixture containing a pyrophoric liquid, carbon bisulfide (disulfide), ethyl chloride, 

ethylene oxide, nickel carbonyl, spirits 

of nitroglycerin, or toxic material (Division 6.1 or 2.3), unless specifically authorized in this part. 

(2) For the gases named, the following requirements apply (for cryogenic liquids, see §173.316): 

Kind of gas 

Maximum permitted filling density (percent) 

(see Note 1) 

Packaging marked as shown in this column or of 

the same type with higher service pressure must 

be used, except as provided in §§ 173.301(l), 

173.301a(e), and 180.205(a) 

(see notes following table) 

Anhydrous ammonia ............................................... 54 .................................. DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-3A480X; DOT4AA480; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3AL480. 

Bromotrifluoromethane (R–13B1 or H–1301) ........ 124 ................................ DOT-3A400; DOT-3AA400; DOT-3B400; DOT4AA480; DOT-4B400; DOT-4BA400; DOT4BW400; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; DOT3AL400.

Carbon dioxide (see Notes 4, 7, and 8) ................. 68 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800; 

DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL1800.

Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid (see paragraph

(e) of this section).

....................................... DOT-4L. 

Chlorine (see Note 2) ............................................. 125 ................................ DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-3; DOT3BN480; DOT-3E1800. 

Chlorodifluroethane or 1-Chloro-1, 1- 

difluoroethane (R–142b).

100 ................................ DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL150. 

Chlorodifluoromethane (R–22) (see Note 8) .......... 105 ................................ DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT-4BW240; DOT4B240ET; DOT-4E240; DOT-39; DOT-3E1800; 

DOT-3AL240.

597

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.304a 

Kind of gas 

Maximum permitted filling density (percent) 

(see Note 1) 

Packaging marked as shown in this column or of 

the same type with higher service pressure must 

be used, except as provided in §§ 173.301(l), 

173.301a(e), and 180.205(a) 

(see notes following table) 

Chloropentafluorethane (R–115) ............................ 110 ................................ DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT4BA225; DOT-4B225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL225. 

Chlorotrifluoromethane (R–13) (see Note 8) .......... 100 ................................ DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3; DOT3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800. 

Cyclopropane (see Note 8) .................................... 55 .................................. DOT-3A225; DOT-3A480X; DOT-3AA225; DOT3B225; DOT-4AA480; DOT4B225; DOT4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-4B240ET; DOT3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL225. 

Dichlorodifluoromethane (R–12) (see Note 8) ....... 119 ................................ DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT4B240ET; DOT-4E225; DOT-39; DOT-3E1800; 

DOT-3AL225.

Dichlorodifluoromethane and difluoroethane mixture (constant boiling mixture) (R–500) (see

Note 8).

Not liquid full at 131 °F DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT3E1800; DOT-4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-39. 

1,1-Difluoroethane (R–152a) (see note 8) ............. 79 .................................. DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800; DOT-3AL150. 

1,1-Difluoroethylene (R–1132A) ............................. 73 .................................. DOT-3A2200; DOT-3AA2200; DOT-3AX2200;

DOT-3AAX2200; DOT-3T2200; DOT-39. 

Dimethylamine, anhydrous ..................................... 59 .................................. DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; ICC– 

3E1800.

Ethane (see Note 8) ............................................... 35.8 ............................... DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800; 

DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800. 

Ethane (see Note 8) ............................................... 36.8 ............................... DOT-3A2000; DOT-3AX2000; DOT-3AA2000; 

DOT-3AAX2000; DOT-3T2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL2000.

Ethylene (see Note 8) ............................................ 31.0 ............................... DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800; 

DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800. 

Ethylene (see Note 8) ............................................ 32.5 ............................... DOT-3A2000; DOT-3AX2000; DOT-3AA2000; 

DOT-3AAX2000; DOT-3T2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL2000.

Ethylene (see Note 8) ............................................ 35.5 ............................... DOT-3A2400; DOT-3AX2400; DOT-3AA2400; 

DOT-3AAX2400; DOT-3T2400; DOT-39; DOT3AL2400.

Hydrogen chloride, anhydrous ............................... 65 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3AX1800;

DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3T1800; DOT3E1800.

Hydrogen sulfide (see Notes 10 and 14) ............... 62.5 ............................... DOT-3A; DOT-3AA; DOT-3B; DOT-4A; DOT-4B; 

DOT-4BA; DOT-4BW; DOT-3E1800; DOT3AL.

Insecticide, gases liquefied (see Notes 8 and 12) Not liquid full at 131 °F DOT-3A300; DOT-3AA300; DOT-3B300; DOT4B300; DOT-4BA300; DOT-4BW300; DOT3E1800.

Liquefied nonflammable gases, other than classified flammable, corrosive, toxic & mixtures or 

solution thereof filled w/nitrogen, carbon dioxide, 

or air (see Notes 7 and 8)..

Not liquid full at 131 °F Specification packaging authorized in paragraph 

(a)(1) of this section and DOT-3HT; DOT 4D; 

DOT-4DA; DOT-4DS. 

Methyl acetylene-propadiene, mixtures, stabilized; 

(see Note 5)..

Not liquid at 131 °F ....... DOT-4B240 without brazed seams; DOT4BA240 without brazed seams; DOT-3A240; 

DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT-3E1800; 

DOT-4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-4B240ET; 

DOT-3AL240.

Methyl chloride ....................................................... 84 .................................. DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3; 

DOT-3E1800; DOT-4B240ET. Cylinders complying with DOT-3A150; DOT-3B150; and 

DOT-4B150 manufactured prior to Dec. 7, 

1936 are also authorized. 

Methyl mercaptan ................................................... 80 .................................. DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; OT4B240; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-3E1800; DOT4BA240; DOT-4BW240. 

Nitrosyl chloride ...................................................... 110 ................................ DOT-3BN400 only. 

598

§ 173.304a 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Kind of gas 

Maximum permitted filling density (percent) 

(see Note 1) 

Packaging marked as shown in this column or of 

the same type with higher service pressure must 

be used, except as provided in §§ 173.301(l), 

173.301a(e), and 180.205(a) 

(see notes following table) 

Nitrous oxide (see Notes 7, 8, and 11) .................. 68 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800; 

DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800; DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39; DOT3AL1800.

Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid (see paragraph

(e) of this section.).

....................................... DOT-4L. 

Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas, n.o.s. 

(see Notes 8 and 13).

Not liquid full at 130 °F DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT3E1800; DOT-4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-39; DOT-3AL240. 

Sulfur dioxide (see note 8) ..................................... 125 ................................ DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT4B240ET; DOT-3; DOT-39; DOT-3E1800; 

DOT-3AL225.

Sulfur hexafluoride .................................................. 120 ................................ DOT-3A1000; DOT-3AA1000; DOT-AAX2400; 

DOT-3; DOT-3AL1000; DOT-3E1800; DOT3T1800.

Sulfuryl fluoride ....................................................... 106 ................................ DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-3E1800; DOT4B480; DOT-4BA480; DOT-4BW480. 

Tetrafluoroethylene, stabilized ................................ 90 .................................. DOT-3A1200; DOT-3AA1200; DOT-3E1800.

Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilized .......................... 115 ................................ DOT-3A300; DOT-3AA300; DOT-3B300; DOT4B300; DOT-4BA300; DOT-4BW300; DOT3E1800.

Trimethylamine, anhydrous .................................... 57 .................................. DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT3E1800.

Vinyl chloride (see Note 5) ..................................... 84 .................................. DOT-4B150 without brazed seams; DOT4BA225 without brazed seams; DOT-4BW225; 

DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3E1800; 

DOT-3AL150.

Vinyl fluoride, stabilized .......................................... 62 .................................. DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3E1800; 

DOT-3AL1800.

Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized(see Note 5) ............. 68 .................................. DOT-4B150, without brazed seams; DOT4BA225 without brazed seams; DOT-4BW225; 

DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B1800; 

DOT-3E1800.

NOTE 1: ‘‘Filling density’’ means the percent ratio of the weight of gas in a packaging to the weight of water that the container will hold at 16 °C (60 °F). (1 lb of water=27.737 in 3 at 60 °F.). NOTE 2: Cylinders purchased after Oct. 1, 1944, for the transportation of chlorine must contain no aperture other than that provided in the neck of the cylinder for attachment of a valve equipped with an approved pressure relief device. Cylinders purchased after Nov. 1, 1935, and filled with chlorine may not contain over 68.04 kg (150 lb) of gas. NOTE 3: [Reserved] NOTE 4: Special carbon dioxide mining devices containing a heating element and filled with not over 2.72 kg (6 lb) of carbon 

dioxide may be filled to a density of not over 85 percent, provided the cylinder is made of steel with a calculated bursting pres- sure in excess of 39000 psig, fitted with a frangible disc that will operate at not over 57 percent of that pressure, and is able to withstand a drop of 10 feet when striking crosswise on a steel rail while under a pressure of at least 3000 psig. Such devices 

must be shipped in strong boxes or must be wrapped in heavy burlap and bound by 12-gauge wire with the wire completely covered by friction tape. Wrapping must be applied so as not to interfere with the functioning of the frangible disc pressure relief de- vice. Shipments must be described as ‘‘liquefied carbon dioxide gas (mining device)’’ and marked, labeled, and certified as pre- scribed for liquefied carbon dioxide. NOTE 5: All parts of valve and pressure relief devices in contact with contents of cylinders must be of a metal or other material, 

suitably treated if necessary, that will not cause formation of any acetylides. NOTE 6: [Reserved] NOTE 7: Specification 3HT cylinders for aircraft use only, having a maximum service life of 24 years. Authorized only for nonflammable gases. Cylinders must be equipped with pressure relief devices of the frangible disc type that meet the requirements 

of § 173.301(f). Each frangible disc must have a rated bursting pressure that does not exceed 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure of the cylinder. Discs with fusible metal backing are not permitted. Cylinders may be offered for transpor- tation only when packaged in accordance with § 173.301(a)(9). NOTE 8: See § 173.301(a)(9). NOTE 9: [Reserved] NOTE 10: Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or a threaded solid plug. 

NOTE 11: Must meet the valve and cleaning requirements in § 173.302(b). 

NOTE 12: For an insecticide gas that is nontoxic and nonflammable, see § 173.305(c). 

NOTE 13: For a refrigerant or dispersant gas that is nontoxic and nonflammable, see § 173.304(d). 

NOTE 14: The use of DOT specification cylinder with a marked service pressure of 480 psi is authorized until December 31, 

2003.

(b) [Reserved] 

(c) Verification of content in cylinder. 

Except as noted in paragraph (d)(4) of 

this section, the amount of liquefied 

gas filled into a cylinder must be by 

weight or, when the gas is lower in 

pressure than required for liquefaction, 

a pressure-temperature chart for the 

599

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.304a 

specific gas may be used to ensure that 

the service pressure at 55 °C (131 °F)

will not exceed 5/4 of the service pressure at 21 °C (70 °F). The weight of liquefied gas filled into the cylinder also 

must be checked, after disconnecting 

the cylinder from the filling line, by 

the use of an accurate scale. 

(d) Requirements for liquefied petroleum gas. (1) Filling density limits are 

as follows: 

Minimum specific gravity of 

liquid material at 60 °F

Maximum the filling density in 

percent of the water-weight 

capacity of the cylinder 

0.271 to 0.289 ....................... 26 

0.290 to 0.306 ....................... 27 

0.307 to 0.322 ....................... 28 

0.323 to 0.338 ....................... 29 

0.339 to 0.354 ....................... 30 

0.355 to 0.371 ....................... 31 

0.372 to 0.398 ....................... 32 

0.399 to 0.425 ....................... 33 

0.426 to 0.440 ....................... 34 

0.441 to 0.452 ....................... 35 

0.453 to 0.462 ....................... 36 

0.463 to 0.472 ....................... 37 

0.473 to 0.480 ....................... 38 

0.481 to 0.488 ....................... 39 

0.489 to 0.495 ....................... 40 

0.496 to 0.503 ....................... 41 

0.504 to 0.510 ....................... 42 

0.511 to 0.519 ....................... 43 

0.520 to 0.527 ....................... 44 

0.528 to 0.536 ....................... 45 

0.537 to 0.544 ....................... 46 

0.545 to 0.552 ....................... 47 

Minimum specific gravity of 

liquid material at 60 °F

Maximum the filling density in 

percent of the water-weight 

capacity of the cylinder 

0.553 to 0.560 ....................... 48 

0.561 to 0.568 ....................... 49 

0.569 to 0.576 ....................... 50 

0.577 to 0.584 ....................... 51 

0.585 to 0.592 ....................... 52 

0.593 to 0.600 ....................... 53 

0.601 to 0.608 ....................... 54 

0.609 to 0.617 ....................... 55 

0.618 to 0.626 ....................... 56 

0.627 to 0.634 ....................... 57 

(2) Subject to §173.301a(d), any filling 

density percentage prescribed in this 

section is authorized to be increased by 

a factor of 2 for liquefied petroleum gas 

in DOT 3 cylinders or in DOT 3A cylinders marked for 1800 psig, or higher, 

service pressure. 

(3) Liquefied petroleum gas must be 

shipped in specification cylinders as 

follows:

(i) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3E, 3AL, 4B, 

4BA, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4E, or 39 cylinders. 

Shipments of flammable gases in DOT 

3AL cylinders are authorized only 

when transported by motor vehicle, 

rail car, or cargo-only aircraft. 

(ii) Additional containers may be 

used within the limits of quantity and 

pressure as follows: 

Type of container 

Maximum

capacity

(cubic

inches)

Maximum filling pressure 

(psig)

DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1) ................................... 31.83 45 psig at 70 °F and 105 psig at 130 °F (see Note 2). 

DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1) ................................... 31.83 35 psig at 70 °F and 100 psig at 130 °F.

NOTE 1: Containers must be packed in strong wooden or fiber boxes of such design as to protect valves from damage or accidental functioning under conditions normally incident to transportation. Each completed container filled for shipment must have

been heated until its contents reach a temperature of 54 °C (130 °F), without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. 

Each outside shipping container must be plainly marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS’.

NOTE 2: A container must be equipped with a pressure relief device that will prevent rupture of the container and dangerous 

projection of a closing device when exposed to fire. 

(4) Verification of content. A cylinder 

with a water capacity of 90.72 kg (200 

lb) or more and for use with a liquefied 

petroleum gas with a specific gravity 

of 0.504 or greater at 16 °C (60 °F) may 

have the quantity of its contents determined by using a fixed length dip tube 

gauging device. The length of the dip 

tube must be such that when a liquefied petroleum gas, with a specific volume of 0.03051 cu. ft./lb. at a temperature of 40 °F, is filled into the container, the liquid just reaches the bottom of the tube. The weight of this liquid may not exceed 42 percent of the 

water capacity of the container, which 

must be stamped on the cylinder. The 

length of the dip tube, expressed in 

inches carried out to one decimal place 

and prefixed with the letters ‘‘DT’’, 

must be stamped on the container and 

on the exterior of removable type dip 

tube. For the purpose of this requirement, the marked length must be expressed as the distance measured along 

the axis of a straight tube from the top 

of the boss through which the tube is 

600

§ 173.304b 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

inserted to the proper level of the liquid in the container. The length of 

each dip tube must be checked when installed by weighing each container 

after filling except when installed in 

groups of substantially identical containers, in which case one of each 25 

containers must be weighed. The quantity of liquefied gas in each container 

must be checked by means of the dip 

tube after disconnecting from the filling line. The outlet from the dip tube 

may not be larger than 0.1016 centimeters (0.040 inch; No. 54 drill bit size 

orifice). A container representative of 

each day’s filling at each filling plant 

must have its contents checked by 

weighing after disconnecting from the 

filling line. 

(e) Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid 

or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. (1)

The following provisions apply to carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid, and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid: 

(i) DOT 4L cylinders conforming to 

the provisions of this paragraph are authorized.

(ii) Each cylinder must be protected 

with at least one pressure relief device 

and at least one frangible disc conforming to §173.301(f) and paragraph 

(a)(2) of this section. The relieving capacity of the pressure relief device system must be equal to or greater than 

that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 5.8.3 of CGA S–1.1 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(iii) The temperature and pressure of 

the gas at the time the shipment is offered for transportation may not exceed ¥18 °C (0 °F) and 290 psig for carbon dioxide and ¥15.6 °C (+4 °F) and 290 

psig for nitrous oxide. Maximum time 

in transit may not exceed 120 hours. 

(2) The following pressure relief device settings, design service temperatures and filling densities apply: 

Pressure relief device setting maximum start—to discharge gauge 

pressure in psig 

Maximum permitted filling density 

(percent by weight) 

Carbon dioxide, refrigerated 

liquid

Nitrous oxide, refrigerated 

liquid

105 psig ............................................................................................... 108 104 

170 psig ............................................................................................... 105 101 

230 psig ............................................................................................... 104 99 

295 psig ............................................................................................... 102 97 

360 psig ............................................................................................... 100 95 

450 psig ............................................................................................... 98 83 

540 psig ............................................................................................... 92 87 

625 psig ............................................................................................... 86 80 

Design service temperature °C(°F) ..................................................... ¥196 °C(¥320 °F) ¥196 °C(¥320 °F)

[67 FR 51647, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 24661, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 57632, Oct. 6, 2003; 

68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005; 72 FR 4456, Jan. 31, 2007; 72 FR 55098, Sept. 

28, 2007; 73 FR 4719, Jan. 28, 2008] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: At 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005, §173.304a was amended in the table in paragraph (a)(2) by removing the phrase ‘‘DOT–4A480’’ from the entry ‘‘Hydrogen sulfide’’; however, the amendment could not be incorporated because that phrase does not exist in the 

entry.

§ 173.304b Additional requirements for 

shipment of liquefied compressed 

gases in UN pressure receptacles. 

(a) General. Liquefied gases and gas 

mixtures must be offered for transportation in UN pressure receptacles subject to the requirements in this section 

and §173.304. In addition, the general 

requirements applicable to UN pressure 

receptacles in §§173.301 and 173.301b 

must be met. 

(b) UN pressure receptacle filling limits. 

A UN pressure receptacle is authorized 

for the transportation of liquefied compressed gases and gas mixtures as specified in this section. When a liquefied 

compressed gas or gas mixture is transported in a UN pressure receptacle, the 

filling ratio may not exceed the maximum filling ratio prescribed in this 

section and the applicable ISO standard. Compliance with the filling limits 

may be determined by referencing the 

numerical values and data in Table 2 of 

P200 of the UN Recommendations (IBR, 

601

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.306 

see §171.7 of this subchapter). Alternatively, the maximum allowable filling limits may be determined as follows:

(1) For high pressure liquefied gases, 

in no case may the filling ratio of the 

settled pressure at 65 °C (149 °F) exceed 

the test pressure of the UN pressure receptacle.

(2) For low pressure liquefied gases, 

the filling factor (maximum mass of 

contents per liter of water capacity) 

must be less than or equal to 95 percent 

of the liquid phase at 50 °C. In addition, 

the UN pressure receptacle may not be 

liquid full at 60 °C. The test pressure of 

the pressure receptacle must be equal 

to or greater than the vapor pressure of 

the liquid at 65 °C.

(3) For high pressure liquefied gases 

or gas mixtures, the maximum filling 

ratio may be determined using the formulas in (3)(b) of P200 of the UN Recommendations.

(4) For low pressure liquefied gases or 

gas mixtures, the maximum filling 

ratio may be determined using the formulas in (3)(c) of P200 of the UN Recommendations.

(c) Tetraflouroethylene, stabilized, 

UN1081 must be packaged in a pressure 

receptacle with a minimum test pressure of 200 bar and a working pressure 

not exceeding 5 bar. 

(d) Fertilizer ammoniating solution 

with free ammonia, UN1043 is not authorized in UN tubes or MEGCs. 

[74 FR 2265, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.305 Charging of cylinders with a 

mixture of compressed gas and 

other material. 

(a) Detailed requirements. A mixture of 

a compressed gas and any other material must be shipped as a compressed 

gas if the mixture is a compressed gas 

as designated in §173.115 and when not 

in violation of §173.301(a). 

(b) Filling limits. (See §173.301.) For 

mixtures, the liquid portion of the liquefied compressed gas at 131 °F. plus 

any additional liquid or solid must not 

completely fill the container. 

(c) Nonpoisonous and nonflammable 

mixtures. Mixtures containing compressed gas or gases including insecticides, which mixtures are nonpoisonous 

and nonflammable under this part 

must be shipped in cylinders as prescribed in §173.304(a) or as follows: 

(1) Specification 2P (§178.33 of this 

subchapter). Inside metal containers 

equipped with safety relief devices of a 

type examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate 

Administrator, and packed in strong 

wooden or fiber boxes of such design as 

to protect valves from damage or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Pressure in 

the container may not exceed 85 psia at 

70 °F. Each completed metal container 

filled for shipment must be heated 

until content reaches a minimum temperature of 130 °F., without evidence of 

leakage, distortion or other defect. 

Each outside shipping container must 

be plainly marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS.’’ 

(2) [Reserved] 

(d) Poisonous mixtures. A mixture containing any poisonous material (Division 6.1 or 2.3) in such proportions that 

the mixture would be classed as poisonous under §173.115 or §173.132 must 

be shipped in packagings as authorized 

for these poisonous materials. 

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 

FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 

173–70, 38 FR 5309, Feb. 27, 1973, Amdt. 173–94, 

41 FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976; 45 FR 32697, May 19, 

1980; Amdt. 173–224, 56 FR 66275, 66279, Dec. 20, 

1991; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61013, 

Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 

24662, May 8, 2003] 

§ 173.306 Limited quantities of compressed gases. 

(a) Limited quantities of compressed 

gases for which exceptions are permitted as noted by reference to this 

section in §172.101 of this subchapter 

are excepted from labeling, except 

when offered for transportation or 

transported by air, and, unless required 

as a condition of the exception, specification packaging requirements of 

this subchapter when packaged in accordance with the following paragraphs. For transportation by aircraft, 

the package must also comply with the 

applicable requirements of §173.27 of 

this subchapter and only hazardous 

materials authorized aboard passengercarrying aircraft may be transported 

as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F 

602

§ 173.306 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter 

except §174.24, and to part 177 of this 

subchapter except §177.817. Each package may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) 

gross weight. 

(1) When in containers of not more 

than 4 fluid ounces capacity (7.22 cubic 

inches or less) except cigarette lighters. Special exceptions for shipment of 

certain compressed gases in the ORM-D 

class are provided in paragraph (i) of 

this section. 

(2) When in metal containers filled 

with a material that is not classed as a 

hazardous material to not more than 90 

percent of capacity at 70 °F. and then 

charged with nonflammable, nonliquefied gas. Each container must be tested 

to three times the pressure at 70 °F.

and, when refilled, be retested to three 

times the pressure of the gas at 70 °F.

Also, one of the following conditions 

must be met: 

(i) Container is not over 0.95 L (1 

quart) capacity and charged to not 

more than 11.17 bar (482.63 kPa, 170 

psig) at 21 °C (70 °F), and must be 

packed in a strong outer packaging, or 

(ii) Container is not over 30 gallons 

capacity and charged to not more than 

75 psig at 70 °F.

(3) When in a metal container for the 

sole purpose of expelling a nonpoisonous (other than a Division 6.1 Packing Group III material) liquid, paste or 

powder, provided all of the following 

conditions are met. Special exceptions 

for shipment of aerosols in the ORM-D 

class are provided in paragraph (i) of 

this section. 

(i) Capacity must not exceed 1 L(61.0 

cubic inches). 

(ii) Pressure in the container must 

not exceed 180 psig at 130 °F. If the 

pressure exceeds 140 psig at 130 °F., but 

does not exceed 160 psig at 130 °F., a 

specification DOT 2P (§178.33 of this 

subchapter) inside metal container 

must be used; if the pressure exceeds 

160 psig at 130 °F., a specification DOT 

2Q (§178.33a of this subchapter) inside 

metal container must be used. In any 

event, the metal container must be capable of withstanding without bursting 

a pressure of one and one-half times 

the equilibrium pressure of the content 

at 130 °F.

(iii) Liquid content of the material 

and gas must not completely fill the 

container at 130 °F.

(iv) The container must be packed in 

strong outside packagings. 

(v) Each container must be subjected 

to a test performed in a hot water 

bath; the temperature of the bath and 

the duration of the test must be such 

that the internal pressure reaches that 

which would be reached at 55 °C (131 °F)

(50 °C (122 °F) if the liquid phase does 

not exceed 95% of the capacity of the 

container at 50 °C (122 °F)). If the contents are sensitive to heat, the temperature of the bath must be set at between 20 °C (68 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F) but, 

in addition, one container in 2,000 must 

be tested at the higher temperature. 

No leakage or permanent deformation 

of a container may occur. 

(vi) Each outside packaging must be 

marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.’’

(4) Gas samples must be transported 

under the following conditions: 

(i) A gas sample may only be transported as non-pressurized gas when its 

pressure corresponding to ambient atmospheric pressure in the container is 

not more than 105 kPa absolute (15.22 

psia).

(ii) Non-pressurized gases, toxic (or 

toxic and flammable) must be packed 

in hermetically sealed glass or metal 

inner packagings of not more than one 

L (0.3 gallons) overpacked in a strong 

outer packaging. 

(iii) Non-pressurized gases, flammable must be packed in hermetically 

sealed glass or metal inner packagings 

of not more than 5 L (1.3 gallons) and 

overpacked in a strong outer packaging.

(5) For limited quantities of Division 

2.2 gases with no subsidiary risk, when 

in a plastic container for the sole purpose of expelling a liquid, paste or powder, provided all of the following conditions are met. Special exceptions for 

shipment of aerosols in the ORM–D 

class are provided in paragraph (i) of 

this section. 

(i) Capacity must not exceed 1 L (61.0 

cubic inches). 

(ii) Pressure in the container must 

not exceed 160 psig at 130 °F. If the 

pressure in the container is less than 

603

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.306 

140 psig at 130 °F, a non-DOT specification container may be used. If the pressure in the container exceeds 140 psig 

at 130 °F but does not exceed 160 psig at 

130 °F, the container must conform to 

specification DOT 2S. All non-DOT 

specification and specification DOT 2S 

containers must be capable of withstanding, without bursting, a pressure 

of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 130 

°F.

(iii) Liquid content of the material 

and gas must not completely fill the 

container at 130 °F.

(iv) The container must be packed in 

strong outside packagings. 

(v) Except as provided in paragraph 

(a)(5)(vi) of this section, each container 

must be subjected to a test performed 

in a hot water bath; the temperature of 

the bath and the duration of the test 

must be such that the internal pressure 

reaches that which would be reached at 

55 °C (131 °F) or 50 °C (122 °F) if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the 

capacity of the container at 50 °C (122 

°F). If the contents are sensitive to 

heat, or if the container is made of 

plastic material which softens at this 

test temperature, the temperature of 

the bath must be set at between 20 °C

(68 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F) but, in addition, 

one container in 2,000 must be tested at 

the higher temperature. No leakage or 

permanent deformation of a container 

may occur except that a plastic container may be deformed through softening provided that it does not leak. 

(vi) As an alternative to the hot 

water bath test in paragraph (a)(5)(v) of 

this section, testing may be performed 

as follows: 

(A) Pressure and leak testing before filling. Each empty container must be subjected to a pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected in the 

filled containers at 55 °C (131 °F) (or 50 

°C (122 °F) if the liquid phase does not 

exceed 95 percent of the capacity of the 

container at 50 °C (122 °F). This must be 

at least two-thirds of the design pressure of the container. If any container 

shows evidence of leakage at a rate 

equal to or greater than 3.3 × 10¥2

mbar L/s at the test pressure, distortion or other defect, it must be rejected; and 

(B) Testing after filling. Prior to filling, the filler must ensure that the 

crimping equipment is set appropriately and the specified propellant is 

used before filling the container. Once 

filled, each container must be weighed 

and leak tested. The leak detection 

equipment must be sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 

2.0 × 10¥3 mbar L/s at 20 °C (68 °F). Any 

filled container which shows evidence 

of leakage, deformation, or excessive 

weight must be rejected. 

(vi) Each outside packaging must be 

marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.’’

(b) Exceptions for foodstuffs, soap, 

biologicals, electronic tubes, and audible 

fire alarm systems. Limited quantities of 

compressed gases (except Division 2.3 

gases) for which exceptions are provided as indicated by reference to this 

section in §172.101 of this subchapter, 

when accordance with one of the following paragraphs, are excepted from 

labeling, except when offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, 

and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter. For 

transportation by aircraft, the package 

must comply with the applicable requirements of §173.27 of this subchapter; the net quantity per package 

may not exceed the quantity specified 

in column (9A) of the Hazardous Materials Table in §172.101 of this subchapter; and only hazardous materials 

authorized aboard passenger-carrying 

aircraft may be transported as a limited quantity. In addition, shipments 

are not subject to subpart F 

(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter, 

except §174.24, and to part 177 of this 

subchapter, except §177.817. Special exceptions for shipment of certain compressed gases in the ORM–D class are 

provided in paragraph (i) of this section.

(1) Foodstuffs or soaps in a nonrefillable metal or plastic container not exceeding 1 L (61.0 cubic inches), with 

soluble or emulsified compressed gas, 

provided the pressure in the container 

does not exceed 140 psig at 130 °F. Plastic containers must only contain Division 2.2 non-flammable soluble or 

emulsified compressed gas. The metal 

604

§ 173.306 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

or plastic container must be capable of 

withstanding, without bursting, a pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 130 

°F.

(i) Containers must be packed in 

strong outside packagings. 

(ii) Liquid content of the material 

and the gas must not completely fill 

the container at 130 °F.

(iii) Each outside packaging must be 

marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.’’

(2) Cream in refillable metal or plastic containers with soluble or 

emulsified compressed gas. Plastic containers must only contain Division 2.2 

non-flammable soluble or emulsified 

compressed gas. Containers must be of 

such design that they will hold pressure without permanent deformation 

up to 375 psig and must be equipped 

with a device designed so as to release 

pressure without bursting of the container or dangerous projection of its 

parts at higher pressures. This exception applies to shipments offered for 

transportation by refrigerated motor 

vehicles only. 

(3) Nonrefillable metal or plastic containers charged with a Division 6.1 

Packing Group III or nonflammable solution containing biological products 

or a medical preparation which could 

be deteriorated by heat, and compressed gas or gases. Plastic containers 

must only contain 2.2 non-flammable 

soluble or emulsified compressed gas. 

The capacity of each container may 

not exceed 35 cubic inches (19.3 fluid 

ounces). The pressure in the container 

may not exceed 140 psig at 130 °F, and 

the liquid content of the product and 

gas must not completely fill the containers at 130 °F. One completed container out of each lot of 500 or less, 

filled for shipment, must be heated, 

until the pressure in the container is 

equivalent to equilibrium pressure of 

the contents at 130 °F. There must be 

no evidence of leakage, distortion, or 

other defect. The container must be 

packed in strong outside packagings. 

(4) Electronic tubes, each having a 

volume of not more than 30 cubic 

inches and charged with gas to a pressure of not more than 35 psig and 

packed in strong outside packagings. 

(5) Audible fire alarm systems powered by a compressed gas contained in 

an inside metal container when shipped 

under the following conditions: 

(i) Each inside container must have 

contents which are not flammable, poisonous, or corrosive as defined under 

this part, 

(ii) Each inside container may not 

have a capacity exceeding 35 cubic 

inches (19.3 fluid ounces), 

(iii) Each inside container may not 

have a pressure exceeding 70 psig at 70 

°F. and the liquid portion of the gas 

may not completely fill the inside container at 130 °F., and 

(iv) Each nonrefillable inside container must be designed and fabricated 

with a burst pressure of not less than 

four times its charged pressure at 130 

°F. Each refillable inside container 

must be designed and fabricated with a 

burst pressure of not less than five 

times its charged pressure at 130 °F.

(c)–(d) [Reserved] 

(e) Refrigerating machines. (1) New 

(unused) refrigerating machines or 

components thereof are excepted from 

the specification packaging requirements of this part if they meet the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of 

part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 

of this subchapter except §174.24 and to 

part 177 of this subchapter except 

§177.817. 

(i) Each pressure vessel may not contain more than 5,000 pounds of Group 

A1 refrigerant as classified in ANSI/ 

ASHRAE Standard 15 or not more than 

50 pounds of refrigerant other than 

Group A1. 

(ii) Machines or components having 

two or more charged vessels may not 

contain an aggregate of more than 2,000 

pounds of Group I refrigerant or more 

than 100 pounds of refrigerant other 

than Group I. 

(iii) Each pressure vessel must be 

equipped with a safety device meeting 

the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(iv) Each pressure vessel must be 

equipped with a shut-off valve at each 

opening except openings used for safety 

devices and with no other connection. 

These valves must be closed prior to 

and during transportation. 

605

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.306 

(v) Pressure vessels must be manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, or 

when over 6 inches internal diameter, 

in accordance with Section VIII of the 

ASME Code (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(vi) All parts subject to refrigerant 

pressure during shipment must be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 

15.

(vii) The liquid portion of the refrigerant, if any, may not completely fill 

any pressure vessel at 130 °F.

(viii) The amount of refrigerant, if 

liquefied, may not exceed the filling 

density prescribed in §173.304. 

(f) Accumulators (Articles, pressurized 

pneumatic or hydraulic containing nonflammable gas). The following applies to 

accumulators, which are hydraulic accumulators containing nonliquefied, 

nonflammable gas, and nonflammable 

liquids or pneumatic accumulators 

containing nonliquefied, nonflammable 

gas, fabricated from materials which 

will not fragment upon rupture. 

(1) Accumulators installed in motor 

vehicles, construction equipment, and 

assembled machinery and designed and 

fabricated with a burst pressure of not 

less than five times their charged pressure at 70 °F., when shipped, are not 

subject to the requirements of this subchapter.

(2) Accumulators charged with limited quantities of compressed gas to 

not more than 200 p.s.i.g. at 70 °F. are 

excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and the 

specification packaging requirements 

of this subchapter when shipped under 

the following conditions. In addition, 

shipments are not subject to subpart F 

of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 

174 of this subchapter except §174.24 

and to part 177 of this subchapter except §177.817. 

(i) Each accumulator must be shipped 

as an inside packaging, 

(ii) Each accumulator may not have 

a gas space exceeding 2,500 cubic inches 

under stored pressure, and 

(iii) Each accumulator must be tested, without evidence of failure or damage, to at least three times its charged 

pressure of 70 °F., but not less than 120 

p.s.i. before initial shipment and before 

each refilling and reshipment. 

(3) Accumulators with a charging 

pressure exceeding 200 p.s.i.g. at 70 °F.

are excepted from labeling (except 

when offered for transportation by air) 

and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when 

shipped under the following conditions: 

(i) Each accumulator must be in compliance with the requirements stated in 

paragraph (f)(2), (i), (ii), and (iii) of this 

section, and 

(ii) Each accumulator must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than five times its 

charged pressure at 70 °F. when 

shipped.

(4) Accumulators intended to function as shock absorbers, struts, gas 

springs, pneumatic springs or other impact or energy-absorbing devices are 

not subject to the requirements of this 

subchapter provided each: 

(i) Has a gas space capacity not exceeding 1.6 L and a charge pressure not 

exceeding 280 bar, where the product of 

the capacity expressed in liters and 

charge pressure expressed in bars does 

not exceed 80 (for example, 0.5 L gas 

space and 160 bar charge pressure); 

(ii) Has a minimum burst pressure of 

4 times the charge pressure at 20°C for 

products not exceeding 0.5 L gas space 

capacity and 5 times the charge pressure for products greater than 0.5 L gas 

space capacity; 

(iii) Design type has been subjected 

to a fire test demonstrating that the 

article relieves its pressure by means 

of a fire degradable seal or other pressure relief device, such that the article 

will not fragment and that the article 

does not rocket; and 

(iv) Accumulators must be manufactured under a written quality assurance program which monitors parameters controlling burst strength, burst 

mode and performance in a fire situation as specified in paragraphs (f)(4)(i) 

through (f)(4)(iii) of this section. A 

copy of the quality assurance program 

must be maintained at each facility at 

which the accumulators are manufactured.

(5) Accumulators not conforming to 

the provisions of paragraphs (f)(1) 

through (f) (4) of this section, may only 

be transported subject to the approval 

of the Associate Administrator. 

606

§ 173.306 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(g) Water pump system tank. Water

pump system tanks charged with compressed air or limited quantities of nitrogen to not over 40 psig for singletrip shipment to installation sites are 

excepted from labeling (transportation 

by air not authorized) and the specification packaging requirements of 

this subchapter when shipped under the 

following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of 

this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except §174.24 and part 177 except §177.817. 

(1) The tank must be of steel, welded 

with heads concave to pressure, having 

a rated water capacity not exceeding 

120 gallons and with outside diameter 

not exceeding 24 inches. Safety relief 

devices not required. 

(2) The tank must be pneumatically 

tested to 100 psig. Test pressure must 

be permanently marked on the tank. 

(3) The stress at prescribed pressure 

must not exceed 20,000 psi using formula:

S = Pd / 2t 

where:

S = wall stress in psi: 

P = prescribed pressure for the tank of at 

least 3 times charged pressure at 70 °F or 

100 psig, whichever is greater; 

d = inside diameter in inches; 

t = minimum wall thickness, in inches. 

(4) The burst pressure must be at 

least 6 times the charge pressure at 70 

°F.

(5) Each tank must be overpacked in 

a strong outer packaging in accordance 

with §173.301(h). 

(h) Lighter refills. (1) Lighter refills 

(see §171.8 of this subchapter) must not 

contain an ignition element but must 

contain a release device. Lighter refills 

offered for transportation under this 

section may not exceed 4 fluid ounces 

capacity (7.22 cubic inches) or contain 

more than 65 grams of a Division 2.1 

fuel. For transportation by highway or 

rail, lighter refills must be tightly 

packed and secured against movement 

in strong outer packagings. For transportation by aircraft or vessel, lighter 

refills must be tightly packed and secured against movement in any rigid 

specification outer packaging authorized in Subpart L of Part 178 of this 

subchapter at the Packing Group II 

performance level. 

(2) Exceptions. For highway transportation, when no more than 1,500 lighter 

refills covered by this paragraph are 

transported in one motor vehicle, the 

requirements of subparts C through H 

of part 172, and Part 177 of this subchapter do not apply. Lighter refills 

covered under this paragraph must be 

packaged in rigid, strong outer packagings meeting the general packaging 

requirements of subpart B of this part. 

Outer packagings must be plainly and 

durably marked, on two opposing sides 

or ends, with the word ‘‘LIGHTER REFILLS’’ and the number of devices contained therein in letters measuring at 

least 20 mm (0.79 in) in height. No person may offer for transportation or 

transport the lighter refills or prepare 

the lighter refills for shipment unless 

that person has been specifically informed of the requirements of this section.

(i) Consumer commodities. A limited 

quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1), (a)(3), (a)(5), 

or (b) of this section and is a ‘‘consumer commodity’’ as defined in §171.8 

of this subchapter, may be renamed 

‘‘consumer commodity’’ and reclassed 

as ORM–D material. Each package may 

not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross 

weight. In addition to the exceptions 

provided by paragraphs (a) and (b) of 

this section— 

(1) Outside packagings are not required to be marked ‘‘INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS’’; 

(2) Shipments of ORM–D materials 

are not subject to the shipping paper 

requirements of subpart C of part 172 of 

this subchapter, unless the material 

meets the definition of a hazardous 

substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for 

transportation or transported by aircraft; and 

(3) Shipments of ORM–D materials 

are eligible for the exceptions provided 

in §173.156. 

(j) Aerosols and receptacles small, containing gas with a capacity of less than 50 

mL. Aerosols, as defined in §171.8 of 

this subchapter, and receptacles small, 

607

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.308 

containing gas, with a capacity not exceeding 50 mL (1.7 oz.) and with a pressure not exceeding 970 kPa (141 psig) at 

55 °C (131 °F), containing no hazardous 

materials other than a Division 2.2 gas, 

are not subject to the requirements of 

this subchapter. The pressure limit 

may be increased to 2,000 kPa (290 psig) 

at 55 °C (131 °F) provided the aerosols 

are transported in outer packages that 

conform to the packaging requirements of Subpart B of this part. This 

paragraph (j) does not apply to a selfdefense spray (e.g., pepper spray). 

(k) Aerosols for recycling or disposal. 

Aerosols, as defined in §171.8 of this 

subchapter, containing a limited quantity which conforms to the provisions 

of paragraph (a)(3), (a)(5), (b)(1), (b)(2), 

or (b)(3) of this section are not subject 

to the 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight 

limitation when transported by motor 

vehicle for purposes of recycling or disposal under the following conditions: 

(1) The strong outer packaging and 

its contents must not exceed a gross 

weight of 500 kg (1,100 pounds); 

(2) Each aerosol container must be 

secured with a cap to protect the valve 

stem or the valve stem must be removed; and 

(3) The packaging must be offered for 

transportation or transported by— 

(i) Private or contract motor carrier; 

or

(ii) Common carrier in a motor vehicle under exclusive use for such service.

(l) For additional exceptions, also see 

§173.307. 

(l) For additional exceptions, also see 

§173.307. 

[Amdt. 173–94, 41 FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.306, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.307 Exceptions for compressed 

gases. 

(a) The following materials are not 

subject to the requirements of this subchapter:

(1) Carbonated beverages. 

(2) Tires when inflated to pressures 

not greater than their rated inflation 

pressures. For transportation by air, 

tires and tire assemblies must meet the 

conditions in §175.8(b)(4) of this subchapter.

(3) Balls used for sports. 

(4) Refrigerating machines, including 

dehumidifiers and air conditioners, and 

components thereof, such as 

precharged tubing containing: 

(i) 12 kg (25 pounds) or less of a nonflammable, non-toxic gas; 

(ii) 12 L (3 gallons) or less of ammonia solution (UN2672); 

(iii) Except when offered or transported by air, 12 kg (25 pounds) or less 

of a flammable, non-toxic gas; 

(iv) Except when offered or transported by air or vessel, 20 kg (44 

pounds) or less of a Group A1 refrigerant specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 

Standard 15 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); or 

(v) 100 g (4 ounces) or less of a flammable, non-toxic liquefied gas. 

(5) Manufactured articles or 

apparatuses, each containing not more 

than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of inert gas 

and packaged so that the quantity of 

inert gas per package does not exceed 1 

g (0.35 ounce). 

(b) [Reserved] 

[Amdt. 173–94, 41 FR 16081, Apr. 15, 1976, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–135, 45 FR 13090, Feb. 

28, 1980; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 68 FR 45038, 

July 31, 2003; 68 FR 75745, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 

76174, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 14604, Mar. 22, 2006; 

74 FR 2266, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.308 Lighters. 

(a) General requirements. No person 

may offer for transportation or transport a lighter (see §171.8 of this subchapter) containing a Division 2.1 

(flammable gas) material except under 

the following conditions: 

(1) The lighter must contain a fuel 

reservoir not exceeding 4 fluid ounces 

capacity (7.22 cubic inches), and must 

contain not more than 10 grams (0.35 

ounce) of flammable gas. 

(2) The maximum filling density may 

not exceed 85 percent of the volumetric 

capacity of each fluid reservoir at 15 °C

(59 °F).

(3) Each lighter design, including closures, must be capable of withstanding, 

without leakage or rupture, an internal 

pressure of at least two times the pressure of the flammable gas at 55 °C (131 

°F).

608

§ 173.308 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(4) Each appropriate lighter design 

must be examined and successfully 

tested by a person or agency (authorized testing agency) who is authorized 

by the Associate Administrator to perform such examination and testing 

under the provisions of subpart E of 

part 107 of this chapter and who— 

(i) Has the equipment necessary to 

perform the testing required to the 

level of accuracy required; 

(ii) Is able to demonstrate, upon request, the knowledge of the testing 

procedures and requirements of the 

HMR relative to lighters; 

(iii) Does not manufacture or market 

lighters, is not financially dependent 

or owned in whole or in part, by any 

entity that manufactures or markets 

lighters;

(iv) Is a resident of the United 

States; and 

(v) Performs all examination and 

testing in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(3) and (4) of this 

section.

(5) The Associate Administrator will 

assign an identification code to each 

person who is authorized to examine 

and test lighters. This identification 

code must be incorporated into a 

unique test report identifier for each 

successfully tested lighter design. 

(b) Examination and testing of lighter 

design types—(1) Lighter design type definition. A new lighter design is one that 

has never been examined and tested or 

one that differs from a previous design 

in any manner that may affect the escape (leakage) of gas. Lighter characteristics that may affect the escape of 

gas include changes in materials of 

construction, ignition mechanism, 

burner valve design, wall thickness, 

sealing materials, and type of fuel (e.g., 

vapor pressure differences). 

(2) Lighter samples submitted for examination and testing. Samples of a new 

lighter design are excepted from the requirements of (a)(4) and (d) of this section and may be offered for transportation and transported under the following conditions: 

(i) The samples must be transported 

only to an authorized testing agency; 

(ii) No more than 12 lighters may be 

packaged in a single outer packaging; 

(iii) Inner packagings must conform 

to the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) 

of this section. For transportation by 

aircraft, intermediate or outer packagings must meet the pressure differential requirements of §173.27(c) of this 

part;

(iv) The outer packaging must conform to the requirements of Subpart M 

of Part 178 of this subchapter at the 

Packing Group I performance level and 

to the requirements of §173.24 of this 

subpart;

(v) The word ‘‘sample’’ must appear 

on the shipping paper as part of the 

proper shipping name or in association 

with the basic description; and 

(vi) In addition to other required 

markings and labels, the package must 

be marked ‘‘SAMPLE FOR EXAMINATION AND TESTING.’’ 

(vii) All other applicable requirements of this subchapter must be met. 

(3) Examination and testing of sample 

lighters by an authorized testing agency. 

Each sample lighter must be examined 

for conformance with paragraph (a) of 

this section by a person authorized by 

the Associate Administrator. In addition, lighters must be subjected to the 

following leakage test: 

(i) A minimum of six lighters must be 

examined and tested at one time. Store 

the lighters in a desiccator for 24 

hours. After drying, weigh each lighter 

on an analytical balance capable of accurately measuring to within 1⁄10 of a 

milligram (0.0001 grams). 

(ii) After weighing, place the lighters 

together in an explosion-proof, controlled-temperature laboratory oven 

capable of maintaining 38 ± 1 °C (100 ± 

2 °F) for 96 continuous hours (4 days). 

At the end of 96 hours, remove the 

lighters from the oven and place them 

in the same desiccator and allow the 

lighters to cool to ambient temperature.

(iii) After cooling, weigh each lighter 

and determine the net weight differences for each lighter tested (subtract the mass after oven exposure 

from the original mass before oven exposure).

(iv) Weight losses must be assessed to 

determine the quantity of gas that 

leaked from the lighters and from the 

weight change as a result of absorbed 

moisture. If the net weight has increased, the test facility must run the 

required test using six empty lighters 

609

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.308 

in parallel with the six filled lighters. 

The parallel tests are conducted to determine the weight of moisture absorbed in the plastic in order to determine the weight loss of the lighters 

from gas leakage. 

(v) If the net weight loss for any one 

of the six lighters exceeds 20 milligrams (0.020 grams), the design must be 

rejected.

(vi) Lighters manufactured to a rejected lighter design may not be offered for transportation or transported 

in commerce unless approved in writing by the Associate Administrator. 

(4) Recordkeeping requirements. (i) Following the examination of each new 

lighter design, the person or agency 

that conducted the examination and 

test must prepare a test report and 

make that test report available to the 

manufacturer. At a minimum, the test 

report must contain the following information:

(A) Name and address of test facility; 

(B) Name and address of applicant; 

(C) A test report identifier, that is, 

the authorized person or agency identifier code immediately followed by an 

alpha/numeric identifier of four or 

more characters assigned to the specific lighter design by the authorized 

person or agency (e.g., ‘‘LAA****,’’ 

where, ‘‘LAA’’ is the identification 

code assigned to the authorized person 

or agency by the Associate Administrator and ‘‘ ’’ is replaced with the 

unique test report identifier assigned 

to the specific lighter design by the authorized person or agency); 

(D) Manufacturer of the lighter. For 

a foreign manufacturer, the U.S. agent 

or importer must be identified; 

(E) Description of the lighter design 

type (e.g., model, dimensions, ignition 

mechanism, reservoir capacity, lot/ 

batch number) in sufficient detail to 

ensure conformance with paragraph 

(b)(4)(iii) of this section; and 

(F) A certification by the authorized 

testing agency that the lighter design 

conforms to paragraph (a) of this section and passes or does not pass the required leakage test in paragraph (b) of 

this section. 

(ii) For as long as any lighter design 

is in production and for at least three 

years thereafter, a copy of each lighter’s test report must be maintained by 

the authorized testing agency that performed the examination and testing 

and the manufacturer of the design. 

For a foreign manufacturer, each test 

report must be maintained in accordance with this paragraph by the foreign 

manufacturer’s U.S. agent or importer. 

(iii) Test reports must be traceable to 

a specific lighter design and must be 

made available to a representative of 

the Department upon request. 

(5) Transitional provisions. Until January 1, 2012, approval numbers issued by 

the Associate Administrator prior to 

January 1, 2007 may continue to be 

marked on packages and annotated on 

shipping papers, where applicable. 

After that time, previously issued approvals (i.e., T-** *) will no longer be 

valid and each lighter design currently 

in production must be re-examined and 

tested under the provisions of this section.

(c) Packaging requirements—(1) Inner

containment. Lighters must be placed in 

an inner packaging that is designed to 

prevent movement of the lighters and 

inadvertent ignition or leakage. The 

ignition device and gas control lever of 

each lighter must be designed, or securely sealed, taped, or otherwise fastened or packaged to protect against 

accidental functioning or leakage of 

the contents during transport. If lighters are packed vertically in a plastic 

tray, a plastic, fiberboard or paperboard partition must be used to prevent friction between the ignition device and the inner packaging. 

(2) Outer packaging. Lighters and 

their inner packagings must be tightly 

packed and secured against movement 

in any rigid specification outer packaging authorized in Subpart L of Part 

178 of this subchapter at the Packing 

Group II performance level. 

(d) Shipping paper and marking requirements. (1) In addition to the requirements of subpart C of part 172, 

shipping papers must be annotated 

with the lighter design test report 

identifier (see paragraph (b)(4)(i)(C) of 

this section) traceable to the test report assigned to the lighters or, if applicable, the previously issued approval 

number (i.e., T***), in association with 

the basic description. 

(2) In addition to the requirements of 

subpart D of part 172, a lighter design 

610

§ 173.309 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

test report identifier (see paragraph 

(b)(4)(i)(C) of this section) or, if applicable, the previously issued approval 

number (i.e., T***), must be marked on 

a package containing lighters. 

(3) For transportation by vessel in a 

closed transport vehicle or a closed 

freight container, the following warning must be affixed to the access doors: 

WARNING—MAY CONTAIN EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES WITH AIR—KEEP 

IGNITION SOURCES AWAY WHEN 

OPENING

The warning must be on a contrasting background and must be in 

letters measuring at least 12.7 mm (0.5 

inch) in height. 

(e) Exceptions—(1) Common or contract 

carriage. For highway transportation 

by common or contract carrier, when 

no more than 1,500 lighters covered by 

this section are transported in one 

motor vehicle, the requirements of subparts C through H of part 172, and Part 

177 of this subchapter do not apply. 

Lighters transported in accordance 

with this paragraph are also excepted 

from the specification packaging, shipping paper, and marking requirements 

specified in §§173.308(c) and (d). Inner 

packagings must conform to paragraph 

(c)(1) of this section. Lighters must be 

further packaged in rigid, strong outer 

packagings meeting the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 

173. Outer packagings must be plainly 

and durably marked, on two opposing 

sides or ends, with the word ‘‘LIGHTERS’’ and the number of devices contained therein in letters measuring at 

least 20 mm (0.79 in) in height. In addition, the package must include the test 

report identifier for each lighter design 

as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(i)(C) of 

this section or, if applicable, the previously issued approval number (i.e.,

T***). The test report identifier or approval number must be durable, legible, in English, and located in, attached to, or marked directly on the 

package. No person may offer for transportation or transport the lighters or 

prepare the lighters for shipment unless that person has been specifically 

informed of the requirements of this 

section.

(2) Private carriage. For highway 

transportation by a private carrier, 

lighters that have been examined and 

successfully tested in accordance with 

this section are not subject to any 

other requirements of this subchapter 

under the following conditions: 

(i) No person may offer for transportation or transport the lighters or prepare the lighters for shipment unless 

that person has been specifically informed of the requirements of this section;

(ii) Lighters must be placed in an 

inner packaging that is designed to 

prevent accidental activation of the ignition device or valve, release of gas, 

and movement of the lighters (e.g.,

tray, blister pack, etc.); 

(iii) Inner packagings must be placed 

in a securely closed rigid outer packaging that limits movement of the 

inner packagings and protects them 

from damage; 

(iv) The outer package may contain 

not more than 300 lighters; 

(v) A transport vehicle may carry not 

more than 1,500 lighters at any one 

time;

(vi) The lighters may not be placed in 

an outer packaging with other hazardous materials; and 

(vii) Outer packagings must be plainly and durably marked with the words 

‘‘LIGHTERS, excepted quantity.’’ 

[71 FR 3427, Jan. 23, 2006, as amended at 73 

FR 57006, Oct. 1, 2008] 

§ 173.309 Fire extinguishers. 

(a) Fire extinguishers charged with a 

limited quantity of compressed gas to 

not more than 1660 kPa (241 psig) at 21 

°C (70 °F) are excepted from labeling 

(except when offered for transportation 

by air) and the specification packaging 

requirements of this subchapter when 

shipped under the following conditions. 

In addition, shipments are not subject 

to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter 

except §174.24 or to part 177 of this subchapter except §177.817. 

(1) Each fire extinguisher must have 

contents which are nonflammable, nonpoisonous, and noncorrosive as defined 

under this subchapter. 

(2) Each fire extinguisher must be 

shipped as an inner packaging. 

(3) Nonspecification cylinders are authorized subject to the following conditions:

611

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.310 

(i) The internal volume of each cylinder may not exceed 18 L (1,100 cubic 

inches). For fire extinguishers not exceeding 900 mL (55 cubic inches) capacity, the liquid portion of the gas plus 

any additional liquid or solid must not 

completely fill the container at 55 °C

(130 °F). Fire extinguishers exceeding 

900 mL (55 cubic inches) capacity may 

not contain any liquefied compressed 

gas;

(ii) Each fire extinguisher manufactured on and after January 1, 1976, 

must be designed and fabricated with a 

burst pressure of not less than six 

times its charged pressure at 21 °C (70 

°F) when shipped; 

(iii) Each fire extinguisher must be 

tested, without evidence of failure or 

damage, to at least three times its 

charged pressure at 21 °C (70 °F) but not 

less than 825 kPa (120 psig) before initial shipment, and must be marked to 

indicate the year of the test (within 90 

days of the actual date of the original 

test) and with the words ‘‘MEETS DOT 

REQUIREMENTS.’’ This marking is 

considered a certification that the fire 

extinguisher is manufactured in accordance with the requirements of this 

section. The words ‘‘This extinguisher 

meets all requirements of 49 CFR 

173.306’’ may be displayed on fire extinguishers manufactured prior to January 1, 1976; and 

(iv) For any subsequent shipment, 

each fire extinguisher must be in compliance with the retest requirements of 

the Occupational Safety and Health 

Administration Regulations of the Department of Labor, 29 CFR 1910.157. 

(4) Specification 2P or 2Q (§§178.33 

and 178.33a of this subchapter) inner 

nonrefillable metal packagings are authorized for use as fire extinguishers 

subject to the following conditions: 

(i) The liquid portion of the gas plus 

any additional liquid or solid may not 

completely fill the packaging at 55 °C

(130 °F);

(ii) Pressure in the packaging shall 

not exceed 1250 kPa (181 psig) at 55 °C

(130 °F). If the pressure exceeds 920 kPa 

(141 psig) at 55 °C (130 °F), but does not 

exceed 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55 °C (130 

°F), a specification DOT 2P inner metal 

packaging must be used; if the pressure 

exceeds 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55 °C (130 

°F), a specification DOT 2Q inner metal 

packaging must be used. The metal 

packaging must be capable of withstanding, without bursting, a pressure 

of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55 

°C (130 °F); and 

(iii) Each completed inner packaging 

filled for shipment must have been 

heated until the pressure in the container is equivalent to the equilibrium 

pressure of the contents at 55 °C (130 

°F) without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. 

(b) Specification 3A, 3AA, 3E, 3AL, 

4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW (§§178.36, 

178.37, 178.42, 178.46, 178.50, 178.51, 178.55 

and 178.61 of this subchapter) cylinders 

are authorized for use as fire extinguishers.

[Amdt. 173–235, 58 FR 50503, Sept. 27, 1993, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 

26, 1994; Amdt. 173–258, 61 FR 51240, Oct. 1, 

1996; 66 FR 45380, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 71 FR 

54395, Sept. 14, 2006] 

§ 173.310 Exceptions for radiation detectors. 

Radiation detectors, radiation sensors, electron tube devices, or ionization chambers, herein referred to as 

‘‘radiation detectors,’’ that contain 

only Division 2.2 gases, are excepted 

from the specification packaging in 

this subchapter and, except when 

transported by air, from labeling and 

placarding requirements of this subchapter when designed, packaged, and 

transported as follows: 

(a) Radiation detectors must be single-trip, hermetically sealed, welded 

metal inside containers that will not 

fragment upon impact. 

(b) Radiation detectors must not 

have a design pressure exceeding 4.83 

MPa (700 psig) and a capacity exceeding 355 fluid ounces (641 cubic inches). 

They must be designed and fabricated 

with a burst pressure of not less than 

three times the design pressure if the 

radiation detector is equipped with a 

pressure relief device, and not less than 

four times the design pressure if the 

detector is not equipped with a pressure relief device. 

(c) Radiation detectors must be 

shipped in a strong outer packaging capable of withstanding a drop test of at 

least 1.2 meters (4 feet) without breakage of the radiation detector or rupture 

612

§ 173.312 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

of the outer packaging. If the radiation 

detector is shipped as part of other 

equipment, the equipment must be 

packaged in strong outer packaging or 

the equipment itself must provide an 

equivalent level of protection. 

(d) Emergency response information 

accompanying each shipment and 

available from each emergency response telephone number for radiation 

detectors must identify those receptacles that are not fitted with a pressure relief device and provide appropriate guidance for exposure to fire. 

[75 FR 27215, May 14, 2010] 

§ 173.312 Requirements for shipment 

of MEGCs. 

(a) General requirements. (1) Unless 

otherwise specified, a MEGC is authorized for the shipment of liquefied and 

non-liquefied compressed gases. Each 

pressure receptacle contained in a 

MEGC must meet the requirements in 

§§173.301, 173.301b, 173.302b and 173.304b, 

as applicable. 

(2) The MEGC must conform to the 

design, construction, inspection and 

testing requirements prescribed in 

§178.75 of this subchapter. 

(3) No person may offer or accept a 

hazardous material for transportation 

in a MEGC that is damaged to such an 

extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or the MEGC’s structural or service equipment may be affected.

(4) No person may fill or offer for 

transportation a pressure receptacle in 

a MEGC if the pressure receptacle or 

the MEGC is due for periodic requalification, as prescribed in subpart C to 

part 180 of this subchapter. However, 

this restriction does not preclude 

transportation of pressure receptacles 

filled and offered for transportation 

prior to the requalification due date. 

(5) Prior to filling and offering a 

MEGC for transportation, the MEGC’s 

structural and service equipment must 

be visually inspected. Any unsafe condition must be corrected before the 

MEGC is offered for transportation. All 

required markings must be legible. 

(6) Except for Division 2.2 permanent 

gases, each pressure receptacle must be 

equipped with an individual shutoff 

valve that must be tightly closed while 

in transit. For Division 2.1, Division 2.2 

liquefied gases and 2.3 gases, the manifold must be designed so that each 

pressure receptacle can be filled separately and be kept isolated by a valve 

capable of being closed during transit. 

For Division 2.1 gases, the pressure receptacles must be isolated by a valve 

into assemblies of not more than 3,000 

L.

(b) Filling. (1) A MEGC may not be 

filled to a pressure greater than the 

lowest marked working pressure of any 

pressure receptacle. A MEGC may not 

be filled above its marked maximum 

permissible gross mass. 

(2) After each filling, the shipper 

must verify the leakproofness of the 

closures and equipment. Each fill opening must be closed by a cap or plug. 

(c) Damage protection. During transportation, a MEGC must be protected 

against damage to the pressure receptacles and service equipment resulting 

from lateral and longitudinal impact 

and overturning as prescribed in §178.75 

of this subchapter. 

[71 FR 33884, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.313 UN Portable Tank Table for 

Liquefied Compressed Gases. 

The UN Portable Tank Table for Liquefied Compressed Gases is referenced 

in §172.102(c)(7)(iii) of this subchapter 

for portable tanks that are used to 

transport liquefied compressed gases. 

The table applies to each liquefied 

compressed gas that is identified with 

Special Provision T50 in Column (7) of 

the §172.101 Table. In addition to providing the UN identification number 

and proper shipping name, the table 

provides maximum allowable working 

pressures, bottom opening requirements, pressure relief device requirements, and degree of filling requirements for liquefied compressed gas permitted for transportation in a T50 portable tank. In the minimum test pressure column, ‘‘small’’ means a portable 

tank with a diameter of 1.5 meters or 

less when measured at the widest part 

of the shell, ‘‘sunshield’’ means a portable tank with a shield covering at 

least the upper third of the shell, 

‘‘bare’’ means no sunshield or insulation is provided, and ‘‘insulated’’ 

means a complete cladding of sufficient 

613

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.313 

thickness of insulating material necessary to provide a minimum conductance of not more than 0.67 w/m2/k. In 

the pressure relief requirements column, the word ‘‘Normal’’ denotes that 

a frangible disc as specified in 

§178.276(e)(3) of this subchapter is not 

required.

UN PORTABLE TANK TABLE FOR LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED GASES

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed 

gases

Minimum design 

pressure (bar) 

small; bare; 

sunshield; insulated

Openings

below liquid 

level

Pressure relief requirements (See

§ 178.276(e)) 

Maximum filling 

density (kg/l) 

1005 ...... Ammonia, anhydrous ............................. 29.0 Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.53 

25.7

22.0

19.7

1009 ...... Bromotrifluoromethane or Refrigerant 

gas R 13B1.

38.0 Allowed Normal 1.13 

34.0

30.0

27.5

1010 ...... Butadienes, stabilized ............................ 7.5 Allowed Normal 0.55 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1011 ...... Butane .................................................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.51 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1012 ...... Butylene ................................................. 8.0 Allowed Normal 0.53 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1017 ...... Chlorine .................................................. 19.0 Not § 178.276(e)(3) 1.25 

17.0 Allowed 

15.0

13.5

1018 ...... Chlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant 

gas R 22.

26.0 Allowed Normal 1.03 

24.0

21.0

19.0

1020 ...... Chloropentafluoroethane or Refrigerant 

gas R 115.

23.0 Allowed Normal 1.06 

20.0

18.0

16.0

1021 ...... 1-Chloro-1,2,2,2-tetrafluoroethane or 

Refrigerant gas R 124.

10.3 Allowed Normal 1.2 

9.8

7.9

7.0

1027 ...... Cyclopropane ......................................... 18.0 Allowed Normal 0.53 

16.0

14.5

13.0

1028 ...... Dichlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant 

gas R 12.

16.0 Allowed Normal 1.15 

15.0

13.0

11.5

1029 ...... Dichlorofluoromethane or Refrigerant 

gas R 21.

7.0 Allowed Normal 1.23 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1030 ...... 1,1-Difluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 

152a.

16.0 Allowed Normal 0.79 

14.0

12.4

11.0

1032 ...... Dimethylamine, anhydrous .................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.59 

7.0

7.0

7.0

614

§ 173.313 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

UN PORTABLE TANK TABLE FOR LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED GASES—Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed 

gases

Minimum design 

pressure (bar) 

small; bare; 

sunshield; insulated

Openings

below liquid 

level

Pressure relief requirements (See

§ 178.276(e)) 

Maximum filling 

density (kg/l) 

1033 ...... Dimethyl ether ........................................ 15.5 Allowed Normal 0.58 

13.8

12.0

10.6

1036 ...... Ethylamine ............................................. 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.61 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1037 ...... Ethyl chloride ......................................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.8 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1040 ...... Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up to a 

total pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at 50 

°C.

Only authorized 

in 10 bar insulated portable tanks— 

Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.78 

1041 ...... Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide mixture with more than 9% but not more 

than 87% ethylene oxide.

See MAWP definition in 

§ 178.276(a) 

Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f) 

1055 ...... Isobutylene ............................................. 8.1 Allowed Normal 0.52 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1060 ...... Methyl acetylene and propadiene mixture, stabilized.28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43 

24.5

22.0

20.0

1061 ...... Methylamine, anhydrous ........................ 10.8 Allowed Normal 0.58 

9.6

7.8

7.0

1062 ...... Methyl bromide ...................................... 7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.51 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1063 ...... Methyl chloride or Refrigerant gas R 40 14.5 Allowed Normal 0.81 

12.7

11.3

10.0

1064 ...... Methyl mercaptan .................................. 7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.78 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1067 ...... Dinitrogen tetroxide ................................ 7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.3 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1075 ...... Petroleum gas, liquefied ........................ See MAWP definition in 

§ 178.276(a) 

Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f) 

1077 ...... Propylene ............................................... 28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43 

24.5

22.0

20.0

1078 ...... Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. ........................... See MAWP definition in 

§ 178.276(a) 

Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f) 

1079 ...... Sulphur dioxide ...................................... 11.6 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.23 

10.3

8.5

7.6

1082 ...... Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilized or

Refrigerant gas R 1113.

17.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.13 

15.0

13.1

11.6

1083 ...... Trimethylamine, anhydrous ................... 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.56 

7.0

615

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.313 

UN PORTABLE TANK TABLE FOR LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED GASES—Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed 

gases

Minimum design 

pressure (bar) 

small; bare; 

sunshield; insulated

Openings

below liquid 

level

Pressure relief requirements (See

§ 178.276(e)) 

Maximum filling 

density (kg/l) 

7.0

7.0

1085 ...... Vinyl bromide, stabilized ........................ 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.37 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1086 ...... Vinyl chloride, stabilized ........................ 10.6 Allowed Normal 0.81 

9.3

8.0

7.0

1087 ...... Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized ................. 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.67 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1581 ...... Chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixture.7.0 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.51 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1582 ...... Chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixture.19.2 Not Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 0.81 

16.9

15.1

13.1

1858 ...... Hexafluoropropylene compressed or

Refrigerant gas R 1216.

19.2 Allowed Normal 1.11 

16.9

15.1

13.1

1912 ...... Methyl chloride and methylene chloride 

mixture.

15.2 Allowed Normal 0.081 

13.0

11.6

10.1

NA, 1954 Insecticide gases, flammable, n.o.s. ..... See MAWP definition in 

§ 178.276(a) 

Allowed Normal § 173.32(f) 

1958 ...... 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane or 

Refrigerant gas R 114.

7.0 Allowed Normal 1.3 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1965 ...... Hydrocarbon gas, mixture liquefied, 

n.o.s..

See MAWP definition in 

178.276(a)

Allowed Normal See § 173.32(f) 

1969 ...... Isobutane ............................................... 8.5 Allowed Normal 0.49 

7.5

7.0

7.0

1973 ...... Chlorodifluoromethane and 

chloropentafluoroethane mixture with 

fixed boiling point, with approximately 

49% chlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 502.

28.3 Allowed Normal 1.05 

25.3

22.8

20.3

1974 ...... Chlorodifluorobromomethane or Refrigerant gas R 12B1.7.4 Allowed Normal 1.61 

7.0

7.0

7.0

1976 ...... Octafluorocyclobutane or Refrigerant

gas RC 318.

8.8 Allowed Normal 1.34 

7.8

7.0

7.0

1978 ...... Propane ................................................. 22.5 Allowed Normal 0.42 

20.4

616

§ 173.313 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

UN PORTABLE TANK TABLE FOR LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED GASES—Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed 

gases

Minimum design 

pressure (bar) 

small; bare; 

sunshield; insulated

Openings

below liquid 

level

Pressure relief requirements (See

§ 178.276(e)) 

Maximum filling 

density (kg/l) 

18.0

16.5

1983 ...... 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 133a.7.0 Allowed Normal 1.18 

7.0

7.0

7.0

2035 ...... 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane compressed or 

Refrigerant gas R 143a.

31.0 Allowed Normal 0.76 

27.5

24.2

21.8

2424 ...... Octafluoropropane or Refrigerant gas R 

218.

23.1 Allowed Normal 1.07 

20.8

18.6

16.6

2517 ...... 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 142b.8.9 Allowed Normal 0.99 

7.8

7.0

7.0

2602 ...... Dichlorodifluoromethane and 

difluoroethane azeotropic mixture with 

approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 500.

20.0 Allowed Normal 1.01 

18.0

16.0

14.5

3057 ...... Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14.6 Not allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.17 

12.9

11.3

9.9

3070 ...... Ethylene oxide and dichlorodifluoromethane mixture with not more than 

12.5% ethylene oxide.

14.0 Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) 1.09 

12.0

11.0

9.0

3153 ...... Perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether) ................ 14.3 Allowed Normal 1.14 

13.4

11.2

10.2

3159 ...... 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane or Refrigerant 

gas R 134a.

17.7 Allowed Normal 1.04 

15.7

13.8

12.1

3161 ...... Liquefied gas, flammable, n.o.s. ............ See MAWP definition in 

§ 178.276(a) 

Allowed Normal § 173.32(f) 

3163 ...... Liquefied gas, n.o.s. .............................. See MAWP definition in 

§ 178.276(a) 

Allowed Normal § 173.32(f) 

3220 ...... Pentafluoroethane or Refrigerant gas R 

125.

34.4 Allowed Normal 0.95 

30.8

27.5

24.5

3252 ...... Difluoromethane or Refrigerant gas R 

32.

43.0 Allowed Normal 0.78 

39.0

34.4

30.5

3296 ...... Heptafluoropropane or Refrigerant gas 

R 227.

16.0 Allowed Normal 1.2 

14.0

12.5

11.0

617

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.314 

UN PORTABLE TANK TABLE FOR LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED GASES—Continued

UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied compressed 

gases

Minimum design 

pressure (bar) 

small; bare; 

sunshield; insu- lated

Openings

below liquid level

Pressure relief requirements (See

§ 178.276(e)) 

Maximum filling 

density (kg/l) 

3297 ...... Ethylene oxide and 

chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture, with 

not more than 8.8% ethylene oxide.

8.1 Allowed Normal 1.16 

7.0

7.0

7.0

3298 ...... Ethylene oxide and pentafluoroethane 

mixture, with not more than 7.9% 

ethylene oxide.

25.9 Allowed Normal 1.02 

23.4

20.9

18.6

3299 ...... Ethylene oxide and tetrafluoroethane 

mixture, with not more than 5.6% 

ethylene oxide.

16.7 Allowed Normal 1.03 

14.7

12.9

11.2

3318 ...... Ammonia solution, relative density less 

than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with 

more than 50% ammonia.

See MAWP definition in 

§ 178.276(a) 

Allowed § 178.276(e)(3) § 173.32(f) 

3337 ...... Refrigerant gas R 404A ......................... 31.6 Allowed Normal 0.84 

28.3

25.3

22.5

3338 ...... Refrigerant gas R 407A ......................... 31.3 Allowed Normal 0.95 

28.1

25.1

22.4

3339 ...... Refrigerant gas R 407B ......................... 33.0 Allowed Normal 0.95 

29.6

26.5

23.6

3340 ...... Refrigerant gas R 407C ......................... 29.9 Allowed Normal 0.95 

26.8

23.9

21.3

[69 FR 76174, Dec. 20, 2004, as amended at 70 

FR 34399, June 14, 2005] 

§ 173.314 Compressed gases in tank 

cars and multi-unit tank cars. 

(a) Definitions. For definitions of 

compressed gases, see §173.115. 

(b) General requirements. (1) Tank car 

tanks containing compressed gases 

must not be shipped unless they were 

loaded by or with the consent of the 

owner thereof. 

(2) Tank car tanks must not contain 

gases capable of combining chemically 

and must not be loaded with any gas 

which combines chemically with the 

gas previously loaded therein, until all 

residue has been removed and interior 

of tank thoroughly cleaned. 

(3) For tanks of the DOT-106A and 

110A class, the tanks must be placed in 

position and attached to car structure 

by the shipper. 

(4) Wherever the word ‘‘approved’’ is 

used in this part of the regulations, it 

means approval by the Association of 

American Railroads Committee on 

Tank Cars as prescribed in §179.3 of 

this subchapter. 

(5) Each tank car used for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia or 

any material that meets the criteria of 

Division 2.1 or 2.3 must have gaskets 

for manway cover plates and for 

mounting of fittings designed (for temperature, application, media, pressure, 

and size) to create a positive seal so 

that, under conditions normally incident to transportation, there will not 

be an identifiable release of the material to the environment. The use of 

sealants to install gaskets is prohibited.

618

§ 173.314 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(c) Authorized gases, filling limits for 

tank cars. A compressed gas in a tank 

car or a multi-unit tank car must be 

offered for transportation in accordance with §173.31 and this section. The 

gases listed below must be loaded and 

offered for transportation in accordance with the following table: 

Proper shipping name 

Outage and filling limits

(see note 1) 

Authorized tank car 

class

(see note 11) 

Authorized tank car specification

(see note 12) 

Ammonia, anhydrous, or ammonia solutions > 

50 percent ammonia.

Notes 2, 10 ................ 105, 112, 114, 120 ..... 105J500I, 112J500I 

Note 3 ........................ 106.

Ammonia solutions with > 35 percent, but ≤ 

50 percent ammonia by mass.

Note 3 ........................ 105, 109, 112, 114, 

120.

Argon, compressed .......................................... Note 4 ........................ 107.

Boron trichloride ............................................... Note 3 ........................ 105, 106.

Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid ................... Note 5 ........................ 105.

Chlorine ............................................................ Note 6 ........................ 105 ............................. 105J600I 

125 ............................. 106.

Chlorine trifluoride ............................................ Note 3 ........................ 106, 110.

Chlorine pentafluoride ...................................... Note 3 ........................ 106, 110.

Dimethyl ether .................................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 

114, 120.

Dimethylamine, anhydrous ............................... Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112.

Dinitrogen tetroxide, inhibited .......................... Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112 ............. 105J500I 

Division 2.1 materials not specifically identified 

in this table.

Notes 9, 10 ................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 

114, 120.

Division 2.2 materials not specifically identified 

in this table.

Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 109, 110, 

112, 114, 120.

Division 2.3 Zone A materials not specifically 

identified in this table.

None ........................... See § 173.245. ........... 105J600I 

Division 2.3 Zone B materials not specifically 

identified in this table.

Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 

114, 120.

105J600I

Division 2.3 Zone C materials not specifically 

identified in this table.

Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 

114, 120.

105J500I

Division 2.3 Zone D materials not specifically 

identified in this table.

Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 109, 110, 

112, 114, 120.

105J500I, 112J500I 

Ethylamine ........................................................ Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 

114, 120.

Helium, compressed ........................................ Note 4 ........................ 107.

Hydrogen .......................................................... Note 4 ........................ 107.

Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid .............. Note 7 ........................ 105 ............................. 105J600I, 112S600I

Hydrogen sulfide .............................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 110, 112, 

114, 120.

105J600I

Hydrogen sulfide, liquefied ............................... 68 ............................... 106.

Methyl bromide ................................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106 ..................... 105J500I

Methyl chloride ................................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112.

Methyl mercaptan ............................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106 ..................... 105J500I

Methylamine, anhydrous .................................. Note 3 ........................ 105, 106, 112.

Nitrogen, compressed ...................................... Note 4 ........................ 107.

Nitrosyl chloride ................................................ 124 ............................. 105 ............................. 105J500I 

110 ............................. 106.

Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid ...................... Note 5 ........................ 105.

Oxygen, compressed ....................................... Note 4 ........................ 107.

Phosgene ......................................................... Note 3 ........................ 106.

Sulfur dioxide, liquefied .................................... 125 ............................. 105, 106, 110 ............. 105J500I

Sulfuryl fluoride ................................................ 120 ............................. 105.

Vinyl fluoride, stabilized ................................... Note 8 ........................ 105.

NOTES: 1. The percent filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the mass of gas in the tank to 

the mass of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in kilograms, the mass of 1 L of water at 

15.5 °C in air is 1 kg. (the mass of one gallon of water at 60 °F in air is 8.32828 pounds). 

2. The liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least two percent of the total capacity of the tank at the reference

temperature of 46 °C (115 °F) for a noninsulated tank; 43 °C (110 °F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour 

per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 41 °C (105 °F)

for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 

15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square 

foot/per degree F) temperature differential. 

3. The requirements of § 173.24b(a) apply. 

4. The gas pressure at 54.44 °C (130 °F.) in any non-insulated tank car may not exceed 7/10 of the marked test pressure, except that a tank may be charged with helium to a pressure 10 percent in excess of the marked maximum gas pressure at 54.44 

°C (130 °F.) of each tank. 

5. The liquid portion of the gas at -17.77 °C (0 °F.) must not completely fill the tank. 

6. The maximum permitted filling density is 125 percent. The quantity of chlorine loaded into a single unit-tank car may not be

loaded in excess of the normal lading weights nor in excess of 81.65 Mg (90 tons). 

7. 89 percent maximum to 80.1 percent minimum at a test pressure of 6.2 Bar (90 psig). 

8. 59.6 percent maximum to 53.6 percent minimum at a test pressure of 7.2 Bar (105 psig). 

619

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.314 

9. For a liquefied petroleum gas, the liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least one percent of the total capac- ity of the tank at the reference temperature of 46 °C (115 °F) for a noninsulated tank; 43 °C (110 °F) for a tank having a thermal 

protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 

10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 41 °C (105 °F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an over- all thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius 

(0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential. 

10. For liquefied petroleum gas and anhydrous ammonia, during the months of November through March (winter), the following 

reference temperatures may be used: 38 °C (100 °F) for a noninsulated tank; 32 °C (90 °F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22 

kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 29 °C (85 °F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket and insulation that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius 

(0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential. The winter reference temperatures may only be used 

for a tank car shipped directly to a consumer for unloading and not stored in transit. The offeror of the tank must inform each

customer that the tank car was filled based on winter reference temperatures. The tank must be unloaded as soon as possible 

after March in order to retain the specified outage and to prevent a release of hazardous material which might occur due to the

tank car becoming liquid full at higher temperatures. 

11. For materials poisonous by inhalation, the single unit tank car tanks authorized are only those cars approved by the Tank 

Car Committee for transportation of the specified material and built prior to March 16, 2009. 

12. Except as provided by paragraph (d) of this section, for materials poisonous by inhalation, fusion-welded tank car tanks 

built on or after March 16, 2009 used for the transportation of the PIH materials noted, must meet the applicable authorized tank car specification and must be equipped with a head shield as prescribed in § 179.16(c)(1). 

(d) Alternative tank car tanks for materials poisonous by inhalation. (1) As an 

alternative to the authorized tank car 

specification noted in the column 4 of 

the table in paragraph (c) of this section, a car of the same authorized tank 

car specification but of the next lower 

test pressure, as prescribed in column 5 

of the table at §179.101–1, may be used 

provided both of the following conditions are met: 

(i) The difference between the alternative and the required minimum plate 

thicknesses, based on the calculation 

prescribed in §179.100–6 of this subchapter, is added to the alternative 

tank car jacket and head shield. When 

the jacket and head shield are made 

from any authorized steel with a minimum tensile strength from 70,000 p.s.i. 

to 80,000 p.s.i., but the required minimum plate thickness calculation is 

based on steel with a minimum tensile 

strength of 81,000 p.s.i., the thickness 

to be added to the jacket and head 

shield must be increased by a factor of 

1.157. Forming allowances for heads are 

not required to be considered when calculating thickness differences as prescribed in this paragraph. 

(ii) The tank car jacket and head 

shield must be manufactured from carbon steel plate as prescribed in 

§179.100–7(a) of this subchapter. 

(e) Verification of content. The amount 

of liquefied gas loaded into each tank 

may be determined either by measurement or calculation of the weight. If by 

measurement, the weight must be 

checked after disconnecting the loading line by the use of proper scales. If 

by calculation, the weight of liquefied 

petroleum gas, methylacetylene propadiene, stabilized, dimethylamine, 

methylamine anhydrous, or 

trimethylamine may be calculated 

using the outage tables supplied by the 

tank car owners and the specific 

gravities as determined at the plant, 

and this computation must be checked 

by determination of specific gravity of 

product after loading. Carriers may 

verify calculated weights by use of 

proper scales. The use of a fixed tube 

gauge device is authorized for determining the weight of methyl 

mercaptan in Specification 105A300W 

tanks instead of weighing. 

(f) [Reserved] 

(g) Special requirements for hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, and 

vinyl fluoride,stabilized. 

(1) The shipper shall notify the Federal Railroad Administration whenever 

a tank car is not received by the consignee within 20 days from the date of 

shipment. Notification to the Federal 

Railroad Administration may be made 

by e-mail to Hmassist@fra.dot.gov or

telephone call to (202) 493–6229. 

(2) A tank car containing hydrogen 

chloride, refrigerated liquid must have 

the auxiliary valve on the pressure relief device closed during transportation.

(3) See §179.102–17 of this subchapter 

for additional requirements. 

(4) Tank cars containing hydrogen 

chloride, refrigerated liquid, must be 

unloaded to such an extent that any 

residue remaining in the tank at a reference temperature of 32 °C (90 °F) will 

not actuate the reclosing pressure relief device. 

620

§ 173.314 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(h)–(i) [Reserved] 

(j) Special requirements for materials 

having a primary or secondary Division 

2.1 (flammable gas) hazard. For single 

unit tank cars, interior pipes of loading 

and unloading valves, sampling devices, and gauging devices with an 

opening for the passage of the lading 

exceeding 1.52 mm (0.060 inch) diameter 

must be equipped with excess flow 

valves. For single unit tank cars constructed before January 1, 1972, gauging devices must conform to this paragraph by no later than July 1, 2006. The 

protective housing cover must be provided with an opening, with a weatherproof cover, above each pressure relief 

valve that is concentric with the discharge of the pressure relief valve and 

that has an area at least equal to the 

valve outlet area. Class DOT 109 tank 

cars and tank cars manufactured from 

aluminum or nickel plate are not authorized.

(k) Special requirements for chlorine. 

Tank cars built after September 30, 

1991, must have an insulation system 

consisting of 5.08 cm (2 inches) glass 

fiber placed over 5.08 cm (2 inches) of 

ceramic fiber. Tank cars must have excess flow valves on the interior pipes of 

liquid discharge valves. Tank cars constructed to a DOT 105A500W specification may be marked as a DOT 105A300W 

specification with the size and type of 

reclosing pressure relief valves required by the marked specification. 

(l) Special requirements for hydrogen 

sulphide. Each multi-unit tank car 

must be equipped with adequate pressure relief devices of the fusible plug 

type having a yield temperature not 

over 76.66 °C (170 °F.), and not less than 

69.44 °C (157 °F.). Each device must be 

resistant to extrusion of the fusible 

alloy and leak tight at 55 °C (130 °F.). A 

threaded solid plug must seal each 

valve outlet. In addition, a metal cover 

must protect all valves. 

(m) Special requirements for nitrosyl 

chloride. Single unit tank cars and 

their associated service equipment, 

such as venting, loading and unloading 

valves, and reclosing pressure relief 

valves, must be made of metal or clad 

with a material that is not subject to 

rapid deterioration by the lading. 

Multi-unit tank car tanks must be 

nickel-clad and have reclosing pressure 

relief devices incorporating a fusible 

plug having a yield temperature of 

79.44 °C (175 °F.). Reclosing pressure relief devices must be vapor tight at 54.44 

°C (130 °F.).

(n) Special requirements for hydrogen. 

Each tank car must be equipped with 

one or more pressure relief devices. 

The discharge outlet for each pressure 

relief device must be connected to a 

manifold having a non-obstructed discharge area of at least 1.5 times the 

total discharge area of the pressure relief devices connected to the manifold. 

All manifolds must be connected to a 

single common header having a non-obstructed discharge pointing upward and 

extending above the top of the car. The 

header and the header outlet must each 

have a non-obstructed discharge area 

at least equal to the total discharge 

area of the manifolds connected to the 

header. The header outlet must be 

equipped with an ignition device that 

will instantly ignite any hydrogen discharged through the pressure relief device.

(o) Special requirements for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid and nitrous 

oxide, refrigerated liquid. Each tank car 

must have an insulation system so that 

the thermal conductance is not more 

than 0.613 kilojoules per hour, per 

square meter, per degree Celsius (0.03 

B.t.u. per square foot per hour, per degree Fahrenheit) temperature differential. Each tank car must be equipped 

with one reclosing pressure relief valve 

having a start-to-discharge pressure 

not to exceed 75 percent of the tank 

test pressure and one non-reclosing 

pressure relief valve having a rupture 

disc design to burst at a pressure less 

than the tank test pressure. The discharge capacity of each pressure relief 

device must be sufficient to prevent 

building up of pressure in the tank in 

excess of 82.5 percent of the test pressure of the tank. Tanks must be 

equipped with two regulating valves 

set to open at a pressure not to exceed 

24.1 Bar (350 psi) on DOT 105A500W 

tanks and at a pressure not to exceed 

27.6 Bar (400 psi) on DOT 105A600W 

tanks. Each regulating valve and pressure relief device must have its final 

discharge piped to the outside of the 

protective housing. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52665, Dec. 21, 1990] 

621

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.314, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.315 Compressed gases in cargo 

tanks and portable tanks. 

(a) Liquefied compressed gases that 

are transported in UN portable tanks, 

DOT specification portable tanks, or 

cargo tanks must be prepared in accordance with this section, §173.32, 

§173.33 and subpart E or subpart G of 

part 180 of this subchapter, as applicable. For cryogenic liquid in cargo 

tanks, see §173.318. For marking requirements for portable tanks and 

cargo tanks, see §172.326 and §172.328 of 

this subchapter, as applicable. 

(1) UN portable tanks: UN portable 

tanks must be loaded and offered for 

transportation in accordance with 

portable tank provision T50 in §172.102 

of this subchapter. 

(2) Cargo tanks and DOT specification 

portable tanks: Cargo tanks and DOT 

specification portable tanks must be 

loaded and offered for transportation in 

accordance with the following table: 

Kind of gas 

Maximum permitted filling density Specification container required 

Percent by weight 

(see Note 1) 

Percent by volume 

(see par. (f) of this 

section)

Type (see Note 2) Minimum design 

pressure (psig) 

Ammonia, anhydrous or Ammonia solutions with greater than 50 percent 

ammonia (see Notes 14 and 17).

56 .......................... 82, See Note 5 ...... DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Notes 12, 17 and 

27.

265; See Note 17. 

Ammonia solutions with more than 35 

percent but not more than 50 percent 

ammonia.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; see 

Note 12.

100; See par. (c) of 

this section. 

Bromotrifluoromethane (R–13B1 or H– 

1301); (See Note 9).

133 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

365.

Butadiene, stabilized .............................. See par. (b) of this 

section.

See par. (b) of this 

section.

DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

100.

Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid ......... See par. (c)(1) of 

this section.

95 .......................... ......do .................... 200; see Note 3. 

Chlorine .................................................. 125 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

225; See Notes 4 

and 8. 

Chlorodifluoroethane (R–142b) (1- 

Chloro 1,1-difluoroethane); (See Note 

9).

100 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

100.

Chlorodifluoromethane (R–22); (See 

Note 9).

105 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

250.

Chloropentafluoroethane (R–115); (See 

Note 9).

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

Chlorotrifluoromethane (R–13); (See 

Note 9).

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

Dichlorodifluoromethane (R–12); (See 

Note 9).

119 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

150.

Difluoroethane (R–152a); (See Note 9) 79 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

150.

Dimethyl ether (see Note 16) ................ 59 .......................... ......do .................... ......do .................... 200. 

Dimethylamine, anhydrous .................... 59 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

150.

Division 2.1, materials not specifically 

provided for in this table.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

See Note 18. 

Division 2.2, materials not specifically 

provided for in this table.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

See Note 19. 

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone A, materials 

not specifically provided for in this 

table.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 23.

See Note 20. 

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone B, materials 

not specifically provided for in this 

table.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 23.

See Note 20. 

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone C, materials 

not specifically provided for in this 

table.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 24.

See Note 21. 

Division 2.3, Hazard Zone D, materials 

not specifically provided for in this 

table.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 25.

See Note 22. 

Ethane, refrigerated liquid ..................... ................................ See par. (c) of this 

section.

MC–331, MC–338 100; see Note 11. 

622

§ 173.315 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Kind of gas 

Maximum permitted filling density Specification container required 

Percent by weight 

(see Note 1) 

Percent by volume 

(see par. (f) of this 

section)

Type (see Note 2) Minimum design 

pressure (psig) 

Ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated 

liquid.

................................ See par. (c) of this 

section.

MC–331, MC–338 275; see Note 11. 

Hexafluoropropylene .............................. 110 ........................ See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

250.

Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid .... 103.0 ..................... See Note 7 ............ MC–331, MC–338 100; see Note 11. 

91.6 ....................... ......do .................... ......do .................... 300; see Note 11. 

86.7 ....................... ......do .................... ......do .................... 450; see Note 11. 

Liquefied petroleum gas (see Note 15) See par. (b) of this 

section.

See par. (b) of this 

section.

DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 26.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

Methylacetylene-propadiene, stabilized 

(see Note 13).

53 .......................... 90 .......................... DOT 51, MC 330, 

MC 331.

200.

Methylamine, anhydrous ........................ 60 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331..

Methyl chloride ....................................... 84 .......................... 88.5 ....................... ......do .................... 150. 

Methyl chloride (optional portable tank 

2,000 pounds water capacity, fusible 

plug).

......do .................... See Note 6 ............ DOT-51 .................. 225. 

Methyl mercaptan .................................. 80 .......................... 90 .......................... DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 23.

100.

Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid ............ See par. (c)(1) of 

this section.

95 .......................... DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

200; See Note 3. 

Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant 

gas, n.o.s. (See Note 9).

See par. (c) of this 

section.

See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

See par. (c) of this 

section.

Sulfur dioxide (tanks not over 1,200 gallons water capacity).125 ........................ 87.5 ....................... DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 24.

150; See Note 4. 

Sulfur dioxide (tanks over 1,200 gallons 

water capacity).

125 ........................ 87.5 ....................... DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331; See 

Note 24.

125; See Note 4. 

Sulfur dioxide (optional portable tank 

1,000–2,000 pounds water capacity, 

fusible plug).

125 ........................ See Note 6 ............ DOT-51; See Note 

24.

225.

Trimethylamine, anhydrous .................... 57 .......................... See Note 7 ............ DOT-51, MC–330, 

MC–331.

150.

Vinyl chloride .......................................... 84 (see Note 13) ... See Note 7 ............ MC–330, MC–331 150. 

Vinyl fluoride, stabilized ......................... 66 .......................... ......do .................... ......do .................... 250; see Note 11. 

Vinyl methyl ether .................................. 68 .......................... See Notes 7 and 

13.

......do .................... 100. 

NOTE 1: Maximum filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the weight of gas in the tank to 

the weight of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in pounds, the weight of a gallon (231

cubic inches) of water at 60 °F. in air shall be 8.32828 pounds. 

NOTE 2: See § 173.32 for authority to use other portable tanks and for manifolding cargo tanks, see paragraph (q) of this section. Specifications MC 330 cargo tanks may be painted as specified for MC 331 cargo tanks. 

NOTE 3: If cargo tanks and portable tank containers for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid, and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid,

are designed to conform to the requirements in Section VIII of the ASME Code for low temperature operation (IBR, see § 171.7 

of this subchapter), the design pressure may be reduced to 100 psig or the controlled pressure, whichever is greater. 

NOTE 4: Material must be steel. Packagings must have a corrosion allowance of 20 percent or 0.10 inch, whichever is less, 

added to the metal thickness. The minimum wall thickness for chlorine packagings is 0.300 inch for stainless steel or 0.625 inch

for carbon steel, including corrosion allowance. 

NOTE 5: Unlagged cargo tanks and portable tank containers for liquid anhydrous ammonia may be filled to 87.5 percent by volume provided the temperature of the anhydrous ammonia being loaded into such tanks is determined to be not lower than 30 °F. or provided the filling of such tanks is stopped at the first indication of frost or ice formation on the outside surface of the tank and is not resumed until such frost or ice has disappeared. 

NOTE 6: Tanks equipped with fusible plugs must be filled by weight. 

NOTE 7: Tanks must be filled by weight. 

NOTE 8: Chlorine packagings may be shipped only if the contents are to be unloaded at one unloading point. 

NOTE 9: This gas may be transported in authorized cargo tanks and portable tanks marked ‘‘DISPERSANT GAS,’’ or 

‘‘REFRIGERANT GAS.’’

NOTE 10: [Reserved] 

NOTE 11: MC–330, MC–331 and MC–338 cargo tanks must be insulated. Cargo tanks must meet all the following requirements. Each tank must have a design service temperature of minus 100 °F., or no warmer than the boiling point at one atmosphere of the hazardous material to be shipped therein, whichever is colder, and must conform to the low-temperature requirements in Section VIII of the ASME Code. When the normal travel time is 24 hours or less, the tank’s holding time as loaded 

must be at least twice the normal travel time. When the normal travel time exceeds 24 hours, the tank’s holding time as loaded 

must be at least 24 hours greater than the normal travel time. The holding time is the elapsed time from loading until venting occurs under equilibrium conditions. The cargo tank must have an outer jacket made of steel when the cargo tank is used to transport a flammable gas. 

NOTE 12: No aluminum, copper, silver, zinc or an alloy of any of these metals shall be used in packaging construction where it 

comes into contact with the lading. 

NOTE 13: All parts of valves and safety devices in contact with contents of tank must be of a metal or other material suitably 

treated if necessary, which will not cause formation of any acetylides. 

623

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315 

NOTE 14: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel ‘‘(NQT)’’ are 

authorized for all grades of anhydrous ammonia. Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched and 

tempered steel ‘‘(QT)’’ (see marking requirements of § 172.328(c) of this subchapter) are authorized for anhydrous ammonia having a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by weight. Any tank being placed in anhydrous ammonia service or a tank which has 

been in other service or has been opened for inspection, test, or repair, must be cleaned of the previous product and must be 

purged of air before loading. See § 172.203(h) of this subchapter for special shipping paper requirements. NOTE 15: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel (NQT) are 

authorized for all grades of liquefied petroleum gases. Only grades of liquefied petroleum gases determined to be ‘‘noncorrosive’’ are authorized in Specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched and tempered steel (QT). ‘‘Noncorrosive’’ means the corrosiveness of the gas does not exceed the limitations for classification 1 of the ASTM Copper Strip Classifications when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1838, ‘‘Copper Strip Corrosion by Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases’’ (IBR, see 

§ 171.7 of this subchapter). (For (QT) and (NQT) marking requirements, see § 172.328(c) of this subchapter. For special shipping 

paper requirements, see § 172.203(h) of this subchapter.) NOTE 16: Openings, inlets, and outlets on MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must conform to § 178.337–8(a) of this subchapter. MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with emergency discharge control equipment as specified in 

§ 178.337–11(a) of this subchapter. 

NOTE 17: A Specification MC-330 or MC-331 cargo tank or a nonspecification cargo tank meeting, and marked in conformance 

with, the edition of the ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated, may be used for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia if

it:

(1) Has a minimum design pressure not lower than 250 psig; 

(2) Was manufactured in conformance with the ASME Code prior to January 1, 1981, according to its ASME name plate and 

manufacturer’s data report; 

(3) Is painted white or aluminum; 

(4) Complies with Note 12 of this paragraph; 

(5) Has been inspected and tested in accordance with subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter as specified for MC 331 cargo 

tanks.

(6) Was used to transport anhydrous ammonia prior to January 1, 1981; 

(7) Is operated exclusively in intrastate commerce (including its operation by a motor carrier otherwise engaged in interstate 

commerce) in a state where its operation was permitted by the laws of that State (not including the incorporation of this subchapter) prior to January 1, 1981; and 

(8) Is operated in conformance with all other requirements of this subchapter. 

NOTE 18: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference temperature of 

the lading plus one percent or 173.4 kPa (25 psig), whichever is less. 

NOTE 19: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference temperature of 

the lading. 

NOTE 20: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.5 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 °C

(115 °F).

NOTE 21: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.3 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 °C

(115 °F). NOTE 22: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.1 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 °C

(115 °F). NOTE 23: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance 

with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and heads must be the greater of 7.62 mm (0.300 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum design pressure. NOTE 24: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance 

with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and heads must be the greater of 6.35 mm

(0.250 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum design pressure. For sulphur dioxide, this Note does not

apply until October 1, 1994. 

NOTE 25: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance 

with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness for shell and heads must be as calculated for the packaging at its minimum design pressure. 

NOTE 26: Non-specification cargo tanks may be used for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gas, subject to the conditions 

prescribed in paragraph (k) of this section. 

NOTE 27: Non-specification cargo tanks may be used for transportation of Ammonia, anhydrous and ammonia solutions with 

greater than 50% ammonia, subject to the conditions prescribed in paragraph (m) of this section. 

(b) Maximum permitted filling densities for cargo and portable tank containers for transportation of butadiene, 

stabilized, and liquefied petroleum gas 

are as follows: 

Maximum specific gravity of the 

liquid material at 60 °F.

Maximum permitted filling density in percent 

of the water-weight capacity of the tanks (percent) See Note 1 

1200 gallons or 

less

Over 1200 

gallons

0.473 to 0.480 ............................... 38 41 

0.481 to 0.488 ............................... 39 42 

0.489 to 0.495 ............................... 40 43 

0.496 to 0.503 ............................... 41 44 

0.504 to 0.510 ............................... 42 45 

0.511 to 0.519 ............................... 43 46 

0.520 to 0.527 ............................... 44 47 

0.528 to 0.536 ............................... 45 48 

0.537 to 0.544 ............................... 46 49 

0.545 to 0.552 ............................... 47 50 

Maximum specific gravity of the 

liquid material at 60 °F.

Maximum permitted filling density in percent 

of the water-weight capacity of the tanks (percent) See Note 1 

1200 gallons or 

less

Over 1200 

gallons

0.553 to 0.560 ............................... 48 51 

0.561 to 0.568 ............................... 49 52 

0.569 to 0.576 ............................... 50 53 

0.577 to 0.584 ............................... 51 54 

0.585 to 0.592 ............................... 52 55 

0.593 to 0.600 ............................... 53 56 

0.601 to 0.608 ............................... 54 57 

0.609 to 0.617 ............................... 55 58 

0.618 to 0.626 ............................... 56 59 

0.627 and over .............................. 57 60 

NOTE 1: Filling is permitted by volume provided the same 

filling density is used as permitted by weight, except when 

using fixed length dip tube or other fixed maximum liquid level 

indicators (paragraph (f) of this section), in which case the 

maximum permitted filling density shall not exceed 97 percent 

of the maximum permitted filling density by weight contained 

in the table. 

624

§ 173.315 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(1) Odorization. All liquefied petroleum gas shall be effectively odorized 

as required in Note 2 of this paragraph 

to indicate positively, by a distinctive 

odor, the presence of gas down to a 

concentration in air of not over onefifth the lower limit of combustibility 

provided, however, that odorization is 

not required if harmful in the use or 

further processing of the liquefied petroleum gas, or if odorization will serve 

no useful purpose as a warning agent in 

such use or further processing. 

NOTE 1: The lower limits of combustibility 

of the more commonly used liquefied petroleum gases are: Propane, 2.15 percent; butane, 1.55 percent. These figures represent 

volumetric percentages of gas-air mixtures 

in each case. 

NOTE 2: The use of 1.0 pound of ethyl 

mercaptan, 1.0 pound of thiophane, or 1.4 

pounds of amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallons 

of liquefied petroleum gas shall be considered sufficient to meet the requirements of 

§173.315(b)(1). This note does not exclude the 

use of any other odorant in sufficient quantity to meet the requirements of 

§173.315(b)(1). 

(c) Except as otherwise provided, the 

loading of a liquefied gas into a cargo 

tank or portable tank shall be determined by weight or by a suitable liquid 

level gauging device. The vapor pressure (psig) at 115 °F. must not exceed 

the design pressure of the cargo tank 

or portable tank container. The outage 

and filling limits for liquefied gases 

must be as prescribed in §173.24b of this 

part, except that this requirement does 

not apply to: 

(1) A tank containing carbon dioxide, 

refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. Such tank is required to 

be equipped with suitable pressure control valves and may not be filled to a 

level exceeding 95 percent of the volumetric capacity of the tank. 

(2) A tank containing ethane, refrigerated liquid; ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid; or hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid. Such tank must be 

filled to allow at least two percent outage below the inlet of the pressure relief valve or pressure control valve 

under conditions of incipient opening, 

with the tank in a level attitude. 

(d) If the loading of cargo tanks and 

portable tank containers with liquefied 

gases is to be determined by weight, 

the gross weight shall be checked after 

the filling line is disconnected in each 

instance. The gross weight shall be calculated from the tank capacity and 

tare weight set forth on the metal 

plate required by the specification, and 

the maximum filling density permitted 

for the material being loaded into the 

tank as set forth in the table, paragraph (a) of this section. 

(e) If the loading of cargo tanks and 

portable tank containers with liquefied 

gases is to be determined by adjustable 

liquid level device, each tank and each 

compartment thereof shall have a thermometer well, so that the internal liquid temperature can easily be determined, and the amount of liquid in the 

tank shall be corrected to a 60 °F.

basis. Liquid levels shall not exceed a 

level corresponding to the maximum 

filling density permitted for the material being loaded into the tank as set 

forth in the table in paragraph (a) of 

this section. 

(f) When the loading of cargo tanks 

and portable tank containers with liquefied gases is determined only by 

fixed length dip tube or other fixed 

maximum liquid level indicator, the 

device shall be arranged to function at 

a level not to exceed the maximum permitted volume prescribed by the table, 

paragraph (a) of this section. Loading 

shall be stopped when the device functions.

(g) Containers, the liquid level of 

which has been determined by means of 

a fixed length dip tube gauging device, 

shall not be acceptable for stowage as 

cargo on vessels in commerce subject 

to the jurisdiction of the United States 

Coast Guard. Nothing contained in this 

section shall be so construed as to prohibit the transportation on car floats 

or car ferries of motor vehicles laden 

with containers nor cargo tanks the 

liquid level of either of which has been 

determined by means of fixed length 

dip tube devices. 

(h) Each cargo tank and portable 

tank, except a tank filled by weight, 

must be equipped with one or more of 

the gauging devices described in the 

following table which indicate accurately the maximum permitted liquid 

level. Additional gauging devices may 

be installed but may not be used as primary controls for filling of cargo tanks 

and portable tanks. Gauge glasses are 

625

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315 

not permitted on any cargo tank or 

portable tank. Primary gauging devices used on cargo tanks of less than 

3500 gallons water capacity are exempt 

from the longitudinal location requirements specified in paragraphs (h)(2) 

and (3) of this section provided: The 

tank length does not exceed three 

times the tank diameter; and the cargo 

tank is unloaded within 24 hours after 

each filling of the tank. 

Kind of gas Gaging device permitted 

for filling purposes 

Anhydrous ammonia ..................... Rotary tube; adjustable 

slip tube; fixed length 

dip tube. 

Anhydrous dimethylamine ............ None. 

Anhydrous monomethylamine ...... Do. 

Anhydrous trimethylamine ............ Do. 

Aqua ammonia solution containing anhydrous ammonia.Rotary tube; adjustable 

slip tube; fixed length 

dip tube. 

Butadiene, stabilized .................... Do. 

Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid Do. 

Chlorine ........................................ None. 

Dichlorodifluoromethane ............... Do. 

Difluoroethane .............................. Do. 

Difluoromonochloroethane ............ Do. 

Dimethyl ether .............................. Do. 

Ethane, refrigerated liquid ............ Rotary tube; adjustable 

slip tube; fixed length 

dip tube. 

Ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid.Do.

Hexafluoropropylene ..................... None. 

Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated 

liquid.

Do.

Liquefied petroleum gases ........... Rotary tube; adjustable 

slip tube; fixed length 

dip tube. 

Methyl chloride ............................. Fixed length dip tube. 

Methyl mercaptan ......................... Rotary tube; adjustable 

slip tube; fixed length 

dip tube. 

Monochlorodifluoromethane ......... None. 

Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid .. Rotary tube; adjustable 

slip tube; fixed length 

dip tube. 

Methylacetylenepropadiene, stabilized.Do.

Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas, n.o.s.None.

Sulfur dioxide ................................ Fixed length dip tube. 

Vinyl chloride ................................ None. 

Vinyl fluoride, inhibited ................. Do. 

(1) The design pressure of the liquid 

level gauging devices shall be at least 

equal to the design pressure of the 

tank.

(2) If the primary gauging device is 

adjustable, it must be capable of adjustment so that the end of the tube 

will be in the location specified in 

paragraph (h)(3) of this section for at 

least one of the ladings to be transported, at the filling level corresponding to an average loading temperature. Exterior means must be provided to indicate this adjustment. The 

gauging device must be legibly and permanently marked in increments not 

exceeding 20 Fahrenheit degrees (or not 

exceeding 25 p.s.i.g. on tanks for carbon 

dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous 

oxide, refrigerated liquid), to indicate 

the maximum levels to which the tank 

may be filled with liquid at temperatures above 20 °F. However, if it is not 

practicable to so mark the gauging device, this information must be legibly 

and permanently marked on a plate affixed to the tank adjacent to the gauging device. 

(3) A dip tube gauging device consists 

of a pipe or tube with a valve at its 

outer end with its intake limited by an 

orifice not larger than 0.060 inch in diameter. If a fixed length dip tube is 

used, the intake must be located midway of the tank both longitudinally 

and laterally and at maximum permitted filling level. In tanks for liquefied petroleum gases, the intake must 

be located at the level reached by the 

lading when the tank is loaded to maximum filling density at 40 °F.

(4) Except on a tank used exclusively 

for the transportation of carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous 

oxide, refrigerated liquid, each opening 

for a pressure gauge must be restricted 

at or inside the tank by an orifice no 

larger than 0.060 inch in diameter. For 

carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or 

nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid service, the pressure gauge need only be 

used during the filling operation. 

(i) Each tank must be provided with 

one or more pressure relief devices 

which, unless otherwise specified in 

this part, must be of the spring-loaded 

type. Each valve must be arranged to 

discharge upward and unobstructed to 

the outside of the protective housing to 

prevent any impingement of escaping 

gas upon the tank. For each chlorine 

tank the protective housing must be in 

compliance with the requirements set 

forth in the applicable specification. 

(1) The safety relief valves on each 

tank must meet the following conditions:

(i) The total relieving capacity, as 

determined by the flow formulas contained in Section 5 of CGA S–1.2 (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter), must be 

626

§ 173.315 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

sufficient to prevent a maximum pressure in the tank of more than 120 percent of the design pressure; 

(ii) The flow capacity rating, testing 

and marking must be in accordance 

with Sections 5, 6 and 7 of CGA Pamphlet S–1.2. 

(iii) For an insulated tank, the required relieving capacity of the relief 

devices must be the same as for an 

uninsulated tank, unless the insulation 

will remain in place and will be effective under fire conditions. In this case, 

except for UN portable tanks, each insulated tank must be covered by a 

sheet metal jacket of not less than 16 

gauge thickness. For UN portable 

tanks where the relieving capacity of 

the valves has been reduced on the 

basis of the insulation system, the insulation system must remain effective 

at all temperatures less than 649 °C

(1200.2 °F) and be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700 °C

(1292.0 °F) or greater. 

(iv) An MC 330 cargo tank that has 

relief valves sized by Fetterly’s formula dated November 27, 1928, may be 

continued in service. 

(2) Each safety relief valve must be 

arranged to minimize the possibility of 

tampering. If the pressure setting or 

adjustment is external to the valve, 

the safety relief valve must be provided 

with means for sealing the adjustment 

and it must be sealed. 

(3) Each safety relief valve on a portable tank, other than a UN portable 

tank, must be set to start-to-discharge 

at pressure no higher than 110% of the 

tank design pressure and no lower than 

the design pressure specified in paragraph (a) of this section for the gas 

transported. For UN portable tanks 

used for liquefied compressed gases and 

constructed in accordance with the requirements of §178.276 of this subchapter, the pressure relief device(s) 

must conform to §178.276(e) of this subchapter.

(4) Except for UN portable tanks, 

each safety relief valve must be plainly 

and permanently marked with the 

pressure in p.s.i.g. at which it is set to 

discharge, with the actual rate of discharge of the device in cubic feet per 

minute of the gas or of air at 60 °F (15.6 

°C) and 14.7 p.s.i.a., and with the manufacturer’s name or trade name and 

catalog number. The start-to-discharge 

valve marking must be visible after the 

valve is installed. The rated discharge 

capacity of the device must be determined at a pressure of 120% of the design pressure of the tank. For UN portable tanks, each pressure relief device 

must be clearly and permanently 

marked as specified in §178.274(f)(1) of 

this subchapter. 

(5) Each safety relief valve must have 

direct communication with the vapor 

space in the tank. 

(6) Each connection to a safety relief 

valve must be of sufficient size to provide the required rate of discharge 

through the safety relief valve. 

(7) [Reserved] 

(8) Each pressure relief valve outlet 

must be provided with a protective device to prevent the entrance and accumulation of dirt and water. This device 

must not impede flow through the 

valve. Pressure relief devices must be 

designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and 

the development of any dangerous excess pressure. 

(9) On tanks for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid each safety relief device must be installed and located so 

that the cooling effect of the contents 

will not prevent the effective operation 

of the device. In addition to the required safety relief valves, these tanks 

may be equipped with one or more 

pressure controlling devices. 

(10) Each tank for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid also may be equipped 

with one or more non-reclosing pressure relief devices set to function at a 

pressure not over two times nor less 

than 1.5 times the design pressure of 

the tank. 

(11) Each portion of connected liquid 

piping or hose that can be closed at 

both ends must be provided with a safety relief valve without an intervening 

shut-off valve to prevent excessive hydrostatic pressure that could burst the 

piping or hose. 

(12) Subject to conditions of paragraph (a) of this section for the methyl 

chloride and sulfur dioxide optional 

portable tanks, one or more fusible 

plugs examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate 

Administrator may be used on these 

627

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315 

tanks in place of safety relief valves of 

the spring-loaded type. The fusible plug 

or plugs must be in accordance with 

CGA Pamphlet S–1.2, to prevent a pressure rise in the tank of more than 120 

percent of the design pressure. If the 

tank is over 30 inches long, each end 

must have the total specified safety 

discharge area. 

(13) A safety relief valve on a chlorine cargo tank must conform to one of 

the following standards of The Chlorine 

Institute, Inc.: Type 1 1⁄2 JQ225, Dwg. 

H51970 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); or Type 1 1⁄2 JQ225, Dwg. 

H50155 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(j) Storage containers for liquefied 

petroleum gas for permanent installation on consumer premises may be 

shipped by private motor carrier only 

under the following conditions: 

(1) Each container must be constructed in compliance with the requirements in Section VIII of the 

ASME Code (containers built in compliance with earlier editions starting 

with 1943 are authorized) and must be 

marked to indicate compliance in the 

manner specified by the respective 

Code.

(2) Each container must be equipped 

with safety devices in compliance with 

the requirements for safety devices on 

containers as specified in NFPA 58 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(3) The containers must be braced or 

otherwise secured on the vehicle to 

prevent relative motion while in transit. Valves or other fittings must be 

adequately protected against damage 

during transportation. (See §177.834(a) 

of this subchapter.) 

(4) Except as provided in paragraph 

(j)(5) of this section, containers shall 

not be shipped when charged with liquefied petroleum gas to more than 5 

percent of their water capacity. 

(5) Storage containers of less than 

1,042 pounds water capacity (125 gallons) may be shipped when charged 

with liquefied petroleum gas in compliance with DOT filling density. 

(k) A nonspecification cargo tank 

meeting, and marked in conformance 

with, the edition of Section VIII of the 

ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated may be used for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gas provided it meets all of the following conditions:

(1) It must have a minimum design 

pressure no lower than 250 psig. 

(2) It must have a capacity of 13,247.5 

L (3,500 water gallons) or less. 

(3) It must have been manufactured 

in conformance with Section VIII of 

the ASME Code prior to January 1, 

1981, according to its ASME name plate 

and manufacturer’s data report. 

(4) It must conform to the applicable 

provisions of NFPA 58, except to the 

extent that provisions in NFPA 58 are 

inconsistent with requirements in 

parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter. 

(5) It must be inspected, tested, and 

equipped in accordance with subpart E 

of part 180 of this subchapter as specified for MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles.

(6) Except as provided in this paragraph (k), it must be operated exclusively in intrastate commerce, including its operation by a motor carrier 

otherwise engaged in interstate commerce, in a state where its operation 

was permitted by law (not including 

the incorporation of this subchapter) 

prior to January 1, 1981. A cargo tank 

motor vehicle operating under authority of this section may cross state lines 

to travel to and from a qualified assembly, repair, maintenance, or requalification facility. The cargo tank need 

not be cleaned and purged, but it may 

not contain liquefied petroleum gas in 

excess of five percent of the water capacity of the cargo tank. If the vehicle 

engine is supplied fuel from the cargo 

tank, enough fuel in excess of five percent of the cargo tank’s water capacity 

may be carried for the trip to or from 

the facility. 

(7) It must have been used to transport liquefied petroleum gas prior to 

January 1, 1981. 

(8) It must be operated in conformance with all other requirements of 

this subchapter. 

(l) Anhydrous ammonia must not be 

offered for transportation or transported in specification MC 330 and MC 

331 cargo tanks constructed of 

quenched and tempered (‘‘QT’’) steel 

except as provided in this paragraph. 

(1) The ammonia must have a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by 

weight. Any addition of water must be 

628

§ 173.315 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

made using steam condensate, deionized, or distilled water. 

(2) Except as otherwise provided in 

this paragraph, each person offering for 

transportation or transporting anhydrous ammonia shall perform a periodic analysis for prescribed water content in the ammonia. The analysis 

must be performed: 

(i) From a sample of the ammonia in 

storage taken at least once every 7 

days, or each time ammonia is added to 

the storage tanks, whichever is less 

frequent; or 

(ii) At the time the cargo tanks are 

loaded, then a sample of the ammonia 

taken from at least one loaded cargo 

tank out of each 10 loads, or from one 

cargo tank every 24 hours, whichever is 

less frequent; or 

(iii) At the same frequency as described in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this 

section, from a sample taken from the 

loading line to the cargo tank. 

(3) If water is added at the time of 

loading:

(i) The sample for analysis must be 

taken from a point in the loading line 

between the water injection equipment 

and the cargo tank; and 

(ii) Positive provisions must be made 

to assure water injection equipment is 

operating.

(4) If water injection equipment becomes inoperative, suitable corrective 

maintenance must be performed after 

which a sample from the first loaded 

cargo tank must be analyzed for prescribed water content. 

(5) The analysis method for water 

content must be as prescribed in CGA 

G–2.2, ‘‘Tentative Standard Method for 

Determining Minimum of 0.2 percent 

water in Anhydrous Ammonia,’’ (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

(6) Records indicating the results of 

the analysis taken, as required by this 

paragraph, must be retained for 2 years 

and must be open to inspection by a 

representative of the Department. 

(7) Each person receiving anhydrous 

ammonia containing 0.2 per cent water 

by weight may offer for transportation 

or transport that ammonia without 

performing the prescribed analysis for 

water content provided: 

(i) The ammonia received was certified as containing 0.2 percent water 

as prescribed in §§172.203(h)(l)(i) and 

177.817(a) of this subchapter; and 

(ii) The amount of water in the ammonia has not been reduced by any 

means.

(m) A cargo tank (commonly known 

as a nurse tank and considered an implement of husbandry) transporting anhydrous ammonia, and operated by a 

private carrier exclusively for agricultural purposes does not have to meet 

the specification requirements of part 

178 of this subchapter if it: 

(1) Has a minimum design pressure of 

250 psig and meets the requirements of 

the edition of Section VIII of the 

ASME Code in effect at the time it was 

manufactured and is marked accordingly;

(2) Is equipped with safety relief 

valves meeting the requirements of 

CGA pamphlet S1.2; 

(3) Is painted white or aluminum; 

(4) Has capacity of 3,000 gallons or 

less;

(5) Is loaded to a filling density no 

greater than 56 percent; 

(6) Is securely mounted on a farm 

wagon; and 

(7) Is in conformance with the requirements of part 172 of this subchapter except that shipping papers are 

not required; and it need not be 

marked or placarded on one end if that 

end contains valves, fittings, regulators or gauges when those appurtenances prevent the markings and 

placard from being properly placed and 

visible.

(n) Emergency discharge control for 

cargo tank motor vehicles in liquefied 

compressed gas service—(1) Required

emergency discharge control equipment. 

Each cargo tank motor vehicle in liquefied compressed gas service must 

have an emergency discharge control 

capability as specified in the following 

table:

629

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.315 

§ 173.315(n)(1)(*) Material Delivery service Required emergency discharge control 

capability

(i) ......................... Division 2.2 materials with no 

subsidiary hazard, excluding 

anhydrous ammonia.

All ............................................. None. 

(ii) ........................ Division 2.3 materials .............. All ............................................. Paragraph (n)(2) of this section. 

(iii) ........................ Division 2.2 materials with a 

subsidiary hazard, Division 

2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia.

Other than metered delivery 

service.

Paragraph (n)(2) of this section. 

(iv) ....................... Division 2.2 materials with a 

subsidiary hazard, Division 

2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia in a cargo 

tank motor vehicle with a capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 

water gallons) or less.

Metered delivery service ......... Paragraph (n)(3) of this section. 

(v) ........................ Division 2.2 materials with a 

subsidiary hazard, Division 

2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia in a cargo 

tank motor vehicle with a capacity greater than 13,247.5 

L (3,500 water gallons).

Metered delivery service ......... Paragraph (n)(3) of this section, and, for 

obstructed view deliveries where permitted by § 177.840(p) of this subchapter, paragraph (n)(2) or (n)(4) of 

this section. 

(vi) ....................... Division 2.2 materials with a 

subsidiary hazard, Division 

2.1 materials, and anhydrous ammonia in a cargo 

tank with a capacity of greater than 13,247.5 L (3,500 

water gallons).

Both metered delivery and 

other than metered delivery 

service.

Paragraph (n)(2) of this section, provided the system operates for both 

metered and other than metered deliveries; otherwise, paragraphs (n)(2) 

and (n)(3) of this section. 

(2) Cargo tank motor vehicles in other 

than metered delivery service. A cargo 

tank motor vehicle in other than metered delivery service must have a 

means to automatically shut off the 

flow of product without the need for 

human intervention within 20 seconds 

of an unintentional release caused by a 

complete separation of a liquid delivery hose (passive shut-down capability).

(i) Designed flow of product through 

a bypass in the valve is acceptable 

when authorized by this subchapter. 

(ii) The design for the means to automatically shut off product flow must 

be certified by a Design Certifying Engineer. The certification must consider 

any specifications of the original component manufacturer and must explain 

how the passive means to shut off the 

flow of product operates. It must also 

outline the parameters (e.g., temperature, pressure, types of product) within 

which the passive means to shut off the 

flow of product is designed to operate. 

All components of the discharge system that are integral to the design 

must be included in the certification. A 

copy of the design certification must 

be provided to the owner of the cargo 

tank motor vehicle on which the equipment will be installed. 

(iii) Installation must be performed 

under the supervision of a Registered 

Inspector unless the equipment is installed and removed as part of regular 

operation (e.g., a hose). The Registered 

Inspector must certify that the equipment is installed and tested, if it is 

possible to do so without damaging the 

equipment, in accordance with the Design Certifying Engineer’s certification. The Registered Inspector must 

provide the certification to the owner 

of the cargo tank motor vehicle. 

(3) Cargo tank motor vehicles in metered 

delivery service. When required by the 

table in paragraph (n)(1) of this section, a cargo tank motor vehicle must 

have an off-truck remote means to 

close the internal self-closing stop 

valve and shut off all motive and auxiliary power equipment upon activation 

by a qualified person attending the unloading of the cargo tank motor vehicle (off-truck remote shut-off). It must 

function reliably at a distance of 45.72 

630

§ 173.315 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

m (150 feet). The off-truck remote shutoff activation device must not be capable of reopening the internal self-closing stop valve after emergency activation.

(i) The emergency discharge control 

equipment must be installed under the 

supervision of a Registered Inspector. 

Each wireless transmitter/receiver 

must be tested to demonstrate that it 

will close the internal self-closing stop 

valve and shut off all motive and auxiliary power equipment at a distance of 

91.44 m (300 feet) under optimum conditions. Emergency discharge control 

equipment that does not employ a 

wireless transmitter/receiver must be 

tested to demonstrate its functioning 

at the maximum length of the delivery 

hose.

(ii) The Registered Inspector must 

certify that the remote control equipment is installed in accordance with 

the original component manufacturer’s 

specifications and is tested in accordance with paragraph (n)(3)(i) of this 

section. The Registered Inspector must 

provide the owner of the cargo tank 

motor vehicle with this certification. 

(4) Query systems. When a transmitter/receiver system is used to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 

(n)(1)(v) of this section, it must close 

the internal self-closing stop valve and 

shut off all motive and auxiliary power 

equipment unless the qualified person 

attending the unloading operation prevents it from doing so at least once 

every five minutes. Testing and certification must be as specified in paragraph (n)(3) of this section. 

(5) Compliance dates. (i) Each specification MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle with a certificate of construction 

issued two or more years after July 1, 

1999, must have an appropriate emergency discharge control capability as 

specified in this paragraph (n). 

(ii) No MC 330, MC 331, or nonspecification cargo tank motor vehicle authorized under paragraph (k) of this 

section may be operated unless it has 

an appropriate emergency discharge 

control capability as specified in this 

paragraph (n) no later than the date of 

its first scheduled pressure retest required after July 1, 2001. No MC 330, MC 

331 or nonspecification cargo tank 

motor vehicle authorized under paragraph (k) of this section may be operated after July 1, 2006, unless it has 

been equipped with emergency discharge control equipment as specified 

in this paragraph (n). 

(iii) No MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank 

motor vehicle with a capacity over 

13,247 L (3,500 gallons) used in metered 

delivery service may be operated unless it has an appropriate discharge 

control capability as specified in this 

paragraph (n) no later than July 1, 2003, 

or the date of its first scheduled pressure retest required after July 1, 2001, 

whichever is earlier. 

(o) Chlorine cargo tank motor vehicles. 

Each cargo tank motor vehicle used for 

the transportation of chlorine must 

meet the requirements in the following:

(1) Any hose, piping, or tubing used 

for loading or unloading that is mounted or carried on the motor vehicle may 

not be attached to any valve and must 

be capped at all ends to prevent the 

entry of moisture, except at the time 

of loading or unloading. Except at the 

time of loading and unloading, the pipe 

connection of each angle valve must be 

closed with a screw plug which is 

chained or otherwise fastened to prevent misplacement. 

(2) Each chlorine cargo tank motor 

vehicle angle valve must be tested to 

be leak free at not less than 225 psig 

using dry air or inert gas before installation and thereafter every 2 years 

when performing the required periodic 

retest in §180.407(c) of this subchapter. 

Prior to each loading, the cargo tank 

motor vehicle must be inspected and 

the angle valves and gasketed joints 

must be examined and tested at a pressure of not less than 50 psig to determine that they are not leaking and are 

in proper condition for transportation. 

Any leaks must be corrected before the 

cargo tank motor vehicle is offered for 

transportation.

(3) Excess flow valves on the cargo 

tank motor vehicle must meet the requirements of paragraph (n) of this section.

(p) Fusible elements. Each MC 330, MC 

331, or nonspecification cargo tank authorized under paragraph (k) of this 

section must have a thermal means of 

closure for each internal self-closing 

631

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.316 

stop valve as specified in §178.337– 

8(a)(4) of this subchapter. 

(q) Manifolding is authorized for 

cargo tanks containing anhydrous ammonia provided each individual cargo 

tank is equipped with a pressure relief 

device or valves and gauging devices as 

required by paragraphs (h) and (i) of 

this section. Each valve must be tightly closed while the cargo tank is in 

transit. Each cargo tank must be filled 

separately.

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 

FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.315, see the List of CFR 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.316 Cryogenic liquids in cylinders. 

(a) General requirements. (1) A cylinder may not be loaded with a cryogenic liquid colder than the design 

service temperature of the packaging. 

(2) A cylinder may not be loaded with 

any material which may combine 

chemically with any residue in the 

packaging to produce an unsafe condition.

(3) The jacket covering the insulation 

on a cylinder used to transport any 

flammable cryogenic liquid must be 

made of steel. 

(4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or abrading aluminum parts that may come in 

contact with oxygen in the cryogenic 

liquid form may not be installed on 

any cylinder used to transport oxygen, 

cryogenic liquid unless the parts are 

anodized in accordance with ASTM 

Standard B 580 (IBR, see §171.7 of this 

subchapter).

(5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting may not be installed on any cylinder used to transport any flammable 

cryogenic liquid. 

(6) Each cylinder must be provided 

with one or more pressure relief devices, which must be installed and 

maintained in compliance with the requirements of this subchapter. 

(7) Each pressure relief device must 

be installed and located so that the 

cooling effect of the contents during 

venting will not prevent effective operation of the device. 

(8) The maximum weight of the contents in a cylinder with a design service temperature colder than ¥320 °F.

may not exceed the design weight 

marked on the cylinder (see §178.35 of 

this subchapter). 

(b) Pressure control systems. Each cylinder containing a cryogenic liquid 

must have a pressure control system 

that conforms to §173.301(f) and is designed and installed so that it will prevent the cylinder from becoming liquid 

full.

(c) Specification cylinder requirements 

and filling limits. Specification DOT-4L 

cylinders (§178.57 of this subchapter) 

are authorized for the transportation 

of cryogenic liquids when carried in the 

vertical position as follows: 

(1) For purposes of this section, ‘‘filling density,’’ except for hydrogen, is 

defined as the percent ratio of the 

weight of lading in the packaging to 

the weight of water that the packaging 

will hold at 60 °F. (1 lb. of water = 27.737 

cubic inches at 60 °F.).

(2) The cryogenic liquids of argon, nitrogen, oxygen, helium and neon must 

be loaded and shipped in accordance 

with the following table: 

Pressure control valve setting (maximum startto-discharge pressure psig) 

Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) 

Air Argon Nitrogen Oxygen Helium Neon 

45 ...................................................................... 82.5 133 76 108 12.5 109 

75 ...................................................................... 80.3 130 74 105 12.5 104 

105 .................................................................... 78.4 127 72 103 12.5 100 

170 .................................................................... 76.2 122 70 100 12.5 92 

230 .................................................................... 75.1 119 69 98 12.5 85 

295 .................................................................... 73.3 115 68 96 12.5 77 

360 .................................................................... 70.7 113 65 93 12.5 ..................

450 .................................................................... 65.9 111 61 91 12.5 ..................

540 .................................................................... 62.9 107 58 88 12.5 ..................

625 .................................................................... 60.1 104 55 86 12.5 ..................

Design service temperature ( °F.) .................... ¥320 ¥320 ¥320 ¥320 ¥452 ¥411

632

§ 173.318 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(3) Hydrogen (minimum 95 percent 

parahydrogen) must be loaded and 

shipped as follows: 

Column 1 Column 2 

Design service temperature .................... Minus 423 °F. or 

colder.

Maximum permitted filling density, based 

on cylinder capacity at minus 423 °F

(see Note 1).

6.7 percent. 

The pressure control valve must be designed and set to limit the pressure in 

the cylinder to not more than.

17 psig. 

NOTE 1: The filling density for hydrogen, 

cryogenic liquid is defined as the percent 

ratio of the weight of lading in a packaging 

to the weight of water that the packaging 

will hold at minus 423 °F. The volume of the 

packaging at minus 423 °F is determined in 

cubic inches. The volume is converted to 

pounds of water (1 lb. of water = 27.737 cubic 

inches).

(i) Each cylinder must be constructed, insulated and maintained so 

that during transportation the total 

rate of venting shall not exceed 30 SCF 

of hydrogen per hour. 

(ii) In addition to the marking requirements in §178.35 of this subchapter, the total rate of venting in 

SCF per hour (SCFH) shall be marked 

on the top head or valve protection 

band in letters at least one-half inch 

high as follows: ‘‘VENT RATE**SCFH’’ 

(with the asterisks replaced by the 

number representing the total rate of 

venting, in SCF per hour). 

(iii) Carriage by highway is subject 

to the conditions specified in 

§177.840(a) of this subchapter. 

(d) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Where

charging requirements are not specifically prescribed in paragraph (c) of this 

section, the cryogenic liquid must be 

shipped in packagings and under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 173–166, 48 FR 27695, June 16, 1983, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–166, 49 FR 24314, June 

12, 1984; Amdt. 173–180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 

1984; Amdt. 173–201, 52 FR 13041, Apr. 20, 1987: 

Amdt. 173–250, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996; 

Amdt. 173–261, 62 FR 24741, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 

45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 16013, Sept. 27, 2002; 

68 FR 75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept. 

7, 2004] 

§ 173.318 Cryogenic liquids in cargo 

tanks. 

(a) General requirements. (1) A cargo 

tank may not be loaded with a cryogenic liquid colder than the design 

service temperature of the packaging. 

(2) A cargo tank may not be loaded 

with any material that may combine 

chemically with any residue in the 

packaging to produce an unsafe condition (see §178.338–15). 

(3) The jacket covering the insulation 

on a tank used to transport a cryogenic 

liquid must be made of steel if the 

cryogenic liquid: 

(i) Is to be transported by vessel (see 

§176.76(g) of this subchapter); or 

(ii) Is oxygen or a flammable material.

(4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or abrading aluminum parts that may come in 

contact with oxygen in the cryogenic 

liquid form may not be installed on 

any cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid unless the parts 

are anodized in accordance with ASTM 

Standard B 580 (IBR, see §171.7 of this 

subchapter).

(5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting, external to the jacket that retains lading during transportation may 

not be installed on any cargo tank used 

to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid 

or any flammable cryogenic liquid. 

(6) A cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid must be provided with a manhole (see §178.338–6 of 

this subchapter). 

(b) Pressure relief systems and pressure 

control valves—(1) Types of pressure relief 

systems—(i) Tanks in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service. Except as 

otherwise provided in this paragraph, 

each tank in oxygen and flammable 

cryogenic liquid service must be protected by two independent pressure relief systems which are not connected in 

series, namely: 

(A) A primary system of one or more 

pressure relief valves; and 

(B) A secondary system of one of 

more frangible discs or pressure relief 

valves. For a tank in carbon monoxide 

service, the secondary system must be 

pressure relief valves only. 

(ii) Tanks in helium and atmospheric 

gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service. For a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the tank must be 

protected by at least one pressure relief system consisting of: 

633

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.318 

(A) One or more pressure relief 

valves; or 

(B) A combination of one or more 

pressure relief valves and one or more 

frangible discs. 

(2) Capacities of pressure relief systems—(i) Tanks in oxygen or flammable 

cryogenic liquid service. For tanks in oxygen or flammable cryogenic liquid 

service, the primary system and the 

secondary system of pressure relief devices must each have a flow capacity 

equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in 

paragraph 5.3.2 or paragraph 5.3.3 of 

CGA S–1.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). In addition: 

(A) The primary pressure relief system must have a total flow capacity at 

a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of 

the tank’s design pressure. 

(B) The secondary pressure relief system must have a total flow capacity at 

a pressure not exceeding 150 percent of 

the tank’s design pressure. 

(C) The flow capacity and rating 

must be verified and marked by the 

manufacturer of the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S–1.2. 

(ii) Tanks in helium and atmospheric 

gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service. For tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic 

liquid service, the pressure relief system must have a flow capacity equal to 

or greater than that calculated by the 

applicable formula in paragraphs 5.3.2 

or 5.3.3 of CGA Pamphlet S–1.2. If the 

pressure relief system consists of a 

combination of pressure relief valves 

and frangible discs, the pressure relief 

valves must have a total venting capacity equal to or greater than that 

calculated by the applicable formula in 

paragraph 4.1.10.1.1 of CGA Pamphlet 

S–1.2. The pressure relief system must 

have this total flow capacity at a pressure not exceeding 150 percent of the 

tank’s design pressure. The flow capacity and rating must be verified and 

marked by the manufacturer of the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet 

S–1.2.

(3) Type and construction of pressure 

relief devices. (i) Each pressure relief device must be designed and constructed 

for a pressure equal to or exceeding the 

tank’s design pressure at the coldest 

temperature reasonably expected to be 

encountered.

(ii) Pressure relief devices must be either spring-loaded pressure relief 

valves or frangible discs. Pressure relief valves must be of a type that automatically open and close at predetermined pressures. 

(4) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i)

On a tank used in oxygen or flammable 

cryogenic liquid service, the pressure 

relief devices must perform as follows. 

(A) Each pressure relief valve in the 

primary relief system must be set-todischarge at a pressure no higher than 

110 percent of the tank’s design pressure.

(B) Each pressure relief device in the 

secondary pressure relief system must 

be designed to commence functioning 

at a pressure no lower than 130 percent 

and no higher than 150 percent of the 

tank’s design pressure. 

(ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief 

devices in the pressure relief system 

must be designed to commence functioning at no higher than 150 percent of 

the tank’s design pressure. 

(5) Optional pressure relief devices and 

pressure control valves. In addition to 

the required pressure relief devices, a 

cargo tank in cryogenic liquid (except 

carbon monoxide) service may be 

equipped with one or both of the following:

(i) One or more pressure control 

valves set at a pressure below the 

tank’s design pressure. 

(ii) One or more frangible discs set to 

function at a pressure not less than one 

and one-half times or more than two 

times the tank’s design pressure. 

(6) Maximum filling rate. (i) For a tank 

used in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate 

at which the tank is filled must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of the primary pressure relief system rated at a 

pressure not exceeding 120 percent of 

the tank’s design pressure. 

(ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate 

at which the tank is filled must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of the 

pressure relief valves rated at 150 percent of the tank’s design pressure. 

634

§ 173.318 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(7) Arrangement and location of pressure relief devices. (i) The discharge 

from any pressure relief system must 

be directed upward and be unobstructed to the outside of the protective housing in such a manner as to 

prevent impingement of gas upon the 

jacket or any structural part of the vehicle.

(ii) Each pressure relief valve must 

be arranged or protected to prevent the 

accumulation of foreign material between the relief valve and the atmospheric discharge opening in any relief 

piping. The arrangement must not impede flow through the device. 

(iii) Each pressure relief valve must 

be designed and located to minimize 

the possibility of tampering. If the 

pressure setting or adjustment is external to the valve, the valve adjustment 

must be sealed. 

(iv) Each pressure relief device must 

have direct communication with the 

vapor space of the tank at the 

midlength of the top centerline. 

(v) Each pressure relief device must 

be installed and located so that the 

cooling effect of the contents during 

venting will not prevent the effective 

operation of the device. 

(8) Connections. (i) Each connection 

to a pressure relief device must be of 

sufficient size to allow the required 

rate of discharge through the pressure 

relief device. The inlet connection 

must be not less than one-half inch 

nominal pipe size. 

(ii) A shut-off valve may be installed 

in a pressure relief system only when 

the required relief capacity is provided 

at all times. 

(9) Pressure relief devices for piping 

hose and vacuum-insulated jackets. (i)

Each portion of connected liquid piping 

or hose that can be closed at both ends 

must be provided with either a hydrostatic pressure relief valve without an 

intervening shut-off valve, or a check 

valve permitting flow from the pipe or 

hose into the tank. If used, the relief 

valve must be located so as to prevent 

its discharge from impinging on the 

tank, piping, or operating personnel. 

(ii) On a vacuum-insulated cargo 

tank the jacket must be protected by a 

suitable relief device to release internal pressure. The discharge area of this 

device must be at least 0.00024 square 

inch per pound of water capacity of the 

tank. This relief device must function 

at a pressure not exceeding the internal design pressure of the jacket, calculated in accordance with Section 

VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see §171.7 

of this subchapter), or 25 psig, whichever is less. 

(10) Tank inlet, outlet, pressure relief 

device and pressure control valve markings. (i) Each tank inlet and outlet, except pressure relief devices and pressure control valves, must be permanently marked to indicate whether it 

communicates with ‘‘vapor’’ or ‘‘liquid’’ when the tank is filled to the 

maximum permitted filling density. 

(ii) Each pressure relief valve must 

be plainly and permanently marked 

with the pressure, in psig, at which it 

is set-to-discharge, the discharge rate 

of the device in SCF per minute 

(SCFM) of free air, and the manufacturer’s name or trade name and catalog 

number. The marked set-to-discharge 

pressure valve must be visible with the 

valve in its installed position. The 

rated discharge capacity of the device 

must be determined at a pressure of 120 

percent of the design pressure of the 

tank.

(iii) Each pressure control valve must 

be plainly and permanently marked 

with the pressure, in psig, at which it 

is set-to-discharge. 

(c) Weight of lading requirements. The

weight of a cryogenic liquid in the 

tank must be determined by weighing 

or by the use of a liquid level gauging 

device authorized in §178.338–14(a) of 

this subchapter, and may not exceed 

the lesser of: 

(1) The weight of lading in the tank, 

based on the water capacity stamped 

on the nameplate (§178.338–18(a)(4) of 

this subchapter) and the appropriate 

maximum permitted filling density 

specified in paragraph (f) of this section; or 

(2) The maximum weight of lading for 

which the cargo tank was designed, as 

marked on the specification plate (see 

§178.338–18(b) of this subchapter). 

(d) Outage. Except for a cargo tank 

containing helium, cryogenic liquid, a 

cargo tank offered for transportation 

must have an outage of at least two 

percent below the inlet of the pressure 

relief device or pressure control valve, 

635

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.318 

under conditions of incipient opening, 

with the tank in a level attitude. 

(e) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid in a cargo tank at the 

start of travel must be at a temperature sufficiently cold that the pressure 

setting of the pressure control valve or 

the required pressure relief valve, 

whichever is lower, will not be reached 

in less time than the marked rated 

holding time for the cryogenic liquid 

(see paragraph (g)(3) of this section and 

§178.338–9(b) of this subchapter). 

(f) Specification MC–338 (§178.338 of 

this subchapter) cargo tanks are authorized for the shipment of the following 

cryogenic liquids subject to the following additional requirements: 

(1) For purposes of this section, ‘‘filling density’’ is defined as the percent 

ratio of the weight of lading in the 

tank to the weight of water that the 

tank will hold at the design service 

temperature (one pound of water=27.737 

cubic inches at 60 °F., or one gallon of 

water = 231 cubic inches at 60 °F. and 

weighs 8.32828 pounds). 

(2) Air, argon, helium, nitrogen, and oxygen, cryogenic liquids must be loaded 

and shipped in accordance with the following table: 

PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE SETTING OR RELIEF VALVE SETTING

Maximum set-todischarge pressure 

(psig)

Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) 

Air Argon Helium Nitrogen Oxygen 

26 .......................... ............................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

30 .......................... 80.3 ....................... 129 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 74 .......................... 105 

40 .......................... 79.2 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

50 .......................... 78.0 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

55 .......................... 77.3 ....................... 125 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 71 .......................... 102 

60 .......................... 76.9 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

80 .......................... 75.3 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

85 .......................... 75.1 ....................... 121 ........................ 12.5 ....................... ............................... 99 

100 ........................ 73.0 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

105 ........................ 73.7 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... 67 ..........................

120 ........................ 72.2 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

140 ........................ 71.4 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

145 ........................ 70.9 ....................... 115 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 64 .......................... 94 

180 ........................ 68.3 ....................... ............................... 12.5 ....................... ...............................

200 ........................ 67.3 ....................... 110 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 61 .......................... 91 

250 ........................ 63.3 ....................... 106 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 57 .......................... 87 

275 ........................ 62.3 ....................... 105 ........................ 12.5 ....................... 56 .......................... 86 

325 ........................ 59.4 ....................... 101 ........................ ............................... 53 .......................... 83 

Design service temperature.¥320 °F ............... ¥320 °F ............... ¥452 °F ............... ¥320 °F ............... ¥320 °F

(3) Carbon monoxide, hydrogen (minimum 95 percent para-hydrogen), ethylene, and methane or natural gas, cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped 

in accordance with the following table: 

PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE SETTING OR RELIEF VALVE SETTING

Maximum set-to-discharge pressure (psig) 

Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) 

Carbon monoxide Ethylene Hydrogen Methane or natural gas 

13 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... 6.6 ................................

15 .................................. 75.0 .............................. ...................................... 6.6 ................................ 40.5 

17 .................................. 74.0 .............................. ...................................... 6.6 ................................

20 .................................. ...................................... 53.5 .............................. ...................................... 40.0 

25 .................................. 73.0 .............................. ...................................... ......................................

30 .................................. 72.0 .............................. 52.7 .............................. 6.3 ................................ 39.1 

35 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... ......................................

40 .................................. ...................................... 52.0 .............................. ...................................... 38.6 

45 .................................. 71.5 .............................. ...................................... ......................................

50 .................................. ...................................... 51.4 .............................. 6.0 ................................ 38.2 

55 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... ......................................

60 .................................. ...................................... 50.8 .............................. ......................................

70 .................................. ...................................... 50.2 .............................. 5.7 ................................ 37.5 

90 .................................. ...................................... 49.2 .............................. ......................................

636

§ 173.318 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE SETTING OR RELIEF VALVE SETTING—Continued

Maximum set-to-discharge pressure (psig) 

Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) 

Carbon monoxide Ethylene Hydrogen Methane or natural gas 

95 .................................. ...................................... ...................................... ......................................

100 ................................ ...................................... 48.4 .............................. 5.4 ................................ 36.6 

115 ................................ ...................................... 48.2 .............................. ......................................

125 ................................ ...................................... ...................................... 5.0 ................................

150 ................................ ...................................... ...................................... 4.5 ................................

175 ................................ 62.5 .............................. 45.8 .............................. ......................................

285 ................................ 56.0 .............................. ...................................... ......................................

Design service temperature.¥320 °F ...................... ¥155 °F ...................... ¥423 °F ...................... ¥260 °F

(4) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Where

charging requirements are not specifically prescribed in this paragraph (f), 

the cryogenic liquid must be shipped in 

packagings and under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator. 

(g) One-way travel time; marking. The

jacket of a cargo tank to be used to 

transport a flammable cryogenic liquid 

must be marked on its right side near 

the front, in letters and numbers at 

least two inches high, ‘‘One-Way-Travel-Time ll hrs.’’, with the blank filled 

in with a number indicating the oneway travel time (OWTT), in hours, of 

the cargo tank for the flammable cryogenic liquid to be transported. A cargo 

tank that is partially unloaded at one 

or more locations must have additional 

marking ‘‘One-Way-Travel-Time ll 

hrs. ll psig to ll psig at ll percent filling density,’’ with the second 

blank filled in with the pressure existing after partial unloading and the 

third blank filled in with the set-to-discharge pressure of the control valve or 

pressure relief valve, and the fourth 

blank with the filling density following 

partial unloading. Multiple OWTT 

markings for different pressure levels 

are permitted. The abbreviation 

‘‘OWTT’’ may be used in place of the 

words ‘‘One-way-travel-time’’ in the 

marking required by this paragraph. 

(1) OWTT is based on the marked 

rated holding time (MRHT) of the 

cargo tank for the cryogenic liquid to 

be transported in the cargo tank. If the 

MRHT for the flammable cryogenic liquid is not displayed on or adjacent to 

the specification plate, this MRHT may 

be derived. 

(2) The MRHT is converted to OWTT, 

in hours, as follows: 

(i) For a tank with an MRHT of 72 

hours or less, 

OWTT = (MRHT ¥ 24) / 2 

(ii) For a tank with an MRHT greater 

than 72 hours, 

OWTT = MRHT ¥ 48

(3) Each cargo tank motor vehicle 

used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid must be examined after 

each shipment to determine its actual 

holding time. The record required by 

§177.840(h) of this subchapter may be 

used for this determination. If the examination indicates that the actual 

holding time of the cargo tank, after 

adjustment to reflect an average ambient temperature of 85 °F, is less than 90 

percent of the marked rated holding 

time (MRHT) for the cryogenic liquid 

marked on the specification plate or 

adjacent thereto (see §178.338–18(b) of 

this subchapter), the tank may not be 

refilled with any flammable cryogenic 

liquid until it is restored to its marked 

rated holding time value or it is remarked with the actual marked rated 

holding time determined by this examination. If the name of the flammable 

cryogenic liquid that was transported 

and its marked rated holding time is 

not displayed on or adjacent to the 

specification plate, this requirement 

may be met by deriving the MRHT of 

the cargo tank for that flammable 

cryogenic liquid and comparing that 

derived MRHT with the actual holding 

time after adjustment. 

[Amdt. 173–166, 48 FR 27696, June 16, 1983] 

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting §173.318, see the List of CFR 

637

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.319 

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and 

on GPO Access. 

§ 173.319 Cryogenic liquids in tank 

cars. 

(a) General requirements. (1) A tank 

car containing a flammable cryogenic 

liquid may not be shipped unless it was 

loaded by, or with the consent of, the 

owner of the tank car. 

(2) The amount of flammable cryogenic liquid loaded into a tank car 

must be determined, either by direct 

measurement or by calculation based 

on weight, to verify that the tank has 

not been filled to a level in excess of 

the limits specified in paragraph (d)(2) 

of this section. The weight of any flammable cryogenic liquid loaded, except 

hydrogen, must be checked by use of 

scales after disconnecting the loading 

line.

(3) The shipper shall notify the Federal Railroad Administration whenever 

a tank car containing any flammable 

cryogenic liquid is not received by the 

consignee within 20 days from the date 

of shipment. Notification to the Federal Railroad Administration may be 

made by e-mail to Hmassist@fra.dot.gov

or telephone call to (202) 493–6229. 

(4) A tank car may not be loaded 

with any flammable cryogenic liquid: 

(i) That may combine chemically 

with any residue in the tank to 

produce an unsafe condition, 

(ii) That is colder than the design 

service temperature of the tank, 

(iii) If the average daily pressure rise 

in the tank exceeded 3 psig during the 

prior shipment, 

(iv) Unless it is marked with the 

name of contents, in accordance with 

§172.330 of this subchapter. 

(b) When a tank car containing a 

flammable cryogenic liquid is offered 

for transportation: 

(1) At least 0.5 percent outage must 

be provided below the inlet of the pressure relief or pressure control valve at 

the start-to-discharge pressure setting 

of the valve, with the tank car in a 

level attitude, and 

(2) The absolute pressure in the annular space must be less than 75 microns 

of mercury. 

(c) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid must be loaded into a tank 

car at such a temperature that the average daily pressure rise during transportation will not exceed 3 psig (see 

paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section). 

(d) A Class DOT-113 tank car is authorized for the shipment of the following cryogenic liquids subject to the 

following additional requirements: 

(1) For purposes of this section, ‘‘filling density’’ is defined as the percent 

ratio of the weight of lading in the 

tank to the weight of water that the 

tank will hold at the design service 

temperature (one pound of water = 

27.737 cubic inches at 60 °F., or one gallon of water = 231 cubic inches at 60 °F.

and weighs 8.32828 pounds). 

(2) Ethylene, and hydrogen (minimum 

95 percent parahydrogen), cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table: 

PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE SETTING OR RELIEF VALVE SETTING

Maximum start-to-discharge pressure 

(psig)

Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) 

Ethylene Ethylene Ethlyene Hydrogen 

17 ........................................................... ................................ ................................ ................................ 6.60. 

45 ........................................................... 52.8 ....................... ................................ ................................

75 ........................................................... ................................ 51.1 ....................... 51.1 .......................

Maximum pressure when offered for 

transportation.

10 psig ................... 10 psig ................... 20 psig ...................

Design service temperature ................... Minus 260 °F ......... Minus 260 °F ......... Minus 155 °F ......... Minus 423 °F.

Specification (see § 180.507(b)(3) of 

this subchapter).

113D60W ..............

113C60W ..............

113C120W ............ 113D120W ............ 113A175W. 

113A60W.

(e) Special requirements for class DOT 

113 tank cars—(1) A class DOT-113 tank 

car need not be periodically pressure 

tested; however, each shipment must 

be monitored to determine the average 

daily pressure rise in the tank car. If 

the average daily pressure rise during 

any shipment exceeds 0.2 Bar (3 psig) 

638

§ 173.320 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

per day, the tank must be tested for 

thermal integrity prior to any subsequent shipment. 

(2) Thermal integrity test. When required by paragraph (e)(1) of this section, either of the following thermal 

integrity tests may be used: 

(i) Pressure rise test. The pressure rise 

in the tank may not exceed 0.34 Bar (5 

psig) in 24 hours. When the pressure 

rise test is performed, the absolute 

pressure in the annular space of the 

loaded tank car may not exceed 75 microns of mercury at the beginning of 

the test and may not increase more 

than 25 microns during the 24-hour period; or 

(ii) Calculated heat transfer rate test. 

The insulation system must be performance tested as prescribed in 

§179.400–4 of this subchapter. When the 

calculated heat transfer rate test is 

performed, the absolute pressure in the 

annular space of the loaded tank car 

may not exceed 75 microns of mercury 

at the beginning of the test and may 

not increase more than 25 microns during the 24-hour period. The calculated 

heat transfer rate in 24 hours may not 

exceed:

(A) 120 percent of the appropriate 

standard heat transfer rate specified in 

§179.401–1 of this subchapter, for DOT113A60W and DOT-113C120W tank cars; 

(B) 122.808 joules (0.1164 Btu/day/lb.) 

of inner tank car water capacity, for 

DOT-113A175W tank cars; 

(C) 345.215 joules (0.3272 Btu/day/lb.) 

of inner tank car water capacity, for 

DOT-113C60W and 113D60W tank cars; 

or

(D) 500.09 joules (0.4740 Btu/day/lb.) of 

inner tank car water capacity, for 

DOT-113D120W tank cars. 

(3) A tank car that fails a test prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section must be removed from hazardous 

materials service. A tank car removed 

from hazardous materials service because it failed a test prescribed in 

paragraph (e)(2) of this section may not 

be used to transport a hazardous material unless the tank car conforms to all 

applicable requirements of this subchapter.

(4) Each rupture disc must be replaced every 12 months, and the replacement date must be marked on the 

car near the pressure relief valve information.

(5) Pressure relief valves and alternate pressure relief valves must be 

tested every five years. The start-todischarge pressure and vapor tight 

pressure requirements for the pressure 

relief valves must be as specified in 

§179.401–1 of this subchapter. The alternate pressure relief device values specified in §179.401–1 of this subchapter for 

a DOT-113C120W tank car apply to a 

DOT-113D120W tank car. 

(49 U.S.C. 1803, 1804, 1808; 49 CFR 1.53, app. A 

to part 1) 

[Amdt. 173–166, 48 FR 27698, June 16, 1983, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–245, Sept. 21, 1995; 65 

FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45184, 45379, 

45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] 

§ 173.320 Cryogenic liquids; exceptions. 

(a) Atmospheric gases and helium, 

cryogenic liquids, in Dewar flasks, insulated cylinders, insulated portable 

tanks, insulated cargo tanks, and insulated tank cars, designed and constructed so that the pressure in such 

packagings will not exceed 25.3 psig 

under ambient temperature conditions 

during transportation are not subject 

to the requirements of this subchapter 

when transported by motor vehicle or 

railcar except as specified in paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3) of this 

section.

(1) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this 

subchapter pertaining to the reporting 

of incidents, not including a release 

that is the result of venting through a 

pressure control valve, or the neck of 

the Dewar flask. 

(2) Subparts A, B, C, D, G and H of 

part 172, (§§174.24 for rail and 177.817 for 

highway) and in addition, part 172 in 

its entirety for oxygen. 

(3) Subparts A and B of part 173, and 

§§174.1 and 177.800, 177.804, and 177.823 of 

this subchapter. 

(b) The requirements of this subchapter do not apply to atmospheric 

gases and helium: 

(1) During loading and unloading operations (pressure rises may exceed 25.3 

psig); or 

(2) When used in operation of a process system; such as a refrigeration system (pressure may exceed 25.3 psig). 

639

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.323 

(c) For transportation aboard aircraft, see the ICAO Technical Instructions (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), Packing Instruction 202 and 

the packaging specifications in part 6, 

chapter 5. 

[Amdt. 173–201, 52 FR 13043, Apr. 20, 1987, as 

amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 

33436, June 21, 2001; 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002; 

68 FR 48570, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75746, Dec. 31, 

2003]

§ 173.321 Ethylamine. 

Ethylamine must be packaged as follows:

(a) In 1A1 drums which meet Packing 

Group I performance level requirements.

(b) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except 

acetylene.

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990] 

§ 173.322 Ethyl chloride. 

Ethyl chloride must be packaged in 

any of the following single or combination non-bulk packagings which meet 

Packing Group I performance level requirements:

(a) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes 

with glass, earthenware, or metal inner 

receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) 

capacity each; 

(b) In 4G fiberboard boxes with glass, 

earthenware, or metal inner receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) capacity each. Outer packagings may not 

exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight; 

(c) In 1A1 drums of not over 100 L (26 

gallons) capacity each; or 

(d) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except 

acetylene. Cylinders made of aluminum alloy are not authorized. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 74 FR 2266, Jan. 14, 2009] 

§ 173.323 Ethylene oxide. 

(a) For packaging ethylene oxide in 

non-bulk packagings, silver mercury or 

any of its alloys or copper may not be 

used in any part of a packaging, valve, 

or other packaging appurtenance if 

that part, during normal conditions of 

transportation, may come in contact 

with ethylene oxide liquid or vapor. 

Copper alloys may be used only where 

gas mixtures do not contain free acetylene at any concentration that will 

form copper acetylene. All packaging 

and gaskets must be constructed of 

materials which are compatible with 

ethylene oxide and do not lower the 

auto-ignition temperature of ethylene 

oxide.

(b) Ethylene oxide must be packaged 

in one of the following: 

(1) In hermetically sealed glass or 

metal inner packagings suitably cushioned in an outer package authorized 

by §173.201(b). The maximum quantity 

permitted in any glass inner packaging 

is 100 g (3.5 ounces), and the maximum 

quantity permitted in any metal inner 

packaging is 340 g (12 ounces). After 

filling, each inner packaging shall be 

determined to be leak-tight by placing 

the inner packaging in a hot water 

bath at a temperature, and for a period 

of time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapor pressure of ethylene oxide at 55 °C is 

achieved. The total quantity in any 

outer packaging shall not exceed 100 g 

(3.5 ounces), and the total quantity in 

any outer packaging containing only 

metal inner packagings shall not exceed 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds). Each completed package must be capable of 

passing all Packing Group I performance tests. 

(2) In specification cylinders or UN 

pressure receptacles, as authorized for 

any compressed gas except acetylene. 

Pressurizing valves and insulation are 

required for cylinders over 4 L (1 gallon) capacity. Eductor tubes must be 

provided for cylinders over 19 L (5 gallons) capacity. Cylinders must be 

seamless or welded steel (not brazed) 

with a nominal capacity of no more 

than 115 L (30 gallons) and may not be 

liquid full below 82 °C (180 °F). Before 

each refilling, each cylinder must be 

tested for leakage at no less than 103.4 

kPa (15 psig) pressure. In addition, 

each cylinder must be equipped with a 

fusible type relief device with yield 

temperature of 69 °C to 77 °C (157 °F to 

170 °F). The capacity of the relief device and the effectiveness of the insulation must be such that the charged cylinder will not explode when tested by 

the method described in CGA Pamphlet 

C–14 or other equivalent method. 

(3) In 1A1 steel drums of no more 

than 231 L (61 gallons) and meeting 

640

§ 173.323 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Packing Group I performance standards. The drum must be lagged of all 

welded construction with the inner 

shell having a minimum thickness of 

1.7 mm (0.068 inches) and the outer 

shell having a minimum thickness of 

2.4 mm (0.095 inches). Drums must be 

capable of withstanding a hydrostatic 

test pressure of 690 kPa (100 psig). Lagging must be of sufficient thickness so 

that the drum, when filled with ethylene oxide and equipped with the required pressure relief device, will not 

rupture when exposed to fire. The drum 

may not be liquid full below 85 °C (185 

°F), and must be marked ‘‘THIS END 

UP’’ on the top head. Before each refilling, each drum must be tested for leakage at no less than 103 kPa (15 psig) 

pressure. Each drum must be equipped 

with a fusible type relief device with 

yield temperature of 69 °C to 77 °C (157 

°F to 170 °F), and the capacity of the 

relief device must be such that the 

filled drum is capable of passing, without rupture, the test method described 

in CGA Pamphlet C–14 or other equivalent method. 

(c) When §172.101 of this subchapter 

specifies that a hazardous material be 

packaged under this section, only the 

following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of this part, the special provisions specified in column 7 of 

the §172.101 table, and paragraphs (d) 

through (j) of this section: 

(1) Tank cars. Class DOT 105 tank 

cars:

(i) Each tank car built before March 

16, 2009 must have a tank test pressure 

of at least 20.7 Bar (300 psig); and 

(ii) Except as provided in §173.314(d), 

tank cars built on or after March 16, 

2009 used for the transportation of 

ethylene oxide must meet the applicable authorized tank car specification 

listed in the table in §173.314(c). 

(2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 330 

and MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles. 

(3) Portable tanks. DOT 51 portable 

tanks.

(d) The pressure relief devices must 

be set to function at 517 kPa (75 psig). 

Portable tanks fitted with non-reclosing devices made and in use prior 

to December 31, 1987, may continue to 

be used in ethylene oxide service. 

(e) In determining outage, consideration must be given to the lading temperature and solubility of inert gas 

padding in ethylene oxide as well as 

the partial pressure exerted by the gas 

padding.

(f) Each tank, loaded or empty, must 

be padded with dry nitrogen or other 

suitable inert gas of sufficient quantity 

to render the vapor space of the tank 

nonflammable up to 41 °C (105 °F). The 

gas used for padding must be free of 

impurities which may cause the ethylene oxide to polymerize, decompose or 

undergo other violent chemical reaction.

(g) Copper, silver, mercury, magnesium or their alloys may not be used in 

any part of the tank or appurtenances 

that are normally in contact with the 

lading.

(h) Neoprene, natural rubber and asbestos gaskets are prohibited. All packing and gaskets must be made of materials which do not react with or lower 

the autoignition temperature of the 

lading.

(i) Each tank must be insulated with 

cork (at least 10 cm (4 inches) thick), 

or mineral wool, fiberglass or other 

suitable insulation material of sufficient thickness so that the thermal 

conductance at 16 °C (60 °F) is not more 

than 0.075 Btu per hour per square foot 

per degree F. temperature differential. 

Portable tanks made and in use prior 

to December 31, 1987 equipped with fusible plugs instead of a pressure relief 

valve or rupture disc, must have sufficient insulation so that the tank as 

filled for shipment will not rupture in 

a fire. The insulation on portable tanks 

or cargo tank motor vehicles must be 

protected with a steel jacket at least 

2.54 mm (0.100 inch) thick, or as required by the specification. 

(j) Tank car tanks built after December 30, 1971 must be equipped with a 

thermometer well. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended at 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 

173–236, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173– 

234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173–145, 60 

FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995; 66 FR 45380, 45383, 

Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75746, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 

76178, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 33884, June 12, 2006; 

74 FR 1801, Jan. 13, 2009] 

641

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.337 

§ 173.334 Organic phosphates mixed 

with compressed gas. 

Hexaethyl tetraphosphate, parathion, 

tetraethyl dithio pyrophosphate, tetraethyl pyrophosphate, or other Division 

6.1 organic phosphates (including a 

compound or mixture), may be mixed 

with a non-flammable compressed gas. 

This mixture may not contain more 

than 20 percent by weight of organic 

phosphate and must be packaged in 

DOT 3A240, 3AA240, 3B240, 4B240, 

4BA240, 4BW240 or UN cylinders meeting all of the following requirements: 

(a) Each cylinder may be filled with 

not more than 5 kg (11.0 lb) of the mixture, to a maximum filling density of 

not more than 80 percent of the water 

capacity.

(b) No cylinder may be equipped with 

an education tube or a fusible plug. 

(c) No cylinder may be equipped with 

any valve unless the valve is a type approved by the Associate Administrator. 

(d) Cylinders must be overpacked in a 

box, crate, or other strong outer packaging conforming to the requirements 

of §173.25 and arranged to protect each 

valve or other closing device from damage. Except as provided in paragraph 

(e) of this section, no more than four 

cylinders may be packed in a strong 

outer packaging. Each strong outer 

packaging with its closing device protection must be sufficiently strong to 

protect all parts of each cylinder from 

deformation or leakage if the completed package is dropped 1.8 m (6 feet) 

onto a non-yielding surface, such as 

concrete or steel, impacting at the 

packaging’s weakest point. 

(e) Cylinders may be packed in strong 

wooden boxes with valves or other closing devices protected from damage, 

with not more than twelve cylinders in 

one outside wooden box. An outer fiberboard box may be used when not more 

than four such cylinders are to be 

shipped in one packaging. Valves must 

be adequately protected. Box and valve 

protection must be of sufficient 

strength to protect all parts of inner 

packagings and valves from deformation or breakage resulting from a drop 

of at least 1.8 m (6 feet) onto a nonyielding surface, such as concrete or 

steel, impacting at the weakest point. 

[67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 71 

FR 54395, Sept. 14, 2006; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, 

2010]

EDITORIAL NOTE: At 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 

2002, §173.334(f) was amended, however, paragraph (f) does not exist in this section. 

§ 173.335 [Reserved] 

§ 173.336 Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, 

or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied. 

(a) Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or 

dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied, must be 

packaged in specification or UN cylinders as prescribed in §173.192, except 

valves are not authorized. UN tubes 

and MEGCs are not authorized for use. 

Cylinders must be equipped with a 

stainless steel valve and valve seat 

that will not deteriorate in contact 

with nitrogen dioxide. Each valve opening must be closed by a solid metal 

plug with tapered thread properly luted 

to prevent leakage. Transportation in 

DOT 3AL cylinders is authorized only 

by highway and rail. 

(b) Each UN pressure receptacle must 

be cleaned in accordance with the requirements of ISO 11621 (IBR, see §171.7 

of this subchapter). Each DOT specification cylinder must be cleaned according to the requirements of GSA 

Federal Specification RR–C–901D, paragraphs 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of 

this subchapter). Cleaning agents 

equivalent to those specified in RR–C– 

901D may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected 

at random from a group of 200 or fewer 

and cleaned at the same time must be 

tested for oil contamination in accordance with Specification RR–C–901D, 

paragraph 4.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this 

subchapter) and meet the standard of 

cleanliness specified therein. 

[71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.337 Nitric oxide. 

(a) Nitric oxide must be packaged in 

cylinders conforming to the requirements of §173.40 and as follows: 

(1) DOT specification cylinder. In a 

DOT 3A1800, 3AA1800, 3E1800, or 

3AL1800 cylinder. A DOT specification 

cylinder must be charged to a pressure 

of not more than 5,170 kPa (750 psi) at 

642

§ 173.338 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

21 °C (70 °F). Transportation of nitric 

oxide in a DOT 3AL is cylinder is authorized only by highway and rail. 

(2) UN cylinder. In a UN cylinder with 

a minimum test pressure of 200 bar. 

The maximum working pressure of the 

cylinder must not exceed 50 bar. The 

pressure in the cylinder at 65 °C (149 °F)

may not exceed the test pressure. The 

use of UN tubes and MEGCs is not authorized.

(3) Valves. Cylinders must be 

equipped with a stainless steel valve 

and valve seat that will not deteriorate 

in contact with nitric oxide. Cylinders 

or valves may not be equipped with 

pressure relief devices of any type. 

(b) Each UN cylinder must be cleaned 

in accordance with the requirements of 

ISO 11621 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). Each DOT specification cylinder must be cleaned in compliance 

with the requirements of GSA Federal 

Specification RR–C–901D, paragraphs 

3.3.1 and 3.3.2 (IBR, see §171.7 of this 

subchapter). Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in Federal Specification RR–C–901D may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be 

capable of reacting with oxygen. One 

cylinder selected at random from a 

group of 200 or fewer and cleaned at the 

same time must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with Federal 

Specification RR–C–901D paragraph 

4.3.2 and meet the standard of cleanliness specified therein. 

[71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006] 

§ 173.338 Tungsten hexafluoride. 

(a) Tungsten hexafluoride must be 

packaged in specification 3A, 3AA, 

3BN, or 3E (§§178.36, 178.37, 178.39, 178.42 

of this subchapter) cylinders. Cylinders 

must be equipped with a valve protection cap or be packed in a strong outer 

packaging meeting the provisions of 

§173.40. Outlets of any valves must be 

capped or plugged. As an alternative, 

the cylinder opening may be closed by 

the use of a metal plug. Specification 

3E cylinders must be shipped in an 

overpack that meets the provisions of 

§173.40. 

(b) In place of the volumetric expansion test, DOT 3BN cylinders used in 

exclusive service may be given a complete external visual inspection in conformance with part 180, subpart C, of 

this subchapter, at the time such periodic requalification becomes due. Cylinders that undergo a complete external visual inspection, in place of the 

volumetric expansion test, must be 

condemned if removed from tungsten 

hexafluoride service. 

[ 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009, as amended at 75 

FR 5395, Feb. 2, 2010] 

§ 173.340 Tear gas devices. 

(a) Packagings for tear gas devices 

must be approved prior to initial transportation by the Associate Administrator.

(b) Tear gas devices may not be assembled with, or packed in the same 

packaging with, mechanically- or 

manually-operated firing, igniting, 

bursting, or other functioning elements 

unless of a type and design which has 

been approved by the Associate Administrator.

(c) Tear gas grenades, tear gas candles, and similar devices must be packaged in one of the following packagings 

conforming to the requirements of part 

178 of this subchapter at the Packing 

Group II performance level: 

(1) In UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F metalstrapped wooden boxes. Functioning 

elements not assembled in grenades or 

devices must be in a separate compartment of these boxes, or in inner or separate outer boxes, UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 

4F, and must be so packed and cushioned that they may not come in contact with each other or with the walls 

of the box during transportation. Not 

more than 50 tear gas devices and 50 

functioning elements must be packed 

in one box, and the gross weight of the 

outer box may not exceed 35 kg (77 

pounds).

(2) In a UN 1A2 metal drum. Functioning elements must be packed in a 

separate inner packaging or compartment. Not more than 24 tear gas devices and 24 functioning elements must 

be packed in one outer drum, and the 

gross weight of the drum may not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds). 

(3) In a UN 4G fiberboard box with inside tear gas devices meeting Specifications 2P or 2Q. Each inside packaging 

must be placed in fiberboard tubes 

fitted with metal ends or a fiber box 

with suitable padding. Not more than 

30 inner packagings must be packed in 

643

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.403 

one outer box, and the gross weight of 

the outer box may not exceed 16 kg (35 

pounds).

(4) In other packagings of a type or 

design which has been approved by the 

Associate Administrator. 

(d) Tear gas devices may be shipped 

completely assembled when offered by 

or consigned to the U.S. Department of 

Defense, provided the functioning elements are so packed that they cannot 

accidentally function. Outer packagings must be UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F 

metal-strapped wooden boxes. 

[Amdt. 173–224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990, as 

amended 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001] 

Subpart H [Reserved] 

Subpart I—Class 7 (Radioactive) 

Materials 

SOURCE: Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 

28, 1995, unless otherwise noted. 

§ 173.401 Scope. 

(a) This subpart sets forth requirements for the packaging and transportation of Class 7 (radioactive) materials by offerors and carriers subject to 

this subchapter. The requirements prescribed in this subpart are in addition 

to, not in place of, other requirements 

set forth in this subchapter for Class 7 

(radioactive) materials and those of 

the Nuclear Regulatory Commission in 

10 CFR part 71. 

(b) This subpart does not apply to: 

(1) Class 7 (radioactive) materials 

produced, used, transported, or stored 

within an establishment other than 

during the course of transportation, including storage in transportation. 

(2) Class 7 (radioactive) materials 

that have been implanted or incorporated into, and are still in, a person 

or live animal for diagnosis or treatment.

(3) Class 7 (radioactive) material that 

is an integral part of the means of 

transport.

(4) Natural material and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides which are not intended to be 

processed for use of these radionuclides, provided the activity concentration of the material does not exceed 10 times the values specified in 

§173.436. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended at 69 FR 3670, Jan. 26, 2004] 

§ 173.403 Definitions. 

For purposes of this subpart— 

A1 means the maximum activity of 

special form Class 7 (radioactive) material permitted in a Type A package. 

This value is either listed in §173.435 or 

may be derived in accordance with the 

procedures prescribed in §173.433. 

A2 means the maximum activity of 

Class 7 (radioactive) material, other 

than special form material, LSA material, and SCO, permitted in a Type A 

package. This value is either listed in 

§173.435 or may be derived in accordance with the procedures prescribed in 

§173.433. 

Class 7 (radioactive) material See the 

definition of Radioactive material in this 

section.

Closed transport vehicle means a transport vehicle or conveyance equipped 

with a securely attached exterior enclosure that during normal transportation restricts the access of unauthorized persons to the cargo space containing the Class 7 (radioactive) materials. The enclosure may be either temporary or permanent, and in the case of 

packaged materials may be of the ‘‘seethrough’’ type, and must limit access 

from top, sides, and bottom. 

Consignment means a package or 

group of packages or load of radioactive material offered by a person for 

transport in the same shipment. 

Containment system means the assembly of components of the packaging intended to retain the Class 7 (radioactive) material during transport. 

Contamination means the presence of 

a radioactive substance on a surface in 

quantities in excess of 0.4 Bq/cm2 for

beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 0.04 Bq/cm2 for

all other alpha emitters. Contamination exists in two phases. 

(1) Fixed radioactive contamination 

means radioactive contamination that 

cannot be removed from a surface during normal conditions of transport. 

(2) Non-fixed radioactive contamination 

means radioactive contamination that 

can be removed from a surface during 

normal conditions of transport. 

644

§ 173.403 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Conveyance means:

(1) For transport by public highway 

or rail: any transport vehicle or large 

freight container; 

(2) For transport by water: any vessel, or any hold, compartment, or defined deck area of a vessel including 

any transport vehicle on board the vessel; and 

(3) For transport by aircraft, any aircraft.

Criticality Safety Index (CSI) means a 

number (rounded up to the next tenth) 

which is used to provide control over 

the accumulation of packages, overpacks or freight containers containing 

fissile material. The CSI for packages 

containing fissile material is determined in accordance with the instructions provided in 10 CFR 71.22, 71.23, 

and 71.59. The CSI for an overpack, 

freight container, or consignment containing fissile material packages is the 

arithmetic sum of the criticality safety indices of all the fissile material 

packages contained within the overpack, freight container, or consignment.

Design means the description of a 

special form Class 7 (radioactive) material, a package, packaging, or LSA-III, 

that enables those items to be fully 

identified. The description may include 

specifications, engineering drawings, 

reports showing compliance with regulatory requirements, and other relevant documentation. 

Deuterium means, for the purposes of 

§173.453, deuterium and any deuterium 

compound, including heavy water, in 

which the ratio of deuterium atoms to 

hydrogen atoms exceeds 1:5000. 

Exclusive use means sole use by a single consignor of a conveyance for 

which all initial, intermediate, and 

final loading and unloading are carried 

out in accordance with the direction of 

the consignor or consignee. The consignor and the carrier must ensure that 

any loading or unloading is performed 

by personnel having radiological training and resources appropriate for safe 

handling of the consignment. The consignor must provide to the initial carrier specific written instructions for 

maintenance of exclusive use shipment 

controls, including the vehicle survey 

requirement of §173.443 (c) as applicable, and include these instructions with 

the shipping paper information provided to the carrier by the consignor. 

Exemption value means either an exempt material activity concentration 

or an exempt consignment activity 

limit listed in the table in §173.436, or 

determined according to the procedures described in §173.433, and used to 

determine whether a given physically 

radioactive material is sufficiently radioactive to be subject to the HMR (see 

definition of radioactive material). An 

exemption value is different from an 

exemption, as specified under the definition for special permit in §171.8 of 

this subchapter. 

Fissile material means plutonium239,

plutonium241, uranium233, uranium235,

or any combination of these radionuclides. This term does not apply to 

material containing fissile nuclides, 

unirradiated natural uranium and 

unirradiated depleted uranium, or to 

natural uranium or depleted uranium 

that has been irradiated in thermal reactors only. 

Freight container means a reusable 

container having a volume of 1.81 cubic 

meters (64 cubic feet) or more, designed 

and constructed to permit it being lifted with its contents intact and intended primarily for containment of 

packages in unit form during transportation. A ‘‘small freight container’’ is 

one which has either one outer dimension less than 1.5 m (4.9 feet) or an internal volume of not more than 3.0 

cubic meters (106 cubic feet). All other 

freight containers are designated as 

‘‘large freight containers.’’ 

Graphite means, for the purposes of 

§173.453, graphite with a boron equivalent content less than 5 parts per million and density greater than 1.5 grams 

per cubic centimeter. 

Highway route controlled quantity 

means a quantity within a single package which exceeds: 

(1) 3,000 times the A1 value of the 

radionuclides as specified in §173.435 for 

special form Class 7 (radioactive) material;

(2) 3,000 times the A2 value of the 

radionuclides as specified in §173.435 for 

normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material; or 

(3) 1,000 TBq (27,000 Ci), whichever is 

least.

645

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.403 

Limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) 

material means a quantity of Class 7 

(radioactive) material not exceeding 

the material’s package limits specified 

in §173.425 and conforming with requirements specified in §173.421. 

Low Specific Activity (LSA) material 

means Class 7 (radioactive) material 

with limited specific activity which 

satisfies the descriptions and limits set 

forth below. Shielding material surrounding the LSA material may not be 

considered in determining the estimated average specific activity of the 

package contents. LSA material must 

be in one of three groups: 

(1) LSA-I: 

(i) Uranium and thorium ores, concentrates of uranium and thorium ores, 

and other ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides which are intended to be processed for the use of 

these radionuclides; or 

(ii) Solid unirradiated natural uranium or depleted uranium or natural 

thorium or their solid or liquid compounds or mixtures; or 

(iii) Radioactive material other than 

fissile material, for which the A2 value

is unlimited; or 

(iv) Other radioactive material, excluding fissile material in quantities 

not excepted under §173.453, in which 

the activity is distributed throughout 

and the estimated average specific activity does not exceed 30 times the values for activity concentration specified 

in §173.436, or 30 times the default values listed in Table 8 of §173.433. 

(2) LSA-II: 

(i) Water with tritium concentration 

up to 0.8 TBq/L (20.0 Ci/L); or 

(ii) Other radioactive material in 

which the activity is distributed 

throughout and the average specific activity does not exceed 10¥4 A2/g for solids and gases, and 10¥5 A2/g for liquids. 

(3) LSA-III. Solids (e.g., consolidated

wastes, activated materials), excluding 

powders, that meet the requirements of 

§173.468 and in which: 

(i) The radioactive material is distributed throughout a solid or a collection of solid objects, or is essentially 

uniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, 

bitumen, ceramic, etc.); 

(ii) The radioactive material is relatively insoluble, or it is intrinsically 

contained in a relatively insoluble material, so that, even under loss of packaging, the loss of Class 7 (radioactive) 

material per package by leaching when 

placed in water for seven days would 

not exceed 0.1 A2; and 

(iii) The estimated average specific 

activity of the solid, excluding any 

shielding material, does not exceed 2 × 

10¥3 A2/g.

Low toxicity alpha emitters means natural uranium; depleted uranium; natural thorium; uranium-235 or uranium238; thorium-232; thorium-228 and thorium-230 when contained in ores or 

physical and chemical concentrates; 

and alpha emitters with a half-life of 

less than 10 days. 

Maximum normal operating pressure 

means the maximum gauge pressure 

that would develop in a containment 

system during a period of one year, in 

the absence of venting or cooling, 

under the heat conditions specified in 

10 CFR 71.71(c)(1). 

Multilateral approval means approval 

of a package design or shipment by the 

relevant Competent Authority of the 

country of origin and of each country 

through or into which the package or 

shipment is to be transported. This definition does not include approval from 

a country over which Class 7 (radioactive) materials are carried in aircraft, if there is no scheduled stop in 

that country. 

Natural thorium means thorium with 

the naturally occurring distribution of 

thorium isotopes (essentially 100 percent by weight of thorium-232). 

Normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material means Class 7 (radioactive) which 

has not been demonstrated to qualify 

as ‘‘special form Class 7 (radioactive) 

material.’’

Package means the packaging together with its radioactive contents as 

presented for transport. 

(1) ‘‘Excepted package’’ means a 

packaging together with its excepted 

Class 7 (radioactive) materials as specified in §§173.421–173.426 and 173.428. 

(2) ‘‘Industrial package’’ means a 

packaging that, together with its low 

specific activity (LSA) material or surface contaminated object (SCO) contents, meets the requirements of 

646

§ 173.403 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

§§173.410 and 173.411. Industrial packages are categorized in §173.411 as either:

(i) ‘‘Industrial package Type 1 (IP– 

1)’’;

(ii) ‘‘Industrial package Type 2 (IP– 

2)’’; or 

(iii) ‘‘Industrial package Type 3 (IP– 

3)’’.

(3) ‘‘Type A package’’ means a packaging that, together with its radioactive contents limited to A1 or A2 as

appropriate, meets the requirements of 

§§173.410 and 173.412 and is designed to 

retain the integrity of containment 

and shielding required by this part 

under normal conditions of transport 

as demonstrated by the tests set forth 

in §173.465 or §173.466, as appropriate. A 

Type A package does not require Competent Authority approval. 

(4) ‘‘Type B package’’ means a packaging designed to transport greater 

than an A1 or A2 quantity of radioactive material that, together with its 

radioactive contents, is designed to retain the integrity of containment and 

shielding required by this part when 

subjected to the normal conditions of 

transport and hypothetical accident 

test conditions set forth in 10 CFR part 

71.

(i) ‘‘Type B(U) package’’ means a 

Type B packaging that, together with 

its radioactive contents, for international shipments requires unilateral 

approval only of the package design 

and of any stowage provisions that 

may be necessary for heat dissipation. 

(ii) ‘‘Type B(M) package’’ means a 

Type B packaging, together with its radioactive contents, that for international shipments requires multilateral approval of the package design, 

and may require approval of the conditions of shipment. Type B(M) packages 

are those Type B package designs 

which have a maximum normal operating pressure of more than 700 kPa/ 

cm2 (100 lb/in2) gauge or a relief device 

which would allow the release of Class 

7 (radioactive) material to the environment under the hypothetical accident 

conditions specified in 10 CFR part 71. 

(5) ‘‘Fissile material package’’ means 

a packaging, together with its fissile 

material contents, which meets the requirements for fissile material packages described in subpart E of 10 CFR 

71. A fissile material package may be a 

Type AF package, a Type B(U)F package, or a Type B(M)F package. 

Packaging means, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the assembly of components necessary to ensure compliance with the packaging requirements 

of this subpart. It may consist of one 

or more receptacles, absorbent materials, spacing structures, thermal insulation, radiation shielding, service 

equipment for filling, emptying, venting and pressure relief, and devices for 

cooling or absorbing mechanical 

shocks. The conveyance, tie-down system, and auxiliary equipment may 

sometimes be designated as part of the 

packaging.

Quality assurance means a systematic 

program of controls and inspections applied by each person involved in the 

transport of radioactive material 

which provides confidence that a standard of safety prescribed in this subchapter is achieved in practice. 

Radiation level means the radiation 

dose-equivalent rate expressed in 

millisieverts per hour or mSv/h 

(millirems per hour or mrem/h). Neutron flux densities may be converted 

into radiation levels according to 

Table 1: 

TABLE 1—NEUTRON FLUENCE RATES TO BE REGARDED AS EQUIVALENT TO A RADIATION

LEVEL OF 0.01 MSV/H (1MREM/H) 1

Energy of neutron 

Flux density 

equivalent to 0.01 

mSv/h (1 mrem/h) 

neutrons per 

square centimeter 

per second (n/ 

cm 2/s)

Thermal (2.510E–8) MeV ........................ 272.0 

1 keV ....................................................... 272.0 

10 keV ..................................................... 281.0 

100 keV ................................................... 47.0 

500 keV ................................................... 11.0 

1 MeV ...................................................... 7.5 

5 MeV ...................................................... 6.4 

10 MeV .................................................... 6.7 

1Flux densities equivalent for energies between those listed 

in this table may be obtained by linear interpolation. 

Radioactive contents means a Class 7 

(radioactive) material, together with 

any contaminated or activated solids, 

liquids and gases within the packaging. 

647

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.403 

Radioactive instrument or article means

any manufactured instrument or article such as an instrument, clock, electronic tube or apparatus, or similar instrument or article having Class 7 (radioactive) material in gaseous or nondispersible solid form as a component 

part.

Radioactive material means any material containing radionuclides where 

both the activity concentration and 

the total activity in the consignment 

exceed the values specified in the table 

in §173.436 or values derived according 

to the instructions in §173.433. 

Special form Class 7 (radioactive) material means either an indispersible solid 

radioactive material or a sealed capsule containing radioactive material 

which satisfies the following conditions:

(1) It is either a single solid piece or 

a sealed capsule containing radioactive 

material that can be opened only by 

destroying the capsule; 

(2) The piece or capsule has at least 

one dimension not less than 5 mm (0.2 

in); and 

(3) It satisfies the test requirements 

of §173.469. Special form encapsulations 

designed in accordance with the requirements of §173.389(g) in effect on 

June 30, 1983 (see 49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 1982), and constructed prior to July 1, 1985 and special form encapsulations designed in 

accordance with the requirements of 

§173.403 in effect on March 31, 1996 (see 

49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 

1995), and constructed prior to April 1, 

1997, may continue to be used. Any 

other special form encapsulation must 

meet the requirements of this paragraph (3). 

Specific activity of a radionuclide 

means the activity of the radionuclide 

per unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of a material in which 

the radionuclide is essentially uniformly distributed is the activity per 

unit mass of the material. 

Surface Contaminated Object (SCO) 

means a solid object which is not itself 

radioactive but which has radioactive 

material distributed on its surface. 

SCO exists in two phases: 

(1) SCO-I: A solid object on which: 

(i) The non-fixed contamination on 

the accessible surface averaged over 300 

cm2 (or the area of the surface if less 

than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm2

(10¥4 microcurie/cm2 ) for beta and 

gamma and low toxicity alpha 

emitters, or 0.4 Bq/cm2 (10¥5

microcurie/cm2) for all other alpha 

emitters;

(ii) The fixed contamination on the 

accessible surface averaged over 300 

cm2 (or the area of the surface if less 

than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/

cm2 (1.0 microcurie/cm2) for beta and 

gamma and low toxicity alpha 

emitters, or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 (0.1

microcurie/cm2) for all other alpha 

emitters; and 

(iii) The non-fixed contamination 

plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 

cm2 (or the area of the surface if less 

than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/

cm2 (1 microcurie/cm2) for beta and 

gamma and low toxicity alpha 

emitters, or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 (0.1

microcurie/cm2) for all other alpha 

emitters.

(2) SCO-II: A solid object on which 

the limits for SCO-I are exceeded and 

on which: 

(i) The non-fixed contamination on 

the accessible surface averaged over 300 

cm2 (or the area of the surface if less 

than 300 cm2) does not exceed 400 Bq/ 

cm2 (10¥2 microcurie/cm2) for beta and 

gamma and low toxicity alpha 

emitters, or 40 Bq/cm2 (10¥3 microcurie/

cm2) for all other alpha emitters; 

(ii) The fixed contamination on the 

accessible surface averaged over 300 

cm2 (or the area of the surface if less 

than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/

cm2 (20 microcurie/cm2) for beta and 

gamma and low toxicity alpha 

emitters, or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 (2 microcuries/cm2) for all other alpha 

emitters; and 

(iii) The non-fixed contamination 

plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 

cm2 (or the area of the surface if less 

than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/

cm2 (20 microcuries/cm2) for beta and 

gamma and low toxicity alpha 

emitters, or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 (2 microcuries/cm2) for all other alpha 

emitters.

Transport index (TI) means the 

dimensionless number (rounded up to 

the next tenth) placed on the label of a 

648

§ 173.410 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

package, to designate the degree of 

control to be exercised by the carrier 

during transportation. The transport 

index is determined by multiplying the 

maximum radiation level in 

millisieverts (mSv) per hour at 1 m (3.3 

ft) from the external surface of the 

package by 100 (equivalent to the maximum radiation level in millirem per 

hour at 1 m (3.3 ft)). 

Type A quantity means a quantity of 

Class 7 (radioactive) material, the aggregate radioactivity which does not 

exceed A1 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) material of A2 for normal 

form Class 7 (radioactive) material, 

where A1 and A2 values are given in 

§173.435 or are determined in accordance with §173.433. 

Type B quantity means a quantity of 

material greater than a Type A quantity.

Unilateral approval means approval of 

a package design solely by the Competent Authority of the country of origin of the design. 

Unirradiated thorium means thorium 

containing not more than 10¥7 grams

uranium-233 per gram of thorium-232. 

Unirradiated uranium means uranium 

containing not more than 2 × 103 Bq of 

plutonium per gram of uranium-235, 

not more than 9 × 106 Bq of fission products per gram of uranium-235 and not 

more than 5 × 10¥3 g of uranium-236 per 

gram of uranium-235. 

Uranium—natural, depleted or enriched 

means the following: 

(1)(i) ‘‘Natural uranium’’ means 

chemically separated uranium containing the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes (approximately 99.28% uranium-238 and 0.72% 

uranium-235 by mass). 

(ii) ‘‘Depleted uranium’’ means uranium containing a lesser mass percentage of uranium-235 than in natural uranium.

(iii) ‘‘Enriched uranium’’ means uranium containing a greater mass percentage of uranium-235 than 0.72%. 

(2) In all cases listed in this definition, a very small mass percentage of 

uranium-234 is present. 

[69 FR 3670, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55116, Sept. 

13, 2004; 69 FR 58843, Oct. 1, 2004; 70 FR 56098, 

Sept. 23, 2005; 70 FR 73165, Dec. 9, 2005] 

§ 173.410 General design requirements. 

In addition to the requirements of 

subparts A and B of this part, each 

package used for the shipment of Class 

7 (radioactive) materials must be designed so that— 

(a) The package can be easily handled and properly secured in or on a 

conveyance during transport. 

(b) Each lifting attachment that is a 

structural part of the package must be 

designed with a minimum safety factor 

of three against yielding when used to 

lift the package in the intended manner, and it must be designed so that 

failure of any lifting attachment under 

excessive load would not impair the 

ability of the package to meet other 

requirements of this subpart. Any 

other structural part of the package 

which could be used to lift the package 

must be capable of being rendered inoperable for lifting the package during 

transport or must be designed with 

strength equivalent to that required 

for lifting attachments. 

(c) The external surface, as far as 

practicable, will be free from protruding features and will be easily decontaminated.

(d) The outer layer of packaging will 

avoid, as far as practicable, pockets or 

crevices where water might collect. 

(e) Each feature that is added to the 

package will not reduce the safety of 

the package. 

(f) The package will be capable of 

withstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance that may arise under normal 

conditions of transport without any deterioration in the effectiveness of the 

closing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a whole and without loosening 

or unintentionally releasing the nuts, 

bolts, or other securing devices even 

after repeated use (see §§173.24, 173.24a, 

and 173.24b). 

(g) The materials of construction of 

the packaging and any components or 

structure will be physically and chemically compatible with each other and 

with the package contents. The behavior of the packaging and the package 

contents under irradiation will be 

taken into account. 

(h) All valves through which the 

package contents could escape will be 

649

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.411 

protected against unauthorized operation.

(i) For transport by air— 

(1) The temperature of the accessible 

surfaces of the package will not exceed 

50 °C (122 °F) at an ambient temperature of 38 °C (100 °F) with no account 

taken for insulation; 

(2) The integrity of containment will 

not be impaired if the package is exposed to ambient temperatures ranging 

from ¥40 °C (¥40 °F) to +55 °C (131 °F);

and

(3) Packages containing liquid contents will be capable of withstanding, 

without leakage, an internal pressure 

that produces a pressure differential of 

not less than 95 kPa (13.8 lb/in2).

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20750, May 

8, 1996; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999] 

§ 173.411 Industrial packagings. 

(a) General. Each industrial packaging must comply with the requirements of this section which specifies 

packaging tests, and record retention 

applicable to Industrial Packaging 

Type 1 (IP–1), Industrial Packaging 

Type 2 (IP–2), and Industrial Packaging 

Type 3 (IP–3). 

(b) Industrial packaging certification 

and tests. (1) Each IP–1 must meet the 

general design requirements prescribed 

in §173.410. 

(2) Each IP–2 must meet the general 

design requirements prescribed in 

§173.410 and when subjected to the tests 

specified in §173.465(c) and (d) or evaluated against these tests by any of the 

methods authorized by §173.461(a), 

must prevent: 

(i) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and 

(ii) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or calculated at 

the external surfaces for the condition 

before the test. 

(3) Each IP–3 packaging must meet 

the requirements for an IP–1 and an 

IP–2, and must meet the requirements 

specified in §173.412(a) through (j). 

(4) Tank containers may be used as 

Industrial package Types 2 or 3 (Type 

IP–2 or Type IP–3) provided that: 

(i) They satisfy the requirements for 

Type IP–1 specified in paragraph (b)(1); 

(ii) They are designed to conform to 

the standards prescribed in Chapter 6.7, 

of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous 

Goods, (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), ‘‘Requirements for the Design, Construction, Inspection and 

Testing of Portable Tanks and Multiple-Element Gas Containers 

(MEGCs),’’ or other requirements at 

least equivalent to those standards; 

(iii) They are capable of withstanding 

a test pressure of 265 kPa (37.1 psig); 

and

(iv) They are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided 

shall be capable of withstanding the 

static and dynamic stresses resulting 

from handling and routine conditions 

of transport and of preventing a loss of 

shielding integrity which would result 

in more than a 20% increase in the radiation level at any external surface of 

the tank containers. 

(5) Tanks, other than tank containers, including DOT Specification 

IM 101 or IM 102 steel portable tanks, 

may be used as Industrial package 

Types 2 or 3 (Type IP–2) or (Type IP–3) 

for transporting LSA–I and LSA–II liquids and gases as prescribed in Table 6, 

provided that they conform to standards at least equivalent to those prescribed in paragraph (b)(4) of this section.

(6) Freight containers may be used as 

Industrial packages Types 2 or 3 (Type 

IP–2) or (Type IP–3) provided that: 

(i) The radioactive contents are restricted to solid materials; 

(ii) They satisfy the requirements for 

Type IP–1 specified in paragraph (b)(1); 

and

(iii) They are designed to conform to 

the standards prescribed in the International Organization for Standardization document ISO 1496–1: ‘‘Series 1 

Freight Containers—Specifications and 

Testing—Part 1: General Cargo Containers; excluding dimensions and ratings (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter). 

They shall be designed such that if subjected to the tests prescribed in that 

document and the accelerations occurring during routine conditions of transport they would prevent: 

(A) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and 

650

§ 173.412 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(B) Loss of shielding integrity which 

would result in more than a 20% increase in the radiation level at any external surface of the freight containers. 

(7) Metal intermediate bulk containers may also be used as Industrial 

package Type 2 or 3 (Type IP–2 or Type 

IP–3), provided that: 

(i) They satisfy the requirements for 

Type IP–1 specified in paragraph (b)(1); 

and

(ii) They are designed to conform to 

the standards prescribed in Chapter 6.5 

of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous 

Goods, (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), ‘‘Requirements for the Construction and Testing of Intermediate 

Bulk Containers,’’ for Packing Group I 

or II, and if they were subjected to the 

tests prescribed in that document, but 

with the drop test conducted in the 

most damaging orientation, they would 

prevent:

(A) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and 

(B) Loss of shielding integrity which 

would result in more than a 20% increase in the radiation level at any external surface of the intermediate bulk 

containers.

(c) Except for IP–1 packagings, each 

offeror of an industrial package must 

maintain on file for at least one year 

after the latest shipment, and shall 

provide to the Associate Administrator 

on request, complete documentation of 

tests and an engineering evaluation or 

comparative data showing that the 

construction methods, packaging design, and materials of construction 

comply with that specification. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20750, May 

8, 1996; 66 FR 45379, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 

75747, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004; 

69 FR 55117, Sept. 13, 2004; 69 FR 58843, Oct. 1, 

2004; 72 FR 55693, Oct. 1, 2007] 

§ 173.412 Additional design requirements for Type A packages. 

In addition to meeting the general 

design requirements prescribed in 

§173.410, each Type A packaging must 

be designed so that— 

(a) The outside of the packaging incorporates a feature, such as a seal, 

that is not readily breakable, and that, 

while intact, is evidence that the package has not been opened. In the case of 

packages shipped in closed transport 

vehicles in exclusive use, the cargo 

compartment, instead of the individual 

packages, may be sealed. 

(b) The smallest external dimension 

of the package is not less than 10 cm (4 

inches).

(c) Containment and shielding is 

maintained during transportation and 

storage in a temperature range of ¥40

°C (¥40 °F) to 70 °C (158 °F). Special attention shall be given to liquid contents and to the potential degradation 

of the packaging materials within the 

temperature range. 

(d) The packaging must include a 

containment system securely closed by 

a positive fastening device that cannot 

be opened unintentionally or by pressure that may arise within the package 

during normal transport. Special form 

Class 7 (radioactive) material, as demonstrated in accordance with §173.469, 

may be considered as a component of 

the containment system. If the containment system forms a separate unit 

of the package, it must be securely 

closed by a positive fastening device 

that is independent of any other part of 

the package. 

(e) For each component of the containment system account is taken, 

where applicable, of radiolytic decomposition of materials and the generation of gas by chemical reaction and 

radiolysis.

(f) The containment system will retain its radioactive contents under the 

reduction of ambient pressure to 25 

kPa (3.6 psi). 

(g) Each valve, other than a pressure 

relief device, is provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage. 

(h) Any radiation shield that encloses 

a component of the packaging specified 

as part of the containment system will 

prevent the unintentional escape of 

that component from the shield. 

(i) Failure of any tie-down attachment that is a structural part of the 

packaging, under both normal and accident conditions, must not impair the 

ability of the package to meet other 

requirements of this subpart. 

(j) When evaluated against the performance requirements of this section 

and the tests specified in §173.465 or 

using any of the methods authorized by 

651

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.416 

§173.461(a), the packaging will prevent—

(1) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and 

(2) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or calculated at 

the external surfaces for the condition 

before the test. 

(k) Each packaging designed for liquids will— 

(1) Be designed to provide for ullage 

to accommodate variations in temperature of the contents, dynamic effects 

and filling dynamics; 

(2) Meet the conditions prescribed in 

paragraph (j) of this section when subjected to the tests specified in §173.466 

or evaluated against these tests by any 

of the methods authorized by 

§173.461(a); and 

(3) Either— 

(i) Have sufficient suitable absorbent 

material to absorb twice the volume of 

the liquid contents. The absorbent material must be compatible with the 

package contents and suitably positioned to contact the liquid in the 

event of leakage; or 

(ii) Have a containment system composed of primary inner and secondary 

outer containment components designed to assure retention of the liquid 

contents within the secondary outer 

component in the event that the primary inner component leaks. 

(l) Each package designed for gases, 

other than tritium not exceeding 40 

TBq (1080Ci) or noble gases not exceeding the A2 value appropriate for the 

noble gas, will be able to prevent loss 

or dispersal of contents when the package is subjected to the tests prescribed 

in §173.466 or evaluated against these 

tests by any of the methods authorized 

by §173.461(a). 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended by 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 

57633, Oct. 6, 2003] 

§ 173.413 Requirements for Type B 

packages. 

Except as provided in §173.416, each 

Type B(U) or Type B(M) package must 

be designed and constructed to meet 

the applicable requirements specified 

in 10 CFR part 71. 

§ 173.415 Authorized Type A packages. 

The following packages are authorized for shipment if they do not contain quantities exceeding A1 or A2 as

appropriate:

(a) DOT Specification 7A (see §178.350 

of this subchapter) Type A general 

packaging. Each offeror of a Specification 7A package must maintain on file 

for at least one year after the latest 

shipment, and shall provide to DOT on 

request, complete documentation of 

tests and an engineering evaluation or 

comparative data showing that the 

construction methods, packaging design, and materials of construction 

comply with that specification. 

(b) Any other Type A packaging that 

also meets the applicable standards for 

fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71 and 

is used in accordance with §173.471. 

(c) Any Type B(U) or Type B(M) 

packaging authorized pursuant to 

§173.416. 

(d) Any foreign-made packaging that 

meets the standards in ‘‘IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material No. TS-R-1’’ (IBR, see 

§171.7 of this subchapter) and bears the 

marking ‘‘Type A’’. Such packagings 

may be used for domestic and export 

shipments of Class 7 (radioactive) materials provided the offeror obtains the 

applicable documentation of tests and 

engineering evaluations and maintains 

the documentation on file in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section. 

These packagings must conform with 

requirements of the country of origin 

(as indicated by the packaging marking) and the IAEA regulations applicable to Type A packagings. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended at 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 

75742, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004; 

69 FR 55117, Sept. 13, 2004] 

§ 173.416 Authorized Type B packages. 

Each of the following packages is authorized for shipment of quantities exceeding A1 or A2, as appropriate: 

(a) Any Type B(U) or Type B(M) 

packaging that meets the applicable 

requirements of 10 CFR part 71 and 

that has been approved by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission may be 

shipped pursuant to §173.471. 

(b) Any Type B(U) or B(M) packaging 

that meets the applicable requirements 

652

§ 173.417 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

in ‘‘IAEA Regulations for the Safe 

Transport of Radioactive Material, No. 

TS-R-1’’ (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter) and for which the foreign 

Competent Authority Certificate has 

been revalidated by DOT pursuant to 

§173.473. These packagings are authorized only for export and import shipments.

(c) Continued use of an existing Type 

B packaging constructed to DOT Specification 6M, 20WC, or 21WC is authorized until October 1, 2008 if it conforms 

in all aspects to the requirements of 

this subchapter in effect on October 1, 

2003.

[69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004] 

§ 173.417 Authorized fissile materials 

packages. 

(a) Except as provided in §173.453, 

fissile materials containing not more 

than A1 or A2 as appropriate, must be 

packaged in one of the following packagings:

(1)(i) Any packaging listed in 

§173.415, limited to the Class 7 (radioactive) materials specified in 10 CFR 

part 71, subpart C; 

(ii) Any Type AF, Type B(U)F, or 

Type B(M)F packaging that meets the 

applicable standards for fissile material packages in 10 CFR part 71; or 

(iii) Any Type AF, Type B(U)F, or 

Type B(M)F packaging that meets the 

applicable requirements for fissile material packages in Section VI of the 

International Atomic Energy Agency 

‘‘Regulations for the Safe Transport of 

Radioactive Material, No. TS-R-1 (IBR, 

see §171.7 of this subchapter),’’ and for 

which the foreign Competent Authority certificate has been revalidated by 

the U.S. Competent Authority, in accordance with §173.473. These packages 

are authorized only for export and import shipments. 

(2) A residual ‘‘heel’’ of enriched solid 

uranium hexafluoride may be transported without a protective overpack 

in any metal cylinder that meets both 

the requirements of §173.415 and 

§178.350 of this subchapter for Specification 7A Type A packaging, and the 

requirements of §173.420 for packagings 

containing greater than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride. Any such shipment 

must be made in accordance with Table 

2, as follows: 

TABLE 2—ALLOWABLE CONTENT OF URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE (UF6 ‘‘HEEL’’ IN A SPECIFICATION 7A

CYLINDER)

Maximum cylinder di- ameterCylinder volume Maximum Ura- nium 235-en- richment

(weight)

percent

Maximum ‘‘Heel’’ weight per cylinder 

Centimeters Inches Liters Cubic feet 

UF6 Uranium-235

kg lb kg lb 

12.7 5 8.8 0.311 100.0 0.045 0.1 0.031 0.07 

20.3 8 39.0 1.359 12.5 0.227 0.5 0.019 0.04 

30.5 12 68.0 2.410 5.0 0.454 1.0 0.015 0.03 

76.0 30 725.0 25.64 5.0 11.3 25.0 0.383 0.84 

122.0 48 3,084.0 1 108.9 4.5 22.7 50.0 0.690 1.52 

122.0 48 4,041.0 2 142.7 4.5 22.7 50.0 0.690 1.52 

1 10 ton. 

2 14 ton 

(3) DOT Specification 20PF–1, 20PF–2, 

or 20PF–3 (see §178.356 of this subchapter), or Specification 21PF–1A, 

21PF–1B, or 21PF–2 (see §178.358 of this 

subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated 

overpack with snug fittings inner 

metal cylinders, meeting all requirements of §§173.24, 173.410, 173.412, and 

173.420 and the following: 

(i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance 

with United States Enrichment Corporation Report No. USEC–651 or ANSI 

N14.1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter); and 

(ii) Quantities of uranium 

hexafluoride are authorized as shown 

in Table 3 of this section, with each 

package assigned a minimum criticality safety index as also shown. 

(b) Fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials with radioactive content exceeding A1 or A2 must be packaged in one of 

the following packagings: 

(1) Type B(U), or Type B(M) packaging that meets the standards for 

653

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.418 

packaging of fissile materials in 10 

CFR part 71, and is approved by the 

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission 

and used in accordance with §173.471; 

(2) Type B(U) or Type B(M) packaging that also meets the applicable 

requirements for fissile material packaging in Section VI of the International Atomic Energy Agency ‘‘Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, No. TS-R-1,’’ and 

for which the foreign Competent Authority certificate has been revalidated 

by the U.S. Competent Authority in accordance with §173.473. These packagings are authorized only for import 

and export shipments; or 

(3) DOT Specifications 20PF–1, 20PF– 

2, or 20PF–3 (see §178.356 of this subchapter), for DOT Specifications 21PF– 

1A or 21PF–1B (see §178.356 of this subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated overpack with snug fitting inner metal cylinders, meeting all requirements of 

§§173.24, 173.410, and 173.412, and the following:

(i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance 

with United States Enrichment Corporation Report No. USEC–651 or ANSI 

N14.1; and 

(ii) Quantities of uranium 

hexafluoride are authorized as shown 

in Table 3, with each package assigned 

a minimum criticality safety index as 

also shown: 

TABLE 3—AUTHORIZED QUANTITIES OF URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE

Protective overpack 

specification number 

Maximum inner cyclinder diameterMaximum weight of UF6 contentsMaximum U– 

235 enrichment (weight/ 

percent)

Minimum criticality safety index Centimeters Inches Kilograms Pounds 

20PF–1 .......................... 12.7 5 25 55 100.0 0.1 

20PF–2 .......................... 20.3 8 116 255 12.5 0.4 

20PF–3 .......................... 30.5 12 209 460 5.0 1.1 

21PF–1A1 or 21PF– 

1B1,276.0 ................... 230 2,250 4,950 5.0 5.0 

21PF–1A1 or 21PF–1B1 376.0 330 2,282 5,020 5.0 5.0 

21PF–21 ........................ 276.0 230 2,250 4,950 5.0 5.0 

21PF–21 ........................ 376.0 330 2,282 5,020 5.0 5.0 

1For 76 cm (30 in) cylinders, the maximum H/U atomic ratio is 0.088. 

2 Model 30A inner cylinder (reference USEC–651). 

3 Model 30B inner cylinder (reference USEC–651). 

(c) Continued use of an existing 

fissile material packaging constructed 

to DOT Specification 6L, 6M, or 1A2, is 

authorized until October 1, 2008 if it 

conforms in all respects to the requirements of this subchapter in effect on 

October 1, 2003. 

[69 FR 3673, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55118, Sept. 

13, 2004] 

§ 173.418 Authorized packages— 

pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) 

materials. 

Pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials, as referenced in the §172.101 

table of this subchapter, in quantities 

not exceeding A2 per package must be 

transported in DOT Specification 7A 

packagings constructed of materials 

that will not react with, nor be decomposed by, the contents. Contents of the 

package must be— 

(a) In solid form and must not be 

fissile unless excepted by §173.453; 

(b) Contained in sealed and corrosion 

resistant receptacles with positive closures (friction or slip-fit covers or stoppers are not authorized); 

(c) Free of water and contaminants 

that would increase the reactivity of 

the material; and 

(d) Inerted to prevent self-ignition 

during transport by either— 

(1) Mixing with large volumes of 

inerting materials, such as graphite, 

dry sand, or other suitable inerting 

material, or blended into a matrix of 

hardened concrete; or 

(2) Filling the innermost receptacle 

with an appropriate inert gas or liquid. 

654

§ 173.419 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(e) Pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) 

materials transported by aircraft must 

be packaged in Type B packages. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended at 68 FR 45038, July 31, 2003; 70 FR 

56098, Sept. 23, 2005] 

§ 173.419 Authorized packages—oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

(a) An oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) 

material, as referenced in the §172.101 

table of this subchapter, is authorized 

in quantities not exceeding an A2 per

package, in a DOT Specification 7A 

package provided that— 

(1) The contents are: 

(i) Not fissile; 

(ii) Packed in inside packagings of 

glass, metal or compatible plastic; and 

(iii) Cushioned with a material that 

will not react with the contents; and 

(2) The outside packaging is made of 

wood, metal, or plastic. 

(b) The package must be capable of 

meeting the applicable test requirements of §173.465 without leakage of 

contents.

(c) For shipment by air, the maximum quantity in any package may 

not exceed 11.3 kg (25 pounds). 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended at 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001] 

§ 173.420 Uranium hexafluoride 

(fissile, fissile excepted and nonfissile). 

(a) In addition to any other applicable requirements of this subchapter, 

quantities greater than 0.1 kg of fissile, 

fissile excepted or non-fissile uranium 

hexafluoride must be offered for transportation as follows: 

(1) Before initial filling and during 

periodic inspection and test, packagings must be cleaned in accordance 

with American National Standard 

N14.1 (IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter).

(2) Packagings must be designed, fabricated, inspected, tested and marked 

in accordance with— 

(i) American National Standard N14.1 

in effect at the time the packaging was 

manufactured;

(ii) Specifications for Class DOT-106A 

multi-unit tank car tanks (see §§179.300 

and 179.301 of this subchapter); or 

(iii) Section VIII of the ASME Code 

(IBR, see §171.7 of this subchapter), 

provided the packaging— 

(A) Was manufactured on or before 

June 30, 1987; 

(B) Conforms to the edition of the 

ASME Code in effect at the time the 

packaging was manufactured; 

(C) Is used within its original design 

limitations; and 

(D) Has shell and head thicknesses 

that have not decreased below the minimum value specified in the following 

table:

Packaging model 

Minimum thickness; millimeters 

(inches)

1S, 2S ...................................................... 1.58 (0.062) 

5A, 5B, 8A ............................................... 3.17 (0.125) 

12A, 12B .................................................. 4.76 (0.187) 

30B .......................................................... 7.93 (0.312) 

48A, F, X, and Y ...................................... 12.70 (0.500) 

48T, O, OM, OM Allied, HX, H, and G ... 6.35 (0.250) 

(3) Each package shall be designed so 

that it will: 

(i) withstand a hydraulic test at an 

internal pressure of at least 1.4 MPa 

(200 psi) without leakage; 

(ii) withstand the test specified in 

§173.465(c) without loss or dispersal of 

the uranium hexafluoride; and 

(iii) withstand the test specified in 10 

CFR 71.73(c)(4) without rupture of the 

containment system. 

(4) Uranium hexafluoride must be in 

solid form. 

(5) The volume of solid uranium 

hexafluoride, except solid depleted uranium hexafluoride, at 20 °C (68 °F) may 

not exceed 61% of the certified volumetric capacity of the packaging. The 

volume of solid depleted uranium 

hexafluoride at 20 °C (68 °F) may not 

exceed 62% of the certified volumetric 

capacity of the packaging. 

(6) The pressure in the package at 20 

°C (68 °F) must be less than 101.3 kPa 

(14.8 psig). 

(b) Each packaging for uranium 

hexafluoride must be periodically inspected, tested, marked and otherwise 

conform with the American National 

Standard N14.1. 

(c) Each repair to a packaging for 

uranium hexafluoride must be performed in accordance with the American National Standard N14.1. 

(d) Non-fissile uranium hexafluoride, 

in quantities of less than 0.1 kg, may 

655

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.424 

be shipped in packaging that meets 

§§173.24, 173.24a, and 173.410. 

[69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55118, Sept. 

13, 2004] 

§ 173.421 Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

(a) A Class 7 (radioactive) material 

with an activity per package which 

does not exceed the limited quantity 

package limits specified in Table 4 in 

§173.425, and its packaging, are excepted from requirements in this subchapter for specification packaging, labeling, marking (except for the UN 

identification number marking requirement described in §173.422(a)), and 

if not a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, shipping papers, and the 

requirements of this subpart if: 

(1) Each package meets the general 

design requirements of §173.410; 

(2) The radiation level at any point 

on the external surface of the package 

does not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 

mrem/ hour); 

(3) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on the 

external surface of the package does 

not exceed the limits specified in 

§173.443(a); 

(4) The outside of the inner packaging or, if there is no inner packaging, 

the outside of the packaging itself 

bears the marking ‘‘Radioactive’’; 

(5) The package does not contain 

fissile material unless excepted by 

§173.453. 

(6) The material is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in accordance with §173.422. 

(b) A limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is a hazardous 

substance or a hazardous waste, is not 

subject to the provisions in §172.203(d) 

or §172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended at 69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004; 70 FR 

56098, Sept. 23, 2005] 

§ 173.422 Additional requirements for 

excepted packages containing Class 

7 (radioactive) materials. 

An excepted package of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is prepared for 

shipment under the provisions of 

§173.421, §173.424, §173.426, or §173.428 is 

not subject to any additional requirements of this subchapter, except for 

the following: 

(a) The outside of each package must 

be marked with the four digit UN identification number for the material preceded by the letters UN, as shown in 

column (4) of the Hazardous Materials 

Table in §172.101 of this subchapter; 

(b) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this 

subchapter, pertaining to the reporting 

of incidents; 

(c) Sections 174.750, 175.700(b), and 

176.710 of this subchapter (depending on 

the mode of transportation), pertaining 

to the reporting of decontamination; 

(d) The training requirements of subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter; 

and

(e) For materials that meet the definition of a hazardous substance or a 

hazardous waste, the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of 

this subchapter. 

[69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004] 

§ 173.423 Requirements for multiple 

hazard limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) materials. 

(a) Except as provided in §173.4, when 

a limited quantity radioactive material meets the definition of another 

hazard class or division, it must be— 

(1) Classed for the additional hazard; 

(2) Packaged to conform with the requirements specified in §173.421(a)(1) 

through (a)(5) or §173.424(a) through 

(g), as appropriate; and 

(3) Offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements applicable to the hazard for which it is 

classed.

(b) A limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) material which is classed other 

than Class 7 in accordance with this 

subchapter is excepted from the requirements of §§173.422(a), 172.203(d), 

and 172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter if 

the entry ‘‘Limited quantity radioactive material’’ appears on the shipping paper in association with the 

basic description. 

§ 173.424 Excepted packages for radioactive instruments and articles. 

A radioactive instrument or article 

and its packaging are excepted from requirements in this subchapter for specification packaging, labeling, marking 

656

§ 173.425 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

(except for the UN identification number marking requirement described in 

§173.422(a)), and if not a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, shipping papers and the requirements of this subpart if: 

(a) Each package meets the general 

design requirements of §173.410; 

(b) The activity of the instrument or 

article does not exceed the relevant 

limit listed in Table 4 in §173.425; 

(c) The total activity per package 

does not exceed the relevant limit listed in Table 4 in §173.425; 

(d) The radiation level at 10 cm (4 in) 

from any point on the external surface 

of any unpackaged instrument or article does not exceed 0.1 mSv/hour (10 

mrem/hour);

(e) The active material is completely 

enclosed by non-active components (a 

device performing the sole function of 

containing radioactive material shall 

not be considered to be an instrument 

or manufactured article); 

(f) The radiation level at any point 

on the external surface of a package 

bearing the article or instrument does 

not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 mrem/ 

hour), or, for exclusive use domestic 

shipments, 0.02 mSv/hour (2 mrem/ 

hour);

(g) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on the 

external surface of the package does 

not exceed the limits specified in 

§173.443(a); 

(h) Except as provided in §173.426, the 

package does not contain more than 15 

g of uranium-235; and 

(i) The package is otherwise prepared 

for shipment as specified in §173.422. 

[69 FR 3675, Jan. 26, 2004] 

§ 173.425 Table of activity limits—excepted quantities and articles. 

The limits applicable to instruments, 

articles, and limited quantities subject 

to exceptions under §§173.421 and 173.424 

are set forth in table 4 as follows: 

TABLE 4—ACTIVITY LIMITS FOR LIMITED QUANTITIES, INSTRUMENTS, AND ARTICLES

Nature of contents 

Instruments and articles 

Limited quantity package limits 1

Limits for each instrument or article 1 Package limits 1

Solids:

Special form ........................................ 10¥2 A1 A1 10¥3 A1

Normal form ........................................ 10¥2 A2 A2 10¥3 A2

Liquids:

Tritiated water: 

<0.0037 TBq/L (0.1 Ci/L) ...... 37 TBq (1,000 Ci) 

0.0037 TBq to 0.037 TBq/L 

(0.1 Ci to 1.0 Ci/L).

3.7 TBq (100 Ci) 

>0.037 TBq/L (1.0 Ci/L) ........ 0.037 TBq (1.0 Ci) 

Other Liquids ....................................... 10¥3 A2 10¥1 A2 10¥4 A2

Gases:

Tritium 2 ............................................... 2 × 10¥2 A2 2 × 10¥1 A2 2 × 10¥2 A2

Special form ........................................ 10¥3 A1 10¥2 A1 10¥3 A1

Normal form ........................................ 10¥3 A2 10¥2 A2 10¥3 A2

1For mixtures of radionuclides see § 173.433(d). 

2These values also apply to tritium in activated luminous paint and tritium adsorbed on solid carriers. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20751, May 8, 

1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR 3676, 

Jan. 26, 2004] 

§ 173.426 Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or 

thorium. 

A manufactured article in which the 

sole Class 7 (radioactive) material content is natural uranium, unirradiated 

depleted uranium or natural thorium, 

and its packaging, are excepted from 

the requirements in this subchapter for 

specification packaging, labeling, 

marking (except for the UN identification number marking requirement described in §173.422(a)), and if not a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, 

shipping papers and the requirements 

of this subpart if: 

(a) Each package meets the general 

design requirements of §173.410; 

657

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.427 

(b) The outer surface of the uranium 

or thorium is enclosed in an inactive 

sheath made of metal or other durable 

protective material; 

(c) The conditions specified in 

§173.421(a) (2), (3) and (4) are met; and 

(d) The article is otherwise prepared 

for shipment as specified in §173.422. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20752, May 

8, 1996; 69 FR 3676, Jan. 26, 2004] 

§ 173.427 Transport requirements for 

low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 

(radioactive) materials and surface 

contaminated objects (SCO). 

(a) In addition to other applicable requirements specified in this subchapter, LSA materials and SCO, unless excepted by paragraph (c) or (d) of 

this section, must be packaged in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section and must be transported in accordance with the following conditions: 

(1) The external dose rate may not 

exceed an external radiation level of 10 

mSv/h (1 rem/h) at 3 m from the 

unshielded material; 

(2) The quantity of LSA and SCO material in any single conveyance may 

not exceed the limits specified in Table 

5;

(3) LSA material and SCO that are or 

contain fissile material must conform 

to the applicable requirements of 

§173.453; 

(4) Packaged and unpackaged Class 7 

(radioactive) materials must conform 

to the contamination control limits 

specified in §173.443; 

(5) External radiation levels may not 

exceed those specified in §173.441; and 

(6) For LSA material and SCO consigned as exclusive use: 

(i) Shipments shall be loaded by the 

consignor and unloaded by the consignee from the conveyance or freight 

container in which originally loaded; 

(ii) There may be no loose radioactive material in the conveyance; 

however, when the conveyance is the 

packaging, there may not be any leakage of radioactive material from the 

conveyance;

(iii) Packaged and unpackaged Class 

7 (radioactive) materials must be 

braced so as to prevent shifting of lading under conditions normally incident 

to transportation; 

(iv) Specific instructions for maintenance of exclusive use shipment controls shall be provided by the offeror to 

the carrier. Such instructions must be 

included with the shipping paper information;

(v) Except for shipments of 

unconcentrated uranium or thorium 

ores, the transport vehicle must be 

placarded in accordance with subpart F 

of part 172 of this subchapter; 

(vi) For domestic transportation 

only, packaged and unpackaged Class 7 

(radioactive) materials containing less 

than an A2 quantity are excepted from 

the marking and labeling requirements 

of this subchapter. However, the exterior of each package or unpackaged 

Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be 

stenciled or otherwise marked ‘‘RADIOACTIVE—LSA’’ or ‘‘RADIOACTIVE—SCO’’, as appropriate, and 

packages or unpackaged Class 7 (radioactive) materials that contain a hazardous substance must be stenciled or 

otherwise marked with the letters 

‘‘RQ’’ in association with the description in this paragraph (a)(6)(vi); and 

(vii) Transportation by aircraft is 

prohibited except when transported in 

an industrial package in accordance 

with Table 6 of this section, or in an 

authorized Type A or Type B package. 

(b) Except as provided in paragraph 

(c) of this section, LSA material and 

SCO must be packaged as follows: 

(1) In an industrial package (IP–1, IP– 

2 or IP–3; §173.411), subject to the limitations of Table 6; 

(2) In a DOT Specification 7A 

(§178.350 of this subchapter) Type A 

package;

(3) In any Type B(U) or B(M) packaging authorized pursuant to §173.416; 

(4) In a packaging which meets the 

requirements of §§173.24, 173.24a, and 

173.410, but only for domestic transportation of an exclusive use shipment 

that is less than an A2 quantity.

(5) For exclusive use transport of liquid LSA-I only, in either: 

(i) Specification 103CW, 111A60W7 

(§§173.31, and 179.201–1 to 179.201–11 of 

this subchapter) tank cars. Bottom 

openings in tanks are prohibited; or 

(ii) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC 

312, MC 331 or DOT 412 (§178.348 or 

§178.337 of this subchapter) cargo tank 

motor vehicles. Bottom outlets are not 

658

§ 173.428 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

authorized. Trailer-on-flat-car service 

is not authorized. 

(c) LSA material and SCO in groups 

LSA-I and SCO-I may be transported 

unpackaged under the following conditions:

(1) All unpackaged material, other 

than ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides, shall be transported in such a manner that under 

normal conditions of transport there 

will be no escape of the radioactive 

contents from the conveyance nor will 

there be any loss of shielding; 

(2) Each conveyance must be under 

exclusive use, except when only transporting SCO-I on which the contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than 4.0 

Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters 

and low toxicity alpha emitters and 0.4 

Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters; 

and

(3) For SCO-I where it is suspected 

that non-fixed contamination exists on 

inaccessible surfaces in excess of the 

values specified in paragraph (c)(2) of 

this section, measures shall be taken 

to ensure that the radioactive material 

is not released into the conveyance or 

to the environment. 

(d) LSA and SCO that exceed the 

packaging limits in this section must 

be packaged in accordance with 10 CFR 

part 71. 

(e) Tables 5 and 6 are as follows: 

TABLE 5—CONVEYANCE ACTIVITY LIMITS FOR

LSA MATERIAL AND SCO

Nature of material 

Activity

limit for 

conveyances

1. LSA-I ................................................................ No limit. 

2. LSA-II and LSA-III; Non-combustible solids .... No limit. 

3. LSA-II and LSA-III; Combustible solids and all 

liquids and gases.

100 A2

4. SCO ................................................................. 100 A2

TABLE 6—INDUSTRIAL PACKAGE INTEGRITY

REQUIREMENTS FOR LSA MATERIAL AND SCO

Contents

Industrial packaging type 

Exclusive

use

shipment

Non

exclusive

use

shipment

1. LSA-I: 

Solid ............................................ IP–1 ... IP–1 

TABLE 6—INDUSTRIAL PACKAGE INTEGRITY REQUIREMENTS FOR LSA MATERIAL AND SCO—

Continued

Contents

Industrial packaging type 

Exclusive

use

shipment

Non

exclusive

use

shipment

Liquid ........................................... IP–1 ... IP–2 

2. LSA-II: 

Solid ............................................ IP–2 ... IP–2 

Liquid and gas ............................ IP–2 ... IP–3 

3. LSA-III ................................................... IP–2 ... IP–3 

4. SCO-I .................................................... IP–1 ... IP–1 

5. SCO-II ................................................... IP–2 ... IP–2 

[69 FR 3676, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55118, Sept. 

13, 2004; 69 FR 58843, Oct. 1, 2004; 70 FR 56098, 

Sept. 23, 2005] 

§ 173.428 Empty Class 7 (radioactive) 

materials packaging. 

A packaging which previously contained Class 7 (radioactive) materials 

and has been emptied of contents as far 

as practical, is excepted from the shipping paper and marking (except for the 

UN identification number marking requirement described in §173.422(a)) requirements of this subchapter, provided that— 

(a) The packaging meets the requirements of §173.421(a) (2), (3), and (5) of 

this subpart; 

(b) The packaging is in unimpaired 

condition and is securely closed so that 

there will be no leakage of Class 7 (radioactive) material under conditions 

normally incident to transportation; 

(c) The outer surface of any uranium 

or thorium in its structure is covered 

with an inactive sheath made of metal 

or some other substantial material; 

(d) Internal contamination does not 

exceed 100 times the limits in 

§173.443(a); 

(e) Any labels previously applied in 

conformance with subpart E of part 172 

of this subchapter are removed, obliterated, or covered and the ‘‘Empty’’ label 

prescribed in §172.450 of this subchapter 

is affixed to the packaging; and 

(f) The packaging is prepared for 

shipment as specified in §173.422. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended by Amdt. 173–244, 61 FR 20752, May 

8, 1996; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 69 FR 3677, 

Jan. 26, 2004] 

659

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.433 

§ 173.431 Activity limits for Type A and 

Type B packages. 

(a) Except for LSA material and SCO, 

a Type A package may not contain a 

quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) materials greater than A1 for special form 

Class 7 (radioactive) material or A2 for

normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material as listed in §173.435, or, for Class 

7 (radioactive) materials not listed in 

§173.435, as determined in accordance 

with §173.433. 

(b) The limits on activity contained 

in a Type B(U) or Type B(M) package 

are those prescribed in §§173.416 and 

173.417, or in the applicable approval 

certificate under §§173.471, 173.472 or 

173.473.

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as 

amended at 69 FR 3677, Jan. 26, 2004] 

§ 173.433 Requirements for determining basic radionuclide values, 

and for the listing of radionuclides 

on shipping papers and labels. 

(a) For individual radionuclides listed in the table in §173.435 and §173.436: 

(1) A1 and A2 values are given in the 

table in §173.435; and 

(2) Activity concentration exemption 

values and consignment activity exemption values are given in the table 

in §173.436. 

(b) For individual radionuclides 

which are not listed in the tables in 

§173.435 or §173.436: 

(1) the radionuclide values in Tables 7 

or 8 of this section may be used; or 

(2) other basic radionuclide values 

may be used provided they are first approved by the Associate Administrator 

or, for international transport, multilateral approval is obtained from the 

pertinent Competent Authorities. 

(c) In calculating A1 or A2 values for 

a radionuclide not listed in the table in 

§173.435: 

(1) Where the chemical form of each 

radionuclide is known, it is permissible 

to use the A2 value related to its solubility class as recommended by the 

International Commission on Radiological Protection, if the chemical 

forms under both normal and accident 

conditions of transport are taken into 

consideration.

(2) A single radioactive decay chain 

in which the radionuclides are present 

in their naturally-occurring proportions, and in which no daughter nuclide 

has a half life either longer than 10 

days or longer than that of the parent 

nuclide, will be considered as a single 

radionuclide, and the activity to be 

taken into account and the A1 or A2

value to be applied will be those corresponding to the parent nuclide of 

that chain. Otherwise, the parent and 

daughter nuclides will be considered as 

a mixture of different nuclides. 

(d) Mixtures of radionuclides whose 

identities and respective activities are 

known must conform to the following 

conditions:

(1) For special form Class 7 (radioactive) material, the activity which 

may be transported in a Type A package must satisfy: 

B(i)

A (i) i 1

∑ ≤ 1

Where:

B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i in special form; and 

A1 (i) is the A1 value for radionuclide i. 

(2) For normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material, the activity which 

may be transported in a Type A package must satisfy: 

C(j)

A (j) j 2

∑ ≤ 1

Where:

C(j) is the activity of radionuclide j in normal form; and 

A2(j) is the A2 value for radionuclide j. 

(3) If the package contains both special and normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material, the activity which 

may be transported in a Type A package must satisfy: 

B(i)

A (i)

+ C(j)

A (j) i 1 2 j

∑ ∑ ≤ 1

Where:

The symbols are defined as in paragraphs 

(d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section. 

(4) Alternatively, the A1 value for a 

mixture of special form material may 

be determined as follows: 


ER26JA04.001</MATH> ER26JA04.002</MATH> ER26JA04.003</MATH>
660

§ 173.433 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

A for mixture = f(i)

A

1

i 1

1

∑ ( )i

Where:

f(i) is the fraction of activity for radionuclide i in the mixture; and 

A1(i) is the appropriate A1 value for radionuclide i. 

(5) Alternatively, the A2 value for 

mixtures of normal form material may 

be determined as follows: 

A for mixture = f(i)

A

2

i 2

1

∑ ( )i

Where:

f(i) is the fraction of activity for normal 

form radionuclide i in the mixture; and 

A2(i) is the appropriate A2 value for radionuclide i. 

(6) The exempt activity concentration for mixtures of nuclides may be 

determined as follows: 

Exempt activity concentration limit for mixture = 1

i

f i

A i

( ) ∑[ ]( )

Where:

f(i) is the fraction of activity concentration 

of nuclide i in the mixture; and [A](i) is the 

activity concentration for exempt material 

containing nuclide i. 

(7) The activity limit for an exempt 

consignment for mixtures of nuclides 

may be determined as follows: 

Exempt consignment activity limit for mixture = f(i)

i

1

∑ A i( )

Where:

f(i) is the fraction of activity of nuclide i in 

the mixture; and 

A(i) is the activity limit for exempt consignments for nuclide i. 

(e) When the identity of each nuclide 

is known but the individual activities 

of some of the radionuclides are not 

known, the radionuclides may be 

grouped and the lowest A1 or A2 value,

as appropriate, for the radionuclides in 

each group may be used in applying the 

formulas in paragraphs (d)(1) through 

(d)(5) of this section. Groups may be 

based on the total alpha activity and 

the total beta/gamma activity when 

these are known, using the lowest A1 or

A2 values for the alpha emitters or 

beta/gamma emitters, respectively. 

(f) When the identity of each nuclide 

is known but the individual activities 

of some of the radionuclides are not 

known, the radionuclides may be 

grouped and the lowest [A] (activity 

concentration for exempt material) or 

A (activity limit for exempt consignment) value, as appropriate, for the 

radionuclides in each group may be 

used in applying the formulas in paragraphs (d)(6) and (d)(7) of this section. 

Groups may be based on the total alpha 

activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the 

lowest [A] or A values for the alpha 

emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.

(g) Shipping papers and labeling. For

mixtures of radionuclides, the radionuclides (n) that must be shown on 

shipping papers and labels in accordance with §§172.203 and 172.403 of this 

subchapter, respectively, must be determined on the basis of the following 

formula:

a

A

a

A

(i)

(i)

(i)

i=1 (i)

n+m

i=1

n

∑ ≥ 0 95 . ∑


ER26JA04.004</MATH> ER26JA04.005</MATH> ER13se04.013</MATH> ER26JA04.007</MATH> ER26JA04.008</MATH>
661

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.435 

Where:

n + m represents all the radionuclides in the 

mixture;

m are the radionuclides that do not need to 

be considered; 

a(i) is the activity of radionuclide i in the 

mixture; and 

A(i) is the A1 or A2 value, as appropriate for 

radionuclide i. 

(h) Tables 7 and 8 are as follows: 

TABLE 7—GENERAL VALUES FOR A1 AND A2

Radioactive contents 

A1 A2

(TBq) (Ci) (TBq) (Ci) 

1. Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides are known to be 

present ............................................................................... 1 × 10¥1 2.7 × 100 2 × 10¥2 5.4 × 10¥1

2. Only alpha emitting nuclides are known to be present .... 2 × 10¥1 5.4 × 100 9 × 10¥5 2.4 × 10¥3

3. No relevant data are available .......................................... 1 × 10¥3 2.7 × 10¥2 9 × 10¥5 2.4 × 10¥3

TABLE 8—GENERAL EXEMPTION VALUES

Radioactive contents 

Activity concentration for exempt material Activity limits for exempt consignments

(Bq/g) (Ci/g) (Bq) Ci) 

1. Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides are known to be 

present ............................................................................... 1 × 101 2.7 × 10¥10 1 × 104 2.7 × 10¥7

2. Only alpha emitting nuclides are known to be present .... 1 × 10¥1 2.7 × 10¥12 1 × 103 2.7 × 10¥8

3. No relevant data are available .......................................... 1 × 10¥1 2.7 × 10¥12 1 × 103 2.7 × 10¥8

[69 FR 3677, Jan. 26, 2004; 69 FR 55119, Sept. 13, 2004] 

§ 173.434 Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium. 

The table of activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium are 

as follows: 

Thorium and uranium enrichment 1(Wt% 235 U present) 

Specific activity 

TBq/gram Grams/Tbq Ci/gram Grams/Ci 

0.45 (depleted) ...................................................................................... 1.9×10¥8 5.4×107 5.0×10¥7 2.0×106

0.72 (natural) ......................................................................................... 2.6×10¥8 3.8×107 7.1×10¥7 1.4×106

1.0 ......................................................................................................... 2.8×10¥8 3.6×107 7.6×10¥7 1.3×106

1.5 ......................................................................................................... 3.7×10¥8 2.7×107 1.0×10¥6 1.0×106

5.0 ......................................................................................................... 1.0×10¥7 1.0×107 2.7×10¥6 3.7×105

10.0 ....................................................................................................... 1.8×10¥7 5.6×106 4.8×10¥6 2.1×105

20.0 ....................................................................................................... 3.7×10¥7 2.7×106 1.0×10¥5 1.0×105

35.0 ....................................................................................................... 7.4×10¥7 1.4×106 2.0×10¥5 5.0×104

50.0 ....................................................................................................... 9.3×10¥7 1.1×106 2.5×10¥5 4.0×104

90.0 ....................................................................................................... 2.1×10¥6 4.7×105 5.8×10¥5 1.7×104

93.0 ....................................................................................................... 2.6×10¥6 3.9×105 7.0×10¥5 1.4×104

95.0 ....................................................................................................... 3.4×10¥6 3.0×105 9.1×10¥5 1.1×104

Natural thorium ...................................................................................... 8.1×10¥9 1.2×108 2.2×10¥7 4.6×106

1The figures for uranium include representative values for the activity of uranium-234 which is concentrated during the enrichment process. The activity for thorium includes the equilibrium concentration of thorium-228. 

[Amdt. 173–244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998] 

§ 173.435 Table of A1 and A2 values for radionuclides. 

The table of A1 and A2 values for radionuclides is as follows: 

Symbol of 

radionuclide

Element and 

atomic number A1 (TBq) A1 (Ci) b A2 (TBq) A2 (Ci) b

Specific activity 

(TBq/g) (Ci/g) 

Ac-225 (a) ...................... Actinium (89) ............ 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 6.0×10¥3 1.6×10¥1 2.1×103 5.8×104

Ac-227 (a) ...................... ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 9.0×10¥5 2.4×10¥3 2.7 7.2×101

Ac-228 ............................ ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 8.4×104 2.2×106

Ag-105 ............................ Silver (47) ................. 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 1.1×103 3.0×104

Ag-108m (a) ................... ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 9.7×10¥1 2.6×101

Ag-110m (a) ................... ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 1.8×102 4.7×103

Ag-111 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 5.8×103 1.6×105

Al-26 ............................... Aluminum (13) .......... 1.0×10¥1 2.7 1.0×10¥1 2.7 7.0×10¥4 1.9×10¥2

662

§ 173.435 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Symbol of 

radionuclide

Element and 

atomic number A1 (TBq) A1 (Ci) b A2 (TBq) A2 (Ci) b

Specific activity 

(TBq/g) (Ci/g) 

Am-241 ........................... Americium (95) ......... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 1.3×10¥1 3.4

Am-242m (a) .................. ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 3.6×10¥1 1.0×101

Am-243 (a) ..................... ................................... 5.0 1.4×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 7.4×10¥3 2.0×10¥1

Ar-37 .............................. Argon (18) ................ 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.7×103 9.9×104

Ar-39 .............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0×101 5.4×102 1.3 3.4×101

Ar-41 .............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 1.5×106 4.2×107

As-72 .............................. Arsenic (33) .............. 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 6.2×104 1.7×106

As-73 .............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 8.2×102 2.2×104

As-74 .............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 3.7×103 9.9×104

As-76 .............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 5.8×104 1.6×106

As-77 .............................. ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 3.9×104 1.0×106

At-211 (a) ....................... Astatine (85) ............. 2.0×101 5.4×102 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 7.6×104 2.1×106

Au-193 ............................ Gold (79) .................. 7.0 1.9×102 2.0 5.4×101 3.4×104 9.2×105

Au-194 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 1.5×104 4.1×105

Au-195 ............................ ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 6.0 1.6×102 1.4×102 3.7×103

Au-198 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 9.0×103 2.4×105

Au-199 ............................ ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 7.7×103 2.1×105

Ba-131 (a) ...................... Barium (56) .............. 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 3.1×103 8.4×104

Ba-133 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0 8.1×101 9.4 2.6×102

Ba-133m ......................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.2×104 6.1×105

Ba-140 (a) ...................... ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 3.0×10¥1 8.1 2.7×103 7.3×104

Be-7 ................................ Beryllium (4) ............. 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×101 5.4×102 1.3×104 3.5×105

Be-10 .............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 8.3×10¥4 2.2×10¥2

Bi-205 ............................. Bismuth (83) ............. 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 1.5×103 4.2×104

Bi-206 ............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.8×103 1.0×105

Bi-207 ............................. ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 1.9 5.2×101

Bi-210 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 4.6×103 1.2×105

Bi-210m (a) .................... ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.0×10¥2 5.4×10¥1 2.1×10¥5 5.7×10¥4

Bi-212 (a) ....................... ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 5.4×105 1.5×107

Bk-247 ............................ Berkelium (97) .......... 8.0 2.2×102 8.0×10¥4 2.2×10¥2 3.8×10¥2 1.0

Bk-249 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.0×10¥1 8.1 6.1×101 1.6×103

Br-76 .............................. Bromine (35) ............ 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 9.4×104 2.5×106

Br-77 .............................. ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0 8.1×101 2.6×104 7.1×105

Br-82 .............................. ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×104 1.1×106

C-11 ............................... Carbon (6) ................ 1.0 2.7×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.1×107 8.4×108

C-14 ............................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.0 8.1×101 1.6×10¥1 4.5

Ca-41 ............................. Calcium (20) ............. Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 3.1×10¥3 8.5×10¥2

Ca-45 ............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.0 2.7×101 6.6×102 1.8×104

Ca-47 (a) ........................ ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0×10¥1 8.1 2.3×104 6.1×105

Cd-109 ........................... Cadmium (48) .......... 3.0×101 8.1×102 2.0 5.4×101 9.6×101 2.6×103

Cd-113m ........................ ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 8.3 2.2×102

Cd-115 (a) ...................... ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 1.9×104 5.1×105

Cd-115m ........................ ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 9.4×102 2.5×104

Ce-139 ........................... Cerium (58) .............. 7.0 1.9×102 2.0 5.4×101 2.5×102 6.8×103

Ce-141 ........................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.1×103 2.8×104

Ce-143 ........................... ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.5×104 6.6×105

Ce-144 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.0×10¥1 5.4 1.2×102 3.2×103

Cf-248 ............................ Californium (98) ........ 4.0×101 1.1×103 6.0×10¥3 1.6×10¥1 5.8×101 1.6×103

Cf-249 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 8.0×10¥4 2.2×10¥2 1.5×10¥1 4.1

Cf-250 ............................ ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×10¥3 5.4×10¥2 4.0 1.1×102

Cf-251 ............................ ................................... 7.0 1.9×102 7.0×10¥4 1.9×10¥2 5.9×10¥2 1.6

Cf-252 (h) ....................... ................................... 5.0×10¥2 1.4 3.0×10¥3 8.1×10¥2 2.0×101 5.4×102

Cf-253 (a) ....................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×10¥2 1.1 1.1×103 2.9×104

Cf-254 ............................ ................................... 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 3.1×102 8.5×103

Cl-36 ............................... Chlorine (17) ............ 1.0×101 2.7×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.2×10¥3 3.3×10¥2

Cl-38 ............................... ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.0×10¥1 5.4 4.9×106 1.3×108

Cm-240 .......................... Curium (96) .............. 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0×10¥2 5.4×10¥1 7.5×102 2.0×104

Cm-241 .......................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 1.0 2.7×101 6.1×102 1.7×104

Cm-242 .......................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.0×10¥2 2.7×10¥1 1.2×102 3.3×103

Cm-243 .......................... ................................... 9.0 2.4×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 1.9 5.2×101

Cm-244 .......................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×10¥3 5.4×10¥2 3.0 8.1×101

Cm-245 .......................... ................................... 9.0 2.4×102 9.0×10¥4 2.4×10¥2 6.4×10¥3 1.7×10¥1

Cm-246 .......................... ................................... 9.0 2.4×102 9.0×10¥4 2.4×10¥2 1.1×10¥2 3.1×10¥1

Cm-247 (a) ..................... ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 3.4×10¥6 9.3×10¥5

Cm-248 .......................... ................................... 2.0×10¥2 5.4×10¥1 3.0×10¥4 8.1×10¥3 1.6×10¥4 4.2×10¥3

Co-55 ............................. Cobalt (27) ............... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 1.1×105 3.1×106

Co-56 ............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 1.1×103 3.0×104

Co-57 ............................. ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×101 2.7×102 3.1×102 8.4×103

Co-58 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 1.2×103 3.2×104

Co-58m .......................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.2×105 5.9×106

Co-60 ............................. ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.2×101 1.1×103

Cr-51 .............................. Chromium (24) ......... 3.0×101 8.1×102 3.0×101 8.1×102 3.4×103 9.2×104

663

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.435 

Symbol of 

radionuclide

Element and 

atomic number A1 (TBq) A1 (Ci) b A2 (TBq) A2 (Ci) b

Specific activity 

(TBq/g) (Ci/g) 

Cs-129 ............................ Cesium (55) .............. 4.0 1.1×102 4.0 1.1×102 2.8×104 7.6×105

Cs-131 ............................ ................................... 3.0×101 8.1×102 3.0×101 8.1×102 3.8×103 1.0×105

Cs-132 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 5.7×103 1.5×105

Cs-134 ............................ ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 4.8×101 1.3×103

Cs-134m ......................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.0×105 8.0×106

Cs-135 ............................ ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.0 2.7×101 4.3×10¥5 1.2×10¥3

Cs-136 ............................ ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 2.7×103 7.3×104

Cs-137 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.2 8.7×101

Cu-64 ............................. Copper (29) .............. 6.0 1.6×102 1.0 2.7×101 1.4×105 3.9×106

Cu-67 ............................. ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 2.8×104 7.6×105

Dy-159 ............................ Dysprosium (66) ....... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.1×102 5.7×103

Dy-165 ............................ ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.0×105 8.2×106

Dy-166 (a) ...................... ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 3.0×10¥1 8.1 8.6×103 2.3×105

Er-169 ............................ Erbium (68) .............. 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.0 2.7×101 3.1×103 8.3×104

Er-171 ............................ ................................... 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 9.0×104 2.4×106

Eu-147 ............................ Europium (63) .......... 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 1.4×103 3.7×104

Eu-148 ............................ ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 6.0×102 1.6×104

Eu-149 ............................ ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×101 5.4×102 3.5×102 9.4×103

Eu-150 (short lived) ....... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 6.1×104 1.6×106

Eu-150 (long lived) ......... ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 6.1×104 1.6×106

Eu-152 ............................ ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 6.5 1.8×102

Eu-152m ......................... ................................... 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 8.2×104 2.2×106

Eu-154 ............................ ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 9.8 2.6×102

Eu-155 ............................ ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 3.0 8.1×101 1.8×101 4.9×102

Eu-156 ............................ ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 2.0×103 5.5×104

F-18 ................................ Fluorine (9) ............... 1.0 2.7×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.5×106 9.5×107

Fe-52 (a) ........................ Iron (26) .................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 2.7×105 7.3×106

Fe-55 .............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 8.8×101 2.4×103

Fe-59 .............................. ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 1.8×103 5.0×104

Fe-60 (a) ........................ ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0×10¥1 5.4 7.4×10¥4 2.0×10¥2

Ga-67 ............................. Gallium (31) .............. 7.0 1.9×102 3.0 8.1×101 2.2×104 6.0×105

Ga-68 ............................. ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 1.5×106 4.1×107

Ga-72 ............................. ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 1.1×105 3.1×106

Gd-146 (a) ...................... Gadolinium (64) ........ 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 6.9×102 1.9×104

Gd-148 ........................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×10¥3 5.4×10¥2 1.2 3.2×101

Gd-153 ........................... ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 9.0 2.4×102 1.3×102 3.5×103

Gd-159 ........................... ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.9×104 1.1×106

Ge-68 (a) ........................ Germanium (32) ....... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 2.6×102 7.1×103

Ge-71 ............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 5.8×103 1.6×105

Ge-77 ............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 1.3×105 3.6×106

Hf-172 (a) ....................... Hafnium (72) ............ 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 4.1×101 1.1×103

Hf-175 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0 8.1×101 3.9×102 1.1×104

Hf-181 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 6.3×102 1.7×104

Hf-182 ............................ ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 8.1×10¥6 2.2×10¥4

Hg-194 (a) ...................... Mercury (80) ............. 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 1.3×10¥1 3.5

Hg-195m (a) ................... ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 1.5×104 4.0×105

Hg-197 ........................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 1.0×101 2.7×102 9.2×103 2.5×105

Hg-197m ........................ ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 2.5×104 6.7×105

Hg-203 ........................... ................................... 5.0 1.4×102 1.0 2.7×101 5.1×102 1.4×104

Ho-166 ........................... Holmium (67) ............ 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 2.6×104 7.0×105

Ho-166m ........................ ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 6.6×10¥2 1.8

I-123 ............................... Iodine (53) ................ 6.0 1.6×102 3.0 8.1×101 7.1×104 1.9×106

I-124 ............................... ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 9.3×103 2.5×105

I-125 ............................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 3.0 8.1×101 6.4×102 1.7×104

I-126 ............................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 1.0 2.7×101 2.9×103 8.0×104

I-129 ............................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 6.5×10¥6 1.8×10¥4

I-131 ............................... ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 4.6×103 1.2×105

I-132 ............................... ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 3.8×105 1.0×107

I-133 ............................... ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 4.2×104 1.1×106

I-134 ............................... ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 9.9×105 2.7×107

I-135 (a) ......................... ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.3×105 3.5×106

In-111 ............................. Indium (49) ............... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0 8.1×101 1.5×104 4.2×105

In-113m .......................... ................................... 4.0 1.1×102 2.0 5.4×101 6.2×105 1.7×107

In-114m (a) .................... ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 8.6×102 2.3×104

In-115m .......................... ................................... 7.0 1.9×102 1.0 2.7×101 2.2×105 6.1×106

Ir-189 (a) ........................ Iridium (77) ............... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.9×103 5.2×104

Ir-190 .............................. ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 2.3×103 6.2×104

Ir-192 (c) ........................ ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.4×102 9.2×103

Ir-194 .............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.1×104 8.4×105

K-40 ................................ Potassium (19) ......... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 2.4×10¥7 6.4×10¥6

K-42 ................................ ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.2×105 6.0×106

K-43 ................................ ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.2×105 3.3×106

664

§ 173.435 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–10 Edition) 

Symbol of 

radionuclide

Element and 

atomic number A1 (TBq) A1 (Ci) b A2 (TBq) A2 (Ci) b

Specific activity 

(TBq/g) (Ci/g) 

Kr-81 .............................. Krypton (36) ............. 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 7.8×10¥4 2.1×10¥2

Kr-85 .............................. ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.5×101 3.9×102

Kr-85m ........................... ................................... 8.0 2.2×102 3.0 8.1×101 3.0×105 8.2×106

Kr-87 .............................. ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.0×10¥1 5.4 1.0×106 2.8×107

La-137 ............................ Lanthanum (57) ........ 3.0×101 8.1×102 6.0 1.6×102 1.6×10¥3 4.4×10¥2

La-140 ............................ ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 2.1×104 5.6×105

Lu-172 ............................ Lutetium (71) ............ 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 4.2×103 1.1×105

Lu-173 ............................ ................................... 8.0 2.2×102 8.0 2.2×102 5.6×101 1.5×103

Lu-174 ............................ ................................... 9.0 2.4×102 9.0 2.4×102 2.3×101 6.2×102

Lu-174m ......................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 1.0×101 2.7×102 2.0×102 5.3×103

Lu-177 ............................ ................................... 3.0×101 8.1×102 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 4.1×103 1.1×105

Mg-28 (a) ....................... Magnesium (12) ....... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 2.0×105 5.4×106

Mn-52 ............................. Manganese (25) ....... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 1.6×104 4.4×105

Mn-53 ............................. ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 6.8×10¥5 1.8×10¥3

Mn-54 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 2.9×102 7.7×103

Mn-56 ............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 8.0×105 2.2×107

Mo-93 ............................. Molybdenum (42) ..... 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0×101 5.4×102 4.1×10¥2 1.1

Mo-99 (a) (i) ................... ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.8×104 4.8×105

N-13 ............................... Nitrogen (7) .............. 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 5.4×107 1.5×109

Na-22 ............................. Sodium (11) .............. 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 2.3×102 6.3×103

Na-24 ............................. ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.0×10¥1 5.4 3.2×105 8.7×106

Nb-93m .......................... Niobium (41) ............. 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.0×101 8.1×102 8.8 2.4×102

Nb-94 ............................. ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 6.9×10¥3 1.9×10¥1

Nb-95 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 1.5×103 3.9×104

Nb-97 ............................. ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 9.9×105 2.7×107

Nd-147 ........................... Neodymium (60) ....... 6.0 1.6×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.0×103 8.1×104

Nd-149 ........................... ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 4.5×105 1.2×107

Ni-59 ............................... Nickel (28) ................ Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 3.0×10¥3 8.0×10¥2

Ni-63 ............................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.0×101 8.1×102 2.1 5.7×101

Ni-65 ............................... ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 7.1×105 1.9×107

Np-235 ........................... Neptunium (93) ........ 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 5.2×101 1.4×103

Np-236 (short-lived) ....... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0 5.4×101 4.7×10¥4 1.3×10¥2

Np-236 (long-lived) ........ ................................... 9.0×100 2.4×102 2.0×10¥2 5.4×10¥1 4.7×10¥4 1.3×10¥2

Np-237 ........................... ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×10¥3 5.4×10¥2 2.6×10¥5 7.1×10¥4

Np-239 ........................... ................................... 7.0 1.9×102 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 8.6×103 2.3×105

Os-185 ........................... Osmium (76) ............ 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 2.8×102 7.5×103

Os-191 ........................... ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 2.0 5.4×101 1.6×103 4.4×104

Os-191m ........................ ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.0×101 8.1×102 4.6×104 1.3×106

Os-193 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.0×104 5.3×105

Os-194 (a) ...................... ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 1.1×101 3.1×102

P-32 ................................ Phosphorus (15) ....... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 1.1×104 2.9×105

P-33 ................................ ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.0 2.7×101 5.8×103 1.6×105

Pa-230 (a) ...................... Protactinium (91) ...... 2.0 5.4×101 7.0×10¥2 1.9 1.2×103 3.3×104

Pa-231 ............................ ................................... 4.0 1.1×102 4.0×10¥4 1.1×10¥2 1.7×10¥3 4.7×10¥2

Pa-233 ............................ ................................... 5.0 1.4×102 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.7×102 2.1×104

Pb-201 ............................ Lead (82) .................. 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 6.2×104 1.7×106

Pb-202 ............................ ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0×101 5.4×102 1.2×10¥4 3.4×10¥3

Pb-203 ............................ ................................... 4.0 1.1×102 3.0 8.1×101 1.1×104 3.0×105

Pb-205 ............................ ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 4.5×10¥6 1.2×10¥4

Pb-210 (a) ...................... ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 5.0×10¥2 1.4 2.8 7.6×101

Pb-212 (a) ...................... ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 2.0×10¥1 5.4 5.1×104 1.4×106

Pd-103 (a) ...................... Palladium (46) .......... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.8×103 7.5×104

Pd-107 ............................ ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 1.9×10¥5 5.1×10¥4

Pd-109 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 7.9×104 2.1×106

Pm-143 ........................... Promethium (61) ...... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0 8.1×101 1.3×102 3.4×103

Pm-144 ........................... ................................... 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 9.2×101 2.5×103

Pm-145 ........................... ................................... 3.0×101 8.1×102 1.0×101 2.7×102 5.2 1.4×102

Pm-147 ........................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0 5.4×101 3.4×101 9.3×102

Pm-148m (a) .................. ................................... 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 7.9×102 2.1×104

Pm-149 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.5×104 4.0×105

Pm-151 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.7×104 7.3×105

Po-210 ............................ Polonium (84) ........... 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0×10¥2 5.4×10¥1 1.7×102 4.5×103

Pr-142 ............................ Praseodymium (59) .. 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.3×104 1.2×106

Pr-143 ............................ ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.5×103 6.7×104

Pt-188 (a) ....................... Platinum (78) ............ 1.0 2.7×101 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 2.5×103 6.8×104

Pt-191 ............................. ................................... 4.0 1.1×102 3.0 8.1×101 8.7×103 2.4×105

Pt-193 ............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.4 3.7×101

Pt-193m .......................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.8×103 1.6×105

Pt-195m .......................... ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 6.2×103 1.7×105

Pt-197 ............................. ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.2×104 8.7×105

Pt-197m .......................... ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.7×105 1.0×107

Pu-236 ............................ Plutonium (94) .......... 3.0×101 8.1×102 3.0×10¥3 8.1×10¥2 2.0×101 5.3×102

665

Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 173.435 

Symbol of 

radionuclide

Element and 

atomic number A1 (TBq) A1 (Ci) b A2 (TBq) A2 (Ci) b

Specific activity 

(TBq/g) (Ci/g) 

Pu-237 ............................ ................................... 2.0×101 5.4×102 2.0×101 5.4×102 4.5×102 1.2×104

Pu-238 ............................ ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 6.3×10¥1 1.7×101

Pu-239 ............................ ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 2.3×10¥3 6.2×10¥2

Pu-240 ............................ ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 8.4×10¥3 2.3×10¥1

Pu-241 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 6.0×10¥2 1.6 3.8 1.0×102

Pu-242 ............................ ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 1.5×10¥4 3.9×10¥3

Pu-244 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 1.0×10¥3 2.7×10¥2 6.7×10¥7 1.8×10¥5

Ra-223 (a) ...................... Radium (88) ............. 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 7.0×10¥3 1.9×10¥1 1.9×103 5.1×104

Ra-224 (a) ...................... ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 2.0×10¥2 5.4×10¥1 5.9×103 1.6×105

Ra-225 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 4.0×10¥3 1.1×10¥1 1.5×103 3.9×104

Ra-226 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 3.0×10¥3 8.1×10¥2 3.7×10¥2 1.0

Ra-228 (a) ...................... ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.0×10¥2 5.4×10¥1 1.0×101 2.7×102

Rb-81 ............................. Rubidium (37) ........... 2.0 5.4×101 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 3.1×105 8.4×106

Rb-83 (a) ........................ ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 6.8×102 1.8×104

Rb-84 ............................. ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 1.8×103 4.7×104

Rb-86 ............................. ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 3.0×103 8.1×104

Rb-87 ............................. ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 3.2×10¥9 8.6×10¥8

Rb(nat) ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 6.7×106 1.8×108

Re-184 ........................... Rhenium (75) ........... 1.0 2.7×101 1.0 2.7×101 6.9×102 1.9×104

Re-184m ........................ ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 1.0 2.7×101 1.6×102 4.3×103

Re-186 ........................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.9×103 1.9×105

Re-187 ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 1.4×10¥9 3.8×10¥8

Re-188 ........................... ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 3.6×104 9.8×105

Re-189 (a) ...................... ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.5×104 6.8×105

Re(nat) ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 0.0 2.4×10¥8

Rh-99 ............................. Rhodium (45) ........... 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 3.0×103 8.2×104

Rh-101 ........................... ................................... 4.0 1.1×102 3.0 8.1×101 4.1×101 1.1×103

Rh-102 ........................... ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 4.5×101 1.2×103

Rh-102m ........................ ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 2.3×102 6.2×103

Rh-103m ........................ ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.2×106 3.3×107

Rh-105 ........................... ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 3.1×104 8.4×105

Rn-222 (a) ...................... Radon (86) ............... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 4.0×10¥3 1.1×10¥1 5.7×103 1.5×105

Ru-97 ............................. Ruthenium (44) ........ 5.0 1.4×102 5.0 1.4×102 1.7×104 4.6×105

Ru-103 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 1.2×103 3.2×104

Ru-105 ........................... ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 2.5×105 6.7×106

Ru-106 (a) ...................... ................................... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.0×10¥1 5.4 1.2×102 3.3×103

S-35 ................................ Sulphur (16) ............. 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.0 8.1×101 1.6×103 4.3×104

Sb-122 ............................ Antimony (51) ........... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 1.5×104 4.0×105

Sb-124 ............................ ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.5×102 1.7×104

Sb-125 ............................ ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 1.0 2.7×101 3.9×101 1.0×103

Sb-126 ............................ ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 3.1×103 8.4×104

Sc-44 .............................. Scandium (21) .......... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 6.7×105 1.8×107

Sc-46 .............................. ................................... 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 1.3×103 3.4×104

Sc-47 .............................. ................................... 1.0×101 2.7×102 7.0×10¥1 1.9×101 3.1×104 8.3×105

Sc-48 .............................. ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 5.5×104 1.5×106

Se-75 .............................. Selenium (34) ........... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0 8.1×101 5.4×102 1.5×104

Se-79 .............................. ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 2.0 5.4×101 2.6×10¥3 7.0×10¥2

Si-31 ............................... Silicon (14) ............... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.4×106 3.9×107

Si-32 ............................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 3.9 1.1×102

Sm-145 ........................... Samarium (62) ......... 1.0×101 2.7×102 1.0×101 2.7×102 9.8×101 2.6×103

Sm-147 ........................... ................................... Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 8.5×10¥1 2.3×10¥8

Sm-151 ........................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 1.0×101 2.7×102 9.7×10¥1 2.6×101

Sm-153 ........................... ................................... 9.0 2.4×102 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.6×104 4.4×105

Sn-113 (a) ...................... Tin (50) ..................... 4.0 1.1×102 2.0 5.4×101 3.7×102 1.0×104

Sn-117m ......................... ................................... 7.0 1.9×102 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 3.0×103 8.2×104

Sn-119m ......................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.0×101 8.1×102 1.4×102 3.7×103

Sn-121m (a) ................... ................................... 4.0×101 1.1×103 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 2.0 5.4×101

Sn-123 ............................ ................................... 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 3.0×102 8.2×103

Sn-125 ............................ ................................... 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 4.0×103 1.1×105

Sn-126 (a) ...................... ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 4.0×10¥1 1.1×101 1.0×10¥3 2.8×10¥2

Sr-82 (a) ......................... Strontium (38) .......... 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.0×10¥1 5.4 2.3×103 6.2×104

Sr-85 .............................. ................................... 2.0 5.4×101 2.0 5.4×101 8.8×102 2.4×104

Sr-85m ........................... ................................... 5.0 1.4×102 5.0 1.4×102 1.2×106 3.3×107

Sr-87m ........................... ................................... 3.0 8.1×101 3.0 8.1×101 4.8×105 1.3×107

Sr-89 .............................. ................................... 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 6.0×10¥1 1.6×101 1.1×103 2.9×104

Sr-90 (a) ......................... ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 5.1 1.4×102

Sr-91 (a) ......................... ................................... 3.0×10¥1 8.1 3.0×10¥1 8.1 1.3×105 3.6×106

Sr-92 (a) ......................... ................................... 1.0 2.7×101 3.0×10¥1 8.1 4.7×105 1.3×107

T(H-3) ............................. Tritium (1) ................. 4.0×101 1.1×103 4.0×101 1.1×103 3.6×102 9.7×103

Ta-178 (long-lived) ......... Tantalum (73) ........... 1.0 2.7×101 8.0×10¥1 2.2×101 4.2×106 1.1×108

Ta-179 ............................ ................................... 3.0×101 8.1×102 3.0×101 8.1×102 4.1×101 1.1×103

Ta-182 ............................ ................................... 9.0×10¥1 2.4×101 5.0×10¥1 1.4×101 2.3×102 6.2×103